Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
939 Caroline St Technical 1996 - Building
IsECN A►- P ermrt Cro\�� 95 Address d Add .��,nsi+a ©r P rQ1 ect des s f ineied (2:4, (Y\e,r‘ cf)..\ qtssv-- RoNnoXe,1 permit was Date the ��cal pages. Number of tech \:0,\Pcrete 0 v\e_ cn C1/4-n Nr6Q/CIA obq 0\ 01(0 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL VOLUME 1 PROJECT MANUAL 95.1,58 00 NOVEMBER 1 1996 MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON WSEC APPROVE ?tithe best of:my.ltnowledge and ability these Plans show compliance with the'requirergei is of the 1994 WSEC as initialed below• nvelope 'Mechanical 1.4litu g n u.a.. 1 `940' 2 .s ue S F Si ature �:1'i" l.r 1 1 i MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 THE PROJECT 1 1 IDENTIFICATION Olympic Memorial Hospital 3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel 1 2 PROJECT ADDRESS Olympic Memorial Hospital 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 98362 1 3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION See Section 01010, Summary of Work, for complete project description. 1 4 OWNER Olympic Memorial Hospital 1 5 OWNER'S PROJECT MANAGER Mr Mike Glenn (360) 417 7703 PART 2THF DOCUMENTS SECTION 00002 PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION 2 1 TITLE `The Construction Documents for the `Olympic Memorial Hospital 3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel. 2 2 DATE The construction documents are dated November 1, 1996. EARJ' 3 THE DESIGN TEAM 3 1 CERTIFICATION I hereby certify that this project specification was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly registered architect under the laws of the State of Washington. REGISTERED TEC I, RK SIA11: OE WASHIWGTUrr MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 2 ARCHITECT Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordo Vince Nordfors, Principal Dan Jardine, Project Manager Gary Braun, Project Architect Kevin Ruby Team Assistant 3 3 CONSULTANTS Mechanical Engineer Facility Support, Inc. (a.k.a. FSi) Rob Danforth, Project Manager Jill Connell, Project Engineer Electrical Engineer Sparling Jeff Losnegard, Project Engineer Structural Engineer Martens /Chan Randy Martens, Project Engineer Cost Estimator Rider Hunt Ackroyd David Nash, Project Estimator 01996 Mahlum Nordfora McKinley Gordon SECTION 00002 PAGE 2 INTRODUCTION 2505 Third Avenue, Suite 219 Seattle, Washington 98121 (206) 441 -4151 (206) 441 -0478 (FAX) 605 First Avenue, Suite 400 Seattle, Washington 98121 (206) 622 3321 (206) 622 5804 (FAX) 720 Olive Way Suite 1100 Seattle, Washington 98101 1853 (206) 667-0555 (206) 667 -0554 (FAX) 400 Mercer St. Suite 410 Seattle, Washington 98109 (206) 298-9818 (206) 298 -9876 (FAX) 999 Third Avenue, Suite 830 Seattle, Washington 98104 (206) 223 -2055 (206) 223 -2056 (FAX) END OF SECTION 00002 Y i Envelope Summary Climate Zone 1 ENV -SUM 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Info 'Project Description Compliance Option Space Heat Type Project Address Applicant Name: Applicant Address: I Applicant Phone: Glazing Area Calculation Note: Below grade walls may be included in the Gross Exterior Wall Area if they are insulated to the level required for opaque walls. Concrete/Masonry Option Opaque Doors Vertical Glazing Overhead Glazing Roofs Over Attic All Other Roofs Opaque Walls Below Grade Walls Floors Over Unconditioned Space Slabs -on -Grade Radiant Floors Semi- heated space' I Roofs Over Semi- Heated Spaces' I New Building Addition Electric Resistance Total Glazing Area (rough opening) (vertical overtid) Envelope Requirements (enter values as applicable) Fully heated/cooled space �a -bl.e 15 Minimum Insulation R- values Maximum U- factors I I O 6o I o Maximum SHGC (or SC) I VerticaVOverhead Glazing I Q !f S Minimum Insulation R- values 'Refer to Section 1310 for qualifications and requirements Notes. ©WMPIL Me,moel iw UosPi1`.�t;� 931 6,4feoi ,tee Pao- WA £A. I 3Al2491146 AaafirEcr I 2695 TNIa.ia Avg zoirE vet 660 ggtz, (z 001 -4151 Prescriptive At Component Performance (See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications) divided by ,X Alteration Change of Use X All other Gross Exterior Wall Area ENVSTD Second Edition June 1995 Date eiv ggz For Building Department Use (see over for definitions) Systems Analysis times 100 equals Glazing xloo= 3? ['Check here if using this option and if project meets all requirements for the Concrete/Masonry Option. See Decision Flowchan(over) for qualifications. Enter requirements for each qualifying assembly in the table below. Opaque Concrete/Masonry Wall Requirements Insulation on interior maximum U- factor is 0.19 Insulation on exterior or integral maximum U- factor is 025 If project qualifies for Concrete/Masoniy Option, list walls with HC 2 9.0. Btuift below (other walls must meet Opaque Wall requirements). Use descriptions and values from Table 20-5b in the Code. Wall Description U- factor (including insulation R -value position) m zsEc To the best of my knowledge and ability, these plans show compliance with the requirements of the 1994 WSEC as initialed below. Mechanical fighting Envelope Weegi 170594023/A i SPE Signature Reg.# Date Envelope UA Calculations Climate Zonel ENV -UA Second Edition June 1995 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forme Project Address 9m Space Heat Type Glazing Area as gross exterior wall area I 3 Concrete/Masonry Option I Yes JS( No Notes: If glazing area exceeds maximum allowed in Table, then calculate adjusted areas on back (over). If Concrete/Masonry Option is used, Target U- factors, SHGC and Glazing will be different than shown below. Refer to Table 13 -1 for correct values. N m c 4 n CO m ui Building Component List components by assembly ID page U- factor U= U= U= U= U= U= U= U= U= U= U= U= U= U= U= U= U= U= R= R= R= R= R= R= R= R= R= R= R= R= R= Note: R= R= R= R= Note: R= R= R= R= R= R= R= R= 1994 Wasnington tate Nonresloenual allergy L.UUU i.uu optical I.n rui i C Electric resistance jAII other Dµgs /7, o Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID Plan ID: Plan ID: Plan ID: Sum of Target Areas here should equal Target Opaque Wall Area (see back) Plan ID Plan ID: Plan ID Plan ID: If insulated to levels required for opaque walls, list above with opaque walls Plan ID Plan ID: Plan ID' Plan ID: Plan ID Plan ID: Plan ID Plan ID (129. 9 ,0 i Proposed a' Proposed UA x Area (A) O 9'x G la =X53 0 X &s.f.0 3/0 Electric Resist. Other Heating 0.034 0.050 0 /0 )c /9 273 o/' r 223 For CMU walls, indicate core insulation material. For compliance: 1) Proposed Total Area shall equal Target Total Area. and 2) Proposed Total UA shall not exceed Target Total UA. Totals 9' /8 .6e12Ir 1 UA (U x A) �Z7 Date N /q9. For Building Department Use Target UA U- factor x Area (A) 0.5 /Z0O Glazing Electric Resist. 0 -15% 0.40 >15 -20% 0.40 >20 -30% not allowed >30 -40% not allowed (see Table 13 -1 for Conc/Masonry values) Glazing 0-15% >15 -20% >20 -30% >30 -40% Electric Resist. 0.80 0.80 not allowed not allowed for Conc/Masonry values) st 19 e2.6.0 12 Electric Resist. Other Heating 0.60 0.60 317o Electric Resist. Other Heating 0.031 0.036 Electric Resist. Ordinary 0.062 Metal stud 0.11 Conc(int) 0.19 Conc(oth) 0.25 UA (U x A) Other Heating 0.90 0.75 0.60 0.50 Other Heating 145 1 40 1.30 1.25 Other Heating 0.14 0.14 0.19 0.25 Electric Resist. Other Heating Ordinary 0.062 0.14 Metal stud 0.11 0.14 Electric Resist. Other Heating 0.029 0.056 Other Heating F =0.54 Electric Resist. F =0.54 (see Table 13 -1 for radiant floor values) Totals 9 0 91/0 Building Permit Plans Checklist !1 -I •I ENV -CHK ••1 ae re er 0 e rm 1994 Washmgton State Energy Code Compliance Forms The following information is necessary to check a building permit application for compl with the building envelope requirements in the Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Project Address Applicability Code (show with X) Section Component GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Sections 1301 1314) Yep yes eyes n o e yea no yes no yes no n a tiJ' no n a no „cis no n a r7 eilyno n a 1994 W yes El n a es no n a yes no no n a I 1311 1 jInsul. installation no n a 1311 .2 Root /ceiling instil. yea no C0 1311.5 yea no `n 13116 o n al 1312 n a 1312.1 no n a l no n a' Lai n But !Scope 1302 !Space heat type Itlectric resistance lutner 131U.2 I semi heated spaces Semi Heated spaces Iaentnlea on plans it ariowea 131 1 l insulation I 1311 3 Wall insulation yea no 1311 4 Floor insulation 1313 1313 1 1313.2 R--1 STb -on -grade floor Radiant floor Glazing and Boors I Tactors 1312.2 SNl_il: SC 'Moisture control 'Vapor retarders Information Required 'Unconditioned spaces identified on plans it anowea 'indicate on plans tnat electric resistance neat is not anowea I ffn Indicate densities and clearances We- Indicate R -value on root sections 0 attics an o er roots; Indicate clearances for attic insulation, Indicate baffles if eave vents installed; Indicate face stapling of faced batts Indicate R -value on wan sections; Indicate face stapling of faced batts, Indicate above grade exterior insulation is protected; Indicate loose -fill core insulation for masonry walls as necess, Indicate heat capacity of masonry walls if masonry option is used or if credit taken in ENVSTD Indicate ti-value on tioor sections; Indicate substantial contact with surface; Indicate supports not more than 24' o c. Indicate that insulation does not block airflow through foundation vents Indicate R -value on walls section or foundation detan; Indicate slab insulation extends down vertically 24' from top; Indicate above grade exterior insulation is protected Indicate R -value on walTsection or foundation detaii; Indicate slab insulation extends down vertically 36' from the top Indicate above grade exterior insulation is protected; Indicate insulation also under entire slab where req'd by Official 'Provide calculation of glazing area (including both vertical vertical and overhead) as percent of gross wall area �f Indicate and door U-factors on cat s n schedule Q E�I�G�.1— che dule (prpr ovide area weighted calculations as as nec ecessary) f( Indicate if values are NFRC or default, if values are default then specify frame type glazing layers, gapwidth low -e coatings gas fillings Indicate glazing solar heat gain coefficient or shading coefficient on glazing schedule (provide area weighted calculations as necessary) 'Indicate vapor retarders on warm side 'Root /ceiling yap ret. 'indicate vapor retarder on root section, Indicate vap retard with sealed seams for non -wood struc. 1313 3 'Wall vapor retarder 'Indicate vapor retarder on wall section I 1313 4 door vapor retarder Indicate vapor retarder on Boor section 1313.5 Crawl space vap. ret. Indicate six mil black polyethylene overlapped on ground 1314 Air leakage I dg. envel. sealing Indicate sealing, caulking gasFeling, and weatherstripping 1314.2 Glazing /door sealing Indicate weatherstripping 1314 3 Assemb as ducts Indicate sealing caulking and gasketing DESCRIPTIVE /COMPONENT PERFORMANCE (Sections 1320 -23 or 1330 -34) yer no Envelope Sum. Form Completed and attached Provide component performance worksheet if necessary Provide ENVSTD screen 1 output if necessary If no is circled for any question, provide explanation Be a V -r is Da MD0 —e Location Building Department on Plans Notes 3.1 J O.( July 1994 199- I• •n l• I I r• Envelope General Requirements 1311 Insulation 1311.1 Installation Requirements: All insulation materials shall be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions to achieve proper densities, maintain clearances, and maintain uniform R- values. To the maximum extent possible, insulation shall extend over the full component area to the intended R- value. 1311.2 Roof /Ceiling Insulation: Open -blown or poured loose -fill insulation may be used in attic spaces where the slope of the ceiling is not more than 3/12 and there is at least thirty inches of dear distance fran the top of the bottom chord of the truss or ceiling joist to the underside of the sheathing at the roof ridge. When eave vents are installed, baffling of the vent openings shall be provided so as to deflect the incoming air above the surface of the insulation. Where lighting fixtures are recessed into a suspended or exposed grid ceiling, the roof /ceiling assembly shall be insulated in a location other than directly on the suspended ceiling. Exception: Type IC rated recessed lighting fixtures. Where installed in wood framing, faced batt insulation shall be face stapled. 1311.3 Wall Insulation: Exterior wall cavities isolated during framing shall be fully insulated to the levels of the surrounding walls. When installed in wood framing, faced bait insulation shall be face stapled. Above grade exterior insulation shall be protected. 1311.4 Floor Insulation: Floor insulation shall be installed in a permanent mariner in substantial contact with the surface being insulated. Insulation supports shall be installed so spacing is not more than twenty- fair inches on center Installed insulation shall not block the airflow through foundation vents. 1311.5 Slab -On -Grade Floor Slat, -on -grade insulation installed inside the foundation wall shall extend downward from the top of the slab a minimum distance of twenty -four inches or to the top of the footing, whichever is less. Insulation installed outside the foundation shall extend downward a minimum of twenty -four inches or to the frostline, whichever is greater Above grade insulation shall be protected. Exception: For monolithic slabs the insulation shall extend downward from the top of the slab to the bottom of the footing. 1311.6 Radiant Floors (on or below grade): Slab-on-grade insulation shall extend downward from the top of the slab a minimum distance of thirty-six inches or downward to the top of the footing and horizontal for an aggregate of not less than thirty -six inches. If required by the building official where sal conditions warrant such insulation, the entire area of a radiant flax shall be thermally isolated from the soil. Where a soil gas control system is provided below the radiant floor which results in increased convective flora below the radiant floor the radiant floor shall be thermally isolated from the sub -flax gravel layer 1312 Glazing and Doors 1312.1 Standard Procedure for Determination of Glazing and Door U- Factors: U- factors for glazing and doors shall be determined, certified and labeled in accordance with Standard RS-31 by a certified independent agency licensed by the National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC). Compliance shall be based on Model Size M or BB. Product samples used for U -factor determinations shall be production line units or representative of units as purchased by the consumer or contractor Building Permit Plans Checklist 1994 Washington State En rgy Code Compliance Forms •II. -1 u V •I ENV -CHK July 1994 Unlabeled glazing and doors shall be assigned the default U -factor in Section 2006. 1312.2 Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Shading Coefficient: Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC), shall be determined. certified and labeled in accordance with the National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) Standard by a certified, independent agency licensed by the NFRC. Exception: Shading coefficients (SC) shall be an acceptable alternate for oarpliance with solar heat gain coefficient requirements. Shading coefficients for glazing shall be taken from Chapter 27 of Standard RS-27 or from the manufacturer's test data 1313 Moisture Control 1313.1 Vapor Retarders: Vapor retarders shall be installed on the warm side (in winter) of insulation as required by this section. Exception: Vapor retarder installed with not more than 1/3 of the norrinal R -value between it and the conditioned space. 1313.2 Roof /Ceiling Assemblies: Roof /ceiling assemblies where the ventilation space above the insulation is less than an average of twelve inches shall be provided with a vapor retarder Roof /ceiling assemblies without a vented airspace, where neither the roof deck nor the roof structure are made of wood, shall provide a continuous vapor retarder with taped seam. Exception: Vapor retarders need not be provided where all of the insulation is installed between the roof membrane and the structural roof deck 1313.3 Walls: Walls separating conditioned space from unconditioned space shall be provided with a vapor retarder 1313.4 Floors: Floors separating conditioned space from unconditioned space shall be provided with a vapor retarder 1313.5 Crawl Spaces: A ground cover of six mil (0.006 inch thick) blade polyethylene or approved equal shall be laid over the ground within crawl spaces. The ground cover shall be overlapped twelve inches minimum at the joints and shall extend to the foundation wall. Exception: The ground cover may be omitted in crawl spaces if the cravvt space has a concrete slab floor with a minimum thickness of three and one-half inches. 1314 Air Leakage 1314.1 Building Envelope: The requirements of this section shall apply to building elements separating conditioned from unconditioned spaces. Exterior joints around windows and door frames, openings between walls and foundation, between walls and roof and wall panels; openings at penetrations of utility services through walls, floors, and roofs; and all other openings in the building envelope shall be sealed, caulked, gasketed, or weatherstripped to limit air leakage. 1314.2 Glazing and Doors: Doors and operable glazing separating conditioned from unconditioned space shall be weatherstripped. Fixed windows shall be tight fitting with glass retained by stops with sealant or caulking all around. Exception: Openings that are required to be fire resistant. 1314.3 Building Assemblies Used as Ducts or Plenums: Building assemblies used as ducts or plenums shall be sealed, caulked, and gasketed to limit air leakage. 1994 Washin ton State Nonresidential Ener• Code Com•liance Form Mechanical Summary MECH -SUM 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Info 04Yr1p /G /✓1 o 'q AC/ L_ ia/- /77o/✓'tt_ e-- /4 939 G •-lE. /v/erAt/6 zes lf/A As i Applicant Address: LOSS /i fU D f E�J7TL�i ail' Applicant Phone: O7/2 Z/ `NW Project Address Applicant Name: Project Description Briefly describe mechanical system type and features. Compliance Option Equipment Schedules Cooling Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name' AC• graJthe 0 /1/1,du✓j /e x7 C./r7 1: peopz /T Aes 6lsul 'I Heating Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name' Model No .6/-3I I/z''x Jeki V 1 Fan Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name' P641/k/ Van; If /f Model No.' Model No.' x6?$oc- vet 9'L k129 X11 60 LL Kg 'If available. 2 As tested according to Table 14-1 s Flow control types: VAV constant volume, or variable speed. E1= /o P0/ V im x z 91e- 12&277 1 e- 277 126z 3' 61351 ,7r/ii►/G A'.Z /'9TE�vi i eq c/r777o /4 CA1� e/A//% CBE A q J4 s7o.✓ al' ///7✓T if v/T iob c- 1 6.4) /'op Ill e jt/pLEl2 i J/i7x Go/4 IPEY�t� e G4/1- /OEA/se7z; Glv/TS Gcui �J✓� ��r�b LP/ fl ,x '.e-e— /6i" .Abj, ciz 17LiU' Go /GS A /aio[i /.°6�7, Simple System at System Systems Analysis (See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications) The following information is required to be incorporated with the mechanical equipment schedules on the plans. For projects without plans, fill in the required information below Capacity /8o/'el/ Capacity 775 OSA CFM Total CFM Econo Total CFM CFM SP' /ZS o 6 4 B iS o- ZS 9a a Zs 142 o /d0 O Z S 14-2 or 14-3 If required. COP S bo OSA cfm Econo /✓A I Date/e2 9 For Building Department Use SEER or EER /o,s IPLV Location Rc Input Btuh Output Btuh Efficiency' A// 14 /4 eile# AA4 HP /BHP Flow Control Location of Service April, 1994 'Ai I. cv I 1/a/fr I 0/ I I iv I if Viz fd°I 6 1/ ik s/ I 1I/ I HSPF Combustion Efficiency or AFUE, as applicable. 4 !-h° CV A°' &x/ 1 1-ia G 3e If Mechanical Summary (back) MECH -SUM 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms System Description See Section 1421 for full description of Simple System qualifications. Decision Flowchart Start System Type Heating Onl <5000 cfm <70% OA no Complex Systems 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form yes yes eating /Cooling or Cooling Only If Heating/Cooling or Cooling Only If Heating Only no i r Includes Econo? no yes Use this flowchart to determine if project qualifies for Simple System Option. If not, either the Complex System or Systems Analysis Options must be used. Reference Sec. 1421 Y rr� u� Constant vol? Split system? <5000 cfm? 54 000 Btu r 1900 cfm r yes Reference Sec. 1423 onstan olume? ackage ye ystem7 no Simple System l Allowed Reference Sec. 1420 VAir cooled? P C onomizer included? <70% outside air? 54 000 Btu 1900 cfm yes yes Split stems no Packaged sys? <54 000 Btuh? no Apnl, 1994 r 4. Use Complex Reference System Sec 1430 Refer to MECH -COMP Mechanical Complex Systems for assistance in determining which Complex Systems requirements are applicable to this project. 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Mechanical Permit Plans Checklist MECH -CHK 1994 Washington State Energy Code Comp h nce Forms Project AddressO�� 3 p The following information is necessary to check a mechanical permit application for compliance with the mechanical requirements in the Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code. Applicability Code (circle one) Section Component HVAC REQUIREMENTS (Sections 1411 Ecomt performance yes no iff.7aA 1411 4 Pkg. elec. htg.& clg. TLIV no n.a. 1411 1 Minimum efficiency 1412 HVAC controls no n.a. 1412.1 Temperature zones yes /rib) n.a. 1412.2 Deadband control yes ho 1412.3 Humidity control yes n.a. 1412.4 Automatic setback no n.a. 1412.4.1 Dampers yes no /q. 1412.5 Heat pump control yes no &‘I 1412.6 Combustion htg. r`i) no n.a. 1412.7 Balancing no n.a. 1422 Thermostat interlock bi€P no n.a. 1423 Economizers 1413 gAir economizers 65 no n.a. 1413.1 Operation yes rof) n.a. 1413.2 Control yes AO n.a. 1413.3 Integrated operation 1414 Ducting systems yes n.a. 1414.1 Duct sealing yes n.a. 1414.2 Duct insulation yes XV n.a. 1415.1 Piping insulation no n.a. 1424 Separate air sys. no Mech. Sum. Form I yes yes yes yes yes 14-12, /4/L.4 t¢i3 /4f3 3 /414 1 i4i4, i ttls,1 Service water htg. Elec. water heater Shut -off controls Heated pools Pool water heaters Pool heater controls Pool covers Information Required I -1424) List heat oumos on schedule Equipment schedule with type, capacity, efficiency Indicate 100% capability on. schedule Indicate controls able to evaluate outside air Indicate capability for partial cooling I 1440 no trf,. I 1441 no ,rf' 1442 I 1450 no prpl 1452 no I 1453 no A 1454 yes no yr! 1454 Pools 90+ degrees If "no" is circled for any question, provide explanation. Indicate locations on plans Indicate 5 degree deadband minimum Indicate humidistat Indicate thermostat with night setback and 7 different day types Indicate damper location and automatic controls Indicate microprocessor on thermostat schedule Indicate modulating or staged control Indicate balancing features on plans Indicate thermostat interlock on plans Equipment schedule Indicate sealing necessary Indicate R -value of insulation on duct Indicate R -value of insulation on piping Indicate separate systems on plans Completed and attached. Equipment schedule with types, in ut/out• efficiency, cfm, hp, economizer OOC 1Sections 1440 14541 Indicate R 10 insulation under tank Indicate automatic shut -off Indicate not electric resistance Indicate switch and 65 degree control Indicate vapor retardant cover Indicate R 12 pool cover G ilS77n// J'Y. C79✓ /i2 /ND /CAD /A 7Z t. S, /5 t26,9175,4PLO /J ni C4-16-47 CO 5 t//v/rG f CE y�ilvL4' Eb wig 16-45 ..245 Ot i, 4A. r)qy C,‘ /.vo/ C-41E12 /.A✓ Cz3Atir.o1,_ SPA s JJ- /,JO/ c-g7 /5330=9 9U SI.L(1Y11 1,Atf71 -riE37 A5 e S /nrl��2 /02 /,t/5P /5 rie1vo- busuc /o,u b//7/c4-7 IA' S/'e /5070 Date /o.... Location Building Department on Plans Notes 7 0 e /oit— April. 1994 1994 Washington State•Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Mechanical Permit Plans Checklist 1994 Washington State En rgy Code Compliance Forms MECH -CHK April, 1994 Mechanical General Requirements 1412 Controls 1412.1 Temperature Controls. Each system shall be provided with at least one temperature control device. Each zone shall be controlled by individual thermostatic.controls responding to temperature within the zone. At a minimum each floor of a building shall be considered as a separate zone. 1412.2 Deadband Controls: When used to control both comfort heating and cooling, zone thermostatic controls shall be capable of a deadband of at least 5 degrees F within which the supply of heating and cooling energy to the zone is shut off or reduced to a minimum. Exceptions: 1 Special occupancy special usage, or code requirements where deadband controls are not appropriate. 2. Buildings complying with Section 1141 4, if in the proposed building energy analysis heating and cooling thermostat setpoints are set to the same temperature between 70 degrees F and 75 degrees F inclusive, and assumed to be constant throughout the year 3. Thermostats that require manual changeover between heating and cooling modes 1412.3 Humidity Controls: If a system is equipped with a means for adding moisture a humidistat shall be provided. 1412.4 Setback and Shut -off• HVAC systems shall be equipped with automatic controls capable of accomplishing a reduction of energy use through control setback or equipment shutdown during periods of non -use or alternate use of the spaces served by the system The automatic controls shall have a minimum seven -day clock and be capable of being set for seven different day types per week. Exceptions: 1 Systems serving areas which require continuous operation at the same temperature setpoint. 2 Equipment with full load demands of 2 kW (6,826 Btu /h) or less may be controlled by readily accessible manual off hour controls 1412.4.1 Dampers: Outside air intakes exhaust outlets and relief outlets serving conditioned spaces shall be equipped with dampers which close automatically when the system is off or upon power failure. Stair shaft and elevator shaft smoke relief openings shall be equipped with normally open dampers These dampers shall remain closed in normal operation until activated by the fire alarm system or other approved smoke detection system Exceptions 1 Systems serving areas which require continuous operation. 2 Combustion air intakes 1412.5 Heat Pump Controls. Unitary air cooled heat pumps shall include microprocessor controls that minimize supplemental heat usage during start-up set -up and defrost conditions. These controls shall anticipate need for heat and use compression heating as the first stage of heat. Controls shall indicate when supplemental heating is being used through visual means (e.g. LED indicators) 1412.6 Combustion Heating Equipment Controls. Combustion heating equipment with a capacity over 225,000 Btu /h shall have modulating or staged combustion control. Exceptions 1 Boilers 2. Radiant Heaters 1412.7 Balancing: Each air supply outlet or air or water terminal device shall have a means for balancing, including but not limited to, dampers temperature and pressure test connections and balancing valves 1413 Air Economizers 1413.1 Operation. Air economizers shall be of automatically modulating outside and return air dampers to provide 100 percent of the design supply air as outside air to reduce or eliminate the need for mechanical cooling 1413.2 Control: Air economizers shall be controlled by a control system capable of determining if outside air can meet part or all of the building's cooling loads 1413.3 Integrated Operation. Building Heating Energy' Air economizers shall be capable of providing partial cooling even when additional mechanical cooling is required to meet the remainder of the cooling load. Controls shall not preclude the economizer operation when mechanical cooling is required simultaneously Exception Economizers on individual, direct expansion, cooling systems with capacities not greater than 75,000 Btu /h may include controls that limit simultaneous operation of the economizer and mechanical cooling for the purpose of preventing ice formation on cooling coils. 1414 Ducting Systems 1414.1 Sealing: Duct work which is designed to operate at pressures above 1/2 inch water column static pressure shall be sealed in accordance with Standard RS -18 Extent of sealing required is as follows. 1 Static pressure. 1/2 inch to 2 inches seal transverse joints 2. Static pressure: 2 inches to 3 inches, seal all transverse joints and longitudinal seams 3. Static pressure. above 3 inches seal all transverse joints longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations 1414.2 Insulation. Ducts and plenums that are constructed as part of the building envelope shall meet the requirements of Chapter 13 Other ducts and plenums shall be thermally insulated per Table 14 -5. Exceptions: 1 Within the HVAC equipment. 2. Exhaust air ducts not subject to condensation. 3 Exposed ductwork within a space that serves that space only 1415 Piping Systems 1415.1 Insulation. Piping shall be thermally insulated in accordance with Table 14 -6 Exception Piping installed within unitary HVAC equipment. Water pipes outside the conditioned space shall be insulated in accordance with Washington State Plumbing Code (WAC 51 26) 1420 SIMPLE SYSTEMS (PACKAGED UNITARY EQUIPMENT) 1421 System Type: To qualify as a simple system, systems shall be one of the following a. Air cooled, constant volume packaged equipment, which provide heating cooling or both, and require only external connection to duct work and energy services. b. Air cooled, constant volume split systems which provide heating cooling or both, with cooling capacity of 54,000 Btu /h or less c Heating only systems which have a capacity of less than 5,000 cfm or which have a minimum outside air supply of less than 70 percent of the total air circulation. All other systems shall comply with Sections 1430 through 1438 1422 Controls: In addition to the control requirements in Section 1412, where separate heating and cooling equipment serve the same temperature zone thermostats shall be interlocked to prevent simultaneous heating and cooling. 1423 Economizers: Economizers meeting the requirements of Section 1413 shall be installed on packaged roof top fan cooling units having a supply capacity of greater than 1,900 cfm or a total cooling capacity greater than 54,000 Btu /h The total capacity of all units without economizers shall not exceed 240,000 Btu/h per building 1424 Separate Air Distribution Systems: Zones with special process temperature requirements and /or humidity requirements shall be served by separate air distribution systems from those serving zones requiring only comfort conditions 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Electric Motors MECH -MOT 1994 Washington State Energy Code Gomel: nce Forms Project Address otyfrva/G 2� .11.5pw2rr_ 7mlisc:406 401/4/ir Complete the following for all design A B squirrel -cage, T -frame induction permanently wired polyphase motors from 1 hp to 200 hp having synchronous speeds of 3600, 1800 or 1200 rpm (unless one of the exceptions below applies). Motor No. or Location Pie Type HP (open or closed) 3 /_GosEt' "T"r l,Los&-2 -1 I Synch. Description of Application or Use Speed 6177472G 14 J5 X G,h7 2K coil/ _moo Apnl, 1994 I Date %3/_96 For Building Department Use Min.Nom. Full load Efficiency ,5 I Open Motors Closed Motors Exceptions: Synchronous 1 Motors in systems designed to use more than one Speed (RPM) 3,600 I 1,800 I 1,200 3,600 I 1 ,800 I 1,200 speed of a multi -speed motor HP Efficiency Efficiency 2. Motors already included in the efficiency 1 0 82.5 I 80.0 75.5 I 82.5 I 80.0 requirements for HVAC equipment (Tables 14-1 or 1.5 82.5 84.0 I 84.0 82.5 84.0 I 85.5 14-2) 2.0 84 0 84.0 85.5 84.0 84.0 j 86.5 3 Motors that are an integral part (i.e. not easily 3.0 84.0 86.5 86.5 85.5 87.5 I 87.5 removed and replaced of specialized process 5.0 85.5 87.5 87 5 87.5 87.5 I 87.5 equipment (i.e. equipment which requires a special 7.5 87.5 88.5 88.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 motor such as an explosion -proof motor) 10 88.5 89.5 90.2 89.5 89.5 89.5 4. Motors integral to a listed piece of equipment for 15 89.5 91.0 90.2 90.2 91 0 90.2 which no qualifying motor has been approved (i.e. if the 20 90.2 91 0 91 0 90.2 91.0 90.2 only U.L. listing for the equipment is with a less -efficient 25 91 0 91 7 91 7 91.0 92.4 91 7 motor and there is no energy efficient motor option). 30 910 92.4 92.4 91.0 92.4 917 40 91 7 93 0 93.0 91 7 93.0 93.0 For motors claiming an exception, list motor and note 50 92.4 93.0 93.0 92.4 93.0 93.0 which exception applies. 60 93.0 93.6 93.6 93.0 93.6 93.6 75 93 0 94.1 93.6 93.0 94.1 93.6 100 93.0 94.1 94.1 93.6 94.5 94.1 125 93.6 94.5 94.1 94.5 94.5 94.1 150 93 6 95.0 94.5 94.5 95.0 95.0 200 94.5 95.0 94.5 95.0 95.0 95.0 Mechanical Complex Systems Checklist MECH -COMP 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form 1994 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms eviv 4 G✓.A5J- The following additional information is necessary to check a mechanical permit application for a complex mechanical system for compliance with the mechanical requirements in the Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code. Use the checklist as a reference for notes added to the mechanical drawings (see the MECH -CHK checklist for additional system requirements). This information must be on the plans since this is the official record of the permit. Having this information in separate specifications alone is NOT an acceptable alternative. Project Address Applicability Code (circle one) Section Component ADDITIONAL CHECKLIST ITEMS yes no X%;11 1431 1 (Field assem. sys. I 1432 (Controls yes no Cs let 1432.1 'Setback shut -off I 1432.2 'Temp. reset control 16; no n.a.1 1432.2.1 (Air systems yes no rc) 1432.2.2 I Hvdronic systems no n.a.I 1433 Economizers 'GeV no n.a.I 1434 'Separate air sys. yes n.a. 1435 Simul. htg. clg. yes no 1 1436 Heat recovery Indicate heat recovery on plans; complete and attach heat recovery calculations frig no n.a.I 1437 IElec. motor effic. IMECH -MOT or Eauio. Schedule with ho, rom, efficiency I I yes no 1438 (Variable flow sys. 'Indicate variable flow on fan and pump schedules I I If "no" is circled for any question, provide explanation /136 /Air puc G2 /4S s'E9 P 2&)-us �.'oo cam O•v6 -07:3.✓&- ,fY., /ctrl /5 GA /2. 77447,1 3,r a CFyr7 A74. 4- V41/ eo) /S /0/ P.- ehatb, Decision Flowchart Section 1432.2 Hot Water Supply Temperature Reset Controls Required Yes Information Required FOR COMPLEX SYSTEMS ONLY I Provide calculations I Indicate separate systems or show isolation devices on plans I Indicate automatic reset I Indicate automatic reset Indicate economizer on equipment schedule or provide calculations to iustifv exemption 'Indicate seoarate systems on plans Indicate that simultaneous heating and cooling is prohibited, unless use of exceotion is iustified Capacity of HW Heating System Greater Than 000,000 Btuh? No Use this flowchart to determine how the requirements of the Complex Systems Option apply to the project. Refer to the indicated Code sections for more complete information on the requirements. No (Start Here J Section 1411.1 Equipment Perf. Shall Meet Tables 14 -1 through 14-3 Field Assembled ,q[npment? No Air System Serving Multiple Zones x u i Yes Yes Section 1431.1 Calculations of to.. Total On -site Energy Input Output Requited Section 1432.2.1 Supply Air Reset Controls Required (continued on back) i i April, 1994 Date Aa y.6 For Building Department Use I Location I Building Department on Plans Notes Yes Seetlon1411.4 Must be Heat Pump 1412.5 Provide Microprocessor Heat Pump Controls 1994 Washin ton State Nonresidential Ener. Code Corn p liance Form Mechanical Complex Systems (back) MECH -COMP 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms April, 1994 If (continued from front) Application Yes Involves Vanable Flows? V Done H- jl C) N n /IN. �8 N. Coo Yes Heating Electric Heating C z0,000 Cooling in one N Fuel Btuh? Package? N. Non Electric No No Electric Multi- Motor Efficiency No speed No Included in Equipmei Motor in a --ts• Performanc Multi -speed Rating? System? Yes Yes 225,000 Yes Btuh Capacity? No Section 1433 Air -Side Economizer Required Fans or Pumps N. IO HP? N No No i Yes Section 1435 Fan Powered Terminal Units Required Section 1412.6 Modulating Staged Combustion Controls Required 'Supply Air Section 1436 5000 CFM Yes 50% Effective Outside Air Heat Re overy 70t/ System Required Cooling Y Packaged No Cooling No Total Bldg Capa ity -4•-c Rooftop Capacity Capacity 54,000 Btuh? Unit? 84,000 Btuh? /40,000 Btuh? N No Y I I v... 1 Y i Section 1435 Variable Flow Devices Required VAV N System? No; Section 1435 Simultaneous Heating Cooling Prohibited Section 1437 Motors Must Meet Efficiencies in Table 14-4 i No Project Info 'Project Address (Project Description Compliance Option (check appropriate box) 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Enerav Code Compliance Form ghtingSummar F LTG -SUM It• 1994 Wasnington State Nonresloenoal Energy Cane Compliance Forms April. 1994 (Applicant Name: I Applicant Address: Applicant Phone: Maya►(a1 rk J WA- Date /l 0 For Building Department Use New Building Addition tg Alteration Prescriptive Lighting Power Allowance Systems Analysis (See Qualification Checklist (over). Indicate Prescriptive LPA spaces clearly on plans.) Alteration Exceptions I No changes are being made to the lighting I Less than 60 of the fixtures are new and installed lighting wattage is not being increased Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage (Interior) Location Allowed (floor /room no.) Occupancy Description Watts per ft2 Area in fe Allowed x Area I i f41A-lavtlo►l (I -lo5pr a1) I .S 4.591.5 f le 03 21. I I I I I I From Table 15-1 (over) document all exceptions taken from footnotes Total Allowed Watts! t Proposed Lighting Wattage (Interior) (May not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Interior) Location Number of Watts/ Watts (floor /room no.) Fixture Description Fixtures Fixture Proposed I l I (v2. 2 I #x2 3 Got lflo PS LI al f OZ I P 4- l Z s- art. tetYL V6 1 12 0 '1 434- I RN I ?ft "ZIO I I _V 47 4.0 120 I Total n m�a'� x Io (lowed Watts for Interior Total Proposed Watts �G1C�4I tort Maximum Allow ghtingWage xterior) Allowed Watts Area in ft Allowed Watts Location Description per ff or per tf (or If for perimeter) x ft (or x If) Covered Parking I 0.2 W/R Open Parking I 0.2 W /fl Outdoor Areas I 0.2 Wife I I Bldg. (by facade) I 0.25 W/f1 I I 1 Bldg. (by perim) I 7.5 W/If I I Note: for building exterior choose either the facade area or the perimeter method, but not both) Total Allowed Watts$ (May not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Exterior) Number of Watts/ Watts Fixtures Fixture Proposed Proposed Lighting Wattage (Exterior) Location Fixture Description I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Exterior Total Proposed Watts 1994 Weshlnoton State Nonresidential Enerav Code Comollance Form Lighting Summary (back» LTGSUM 7994 Wasmnoron State Nonresi°enuat Energy Cope Compliance Forms Prescriptive Spaces' t Qualification Checklist Note: If occupancy type is "Other" and fixture answer is checked. the numoer of fixtures in the space is not limited by Code. Clearly indicate these spaces on plans. if not qualified. do LPA Calculations. Use Occupancy Lignting Fixtures: wtralrcu gAstorag e,aremprOigtpft- stgrighangers t rr. Check here if at least fixlyrps.iq he s all four criteria: I Fixtures are fluorescent. non-lensed, with only one or two lamps, and 2. Lamps are T -5, T-6. T-8 or PL, and 4. Ballasts are electronic ballasts Table 15-1 Unit Lighting Power Allowari►ce (LPA) for Interior Lighting LPA Use' Other 3. Lamps are 5 -50 Watts, and April. 1994 I Painting, weldina, carpentry, machine shoes 2.3 Police and fire stations' I Barber shoos, beauty shoes 2 Atria (atriums) I Hotel banaueticonference/exhibition hall' 2 Assembly soaces auditoriums. avmnasia theaters I Laboratones 2 Process giants I I Aircraft repair hangars 1.5 Restaurantslbars' I Cafeterias. fast food establishments' 1.5 Retail A I Factones, workshops, handling areas 1.5 Retail 8 Retail bankino I "Sas,stationtldt Teal *shoos° 1.5 Locker anolor shower facilities I Insiltuioris` 1.5 alVafMfiouse stbract. tv: Atsn., "J 0.5 I Libraries' 1.5 Aircraft storage hangars I 0.4 I Nursing homes 1.5 Parking garages I Wholesale stores (pallet rack shetnnq) 1.5 I I Mall .concourses I 1 4 Plans Submitted for Common Areas Only' I Schott bualgs. school classrooms, day care centers I 1.35 Common area. comdets. lobbies (except mall concourse) I 0.8 Laundries I 1.3 Toilet facilities and washrooms Office buildings, office/administrative areas in facilities of other use types (including but not limited to schools. 1.2 hospitals, institutions, museums. banks. churches) -)fit `'`c "J X• Footnotes for Table 15-1 I ce w SIZ` I In cascs,tpi which a use is lq(ment specifically the Unit Power Allowance shall be determined by the building oil i�i Th deter ation shall be bac`u on the most com$rable use specified in the table. See Section 1512 for exempt areas. 2. The- 1,er square tooh beincreased. by 0 -o percent per toot of c iling height above twenty tat. unless speeitioTtNdirected othcit C'bv subsequent, otnotes. Ci. tots yJatt i#'r�s uare toot oCro rn may be increased'bv two percent per toot ot'ceiling height above twelve feet. !A 4 For ail other spaces. such as seating and common areas. use the Unit Light Power owgnce for assembly 5 Watts per square toot ot room may be increased by two percent per toot ot'ceiling height above nine feet. 6. Includes pump area under canopy 7 In cases in which a lighting plan is submitted for only a portion of a floor a Unit Lighting Power Allowance of 1.35 may be used for usable otlice floor area and 0.80 watts per square toot shall be used for the common areas. which may include elevator space. lobby area and rest rooms. Common areas. as herein defined do not include mall concourses. LPA Miff) 1.2 1 1 1 1 1 1.5 0.8 s« soon 1572 I 0.8 I 8. For the tire engine room. the Unit Lighting Power Allowance is 1.0 watts per square foot. 9 For indoor sport tournament courts with adjacent spectator seating. the Unit Lighting Power Allowance for the court area is 2.6 watts per square 10. For both Retail A and Retail B. light for free-standing display building showcase illumination and display window illumination installed within two feet ot the window are exempt. Retail A allows a Unit Lighting Power Allowance ot 1.0 watts per square toot. Ceiling mounted adjustable tungsten halogen and HID merchandise display illumrnanes arc exempt. Retail B allows a Unit Lighting Power Allowance of 1.5 watts per square toot. including all ceiling mounted merchandise display luminaries. 11 Provided that a floor plan. indicating rack location and height. is submitted. the square tootage for a warehouse may be detined..for computing the interior Unit Lighting Power Allowance, as the floor area not covered by racks plus the vertical face area (access side only) ot the racks. The height allowance defined in footnote 2 applies only to the floor area not covered by racks. 1994 Washinaton State Nonresidential Enerav Code Compliance Form ghting Summary° LTG-SUM 1 Washington State NonresreeneaI Energy Coos Compliance Forms Project Info 1 ProjectAddress 'Applicant Name: 'Applicant Address: 'Applicant Phone: 'Project Description I New Building Addition Alteration Prescriptive Lighting Power Allowance Systems Analysis (See Qualification Checklist (over). Indicate Prescriptive LPA spaces clearly on plans.) No changes are being made to the lighting I Less than 60 of the fixtures are new and installed lighting wattage is not being increased Compliance Option Alteration Exceptions (check appropriate box) Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage (Interior) Location (floor /room no.) Occupancy Description From Table 15-1 (over) document all exceptions taken from footnotes Proposed Lighting Wattage (Interior) Location (floor /room no.) Fixture Description /,,III (May not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Interior) Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Intenor Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage (Exterior) Allowed Watts Location Description per ft or per If Covered Parking I I 0.2 Wiit Open Parking I I 0.2 W /ft` Outdoor Areas I 0.2 W/ft `Bldg. (by facade) I I 0.25 W /ft Bldg. (by penm) I I 7.5 W/tf Note: for building exterior choose either the facade area or the perimeter method, but not both) Proposed Lighting Wattage (Exterior) Location Fixture Description I I I I I I I 1 Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Exterior I Date For Building Department Use Allowed Watts per re" Area in ft I I I I I I I I I I I Total Allowed Wattsl Number of Watts/ Fixtures Fixture le Total Proposed Watts 4001 Area in ft (or If for penreter) Total Allowed Watts! Allowed x Area Watts Proposed Allowed Watts xtt (or xIf) (May not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Exterior) Number of Watts! Watts Fixtures Fixture Proposed Apn1. 1994 I I I I I I I I I I I Total Proposed Watts! T994 Wasnington State NonrestaMpal Energy Code Compliance I'onns II Lighting (back) LTCz -SUM Prescriptive Spaces Qualification Checklist Note: It occupancy type is 'other' and fixture answer is checked. the number of fixtures in the space is not limited by Code. Clearly indicate these spaces on plans. tf not qualified, do LPA Calculations. Use 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Enerov Code Comailance Form (Occupancy Lighting Fixtures: Painting, welding, carpentry, machine shoos Barber shoos. beauty shoos Hotel banauet/conferenceiexhibition hall' Laboratories Aircraft repair hangars Cafeterias. fast food establishments Factories. workshops, handling areas Gas stations, auto repair shoos' Institutions Libraties Nursing hones Wholesale stores (pallet rack snemnq) Mall concourses Schools buildings. school classrooms. day care centers Laundries Office buildings, officefadministrative areas in facilities of other use types (including but not limited to schools, hospitals, institutions. museums. bane, churchesl --'t- 0 Warehouses. storage areas or aircraft storage hangers Other Check here if at least 95% of fixtures in the space meet all four criteria: 1 Fixtures are fluorescent, non lenses. with only one or two lamps, and 2. Lamps are T -5, T-6, T-8 or PL, and 3. Lamps are 5 -50 Watts, and 4 Ballasts are electronic ballasts Table 15-1 Unit Lighting Power Allowance (LPA) for Interior Lighting LPA I 2.3 I 2 I 2 I 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 14 1.35 1.3 1.2 LPA Use' lWIR Police and fire stations' 1.2 I Atria (atriums) 1 Assembly soaces auaitoriums. evmnasia theaters 1 I Process plants 1 I Restaurants/bars' 1 Retail A 1 Retail B' Retail banidna 1.5 I Locker ana(or snower facilities 0.8 I Warehouses 1 storage areas 0.5 I Aircraft storage hangars 0.4 Parking garages See Sga11532 1 I Plans Submitted for Common Areas Only' I I Common area. comdtxs. loobtes (except mall concourse) 1 0.8 I Toilet facilities and washrooms I 0.8 Footnotes for Table 15 I In cases in which a use is not mentioned specifically the Unit Power Allowance shall be determined by the building official. This determination shall be based upon the most comparable use specified in the table. See Section 1512 for exempt areas. Apel. 1994 2. The watts per square toot may beincrcased. by two percent per toot ot'ceiling height above twenty test. unless specifically directed otherwise by subsequent footnotes. Wafts.psr;; square toot of room may be increased by two percent per toot at ceiling height above twelve feet. 4 For all other spaces. such as seating and common areas. use the Unit Light Power 4llowance for assembly 5 Watts per square toot of room may be increased by two percent per toot dealing height above nine feet. 6. Includes pump area under canopy 7 In cases in which a lighting plan is submitted for only a portion of a floor a Unit Lighting Power Allowance of 1.35 may be used for usable office door area and 0.80 watts per square foot shall be used for the common areas. which may include elevator space, lobby area and rest rooms. Common areas, as herein defined do not include mall concourses. 8. For the tire engine room. the Unit Lighting Power Allowance is 1.0 watts per square toot. 9 For indoor sport tournament courts with adjacent spectator seating. the Unit Lighting Power Allowance for the court area is 2.6 watts per square toot. 10. For both Retail A and Retail B. light for free-standing display. building showcase illumination and display window illumination installed within two test of the window are exempt. Retail A allows a Unit Lighting Power Allowance of 1.0 watts per square foot. Ceiling mounted adjustable tungsten halogen and HID merchandise display illumtnancs arc exempt. Retail B allows a Unit Lighting Power Allowance of 1.5 watts per square toot. Including all ceiling mounted merchandise display luminaries. Provided that a floor plan. indicating rack location and height. is submitted, the square tootage tar a warehouse may be defined. for computing the interior Unit Lighting Power Allowance. as the floor area not covered by racks plus the vertical face area (access side only) of the racks. The height allowance defined in footnote 2 applies only to the door area not covered by racks. 1994 Washin ton State Nonresidential Ener. Code Com•liance Form Electronic Beta Version Lighting Permit Plans Checklist LTG -CHK 1994 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Address H c show with XX Section lyey no dye8 no yes no yes no yes no yes no yes no yes no 1(a) timer w /backup (n 1(b) photocell. 1513.6 linter auto shut -ott 1513.6.1 (a) occup. sensors 1513.6.2' (b) auto. switcnes (AA 4 Component 'LIGHTING CONTROLS (Section 1513) yes jho n a 1 1513.1 (Local control /access n a l 1b13.1 Area controls I 1513.3 'Da zone con trol n a l vertical glazing n a. I overnead glazing lb1J 4 splay /exnib /special 1513 5 'Exterior snut-ofit Information Required Indicate location Indicate location Indicate location The following information is necessary to check a lighting permit application for compliance with the lighting requirements in the 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code. Applicability Code 'Schedule with type, indicate locations Maximum limit per switch Schedule with type anal tures, indicateloocations 'Indicate vertical glazing on plans Indicate overhead glazing on plans !Indicate separate controls Schedule with type and eatures, indicaTrotion Scnedule with type and locations Schedule with type anotures (back -up, override capaol l y 1 II Indicate size of zone on plans SLIGHTING ATTAGE (Sections 1(32 or 1530-32) Oyes )no I 'Lighting Sum. form 'Completed and attached. I I I Schedule with fixture types, ELECTRIC klOTORS Section 1511) yes no n a IFlec motor Efticiency IMECH -MOT or Equipment Schedule with hp It "no" is circled for any question, provide explanation I lamps, oaiiasts, watts per fixture rpm, efficiency 'Date) X 91 July 1994 Location Building Department on Plans Notes 1994 Washin ton State Nonr sidential Ener• Cod Com•liance Form Electro is Beta Version Lighting Permit Plans Checklist 1994 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms LTG -CHK July 1994 Lighting General Requirements 1513 Lighting Controls 1513.1 Local Control and Accessibility Each space, enclosed by walls or ceiling- height partitions, shall be provided with lighting controls located within that space. The lighting controls, whether one or more, shall be capable of turning off all lights within the space. The controls shall be readily accessible, at the point of entry/exit, to personnel occupying or using the space. Exceptions: The following lighting controls may be centralized in remote locations: 1 Lighting controls for spaces which must be used as a whole. 2. Automatic controls. 3. Controls requiring trained operators. 4. Controls for safety hazards and security 1513.2 Area Controls: The maximum lighting power that may be controlled from a single switch or automatic control shall not G that which is provided by a twenty ampere circuit loaded to not more than eighty percent. A master control may be installed provided the individual switches retain their capability to function independently Circuit breakers may not be used as the sole means of switching. Exceptions: 1 Industrial or manufacturing process areas, as may be required for production. 2. Areas less than five percent of the building footprint for footprints over 100,000 ft 1513.3 Daylight Zone Control: All daylighted zones, as defined in Chapter 12, both under overhead glazing and adjacent to vertical glazing, shall be provided with individual controls, or daylight or occupant- sensing automatic controls, which control the lights independent of general area lighting. 1513.4 Display Exhibition, and Specialty Lighting Controls: All display exhibition, or specialty lighting shall be controlled independently of general area lighting. 1513.5 Automatic Shut -off Controls, Exterior Exterior lighting not intended for 24 -hour continuous use shall be automatically switched by timer photocell, or a combination of timer and photocell. Automatic time switches shall also have program back -up capabilities, which prevent the loss of program and time settings for at least 10 hours, if power is interrupted. 1513.6 Automatic Shut -Off Controls, Interior Office buildings greater than 25,000 ft and all school classrooms shall be equipped with separate automatic controls to shut off the lighting during unoccupied hours. Automatic controls may be an occupancy sensor time switch, or other device capable of automatically shutting off lighting. Exceptions: 1 Areas that must be continuously illuminated, or illuminated in a manner requiring manual operation of the lighting. 2. Emergency lighting systems. 3. Switching for industrial or manufacturing process facilities as may be required for production. 1513.6.1 Occupancy Sensors: Occupancy sensors shall be capable of automatically turning off all the lights in an area, no more than 30 minutes after the area has been vacated. 1513.6.2 Automatic Time Switches: Automatic time switches shall have a minimum 7 day clock and be capable of being set for 7 different day types per week and incorporate an automatic holiday 'shut -off" feature, which turns off all loads for at least 24 hours and then resumes normally scheduled operations. Automatic time switches shall also have program back -up capabilities, which prevent the loss of program and time settings for at least 10 hours, if power is interrupted. Automatic time switches shall incorporate an over -ride switching device which: a. is readily accessible; b. is located so that a person using the device can see the lights or the areas controlled by the switch, or so that the area being illuminated is annunciated; c. is manually operated; d. allows the lighting to remain on for no more than two hours when an over -ride is initiated; and e. controls an area not exceeding 5,000 ft or 5 percent of footprint for footprints over 100,000 ft whichever is greater MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL DESCRJ TION OF COMM TENTS THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS CONTAIN THE FOLLOWING VOLUME 1 PROJECT MANUAL Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, Division 1 General Requirements Divisions 2 14 Division 15 Division 16 VOLUME 2 PROJECT DRAWINGS Division A Architectural Drawings Division S Division M. Division E VOLUME 1 PROJECT MANUAL Unit DIVISION Section and Contract SECTION 00003 PAGE 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Technical Specifications .Mechanical Specifications Electrical Specifications .Structural Drawings .Mechanical Drawings Electrical Drawings Description No. of Pages 0 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00002 Introduction 00003 Table of Contents 00030 Advertisements For Bids 00100 Instructions For Bidders AIA Document A701 Instructions to Bidders, 1987 Edition Supplementary Instructions 00300 Bid Form 00320 Bid Bond 00420 Bidder Qualification Form 00515 Contract Transmittal 00520 Notice to Proceed 00700 General Conditions AIA Document A201 General Conditions of the Contract, 1987 Edition Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. Special Conditions of the Contract 00900 Addenda DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01010 Summary of Work 01011 Contract Time and Sequence 01014 Project Finishes and Openings 01026 Payment Procedures Affidavit for Payment of Retained Percentage (Form MNMG1060) 01027 Schedule of Values 01030 Base Bid and Alternates 01036 Change Order Procedures Change Order Proposal (Form MNMG1038) Change Order (Form MNMG1039) Architect's Supplemental Instructions (Form MNMG1036) 2 5 2 1 5 2 3 1 4 1 2 1 24 5 3 1 3 3 2 3 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 00003 PAGE 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Construction Change Directive (Form MNMG1037) 1 01045 Cutting and Patching 4 01064 Seismic Anchorage Requirements 5 01065 Code and Permit Requirements 2 01091 Reference Standards 12 01095 Explanations, Definitions, Abbreviations, Symbols 5 01121 Hazardous Materials Procedures 2 01122 Hazardous Materials Report 1 AHERA Asbestos Survey 9 01200 Project Meetings 2 Progress Meeting Agenda (Form MNMG 1068) 1 01300 Submittals 7 Submittal Cover Sheet/Transmittal (Form MNMG1046) 1 01310 Progress Schedule 3 01400 Quality Control 6 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 5 State Fire Marshall Information Sheet A -1 1 01600 Material and Equipment 4 01610 Delivery Storage, and Handling 1 01630 Product Options and Substitutions 3 Substitution Request Form (Form MNMG1063). 1 01700 Contract Closeout 4 01710 Final Cleaning 2 01720 Project Record Documents 3 01745 Warranty Procedures 3 Contractor's Warranty 3 Subcontractor's Warranty 1 DIVISION 2 SITEWORK Section 02070 Selective Demolition 6 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Section 03300 Cast In Place Concrete 6 DIVISION 4 MASONRY (NOT USED) DIVISION 5 METALS Section 05120 Structural Steel 5 05500 Metal Fabrications. 3 DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 3 06200 Finish Carpentry 5 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork. 9 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07210 Building Insulation 5 07270 Firestopping and Smokestopping 8 07530 Singl Ply Membrane Roofing. 4 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal. 2 07720 Roof Accessories. 3 07901 Joint Sealants 8 07901 -S Joint Sealant Schedule. 1 1 t 1 i 1 r 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 E MAHLUM NORDFORS MCIINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL J DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 00003 PAGE 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 08111 Steel Doors and Frames 6 08211 Flush Wood Doors 5 08305 Access Doors 3 08520 Vinyl Windows. 5 08710 Hardware 11 DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 09200 Lath and Plaster 7 09255 Gypsum Board Assemblies 13 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 6 09660 Resilient Tile Floorings 4 09666 Sheet Vinyl Floor 5 09678 Resilient Base 4 09680 Carpet. 6 09900 Painting 11 09950 Wall Coverings 4 DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Section 10100 Visual Display Boards 3 10190 Cubicles. 3 10265 Wall Surface Protection Systems 4 10522 Fire Extinguishers 3 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories. 6 10990 Miscellaneous Specialties 2 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS Section 12511 Horizontal Louver Blinds. 2 12541 Draperies 2 DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT USED) DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL Section 15010 General Provisions 12 15020 Vibration Isolation 2 15030 Mechanical Painting and Identification 3 15040 Balancing Air and Water Systems. 4 15060 Pipe and Fittings 7 15070 Mechanical Systems Insulation 5 15090 Mechanical Supporting Devices 4 15100 Valves 3 15400 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 5 15410 Domestic Water Piping Systems 1 15420 Soil, Waste and Vent System 2 15490 Medical Gas Systems 5 15500 Automatic Fire Protection Systems 2 15640 Refrigeration Equipment. 1 15650 Liquid Heat Transfer Piping System 2 15700 Air Handling Equipment. 4 15800 Air Distribution System 9 15825 Air Terminal Equipment 3 MAHLUM NORDFORS MCIONLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 15850 Air Filtration. 2 15900 Automatic Temperature Controls 4 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section 16010 General Provisions 9 16030 Testing 4 16051 Existing Conditions 6 16100 Basic Materials and Methods 6 16110 Raceways. 5 16120 Conductors and Terminators 2 16130 Outlet and Pull Boxes 4 16140 Switches and Receptacles 5 16170 Disconnects and Fuse Switches 2 16180 Fuses 1 16450 Grounding. 2 16471 Panelboards 3 16500 Lighting 11 16700 Communications 3 16721 Fire Alarm System. 8 16724 Smoke Damper Control 2 16740 Telephone, Computer Raceway Systems. 2 16750 Nurse Call. 9 16776 Voice Paging System 2 16781 Television System. 6 16960 Medical Gas Alarm Panel 1 16999 Project Closeout. 1 DIVISION AD ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS See Drawings DIVISION AS ARCHITECTURAL SCHEDULES See Drawings VOLUME 2 PROJECT DRAWINGS Unit Description DIVISION A ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS Drawing A0.1 Cover Sheet A0.2 Code Plan A2.1 Second Floor Plan A2.2 Third Floor Demolition Plan A2.3 Third Floor Plan A2.4 Roof Plan A2.5 Finish Plan and Finish Schedule A2.6 Door and Window Schedules and Details A3 1 Exterior Elevation, Building Section,Wall Section A4 1 Enlarged Floor Plan A4.2 Enlarged Floor Plan AS 1 Interior Elevations A5.2 Interior Elevations A5.3 Interior Elevations A6.1 Reflected Ceiling Plan A9 1 Details, Wall Types SECTION 00003 PAGE 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL A9.2 Details DIVISION S STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS Drawing S Unit Support Plan and Details DIVISION M MECHANICAL DRAWINGS Drawing M 1 Symbols and Abbreviations M 2 Second Floor and Demo Plan— Mechanical M 3 Third Floor Demo Plans —HVAC M-4 Third Floor Demo Plan— Piping and Plumbing M -5 Roof Demo Plan— Mechanical M -6 Partial Plans, Sections and Details M -7 Partial Plans, Sections and Details M -8 Third Floor Plan—Fire Protection and Diagrams M -9 Schedules DIVISION E ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS Drawing E -1 Symbols and Abbreviations E 2 Lighting Fixture Schedule E 3 Power —One Line Diagram E-4 Lighting Plan E 5 Power Plan E -6 Signal Plan E -7 Roof Electrical Plan E -8 Schedules 0 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 00003 PAGE 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS END OF SECTION 00003 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL LEGAL NOTICE INVITATION TO BID OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL CLALLAM COUNTY PUBLIC HOSPITAL DISTRICT No. 2 PORT ANGELES, WASHINGTON Date of Bid Opening: November 20, 1996 SECTION 00030 PAGE 1 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS In accordance with RCW 70.44 140, you are invited to bid on a contract for the construction of the Olympic Memorial Hospital 3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel, located within Olympic Memorial Hospital, Port Angeles, Washington. Sealed bids will be received until 2:00 PM at Office of the Administrator Clallam County Public Hospital District No. 2 Olympic Memorial Hospital 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 98362 Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud by the Administrator or his/her authorized representative in the Board Room of Olympic Memorial Hospital at 2:00 PM on Wednesday November 20, 1996. The public is invited to attend the bid opening. In the case of mailing, address bids to Mr Mike Glenn, Assistant Administrator Olympic Memorial Hospital, 939 Caroline Street, Port Angeles, Washington, 98362 Each bid shall be sealed in an opaque envelope and accompanied by a certified check, cashier's check, postal money order, or surety bond (issued by an authorized surety) made payable to: Clallam County Public Hospital District No. 2. Bid security shall be in an amount not less than five percent (5 of the total bid. No bid shall be accepted unless accompanied by bid security and any bid bond must be in a form and issued by a surety acceptable to the Board of Commissioners, Clallam County Public Hospital District No. 2. Bids will not be accepted from bidders who have not attended the mandatory site inspection, which will take place at the site, 10.00 AM, Wednesday, November 13, 1996 The Board of Commissioners, Clallam County Public Hospital District No. 2 reserves the right to reject any or all bids. The Board of Commissioners will consider bids and the matter of awarding the contract at the next scheduled public meeting of the Board of Commissioners to be held in the Board Room of Olympic Memorial Hospital. No bidder may withdraw his/her bid after the date and hour set forth above for the bid opening. If a successful bidder fails to enter into a contract in accordance with his/her bid and furnish required performance and payment bonds within ten (10) days from the date he /she is notified that he/she is the successful bidder, such bidder's bid security shall be forfeited. Bona fide bidders may obtain bid documents at Olympic Reprographics 1016 First Avenue South Seattle, Washington 98134 (206) 343-1587 Bidders should call the printer (listed above) to order sets prior to pick up. A maximum of two sets of documents may be obtained without deposit by AGC general contractors. A maximum of two sets may be MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL obtained with a $150.00 deposit per set by non -AGC general contractors. A maximum of one set of documents may be obtained by AGC and non -AGC mechanical and electrical subcontractors with a $150.00 deposit All other subcontractors may view documents at a plan center or purchase a set directly from the printer (listed above). Dated this 1st Day of November 1996, at Port Angeles, Washington COMMISSION CLALLAM COUNTY PUBLIC HOSPITAL DISTRICT NO 2 01996 Mahlum Nordfon< McKinley Gordon SECTION 00030 PAGE 2 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS END OF SECTION 00030 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 t 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 1 INCORPORATION A. AIA Document A701 Instructions to Bidders, 1987 Edition, is hereby made a part of the Contract as modified by the Supplementary Instructions and is bound herein. 1 2 DESCRIPTION A. Instructions described in this section include: 1 Instructions to Bidders (5 pages) 2. Supplementary Instructions (2 pages) SECTION 0 010 0 PAGE 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS HE A M E R IC AN 1 DEFINITIONS 2 BIDDER S REPRESENTATIONS 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS AIA I N S T I T U T E O F A R C H I T E C T S AIA Document A701 Instructions to Bidders 1987 EDITION TABLE OF ARTICLES 6 POST BID INFORMATION 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR CAUTION. You should sign an original AIA document which has this caution printed in red. An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. Copyright 1970 1974 1978, ©1987 by The American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, N W Washington, D C. 20006 Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecution. AIA DOCUMENT A701 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOURTH EDITION AIA ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A701 1987 1 ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS 1 1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the bid form, and other sample bidding and contract forms. The pro- posed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor Conditions of the Con- tract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Draw ings, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Con- tract for Construction, AIA Document A201 or in other Con- tract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic.instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bid- der offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Docu- ments as the base, to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated. in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. 1 7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid. 1.9 A Sub bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that. 2.1 1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Docu- ments and the Bid is made in accordance therewith. 2.1.2 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Docu- ments or contract documents, to the extent that such docu- mentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, for other portions of the Project, if any being bid concurrently or presently under construction. 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS AIA DOCUMENT A701 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOURTH EDITION AlA ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 has correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and sys- tems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1 COPIES 3.1 1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Docu- ments from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement o"r Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if any stated therein. The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids. The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit. A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder's deposit will be refunded. 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub bidders or others unless specifically offered in the Advertise ment or Invitation to Bid, or in supplementary instructions to bidders. 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids, neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 3.1.4 In making copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms, the Owner and the Architect do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant permission for any other use of the Bidding Documents 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bid- ding Documents with each other and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub bidders requiring clarification or inter pretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, cor rections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 3.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A701 1987 2 dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other mate rials, equipment or other portions of the Work including changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer The Architect s decision of approval or dis- approval of a proposed substitution shall be final. 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Adden- dum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 ADDENDA 3.4.1 Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. 3.4.3 No Addenda will be issued later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. 3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. 4.1 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS 4.1 1 Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to the form included with the Bidding Documents. 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink. 4.1.3 Where so indicated by the makeup of the bid form, sums shall be expressed in both words and figures, and in case of dis- crepancy between the two the amount written in words shall govern. 4.1.4 Interlineations, alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter `No Change. 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, .the Bidder may without forfeiture 3 A701 -1987 ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES of the bid security state the Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner 4.1 7 Each copy of the Bid shall include the legal name of the Bidder and a statement that the Bidder is a sole proprietor part nership corporation or other legal entity Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent s authority to bind the Bidder 4.2 BID SECURITY 4.2.1 If so stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, or supplementary instructions to bidders, each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required, pledging that the Bidder will enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and will, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Sub- paragraph 6.2 1 4.2.2 If a surety bond is required, it shall be written on AIA Document A310 Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents, and the attorney -in -fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn, or (c) all Bids, have been rejected. 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security if any and -other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the nota- tion `SEALED BID ENCLOSED' on the face thereof. 4.3.2 Bids shall-be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic or telegraphic Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time AIA DOCUMENT A701 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOURTH EDITION AIA ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder or by telegram, if by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal amount of the original Bid. 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. 4.4.4 Bid security if required, shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as modified or resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 5.1 OPENING OF BIDS 5.1 1 Unless stated otherwise in the Advertisement or Invita- tion to Bid, the properly identified Bids received on time will be opened publicly and will be read aloud. An abstract of the Bids will be made available to Bidders. When it has been stated that Bids will be opened privately an abstract of the same infor mation may at the discretion of the Owner be made available to the Bidders within a reasonable time. 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS 5.2.1 The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids, reject a Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or reject a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest responsible Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities or irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner's judgment, is in the Owner's own best interests. 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically pro- vided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the low Bid- der on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates ac cepted. ARTICLE 6 POST -BID INFORMATION 6.1 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT 6.1 1 Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under con- sideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request, a prop- erly executed AIA Document A305 Contractor's Qualification Statement, unless such a Statement has been previously AIA A701 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOURTH EDITION AIA® ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bid- ding Documents. 6.2 OWNER'S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY 6.2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements.have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is fur nished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agree ment 'between the Owner and Contractor 6.3 SUBMITTALS 6.3.1 The Bidder shall, as soon as practicable after notification of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing. 1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces, .2 names of the manufacturers, products and the sup- pliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work, and .3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work. 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfac tion of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibil- ity of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents. 6.3.3 Prior to the award of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity the Bidder may at the Bidder's option, (1) withdraw the Bid, or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were pro- posed and shall not be changed except with the written con- sent of the Owner and Architect. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 7 1 BOND REQUIREMENTS 7 1 1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Con- tract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources. 7 1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bid- ding Documents, the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A701 1987 4 furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the cost of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. 7 1.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder s usual sources, changes in cost will be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents. 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract. If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder shall, prior to com- mencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Subparagraph 7.2 1 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312 Performance Bond and Payment Bond. -Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Con- tract Sum. 5 A701 1987 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney -in -fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 8.1 FORM TO BE USED ARTICLE 8 8.1 1 Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents, the Agreement for the Work will be written on AIA Document A101 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Con- tractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum. AIA DOCUMENT A701 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOURTH EDITION AIA ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GFNFRAL 1 1 THE PROJECT Olympic Memorial Hospital 3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 1 2 THE DOCUMENTS The plans and specifications are entitled "Construction Documents for Olympic Memorial Hospital -3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel 1 3 THE ARCHITECT Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon 2505 Third Avenue, Suite 219 Seattle, Washington 98121 PART 2 THE BID To: Olympic Memorial Hospital 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 98362 Ladies and Gentlemen: SECTION 00300 PAGE 1 BID FORM I/We have received the Project Specification for the project as identified above. I/We have also received Addenda Nos. and have included their provisions in my /our bid. I/We have attended the mandatory site inspection. Yes No (check one) I/We have examined both the documents and the site and fully understand the extent and nature of the work. Questions regarding the project have been asked of the Architect during the bidding period. I/We submit the following bid: In submitting this bid, I/We agree: 1 To hold my /our bid open for sixty (60) days. 2. To accept the provisions of the Advertisement to Bid and the Instructions to Bidders regarding disposition of Bid Security 3 To enter into and execute a contract, if awarded on the basis of this bid and to furnish guarantee bonds in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions of this contract. 0 4 To accomplish the work in accordance with the contract documents. 5 To complete the work by the time specified in Section 01011 Contract Time and Sequence. 6. The bids are in accordance with Section 01030, Base Bid and Alternates. 7 I/We have attached to this bid the required Bid Security and Bidder Qualification Form. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL I/We will construct this project for the lump -sum price of: DOLLARS None of the base bid or alternate prices include Washington State sales tax. Alternates (Not Used) Alt. Description Addition #1 Headwall Units at Patient Rooms #2 Wood Veneer Soffits. #3 Vinyl Wallcovering at Patient Room walls #4 Drapes and Valences Subcontractors I/We intend to use the following subcontractors for any and all portions of the work awarded: HVAC Subcontractor Plumbing Subcontractor Electrical Subcontractor Roofing Subcontractor In addition to the above, the following subcontractors have subcontract amounts equal to more than ten percent of the bid amount. 1 2. 3 4 NOTE. If such subcontractors are not listed below a list of their names must be submitted within one hour of the published bid submittal time. Failure to provide this list shall render the bid void. SECTION 00300 PAGE 2 BID FORM MAHLUM NORDFORS McK1NLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL Signatures (Date) (Signature) (Title) (Legal name of person, corporation, or firm submitting bid) SECTION 00300 PAGE 3 BID FORM (State Contractor's License Number) (Seal. If bid is by a corporation, signature must be as required in Section 00100, Instructions to Bidders.) 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 00300 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL KNOW Al J. BY THESE PRESENT; That (Contractor) as Principal, and (Bonding Company) as Surety a corporation of the State of whose principal office is located in the City of State of are firmly bound unto as Obligee, Dollars 1 for the payment whereof Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns jointly and securely firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, Principal has by written proposal, dated offered to enter into a contract with Obligee for NOW THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if the proposal of Principal is accepted by Obligee, Principal will pay to Obligee as liquidated damages a sum equal to five (5) percent of the amount of its bid unless within ten (10) days after delivery by Obligee to Principal of notice of acceptance of its proposal, Principal shall enter into a contract in accordance with its bid and furnish the Contractor's bond specified in said plans and specification sand contract documents. SIGNED AND SEALED this (Title) (Title) 01996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon day of 19 (Surety) (Principal) SECTION 00320 PAGE 1 BID BOND END OF SECTION 00320 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 INCORPORATION SECTION 00420 PAGE 1 BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM The Owner's Qualification Form, three (3) pages, is incorporated hereafter as part of the contract documents and shall be included with the bid form. Fill the following form out and submit along with the bid form. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 Type of organization: Individual Partnership Corporation 2. Years in business under present firm name: 3 Bonding Company- Bonding Capacity 4 Principal Bank: Branch: 5 Has your firm ever failed to complete any work awarded? 6. Has any officer or partner of your fine ever failed to complete a contract handled in his/her own name? If so, state name of individual, contract not completed, and why 7 List projects your organization has under way on this date: Contract Amount Class of Work Complete SECTION 00420 PAGE 2 BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM Years Name and Address of Owner or Contracting Agent 1 1 1 w 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 8. List types of medical work completed in last five years: Contract Amour ti Class of Work Complete SECTION 00420 PAGE 3 BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM Name and Address of Owner or Contracting Agent 9 List typical projects your organization has completed in the past three years: Contract Name and Address of _Arno= Class of Work 1p Coma= Owner or Contracting Agent MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 10. List any projects which resulted in substantial dispute with the Owner, arbitration, or litigation with the Owner or any subcontractors: Contract Name and Address of Amok Class of Work Complete Owner or Contracting Agent 01996 Mahlum Ncadfora McKinley Gordon SECTION 00420 PAGE 4 BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM END OF SECTION 00420 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART l CONTRACT TRANSMITTAL Date: To: From: Dan Jardine, Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon 1 1 REFERENCE Section 00300, Bid Form, your proposal dated 1 2 OWNER'S ACTIONS The Owner authorizes us to advise you that he: Accepts/Rejects your base bid. Accepts your following alternates: Rejects your following alternates: 1 3 CONTRACT TRANSMITTAL The Owner forwards herewith for your signature his agreement with you per Section 00510, Form of Agreement. When the original and copies of the agreement are signed and dated, return the original and two copies to the Architect together with: Your payment bonds per Section 00510, Form of Agreement. Provide an original and two copies to the Architect, fully executed and signed. Your evidence of insurance coverage per Section 00700, General Conditions. Provide the completed original and two copies to the Architect. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON 01996 Mahlum Nordfora McKinley Gordon SECTION 00515 PAGE 1 CONTRACT TRANSMITTAL END OF SECTION 00515 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 00520 PAGE 1 NOTICE TO PROCEED PART 1 NOTICE TO PROCEED Date: To: From: MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON 1 1 REFERENCES A. Section 00300, Bid Form, your proposal dated: B. Section 00510, Form of Agreement, the contract dated: 1 2 OWNER'S DIRECTION The Owner has authorized us to direct you to commence and complete the work as follows: A. DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK is: and shall be the effective date of: 1 The specified insurance coverage 2. The contract, unless dated earlier 3 The performance and payment bond 4 The start of the contract time of one hundred and seventy (170) calendar days B. DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION is and shall be the date of completion of all work except for deferred items, if any and shall be the effective start date of: 1 Liquidated damages at $500.00 per day (if project is not ready for owner's occupancy) 2. 30-day period to complete deferred items 3 Guarantees and warranties 4 Owner's occupancy 5 Owner's assumption of full responsibility for maintenance, heat, utilities, and insurance MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 3 RECEIPT Please signify your receipt and acceptance of this Notice to Proceed in Part 2 below MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON (by) (date) PART 2 CONTRACTOR'S ACCEPTANCE To: MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON This is to acknowledge receipt and acceptance of above Notice to Proceed. 1 The executed contract is attached, has been submitted. 2. Evidence of insurance coverage is attached, has been submitted. (Contractor) (by) 01996 Mahium Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 0 0 5 2 0 PAGE 2 NOTICE TO PROCEED END OF SECTION 00520 1 1 t t 1 e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL FART 1 GENERAL 1 1 INCORPORATION 1 2 DESCRIPTION A. Conditions of the Contract described in this section include: 1 General Conditions (24 pages) 2. Supplementary Conditions of the Contract (6 pages) 3 Special Conditions of the Contract (4 pages) SECTION 00700 PAGE 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. AIA Document A201 General Conditions of the Contract For Construction, 1987 Edition, is hereby made a part of the Contract as modified by the Supplementary General Conditions and is bound herein. INSTRUCTION SHEET FOR AIA DOCUMENT A701, INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS -1987 EDITION A. GENERAL INFORMATION 1 Purpose AIA Document A701 and the 1987 edition of A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, have complementary provisions and are designed to be used together in the Project Manual for competitively bid projects. 2. Related Documents This Document is complementary to, and has been prepared for use with, the 1987 edition of A201 It may also be used with the construction management and federal supplement versions of A201 (i.e. A201 /CM and A201 /SC). Specific information for a particular Project must be provided in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, in the Supplementary Provisions provided for the Project, or in a supplement to this document. Another set of Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A771, is published by the AIA for use on projects involving interiors work. 3. Use of Non AIA Forms If a combination of AIA documents and non -AIA documents is to be used, particular care must be taken to achieve consistency of language and intent. Certain owners require the use of owner contractor agreements and other contract forms which they prepare. Such forms should be carefully compared with the standard AIA forms for which they are being substituted before execution of an agreement If there are any significant omissions, additions or variances from the terms of the related standard AIA forms, both legal and insurance counsel should be consulted. 4. Letter Forms of Agreement Letter forms of agreement are generally discouraged by the AIA, as is the performance of a part or the whole of the Work on the basis of oral agreements or understandings. The standard AIA agreement forms have been developed through more than seventy -five years of experience and have been tested repeatedly in the courts. In addition, the standard forms have been carefully coordinated with other AIA documents, including the owner contractor agreements and the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 5. Use of Current Documents Prior to using an AIA document, users should consult the AIA, an AIA component chapter or a current AIA Documents Price List for the date of the current edition. 6. Reproduction AIA Document A701 is a copyrighted work and may not be reproduced or excerpted from in substantial part without the express written permission of the AIA. The A701 document is intended to be used as a consumable —that is, the original document pur chased by the user is intended to be consumed in the course of being used. There is no implied permission to reproduce this document, nor does membership in The American Institute of Architects confer any further rights to reproduce them. The A701 Document may not be reproduced for Project Manuals. Rather, the normal practice is to purchase a,quantity of the pre- printed forms and bind one in each of the Project Manuals. Modifications may be accomplished through the use of separate Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. Unlike many other AIA documents, A701 does not carry with it a limited license to reproduce. The MA will not permit the reproduction of this document or the use of substantial portions of language from it, except upon written request and after receipt of written permission from the AIA. B. CHANGES FROM THE PREVIOUS EDITION 1 Format Changes Article 9 Supplementary Instructions, has been deleted. Modifications to these Instructions to Bidders may now be made by a separate document supplementing these Instructions. 2 Changes in Content The following changes in content have been made in A701 on the recommendation of AIA members, contractors, legal and insur ance counsel, and users of the document. INSTRUCTION SHEET FOR AIA DOCUMENT A701 1987 EDITION AIA° THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCI IITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, NW V(ASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 1 2 Article 1 Bidding Requirements are now specifically defined and made a part of the Bidding Documents. Modifications have been dropped from the list of proposed Contract Documents because these occur only after the Contract is executed and are unknown at the time Bids are solicited. Article 2: A new Paragraph 2 1 2 has been added in which the Bidder acknowledges an understanding of the documents for other portions of the Project being bid concurrently Article 3 The Bidder is required to carefully compare the Bidding Documents with each other and with other Work being bid concurrently or presently under construction. Article 6. The Bidder is required to submit information as soon as practihle after notification of the award rather than seven days after notification. Article 7' The time for the delivery of the bonds is now no later than three days after the execution of the Contract rather than on the date of the Contract. The bonds are to be written on ALA Document A312 instead of A311 A new Subparagraph 7.2 3 has been added, requiring that the bonds be dated on or after the date of the Contract. C. USING THE A701 FORM 1 Modifications Users are encouraged to consult an attorney before using the form. On publicly funded projects, this document may require modifica- tion with the assistance of legal counsel, particularly with respect to local state or federal regulations governing the bidding process. Because it is designed for general usage. A701 does not provide all the information particular to specific projects required by pro- spective Bidders. Necessary additional information must be provided in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, in the Supplemen- tary Provisions provided for the Project or in a supplement to this document Consult AIA Document A521 Uniform Location of Subject Matter, to determine the proper locations for such information Users are cautioned not to retype this document. Besides being a violation of copyright, retyping eleminates one of the principal advantages of the standard documents. By merely reviewing the modifications to be made to a standard form document, parties familiar with that document can quickly understand the essence of the proposed relationship. Commercial exchanges are greatly expedited and simplified, good -faith dealing is encouraged, and otherwise latent clauses are exposed for scrutiny In this way con- tracting parties can more fairly measure their risks. Some provisions in AIA Document A701 are stated to be effective unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents. If other requirements are desired, these must be stated in the Bidding Documents. Modifications to the General Conditions, wherever contained, should be carefully compared with the requirements of A701 Because A701 is not designed or intended for use as a Contract Document, provisions of this document intended to remain effective after execution of the Contract for Construction should he reelected in the Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary or Other Conditions) INSTRUCTION SHEET FOR AIA DOCUMENT A701 1987 EDITION AIA° THE AMERICAN INsiTru OF ARCHrrECTS, NEW YORK AVENUE NW WASHINGTON, D.0 20006 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 00100 PAGE 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS ARTICLE 9! SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS THE FOLLOWING MODIFICATIONS APPLY TO THE PRECEDING ARTICLES: Article 3.3 This article is expanded and modified by Division 1 of the Specifications. Article 4.2 A Surety Company Bid Bond, AIA Document A310 or a State of Washington approved form, a certified check, cashier's check or postal money order payable to the order of the Commission of Clallam County Public Hospital District No. 2, Olympic Memorial Hospital, shall accompany each bid in an amount not less than five percent (5 of the aggregate of Basic Bid and all Additive Alternates. No bid shall be considered unless accompanied by such bid proposal security Article 4 41 No bidder may withdraw his bid after the hour set for the opening thereof, unless the award of the Contract is delayed for a period exceeding thirty (30) days. Article 5 1 1 Bid opening will be public. Article 6.3 This article is expanded and modified by the Supplementary Conditions and the General Requirements. Article 7 1 Delete Articles 7 1 7 1.1 7 1.2 and 7 1.3 and substitute the following: 'The successful Contractor shall at the time of delivery of the executed Contract, furnish a duly executed bond upon a form, furnished or approved by the Owner, signed by two or more approved sureties or an approved surety company in the full amount of the contract price conditioned upon the faithful performance of the contract by the Contractor within the time prescribed therein. Such bond shall provide that the surety or sureties will agree to protect and indemnify the Owner against any direct or indirect loss that shall be suffered or claimed. a. The failure of the Contractor or any of the Contractor's employees, subcontractors or agents to faithfully perform the said contract, or b. The failure of the Contractor to pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, agents, materialmen, and all persons who shall supply such Contractor subcontractor or agents with provisions or supplies for carrying on such work. At any time and as often as may be deemed necessary the Owner may require any or all sureties or any surety company to appear and qualify themselves upon the bond. Whenever such surety or sureties are deemed by the Owner to have become insufficient, the Owner may demand in writing that the Contractor furnish additional surety in an amount not exceeding that originally required as may be deemed necessary considering the work remaining to be done. No further payments will be made on the contract until such additional surety as required is furnished. Each form of bond must be approved in writing by the Owner The surety or sureties must be authorized to do business in the State of Washington and be satisfactory to the Owner Supplementary Instructions are as follows: a. Liquidated Damages: Under Article 3 of the Owner- Contractor Agreement there shall be added the following statement: Owner and Contractor agree that should the project not be substantially completed within the time specified in the contract, that the damages sustained by the Owner or by the Contractor due to such delay will be assessed at five hundred doll rsjS500) per day which is established as the liquidated damages which either the Contractor shall pay to the Owner, or the Owner shall pay to the Contractor as the case may be, for each day's delay in completing the project MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 00100 PAGE 2 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS beyond the time specified in this contract caused by the fault, error, act, change, or neglect of the other its agents, employees or those acting for it. Paragraph 8.3.4 of the General Conditions is deleted. Refer to Paragraph 8.1.3 of the General Conditions for defmitions of completion as referenced in this paragraph. The above amount will be used also for establishing the amount for "extended overhead' due to causes beyond the owner's control e.g. weather, unforeseen conditions, etc. b Retainage: Under Article 5 of the Owner Contractor Agreement the following statement shall be added: Progress payments noted above will be 95% of application. All monies retained will be deposited in an escrow account (in a bank or trust company chosen by Contractor and approved by Owner) and the interest earned in the account shall accrue to the benefit of the contractor until completion of contract. c. Applicable state laws concerning prevailing wages and other conditions of employment are called to the attention of the bidders for their compliance. The bidder shall include any filing fees required in the bid. d. Mandatory Site Inspection: In addition to examination of the bid documents, each general contractor must examine the site; at the date and time specified below and so indicate on the bid form; and conduct such other examinations and investigations as are necessary to become fully informed of all existing or expected conditions and other matters that might in any way affect the cost or performance of the work. It is further recommended that each plumbing contractor HVAC contractor and electrical contractor attend the site inspection and likewise familiarize themselves with the existing conditions and access restrictions. The mandatory site inspection will be at 10:00 am on Wednesday November 13 1996. END OF SECTION 00100 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 INSTRUCTION SHEET FOR AIA DOCUMENT A201, GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION -1987 Edition A. GENERAL INFORMATION 1 Purpose AIA Document A201 a general conditions forms, is intended to be used as one of the Contract Documents forming the Con- struction Contract. In addition, it is frequently adopted by reference into a variety of other agreements, including the Owner Architect agreements and the Contractor Subcontractor agreements, in order to establish a common basis for the primary and secondary relationships on the typical construction project. 2. Related Documents The current edition of A201 is incorporated by specific reference into two AIA Owner Contractor agreements (A101 and A111) and several AIA Owner- Architect agreements (B141, B151, B161 and B181) It may also be adopted by indirect reference when the prime Agreement between the Owner and Contractor is adopted into a Subcontract, such as AIA Document A401 or when the prime Agreement between the Owner and Architect is adopted into Architect Consultant agreements such as AIA Documents C141, C142 and C161 Such incorporation by reference is a valid legal drafting method, and documents so incorporated are generally interpreted as part of the respective contract. The Contract Documents, including A201, record the Contract for Construction between the Owner and Contractor. The other Contract Documents include: Owner Contractor Agreement Form (i.e. A101 or A111) Supplementary and Other Conditions Drawings Specifications Modifications Also included in the Contract Documents are addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract and other documents listed in the Agreement. The A201 document is considered the keystone document coordinating the many parties involved in the construction process. As mentioned above and diagramed below, it is a vital document used to allocate the proper legal respon- sibilities of the parties. 3. Arbitration General Conditions Owner Contractor Contract Owner Architect Contract for Construction for Design and Administration Contractor- Subcontractor Contract Architect Consultant Contract for a Portion of the Work for a Portion of the Services The AIA publishes other General Conditions that parallel A201 for the construction management family of documents (AIA Document A201 /CM) and the interiors family of documents (AIA Document A271). For certain federal projects, the AIA publishes Federal Supplementary Conditions (AIA Document A201 /SC) for use with A201 The A201 document incorporates ARBITRATION according to the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association. Arbitration is BINDING AND MANDATORY in most states and under the federal Arbitration Act. In a minority of states, arbitration provisions related to future disputes are not enforceable, but arbitration is enforceable if agreed to after the dispute arises. A few states require that the contracting parties be especially notified that the written contract con- tains an arbitration provision by a warning on the face of the document, specific placement of the arbitration provision within the document, or specific discussions among the parties prior to signing the document. Arbitration provisions have been included in most AIA contract forms since 1888 in order to encourage alternative dispute resolution procedures and to provide users of AIA documents with legally enforceable arbitration provisions when the parties choose to adopt arbitration into their contract. Individuals may however, choose to delete the arbitration provisions based upon their business decisions with the advice of counsel To obtain a copy of the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules, write to the American Arbitration Association, 140 West 51st St New York, NY 10020 INSTRUCTION SHEET FOR AIA DOCUMENT A201 1987 EDITION AIA® THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, NW WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 1 4. Use of Non -AIA Forms If a combination of AIA documents and non -AIA documents is to be used, particular care must be taken to achieve consistency of language and intent. Certain owners require the use of owner contractor agreements with general conditions and other contract forms which they prepare. Such forms should be carefully compared with the standard AIA forms for which they are being substituted before execution of an agreement. If there are any significant omissions, additions or variances from the terms of the related standard AIA forms, both legal and insurance counsel should be consulted. 5. Use of Current Documents Prior to using any AIA document, the user should consult the AIA, an AIA component chapter or a current AIA Documents Price List to determine the current edition of each document. 6. Reproduction AIA Document A201 is a copyrighted work and may not be reproduced or excerpted from in substantial part without the express written permission of the AIA. The A201 document is intended to be used as a consumable —that is, the original docu- ment purchased by the user is intended to be consumed in the course of being used. There is no implied permission to reproduce this document, nor does membership in The American Institute of Architects confer any further rights to reproduce them. A201 may not be reproduced for Project Manuals. Rather, if a user wishes to include it in a Project Manual, the normal practice is to purchase a quantity of the pre printed forms and bind one in each of the Project Manuals. Modifications may be accom- plished through the use of separate Supplementary Conditions, such as those derived from AIA Document A511 Unlike the instruction sheets accompanying some AIA documents, this A201 Instruction Sheet does not include a license granting permission to reproduce the A201 document. AIA will not permit the reproduction of this document or the use of substantial portions of language from it, except upon written request and receipt of written permission from the AIA. B. CHANGES FROM THE PREVIOUS EDITION 2 1 Format Changes The provisions dealing with the rights and responsibilities of the Architect have been moved from Article 2 to Article 4 retitled Administration of the Contract, in order to focus on the Owner and the Contractor as the parties to the Construction Con- tract. Miscellaneous Provisions, formerly Article 7 is now Article 13 2. Changes in Content The 1987 edition of A201 revises the 1976 edition to reflect changes in construction industry practices and the law Comments and assistance in this revision were received from numerous individuals and organizations, including those representing owners, architects, engineers, specifiers, general contractors, subcontractors, sureties, attorneys and arbitrators. Substantial changes have been made to the A201 document. The principal changes are as follows. Article 3 Contractor Warranty The warranty provision now explicitly excludes damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, and normal wear and tear under normal usage. Article 4. Administration of the Contract Review of Shop Drawings The provision governing architects review of shop drawings has been expanded, and now requires that the architect be given sufficient time in his or her professional judgment to conduct an adequate review The general limitation on the purpose of the Architect's review to checking for conformance with the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents has been retained. In addition, language has been added specifically excluding purposes of checking details that are the responsibility of the Contractor. Claims and Disputes Provisions governing the handling of Claims and disputes have been expanded and brought together in a single paragraph to spell out procedures more clearly and sequentially diagrams of the Change Order and Claims pro- cesses may be found on the last page of this Instruction Sheet. In the interest of expediting arbitration proceedings, a notice of demand for arbitration is now required to include all causes of action then known to the party filing the demand. Limita- tions on consolidation or joinder in arbitration of the Architect or the Architect's employees or consultants have been retained. Delays Due to Adverse Weather Conditions Claims for delay due to adverse weather conditions must now be substan- tiated by data showing that such conditions were out of the ordinary and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. Article 5 Subcontractors Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts new provision assigns Subcontracts to the Owner in the event that the Con- tract is terminated, and also provides for adjustment of the Subcontractors compensation if termination has resulted in suspension of the Work for more than 30 days. Both Owner and Subcontractors are thus given a measure of protection from the effects of termination INSTRUCTION SHEET FOR AIA DOCUMENT A201 1987 EDITION AIA® THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 I THE A M E R I C A N I N S T I T U T E O F A R C H I T E C T S 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 8 TIME 2 OWNER 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 3 CONTRACTOR 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 111 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK CONTRACT 1 1 1 This document has been approved and endorsed by the Associated General Contractors of America. Copyright 1911 1915 1918, 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961, 1963 1966, 1967 1970, 1976, ©1987 by The American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, N W Washington, D C. 20006. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecutions. AIA A1A Document A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES, CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS MODIFICATION 1987 EDITION TABLE OF ARTICLES CAUTION You should use an original AIA document which has this caution printed in red An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION ALA ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201.1987 1 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work j 9.6.6, 9 9.3 12.3 Acceptance of Work 9 6.6, 9.8.2 9 9.3 9 10 1 9 10.3 Access to Work 3.16, 6.2 1 12 1 Accident Prevention 4.2.3 10 Acts and Omissions 3.2 1 3.2.2 3.3.2 3 12.8, 3 18, 4.2.3 4.3.2, 4.39 8.3 1 101 4, 10.2 5 134.2 137 141 Addenda 1 1 1 3 11 Additional Cost, Claims for 4.3 6, 4 3 7 4 3 9 6 1 1 10.3 Additional Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, 9.8.2 12.2 1 13 5 Additional Time, Claims for 4.3 6, 4 3.8, 4.3 9 8.3.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 3.3.3 4, 9 4 9 5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 1 1 1 Aesthetic Effect 4.2 13' 4.5 1 Allowances 3.8 All -risk Insurance 11.3 1 1 Applications for Payment 4.2 5 7.3 7 9.2 9.3, 9 4, 9 5 1 9.6.3 9.8.3 9101 910.3 9104 1113 14.24 Approvals 2 4, 3.3.3 3 5 3 10.2 3 12 4 through 3 12.8, 3 18.3 4.27 9.3.2, 1131 4 134.2 135 4 1 4,4.3.2 4.3 4 4 4 4, 4.5, 8.3 1 10 1.2 11.3 9 11.3 10 41 411 2 4, 3 12.6, 4.2, 4.3.2 4.3.6, 7 1.2 7.2 1 7.3 6, 7 4, 9.2 9.3 1 9.8.3 9 10 1 9 10.3 12 1 12.2 1 13 5 1 13 5.2 14.2.2 14.2 4 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 3 3 3 3 12.8 3 12 11 4 1.2 4.2 1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2 6, 4.2 7 4.2 10 4.2 12, 4.2 13 4.3.2 5.2 1 7 4, 9 4.2 9 6.4, 9 6 6 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses 2 4, 9.8.2 11 31 1 12.21 12.24, 135.2 1353 14.24 Architect's Administration of the Contract 4.2, 4.3 6, 4.3 7 4.4, 9 4, 9 5 Architect s Approvals 2 4 3 5 1 3 10.2 3 12 6, 3 12.8, 3 18.3 4.2 7 Architect s Authority to Reject Work 3 5 1 4.2 6 12 1.2 12.2 1 Architect s Copyright 1 3 Architect's Decisions 4.2 6 4.2 7 4.2 11 4.2 12, 4.2 13 4 3.2 4 3 6, 4 4 1 4 4 4, 4 5 6.3 7.3 6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3 8.3 1 9.2 94 951 9.8.2 991 101.2 135.2 14.2.2 14.24 Architects Inspections 4.2.2 4.2 9 4.3 6, 9 4.2 9.8.2 99.2 9 10 1 135 Architect's Instructions 4.2 6, 4.2 7 4.2.8, 4.3 7 7 4 1 12 1 13 5.2 Architect s Interpretations 4.2 11 4.2 12 4.3 7 Architects On -Site Observations 4.2.2 4.2 5 4.3.6 9 4.2 95 9 10 1 135 Architect's Project Representative 4.2 10 Architect s Relationship with Contractor 1 1.2 3.2 1 3.2.2 33.3 351 373 311 312.8,31211 316 318,4.2.3 4.24 4.26, 4.212, 5.2 6.2.2 734, 9.8.2 11.37 121 135 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors 1 1.2 4.2.3 4.2 4 4.2.6, 9 6.3 9 6.4, 11.3 7 94.2 951 9 10 1 4.2.2 4.2 5 4.2 9 4.3 6, 9 4.2 9 5 1 9.8.2 9 9.2 9 10 1 13 5 101 3 18.1 9 10.2 10 1 4 6.1 1 Arbitration Architect Architect, Definition of Architect, Extent of Authority 4 4, 5.2 6.3 9 4 9 5 9 6.3 9.8.2 Architect's Representations Architect s Site Visits Asbestos Attorneys Fees Award of Separate Contracts Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work Basic Definitions Bidding Requirements Boiler and Machinery Insurance Bonds, Lien Bonds, Performance and Payment 2 A201 1987 5.2 11 111 117 5.21 1141 11.3.2 9 10.2 73.6.4,9103 1139 .114 INDEX Building Permit 3 7 1 Capitalization 1.4 Certificate of Substantial Completion 9.8.2 Certificates for Payment 4.2 5 4.2 9 9.3.3 9.4, 9 5 9 6.1 966 97 1 9.8.3 910 1 9 10 3 13 7 14.1 1 3 14.2 4 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval 3 12 11 13 5 4 Certificates of Insurance 9.3.2 9 10.2 11 1.3 Change Orders 1 1 1 2 4 1 3.8.2 4 3 11 4.2.8, 4.3.3 5.2.3 7 1 7.2, 7.3.2 8.3 1 9.3 1 1 9 10 3 11.3 1.2 11:3 4, 11.3 9 12 1.2 Change Orders, Definition of 7.2 1 Changes 7 1 CHANGES IN THE WORK 3 11 4.2.8, 7 8.3 1 9.3 1 1 10 1.3 Claim, Definition of 4.3.1 Claims and Disputes 4.3, 4.4 4 5 6.2 5 8.3.2, 9.3 1.2 9.3.3 9 10 4, 10 1 4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 4.5.6 Claims for Additional Cost 4.3 6, 4.3.7 4.3 9 6.1 1 10.3 Claims for Additional Time 4.3 6, 4.3.8, 4.3 9 8.3.2 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions 4.3.6 Claims for Damages 3 18, 4.3 9 6.1 1 6.2 5 8 3.2 9 5 1.2 10 1 4 Claims Subject to Arbitration 4.3.2 4.4 4 4 5 1 Cleaning Up 3.15, 6.3 Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period 13.7 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to 2 1.2 2.2 1 3.2 1 3.2.2 371 3 10 1 3 12 6, 437 5.2 1 6.2.2 8 1.2 8.2.2 9.2 11 1 -.3 11 3.6, 11 4 1 Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration 3 9 1 4.2 4 5.2 1 Completion, Conditions Relating to 3 11 3 15 4.2.2 4.2 9 43.2 94.2,9.8,991 910 11.35 12.2.2 1371 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 9 Completion, Substantial 4.2 9 4 3 5.2 8 1 1 8.1.3 8.2.3 9.8, 9 9 1 12.2.2 13 7 Compliance with Laws 1 3 3 6, 3 7 3 13 4.1 1 10.2.2, 11 1 11.3 13 1 13 5 1 13 5.2 13.6, 14 1 1 14.2 1.3 Concealed or Unknown Conditions 4.3.6 Conditions of the Contract 1 1 1 1 1 7 6.1 1 Consent, Written 1.3 1 3 12.8, 3 14.2 4.1.2, 434,455 9.3.2 9.8.2 991 910.2 910.3101.2 1013 1131 11.314, 11.311 13.2 134.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1 1 4, 6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of 7.3 1 Construction Change Directives 1 1 1 4.2.8, 7 1 7.3, 9 3 1 1 Construction Schedules, Contractor's 3 10 6 1.3 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4 Continuing Contract Performance 4.3.4 Contract, Definition of 1 1.2 CONTRACT TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 4.3 7 5 4 1 1 14 Contract Administration 3.3 3 4 9 4, 9 5 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to 3 7 1 310 5.2 9.2 1113 11.36,1141 Contract Documents, The 1 1 1.2 7 Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of 1.3 2.2 5 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of 1 1 1 Contract Performance During Arbitration 4.3 4 4 5.3 Contract Sum 3.8 4.3 6, 4.3 7 4.4 4, 5.2.3 6.1.3 7.2 7.3 9.1 97 11.31 12.24 123 14.24 Contract Sum, Definition of 9.1 Contract Time 4 3 6 4.3.8, 4 4 4 7.2 1.3 7.3 8.2 1 8.3 1 9 7 12 1 1 Contract Time, Definition of 8.1 1 AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION ALA ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S..copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CONTRACTOR Contractor Definition of Contractor's Bid Contractor's Construction Schedules 3 3:1 6 1.2 111 3.10, 6.1.3 Contractor s Employees 3 3.2, 3 4.2 3.8 1 3 9 3.18, 4.2 3 4:2'6, 8 1.2 10.2 10 3 11 1 1 14.2 1 1 Contractor's Liability Insurance 11 1 Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner's Forces 2.2 6, 3 12 5 3 14.2, 4.2 4 6, 12.2 5 Contractors Relationship with Subcontractors 1.2 4, 3 3.2 3 18 1 318.2 5.2, 5.3 54,96.2 11.37 11.3.8, 14.2 1.2 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 1 1.2 3.2 1 '3.2.2 3.3.3 351 '373 311 312.8316,3.18,4.23 4.24,.4.2.6, 4.212 5.2 6.2.2 734,9.8.2 1.137 121 135 Contractor's Representations 1.2.2 3 5 1 3 12 7 6.2.2 8.2 1 .9 3 3 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3 3.2 3 18, 4.2 3 10 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents 1.2.2, 3.2 3 7 3' Contractor's Right to Stop the Work 9 7 Contractor s Right to Terminate the Contract 14 1 Contractor's Submittals 3 10 3 11 3 12, 4.2 7 5.2 1 5.2 3 7 3.6 9.2 9.3 1 9.8.2 9 9 1 9 10.2 9103 10 1.2 114.2 114.3 Contractor's Superintendent 3 9 10.2 6 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2 4, 3 3 3 4 4.2 3 8.2.2 8.2.3 10 Contractual Liability Insurance 11 1 17 11.2 1. Coordination and Correlation 1.2.2 1.2 4 3 3 1 310 3 12 7 613 6.21 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1 3 2.2 5 3 11 Correction of Work 2 3 2 4, 4.2 1 9.8.2 9 9 1 12 1.2 12.2 13 7 1.3 Cost, Definition of 7.3.6, 14.3 5 Costs 2 4, 3.2 1 3 7 4, 3.8.2 3 15.2 4 3 6, 4.3 7 4.3.8 1 5.2 3 6.1 1 6.2 3 6.3 7.3.3.3 7 3 6 7 3 7 9 7 9.8:2 9 10.2 11 3 1.2 11.3 1.3 1134,11.39 121 12.21 12.24,12.25 135 14 Cutting and Patching 3.14 6:2 6 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3 14.2 6.2 4, 9 5 1 5 10.2 1.2, 10.25 10.3 111 11.3 12.2.5 Damage to the Work 3 14.2, 9 9 1 10.2 1.2 10.2 5 10 3 11 3 Damages, Claims for 3 18, 4.3 9 6.1 1 6.2 5 8 3.2 9 5 1.2 10 1 4 Damages for Delay 6.1 I' 8.3 3' .9 5 1.6, 9 7 Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of 8.1 3 Day Definition of 8 1 4 Decisions of the Architect 4.2 6, 4.2 7 4.2 11 4.2 12, 4.2 13 4 3.2, 4 3 6, 4 4.1 4.4 4, 4 5 6.3 7.3 6, 7 3.8, 8 1 3 8.3 1 9.2 94 951 9.8.2 991 101.2 135.2 14.2.2 14.24 Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.5, 9 7 14 1 1.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance Rejection and Correction of 2 3 2 4, 3 5 1 4.2 1 4.2.6, 4.3 5 9 5.2 9.8.2 9 9 1 10.2 5 12' 13 7 1 3 Defective Work, Definition of 3 5 1 Definitions 1 1 2 1 1 3 1 3 5 1 3 12 1 3 12.2 3 12 3 4,1 1 4 3 1 5 1 6.1.2, 7.2 1 7 3 1 7.3 6, 8 1 9 1 9.8.1 Delays and Extensions of Time 4.3 1 4.3.8 1 4.3.8.2, 6 1 1 6.2 3 7.2' 1 7 3 1 7 3 4; 7.3 5 7.3.8, 739 8 1 1 8.3, 1031 141 14 Disputes 4 1 4, 4.3 4 4 4 5 6.2 5 6.3 7 3.8, 9 3 1.2 Documents and Samples at the'Site 3 11 Drawings, Definition of 1 1 5 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 1 1 1 .1 3 2.2 5 3 11 5.3 Duty to Review Contract Documents and Field Conditions 3.2 Effective Date of Insurance 8.2.2 11 1.2 Emergencies 4.3 7 10.3 Employees, Contractor' 3.3.2, 3 4.2 3.8.1 3 9 3 18.1 3 18.2 4.2 3 4.2.6, 8 1.2 '10.2 10.3 1,1 1 1 14.2 1 1 Equipment, Labor Materials and 1 1 3 1 1 6, 3 4 3 5 1 3.8.2 312.3 3 12 7 3 12 11 313 3 15 1 4.27 6.2 1 7 3 6, 9.3.2 9.3.3 11.3 12.2 4, 14 Execution and Progress of the Work 1 1 3 1.2.3 3.2 3 4 1 3 5 1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.3 4 4.3.8 62:2, 7 1.3 7.39 8.2,83 95 991 10.2, 14.2 14.3 Execution, Correlation.and Intent.of the Contract Documents 1.2, 3 7 1 Extensions of Time 4.3 1 4 3.8, 7.2 1.3 8.3 10 3 I Failure of Payment by Contractor 9 5 1 3 14.2 1.2 Failure of Payment by Owner 4 3 7 9 7 14 1'.3 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment 4.2 1 4.2 9 4.3.2 4.35 9.10, 11 1.2 11 1 3 11 35 12.31 137 Financial Arrangements, Owner's 2.2 1 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance 11 3 GENERAL PROVISIONS Governing Law Guarantees (See Warranty and Warranties) Hazardous Materials Identification Contract Documents 10 1. 10.2 4 1.2 1 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 5.2 1 Indemnification 3 17 3.18, 9 10.2 10 1 4, 11 3 1.2 11 3 7 Information and Services Required of the Owner 2 1.2 2.2, 4 3 4, 6 1.3 6.1 4, 6.2 6, 9 3.2 9.6 1 9.6.4 9 8 3 9 9.2 9 10 3 1014, 11.2 113 1351 135.2 Injury or Damage to Person or Property 4.3.9 Inspections 3 3 3 .3 3 4, 3 7 1 4.2.2 4.2 6, 4.2 9 4.3 6 9 4.2 9.8.2 9 9.2 9 10 1 13 5 Instructions to Bidders 1 1 1 Instructions to the Contractor 3.8 1 4.2.8, 5.2 1 7 12 1 13 5.2 Insurance 439 6.1 1 7.364,93.2,9.8.2,991 910.2 11 Insurance, Boiler and Machinery 11.3.2 Insurance, Contractor's Liability 11 1 Insurance, Effective Date of 8.2.2 11 1.2 Insurance Loss of Use 11 3.3 Insurance, Owner's Liability 11.2 Insurance, Property 10.2 5 11.3 Insurance, Stored Materials 9 3.2 11,3 1 4 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy 9 9 1 11.3 11 Insurance Companies, Settlement with 11.3 10 Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2 3 3 12 4, 4.2 6, 4.2 7 4.2 12 4.2 13 7 4 Interest 13.6 Interpretation 1.2 5 1 4, 1.5, 4 1 1 4 3 1 5 1 6 1.2 8 1 4 Interpretations, Written 4.2 11 4.2 12, 4.3 7 Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required 4 5 6 Judgment on Final Award 4 5 1 4 5 4 1 4.5.7 Labor and Materials, Equipment 1 13 1 1 6 3.4 3 5 1 3 8:2, 312.2 3 12 3 3 12 7 3 12 11 3 13 3 15 1 4.2 7 6.2 1 7.3 6, 9.3.2 9 3 3 12.2 4(14 Labor Disputes 8 3 1 Laws and Regulations 1.3 3.6, 3 7 3 13 4 1 1 4 5 5 4 5 7 991 10.2.2 11 1 11 3 131 134, 1351 135.2 13.6 Liens 2 1.2 4.3.2 .4.3 5 1 8.2.2, 9 3.3 9 10.2 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder 4.5.5 Limitations, Statutes of 4 5 4.2 12.2 6 13 7 Limitations of Authority 3 3 1 4 1.2 4.2 1 4.2 3 4.2 7 4.2 10 5.2.2 5.2 4, 7 4, 11 3 10 AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 1987 3 1 13:1 Limitations of Liability 2 3 3.2 1 3 5 1 3'.3 3 12.8, 3 12 11 317 318,4.2.6 4.27 4.212 6.2.2 94.2,96.4,9104 101'4, 10.25 11 1.2, 11.21 11.37 134.2 135.2 Limitations of Time, General 2.2 1 2.2 4, 3.2 1 3 7 3 3.8.2,310 3 12 5 3 15 1 4.21 4.27 4.211 4.3.2 4.3 3 4.3 4,4.3.6, 4 3 9 4.5 4.2 5.2 1 5.2:3 6.2 4, 7 3 4 7 4, 8.2 9 5 9 6.2 9.8 99 9 10 11 1.3 11.3 1 11 3.2, 11.3 5 11.3.6, 12.2 1 12.2.2 13 5 13 7 Limitations of Time, Specific' 2 1.2 2.2 1 2 4, 3 10,3 11 3 15 1 4.2 1 4.2 11 4.3 4 4, 4 5 5.3 5 4, 73 5 7.3 9 8.2, 9.2 9.3 1.'9.3.3 9 4 1 9.6.1 9 7 9.8.2, 9 10.2 11 1.3 11 3.6, 11 3 10 11.3 11 12.2.2 12.24, 12.26, 137 14 Loss of Use Insurance 11.3.3. Material Suppliers 1.3 1 3 12 1 4.2 4, 4.2.6, 5.2 1 9.3 1 9.3 1.2, 9.3.3 9 4.2 9.6.5 9 10 4 Material's, Hazardous 10 1 10.2 4 Materials, Labor Equipment and 1 1 3 1 1 6, 3 4, 3 5 1 3 8.2, 312.2 312.3 3 12 7 3 12 11 3'13 3 15 1 4.27 6.2 1' 736 9.3.2, 9.3.3 12.2 4, 14 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction 3 3 1 4.2.3 4.2 7 9 4.2 Minor Changes in the Work 1 1 1 4.2.8, 4 3 7 7 1 7 4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13 Modifications, Definition of 1 1 1 Modifications to the Contract 1 1 1 1 1.2 3 7.3 3 11 41.2 4.21 5.23 7 97 Mutual Responsibility 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2.3 1 435 95.2 9.8.2 12 13713 Notice 23 24,3.21 3.2.2 37.3 374,39 3 12 8, 3 129 3 17 43 444, 45 5.21 5.3 5411 8.2.2 941 951 961 97 910 101.2 10.2.6, 11 1 3 11 3 12.2.2 12.24 13 3 '13 5 1 13'5.2 14 Notice, Written 2 444,45 5.21 5.3 5411 101.2 10.26, 1113 113 1 Notice of Testing and Inspections Notice to Proceed Notices, Permits, Fees and Observations,.Architect s On -Site Observations, Contractor's Occupancy On -Site Inspections by the Architect On -Site Observations by the Architect Orders, Written 2 3 Owner s Right to Carry Out the Work Owner's Right to Clean Up 4 A201 1987 .3 24,39 312.8,3129 4.3 8.2.2 94.1 951 97 910 2.2.2 12.2 4 13.3, 13 5.2 14 1351 135.2 8.2.2 2.2.3 3.7 313 7.3.6 4, 10.2.2 4.2.2 4.2 5 436,94.2 951 9 10 1 135 :1.2:2 3.2.2 9669.8 991.1311 4.2.2 4.2 9 4.3 6, 94:2 98.2 99:2 9 10 1 4.2.2 4.2 5 4.3 6 94.2 951 9 10 1 135 39 4.37 7 8.2.2 1139 121 12.2, 13 5.2, 1431 OWNER 2 Owner Definition of 2.1 Owner Information and Services Required of the 2 1.2 2.2, 434,6,9' 1014 11.2 .113 1351 14.115 1413 Owner s Authority 3.8.1 4 1.3 4.2 9 5.2 1 5.2 4, 5 4 1 7.3 1 8.2.2 9.3 1 9.3.2 11 4.1 12.24 13 5.2 14.2 143 1 Owner's Financial Capability 2.2 1 14 1 1 5 Owner's Liability Insurance Owner s Loss of Use insurance Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 11.2 11.3.3 1 1.2 5.2 1 5 4 1 9 6.4 2 4, 12.2 4 14.2.2.2 6.3 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts 6.1" Owner's Right to Stop the Work 2.3, 4 3 7 Owner s Right to Suspend the Work 14'.3 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 14.2 Ownership and Use of Architect's Drawings, Specifications and Other Documents 1 1 1 1.3, 2.2 5 5.3 Partial Occupancy or Use 9,6.6;9.9, 11.3 11 Patching, Cutting.and 3.14, 6.2.6 Patents, Royalties and 3:17 Payment, Applications for 4.2 5 9.2 9.3, 3 4 4 951 9.8:3 9 10 1 9 10 3 9 10 4, 14.24 Payment, Certificates.for 4.2 5 4.2 9 '9.3.3 9.4, 9 5 96.1 9.6.6,971 9.83 9 10 1 910.3 137 141 1.3 14.24 Payment, Failure of 4.3 7 9 5 1 3 9:7 9 10.2 14 1 1.3 14.2 1.2 Payment, Final 4.2 1 4.2 9 4.3.2, 4 5 9 10 1'1 1.2, 11 1 3 11.3 5 12.3 1 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and 7 9103 `11.34 Payments, Progress 4 3 4, 9 3 9.6, 9.8.3 910.3 136, 14.23 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9, 14 Payments to Subcontractors 5 4.2 9 5 1 3 9 6.2 9 6.3 9 6.4, 11.3 8, 14.2 1.2 .PCB 10 1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 7.3 6.4 9 10 3 11.3 9 11 4 Permits, fees and Notices 2.2.3 3.7 3 13 7 3 6 4, 10.2.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl 10 1 Product Data, Definition of 3 12.2 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 3 11 3.12, 4.2 7 Progress and Completion 4.2.2 4.3.4 8.2 Progress Payments 4.3 9 3 9.6, 9.8:3 9 10 3 136, 14.2.3 Project, Definition of the 1 1.4 Project Manual, Definition of the 1 1 7 Project Manuals 2.2 5 Project,Representatives 4.2 10 Property Insurance 10.2 5 1.1.3 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10 Regulations and Laws 1 3 3.6 3 7 3 13 4.1 1 4.5 5 4.57 10.2.2 11 1 11.3 131 134, 1351 135.2 136, 14 Rejection of Work 3 5 1 4.2 12.2 Releases of Waivers and Liens 9 10.2 Representations' 1.2.2 3 5 1 3 12 7 6.2.2 8.2 1 9 3 3 9 4.2 9 5 1 9.8.2 9 10 1 Representatives 2 1 1. 3 1 1 3 9 411 .4.21 4.210 511 51.2 1321 Resolution of Claims and Disputes 4.4 4 5 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3 3.2 4.2 3 6:1 3 6.2 10 Retainage 9 3 1 9 6.2 9.8 3 9 9 1 9 10.2 9 10 3 Review of Contract Documents and Fie Conditions by Contractor 1.2.2 .3.2, 3 7 3 3'12 Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Architect 3 10 1 3 1.0.2 3 11 3 12 4.2 7 4.2 9 5.2 1 5.2.3 9.2 9'8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3 '12 5 Rights and Remedies 1 1.2 2 3 2 4 3 5 .1 3 15.2, 4.2 6, 4.3.6, 4 5 5 3 6 1 6.3 7 3 1 8.3 1 9 5 1 9 7 10.2 5 10 3 12.2.2 12.2 4, 13.4 14 Royalties and Patents 3.17 AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA' ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. Rules and Notices for Arbitration Safety of Persons and Property Safety Precautions and Programs Samples, Definition of Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples at the Site, Documents and Schedule of Values Schedules, Construction Separate Contracts and Contractors 4.5.2 10.2 4.2 3 4.2 7 10.1 '3 12.3 3.11 3.12, 4.2 7 3.11 9.2, 9 3 1 3 10 1 1 4 3 14.2 4.2 4, 455 6, 11.37 12 1.2, 12.25 Shop Drawings, Definition of 3 12 1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 3 11 3.12, 4.2 7 Site, Use of 3.13, 6 1 1 6.2 1 Site Inspections 1.2.2 3.3 4, 4.2.2 4.2 9 4.3.6, 9.8.2, 9 10 1 13 5 Site Visits, Architect s 4.2.2 4.2 5 4.2 9 4.3 6, 94.2 95 1 9.8.2 99.2 .9 10 1 13 5 Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6 12.2 1 13 5 Specifications, Definition of the 1 1.6 Specifications, The 1 1 1 1 1.6, 1 1 7 1.2 4, 1.3 3 11 Statutes of Limitations 4.5 4.2 12.2.6, 13 7 Stopping the Work 2 3 4 3'7 9 7 10 1.2 10 3 14 1 Stored Materials 6.2 1 9.3.2, 10.2 4.2 11 3 1 4, 12.2 4 Subcontractor Definition of 5 1 1 SUBCONTRACTORS 5 Subcontractors, Work by 1.2 4 3.3.2, 3 12 1 4.2.3 5.3 5 4 Subcontractual Relations 5.3, 5 4, 9.3 1.2 9 6.2 9.6.3 964, 10.21 11.37 113.8, 141 1 14.2 1.2 143.2 Submittals 1 3 3.2.3 3 10 3 11 3 12 4:2 7 5.2 1 5.2 3 7 3 6, 9.2 9 3 1 9.8.2 9 9 1 9 10.2 9 10.3 10 L2, 11 1 3 Subrogation Waivers of 6.1. 1 11 3 5 11.3.7 Substantial Completion 4.2 9 4.3 5.2 8'1 1 8 1.3 8.2 3 9.8, 9 9 1 12.2 1 12.2.2 13 7 Substantial Completion, Definition of 9 8.1 Substitution of Subcontractors 5.2 3 5.2 4 Substitution of the Architect 4.1.3 Substitutions of Materials 3 5 1 Sub subcontractor Definition of 5 1.2 Subsurface Conditions .4 3 6 Successors and Assigns 13 :2 Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Supervision and Construction Procedures .1.2 4, 3.3, 3 4, 4.2.3 4 3 4, 6 1 3 6.2 4 7 1 3 7 3 4, 8.2 8.3 1 10 12, 14 Surety 4 4 1 4 4 4,•5 4 1.2 9 10.2 9 10 3 14.2.2 Surety Consent of 9 9 1 9 10.2 9 10 3 Surveys 2.2.2,3 18 3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.3 Suspension of the Work 4.3 7 5 4.2, 14 1 1 4, 14 3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract 4.3 7 5 4.1 1 14 Taxes 3.6, 7 3 6.4 Termination by the Contractor 14.1 Termination by the Owner for Cause 5 4 1 1 14.2 Termination of the Architect 4.1 3 Termination of the Contractor 14.2.2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14 Tests and Inspections 3 3 3 4.2 6, 4.2 9 9 4.2 12.2 1 13.5 TIME 8 Time, Delays and Extensions of 4 3.8, 7.2 1 8.3 Time Limits, Specific 2 1.2 2.2 1 2 4, 3 10 3 11 3 15 1 4.2 1 4.2 11 4.3 4 4, 4 5 5 3 5 4, 7.3 5 7 3 9 8.2, 9.2, 9.3 1 93.3 941 96.1 97 9.8.2 910.2, 11 1.3 11.3.6 11310 11311 12.2.2. 12.24, 12.26, 137 14 Time Limits on Claims 4.3.2 4.3.3, 4 3 6, 4.3 9 4 4, 4 5 Title to Work 9.3:2, 9.3.3 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK Uncovering of Work Unforeseen Conditions Unit Prices Use of Documents 1 1 1 1 3 Use of Site Values, Schedule of Waiver of Claims:. Final Payment Waiver of Claims by the Architect Waiver of Claims by the Contractor Waiver of Claims bV the Owner 9 10 3 1 Waiver of Liens Waivers-of Subrogation Warranty and Warranties 435.3 933 Weather Delays When Arbitration May Be Demanded Work, Definition of Written Consent 455 93.2 12 12.1 436 831 101 714,733.2 2.25 3 12 7 53 3.13, 6.1 1 6.2 1 9 .2, 9 3 1 4.3.5,451 9 10 3 13 4.2. 9 10 4, 11 3 7 13 4.2 4.35 451 993 1135 1137 134.2 9 10.2 611 1135 1137 3.5, 4.2 9 9.8.2 9 9 1 12.2.2 13 7 1 3 4 3.8.2 4:5.4 113 1 3 1 3 12.8, 3 14.2 4 1.2 4.3 4, 9.8.2 9 9 1 9 10.2 9 10:3 10 1.2 10 1 3 11.3 1 11 3 1 4,.1.1 3' 11 13.2 134.2 Written Interpretations 4.2 -11 4.2 12, 4.3 7 Written Notice 2 3 2 4 3 9 3 12.8, 3 12 9 4.3 4 4 4 4.5 5.21 53 5411 8.2.2,941 951 97 910 101.2 10.26 11 1 3 113 12.2.2 12.24, 13.3, 135.2 14 Written Orders 2 3 3 9 4 3 7 7 8.2.2 P1.3 9 12 1 12.2, 13 5.2, 14 3 1 AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 1987 5 6 A201 -1987 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1 1 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modifi- cation is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the 'Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor's bid or portions of addenda relating to bidding requirements). 1 1.2' THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Con- tract .may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contrac tual relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and.Con- tractor (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub subcontractor or (3) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor The Architect shall, however be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties 1 1.3 THE WORK The term `Work means the construction and .services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 1 1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of 'which the Work per formed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. 1 1.5 THE' DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial of the Con- tract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location and dimensions of the' Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, sched- ules and diagrams. 1 1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equip- ment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. 1 1 7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is the volume: usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT 1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor as provided in the Agreement. If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Docu- ments upon request. 1.2.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a reply sentation that the Contractor has visited the site, become famil- iar with local conditions under which the Work is to be per formed and correlated personal' observations with, require ment's of the Contract Documents. 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor The Contract Documents are.comple mentary and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all, performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Docu- ments and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the intended results. 1.2.4 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors' or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1.2.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well -known technical or construction indus- try meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accord- ance with such recognized meanings. 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OFI.ARCHITECT'S- DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 1.3.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect are instruments of the Architect's service through which the Work to be executed by the Con- tractor is described. The Contractor may retain one contract record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor Sub subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect shall be deemed the author of them and will retain all common law statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. All copies of them, except the Contractor's record set, shall be-returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and copies thereof furnished to the Contrac tor are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor Sub subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other proj- ects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. Work without the specific written consent of the Owner and Architect. The Contractor Subcontractors, Sub subcontractors and material or. equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Draw ings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract- Documents. All copies made under this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in con- nection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect s copyright. or other reserved rights. 14 CAPITALIZATION 1 4.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of num- bered articles and identified references to Paragraphs, Subpara- graphs and Clauses in the document or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. 1.5 INTERPRETATION 1.5.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents fre quently omit modifying words such as all and any and arti- cles such as the and an, but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1 DEFINITION 2.1 1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number The term Owner means the Owner or the Owner s authorized representative 2.1.2 The Owner upon reasonable written request shall furnish to the Contractor in writing information which is necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic s lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner s interest therein at the time of execution of the Agreement and, within five days after any change, information of such change in title, recorded or unrecorded. 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor prior to execution of the Agreement and promptly from time to time thereafter furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. [Note: Unless such reasonable evidence were furnished on request prior to the execution of .the Agreement, the prospective contractor would not be required to execute the Agreement or to commence the Work 2.2.2 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. 2.2.3 Except for permits and fees which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assess- ments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 2.2.4 Information or services under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in orderly progress of the Work. 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work. 2.2.6 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and respon- sBilities of the Owner enumerated herein and especially those in respect to Article 6 (Construction by Owner or by Separate Contractors), Article 9 (Payments and Completion) and Article 11 (Insurance and Bonds). 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contrac tor to stop the Work, or.any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated, however the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Con- tractor or any other person or entity except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6 1.3 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.4 1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven -day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven -day period give the Contractor a second. written notice to correct such deficiencies within a second seven -day period. If the Contractor. within such second seven day period after receipt of such second notice fails to com- mence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner may without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such defi- ciencies, including compensation for the Architect s additional services and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Archi- tect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner 3.1 DEFINITION ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to. throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number The term Contractor' means the Contractor or the Contractor s authorized representative. AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 1987 7 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.2 and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsis- tencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error inconsistency or omission and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. If the Con- tractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves a recognized error inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contrac for shall assume appropriate responsibility for such perfor mance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable costs for correction. 3.2.2 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such field mea- surements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or-oniissions discovered shall be reported to the Architect at once. 3.2.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and submittals approved pur suant to Paragraph 3 12 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construe tion means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Con- tract, unless Contract Documents give other specific instruc tions concerning these matters. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts -and omissions of the Contractor s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor 3.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to per form the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor 3.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of por tions of Work already performed under this Contract to deter mine that such portions are in proper condition to receive sub- sequent Work. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor materials, equip- ment, tools, construction equipment and machinery water heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorpo- rated or to be incorporated in the Work. 3.4.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment -of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. 8 A201 1987 3.5 WARRANTY 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permit ted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these require ments, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. 3.6 TAXES 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer use and similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Con- tractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effectiveor merely scheduled to go into effect. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7 1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure arid pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental 'fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or nego- tiations concluded. 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regula- tions. However if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall' promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by app_ ropriate Modification. 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be -con- trary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities against which the Contractor makes reasonable objection. 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 1 materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected promptly by the Owner to avoid delay in the Work, .2 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less. applicable trade discounts, AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. r .3 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum and not in the allowances; 4 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Clause 3.8.2.2 and (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2 3 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superinten- dent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superinten- dent shall represent the Contractor and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Con- tractor Important communications shall be confirmed in writ ing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 The Contractor promptly after being awarded the Con- tract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Con- tract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practi- cable execution of the Work. 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect s approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordi- nated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals 3.10.3 The Contractor shall conform to the most recent schedules. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 3.11 1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record changes and selections made during construction, and in addition approved Shop Drawings, Prod- uct Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Archi- tect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor Sub subcontractor manufacturer supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, per formance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar sub- mittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their'sub- mittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required the way the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2 7 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reason- able promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate con- tractors. Submittals made by the Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without action. 3.12.6 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submit tal has been approved by the Architect. Such Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals 3.12.7 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto or will do so and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 3.12.8 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Draw ings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Archi- tect s approval thereof. 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. 3.12.10 Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. 3.12.11 When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifi- cations. 3.13 USE OF SITE 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting; fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or other wise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contrac tor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE. CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 1987 9 Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor• such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unrea- sonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor s consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. 3.15 CLEANING UP 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surround- ing area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. 3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 3.17 1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or prod- uct of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. However if the Contractor has rea- son to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner Architect, Archi- tect s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, includ- ing but not limited to attorneys fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, dam- age, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible prop- erty (other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor a Subcontractor anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3 18 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3 18 by an employee of the Contractor a Subcontractor anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnifica- tion obligation under this Paragraph 3 18 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers or workmen s compensation ads, disability benefit acts 'or other employee benefit acts. 3.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph 3 18 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect, the Archi- tect s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them arising out of (1) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs or specifica- tions, or (2) the giving of or the failure to give directions or instructions by the Architect, the Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT 4.1 1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture iden- tified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number The term Architect means the Architect or the Architect s authorized representative. 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect 'as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unrea- sonably withheld. 4.1.3 In case of termination of employment of the Architect, the Owner shall appoint an architect against whom the Con- tractor makes no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former architect. 4.1.4 Disputes arising under Subparagraphs 4 1.2 and 4 1 3 shall be subject to arbitration. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the correction period described in Para- graph 12.2 The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicat ing that the Work, when completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check quality or quantity of the Work. On the basis of on- site observations as an architect, the Architect will keep the Owner informed of progress of the Work, and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. 4.2.3 The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's responsibility as provided in Paragraph 3 3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Con- AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION 10 A201 1987 AIA® ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. tractor Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or of any other persons performing portions of the Work. 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administra- tion. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially autho- rized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communi- cate through the Architect. Communications by and with the Architect s consultants shall be through the Architect. Commu- nications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementa- tion of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect will have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13 5.2 and 13 5.3 whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Archi- tect to the Contractor Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons perform- ing portions of the Work. 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Docu- ments. The Architect s action will be taken with such reason- able promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect s review of the Contractor s submit tals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Paragraphs 3.3 3 5 and 3 12 The Architect s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construc tion Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7 4 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion, will receive and forward to the Owner for the Owner's review and records written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will pro- vide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect s responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorpo- rated in the Contract Documents. 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concern- ing performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contrac tor The Architect s response to such requests will be made with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be fur nished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2 then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to fur nish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them. 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpre tation of Contract terms, payment of money extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term Claim also includes other disputes and matters in ques- tion between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relat ing to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. 4.3.2 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect, shall be referred initially to the Architect for action as provided in Paragraph 4 4 A deci- sion by the Architect, as provided in Subparagraph 4 4 4 shall be required as a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation of a Claim between the Contractor and Owner as to all such matters arising prior to the date final payment is due, regardless of (1) whether such matters relate to execution and progress of the Work or (2) the extent to which the Work has been com- pleted. The decision by the Architect in response to a Claim shall not be a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation in the event (1) the position of Architect is vacant, (2) the Architect has not received evidence or has failed to render a decision within agreed time limits, (3) the Architect has failed to take action required under Subparagraph 4 4 4 within 30 days after the Claim is made, (4) 45 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect or (5) the Claim relates to a mechanic s lien. 4.3.3 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later Claims must be made by written notice. An additional Claim made after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered unless submitted in a timely manner AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 'FOURTEENTH EDITION AlA ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 1987 11 4.3.4 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final reso- lution of a Claim including arbitration, unless otherwise agreed in writing the Contractor shall proceed diligently with perfor mance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.3.5 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment. The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from. 1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances aris- ing out of the Contract and unsettled, .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. 4.3.6 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If con- ditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materi- ally from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which dif fer materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Archi- tect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision. If the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial.deter mination, subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph 4.4 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Para- graph 10 3 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to (1) a written interpretation from the Architect, (2) an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) a writ ten order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Archi- tect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner (5) termination of the Contract by the Owner (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in accordance with the procedure established herein. 4.3.8 Claims for Additional Time 4.3.8.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary 4.3.8.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data 12 A201 1987 substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated, and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. 4.3.9 Injury or Damage to Person or Property If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party of any of the other party s employees or agents, or of others for whose acts such party is legally liable, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after first observance. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter If a Claim for addi- tional cost or time related to this Claim is to be asserted, it shall be filed as provided in Subparagraphs 4 3 7 or 4 3.8. 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.4.1 The Architect will review Claims and take one or more of the following preliminary actions within ten days of receipt of a Claim. (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant, (2) submit a schedule to the parties indicating when the Archi- tect expects to take action, (3) reject the Claim in whole or in part, stating reasons for rejection, (4) recommend approval of the Claim by the other party or (5) suggest a compromise. The Architect may also but is not obligated to notify the surety if any of the nature and amount of the Claim. 4.4.2 If a Claim has been resolved, the Architect will prepare or obtain appropriate documentation. 4.4.3 If a Claim has not been resolved, the party making the Claim shall, within ten days after the Architect's preliminary response, take one or more of the following actions. (1) submit additional supporting data requested by the Architect, (2) modify the initial Claim or (3) notify the Architect that the initial Claim stands. 4.4.4 If a Claim has not been resolved after consideration of the foregoing and of further evidence presented by the parties or requested by the Architect, the Architect will notify the parties in writing that the Architect's decision will be made within seven days, which decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to arbitration. Upon expiration of such time period, the Architect will render to the parties the Architect's written decision relative to the Claim, including any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. If there is a surety and there appears to be a possibility of a Contractor s default, the Architect may but is not obligated to notify the surety and request the surety s assistance in resolving the controversy 4.5 ARBITRATION 4.5.1 Controversies and Claims Subject to Arbitration. Any controversy or Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, or the breach thereof, shall be settled by arbitration in accor dance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, and judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators may be entered in any court having jurisdiction thereof, except controversies or Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraph 4.3 5 Such controversies or Claims upon which the Architect has given notice and rendered a decision as provided in Subparagraph 4 4 4 shall be subject to arbitration upon written demand of either party Arbitration may be commenced when 45 days have passed after a Claim has been referred to the Architect as provided in Paragraph 4 3 and no decision has been rendered. AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA® ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, NW WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. 4.5.2 Rules and Notices for Arbitration. Claims between the Owner and Contractor not resolved under Paragraph 4 4 shall, if subject to arbitration under Subparagraph 4 5 1 be decided by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association cur rently in effect, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise. Notice of demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Agreement between the Owner and Con- tractor and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. 4.5.3 Contract Performance During Arbitration. During arbi- tration proceedings, the Owner and Contractor shall comply with Subparagraph 4.3 4 4.5.4 When Arbitration May Be Demanded. Demand for arbi- tration of any Claim may not be made until the earlier of (1) the date on which the Architect has rendered a final written deci- sion on the Claim, (2) the tenth day after the parties have pre sented evidence to the Architect or have been given reasonable opportunity to do so if the Architect has not rendered a final written decision by that date, or (3) any of the five events described in Subparagraph 4.3.2 4.5.4.1 When a written decision of the Architect states that (1) the decision is final but subject to arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision, then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration, pro- ceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. 4.5.4.2 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Subparagraphs 4 5 1 and 4 5 4 and Clause 4 5 4 1 as applicable, and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13 7 4.5.5 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner the Architect, the Architect s employees or consultants, except by written consent containing specific reference to the Agree ment and signed by the Architect, Owner Contractor and any other person or entity sought to be joined. No arbitration shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner parties other than the Owner Contractor a separate contrac tor as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration. No person or entity other than the Owner Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an orig- inal third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of a dispute not described therein or with a person or entity not named or described therein The fore going agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under appli- cable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof 4.5.6 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. A party who files a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitra- tion is permitted to be demanded. When a party fails to include a Claim through oversight, inadvertence or excusable neglect, or when a Claim has matured or been acquired subsequently the arbitrator or arbitrators may permit amendment. 4.5.7 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITIONS 5.1 1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term 'Subcontractor' is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcon- tractor The term 'Subcontractor' does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor 5.1.2 A Sub subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term 'Sub- subcontractor' is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub subcontractor 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor as soon as prac ticable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or enti- ties (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal por tion of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Con- tractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reason- able objection. 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed per son or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made rea- sonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. The Contract Sum shall be increased or deer .ased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change and s:n appropriate Change Order shall be issued. However no increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for such change unle s the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. 5.2.4, Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor person or et itity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasc nable objection to such change. AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 1987 13 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Docu- ments, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor by these Docu- ments, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcon- tract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub -sub- contractors. The Contractor shall make available to each pro- posed Subcontractor prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor identify to the Subcontractor terms and condi- tions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub subcontractors. 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that. 1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Para- graph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcon- tractor in writing, and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety if any obligated under bond relating to the Contract. 5.4.2 If the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1 1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner s own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other por tions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided else where in the Contract Documents. 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different por tions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term Contractor' in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner Contractor Agreement. 14 A201 1987 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activi- ties of the Owner's own-forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate con- tractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction' sched- ules when directed to do so The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule and Contract Sum deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Condi- tions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3 this Article 6 and Articles 10 11 and 12 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate con- tractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activi- ties and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's con- struction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or sepa- rate contractors completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor s Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. 6.2.3 Costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be borne by the party responsi- ble therefor 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrong- fully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially com- pleted construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2 5 6.2.5 Claims and other disputes and matters in question between the Contractor and a separate contractor shall be sub- ject to the provisions of Paragraph 4 3 provided the separate contractor has reciprocal obligations. 6.2.6 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described Tor the Contractor in Paragraph 3 14 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor separate con- tractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surround- ing area free from waste materials and rubbish as described in Paragraph 3 15 the Owner may clean up and allocate the cost among those responsible as the Architect determines to be just. AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA© ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING :'Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 71 CHANGES 7 1 1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execu- tion of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 7 1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner Contractor and Architect, a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone, 7 1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under appli- cable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contrac tor shall proceed promptly unless otherwise provided in the Change Order Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. 7 1 4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally con- templated are so changed in a proposed Change Order or Con- struction Change Directive that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner Contractor and Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following. 1 a change in the Work, .2 the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any and .3 the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7 3 3 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order pre pared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for adjustment, if any in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of addi- tions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Con- tract Time being adjusted accordingly 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: 1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to per mit evaluation, .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or sub- sequently agreed upon, .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percent age fee; or .4 as provided in Subparagraph 7 3 6 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the pro- posed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contrac tor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, includ- ing adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effec tive immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Archi- tect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, includ- ing, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Clause 7.3 3.3 the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph 7 3 6 shall be limited to the following. 1 costs of labor including social security old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers or workmen s compensation insurance; .2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, includ- ing cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed, 3 rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others, 4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work, and .5 additional costs of supervision and field office person- nel directly attributable to the change. 7.3.7 Pending final determination of cost to the Owner amounts not in dispute may be included in Applications for Payment. The amount of credit to be allowed 'by the Contrac tor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as con- firmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any with respect to that change. 7.3.8 If the Owner and Contractor do not agree with the adjustment in Contract Time or the method for determining it, the adjustment or the method shall be referred to the Architect for determination. 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the deter mination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agree meet upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execu- tion of an appropriate Change Order AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA® ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 1987 15 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 7 4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the 'Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly 8.1 DEFINITIONS 8.1 1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Con- tract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. The date shall not be postponed by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities for whom the Contractor is responsible. 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9 8 8.1.4 The term day as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Con- tractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly except by agree ment or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely com- mence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed given by the Owner the Contractor shall 'notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic s liens and other security interests. 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with ade quate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor s control, or by delay authorized by the Owner pending arbitration, or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Paragraph 4 3 8.3.3 This Paragraph 8'3 does not preclude recovery of dam- ages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents 16 A201 1987 ARTICLE 8 TIME ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM 9.1 1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, includ- ing authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and sup- ported by such data to substantiate, its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applica- tions for Payment. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor s right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 9.3.1 1 Such applications may include requests for. payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives but not yet included in Change Orders. 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for pay- ment of amounts the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier because of a dispute or other reason. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incor poration in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the •Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner s interest, and shall include applicable insurance, storage and transportafion to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates' for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor materials and equipment relating to the Work. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9 4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA ©.1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contrac tor for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect s reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9 5 1 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner based on the Architect's observations at the site and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowl- edge, information and belief, quality of the Work is in accor dance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representa- tions are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However the issuance of a Certificate for Pay merit will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor s right to payment or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contrac tor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 The Architect may decide not to certify payment and may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner if in the Architect s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9 4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9 4 1 If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner The Archi- tect may also decide not to certify payment or because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect s opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of. 1 defective Work not remedied, .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicat ing probable filing of such claims, .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments prop- erly to Subcontractors or for labor materials or equipment, .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be com- pleted for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be com- pleted within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for. the anticipated delay or 7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor upon receipt of payment from the Owner out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's por tion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub- subcontractors in similar manner 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontrac tor if practicable, information regarding percentages of com- pletion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of por tions of the Work done by such Subcontractor 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9 6.2 9 6.3 and 9 6 4 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.7 1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount cer tified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Con- tractor may upon seven additional days written notice to the Owner. and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and. the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor s reasonable costs of shut -down, delay and start -up which shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is suffi- ciently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for; its intended use. 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a por tion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected. The Contractor shall proceed promptly to com- plete and correct items on the list. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Docu- ments. Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or desig- AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 1987 17 nated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect s inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contrac tor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Com- pletion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. The Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Sub- stantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall, finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Con- tract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Comple tion. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be sub- mitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written accep- tance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. 9.8.3 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof and upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, the Owner shall make payment, reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any for such Work or por tion thereof as provided in the Contract Documents. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or par tially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contrac tor provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Subparagraph 11.3 11 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to.each of them for payments, retainage if any secu- rity maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insur ance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for cor rection -of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9 8:2 Consent of the Contractor to partial occu- pancy or -use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agree ment between the Owner and Contractor or if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect. 9.9.2 Immediately prior to. such partial occupancy or use, the Owner Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute accep- tance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9 10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make 18 A201 -1987 such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work accept able under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully per formed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect s knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's observations and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Docu- ments and that the entire balance found to be due: the Contrac tor and noted in said final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9 10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidenc ing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Owner (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety if any to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner If a Subcon- tractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled ,to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys fees. 9.10.3 If after Substantial Completion of the Work, final com- pletion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully com- pleted or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Con- tract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that por tion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submit ted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner as provided in Sub- paragraph 4 3 5 9.10.4 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor a Sub- contractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of Claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. Such waivers shall be in addition to the waiver described in Subparagraph 4 3 5 AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA® ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1 1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, main- taining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. 10.1.2 In the event the Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected and report the condition to the and Architect in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor if in fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless. The Work in the affected area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or polychlori- nated biphenyl (PCB), or when it has been rendered harmless, by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor or in accordance with final determination by the Architect on which arbitration has not been demanded, or by arbitration under Article 4 10.1.3 The Contractor shall not be required pursuant to Article 7 to perform without consent any Work relating to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB). 10.1 4 To the fullest extent permitted by law the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor Architect, Archi- tect s consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, includ- ing but not limited to attorneys fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Owner anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Owner or anyone for whose acts the Owner may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of .indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Subparagraph 10 1 4 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor 'shall take reasonable precautions for safety of and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to 1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorpo- rated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor s Subcontractors or Sub subcontrac tors, and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto such as trees, shrubs lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relo- cation or replacement in the course of construction. 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reason- able safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Clauses 10.2 1.2 and 10.2 1 3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor a Subcontractor a Sub subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2 1.2 and 10.2 1 3 except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor s obligations under Paragraph 3 18 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor s organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to -be loaded so as to endanger its safety 10.3 EMERGENCIES 10.3.1 In an emergency affecting safety-of persons or property the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor s discretion, to pre vent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensa- tion or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in.Paragraph 4 3 and Article 7 ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11 1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11 1 1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor s operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, -or by anyone for whose acts any of thein may be liable: 1 claims under workers or workmen s compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed; AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA© ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1755 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 1987 19 .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury occupa- tional sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor's employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Con- tractor's employees, 4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by a person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to employment of such person by the Contractor or (2) by another person, .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible prop- erty including loss of use resulting therefrom, .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury death of a person or property damage arising out of owner ship maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; and 7 claims involving contractual liability insurance appli- cable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3 18. 11 1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11 1 1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Con- tract Documents or required by law whichever coverage is greater Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims -made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be main- tained after final payment. 11 1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These Certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11 1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Owner If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reason- ably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9 10.2 Information concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor s information and belief. 11.2 ,OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner s usual liability insurance. Optionally the Owner may purchase and maintain other insurance for self protection against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract. The Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining this optional Owner's liability insurance unless specifically required by the Contract Documents. 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance in the amount of the initial Con- tract Sum as well as subsequent modifications thereto for the entire Work at the site on a replacement cost basis without vol- untary deductibles. Such property insurance shall be main- tained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Paragraph 9 10 or until no person or entity 20 A201 1987 other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Paragraph 11.3 to be covered, whichever is earlier This insurance shall include interests of the Owner the Contractor Subcontractors and Sub subcontractors in the Work. 11.3.1 1 Property insurance shall be on an all -risk policy' form and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false work, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable\legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. Coverage for other perils shall not be required unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such prop- erty insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor Subcontractors and Sub subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner If the Contrac tor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to pur chase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor then the Owner shall bear all reason- able costs properly attributable thereto 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires minimum deducti- bles and such deductibles are identified in the Contract Docu- ments, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. If the Owner or insurer increases the required minimum deductibles above the amounts so identified or if the Owner elects to purchase this insurance with voluntary deduc tible amounts, the Owner shall be responsible for payment of the additional costs not covered because of such increased or voluntary deductibles. If deductibles are not identified in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of deductibles. 11.3.1 4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- ments, this property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the value established in the approval, and also portions of the Work in transit.) 11.3.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner this insurance shall include interests of the Owner Contractor Subcontractors and Sub subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds 11.3.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner s property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or for other special haz ards be included in the property insurance policy the Owner shall, if include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA® ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, adjoining or adja- cent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after fmal payment prop- erty insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Proj- ect during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph 11 3 7 for damages caused by fire or other perils covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.3 Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, defini- tions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall .contain a provision that the policy will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior writ ten notice has been given to the Contractor 11.3.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcon- try;ctors, sub subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6 if any and any of their sub- contractors, sub subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11 3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary The Owner or Contractor as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any and the subcontrac tors, sub subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity similar waivers each in favor of other parties enum- erated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subro- gation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that per son or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium, directly or indirectly and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. 11.3.8 A loss insured under Owner's property .insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 11 3 10 The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub subcontractors in similar manner 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary The Owner shall deposit in a separate account pro- ceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accor dance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4 5 If after such loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of dam aged property shall be covered by appropriate Change Order 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner s exercise of this power if such objection be made, arbitrators shall be chosen as provided in Paragraph 4 5 The Owner as fiduciary shall, in that case, make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of such arbitrators. If distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, the arbitrators will direct such distribution. 11.3.11 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9 9 shall not commence until the insurance company or com- panies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance. 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contrac tor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Con- tract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipu- lated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obliga- tions arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1 1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect s observation and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to observe prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncover ing and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order be charged to the Owner If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspec tions and compensation for the Architect s services and expenses made necessary thereby 12.2.2 If, within one year after the date of Substantial Comple tion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or after the date AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA© ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 1987 21 for commencement of warranties established under Sub- paragraph 9 9 1 or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor "shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written accep- tance of such condition. This period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substan- tial Completion and the actdal performance of the Work. This obligation under this Subparagraph 12.2.2 shall survive accep- tance of the Work under the,.Contract and termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after dis- covery of the condition. 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner 12.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in accor dance with Paragraph 2 4 If the Contractor does not proceed with correction of such nonconforming Work within a reason- able time fixed by written notice from the Architect, the Owner may remove it and. store the salvable materials or equipment at the Contractor s expense. If the Contractor does not pay costs of such removal and storage within ten days after written notice, the Owner may upon ten additional days written notice sell such materials and equipment at auction or at private sale and shall account for the proceeds thereof, after deducting costs and damages that should have been borne by the Con- tractor including compensation for the Architect s services and expenses made necessary thereby If such proceeds of sale do not cover costs which the Contractor should have borne, the Contract Sum shall be reduced by the deficiency If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay -the difference to the Owner 12.2.5 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Con- tract Documents 12.2.6 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be con- strued to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Con- tract Documents Establishment of the time period of one year as described -in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor s liability with respect to the Con- tractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and cor rection, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final- payment has been made. 22 A201 1987 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1 1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind them- selves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representa- tives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Con- tract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE ARTICLE 13 13:3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 13.4 1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Docu- ments and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and. remedies otherwise imposed or available by law 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them tinder the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or- acquiescence in a breach thereunder except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordi- nances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate tithe. Unless other wise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent test ing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner or with the appropriate public authority and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspec tions are to be made so the Architect may observe such proce dures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require addi- tional testing, inspection or approval not included under Sub- paragraph 13 5 1 the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect may observe such procedures. AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE'CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S: copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. The Owner shall bear such costs except as provided in Sub- paragraph 13 5 3 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13 5 1 and 13 5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect s services and expenses. 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Con- tract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable .delay in the Work. 13.6 INTEREST 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Docu- ments shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD 13.7 1 As between the Owner and Contractor' 1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substan- tial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion, .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certifi- cate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occur ring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certifi- cate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issu- ance of the final Certificate for Payment, any appli- cable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any warranty provided under Paragraph 3 5 the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12.2 or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner whichever occurs last. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1 1 The Contractor. may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor Sub subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor for any of the following reasons: 1 issuance of an order of a court or other public author ity having jurisdiction, .2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency making material unavailable; .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Subparagraph 9 4 1 or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents, .4 if repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions by the Owner as described in Paragraph 14 3 constitute 'in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total num- ber of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365 -day period, whichever is less, or .5 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly upon the Contractor s request, reasonable evidence as required by .Subparagraph 2.2 1 14.1.2 If one of the above reasons exists, the Contractor may upon seven additional days written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery including reasonable overhead, profit and damages. 14.1.3 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters impor tant to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may upon seven additional days written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 14 1.2 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor 1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper, materials, .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors, .3 persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, reg- ulations or orders of a public authority having juris- diction, or 4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to jus- AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA© ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 1987 23 tify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety if any seven days written notice, termi- nate employment of the Contractor and may subject to any prior rights of the surety 1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equip- ment, tools, and construction equipment and machin- ery thereon owned by the Contractor .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Para- graph 5 4, and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.2 1 the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Archi- tect s services and expenses made necessary thereby such excess shall be paid to the Contractor If such costs exceed the. unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the 24 A201 1987 Owner The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon appli- cation, and this obligation for payment shall survive termina- tion of the Contract. 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 The Owner may without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. 14.3.2 An adjustment shall be made for increases in the cost.of performance of the Contract, including profit on the increased cost of performance, caused by suspension, delay or interrup- tion. No adjustment shall be made to the extent. 1 that performance is, was or would have been so sus- pended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of this Contract. 14.3.3 Adjustments made in the cost of performance may have a mutually agreed fixed or percentage fee. AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA® ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 WARNING:_ Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. Article 7• Changes in the Work This article has undergone substantial revision, and provides for a new type of document. The Change Order is now required to be signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, In the event the Contractor's agreement cannot be obtained, a new document, a Construction Change Directive which is signed by the Owner and Architect, shall be issued. Both of these situa- tions were previously covered by Change Orders. Now they are separated so that they can, if necessary be handled independently A diagram of the process may be found on the last page of this Instruction Sheet. Article 9• Payments and Completion Substantial Completion The Substantial Completion provisions now explicitly allow for partial occupancy or use. A Certifi- cate of Substantial Completion covering a portion of Work is provided for, and consent of the insurer of the property is required. Article 10: Protection of Persons and Property Asbestos, PCB and Other Hazardous Wastes The problem of hazardous wastes is addressed, for the first time, in a paragraph prescribing procedures to be followed in the event such substances are encountered on the site. Under its provisions, the Work may only proceed in the affected area by written consent of the Owner and Contractor, or in accordance with a deter mination of the Architect upon which arbitration has not been demanded. Article 11 Insurance and Bonds This article has been expanded to cover bonds as well, and it is now provided that bonding requirements must be made known to the Contractor in the bidding requirements or at the time the Contract is signed. The Contractor, in turn, is required to furnish copies of the bonds on request to any person appearing to be a beneficiary of them. Owner's property insurance is now required to be written in the full amount of the Contract Sum and adjusted for changes in the Contract Sum effected by Change Order. The coverages to be included on the all -risk' policy form are given in much greater detail because all -risk merely means coverage of all risks not specifically excluded. In addition, the Owner is now required to insure materials stored off -site or in transit. Article 12: Uncovering and Correction of Work Correction of Work The correction period has been extended with respect to Work performed after Substantial Comple tion, so that such Work is also covered by a one year correction period. Article 13. Miscellaneous Provisions Statutory Limitation Period separate paragraph has been included under Miscellaneous Provisions giving the dates of commencement of the statutory limitation period with respect to acts or failures to act occurring at different points in the Project. This paragraph covers a range of situations and sets three commencement dates. one for occurrences before Substan- tial Completion, another for those taking place between Substantial Completion and issuance of the final Certificate for Pay ment, and a third for those taking place after the final Certificate has been issued. Article 14 Termination or Suspension of the Contract Procedures are set out for suspension of the Contract by the Owner for reasons other than the fault of the Contractor. A provi- sion allowing for termination in like circumstances has been included in AIA Document A511, Guide for Supplementary Conditions. Further details on these changes may be found in the Architects Handbook of Professional Practice when revised. A side -by side comparison of the 1976 and 1987 editions of A201 will be available for a limited time after publication of the 1987 edition C. USING THE A201 FORM Modifications Users are encouraged to consult an attorney before using an AIA document. Particularly with respect to licensing laws, duties imposed by building codes, interest charges, arbitration and indemnification, this document may require modification with the assistance of legal counsel to fully comply with state or local laws regulating these matters. Generally necessary modifications to the General Conditions may be accomplished by Supplementary Conditions included in the Project Manual and referenced in the Owner Contractor Agreement. See AIA Document A511, Guide for Supplementary Con- ditions, for model provisions and suggested format for the Supplementary Conditions. Because A201 is designed for general usage, it does not provide all the information and legal requirements needed for a specific Project and location. Necessary additional requirements must be provided in the other Contract Documents, such as the Sup- plementary Conditions. Consult AIA Document A521 Uniform Location of Subject Matter, to determine the proper location for such additional stipulations. It is definitely not recommended practice to retype the standard document. Besides being a violation of copyright, retyping can introduce typographical errors and cloud the legal interpretation given to a standard clause when blended with modifica- tions. Retyping eliminates one of the principal advantages of standard form documents. By merely reviewing the modifications to be made to a standard form document, parties familiar with that document can quickly understand the essence of the proposed relationship. Commercial exchanges are greatly simplified and expedited, good -faith dealing is encouraged, and otherwise latent clauses are exposed for scrutiny In this way contracting parties can more confidently and fairly measure their risks. INSTRUCTION SHEET FOR AIA DOCUMENT A201 1987 EDITION AIA° THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, NW WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 3 4 D. CHANGE ORDERS AND CLAIMS The diagrams below are graphic examples of the Change Order and Claims processes under the 1987 edition of AIA Document A201 These diagrams are presented for instructional purposes only, and are not intended to augment or supersede any contract language contained in the document. Users are urged to read the document in its entirety and to consult the relevant contract language regard- ing the particulars of the processes diagrammed below. A Change Order may be initiated by the Owner, Contractor or Architect. Typically upon initiation of the Change Order process, the Architect prepares a copy of AIA Document G709 Proposal Request, and submits it to the Contractor for pricing. This is then con- veyed back through the Architect to the Owner, beginning the process diagrammed below CHANGE ORDER PROCESS Architect transmits proposal with recommen- dations Architect Owner Contractor With full Contractor Proposal Owner sends agrees agreement P prepares submits Architect accepted L and signs and 1 on a h by Owner v Change Change V Order v signs Change signs C.O. price /time cation for paY ent rtme Order Order to or C.C.D. 71.3 payment P Contractor r G701 7.2.1 Ti' 1 1 7.2.1 4.2.8 ARCHITECT Without PROCESSES PAPERWORK i YES full agree- J Architect ment on Contractor price /time Bills Change partially Owner d sent to Owner Order agrees acce ments nts 7.3.4 Architect prepared with partial 'V amount N. for V and Contractor and C.C.D. agreement not in evaluation agree signed dispute 9 7.3.7 7.3.6 7.3.5 7.3.9 W m P Owner or roposal Architect Architect Q Contractor Contrec or Claim rejected re Own NO Becomes must p pares signs 'a sends refuses or both a ber filed Y and signs C.C.D. to z to sign C.C.D. disagree a second Owner by claim within C.C.D. C.C.D. Contractor time 21 days G714 7.3.1 7.3.1 7.3.8 7.3.8 4.3.1 fl 4.3.3 7.3.1 7.3.4 �J 7.3.2 4.2.8 CONTRACTOR DISAGREES Dropped The Claims process may be started through a variety of circumstances, including failure to agree upon the terms of a Change Order as shown in the diagram above. Once the Claim arises, the Owner and Contractor, together with the Architect, seek resolution of the dispute by following specific steps established in the Contract Documents and particularly in A201 These steps are generalized in the diagram below CLAIMS PROCESS U 21 days ma mum Claim made by writte oti Event 4.3.3, 4.3.6 a occurs, is 4.3.9 first recognized, giving rise to Claim 4.3.3 Final payment wain Claims of already made preserved 10 days 10 days ma imum t ma imum Architect take of five prelim, cry ctio 4.4.1 If ctio follows with, 45 days minimum 13.7 4.3.2 4.3.5 Claimant responds 4.4.3 If Clio follows within 30 days minimum 4.3.2 11 mecha lie tiled, may proceed immediately to arbitratio Statute of limitations— maximum time limit No deli ite time limit 4.3.2 Architect citifies parti that final decis forthcoming 4.4.4 7 days ma imum If decisio within 10 days —mi mum 4.5.4 Architect' final de No 6702/703 Arbitration PAYMENTS PROVISIONS IN ART. 9 30 days maximum CLAIMS PROCESS UNDER ART. 4 INSTRUCTION SHEET FOR AM DOCUMENT A201 1987 EDITION AIA° THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASH :NGTON, D C. 20006 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT The following supplements modify change, delete from or add to the `General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 14th Edition, 1987 Where any Article of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered portion of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or use shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1• CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SECTION 00700 PAGE 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 1 1 DEFINITIONS Add the following numbers, titles and paragraphs: 1.1.5 Miscellaneous Definitions 1 1.5 1 The `Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor' AIA Document A101 1987 Edition shall be used as the form of agreement for this Project. All articles in the form shall be subject to the bidding requirements and contract documents. 1.1.5.2 The term `Project Manual' as used in these Supplementary conditions is the volume which includes the Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, and certain of the Contract Documents such as the Conditions of the Contract, and the Technical Specifications. 1 1.5.3 The technical specifications are included in this Project Manual as Divisions 1 through 16. 1 1.5 4 The term "product' as used in these Supplementary Conditions includes materials, systems, equipment and accessories. ARTICLE 3: OWNER 3 2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER Delete Paragraph 3.2.5 in its entirety and add the following: 3.2.5 The Contractor will be furnished fifteen (15) copies of Drawings and Project Manuals free of charge. These copies may consist of Drawings and Project Manuals returned through the bidding process. It is the Contractor's responsibility to assure the completeness of these copies. ARTICLE 4: CONTRACTOR 4 4 LABOR AND MATERIAL Add the following paragraphs: 4 4.3 Not later than twenty (20) days from the Contract Date, the Contractor shall provide a list showing the name of Subcontractors and Principal Suppliers and Fabricators. No substitutions of subcontractors and principal suppliers and fabricators will be allowed without prior approval by the Architect. 4 4 4 The Architect will promptly reply in writing to the Contractor stating whether the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such substitution. Failure to MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL object to above shall not constitute a waiver of any of the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4 7 PERMITS, FEE AND NOTICES Delete Paragraph 4 7 1 in its entirety and add the following: 4 7 1 The Owner shall be responsible for bearing the cost of the building permit and any renewal charges for same. The Architect shall be the `single point' of contact between the Building Department and the project. The Contractor will be notified by the Architect that the permit is available and will be responsible for picking up same. ARTICLE 7: MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Delete Paragraph 7 1 1 in its entirety and add the following: 7 1 1 The Contractor shall at all times comply with federal and state laws, local laws and ordinance, and any regulations which in any manner affect the performance of the contract. 7.9 1 Delete the first sentence and add the following: "Except as may be otherwise provided in this agreement, all claims, counterclaims, disputes and other matters in question between the Owner and the Contractor arising out of or relating to this agreement, or the branch thereof, will be decided by arbitration, if the parties hereto mutually agree, otherwise, in a court of competent jurisdiction within the county in which the Owner is located. In the event the parties agree to arbitrate any matters, said arbitration shall be in compliance with the terms of Paragraph 7.9 of the AIA Document A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. Delete paragraph 7.9.3 in its entirety and add the following: 7.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed to in writing, the Contractor shall diligently carry on the Work and maintain its progress during any arbitration or court proceedings in accordance with the Architect's directions, and the Owner shall continue to make payments to the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. Add the following numbers, titles and paragraphs: 7 10 PREVAILING WAGE ACT SECTION 00700 PAGE 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 7 10 1 State of Washington Prevailing Wage Act, Chapter 39 12 RCW applies to the entire project. The contractor any subcontractor or other person doing work or any part of it shall not pay any workmen, laborers, or mechanics less than the hourly minimum rate of wage defined by RCW 39 12.010 as established by the Department of Labor and Industries which is the prevailing rate of wage. Prevailing Wage Rates are included in the Contract Documents as though bound herein. 7 10.2 The Contractor shall obtain the minimum hourly wage rate for each trade or occupation from the Department of Labor and Industries. 7 10.3 The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall submit a `Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wage' prior to receiving the first payment, and following final acceptance, shall submit Affidavits of Wages Paid' that have been certified by the industrial statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL ARTICLE 9! EAYMFNT AND COMPLETION, See General Requirements Section 01155 for expansion of this article. ARTICLE 11: INSURANCE, SECTION 00700 PAGE 3 GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 11 1 1 In the first line of subparagraphs 11 1 1(6) following the word `maintain insert the words 'in a company or companies licensed to do business in the State of Washington. Add to end of subparagraph 11 1 1(6): "Owner's and Contractor's protective coverage shall include the following as additional named insured: Clallam County Public Hospital District No. 2 (owner Olympic Memorial Hospital, Port Angeles, Washington), the Board of Commissioners thereof, and the officers and employees thereof in their official capacities. Add the following subparagraphs: 11 1 1 7 Liability insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis including: 1 Premises Operations (including X -C U). 2. Independent contractor's protective. 3 Products and completed operations. 4 Contractual including specified provision for the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 4 18. 5 Owner, non -owned and hired motor vehicles. 6. Broad form coverage for property damage. 11 1.2 Add the following Subparagraphs: 1 a. Workmen s Compensation Statutory b. Employer's liability Same limits as compensation liability on Stop Gap. .2 Comprehensive general liability a. Bodily injury $1,250,000 each person/$1,500,000 each occurrence b Personal injury $1,250,000 each person $1,250,000 aggregate $1,500,000 general aggregate. c. Property damage $1,100,000 each person $1 100,000 each occurrence /$1,100,000 aggregate. .3 Automobile liability a. Bodily injury $1,250,000 each person /$1,500,000 each occurrence. 4 Independent contractors same limits as above. .5 Products and completed operations same limits as above until full acceptance of new construction by Owner Additionally named insured: Clallam County Public Hospital District No. 2, State of Washington; the Board of Commissioners and Administrative Officers in their capacities, known as Olympic Memorial Hospital, Port Angeles, Washington. Certificate of insurance to be supplied to Owner .6 Contractual liability same limits as above. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 7 Broad Form Builders Risk policy covering materials, supplies, machinery equipment, fixtures, temporary structures to be used in or incidental to the construction, fabrication, installation, erection or completion, including accrued labor charges. All Risk form with normal Exclusions. All Sub or Independent Contractors should provide Certificates of Insurance to Contractor commensurate with the liability limits set forth in 1 2 and 3. Amount: In the sum of the total completed value. 11 1.5 Add the following paragraph: "Furnish one copy of Certificates herein required for each copy of the Agreement; specifically set forth evidence of all coverage required by Paragraphs 11 1 1 and 11 1.2. The form of the Certificate shall be MA Document G705 Furnish to the Owner copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits. 11 3 PROPERTY INSURANCE. ALL RISK (SEE ALSO 11.1.2 (7) ABOVE) Delete Paragraph 11.3.1 in its entirety and add the following: 11.3 1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the entire work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. Such insurance shall be in a company or companies against which the Owner, the Contractor the Subcontractors and Sub subcontractors in the Work and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and shall include `all risk' insurance for physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief. 11.3 1 1 If this insurance is written with stipulated amounts deductible under the terms of the policy the Contractor shall pay the difference attributable to deductions in any payments made by the insurance carrier on claims paid by this insurance. Delete Paragraph 11.3.4 in its entirety and add the following: SECTION 00700 PAGE 4 GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 11.3.4 The Contractor shall file the original and one certified copy of all policies with the Owner and Architect before exposure to loss may occur If the Owner is damaged by the failure of the Contractor to maintain such insurance and to so notify the Owner then the Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. 11.3.5 Delete in its entirety 11.3.6 Add the following sentence: 'In waiving rights of recovery under terms of this paragraph, the term `Owner' shall be deemed to include his employees, and the Architect and his employees as the Owner's representative, as provided in the Contract Documents. Delete Paragraph 11.3.9 in its entirety and add the following: 11.3.9 If the Owner fmds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion, such occupancy shall not commence prior to a time mutually agreed to by the Owner and Contractor and concurred with by the insurance company or companies. This insurance shall not be canceled or lapsed on account of such partial occupancy MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL ARTICLE 12: CHANGES IN THE WORK 12.1 CHANGE ORDERS SECTION 00700 PAGE 5 GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 12.14 In the second sentence, delete the words 'a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit' and all `an allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with the schedule set forth in Paragraph 12.1.6 below' Add the following Paragraph: 12.1.6 In Paragraphs 12.1.3 and 12.14 the allowance for overhead and profit combined, included in the total cost to the Owner shall be based on the following schedule: 1 For the Contractor for any Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, fifteen (15) percent of the cost. 2. For the Contractor for Work performed by his Subcontractor ten (10) percent of the amount due the Subcontractor 3 For each Subcontractor or Sub subcontractor involved, for any Work performed by that Contractor's own forces, fifteen (15) percent of the cost. 4 For each Subcontractor for Work performed by his Sub subcontractors, ten (10) percent of the amount due the Sub subcontractor. 5 Cost to which overhead and profit is to applied shall be determined in accordance with Paragraph 12.1.4 6. In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a compete itemization of costs including labor materials, and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall also be itemized. In no case will change involving over $100.00 be approved without such itemization. 12.2.1 Delete the remainder following the work 'encountered' near the end of the sentence and add the following: 'a change order may be given pursuant to Paragraph 12.1 ARTICLE 15: EOUAL OPPORTUNITY 15 1 THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN POLICIES OF EMPLOYMENT AS FOLLOWS. 15 1 1 The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color sex, age, marital status, creed, or national origin and the presence of any sensory mental or physical handicap, and to authorize selections or decisions to be made upon such classifications if they are based on a bona fide occupational qualification. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color sex or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of nondiscrimination. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 00700 PAGE 6 GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 15 1.2 The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or advertisement for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color sex, or national origin. 1 s A 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 Y 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS C Section 01010, Summary of Work, Alternates D Section 01205 Procedures and Controls 1 2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS 1 3 PERMITS SECTION 00700 PAGE 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to work of this section. Coordinate related requirements, specified in other Division 1 sections including but not limited to the following: B. Section 01500, Temporary Facilities A. A list of minimum special conditions existing as a part of this project include but are not necessarily limited to the following categories: 1.3 Permits 14 Fire Safety 1.5 Owner Occupancy 1.6 Protection of Existing Utilities 1.7 Continuity of Utility Services 1.8 Work During Other Than Normal Working Hours 1.9 Waste Material 1 10 Control of Solvents 1.11 Final Acceptance A. The permits required for execution of this contract, as referenced in General Conditions, Article 10, and amendments thereto, may include but are not necessarily limited to the following: B. City of Port Angeles Building Permit C City of Port Angeles Electrical Permit D City of Port Angeles Mechanical Permit E. City of Port Angeles Plumbing Permit F City of Port Angeles Fire Department permits for flammable liquid storage and use, and welding and cutting. G Washington State Department of Health/Department of Labor Industry Permit. H. Equipment Standards: All equipment furnished and/or installed under this contract shall meet the safety requirements of all applicable codes. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 4 FIRE SAFETY A. The Contractor shall conduct operations in a manner that is fire -safe for the work area and adjacent areas. Proper fire extinguishers shall be provided, identified, and maintained. Refer to Section 01500. The premise shall be maintained clear of rubbish, debris, or other material constituting a potential fire hazard. A proper fire separation shall be maintained between work area and any adjacent areas. All exit pathways shall be maintained. The City of Port Angeles Fire Code is incorporated herein by reference, and the Contractor shall adhere to all applicable provisions as determined by the Port Angeles Fire Department. B. Where significant or continued noncompliance with fire safety is noted, the Owner reserves the right to stop the work at no extra cost or extension of time pending remedial action. Furthermore, the Contractor shall be responsible for, and reimburse the Owner as appropriate, any fines or penalties levied by the Port Angeles Fire Department. C Prior to a shutdown or temporary termination of all or part of the existing fire sprinkler system, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and Architect in writing 10 days prior and verbal notification 48 hours in advance. The Contractor shall also provide for manned fire watch of the entire affected area for the duration of the shutdown, even as it includes areas outside the scope of work area. The specific schedule and provisions of the shutdown and fire watch shall be submitted to and approved by the Owner and shall adhere to State and city requirements. 1 5 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the entire construction period. The Owner reserves the right to occupy all or portions of the newly completed areas of the building provided that such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the work. Refer to Section 01010, Summary of Work. 1 6 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES A. Concealed utility of record are shown on the drawings. These are not necessarily exact with respect to location or completeness; therefore, the Contractor shall take the following steps: 1 Notify the Owner in writing, on each occasion, of the intent to work near existing underground utility services or structures. Submit procedure for approval to assure safe and continuous operation of the services. 2. Proceed with sufficient caution to preclude damaging any utilities known or unknown. In the event unidentified utilities are encountered, notify Owner immediately for direction. 3. In the event utilities are damaged during construction by general contractor or his subcontractor temporary services and/or repairs must be made immediately to maintain continuity of services at the Contractor's expense. 1 7 CONTINUITY OF UTILITY SERVICES SECTION 00700 PAGE 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT A. Continuity of utility services to and within the building shall be reasonably maintained at all times. Utility systems shutdowns required to facilitate construction work shall be accomplished in accordance with the following requirements: B. The Contractor shall submit a schedule of utility shutdowns within thirty days after the Notice to Proceed. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL C The Contractor shall confirm all requests for utility shutdowns in writing to the Owner not less than ten (10) days prior to the proposed date. Verbal notification shall be given 48 hours prior to Owner's representative and Architect. Requests shall include as a minimum the following information: 1 Utility services affected. 2. Reason shutdown is required. 3 Work to be accomplished during the shutdown. 4 Proposed shutdown date and time. 5 Duration of the shutdown. 6. List person on site responsible for shutdown during its duration, i.e. mechanical subcontractors and/or electrical subcontractors on site man-in- charge. C The actual time and date of all shutdowns will be subject to approval by the Owner. In general, they will be scheduled for nights, weekends, holidays or other low intensity use periods. D The duration of all shutdowns shall be held to a reasonable minimum as determined by the Owner in cooperation with the general contractor and trade being affected. E. Materials and equipment required for the work to be accomplished during shutdown shall be complete and available on the job for review by the Owner prior to the shutdown. If the Contractor is not adequately prepared, the shutdown will be canceled and rescheduled by the Contractor. F The Owner's personnel shall be involved in all shutdown and restarting of utilities. They will inspect the installation prior to restarting and will not restart if any unsafe condition exists. In the event the Contractor's work is not complete during the time scheduled for the shutdown, the Owner may elect to restart the utilities' service. In that event, additional shutdown requirements shall be rescheduled in accordance with the preceding requirements. Restarting shall not be construed as acceptance of the work as complete. G The Contractor shall include in the bid all costs associated with utilities' shutdowns. The Owner will make no extra payment for overtime work, schedule changes or failure to complete utility connections within authorized shutdown periods. 1 8 WORK DURING OTHER THAN NORMAL WORKING HOURS A. When work during other than normal working hours is to be accomplished, the Owner must be advised so that the Owner's Security may be properly notified. Any construction activity between the hours of 6:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m. is subject to approval of the Owner 1 9 WASTE MATERIAL A. All refuse and waste material, including excess earth from excavation, shall be disposed of by the Contractor off the Owner's property Waste material shall not be stockpiled on the Owner's property Immediately clean up any spilled material from buildings, roads, etc. 1 10 CONTROL OF SOLVENTS SECTION 00700 PAGE 3 GENERAL CONDITIONS SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT A. The use of solvents shall be subject to the approval of the Owner A written procedure for the control of emissions shall be submitted prior to any use. Areas where solvents are to be used MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 11 FINAL ACCEPTANCE ®1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 00700 PAGE4 GENERAL CONDITIONS SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT must be isolated and vented to the outside (away from air intakes, pedestrian traffic or patient room windows). A. Final acceptance of the project shall be by action of the Board of Commissioners after substantial completion of the project. END OF SECTION 00700 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL FART 1 GENERAL 1 1 ADDENDA TO BE ISSUED A. Addenda may be issued by the Architect prior to the bid opening. B. All addenda will be considered a part of the contract documents. C Please add addenda to the contract documents and make notations on this page as indicated below Addendum No. of Pages Date Received FART 2 ADDENDA FORMAT Addenda will be issued in the following format: MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL From the Office of: MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON 2505 Third Avenue, Suite 219 Seattle, WA 98121 Date: NOTICE TO ALL CONTRACTORS_ SUBCONTRACTORS. AND SUPPLIERS This addendum is considered a part of the contract documents. Section Description ©1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 00900 PAGE 1 ADDENDA SECTION 0 0 9 01 PAGE 1 ADDENDUM 1 END OF SECTION 00900 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 01010 PAGE 1 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GRNRRAI 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. Project Identification and Location: Refer to Section 00002, Introduction. B. Form of Contract: The work shall be performed under a single General Contract, including mechanical and electrical work, as specified in Divisions 0 and 1 through 16 and as shown on drawings in Division A, M and E. C Governing Regulations: The work shall be performed in accordance with applicable codes, ordinances and regulations. 1 4 WORK SUMMARY A. Demolition and remodel of approximately 7,000 SF within an existing hospital building. The work includes: 1 Interior demolition of existing walls, ceilings and floor finishes, sawcutting new openings in concrete slabs and walls. Temporary removal, storage, protection, and reinstallation of building components on floor below as required to perform work. 2. Construction of walls, ceilings, doors, and related components, including floor ceiling, and wall finishes. 3 Mechanical and electrical systems and equipment and connections and extensions to existing utilities including fire sprinkler and fire alarm systems. Repair of roofing at all penetrations and curbs. 4 Protection of existing facilities, finishes, and equipment. Construction bathers to protect adjacent occupied areas. Patching and repair of all existing facilities, finishes, or utilities damaged as a result of the work. 5 Installation of Owner furnished items and preparations for items furnished and installed by the Owner 6. Replacement of existing exterior window system. 7 Maintaining the project site in an orderly manner maintaining all construction materials and refuse within the area of work, and daily cleaning areas adjacent to the area of work from all refuse caused as a result of the work. 8. Seismic bracing for mechanical and electrical system components per Section 01064 Seismic Anchorage Requirements. 9 Cooperation and coordination with Owner's Representative and other Contractors on site to maintain Owner's operation and ensure the timely progress of all work. B. Items Furnished and Installed by Owner 1 Concurrently with work of this Project, the Owner will separately purchase certain movable and fixed equipment and miscellaneous items which will be installed during the course of Construction. Such items may not be indicated in the Documents, or they may be indicated as 'By Others' or 'MC' items, meaning 'Not in Contract. Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner and his Suppliers. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES SECTION 01010 PAGE 2 SUMMARY OF WORK 2. Items furnished and installed by Owner are noted 'FIO' C Items Furnished by Owner, Installed by Contractor 1 Items furnished by Owner and installed by Contractor are noted 'FOIC. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for required coordination of all trades, to include required scheduling of equipment with Owner for delivery and protection of equipment as required. 3. Refer to drawings and specifications for preparatory work, to be accomplished by Contractor 4 Contractor shall be responsible to verify service requirements for proper installation of items, per approved shop drawings. 5 FOIC items will be delivered to the job site loading dock for consignment to the Contractor 6. The Contractor shall assume custody and responsibility for the items upon uncrating ad determining that the contents are complete and in satisfactory condition for installation. 7 The installation of the items includes the following: a. Uncrating and delivery to installation locations in the Project. b. Setting in place, building -in, leveling and attaching to other work as required. c. Making any required electrical or mechanical connections. d. Leaving items completely installed and in operable condition satisfactory to the Architect D Salvage 1 ems M kigk 'Owner Salvage Contractor to move to storage where directed by Owner 2. Items Marked 'For Re U Contractor to incorporate in the Work and modify and refinish as may be required, or provide new at Contractor's option. 3 Other: All items unless otherwise noted such as clocks, casework, coat hook racks, doors, etc. which are necessary to remove due to interference with new work, remain the property of the Owner and are to be salvaged for the Owner a. All other work becomes Contractor's property and may be reused on the work provided Architect judges it equal to new materials specified. b. Remove all other items from site at Contractor's expense. A. General 1 Comply with requirements of Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. 2. Use of premises will be permitted provided Owner's normal, safe use of building, roads and walks is not negatively affected in Owner's judgment. 3 Any damage to building or site shall be restored to condition on day of bid opening at Contractor's expense, including grass, paving, curbs etc. 4 Provide construction site barrier to prevent unauthorized entry into construction areas and as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Access to Work 1 Existing roadways and walks adjoining the building may be used, subject to approval of planned use prior to starting work. 2. Work area and parking shall be per Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 6 ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING WORK A. Existing finishes and materials shall be altered as shown or as required for a complete installation. In the event of damage, the work includes restoring existing finishes and materials to their condition immediately prior to the award of contract. 1 7 OCCUPANCY BY OWNER A. During the Contractor's performance of the Work, tenants will continue to occupy the buildings and spaces in the immediate vicinity during its normal hours. Protect safety of building occupants at all times. B. Interruption of building access and operation will not be permitted. Limit construction operation and methods to those that will not unduly affect the working environment of the occupied spaces, including noise, dust, odors, hazards and other undesirable effects and conditions. Special caution is emphasized because tenants will be occupying this facility during the construction. 1 8 VERIFICATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS SECTION 01010 PAGE 3 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Project Drawings: Contract Document Drawings do not necessarily represent complete or exact existing conditions of the Project. B. Examination of Existing Building and Site 1 Bidders and Contractors shall examine existing sites and buildings as required prior to bidding to determine any conditions affecting the Work. Refer and read in detail all aspects of the existing as -built drawings. 2. Contact Owner for arrangements. C Examination of Original Drawings 1 Some Original Drawings and other record drawings are available. 2. Contact Architect or Owner for arrangements. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. EAK'T 3 EXECUTION Not used. 01996 Mahlum Nardfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 01010 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART l GENERAL 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. Requirements Specified in This Section 1 Contract time and liquidated damages 2. Contract administration sequence 3. Work sequence requirements B. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere 1 Section 00520, Notice to Proceed 2. Section 00700, General Conditions 3 Section 01026, Payment Procedures 4 Section 01300, Submittals 5 Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 6. Section 01630, Product Options and Substitutions 7 Section 01700, Project Closeout PART 2 CONTRACT TIME AND LIOUIDATED DAMAGES 2 1 CONTRACT TIME ALLOTTED 1 AIA Document 0702, covering total work to Date. SECTION 01011 PAGE 1 CONTRACT TIME AND SEQUENCE A. The work shall be substantially completed within one hundred and fifty (150) calendar days of the date of the Notice to Proceed. B. Contract Time may be changed only by Section 01036, Change Order Procedures. C Provide overtime as required to complete the work within the contract time allotted without additional cost to Owner 2 2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND COMPLETION A. Time is of the essence of each and every portion of this Contract: the Contractor shall prosecute the Work regularly diligently and uninterrupted at such rate of progress as will ensure completion thereof within the time specified. Proceed per Section 00510, Notice to Proceed. B. The Owner intends to occupy that portion of Work complete the day after the Date of Substantial Completion in accordance with the Certificate of Substantial Completion, AIA, Document 0704 C Affidavit for payment and subsequent release of retainage shall be based on the total retainage for a ll Work as defined in Section 01010, Summary of Work. Submit Payment Application as outlined below. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2. AI:A Document G703 to itemize each Part of Work as invoiced to the schedule of values for that Part of Work. 2 3 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. The Work of this Contract shall be commenced at once after the issuance of a written 'Notice to Proceed" and shall be substantially completed within the specified Contract Time limits Contractor shall reimburse Owner for any loss suffered through failure to meet the Construction Schedule. Should an extension of time be granted to the Contractor by Change Order signed by the Owner the Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner and the Architect from any loss to any other Contractor or subcontractor caused by such extension. B. Refer to Article 10. D mks for Delay or Abandonment, of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor for description of 'Liquidated Damages. PART 3 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION SEOUENC$ 3 1 DEFINITION SECTION 01011 PAGE 2 CONTRACT TIME AND SEQUENCE A. Contract Administration shall proceed per the following sequence. Deviations, if any shall be only as approved by Architect. B. Responsibility for activities shall be per Section 00510, Notice to Proceed, and per Section 00700, General Conditions. C Refer to Divisions 1 through 16 Technical Specification for further requirements. 3 2 COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK A. Shall occur upon issuance of Section 00510, Notice to Proceed. 3 3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Submit at this time the following: 1 Section 01300 Construction Progress Schedule. 2. Section 01300 List of Proposed Subcontractors. 3 4 FIRST PROGRESS PAYMENT A. Submittal of Applications for Payment No. 1 (Section 01026, Payment Procedures) shall be preceded by the submittal and approval of the following: 1 Schedule of values per Section 01027 Schedule of Values. 2. Updated construction progress schedule per Section 01310, Progress Schedule. 3 Statement of intent to pay prevailing wages for each trade included in the request in a form agreeable to the Owner The statements shall be approved by the State of Washington, Department of Labor and Industries prior to submission. 3 5 SUBSEQUENT PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Submittal of Application for Payment (Section 01026, Payment Procedures) shall be accompanied by the submittal of documentation as outlined below 1 Updated construction progress schedule (Section 01310, Progress Schedule) 2. Affidavit of materials stored at site, if applicable 3 Affirmative action reports (Section 00821 Equal Employment Opportunity Requirement) MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 4 Statement of intent to pay prevailing wages for each trade included in the request in a form agreeable to the Owner The statements shall be approved by the State of Washington, Department of Labor and Industries prior to submission. 3 6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PAYMENT, OCCUPANCY A. Submission of Application for Payment and Certificate of Substantial Completion (Section 01026, Payment Procedures) to be submitted following substantial completion procedure. 3 7 FINAL PAYMENT, COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE A. Submission of Application for Payment and Affidavit for Payment of Retained Percentage (Section 01026, Payment Procedures) and other documentation as required by the Owner and/or described in Section 01700, Contract Closeout; final payment of retained percentage shall be for all work, partial payment of retained percentage shall not be allowed. PART 4 WORK SEQUENCE REOUIREMENTS 4 1 GENERAL 01996 Mahlwn Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 01011 PAGE 3 CONTRACT TIME AND SEQUENCE A. The Contractor shall schedule and supervise the work to accomplish completion within the Contract Time. B. The Contractor shall schedule any work that impairs tenant operations to after hours or weekends. C Work in occupied spaces of the Building shall be coordinated with the Owner's representative and the Owner at least one week in advance of the work. D Legal exitways shall be maintained at all times while building is occupied. E. All utility and service shutdowns required for connections to existing systems shall be performed after normal business hours at no additional cost. Electrical power interruptions are limited to one hour maximum. F All site work which interferes with roadways or parking is to occur on weekends between 6:00 pm Friday and 6:00 am Monday Steel plates or other adequate support are to be placed over open trenches in roadways and marked with appropriate signage when Contractor is not working. G Upon request of the Property Owner or the Owner, the Contractor shall immediately stop work that is disruptive to building tenants, and reschedule the work for a time that will not interfere with the tenants. END OF SECTION 01011 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 01014 PAGE 1 PROJECT FINISHES AND OPENINGS FART 1 GENERAL 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091, Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. Provide materials and finishes as specified herein, and as scheduled and shown. B. Room materials and finishes are scheduled in Volume 2 Project Drawings. C Door openings are scheduled in Volume 2 Project Drawings. D The extent and details of the work are shown in the drawings. 1 4 PRIORITY OF THE DOCUMENTS A. In event of conflict between documents, provide the most expensive work specified, scheduled or shown. B. In event of work shown or scheduled, but not specified, provide the work as indicated per specifications to be furnished upon request by the Architect. Emu 2 ROOM MATERIAL AND FINISH REQUIREMENTS 2 1 GENERAL A. Provide materials and/or finishes in rooms as specified herein, and as scheduled and shown on drawings. B. See the Room Finish Schedule in Volume 2 Project Drawings. C For room locations, details, and extent, refer to the drawings. 2 2 CODES A. Conform with Section 01065 Code and Permit Requirements. B. Comply with State Fire Marshal's requirements. C Interior Finishes shall comply with the Building Code (see Section 01065 Code and Permit Requirements) as follows: Enclosed Vertical Other Rooms Stairways Exitways or Are Class I II III F_Ipme Sprad 0-25 26 -75 76 -225 2 3 GENERAL NOTES TO FINISH SCHEDULE A. Provide the following if not shown elsewhere. B. Painting: Provide 09900 paint throughout on: MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 3 DOOR OPENING REOUIREMRNTS 3 1 GENERAL NOTES TO DOOR OPENING SCHEDULE A. See Door Opening Schedule in Volume 2 Project Drawings. 1 09100 plaster plaster veneer 2. 09250 gypsum board 3 06200 wood 4 08100 hollow metal 5 08200 wood doors 6. All exposed structural, mechanical and electrical work, except prefmished items C Closets: Provide same finishes as adjoining room unless otherwise indicated. D Typical Room Finish: Provide the following finishes for all rooms and spaces if no other finishes are indicated. 1 Floor and Base: Provide Armstrong 'Seagate vinyl sheet flooring with 6 inch topset vinyl base. 2. Walls: Provide 09100 plaster veneer with 09900 paint. 3. Ceiling and Acoustic Treatment: Provide 09540 ceiling suspension and 09500 acoustic panel. C 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 01014 PAGE 2 PROJECT FINISHES AND OPENINGS END OF SECTION 01014 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL FART 1 GENERA', 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS SECTION 01026 PAGE 1 PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in each section of Divisions 2 through 16. Make particular reference to the following sections: B. Section 00003, Table of Contents C Section 01010, Summary of Work D Section 01011, Contract Time and Sequence E. Section 01030, Base Bid and Alternates F Section 01065, Code and Permit Requirements G Section 01091, Reference Standards H. Section 01095, Explanations, Definitions, Abbreviations, Symbols I. Section 01630, Product Options and Substitutions J Section 01700, Contract Closeout K. Section 01710, Final Cleaning 1 2 DESCRIPTION A. Progress payment shall be made per Section 00700, General Conditions, and as specified hereinafter. 1 3 INCORPORATED DOCUMENTS A. The following documents are incorporated as a part of the contract documents as if bound herein. 1 Application and Certificate for Payment, MA Document G702 2. Continuation Sheet, MA Document G703 3 Certificate of Substantial Completion, MA Document G704 4 Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, MA Document G706A 5 Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, MA Document G706 6. Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment, MA Document G707 B. The following documents are bound herein and incorporated as a part of the contract documents: 1 Affidavit for Payment of Retained Percentage, Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon Form MN1060 C Payment procedures shall comply with requirements of the above incorporated forms and shall be per Section 00700, General Conditions. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL FART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED PART 3 F,XRCUTION 3 1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES SECTION 010 2 6 PAGE 2 PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Submit per Section 01011 Contract Time and Sequence, and Section 01027 Schedule of Values. Form of submission to include all divisions and sections included in Section 00003 Table of Contents. B. Schedule of Values shall be used only as a basis for application for payment. 3 2 APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Each application shall consist of AIA Documents G702 and G703. B. Submit per Section 01011 Contract Time and Sequence. C Contractor shall review draft of application with Architect prior to submittal. D Retainage on MA Document G702 shall be per Owner /Contractor agreement. E. Statement of intent to pay prevailing wages, for each trade included in the request, in a form agreeable to the Owner. The statements shall be approved by the State of Washington Department of Labor and Industries prior to submission. 3 3 REQUEST FOR PAYMENT OF RETAINED PERCENTAGE A. The following forms are required: 1 Form MN1060, certifying that all payrolls, bills, claims, liens, or any other indebtedness for which the Owner or his property might in any way be responsible have been paid or are otherwise satisfied 2. MA Document G707 3 MA Document G706A 4 MA Document G706 5 Affidavit of wages paid in form acceptable to Owner Affidavit shall receive certification from the State of Washington, Department of Labor and Industries, prior to submission to Owner 6. Letter of release of liabilities from State of Washington, Department of Labor and Industries. 7 State of Washington Department of Revenue Certification as proscribed in the agreement between the Owner and the Contractor B. If required by the Owner, provide other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations such as receipts, releases, and waivers of liens arising out of the contract to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner C If any subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify him against any such lien. D If any such lien remains unsatisfied after any such payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all moneys that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all cost and reasonable attorney fees. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 01026 PAGE 3 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 3 4 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Architect will issue AIA Document 0704 per Section 01011, Contract Time and Sequence. END OF SECTION 01026 1 1 1 1 t40 To: Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon This affidavit is executed as a part of the foregoing application for final payment: STATE OF WASHINGTON County of The undersigned, being first duly sworn on oath, disposes and says: 1 That he /she is the of having its principal place of business at 2. That said 3 That as of this date, all persons, firms, and corporations furnishing labor and/or materials in connection with the above described construction, at the request of and for and on behalf of the Contractor described above, have been paid in full, and no person, firm, or corporation who has furnished labor and/or materials to the Contractor herein for the above -described construction or the real property described herein, or the retained percentage of the contractor for labor and materials, except as follows: a. Retained percentages due subcontractors, payable upon payment of retained percentage to Contractor by Owner, and b. Subcontractor progress payments billed in payment estimate 4 That there are no municipal, state, or federal charges, levies, or taxes, unpaid or delinquent, which constitute an encumbrance, claim, or lien against said construction, or said real property or the Contractor's bond, or the retained percentage of the contract. 5 That this affidavit is made by the Undersigned with a full understanding of the facts as set forth herein, and for the purpose of inducing the Owner to make payment to the retained percentage of final payment to the Contractor on the assurance that there are no liens, claims, or encumbrances, under the contract, which may in any way reflect against: (by) Contractor is constructing for residing at AFFIDAVIT FOR PAYMENT OF R E T A I N E D P E R C E N T A G E AFFIDAVIT FOR PAYMENT OF RETAINED PERCENTAGE FINAL PAYMENT (date) SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN to before me this day of 19 NOTARY PUBLIC in and for the State of Washington, Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon 1996 Form 1060 10/96 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKI N LEY GORDON 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 Seattle WA 98121 206 441 -4151 206 441 0478 F MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 DESCRIPTION A. Provide schedule of value submittals as indicated herein. PART 2 REQUIREMENTS SECTION 010 2 7 PAGE 1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 2 1 GENERAL A. Prepare per Section 01300, Submittals, Section 00700, General Conditions, and as follows. B. Purpose is to establish value of every item of the work for use in each request for progress payment. C Review outline of proposed schedule with Architect prior to final submission. 2 2 FORMAT A. Title 'Section 01027 Schedule of Values. Type on AIA Document G703, Continuation Sheet. B. Break out costs per specification divisions and sections (except Division 0) as listed in Section 00003, Table of Contents, unless other method is agreed upon with the Architect. Break down items into subcomponents, materials, installation, etc. so no line item exceeds $50,000. C Each cost item shall include its proportionate share of project overhead and profit. D Include line item for As- builts and O &M Manuals' equal to 1% of the value each for Architectural (Divisions 2 14), Mechanical (Division 15), and Electrical (Division 16), or $1,000 each, whichever is the lesser 2 3 REQUIRED INFORMATION A. Each element of the project, identified with specification section number and title B. Costs for each item C Total of costs which equals the contract sum D Contractor's signature and date 2 4 DISTRIBUTION A. Submit four copies to the Architect with certification statement included in this section. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 3 SCHEDUILE OF VALUES Date: To: MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON From: (Contractor) By iSignature) 0 1996 Mahlum Nordfora McKinley Gordon SECTION 01027 PAGE 2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES This is to certify that this Schedule of Values has been prepared in accordance with the contract documents and that values listed are correct and show the proper cost, including overhead and profit, to provide each item of the work. These values shall be the basis for future Application for Payment. END OF SECTION 01027 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GFNFRAI, 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. Comply with Section 00030, Invitation to Bid, and Section 00100, Instructions to Bidders. B. Each bidder shall state in his bid, in the spaces provided on the Bid Form (Section 00300), the following: 1 Base Bid: Bid for performing the work of the base bid as described below 2. Alternate Bids: Bid for performing additional items of work, omitting items of work, substituting materials or construction for those specified in the base bid, all as described below State the amount to be added to or deducted from the base bid. C No sales tax shall be included for any of the bid prices. D The above terms are used as defined in Section 00100, Instructions to Bidders. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. Base bid is the sum proposed to perform all general, mechanical, and electrical work as specified and shown in Divisions 0 through 16 (specifications) and Divisions A, M, and E (project drawings) also referred to as the contract documents. B. The following items are excluded from the above base bid: 1 Work included in the following additive or deductive alternates 2. Work specifically shown or noted as not in contract (NIC) 1 4 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES 1 5 ALTERNATES SECTION 01030 PAGE 1 BASE BID AND ALTERNATES A. An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form (Section 00300) for certain construction activities defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from base bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the contract documents. A. Coordination: Coordinate related work and modify or adjust adjacent work as necessary to ensure that work affected by each accepted alternate is complete and fully integrated into the project. B. Notification: Immediately following the award of the contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved notification of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or defened for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C Schedule 1 A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this section. Specification sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. 2. Include as part of each alternate miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the alternate. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 2 PROpUCTS (NOT USED) SECTION 010 3 0 PAGE 2 BASE BID AND ALTERNATES FART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL A. Alternate bids may or may not be accepted by Owner B. Bid prices for alternates shall include adjustments in the work of all materials and trades as may be necessary because of additions, deletions, or substitutions. C Rough -ins and all other provisions required for the future installation of items of work omitted in base bid or in deductive alternates shall remain in the contract unless otherwise stated. Refer to drawings or specifications for explanations of cut off points of work remaining. D Work which may be added in alternates shall become part of and be governed by the provisions of the specification sections for like materials and construction. E. In alternate descriptions, reference to architectural drawings shall be interpreted as all- inclusive reference to any other project drawings showing the work. 3 2 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate #1 Headwall Units at Patient Rooms 1 Provide 06400 headwall units at all Patient Rooms. 2. If this alternate is not accepted, base bid provides for 06400 headwall units at Patient Rooms 15, 20, 21 and 22 only Gas outlets, electrical receptacles, and accessories in Patient Rooms 12, 14 16, 18, 19 25, 27 and 34 shall be flush mounted directly into wall. At back to back headwalls, provide 09255 6 inch studs at wall between the adjacent Patient Bedrooms. B. Alternate #2 Wood Veneer Soffits. 1 Provide 09255 framing and 06200 wood veneer soffits as shown above Patient Room doors, Nurse Station counter and entry doors to wing. 2. If this alternate is not accepted, base bid provides for 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings. C Alternate #3 Vinyl Wallcovering at Patient Room walls. 1 Provide 09950 Vinyl Wallcovering at Patient Room walls as shown in Volume 2 Project Drawings, Finish Schedule. 2. If this alternate is not accepted, provide 09900 paint at Patient Room walls in lieu of vinyl wallcovering. D Alternate #4 Drapes and Valences 1 Provide 12541 Draperies and 06200 Wood Valence at exterior windows where indicated in Volume 2, Project Drawings, Room Finish Plan and Schedules and Interior Elevations. 2. If this alternate is not accepted, Base Bid does not include 12541 Draperies and 06200 Wood Valences. 01996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 01030 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in each section of Divisions 2 through 16. Make particular reference to the following sections: 1 Section 00003, Table of Contents 2. Section 01010, Summary of Work 3 Section 01011, Contract Time and Sequence 4 Section 01030, Base Bid and Alternates 5 Section 01065, Code and Permit Requirements 6. Section 01091 Reference Standards 7 Section 01095, Explanations, Definitions, Abbreviations, Symbols 8. Section 01630, Product Options and Substitutions 9 Section 01700, Contract Closeout 10. Section 01710, Final Cleaning 1 2 DESCRIPTION A. The contract may be changed per Section 00700, General Conditions, and as follows. 1 3 INCORPORATED DOCUMENTS A. The following documents are a part of the contract documents: 1 Change Order Proposal, M &NMG Form 1038 2. Change Order M &NMG Form 1039 3 Architect's Supplemental Instructions, M &NMG Form 1036 4 Construction Change Directive, M &NMG Form 1037 B. Change order proposals, change orders, architect's supplemental instructions, and construction change directives shall comply with requirements of the above incorporated forms and shall be per Section 00700, General Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS B. Architect's Supplemental Instructions are used to clarify the scope of work or make changes to the work which have no effect on the contract sum or contract time. Notify the Architect immediately if the supplemental instruction is anticpated to require a change to the contract sum or contract time. A. Architect's Supplemental Instructions (Form1036) is bound herein and incorporated as a part of the contract documents. 3 2 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSALS SECTION 01036 PAGE 1 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. Change Order Proposal (Form 1038) is bound herein and incorporated as a part of the contract documents. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 01036 PAGE 2 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES B. Contractor shall complete proposal portion of form and return original to Architect for action. C The Contractor shall not proceed with the work described in the proposal until the proposal is accepted by the Owner. 3 3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES A. Construction Change Directive (Form 1037) is bound herein and incorporated as a part of the contract documents. B. Proceed with the work described in the construction change directive immediately upon receipt of the signed form. C Fill in the cost, sign, and forward the construction change directive form with requested backup documents to the Architect. 3 4 CHANGE ORDERS A. Change Order (Form 1039) is bound herein and incorporated as a part of the contract documents. B. The Change Order is the instrument by which changes in contract sum or contract time are incorporated into the contract. Accepted change order proposals and construction change directives shall be the basis for contract change orders. C Contract change orders may incorporate more than one change order proposal or construction change directive. 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 01036 r 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 PROJECT OWNER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE TO: COPIES TO: Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon Request Please furnish your proposal to us for performing the following change(s): ATTACHMENTS Contractor: CHANGE ORDER P R O P O S A L NO Olympic Memorial Hospital 3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel Olympic Memorial Hospital Tom Stegbauer BY DATE. Contract Sum: addition deduction of Contract Time: extension reduction of PROJECT NO. BY DATE. BY DATE. Owner Acceptance: We hereby accept the above proposal. BY DATE. 95110.00 CONTRACT DATE September 26, 1996 Contractor Proposal: We propose to perform the change(s) described above for the following change(s) in the Contract Sum and the Contract Time (a detailed cost estimate is attached). (excluding state sales tax) calendar days This proposal includes any and all necessary adjustments to the construction schedule and all direct and indirect costs. All further claims for additional compensation, time, or damages arising out of the changed work addressed in this proposal are waived upon the Owner's acceptance of this proposal. Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon Recommendation: We have carefully examined the above proposal, find it to be in order and the cost reasonable, and recommend its acceptance. This foray when signed above, constitutes the conditions upon which the Architect will issue a Change Order for the above changes. Mahlum k Nordfors McIQnley Gordon 1996 Form 1038 10/96 MAH LU M NORDFORS McKI N LEY GORDON 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 Seattle WA 98121 206 441 -4151 206 441 0478 F A 1 1 t 1 1 1 PROJECT OWNER. ISSUED BY BY CONFIRMED BY BY AUTHORIZED BY BY Olympic Memorial Hospital CHANGE ORDER N O Olympic Memorial Hospital 3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel PROJECT NO: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: Tom Stegbauer The Owner and the Contractor agree to the following change(s): Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon Contractor Olympic Memorial Hospital CONTRACT DATE: September 26, 1996 ATTACHMENTS Contract Time: Before this Change Order, the date of substantial completion was: The Contract Time change because of this Change Order is: days With this Change Order, the new date of substantial completion will be: Contract Sum The original contract sum was: The net change in the Contract Sum by previously authorized Change Orders is: The amount of this Change Order is: The new Contract Sum will be: The above summary does not reflect changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Time which have been authorized by Construction Change Directive. This Change Order becomes valid once signed by the Owner, Contractor, and Architect, and is effective on the date of Owner's Authorization. DATE DATE DATE 95110.00 Mahlum dz Nordfors McKinley Gordon 1996 Form 1039 10/96 MAHLUM NORDFOR McKINLEY GORDON 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 Seattle WA 98121 206 441 -4151 206 441 0478 F 1 A R C H I T E C T S S U P P L E M E N T A L I N S T R U C T I O N N O 1 1 1 PROJECT OWNER. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE TO: COPIES TO: ATTACHMENTS Olympic Memorial Hospital 3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel Olympic Memorial Hospital Tom Stegbauer Issued by Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon By Accepted by Contractor By PROJECT NO Date Date 95110.00 CONTRACT DATE September 26, 19% Proceed immediately with the following at no change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. If you believe this Supplemental Instruction requires a change in either the Contract Time or Contract Sum, contact the Architect within five days of receipt and do not proceed with the following. Otherwise, this change(s) shall be binding to the contract. 0 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon 1996 Form 1036 10 /96 MAH LUM NORDFORS McKI N LEY GORDON 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 Seattle WA 98121 206 441 -4151 206 441 0478 F 1 1 1 1 1 ero PROJECT C O N S T R U C T I O N C H A N G E D I R E C T I V E N O Olympic Memorial Hospital 3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel OWNER. Olympic Memorial Hospital OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Tom Stegbauer TO. COPIES TO: Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon Recommendation Make the following change(s) in this contract: ATTACHMENTS ADJUST THE CONTRACT SUM AS FOLLOWS ADJUST THE CONTRACT TIME AS FOLLOWS By Owner Directive PROJECT NO: CONTRACT DATE September 26, 19% Date: 95110.00 Upon receipt of this signed document, you are hereby directed to proceed immediately with the change(s) described above. B Date. MAHLUM NORDFOR£ McKI N LEY GORDON 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 Seattle WA 98121 Contractor Agreement/Disagreement We have carefully examined the above adjustment and (0 agree) (0 disagree) with the adjustments to the Contract Sum and Contract Time. By Date Following agreement by the Contractor on above adjustments to the Contract Sum and Contract Time, a Change Order will be issued. 206 441 0478 F ®Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon 1996 Form 1037 I0 /96 206 441 -4151 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERA!, 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. Definition: Cutting and patching is hereby defined to include but is not necessarily limited to the cutting and patching of nominally completed or previously existing work in order to accommodate the coordination of work or the installation of other work or to uncover other work for access or inspection or to obtain samples for testing or for similar purposes and is defined to exclude integral cutting and patching during the manufacturing, fabricating, erecting, ad installing process for individual units of work. Drilling the work to install fasteners and similar operations are included under their specific sections. B. General Work: The Contractor represents that he has carefully reviewed all demolition, removal, modification, cutting, and patching requirements of all subtrades and that he has included in his bid the cost for all such requirements for work specified and as further stated below C Mechanical and Electrical Work, Divisions 15 and 16, and Site Utilities: The Contractor represents that he has advised his bidders for the mechanical and electrical work to include in their work all costs of cutting, patching, and coring; disconnecting electrical services; disconnecting and capping utility lines at present locations; connections to new locations and modification in piping runs; and electrical devices, as may be required for the installation and completion of other work in the area. The Contractor represents that he has reviewed the site ad will remove and replace any and all mechanical and electrical items as required for new work whether shown on the drawings or not to produce a complete product as required by code and implied by the balance of the contract documents. 1 4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Comply with Section 01400, Quality Control. B. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural work in a manner resulting in a reduction of load carrying capacity or load/deflection ratio. Notify Architect if work resulting in structural integrity loss is apparent. C Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operational elements and safety- related components in a manner resulting in a reduction of capacities to perform in a manner intended or resulting in decreased operational life, increased maintenance, or decreased safety D Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch work which is exposed to the exterior or exposed in occupied spaces of the building in a manner resulting in a reduction of visual qualities or resulting in substantial evidence of the cut and patch work, both as judged solely by the Architect. Remove and replace work judged by the Architect to be visually unsatisfactory 1 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01610, Delivery Storage, and Handling. SECTION 01045 PAGE 1 CUTTING AND PATCHING MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS SECTION 01045 PAGE 2 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best and most complete cutting and patching per industry standards. 1 8 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Section 01310, Progress Schedule. 1 9 WARRANTY A. Comply with Section 01745, Warranty Procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated or approved by the Architect, provide materials for cutting and patching which will result in equal or better work than the work being cut and patched in terms of performance characteristics and including visual effect where applicable. Comply with the requirements and use materials identical, including color with the original where feasible and where recognized that satisfactory results can be produced thereby PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement, during cutting and patching. B. Inspect after uncovering cutting and patching. C Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3 2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide adequate temporary support for work to be cut to prevent failure. Do not endanger other work. B. Protection: Provide adequate protection of other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage and provide protection of the work from adverse weather exposure. Take precautions not to cut existing pipe, conduit, or duct serving the building but scheduled to be relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3 3 PERFORMANCE A. General 1 Execute cutting, fitting, and patching, including excavation and fill, to complete work and to: a. Fit the several parts together to integrate with other work. b Uncover work to install ill -timed work. c. Remove and replace defective and nonconforming work. d. Remove samples of installed work for testing. e. Provide openings in elements of work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 01045 PAGE 3 CUTTING AND PATCHING 2. All work to be performed in a 'workmanlike' manner Employ skilled tradesmen to perform cutting and patching. Except as otherwise indicated or approved by the Architect, proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, in each instance, and perform the work promptly 3 Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work and to provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. 4 If possible, employ original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for sight exposed surfaces. 5 Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of contract documents. 6. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. 7 At penetrations of fire -rated material, provide proper thickness of the construction element to maintain the required fire rating. For penetrations and recessed items larger than or more numerous than allowed by Uniform Building Code Section 4304(f), provide appropriate blocking, and continuation of the construction element to maintain the required fire rating. 8. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent fmishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly refinish entire unit. B. Cutting 1 Cut work by methods least likely to damage work to be retained and work adjoining. Review proposed procedure with original installer where possible and comply with his recommendations. 2. In general, where mechanical cutting is required, cut work with sawing and grinding tools, not with hammering and chopping tools. Core drill openings through concrete work. C Patching 1 Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances of the work. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and, where necessary extend finish restoration onto retained work adjoining in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching. 3 Where patch occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over the entire unbroken surface containing the patch. D Cutting and Patching for Work by Subcontractors: Cutting and patching for mechanical and electrical work will be included in the cost for mechanical and electrical work, respectively aid will be performed in accordance with this section and Division 15 Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical. See Divisions 15 and 16 for additional instructions. 3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 01400, Quality Control. B. Provide experienced supervision of all elements of the work of this section. 3 5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, and Section 01710, Final Cleaning. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 01996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 01045 PAGE 4 CUTTING AND PATCHING B. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access. Remove completely paint, mortar oils, putty, and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. END OF SECTION 01045 1 1 l 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 r MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 010 6 4 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL SEISMIC ANCHORAGE 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL I 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A complete list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. The purpose of this section is to provide instruction relating to the design and construction of anchorage requirements for mechanical and electrical equipment and components. It is required that these items be anchored to the facility in a manner whereby the overall reliability of the facility is not compromised. B. Unless otherwise determined by the Architect, it is not intended that any item of purchased equipment be modified to meet the requirements of this section. C Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1 Division 9 Finishes 2. Division 15, Mechanical 3 Division 16, Electrical 1 4 INSPECTION A. Installation of all wedge anchors shall be performed under the continuous inspection of a certified inspector B. Field tests of the anchorage shall be performed by a licensed testing laboratory under the supervision of a certified inspector 1 5 GENERAL CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS A. All supports and connections shall be designed by a registered structural engineer licensed in the State of Washington in accordance with the Uniform Building Code, Zone 3 The Contractor shall retain this engineer to perform the design work. B. SMACNA guidelines shall be used for the design of seismic restraints of mechanical systems (and cabinets), with the additional requirements dictated by Paragraph 1.3 above and the specific requirements and exceptions specified in this section. r C Acquisition of design data and installation of gravity and seismic anchorages (restraints) shall be the responsibility of the Contractor unless otherwise noted in this section. Design data and shop drawings shall be provided in accordance with Paragraph 1.8 below 1 6 DISTRIBUTION OF GRAVITY AND SEISMIC LOADS TO STRUCTURE A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to see that the combined equipment and system and piping loads do not exceed the capacity of any individual supporting structural member or group of structural members. B. Supplemental structural distribution members shall be required when equipment gravity and seismic loads exceed design loads shown on the structural drawings and specifications. Requirements will be established by the Architect. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 010 6 4 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL SEISMIC ANCHORAGE 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL REQUIREMENTS C All systems and equipment shall be connected to the building's structural system in a rigid manner except units with special vibration isolation mounting requirements. D The Contractor shall make available to the Architect that information required to verify the anchorage (restraint) of the following critical equipment: 1 In -line centrifugal fans 2. Vaneaxial fans and cabinet fans 3. Air handling units 4 Chillers 5 Boiler and breeching/stack 6. Chilled water pumps 7 Hot water heating and circulation pumps 8. Storage tanks 9 Condenser water pumps 10. Compression tanks 11 Air compressors 12. Cooling towers 13. Cooling tower separator and pump 14 Converter 15 Domestic water booster pump assembly 16. Fire pump and controller 17 Air conditioning units 18. Fan coil units 19 Engine generators, switchgear, mufflers, and radiators 20. Service switchgear 21 Distribution panels (floor mounted) 22. Motor control centers 23 Transformers E. Information to be provided shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1 Center of gravity 2. Weight 3 Footprint 4 Space envelope 5 Tie -down provisions 1 7 CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS BY LOCATION AND STRUCTURAL MEMBER A. Slabs on Grade 1 Conduits, pipe, and ducts may be fastened to the grade slab with supports spaced in accordance with the requirements of Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical. 2. For heavy building equipment (500 pounds or more), submit information on the following for review a. Weight MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 010 6 4 PAGE 3 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL SEISMIC ANCHORAGE 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL REQUIREMENTS b. Dimensions c. Center of gravity d. Vibration criteria e. Base connection details 3 The type of fastener to be used on the grade slab connections shall be either cast -in -place anchor bolts or wedge anchors as specified in Paragraph 1 7 below B. Suspended Slabs 1 Same as requirements for Paragraph 1. 6.A above with modifications specified in Paragraph 1.6.E below 2. For heavy building equipment (500 pounds or more), submit information on the following for review a. Weight b Dimensions c. Center of gravity d. Vibration criteria e. Base connection details 3. The type of fastener to be used on the suspended floor and roof slabs shall be wedge anchors as specified in Paragraph 17 below C Suspended Ceilings: Support and brace in accordance with UBC requirements. D Lighting Fixtures: In suspended ceilings, provide auxiliary supports to the structure in accordance with UBC requirements. E. Equipment and Systems Suspended from Underside of Suspended Slabs or Roof 1 Provide gravity hangers or frames for conduit and pipes running perpendicular to the floor joists or beams. Space the hangers as follows: Pipe Size Maximum Spacing 2 1/2 -inch 11 feet 4 -inch 14 feet 5 -inch 16 feet 6-inch 16 feet 8 -inch 14 feet 10 -inch and over Layout subject to approval of Architect 2. Provide gravity hangers at 10 feet maximum for ducts running perpendicular to joists and beams. 3 Pipes, conduits, and ducts that are oriented parallel to joists or beams shall have vertical supports spaced at a maximum of 10 feet. Supports shall be attached to spreader beams connected to two or more joists as required by the Architect. 4 Lateral or transverse seismic sway bracing shall be provided at 25 feet maximum. It may be anchored at each girder that is oriented perpendicular to the pipe, conduit, or duct. Location of the intermediate bracing between main girder lines shall be staggered for the individual runs and trades to avoid the concentration of loads on any individual joist or beam. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 01064 PAGE 4 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL SEISMIC ANCHORAGE 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL REQUIREMENTS 5 Longitudinal seismic bracing may be located at girders, with a maximum spacing of 50 feet on center and at ends, turns, and bends with the same restriction as noted in Paragraph 1.6.E.4 above. F Vertical Runs Between Floors: Provide tube or metal stud supports in accordance with requirements of this section. Connect to concrete floor or steel framing as noted in Paragraph 17 below 1 8 GENERAL CONNECTIONS TO STRUCTURE A. The following wedge anchors (approved by ICBO) may be used as attachments to the concrete slabs. Phillips Red -head, Parabolt, Dynabolt, Star and Ramset. For seismic design of the anchorage, a safety factor of 3 shall be used with the ultimate -rated capacity of the anchorage. For gravity load design at working stress, a safety factor of 5 shall be applied to the ultimate rated capacity of the anchorage. These safety factors apply for continuous inspection, as specified in Paragraph 1 10 below Installation of wedge anchors shall be field tested as specified in Paragraph 1.9 below B. At suspended slabs, wedge anchors shall be located at the thickened areas of slabs with metal deck. C Welded and bolted connections are not permitted to the main structural members (e.g. beams, girders, columns, braces, etc.) except as noted in the following or by special approval: 1 Clip angles or plate angles may be welded to structural columns, girders, and beams (flanges and webs) with 3/16 -inch by 3 -inch maximum fillet welds. 2. Verify all bolted connections used to webs of steel shapes with Architect. D Clamps with positive grip or threaded fasteners may be used to attach to steel beam or girder webs. No 'C" clamps are permitted. 1 9 CERTIFICATION OF CONNECTION DESIGN A. All design data and shop drawings shall be submitted for approval by the Architect before the equipment anchorage is fabricated or installed. Allow 4 weeks from time of submittal of design data and shop drawings for review The following information must be included in the design data and shop drawings. 1 Exact dimension and intended locations of each unit 2. Verification and location of weight (e.g. plan and height location of the center of gravity) 3 Scale drawings showing base details with original intended connection system 1 10 FIELD TEST A. A calibrated torque wrench shall be used to field test the installation of selected wedge anchorage. The wrench shall be calibrated by a licensed testing laboratory through tensile tests on the wedge anchors. In the field verification test, the wedge anchors shall be torque tested to 1/2 the ultimate pull -out capacity B. Fifty percent of the wedge anchors shall be field- tested if their design tensile load is more than 250 pounds. If the design tensile load is 250 pounds or less, 10 percent of the anchorages shall be field tested. C One percent of the wedge anchors shall be field- tested for withdrawal at 1 1/2 times the design loadings. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 01064 PAGE S OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL SEISMIC ANCHORAGE 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL REQUIREMENTS PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED 01996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 01064 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 01065 PAGE 1 CODE AND PERMIT REQUIREMENTS FART 1 GENERAL, 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1 3 APPLICABLE CODES AND ORDINANCES A. Uniform Building Code, latest edition with Washington State Amendments B. Uniform Mechanical Code, latest edition C Uniform Fire Code, latest edition D Life Safety Code, NFPA 101 latest edition E. Uniform Plumbing Code, latest edition F National Electrical Code, latest edition with Washington State Amendments G Washington State Requirements for Barrier Free Standards, WAC 51 20, latest edition H. Washington State Rules and Regulations for Hospital Construction, WAC 246 -318, latest edition I. State Environmental Protection Act J State Fire Marshal Requirements K. WAC 212 14 State Fire Alarm Code L. City of Port Angeles Zoning Codes and Ordinances PART 2 BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS 2 1 REFERENCED CODE A. The Uniform Building Code, latest edition with Washington State Amendments 2 2 PROJECT CLASSIFICATION A. Seismic Zone: No. 3 B. Fire Zone: N/A C Occupancy Groups: I -1 D Construction Type: Type 1 FR E. Building Floor Area 1 Area of Remodeling: 7,000 square feet F Fire Protection: Building is fully sprinklered. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 01065 PAGE 2 CODE AND PERMIT REQUIREMENTS PART 3 ENERGY CODE REQUIREMENTS 3 1 GOVERNING CODE A. Washington State Energy Code, WAC 51 11 latest edition with all updates 3 2 PROJECT CLASSIFICATION AND ANALYSIS A. Value of alteration does not exceed 60 percent of the replacement value of the existing building. PART 4 PERMITS AND FEES 4 1 GENERAL A. Comply with Section 00510, Form of Agreement. B. Owner shall pay for permit review fees and obtain and pay for the Port Angeles building permit. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all additional permits, approvals, licenses, fees, bonds, and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. Any drawings, received from governing agencies, which are obtained by the Contractor and have corrective notes attached or on such drawings shall be reviewed by the Contractor prior to construction. Notify Architect of any corrective notes prior to doing the Work. C Contractor shall coordinate and obtain all Certification for Owner's occupancy and use of this project or portions of this Work. 01996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 01065 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL. 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 USE OF STANDARDS A. Not all organizations listed below are referenced in the Contract Documents. This list is provided to help the Contractor locate referenced standards, and every effort has been made to provide accurate information. The Contractor is responsible for adherence to all standards referenced in the Contract Documents whether or not they are included in this section 1 3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS SECTION 01091 PAGE 1 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. Individual sections indicate which codes and standards the Contractor must keep available at the project site for reference. B. Publication Dates: Where the date of issue of a reference standard is not specified, comply with the standard in effect as of date of Contract Documents. C Updated Standards: At the request of the Architect, Contractor, or authority having jurisdiction, submit a change order proposal where an applicable code or standard has been revised and reissued after the date of the Contract Documents and before performance of work affected. The Architect will decide whether to issue a change order to proceed with the updated standard. D Conflicting Requirements 1 Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, the most stringent requirements will be enforced unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. Refer requirements that are different but apparently equal, and uncertainties as to which quality level is more stringent to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. 2. In every instance, the quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum to be provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly within specified tolerances, with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum values, as noted, or appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. E. Copies of Standards 1 Each entity engaged in construction on the project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity's construction activity Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 2. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction activity the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. F Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations as referenced in Contract Documents are defined to mean the associated names. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed to be, but are not ensured to be, accurate and up to date as of date of Contract Documents. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 4 LIST OF STANDARDS AA Aluminum Association 900 19th Street NW Suite 300, Washington, D.C. 20006 (202) 862 5100 DAF-45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes American Architectural Manufacturers' Association 2700 River Road, Suite 118, Des Plaines, Illinois 60018 (312) 699-7310 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, Suite 225 Washington, D.C. 20001 (202) 624-5800 American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists P O. Box 12215 Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27709 (919) 549-8141 American Concrete Institute P O. Box 19150, Detroit, Michigan 48219 (313) 532 2600 214 AAMA AASHTO AATCC Aa 301 84(88) 304 315 318 506R 506.2 Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete Recommended Practice for Shotcreting Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete AGC Associated General Contractors of America 1200 Westlake North, Seattle, Washington 98109 (206) 284 -0061 AHA American Hardboard Association 520 N. Hicks Road, Palatine, Illinois 60067 (312) 934 -8800 AI Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building, College Park, Maryland 20740 (301) 277-4258 AIA American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue Northwest, Washington, D C. 20006 (202) 626-7300 SECTION 01091 PAGE 2 REFERENCE STANDARDS MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 01091 PAGE3 REFERENCE STANDARDS AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 400 North Michigan Avenue, 8th Floor Chicago, Illinois 60611 (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1133 Fifteenth Street NW Washington, D.C. 20036 (202) 452 7100 Specification for Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members Ail Associated Laboratories 641 S. Vermont Street, Palatine, Illinois 60067 (312) 358-7400 ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee P.O. Box 210, Germantown, Maryland 20874 (301) 972 1700 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 30 W University Drive, Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004 (312) 394 -0150 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, New York 10018 (212) 354-3300 A10 Series Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition APA American Plywood Association P.O. Box 11700, Tacoma, Washington 98411. (206) 565-6600 APWA American Public Works Association, Washington Chapter Standard Specifications for Municipal Public Works Construction ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle NE, Atlanta, Georgia 30329 (404) 636 -8400 Handbook, Fundamentals (1981 Errata) ASM Architectural Specification Manual ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street, New York, New York 10017 (212) 705 -7722 Elevator Code ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers 3617 Thousand Oaks Boulevard, Suite 210 Westlake, California 91362 (805) 495 -7120 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103 (215) 299 -5400 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL Standards in Building Codes: A36 A53 A82 Al20 Al23 A153 A167 A185 A193/A193M A276 A307 A312/A312M A361 A366 A446/A446M A500 A501 A525 A526/A526M A527/A527M A554 A563 A569/A569M A570/A570M A611 A615 A775/775M A780 A786/A786M SECTION 010 91 PAGE 4 REFERENCE STANDARDS Standard Specification for Structural Steel Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc- Coated Welded and Seamless Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement Pipe, Steel, 'Black and Hot Dipped Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip Steel Welded Wie Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Mateials for High Temperature Service Stainless Steel and Heat Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process for Roofing and Siding Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes Hot Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commerical Quality Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Lock- Forming Quality Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot Rolled, Structural Quality Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Structural Quality Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings Rolled Steel Floor Plates MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 010 91 PAGE 5 REFERENCE STANDARDS B32 Solder Metal B209 Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate B211 Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire B221 Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes B316 Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Rivet and Cold- Heading Wire and Rods B429 Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube C33 Concrete Aggregates C36 Gypsum Wallboard C42 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete C94 Ready -Mix Concrete C143 Method of Test of Slump of Portland Cement Concrete C150 Portland Cement C260 Air- Entraining Admixtures for Concrete C332 Lightweight Aggregates for Insulating Concrete C495 Compressive Strength of Lightweight Insulating Concrete C513 Securing, Preparing, and Testing Specimens from Hardened Lightweight Insulating Concrete for Compressive Strength C518 Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Appartus C578 Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation C612 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation C665 Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing D146 Methods of Sampling and Testing Bitumen- Saturated Felts and Fabrics Used in Roofing and Waterproofing D412 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension D573 Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration in an Air Oven D624 Test Method for Rubber Property- Tear Resistance D746 Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact D882 Test Methods for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting D1149 Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber D1751 Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) D1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction D1938 Test Method for Tear Propagation Resistance of Elastic Film and Thin Sheeting by a Single -Tear Method MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 010 91 PAGE 6 REFERENCE STANDARDS D2626 Specification for Asphalt- Saturated and Coated Organic Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofmg D4637 Vulcanized Rubber Sheet Used in Single -Ply Roof Membrane E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Material E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials E136 Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees C E605 Standard Test Methods for Thickness and Desnity of Sprayed Fire- Resistive Material Applied to Structural Members E736 Standard Test Method for Cohesion/Adehsion of Sprayed Fire- Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 2310 S. Walter Reed Drive, Arlington, Virginia 22206 (703) 671 -9100 Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program (referred to in contract documents as AWI quality standards AWPA American Wood Preservers' Association P.O. Box 849 Stevensville, Maryland 21666 (301) 643 -4163 AWPB American Wood Preservers' Bureau P O. Box 5283, Springfield, Virginia 22150 (703) 339 -6660 AWPI American Wood Preservers' Institute 1651 Old Meadow Road, McLean, Virginia 22101 AWS American Welding Society P.O Box 351040, 550 LeJeune Road Northwest, Miami, Florida 33135 (305) 443-9353 D1 1 Structural Welding Code -Steel D1.2 Structural Welding Code D1.3 Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel D1 4 Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 W Quincy Avenue, Denver Colorado 80235 (303) 794 -7711 BANC Brick Association of North Carolina P O. Box 13290, Greensboro, North Carolina 27415 (919) 273 -5566 BHMA Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association 60 East 42nd Street, Room 511 New York, New York 10165 (212) 682-8142 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 01091 PAGE 7 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL REFERENCE STANDARDS 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road, Schaumburg, Illinois 60195 (312) 490-1700 MSP 1 Manual of Standard Practice Placing Reinforcing Bars Bar Support Specifications CSI The Construction Specifications Institute 601 Madison Street, Alexandria, Virginia 22314 (703) 684 -0300 CTI Ceramic Tile Institute of America 700 North Virgil Avenue, Los Angeles, California 90029 (213) 660-1911 FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association White Lakes Professional Building, 3310 West Harrison, Topeka, Kansas 66611 (913) 266 -7013 Glazing Manual Sealant Manual FM Factory Mutual Engineering and Research 1151 Boston Providence Turnpike, Norwood, Massachusetts 02062 (617) 762 -4300 FMS 1 28 Insulated Steel Deck FMS 1-49 Perimeter Flashing FMS P7825 Approval Guide GA Gypsum Association 1603 Orrington Avenue, Evanston, Illinois 60201 (312) 491 1744 GTA Glass Tempering Association 66 -9 -20 Specification for Ceramic Enameled Spandrel Glass Fully Tempered or Heat Strengthened IFFE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 345 East 47th Street, New York, New York 10017 (212) 705-7900 IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council Route 11 Industrial Park, Cortland, New York 13045 (607) 753-6711 MLA Metal Lath Association 221 North LaSalle Street, Chicago, Illinois 60601 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 010 91 PAGE 8 REFERENCE STANDARDS ML /SFA Metal Lath /Steel Framing Association 600 South Federal Street, Suite 400, Chicago, Illinois 60605 (312) 922-6222 Specification for Metal Lathing and Furring NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 600 S. Federal Street, Suite 400, Chicago, Illinois 60601 (312) 922 -6222 MBG 531 Metal Bar Grating Manual Metal Finishes Manual NBS National Bureau of Standards Washington, D.C. 20234 NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association P.O. Box 781 Herndon, Virginia 22070 (301) 435 -4900 Tek Bulletin No. 45 NCRPM National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Suite 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814 (301) 657 2652 NEC National Electric Code (from NFPA) NECA National Electrical Contractors Association 7315 Wisconsin Avenue, Bethesda, Maryland 20814 (301) 657 3110 NJG -6 Temporary Job Utilities and Services NEIL National Elevator Industry Inc. 630 Third Avenue, New York, New York 10016 (212) 986-1545 Minimum Passenger Elevator Requirements for the Handicapped NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 2101 L Street NW Suite 300, Washington, D.C. 20037 (202) 457 -8700 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park, Quincy Massachusetts 02269 (617) 770-3000 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows 241 Building Construction and Demolition Options 252 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association P.O. Box 34518, Memphis, Tennessee 38184 (901) 377 1818 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 010 91 PAGE 9 REFERENCE STANDARDS NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association 3166 Des Plaines Avenue, Suite 132, Des Plaines, Illinois 60018 (312) 635 -7744 NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (formerly NWMA) 1400 E. Touhy Avenue #G54 Des Plaines, Illinois 60018 (312) 299-5200 I.S 1 Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 175 W Jackson Boulevard, Chicago, Illinois 60604 (312) 786 -0300 MNL 116 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products MNL 117 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products MNL 127 Recommended Practice for Erection of Precast Concrete PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America 614 Industry Drive, Tukwila, Washington 98188 (206) 364-5165 Architectural Specification Manual SAMA Scientific Apparatus Makers Association 1101 Sixteenth Street NW Washington, D.C. 20036 (202) 223-1360 SDI Steel Door Institute d o A. P Wherry and Associates, Inc. 712 Lakewood Center N, 14600 Detroit Avenue, Cleveland, Ohio 44107 (216) 226 -7700 105 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council Route 11, Industrial Park, Cortland, New York 13045 (607) 753-6711 SJI Steel Joist Institute 1205 48th Street North, Suite A, Myrtle Beach, South Carolina 29577 (803) 449 -0487 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association P.O. Box 70, Merrifield, Virginia 22116 (703) 790-9890 Architectural Sheet Metal Manual MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 010 91 PAGE 10 REFERENCE STANDARDS SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Avenue, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15213 (412) 268 -3327 PA 1 Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting Paint 12 Cold- Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film) Paint 20 Zinc -Rich Primers (Type I, 'Inorganic, and Type II, 'Organic SP 1 Solvent Cleaning SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning SP 5 White Metal Blast Cleaning SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning SP 8 Pickling SP 10 Near White Blast Cleaning Sweet's Sweet's Catalog File Sweet's Division McGraw -Hill Information Systems Company Attn. Direct Marketing Dept. 20th Floor 1221 Avenue of the Americas, New York, New York 10124 (800) 521 2737 TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. P.O. Box 326, Princeton, New Jersey 08542 (609) 921 7050 UBC Uniform Building Code International Conference of Building Officials 5360 Workman Mill Road, Whittier California 90601 UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingsten Road, Northbrook, Illinois 60062 (312) 272-8800 Building Materials Directory The Recognized Component Directory Fire Resistance Directory WABO Washington Association of Building Officials WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau P O Box 23145 Portland, Oregon 97223 (503) 639-0651 WMMP Wood Molding and Millwork Producers WM4 General Requirements For Wood Molding WWPA Western Wood Products Association 522 SW 5th Avenue, Yeon Building, Portland, Oregon 97204 -2122 (503) 224-3930 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 010 91 PAGE 11 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1 5 FEDERAL GOVERNMENT AGENCIES CE Corps of Engineers (U.S. Department of the Army) Chief of Engineers Referral Washington, D.C. 20314 (202) 272-0660 CRD C621 Specification for Nonshrink Grout CFR Code of Federal Regulations N. Capitol Street (between G and H Streets NW) Washington, D.C. 20402 (202) 783 -3238 (available from the Government Printing Office) (material is usually first published in the Federal Register) 16 CFR Part 1201 29 CFR 1926 Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite 40 CFR 763 Interim Method of the Detemrination of Asbestos in Bulk Insulation Samples CS Commercial Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402 (202) 377 2000 DOD Department of Defense P 21035A Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair (Metric) (Navy) DOT Department of Transportation 400 Seventh Street SW Washington, D.C. 20590 (202) 366 -4000 EPA Environmental Protection Agency 401 M Street SW Washington, D C. 20460 (202) 382 2090 FS Federal Specification (from GSA) Specifications Unit (WFSIS) 7th and D Streets SW Washington, D.C. 20406 (202) 472 2205 or (202) 472 2140 FF- B -561C Bolds (Screw), Lag FF -S -325 Shield, Expansion; Nail Expasnion; and Nail, Drive Screw (Devices, Anchoring, Masonry) FF -W -84A Washers, Lock (Spring) FF W -92B Washer Flat (Plain) HH -I- 1972/1 Insulation Board, thermal, Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate, Faced with Aluminum Foil on Both Sides of the Foam MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL TT- P-645A Primer Paint, Zinc Chromate, Alkyd Type GSA General Services Administration F Street and 18th Street NW Washington, D.C. 20405 (202) 472 1082 MIL Military Standardization Documents (U.S. Department of Defense) Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19120 MIL- M- 17194D Metal, Expanded, Steel MIL- M- 17999C Metal, Expanded, Aluminum OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration (U.S. Department of Labor) Government Printing Office Washington, D.C. 20402 (202) 523-6091 29 CFR Part 1910 PS Product Standard of NBS (U.S. Department of Commerce) Government Printing Office Washington, D.C. 20402 (202) 783-3238 1996 Mahlum Nardfora McKinley Gordon SECTION 010 91 PAGE 12 REFERENCE STANDARDS HH- I -558B Insulation, Blocks, Boards, Blankets, Felts, Seeving (Pipe and Tube Covering), Thermal (Mineral Fiber Industrial Type) TT-C -494B Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant END OF SECTION 01091 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 01095 PAGE 1 EXPLANATIONS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS FART 1 GENF,RAl. 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified this section. B. Definitions and use of the contract documents shall be per Section 00700 General Conditions, and as follows. In case of conflict, the General Conditions shall take precedence. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. This sections includes the following: 1 Explanation of contract documents 2. Definitions 3. Abbreviations 4 Symbols 5 Keynotes 1 4 BIDDER AND CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY A. Bidders and Contractors are responsible for providing subbidders and subcontractors with all contract documents necessary to achieve accurate completion of the work. PART 2 EXPLANATIONS 2 1 PURPOSE A. The contract documents collect into a single organization system all bid, contract, and technical documents related to project construction in section format. 2 2 SPECIFICATION CONTENT A. Language: This specification uses certain conventions in the use of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows: 1 Wording of the contract documents is abbreviated or streamlined and frequently includes incomplete sentences. 2. 'Shall, 'the Contractor shall, shall be, and similar words and phrases are hereby defined to have mandatory compulsory meaning. 3 These specifications are written in imperative and streamlined form. This imperative language is directed to the Contractor unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Assignment of Specialists 1 The specification requires that certain specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in the operations to be performed. The specialists must be engaged for those activities, and assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. Nevertheless, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling contract requirements remains with the Contractor MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2 3 DESCRIPTION OF DOCUMENTS B. Volume 1 Project Drawings 1 Division A. Architectural Drawings 2. Division M. Mechanical Drawings 3 Division E. Electrical Drawings SECTION 010 9 5 PAGE 2 EXPLANATIONS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 2. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. 3 Use of titles such as carpentry' is not intended to imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as carpenter It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name. 4 The term "installer' shall be used to refer to all specialists. A. Volume 1, Project Manual 1 Division 0: Bidding requirements, contract forms, and conditions of the contract 2. Division 1 General requirements 3 Divisions 2 through 14 Architectural technical specifications 4 Division 15: Mechanical technical specifications 5 Division 16: Electrical technical specifications C Size and Color 1 Project Manual Volume 1 is prepared in 8- 1 /2 -by -1l -inch format and bound. Divisions 0 and 1 are copied on blue paper Divisions 2 through 16 on white paper 2. Project Drawings Volume 2 is in large drawing sheet format and bound. Drawings are reproduced as blueline or blackline on white paper. D Page Number Section page number are consecutive only for each section as noted in page heading. Section 00003, Table of Contents, lists each section and its number of pages. E. Section Format 1 The technical specifications are organized per the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) MASTERFORMAT (1988 Edition). 2. The use of the section format of MASTERFORMAT has been extended to provide a similar format for all bid and contract documents, including drawings. 3 Basic groups of documents and information are organized into divisions, sections, or paragraphs. 4 References to and within the contract documents shall state item section number and name (and paragraph number if required). This paragraph is referred to as Paragraph 2.1.H.4 (or Paragraph 2.1.H to refer to all four paragraphs), Section 01095 Explanations, Definitions, Abbreviations, Symbols. F Reference System 1 References may be general (broadscope) or specific (narrowscope). Broadscope shall be meant to include derivative sections (example: Section 01300, Submittals, also includes Section 01310, Progress Schedule). 2. Numbering of sections is for identification only and may not be consecutive. Contractor shall check his copies of the contract documents with Section 00003, Table of Contents, to verify that they are complete. Notify Architect of incomplete copies. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 010 9 5 PAGE 3 EXPLANATIONS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 3 Section number references used on drawings serve to identify a material or detail with its applicable specification section. Other materials not so identified shall be provided by the respective trades in the customary manner 4 Section number and name shall be used to identify the subject of any correspondence with its related specification section. PART 3 DEFINITIONS 3 1 GENERAL A. A substantial amount of the contract document language constitutes specific definitions for terms found in other contract documents. Certain terms used more generally throughout the contract documents are defined as follows. 3 2 TERMINOLOGY A. Addenda: Additions made to the contract documents during the bidding period. Used to revise, delete, or add to any of the bidding requirements or contract documents. 1 Approve: Where used in conjunction with the Architect's response or submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports, and claims by the Contractor the meaning will be held to the limitations of the Architect's responsibilities and duties as specified in Section 00700, General Conditions. In no case will approval' by the Architect be interpreted as an assurance to the Contractor that the requirements of the contract documents have been fulfilled. 2. As -built Drawings: Set of reproducible drawings prepared by the Contractor to indicate construction changes per Section 01700, Contract Closeout. 3 Bidding Requirements: Used to attract bidders and explain the procedures they are to follow in preparing and submitting their bids. 4 Construction Documents: All of the written and graphic documents prepared or assembled by the Architect for communicating the design and administering the construction contract. They include the following categories: bidding requirements, contract forms, conditions of the contract, specifications, drawings, addenda, and contract modifications. This term is interchangeable with contract documents. 5 Contract Documents: The legally enforceable requirements which become part of the contract when the agreement is signed. See construction documents' above. 6. Contract Modifications: After the agreement has been signed, any additions, deletions, or modifications of the work to be done are accomplished by change order or supplemental instructions. 7 Directed, Requested, etc. Where not otherwise explained, terms such as 'directed, 'requested, 'authorized, 'selected, approved, 'permitted, 'required, and 'accepted' mean 'directed by the Architect, 'requested by the Architect, etc. However no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. 8. Drawings: Graphic representation of the work to be done. Also referred to as project, design, or construction drawings. 9 Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term 'furnish is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation. 10. General Requirements: Synonymous with 'Division 1 sections. 11 Guarantee: A separate contract by a third party analogous to a surety bond, covering responsibility in case the principal fails to perform. Contractor provides a guarantee for materials and a warranty for field workmanship. "Guarantee' and 'warranty' are used interchangeably in these specifications as they relate to Section 00700 General Conditions.) MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 01095 PAGE 4 EXPLANATIONS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 12. Indicated: A cross reference to details, notes, or schedules on the drawings, other paragraphs or schedules in the specifications, and similar means of recording requirements in the contract documents. 13. Install: To describe operations at project site, including the actual unloading, unpacking, assembly erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. 14 Installer The person or entity engaged by the Contractor or his subcontractor or sub subcontractor for the performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including installations, erections, application, and similar required operations. It is a general requirement that installers be recognized experts in the work they are engaged to perform. 15 Project Site: The space available to the Contractor for the performance of the work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the project. The extent of the project site is shown on the drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land upon which the project is to be built. 16. Provide: Except to the extent further defined, means 'to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 17 Record Drawings: Set of prints kept on site and updated by the Contractor to indicate construction changes per Section 01720, Project Record Documents. 18. Shop Drawings: Drawings, schedules, and other information prepared by the Contractor to describe fabrication and installation of elements of the work. 19 Specifications: Define the qualitative requirements for products, materials, ad workmanship upon which the contract is based. Consist of Divisions 1 through 16. 20. Testing Laboratory. An independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests of the work, either at the project site or elsewhere, and to report and (if required) interpret the results of those inspections or tests. 21 Warranty An assurance by the principal that it will assume stipulated responsibilities for completed units. Manufacturer warrants its material. ("Guarantee and 'warranty' are used interchangeably in these specifications as they relate to Section 00700 General Conditions.) FART 4 ABBREVIATIONS 4 1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS A. Following is a list of abbreviations commonly used in specifications and on drawings. 1 AD architectural detail 2. AS architectural schedule 3. EXG existing 4 FCIO furnished by contractor installed by owner 5 FIC furnished and installed by contractor 6. HO furnished and installed by owner 7 FOIC furnished by owner, installed by contractor 8. MISC miscellaneous 9 MC not in contract 10 OC on center 11 OPP opposite 12. R radius 13 SBC Seattle Building Code MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 14 SIM similar 15 TYP typical 16. UBC Uniform Building Code 4 2 SCHEDULES A. Refer to Volume 2, Project Drawings, for schedules and their applicable abbreviations. Lay c SYMBOLS 5 1 GENERAL A. Refer to project drawings or details for symbols and special designations. 5 2 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS A. Where not otherwise noted, symbols are defined by Architectural Graphic Standards, published by John Wiley Sons, Inc. eighth edition. 5 3 MECHANICAL /ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS A. Graphic symbols used on mechanical and electrical drawings are generally aligned with symbols recommended by ASHRAE. Where appropriate, they are supplemented by more specific symbols recommended by technical associations including ASME, ASPE, IEEE, and similar organizations. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Architect for clarification before proceeding. 01996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 01095 PAGE 5 EXPLANATIONS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS END OF SECTION 01095 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 01121 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE REMODEL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERA!. 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. The presence of hazardous materials, including but not limited to asbestos, and related materials or substances, have been identified or determined at the project site to the best of the Owner's ability through a Good Faith Inspection. B. A copy of the Owner's hazardous materials survey is attached to this section and shall be maintained on file with the Owner and available to the Contractor and the Director of the Department of Labor and Industries, or his designee. 1 4 OWNER RESPONSIBILITY A. The abatement of hazardous materials shall be the responsibility of the Owner B. Any questions that arise related to hazardous materials and their disturbance, disruption or abatement shall be referred to the Owner for resolution. C The Owner shall bear the cost of hazardous materials abatement by a certified hazardous materials abatement contractor. 1 5 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY A. If any hazardous materials abatement must be undertaken in the course of performing Contractor's work, Contractor shall discuss the timing of such abatement work with owner and plan for the same in Contractor's work schedule prior to commencing any work on the project. B. Contractor shall not remove, disrupt or disturb any hazardous materials at any time. The Contractor shall have on site an employee who is certified for asbestos recognition during all phases of work. C In the event that Contractor encounters any previously unidentified hazardous materials, the Contractor shall immediately suspend work and inform the Owner when materials suspected of being hazardous are encountered at the project site. D The Owner shall engage the services of a certified hazardous materials contractor to identify hazardous materials and perform hazardous materials abatement. E. The Contractor shall commence work only upon receiving a written clearance from the Owner 1 6 ARCHITECT RESPONSIBILITY A. The Architect will not be responsible for the content of the hazardous materials abatement documents nor for the work done thereunder B. The Architect will not be required to provide any service or render any opinions related to hazardous materials. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 01121 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE REMODEL PROCEDURES FART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 ElEcuTISMI 3 1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall submit a copy of their project weekly safety meeting which shall include in the agenda a discussion on handling of hazardous materials. B. The Contractor will suspend work immediately and notify the Owner if previously unidentified materials suspected of being hazardous are encountered at the project site. C The Contractor shall perform initial demolition only to the extent required to expose undisturbed previously identified materials suspected of being hazardous per Section 02070 Selective Demolition. The Contractor will then cease work, notify the owner in writing that the contractor's forces have vacated the project site. D The Owner is responsible for engaging the services of certified and licensed independent hazardous materials abatement contractor and to secure all necessary permits from applicable agencies and remove hazardous materials. The Owner's abatement contractor shall enter the project site and abate the previously or subsequently identified materials suspected of being hazardous. E. The Contractor shall not resume work until receiving, in writing, clearance from the Owner that the abatement work has been completed. F Neither the Contractor nor the Owner will be penalized by the other for delays in the project schedule due to work required for hazardous materials abatement. The specified contract construction time shall be adjusted to add the actual calendar days lost due to the abatement period. The Contractor shall allow for up to ten (10) days of stopped work for abatement by the Owner's independent hazardous materials abatement contractor. 0 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 01121 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION SECTION 01122 PAGE 1 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REPORT A. The following AHERA Asbestos Survey dated October 22, 1996 was prepared for the Owner by Certified Industrial Hygiene Services, Inc. For the Contractor's convenience, the complete report is reproduced herein. B. The information included in the report shows records of the hazardous materials investigation. The Owner does not represent that the records show completely the existing conditions and does not guarantee any interpretation of these records or the correctness of any information shown on drawings relative to hazardous materials. C Any oral statement or representation made by an officer agent, or employee of the Owner with respect to the physical condition of the site of the work, the presence of hazardous materials, or hazardous material procedures shall not be binding upon the Owner. 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 01122 Certified 420 Maritime Bldg. Industrial 911 Western Venue Hygiene Seattle -A Q$104 Services Inc (206) 622 1096 FAX (206) 343 -3966 Background Information Sampling Plan CIHS Project 961002, pagel OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL PORT ANGELES, WA AHERA ASBESTOS SURVEY EAST WING, 3RD FLOOR October 1996 Certified Industrial Hygiene Services, Seattle WA performed an AHERA survey of the third floor, east wing of the Olympic Memorial Hospital on October 22, 1996. The purpose of the survey was to identify any asbestos containing material that would be impacted by the planned remodeling of this space into a Transitional Care Facility The survey was performed by AHERA inspectors Charles Hale and Dorothy Stansel. During the survey, Dan Jardine of Malhum Nordfors, McKinley Gordon was consulted in a conference call including CIHS staff and Michael Glenn, Olympic Memorial Hospital Administrator This clarified the plan for the remodel with particular reference to the manner in which the demolition and replacement of existing floor surfaces was anticipated. The third floor east wing in this survey was part of the original hospital construction from 1951 There have been several remodels of the east wing since it was originally built and the more recent of these have included a substantial amount of asbestos abatement. The two most recent projects include the conversion of much of this space to a Behavioral Medicine Unit in 1991 and the previous remodeling in 1990 in connection with replacement of water lines and related abatement of asbestos on the second floor below this space. Previous surveys at Olympic Memorial Hospital by CIHS provided some background data for this work. This included surveys extending back to 1987 which categorized the floor tile at that time as containing asbestos. It is important to relate the 1987 data to the drawing of how the walls were located and room numbers assigned at that time. In the course of the 1990 -91 remodel, some walls were relocated and room numbers reassigned. The vinyl asbestos tile was not removed in every location before laying new carpeting or floor tile. The survey of the third floor east wing area revealed seven categones of matenals which were examined and from which samples were collected as appropriate: 1 Plaster and plaster board in walls, 3 samples, 2. Vinyl tile and rolled sheet on the floors, 11 samples, 3 Mastic used with tile, 6 samples: 4 Acoustic ceiling tiles of four types, 4 samples; 5 Thermal system insulation on pipes above the ceilings no sample needed (fiberglass on roof drain line only), 6 Sprayed on fireproofing above the ceilings, 3 samples, 7 Insulation in the pipe chases at grid 9 which are to be opened in the remodeling process, no samples required Samples to be analyzed for the presence of asbestos were taken using the duplicity of samples required in the AHERA sampling protocols. A total of 27 samples were collected. The locations of each sample and the analytical results by Polarized Light Microscopy are included In addition a floor plan is included in which the specific location of sample sites has been marked. The laboratory analysis was performed using polarized light microscopy (PLM) by EMSL Laboratories of Seattle Washington. Findings and Analytical Results One thermal system insulation application was found above the ceilings. This was a roof drain system insulated with fiberglass insulation, a non suspect material requiring no sampling. The pipe can be seen at the location marked on the floor plan. It was agreed that a pipe chase should be opened because of the concern that at the time of original construction there may have been asbestos insulation used which would remain there and complicate the remodeling in the current project. The chase at grid 9 south was opened on its east side and examined visually and by touch. This revealed that abatement had occurred and that only new fiberglass thermal insulation was present. The chase was photographed (appendix "B All of the plaster gypsum board, ceiling tile and sprayed on insulation samples were negative for the presence of asbestos fibers in a concentration of >1% There were positive readings for asbestos in 7 of the samples all of which were obtained from the older vinyl floor covering. All of these materials were old tiles that had been overlaid with more recent non asbestos containing material with the exception of the vinyl sheet flooring found in the mop closet off the elevator lobby on the south side between grid 3 4 Similar matenals were sampled during remodel work in this area in 1990 and were found to contain chrysotile asbestos Previous surveys have identified the tile existing then in this area as Vinyl Asbestos Tile. In the current survey all the old sampled tile that had been covered by a more recent application was positive for asbestos. None of the new tile was positive for asbestos. It is reasonable to CIHS Project 961002, page2 assume that any older "buried" tile encountered in the course of the remodel will be asbestos containing. The mastic found on the old asbestos containing tile also contained asbestos but in amounts below AHERA significance 1 r Multiple layers of tile (which includes an old asbestos containing tile) were found during this survey between grid 6 7 north and south, between grid 9 -10 north only; between grid 3& 4 north only (the OB sleeping room and vestibule) Other areas on this floor with multiple layers of tile were not identified although some may emerge if the existing most recent layer of tile is removed. Discussion and Recommendations Certified Industrial Hygiene Services performed an AHERA type survey for asbestos on the third floor east wing of the Olympic Memorial Hospital on October 22nd, 1996. Twenty seven samples were taken. The only samples that were positive for asbestos were one small area of vinyl asbestos sheet flooring and those from old Vinyl Asbestos floor Tile that had been encapsulated by an overlay of non asbestos containing tile. The vinyl sheet is exposed but in fair condition. The mastics sampled along with the tile did contain asbestos but at a concentration below the quantification limit for the polarized light microscopic method. If the now covered under layer of tile is to be removed or otherwise disturbed arrangements must be made for its removal. Charles H. Hale AHERA Cert. 7013 -01 -02 Dorothy L. Stansel, C I.H. AHERA Cert. 7013 -0103 CIHS Project 961002, page3 44,,,,ei, efk* Certified Industrial H.gicne Services Inc CIHS Project 961002, page4 SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS DATA. date 10-22 -801 10 -22 -802 10-22 -803 10-22 -804 10 -22 -805 10 -22 -806 10 -22 -807 10-22 -809 10 -22 -810 10 -22 -811 10 -22 -813 10-22 -814 10- 22 -814a 10-22 -815 10- 22 -815a 10 -22 -816 10 -22 -817 10 -22 -818 10 -22 -819 10- 22 -819a 10 -22 -820 10- 22 -820a 10 -22 -821 10- 22 -821a 10 -22 -822 10 -22 -823 10- 22 -823a 420 Maritime Bldg. 911 \\estern Avenue Seattle WA 98104 (206) 622 1096 FAX (206) 343 3966 Material ceiling tile ceiling tile ceiling tile plaster gypsum board plaster ceiling tile fireproofing fireproofing fireproofing beige VAT greyVT (new) mastic beige VAT mastic lt. grey VT new beige VT new beige VT beige VAT mastic green VAT mastic brown VAT mastic sheet flooring green VAT mastic Location elevator lobby rooms 327, 329 nurses sta. room 321 room 321 wall behav med med room ceiling in 321 bathroom room 305 grid 3 above ceiling grid 3 above ceiling grid 3 above ceiling med room grid line 7 room 323 associated with #814 2nd layer room 323 associated with 815 behav medicine med room room 317 319) top layer grid line 6 second layer grid line 6 associated with #819 second layer grid line 6 associated with #820 second layer grid line 6 associated with 821 mop room near gnd line 3 second layer room 323 grid 9 -10 associated with 823 Method PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM PLM Result none found none found none found none found none found none found none found none found none found none found 3% chrysotile none found none found 8% chrysotile none found none found none found none found 8% chrysotile none found 7 chrysotile <1% chrysotile 7 chrysotile none found 25% chrysotile 5% chrysotile 1% chrysotile 'VIEW IT PIIOTO CIIIS Project 961002, page5 S 'TAKEN IN PIPE CHASE (a GRID 9 SO'I3TII CIHS Project 961002, page6 NEWER VINYL TILE (FOUND IN ROOMS IND. IN BLUE) SAMPLE 814 NEWER VINYL TILE FOUND IN BEHAV MED MED ROOM LND IN RED 1-0,4 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CIHS Project 961002, page? NEW BEIGE VINYL TILE NO ASBESTOS, SAMPLE 10-22 -817 OLD BEIGE Vinyl Asbestos Tile SAMPLE 10 -22 -815 THREE LAYERS WITH FOUR TYPES OF TILE FROM ROOM SOUTH ON GRID LINE 6, SAMPLES 10-22 -818, 819, 820 821 TWO LAYERS OF TILE IN ROOM 323 (GRID 9-10 NORTH) SAMPLE 10-22 -823 CITES Project 961002, pace8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 ii1111 ONII Oil 11111 MB INN INN Int on joit gin ion WI NMI in 0 0 `6) I 1 1 0 j1 1 I n Ir �Y Y Cer i6ed e]D Maritime BW{. IndustrW 911 WeWre Armee Hygiene Seattle, WA 9II01 Semites. foe. (QOM) 68.1096 1 I 0 0 14 CIHS 1 0 0 0 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091, Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. Attending or Conducting 1 General preconstruction conference 2. Subtrade preconstruction conferences 3. Progress payment meetings B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1 Section 01026, Payment Procedures 2. Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls SECTION 01200 PAGE 1 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 2 PROJECT MEF.TING,S 2 1 GENERAL PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Attendance 1 Owner, Architect, Contractor and his superintendent, major subcontractors, including the individuals responsible for scheduling, mechanical, and electrical work. B. Agenda 1 The purpose is to discuss all matters affecting progress and administration of the work. The Architect has the agenda on file which is available upon request. C Responsibility 1 Conference will be called by Architect at mutually agreeable time and place prior to issuing the Notice to Proceed. 2 2 SUBTRADE PRECONSTRUCTION (PREINSTALLATION) CONFERENCES A. Attendance 1 Meetings shall be held prior to start of work of certain subtrades per Divisions 2 through 16. 2. Attendance shall include Contractor and representative(s) of subtrade(s) as required. The Architect and Owner shall be notified at least 48 hours in advance for their optional attendance. B. Agenda 1 Purpose of these meetings is to ensure full understanding of necessary relation to the work, safety precautions, and other contract requirements of subject work. C Responsibility 1 Contractor shall arrange and conduct meetings at mutually agreeable time and place. Contractor shall record significant discussions and agreement and disagreements of each MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2 3 PROGRESS MEETINGS 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 01200 PAGE 2 PROJECT MEETINGS conference, along with the approved schedule. Distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned promptly including the Owner and Architect. Do not proceed if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date. A. Attendance 1 Owner, Architect, and Contractor 2. Architect's consultants and Contractor's subcontractors shall attend when required. B. Agenda 1 Agenda is attached to this section and shall be used by the Contractor All items requiring action will be assigned to the appropriate individual and carried forward to each subsequent meeting retaining the original meeting and item number The agenda is on disc and available to the Contractor upon request. C Responsibility 1 Day of week and time shall be as agreed at general preconstruction conference. 2. Architect and Contractor shall determine in advance if consultant or subcontractor attendance is required. 3. Meeting minutes shall be by the Contractor and Faxed to all involved individuals within 2 working days of the meeting. END OF SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETING NO: DATE TIME: PLACE ATTENDEES COPIES MEETING NO. /ITEM NO. PROGRESS MEETING AGENDA Olympic Memorial Hospital 3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel BY: FOLLOW UP ACTION DISCUSSION ITEMS REQUIRED BY Government Agency Concerns Contractor Questions Review Architects Supplementary Instruction Review Change Order and Change Order Proposal Review Submittal Status Construction Progress and Schedule Review Site Utilization, Access, and Temporary Facilities Payment Application Review Additional Contractor Concerns Additional Owner Concerns Additional Architect /Engineer Concerns Safety PROJECT NO: 95110.00 DATE: Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon 1996 Form 1068 10/96 MA HLUM N O R D F O I Mc KIN LE GORDON 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 Seattle WA 98121 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 F MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GRNRRAL 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A complete list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION SECTION 01300 PAGE 1 SUBMITTALS A. General: Preparing and processing submittals as required by Section 00700, General Conditions, the specifications, and as follows. B. Required Submittals 1 Schedule of values 2. Construction progress schedule 3 Schedule of submittals 4 List of proposed subcontractors 5 Material and product data 6. Shop drawings and samples 7 Record documents 8. Maintenance and operation manuals 9 Warranty manual 10. Miscellaneous submittals C Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere 1 Substitutions, Section 01630, Product Options and Substitutions 2. Project closeout requirements, Section 01700, Contract Closeout 3 Particular submittal requirements, individual sections of Divisions 2 through 16 1 4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE A. When applicable, each section of Divisions 2 through 16 will include submittal requirements specific to that section (i.e. shop drawings, samples, product data, etc.). The general submittal requirements listed in this section will apply to all sections whether specific requirements are listed or not. B. Each copy of each submittal should have the following information on the cover on the first page of the submittal, or on a permanent label attached to the submittal, as applicable: 1 Project name 2. Submittal number correlated with the submittal schedule provided per 3 10.2 of the General Conditions 3 Date of submittal 4 Name of the Contractor 5 Name of the Architect 6. Name and phone number of subcontractor, supplier, and installer 7 Name of manufacturer MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 013 0 0 PAGE 2 SUBMITTALS 8. Number and title of applicable specification section 9 Drawing number and detail references, when applicable 10. Other necessary identifying information, such as stating the different parts of the submittal (i.e. product data, samples, etc.) and how many of each item are provided C Contractor shall sign or initial each copy of each submittal to certify compliance with requirements of the contract documents or shall notify the Architect, in writing at time of submittal, of all deviations from requirements of contract documents. D Address to Architect. Copy and distribute as specified for each type of submittal (below). Include with each submittal completed Submittal Cover Sheet Transmittal (Form 1046 example at end of this section). E. Submittals to receive Architect's action marking should have blank space provided on cover first page, or label for action marking. F Package submittals required for each particular specification section together Incomplete submittals will generally be returned to the Contractor without review G Architect to receive submittals no less than 15 working days in advance of required approval time to allow proper review by Architect or his consultants. Submittals requiring action in less than 15 working days are not timely submittals. H. Submittals will be accepted from the Contractor only Submittals received from other entities will be returned without action. I. Copies in excess of the number requested will not be returned. 1 5 FORMAT A. Unless otherwise specified or impractical, use paper no larger than 8 -1/2 by 11 inches, except drawings to be size required, but folded to 8 -1/2 by 11 inches where possible. 1 6 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor's first payment request will not be processed prior to receipt of: 1 Schedule of Values 2. Construction Progress Schedule 3 Schedule of Submittals 4 List of Proposed Subcontractors B. Transmit each submittal at or before the time indicated on the approved schedule of submittals. C Prepare and transmit each submittal requiring approval sufficiently in advance of scheduled performance of the work to which it relates to allow for adequate review and processing time, including time for resubmittal if necessary D Prepare and transmit each informational submittal prior to start of the work involved, unless the submittal is of a type which cannot be prepared until after completion of the work. Submit promptly E. If processing time for a particular submittal will be critical to progress of the work, so advise the Architect on the submittal. F The Architect will notify the Contractor when a submittal is being delayed for coordination. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 7 COORDINATION SECTION 01300 PAGE 3 SUBMITTALS G No extension of time will be authorized because of the Contractor's failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the work. A. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of the work. Coordinate each separate submittal with other submittals and related activities that require sequential performance. B. Coordinate submittal of different units of interrelated work so that no submittal will be delayed by the Architect's need to review a related submittal. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on any such submittal until the related submittals are received. C Coordinate schedule so that casework shop drawings are not submitted for review during the same two week period as any other submittal. 1 8 REVIEW AND RETURN OF SUBMITTALS A. Architect shall review and mark with appropriate action per Section 00700, General Conditions. 1 No Exception Taken: Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the contract documents. Accepted shall also mean subject to plans and specifications, dimensions and quantities not guaranteed. 2. Note Markings, Confirm: Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies both with notations and corrections on the submittal and with requirements of the contract documents. 3 Not Accepted, Resubmit: Do not proceed with work covered by the submittal. Revise the submittal or prepare a new submittal in accordance with notations made. Resubmit the submittal without delay B. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor by most economical mode. C Contractor shall perform resubmittals in the same manner as original submittals. Indicate all changes other than those requested by the Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Prepare per Section 01027 Schedule of Values. 3 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Prepare per Section 01310, Progress Schedule. 3 3 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS A. Title 'Schedule of Submittals. B. Prepare and submit for approval a schedule showing all submittals and their initial submittal dates required for coordination of the work. C Organize the schedule by the applicable specification section number D Submit the schedule within thirty (30) days after commencement of the work. E. Revise and resubmit the schedule for approval when required to keep current. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 4 LIST OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS SECTION 013 0 0 PAGE 4 SUBMITTALS A. Format 1 Title 'List of Proposed Subcontractors. 2. List items in order they occur in specification sections. 3 Each list item shall state specification section number(s) and name(s) of subcontract work and subcontractor's name. B. Required Information 1 Section 00700, General Conditions, requires identification of subcontractors. This is hereby interpreted to mean those subcontractors who shall install or furnish and install work in the project. 2. If, with Architect's approval, identification of certain subcontractors is delayed, so indicate in list. Furnish prior to first progress payment application. C Distribution: Submit three copies to Architect. 3 5 MATERIAL AND PRODUCT DATA A. General 1 Purpose of these submittals is to establish the materials and products to be used in the work. 2. Submit to the Architect, shop drawings, samples, and maintenance and operation manuals for related submittal work. B. Format 1 Provide with cover sheet' information per Paragraph 1 4.B. 2. Bind to allow removal or insertion of pages. Provide suitable protective cover 3. Present items in order they occur in specification sections. C Required Information 1 Contractor's statement of approval and identification of any deviations from contract documents per Section 00700, General Conditions. Place on face or cover sheet' of submittals. 2. Description of materials, products, or systems required by all sections of the specification. Provide sufficient technical information to establish conformance with specification via: a. Manufacturer's literature or other necessary descriptive materials, including installation instructions. b Contractor's letter that minor miscellaneous items (nails, bolts, etc.) shall conform to specified standards c. Information requirements for mechanical and electrical items (refer to Divisions 15 and 16). 3 Where possible, submittal should include rough -in and dimension information to preclude need for further submittal per below 4 Indicate clearly for each item the need for selection by Architect of color style, mounting, etc. Selections will be returned with approval. 5 State if item is off -shore items per Section 00800, Supplemental Conditions. 6. Include recommendations for application and use. 7 Show special coordination requirements for the product. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 013 0 0 PAGE 5 SUBMITTALS D Distribution 1 Submit four copies to Architect for all structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical submittals: one each for consultant, Owner and Architect and one for return to Contractor. All architectural submittals require three copies. 2. Architect will forward approved copy of submittal to Contractor 3 6 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES A. General 1 Purpose of these submittals is to determine installation and erection requirements for components of the work. 2. Submit with product data, samples, test data, and installation or application procedures and other submittals as delineated for each section of the specifications. 3 Show all conditions and connections to other work on shop drawings. 4 Submittals under this part are not intended to duplicate those specified under Paragraph 3.5 above. B. Format 1 Provide with cover sheet' information per Paragraph 1 4.B. 2. Submit one set of blueline or blackline prints of appropriate size and one sepia copy of drawings or two 8- 1/2 -by -11 -inch or 11 -by -17 -inch copies, whichever applies. Provide one additional copy of all civil, structural, mechanical, and electrical shop drawings. Reviewed sepia will be returned to Contractor 3 Sample size (2 inches minimum) to be as necessary to display requested color texture, pattern, or construction. Provide four samples total, one sample will be retained by the Architect and one sample is to be kept at the jobsite at all times. C Required Information 1 Submittal information required per specifications for subject work. 2. Reference to work 'by others' shall be assumed to mean 'by Contractor' unless otherwise noted. 3 Samples to include accurate samples of all substrates and coverings, by same or other trades, as required to produce example of final result. D Distribution 1 Submit one copy and one sepia to Architect for each review 2. For work concerning Architect's consultant, submit all copies and sepias to Architect for distribution. 3 Architect will forward approved sepia of submittal to Contractor 4 Architect may return sepia or one copy of approved submittal requesting rearm of corrected sepia or copy Contractor will return one corrected copy each directly to Architect, Consultant, and Owner's representative. 5 Architect will return all copies and sepias of disapproved submittals for resubmittal. 3 7 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare per Section 01720, Project Record Documents. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 8 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUALS SECTION 01300 PAGE 6 SUBMITTALS A. General 1 Purpose is to provide Owner with record information necessary for his future operation and maintenance of the project. 2. Refer to Paragraph 3.5 above for related work. 3. Provide six separate manual sets: two each for architectural, mechanical, and electrical work. B. Format 1 Bind each manual in a three- ringed, heavy -duty vinyl covered hardboard binder. 2. On cover imprint title 'General (or 'Mechanical' or "Electrical Equipment Operation and Maintenance Manual' names of project, Owner Architect (include name of appropriate consultant engineer on mechanical and electrical manuals); and year of substantial completion; include Contractor's name and date. On bound edge, imprint name of project and Owner, year of substantial completion. 3 On bound edge, imprint name of project and owner and year of substantial completion. 4 Pages to be neat, clean sheets 8- 1/2 -by -1l -inch maximum size or accordion foldouts to same size. 5 Items to be identified with tabbed dividers showing section name and number of appropriate specification sections. 6. Arrange dividers and items in order they occur in specifications. C Required Information 1 Table of contents 2. Consecutive page number in lower right corner of each page 3 All information needed to operate and maintain systems and equipment provided in the project presented and arranged in a logical manner for efficient use by the Owner's operating personnel 4 Includes, but not limited to, the following: a. Equipment manufacturer make, model number size, etc. Include distributor phone number etc. as required to obtain replacement parts. b. Equipment nameplate data of major items. c. Description of system configuration and operation, including component identification and interrelations. A master control schematic drawings(s) will normally be required for this purpose. d. Dimensional and performance data for specific unit provided. Extraneous catalog data must be eliminated. e. Manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and materials. f. Manufacturer's recommended operating instructions as appropriate. g Manufacturer's recommended lubrication and servicing data. h. Complete parts list, including reordering information, recommended spares, and anticipated useful life (if appropriate). i Emergency instructions. j Inspection procedures. 5 Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for further requirements for mechanical and electrical manuals. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 013 0 0 PAGE 7 SUBMITTALS D Distribution 1 Prior to binding, submit one preliminary copy to Architect for approval. Preliminary copy shall be complete, except include temporary cover showing intended layout for final cover and bound edge. 2. Upon approval of preliminary copy prepare and submit to Architect two final copies of each manual to be forwarded to Owner 3 9 WARRANTY MANUAL A. Prepare per Section 01745 Warranty Procedures. 3 10 MISCELLANEOUS SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Instruction 1 Completely describe manufacturer's recommended maintenance methods, procedures, and materials. 2. Submit one copy to Owner in advance of Owner's use or maintenance of product or material to preclude incorrect action by Owner 3 Submit one copy in Maintenance and Operation Manual. B. Materials for Maintenance 1 Provide quantities specified in Divisions 2 through 16. 2. Deliver to Owner as directed. 3 Colors, patterns, and textures shall match work installed and shall be taken from same run of stock. 0 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 01300 1 1 1 esti SUBMITTAL C O V E R S H E E T T R A N S M I T T A L PROJECT SPECIFICATION SECTION TO: FROM: SUBCONTRACTOR. SUPPLIER. INSTALLER. MANUFACTURER: Description of Submittals COPIES DWG NO REV /RET SUBMITTAL TYPE Contractors Comments: I have examined this submittal and certify compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents. By Description of Deviation from Requirements: Architects Comments: No Exception Taken Rejected Olympic Memorial Hospital 3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon Date Approvals Requested by Contractor Submittal Review Note Markings See Attached Date Submittal Received PROJECT NO. DATE SUBMITTAL NO: PHONE PHONE PHONE PHONE Date. Architect's review is for general conformance with the design content and Contract Documents. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the proejct plans and specifications, nor departures therefrom. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly and for performing the work in a safe manner By Date 95110.00 Response Required Confirm Resubmit Date Submittal Returned to Contractor Mahium Nordfors McKinley Gordon 1996 Form 1046 10/96 MAHLUM NORDFOR Mc KIN LEY GORDON 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 Seaule WA 98121 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 F MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. Work includes: 1 Construction progress schedule 2. Schedule updates and revisions B. Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1 Section 01010, Summary of Work 2. Section 01011 Contract Time and Sequence 3 Section 01026, Payment Procedures 4 Section 01200, Project Meetings 5 Section 01300, Submittals 6. Section 01700, Contract Closeout 7 Divisions 2 through 16, Technical Specifications PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) SECTION 01310 PAGE 1 PROGRESS SCHEDULE PART 3 FXRCUTION 3 1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. General 1 Prepare per Section 01300, Submittals, and Section 00700, General Conditions. B. Format 1 Title 'Construction Progress Schedule. 2. Date to be that of original submission with revision date noted for each subsequent update. 3 Use paper size and production method suitable for updating and reproduction throughout duration of project. C Required Information 1 Submit, within seven (7) days after Notice to Proceed, a time scaled critical path method (CPM) network schedule diagram of the project for the entire construction period. 2. Create, update, and revise all schedules and execute the plan described by the schedule. 3 Submit initial schedule to the Owner and Architect and review as appropriate for meeting the scheduling requirements of the contract. The construction schedule shall: a. Be an 'activity -type CPM schedule clearly identifying the activity and time required for the activity MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 01310 PAGE 2 PROGRESS SCHEDULE b. Be plotted to a calendar- day -based horizontal time scale divided into weekly increments. c. Clearly display the specific start and completion date of every activity in the schedule (basing the plotting of the CPM schedule on a time scaled calendar shown at the top of the schedule will fulfill the requirement) and the critical path of activities. d. Show a logical sequence of the work to be accomplished. e. Show the order and interdependence of the Contractor's planned activities. f. Have as many activities as practical broken down such that no individual CPM activity element is for a duration greater than 21 calendar days. g. Identify phases or major areas of construction of the CPM schedule by logically grouping activities and indicating phase or area in large print. h. Indicate any required actions of Owner or Architect affecting progress or completion date. i Be updated as required to stay current with job progress and the relationship to the fmal completion date. j Clearly display the precedence of submittal schedule activities, i.e. the nodal point on the construction schedule by which a particular submittal/review /fabrication and delivery must be accomplished. k. Display the phases of the project clearly and the effects (if any) of the other scheduled projects that will occur simultaneously D Scheduling Update Requirements 1 This schedule shall be updated biweekly E. Schedule Revision Requirements 1 When, in the opinion of the Owner with consultation from the Architect, it appears that the Contractor's work progress is generally not conforming to the representations of the schedule to such a degree as to significantly reduce the effectiveness of the schedule as a management tool, the Contractor shall revise the schedule. a. The revised schedule shall show actual as-built progress for all executed activities and shall show the scheduling of all future activities. b The revised schedule shall be submitted to the Architect for review as appropriate for meeting the scheduling requirements of the contract. c. The Contractor will be allowed thirty (30) calendar days to prepare each schedule update. Delay beyond this 30-day period will be cause for withholding progress payments since the schedule of values for payments is based on the CPM schedule. F Distribution 1 Following initial submittal to and response by Architect, print and distribute progress schedule to Architect, Owner principal subcontractors, suppliers or fabricators, and others with a need to know the schedule. Post copies in project meeting rooms and field office. Distribute and post subsequent updated issues to same entities when revisions are made except, delete entities from distribution when they have completed assigned work and are no longer involved in performance of scheduled work. G Procedure During Construction 1 The Contractor and Owner with the assistance of the Architect, shall analyze actual construction progress at each construction progress meeting. If, during the course of the work, changes are of such nature as to cause resequencing or rescheduling of events from that originally shown, the Contractor will submit updated and revised CPM reflecting the actual progress of the work. Should the Contractor fail to meet the scheduled dates shown, the Owner, through the Architect, may direct the Contractor to accelerate his efforts in MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 01996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 01310 PAGE 3 PROGRESS SCHEDULE order to complete the project within the time indicated on the latest approved schedule. Such acceleration costs shall be borne by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 01310 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. General 1 Quality control work by Contractor as indicated 2. Inspections and testing by Owner's testing laboratory B. Requirements 1 Comply with Section 00700, General Conditions 2. Comply with Section 01065 Code and Permit Requirements 3 Comply with Section 01630, Product Options and Substitutions C Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1 Section 01300, Submittals 2. Section 01310, Progress Schedules SECTION 01400 PAGE 1 QUALITY CONTROL D Contract Conditions 1 Independent testing agencies, whether employed by the Owner or the Contractor are not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge the requirements of the Contract Documents or to approve or accept any portion of the work. 2. Employment of testing agencies, by the Contractor or the Owner shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. E. Owner's Responsibility for Inspections and Tests 1 The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform the required services which are indicated in this section as the Owner's responsibility (if any). F Contractor's Responsibility for Inspections and Tests 1 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspections and tests required in Division 2 through 16 and not indicated to be the Owner's responsibility 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for and pay the expense of additional inspections and tests by the Owner's testing laboratory caused by defective work or ill -timed notice. 3 The Contractor shall remove and replace defective work at no cost to the Owner G Code Inspections 1 Inspections and tests specified herein are in addition to those performed by code officials as required by the applicable codes. Any costs associated with code inspections shall be included in the contract sum. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 4 SUBMITTALS D Qualifications for Contractor's Testing Laboratory 1 As indicated in individual sections. SECTION 01400 PAGE 2 QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor shall forward four copies of inspections and tests to the Architect for his use and for distribution to the Owner and consultants. B. The Owner's testing laboratory shall forward one copy each of inspections and tests directly to the Owner, the Architect, the Architect's consultants as directed, and the Contractor Additional copies shall be forwarded to the building official or other authorities as requested. C Include the following information in all types of reports: 1 Date of report 2. Project name and number 3 Description of the quality control activity 4 Name, address, and phone number of entity performing activity 5 Date quality control activity was performed 6. Specification section(s) involved 7 Basis for evaluation (test method, etc.) 8. Results or conclusions, including evaluations and interpretations 9 Title, name, and signature of person performing activity D Include the following information in all test reports: 1 Locations from which samples were taken, if any 2. Ambient conditions at time of activity 3. Recommendations on retesting, if any 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General Workmanship Standards: Except as specifically defined in individual sections, conform to the recognized workmanship quality standards (including ANSI standards where applicable) equal in all respects to best recognized practice of trade. Every installer performing a category of work is required to be: 1 Prequalified to the extent of being familiar with the applicable and recognized quality standards for his/her category of work. 2. Capable of workmanship complying with those standards. B. Industry Standards and Recommendations 1 Applicable standards of construction industry shall be considered a part of the Contract Documents whether or not referenced. 2. Where industry associations are referenced, their published standards related to work specified shall be considered a part of the Contract Documents. 3 Industry or manufacturer's recommendations shall be considered mandatory 4 Referenced standards shall take precedence over nonreferenced standards. 5 Unless otherwise indicated, standards shall be those in effect as of date of Contract Documents. C Qualifications for Owner's Testing Laboratory The testing laboratory will be selected by the Owner and approved by local jurisdiction. The laboratory will meet ASTM E329 -67T standards. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL A. Prepare a schedule of quality control activities required. 1 Include activities of the Owner's testing agencies. 2. Provide the following information for each activity a. Specification section number b. Description of the activity c. Identification of test or inspection methods d. Enumeration of results required e. Number of tests required f. Number and type of samples to be taken, if any g Starting time of activity h. Date work will be ready for the Owner's testing agency access i Elapsed time required for activity j Entity responsible k. Special requirements for activity SECTION 01400 PAGE 3 QUALITY CONTROL 2. A firm independent from the Contractor's organization. 3 Experienced in the testing specified and having the capability of conducting satisfactorily the testing specified without delaying the progress of the work as shown by information supplied as required by ASTM E699 E. General Testing Laboratory Coordination: Where the Owner has employed a testing agency to test or inspect a portion of the work and the Contractor also is required to employ a testing agency for the same or a related element, do not employ the same testing agency unless otherwise agreed upon in writing by the Owner F Qualifications of Manufacturers 1 As indicated in individual sections. 2. The term "experienced," unless otherwise indicated, means having 5 years of successful production of products similar to those to be used on this project. 3 Where qualifications are required to be submitted but no specific qualifications are specified, use only experienced manufacturers. 4 Manufacturer's field personnel shall be employed directly by the manufacturer and normally performing the activities specified. G Testing Equipment Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) standards or to accepted values of natural physical constants. 1 6 COORDINATION WITH OTHER ENTITIES A. Cooperate with other entities performing quality control activities. B. Provide samples of materials and design criteria as indicated and when requested. C Provide other assistance, equipment, tools, and storage facilities as specified. D If desired, make arrangements with those entities and pay for additional similar or related testing or inspection required for the Contractor's use or convenience. 1 7 SCHEDULING MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 01400 PAGE 4 QUALITY CONTROL B. Coordinate quality control activities to avoid delay and to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspections. C Notify the Owner's testing agencies 14 working days prior to commencement or completion of work which is to be tested or inspected, whichever is applicable. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL A. Provide work of the specified quality Where quality level is not indicated, provide work of quality customary in similar types of work. 1 Where codes, laws, or regulations require work of higher quality or performance, provide work complying with those codes, laws, and regulations. 2. Where two or more quality provisions of the Contract Documents conflict, comply with the most stringent requirement. Where requirements are different but apparently equal, and where it is uncertain which requirement is most stringent, obtain clarification from the Architect before proceeding. 3 Actual quality may exceed the specified quality Verify that such differences are acceptable to the Owner (other criteria may make excessive quality undesirable). B. Control products, suppliers, manufacturers, site conditions, installers, and workmanship in such a manner as to produce work of the specified quality C Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. 1 Keep a record of instructions and recommendations which supplement or conflict with the manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When manufacturers' instructions and recommendations conflict with the Contract Documents, obtain clarification from the Architect before proceeding. D Use installers who are capable of producing work of the specified quality E. Perform all quality control activities specified unless indicated to be performed by other entities. F Perform tests as specified. When results of tests are unsatisfactory make whatever changes or repairs are necessary and retest. G Perform inspections as specified. When inspections reveal unsatisfactory work, make whatever changes or repairs are necessary and reinspect. 3 2 CONTRACTOR'S PREINSTALLATION QUALITY CONTROL A. Coordination of Work: Well in advance of the installation of every major unit of work which requires coordination with other work, the Contractor shall ensure that the unit of work can be installed and function as intended and required in conjunction with other work which has preceded or will follow In event of conflicts, the Contractor shall determine corrective action required, inform the Architect, and proceed with Architect's concurrence. B. Inspection of Conditions: The Contractor shall require the installer of each major unit of work to (1) inspect the substrate to receive the work, (2) inspect the conditions under which the work will be performed, and (3) report (in writing to the Contractor) unsatisfactory conditions. The installer shall not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to him. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 01400 PAGE 5 QUALITY CONTROL C Notice for Owner's Testing Lab: The Contractor shall notify the Owner's testing laboratory the structural engineer and the Architect not less than 24 hours before work requiring inspection or testing is started. 3 3 CONTRACTOR'S INSTALLATION QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, the Contractor shall comply with the manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation. To whatever extent these are more explicit or more stringent than applicable requirements, indicate in the Contract Documents. B. Inspection: The Contractor shall inspect each item of material or equipment immediately prior to installation and reject damaged and defective items. C Attachments and Connections: Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work properly as it is installed, true to line and level, and within recognized industry tolerances if not otherwise indicated. Allow for expansions and building movements. Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work, organized for best possible visual effect. Refer questionable visual effect choices to Architect for final decision. D Verify Dimensions: Recheck measurements and dimensions of the work as an integral step of starting each installation. E. Conditions for the Work: Install work during conditions of temperature, humidity exposure, forecasted weather, and status of project completion which will ensure the best possible result for each unit of work in coordination with the entire work. Isolate each unit of work from noncompatible work as required to prevent deterioration. F Closing -in the Work: Coordinate enclosure of work with required inspections and tests so as to avoid the necessity of uncovering work for that purpose. G Mounting Heights: Except as otherwise indicated, mount individual units of work at the industry- recognized standard mounting heights for the applications indicated. Refer questionable mounting height choices to the Architect for final decision. H. Finished Height for Site Items (not applicable) 3 4 RESPONSIBILITIES OF OWNER'S TESTING LABORATORY A. Provide inspection of work listed below B. Make tests required by applicable building codes and these specifications. C Submit written reports of inspections and tests to Superintendent of Buildings, the Architect and his structural engineer and the Contractor 3 5 SCHEDULE OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS BY CONTRACTOR A. Comply with requirements of this section and Divisions 2 16. Provide tests and inspections required for complete and proper execution of the work. 3 6 REPAIR AND PROTECTION BY CONTRACTOR A. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample- taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with Section 01045 Cutting and Patching. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities and protect repaired construction. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 01400 PAGE 6 QUALITY CONTROL C Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services. 3 7 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Adjust, clean, lubricate, restore marred finishes, and protect newly installed work to ensure that it will remain without damage or deterioration during the remainder of the construction period. 1996 Mahl= Nordfora McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 01400 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL FART 1 GENERAI, 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. Work Includes 1 The temporary construction service facilities of all kinds required to complete the work as specified herein. 2. Removal of temporary facilities prior to acceptance. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations 1 Conform with Section 01065, Code and Permit Requirements. B. Precautions 1 Take all necessary precautions for the safety of employees and other personnel on the site of the work; comply with all applicable provisions of Federal, State, and Municipal Safety Laws and Building Codes to prevent accidents or injury to persons on, about or adjacent to the premises where the Work is being done. 1 5 RESPONSIBILITY SECTION 015 0 0 PAGE 1 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor for the general Contract shall be responsible to provide and maintain during the construction period the Temporary Facilities named herein. They shall be located as directed and terminated and removed from the premises prior to the Final Payment. FART 2 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION 2 1 CONTRACTOR'S OFFICE A. Job office trailer must be approved and located by Property Owner. One or more vacant rooms within the construction area may be made available for the Contractors use, subject to any terms and conditions the Owner may specify B. Contractor staging area and project access shall be coordinated with the Property Owner C The Contractor shall include in his bid all temporary structures, chutes, barriers, and the cost of correcting the disturbed areas back to their condition on the day of Notice to Proceed. 2 2 DUSTPROOF ENCLOSURES A. Provide dust -proof enclosures sufficient to protect occupied spaces from remodeling work for the duration of the work. B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent the migration of dust and debris into the existing mechanical system. Any damage to the existing mechanical systems caused by dust or debris will be repaired by the Contractor immediately at the Contractor's expense. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 01500 PAGE 2 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS C Construct dust -tight barriers within or at the edge of the existing building. Survey the existing air duct system and seal appropriate grilles so dust will not be deposited within or through the system. Dust barriers shall be constructed of non combustible studs with 5/8" GWB on public side, painted with two coats of paint, color to match adjacent surfaces or as selected. Extend dust barriers above the finish ceilings. Where passageways must be maintained for the Owner's or Contractor's access, provide temporary solid core wood door with latching hardware in hollow metal frame. Provide floor mats at both sides of door to prevent spread of construction dust to other areas of the building. 2 3 FIRE PROTECTION A. Provide fire protection during all phases of construction as indicated on State Fire Marshal Information Sheet A -1 'Fire Protection During Construction. A copy of this sheet is attached at the end of this section. 2 4 PAINTING OF TEMPORARY STRUCTURES A. Coat temporary structures and barriers with two (2) coats prepared paint, color selected. 2 5 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION SAFETY BARRIERS A. Provide 6' -0' high temporary chain link fencing with locked gates around all structures under construction and around all hazardous conditions caused by construction or excavation. Provide signage in all principle directions reading: Danger Construction Area Keep Out. Take care to keep construction safe and free of hazards at all times. Secure the site at the end of each day Remove all ladders and access to building. 2 6 TEMPORARY TOILETS A. The Owner's facilities may be used per any restrictions or designations established by the Owner 2 7 PUBLIC UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall take care of all public utilities encountered in connection with his work; he shall pay all expenses therewith. He shall properly support all water sewer gas, electric, telephone, and other services and shall immediately notify persons or corporations owning the same granting them the opportunity to take such precautions as they see fit. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused by his operations. LART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND UTILITIES A. Fire Watch 1 The Contractor shall conduct his operations in a fire -safe manner subject to approval of the Owner or his authorized representative. 2. He shall provide and maintain a sufficient number of fire extinguishers of the proper type in locations readily available in case of a fire. 3 He shall clear the premises of excessive rubbish and debris. 4 He shall comply with the applicable provisions of the governing fire code which, by reference, shall be incorporated into these specifications. 5 The Contractor shall immediately correct any deficiencies brought to his attention. 6. Where significant or continued non compliance is noted, the Owner reserves the right to stop the work, at no extra cost or extension of time, pending remedial action. B. Continuity of Utility Services MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 2 WASTE REMOVAL SECTION 01500 PAGE 3 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1 Continuity of utility services to and within existing buildings shall be reasonably maintained at all times. 2. The Contractor shall submit a schedule of utility shutdowns within thirty (30) days after the Notice to Proceed. 3 The Contractor shall confirm all requests for utility shutdowns in writing to the Owner not less than one (1) week prior to the proposed date. Requests shall include as a minimum the following information: a. Utility services affected. b Reason shutdown is required. c. Work to be accomplished during the shutdown. d. Proposed shutdown date and time. e. Duration of the shutdown. 4 The actual time and date of all shutdowns will be subject to approval of the Owner 5 In general, they will be scheduled for nights, weekends, or other low intensity use periods. 6. The duration of all shutdowns shall be held to a reasonable minimum as determined by the Owner 7 Materials and equipment required for the work to be accomplished during shutdown shall be complete and available on the job for review by the Owner three (3) days prior to the shutdown. 8. If the Contractor is not adequately prepared, the shutdown will be canceled and re- scheduled. 9 Only Owner's personnel will shut down and restart utilities. 10. Owner will inspect the installation prior to restarting and will not restart if an unsafe condition exists. 11 In the event the Contractor's work is not completed during the time scheduled for the shutdown, the Owner may elect to restart the utilities service. In that event, additional shutdown requirements shall be re- scheduled in accordance with the preceding requirements. 12. Restarting shall not be construed as acceptance of the work as complete. 13 The Contractor shall include in the bid all costs associated with utilities shutdowns. 14 The Owner will make no extra payment for overtime work, schedule changes or failure to complete utilities connections within authorized shutdown periods. C Cleaning and Protection of Existing Surfaces: 1 Keep public areas adjacent to construction area and along access route to construction area free of dust and debris. Provide daily cleaning at end of work shift to prevent accumulation of dust and permanent soiling of finishes. 2. Provide floor protection along route of access to construction area when removing debris or delivering materials. 3 Provide protection mats for interior of elevator cabs that are in route of access to construction. A. All refuse and waste material, including excess or unusable earth from excavation, shall be disposed of legally by the Contractor off the Owner's property B. Waste material shall not be stockpiled on the Owner's property MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 4 NOISE CONTROL SECTION 015 0 0 PAGE 4 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS C Immediately clean up any spilled material from buildings, roads, etc. 3 3 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION SERVICE FACILITIES A. General 1 The Contractor shall provide those temporary construction service facilities, prior to acceptance by Owner, as required, including all public utility connections, heating systems, and electrical services. 2. All installations shall comply with applicable Federal, State and local codes. 3. All temporary construction service facilities shall be removed by the Contractor prior to acceptance by the Owner. B. Temporary Heat 1 The Contractor shall provide temporary heat as required to protect materials and equipment from dampness and cold. 2. The method of heating is subject to approval of the Architect. 3 The project's permanent heating plant may not be used for temporary heating. C Temporary Illumination 1 Furnish a temporary illumination system which will provide not less than 10 footcandles or adequate illumination of building areas as required to maintain a high level of workmanship for all trades. In addition, provide adequate security and safety lighting for all stairways, corridors, passageways and other areas as required for pathway lighting throughout the building. Pathway illumination level shall be a minimum of 2 footcandles. 2. Provide and maintain security lighting as appropriate to provide general illumination of the work area during night time hours. D Telephone 1 Provide non -coin box telephone connected to nearest city exchange. 2. Install when work is started; maintain until full completion; pay all charges. 3 Allow all those connected with the Work to use, provided they pay for toll calls. E. Fax 1 Provide in office; pay all charges. A. The purpose of this specification is to keep the level of construction noise inside adjacent existing buildings and/or rooms from exceeding a dBA 55 curve (with windows closed) during all occupied hours. The Contractor may meet this criteria by erecting bathers between equipment and occupied areas. B. Outdoor Vehicle and Internal Combustion Engine Noise: Noise level of each piece of equipment shall not be greater than 86 DBA at a distance of 50 feet as measured under noisiest operating conditions. Rubber -tired equipment will be used whenever possible instead of equipment with metal tracks. Mufflers for stationary engines shall provide hospital area quality of silencing. C Indoor Noise: Use of noise producing vehicles and equipment within existing buildings is subject to Owner's approval. D Air Compressors: Equipment with silencing packages. Electric driven preferred. E. Jack Hammers: Use prohibited. Use core drilling or saw cutting equipment whenever possible. 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 01500 PAGE5 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS F General: Any equipment that can be electrically driven instead of gas or diesel is preferred. If noise levels on any gear cannot reasonably be brought down to criteria, either that gear will not be allowed on the job or use times will have to be scheduled subject to approval of the Owner Conformance to this specification shall be included in the Contract price and no compensation will be allowed for special equipment, overtime, etc. that may be required. 3 5 VEHICULAR CONTROL A. Traffic Regulation 1 Existing walkways and roadways leading past new work areas shall remain clear and safe at all times. This shall include access and paths for pedestrian flow B. Refer to additional requirements in 01010 Summary of Work and 01011 Contract Time and Sequence. C On site parking for the Contractor's vehicles is subject to the limitations imposed by the Property Owner 01996 Mahlum Nordfora McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 01500 The following information issued by the Office of the State Fire Marshal, State of Washington: Health Care Facilities Fire Protection Plan Review Information Sheet No. A -1 Fire Protection During Construction April 10, 1980 Revised 6/86 Records of the national Fire Protection Association indicate fatal fires have occurred when construction, remodeling, or demolition has been done in occupied buildings. The 1976 Life Safety Code FNPA Standard 101 Section 1 5.4 states, `Existing buildings may be occupied during repairs or alterations only if all existing exits and all existing fire protection are continuously maintained or in lieu thereof, other measures are taken which provide equivalent safety The following shall be observed during the demolition, construction, repair or alteration period as applicable: 1. Area Separation: Provide a temporary one -hour fire- resistive separation between the construction area and all other areas of the building. If this is not feasible, fire watchman service shall be performed by trained and experienced personnel acceptable to the State Fire Marshal and local fire official. (Preferably equipped with portable radio communication.) 2. Exits: Construction or demolition shall not interfere or obstruct the exits or exiting system. Should it become necessary to do so, alternative methods shall first be approved by the local fire official and the State Fire Marshal. 3. Flammable Gases: Flammable gases and oxygen tanks shall not be used or stored in the building. Tanks shall be kept on the exterior and approved piping or UL- listed hoses used to convey the gases inside. Such tanks shall be positioned at least 20 feet from any building opening. 4 Flammable Liquids: Flammable liquids at the job site shall not be stored in building and shall otherwise be stored, dispensed, and used in accordance with the requirements of the local fire official and 1985 Uniform Code. 5. Housekeeping: Good housekeeping shall be maintained at all times. 6. Fire Extinguisher. Proper and adequate portable fire extinguishers shall be readily available. 7 Special Hazards: The local fire official and State Fire Marshal shall be contacted for procedure involving any special hazards or conditions. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL DATA /COMMUNICATION ROOM RELOCATION FART 1 GRNRRAL 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION B. Requirements 1 Compliance with industry standards and recommendations 2. Product selections and substitutions 3 Warranties SECTION 0 1600 PAGE 1 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. General: Administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for use in the project. C Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere 1 Section 01091 Reference Standards 2. Section 01300, Submittals 3 Section 01310, Progress Schedule 4 Section 01400, Quality Control 5 Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 6. Section 01610, Delivery Storage, and Handling 7 Section 01630, Product Options and Substitutions 8. Section 01745, Warranty Procedures D Definitions: Definitions used in this section are not intended to change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the contract documents. 1 Products,: Items purchased for incorporation in the work, whether purchased for the project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term 'product' includes the terms 'material, equipment, system, and terms of similar intent. 2. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the contract documents. 3 Materials: Products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined, or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the work. 4 Fri imenl: A product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping. 1 4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Section 01400, Quality Control, and Section 01091, Reference Standards. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL DATA /COMMUNICATION ROOM RELOCATION PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 GENERAL LIMITATIONS SECTION 01600 PAGE 2 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01610, Delivery Storage, and Handling. 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best and most complete installation per industry standards. 1 8 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Section 01310, Construction Progress Schedule. 1 9 WARRANTY A. Comply with Section 01745 Warranty Procedures. A. Where possible, provide entire required quantity of each generic product from single source. Where not possible to do so, match separate procurements as closely as possible. B. To extent selection process is under Contractor's control, provide compatible product. C Where available and complying with requirements, provide standard products which have been used previously and successfully in similar applications and which are recommended by the manufacturers for the applications indicated. 2 2 PRODUCT SELECTIONS A. General: It is the Contractor's responsibility to select products which comply with the contract documents and which are compatible with one another. 1 Verify that electrical characteristics of products are compatible with electrical systems. Notify Architect of all discrepancies. 2. Where visual matching to an established physical sample is required, the Architect's decision will be final. 3 Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. B. Single Product Named: Provide only the product(s) specified, unless determined with prior approval to be unavailable, noncompatible with the work, or noncomplying with requirements or governing regulations. C Two or More Products Named: Selection from named products is Contractor's option, provided selection complies with requirements specified. D Equivalent Products: Where specification allows for or equivalent' product, product selection shall be submitted for review and Architect's approval during the bidding period per Section 00100, Instructions to Bidders. E. Acceptable Manufacturers Named: Where a particular manufacturer's product is named, similar products by other named manufacturers may be used provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents F Quality Standard Product Named MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL DATA /COMMUNICATION ROOM .RELOCATION SECTION 01600 PAGE 3 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1 Where a quality standard product or material is named, the manufacturer's product data and specifications, as most recently published, are incorporated in the contract documents. 2. Components of the quality standard product may be referenced in the contract documents using manufacturer's model or part numbers. The work shall conform, or be equivalent, to the quality standard product and components as indicated. 3 Identification of a quality standard product is intended to establish quality standard. Equivalent products by approved manufacturer's are acceptable if approved in addenda. G Substitutions: Products other than those named in this manual shall be only those approved during bidding period per Section 00100, Instructions to Bidders. H. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase .as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures. or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A. Require installer of each major unit of work to inspect substrate and conditions for installation and to report (in writing) unsatisfactory conditions to satisfaction of installer before proceeding. B. Inspect each product immediately before installation and do not install damaged or defective product. 3 2 PREPARATION A. Prior to starting installation of each major component of the work, hold a preinstallation conference, attended by each entity involved or affected by planned installation. Include technical representatives of product manufacturers and others recognized as expert or otherwise capable of influencing success of the installation. Review significant aspects of requirements for the work. Record discussion and distribute as plan of action. 3 3 INSTALLATION A. General 1 Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Anchor securely in place; accurately locate and align with other work. Clean and protect to ensure that products will be free from damage and deterioration at time of acceptance. B. Nameplates 1 Where needed for operation and maintenance, provide permanent engraved plastic laminate nameplates on equipment, located in inconspicuous places, and containing suitable information and operational data. 2. Otherwise, do not allow manufacturer's trademarks or similar labels or nameplates to be placed on products in locations where exposed to view after installation. 3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 01400, Quality Control. 3 5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, and Section 01710, Final Cleaning. B. Clean each element of work at time of installation. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL DATA /COMMUNICATION ROOM RELOCATION C Provide sufficient maintenance and protection during construction to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. 01996 Mehlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 01600 PAGE 4 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT END OF SECTION 01600 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 01610 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL DELIVERY, STORAGE AND 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL HANDLING PART 1 GENERAT, 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. B. Schedule delivery to minimize long -term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. C Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. D Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Labels to include: 1 Name of product 2. Name of manufacturer 3 Date of manufacture, where applicable 4 Shelf life, where applicable 5 Quality or grade, where applicable 6. Lot number where applicable 7 Fire performance characteristics, where applicable E. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. F Store heavy materials away from the project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction. G Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. 01996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 01610 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 01630 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL PRODUCT OPTIONS AND 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SUBSTITUTIONS FART I GENERAL 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091, Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. General: Administrative and procedural requirements for handling product options and requests for substitutions made after award of the contract. B. Requirements 1 Compliance with industry standards and recommendations 2. Product selections and substitutions 3. Warranties C Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere 1 Section 01091 Reference Standards 2. Section 01300 Submittals 3 Section 01310, Progress Schedule 4 Section 01400, Quality Control 5 Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 6. Section 01600, Material and Equipment 7 Section 01610, Delivery Storage, and Handling 8. Section 01745, Warranty Procedures D Definitions: Definitions used in this section are not intended to change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the contract documents. 1 Products: Any product, material, or equipment. 2. Substitution. Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by contract documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the contract. The following are not considered substitutions and are not subject to requirements specified in this section for substitutions: a. Substitutions requested by bidders during the bidding period, and accepted prior to award of contract. b. Revisions to contract documents requested by the Owner or Architect. c. Specified options of products and construction methods included in contract documents. d. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. 1 4 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Request Submittal. Request for substitution will be considered if received within sixty (60) days after commencement of the work. Requests received more than (60) days after commencement of the work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 01630 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL PRODUCT OPTIONS AND 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SUBSTITUTIONS 1 Submit three copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the form and in accordance with procedures required for change order proposals. 2. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related specifications section and drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions and the following information, as appropriate: a. Product data, including drawings and description of products, fabrication, and installation procedures. b Samples where applicable or requested. c. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability performance, and visual effect. d. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate Contractors that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's construction schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall contract time. f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the contract sum. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal to or better in every significant respect to that required by the contract documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately B. Architect's Action: Within five (5) working days of receipt of the request for substitution, the Architect will request additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation of the request. Within fifteen (15) working days of receipt of the request, or ten (10) working days of receipt of the additional information or documentation, whichever is later the Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the product specified by name. Acceptance will be in the form of a change order 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Section 01400, Quality Control, and Section 01091, Reference Standards. 1 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01610, Delivery Storage, and Handling. 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS g. A. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best and most complete installation per industry standards. 1 8 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Section 01310, Progress Schedule. 1 9 WARRANTY A. Comply with Section 01745 Warranty Procedures. l 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 01630 PAGE 3 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL PRODUCT OPTIONS AND 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SUBSTITUTIONS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Architect when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. Otherwise, requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1 The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the contract time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the work promptly or coordinate activities properly 2. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority and the requested substitution can be approved. 3 A substantial advantage is offered the Owner in teens of cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations of merit after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate contractors, and similar considerations. 4 The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility 5 The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated. 6. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the contract documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provide the required warranty B. The Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of shop drawings, product data, or samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the contract documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval. EART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) 01996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 01630 PROJECT SPECIFICATION SECTION TO: FROM PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION MANUFACTURER. MODEL NO: SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Olympic Memorial Hospital 3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel DATE PARAGRAPH: Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon (Bidder /Contractor) PROJECT NO MAHLUM N O R D F O R McKIN LEY SIGNATURE GORDON Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance, and test data adequate for evaluation of the request (applicable portions of the data are clearly identified) Attached data also includes description of changes to contract documents which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments are correct: The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings. 4 I /We will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4 Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed solution. I /We state that the function, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item. 95110.00 FIRM 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 ADDRESS Seattle WA 98121 PHONE FOR USE BY ARCHITECT Accepted Accepted as Noted Not Accepted Received Too Late 441 4151 206 441 0478 F B Y DATE Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon 1996 Form 1063 10/96 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL FART 1 GFNFRAL, 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout. B. Work includes: 1 Substantial completion and punch list procedures 2. Record documents 3 Operating and maintenance instructions 4 Maintenance and operation manuals 5 Warranty manual 6. Warranty list items 7 Final cleanup 8. Final acceptance 1 4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Section 01400, Quality Control. 1 6 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Section 01310, Construction Progress Schedule. 1 7 WARRANTY A. Comply with Section 01745, Warranty Procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) SECTION 01700 PAGE 1 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 3 FXFCUTION 3 1 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND PUNCH LIST PROCEDURE A. Initiation by Contractor 1 The Contractor shall initiate process of determination for substantial completion. 2. He shall do so by giving written notice to the Architect that the project is substantially complete (or portion thereof as previously agreed to with the Owner and Architect) and that the building official has granted permission or certification for occupancy B. Deficiency List MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL NOTE. Final payment and release of retainage will not be granted until all punch list items are complete. Each punch list item, when completed by the contractor must be initialed by the project superintendent prior to resubmission to the architect. SECTION 01700 PAGE 2 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1 Prior to giving notice of substantial completion, and if it is agreed to be helpful, the Architect will walk through the project with the Contractor to point out work needing completion. The list of such work, to be called the 'Deficiency List, will be compiled and written by the Contractor during the walkthrough. 2. Once the Deficiency List has been corrected, the Contractor may commence with notice to the Architect indicating the area is ready for substantial completion. 3 The Deficiency List is not the Punch List. C Determination of Substantial Completion 1 Upon written notification by the Contractor the Architect will review the project (or parts) and determine whether or not substantial completion can be recommended to the Owner. If the determination cannot be made, the Contractor will be so notified. 2. If the determination can be made, the Architect will prepare a certificate of substantial completion for the respective part for the Contractor's signature and the Owner's acceptance. The Owner will occupy the building or part of the building the day after the date of substantial completion. 3 Prior to or at the same time of substantial completion, the Contractor will apply and receive a certificate of occupancy from the inspectors having jurisdiction. This must be a part of granting the substantial completion certificate. D Issuance of Punch List 1 Attached to the certificate of substantial completion, the Architect will provide the punch list indicating items of work which must be completed prior to final acceptance. 2. Upon receipt of punch list, with all items initialed as complete, architectural back -check will be performed. 3 2 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare and provide per Section 01720, Project Record Documents. 3 3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. General 1 Provide per Divisions 15 and 16 and as follows. 2. Time to be per Section 01011 Contract Time and Sequence, and arranged for Owner's convenience. B. Required Information 1 Operation instruction period(s) shall be conducted by Contractor for operating personnel. 2. Instructions shall be provided in all phases of operation and maintenance for all systems, including but not limited to, the following: a. Startup b Shutdown c. Emergency operations d. Noise and vibration adjustments MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL e. Safety procedures f Economy and efficiency adjustments g. Effective energy utilization 3 Contractor representatives shall be foremen or superintendents for the trade involved or manufacturer's representatives. 4 Place of the instruction period shall be as mutually agreed to. 3 4 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUALS SECTION 01700 PAGE 3 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT A. Prepare and provide per Section 01011, Contract Time and Sequence, and Section 01300, Submittals. 3 S WARRANTY MANUAL A. Prepare and provide per Section 01011 Contract Time and Sequence, and Section 01745 Warranty Procedures. 3 6 WARRANTY LIST ITEMS A. Prepare and provide per Section 01745 Warranty Procedures. 3 7 FINAL CLEANUP A. Comply with Section 01710, Final Cleaning. 3 8 AS BUILT DRAWINGS A. General 1 Prepare per Section 00700, General Conditions, and as follows. 2. Submit per Section 01011 Contract Time and Sequence. B. Format 1 Contractor shall provide one set of Diazo Sepia Mylars of Division A, M, and E drawings and two sets of blueline prints entitled As -built Drawings. 2. In addition to the above, the Contractor shall provide an AutoCad computer file disk copy of Division A, M, and E As -built Drawings. This copy shall be based on the design drawing files provided by the Architect, updated to show as-built information. 3 Make notations clearly legibly Accurately draft changes in the work. C Required Information 1 Significant changes made during construction. Identify source of changes. 2. Significant detail not shown in original Contract Documents. 3 Location of underground utilities and appurtenances as actually installed or encountered, referenced to permanent surface improvements. Show and locate changes in direction by dimension and elevation as utilities are actually installed. 4 Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in building structure as actually installed or encountered, reference to visible and accessible features of the structures. D Distribution 1 Submit one copy to Architect. For records concerning mechanical and electrical work, submit direct to Architect's Consultant with transmittal letter copy to Architect. 2. Architect will return submittal for corrections as necessary 3 Architect will forward accepted submittal to Owner. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 9 FINAL ACCEPTANCE 01996 Mahl= Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 01700 PAGE 4 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT A. Requirements Prior to Final Acceptance 1 Contractor's submission of, and Architect's acceptance of, all record drawings and as -built drawings. 2. Submission and approval of warranties. 3 Issuance of final certificate of occupancy and submission of copies of all permits with signature of inspector indicating final approval, or equivalent, if not already obtained at time of substantial completion. 4 Final cleanup by the Contractor 5 Execution of all change orders. 6. Completion of all punch list items. B. Final Acceptance Process 1 When all items described above have been completed, the following are required: a. Architect's recommendation of final acceptance to the Owner b. Contractor's submission of final request for 100 percent payment and payment of retainage. Supporting documents shall include: 1) Affidavit for Payment of Retained Percentage per Section 01026, Payment Procedures. 2) Consent of Surety per Section 01026, Payment Procedures. 3) Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens per Section 01026, Payment Procedures. 4) Contractors Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims per Section 01026, Payment Procedures. 5) State of Washington Department of Revenue Certification, as proscribed in the agreement between the Owner and the Contractor. 6) Affidavit of wages paid in a form acceptable to the Owner Affidavit shall receive certification from the state of Washington, Department of Labor and Industries, prior to submission to Owner 7) In addition to the Affidavit of wages paid, copy of letter of release written by the state of Washington, Department of Labor and Industries to the Contractor C Final Payment and Release of Retainage: Final payment and release of retainage shall be in accordance with the conditions of the contract upon final acceptance by the Owner and receipt of properly prepared invoice vouchers from the Contractor. In any case, release of retainage will not occur until thirty (30) days after final acceptance by the Owner END OF SECTION 01700 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL FART 1 GRNFRAI 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091, Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies procedural requirements for final cleaning. B. General cleaning during construction is required by Section 00700, General Conditions, and included in Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. C Cleaning required for specific trades of work is specified in sections pertaining to that trade of work. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Section 01400, Quality Control. 1 5 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Section 01310, Progress Schedule. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) SECTION 01710 PAGE 1 FINAL CLEANING PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL A. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for fmal cleaning. B. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. C Use only cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer on surface to be cleaned. D Materials producing flammable or harmful vapors are deemed inappropriate. 3 2 FINAL CLEANUP A. Upon completion of all other work under the contract, and prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall be responsible for final cleanup of all work under this contract. B. Leave entire project perfectly clean and ready for occupancy All building and fixture surfaces shall be turned over to the Owner in a new condition, free of all damage, dust, dirt, spots, stains, encrustations, and other blemishes. C Perform the following minimum cleaning operations after all trades have completed their work under this contract: 1 Vacuum entire interior of project. 2. Clean all air ducts and ventilation equipment. 3 Hand dust and clean shelves and cabinets. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 4 Remove labels that are not permanent. 5 Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. 6. Clean fmish floors and floor coverings; wax when so specified. 7 Leave concrete floors broom clean. 8. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. 9 Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. 10. Remove all protective coverings from all accessories furnished or installed. 11 Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. D Contractor shall continue final cleanup as may be required ed by the punch list or other corrective work until such work is complete. 3 3 PEST CONTROL A. Engage an experienced exterminator to make a final inspection and rid the project of rodents, insects, and other pests. 3 4 REMOVAL OF PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the work during construction. 3 S COMPLIANCE A. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner B. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated work have become the Owner's property arrange for disposition of these materials as directed. ®1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 01710 PAGE 2 FINAL CLEANING END OF SECTION 01710 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091, Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for record documents. Record documents are defined as one set of construction documents kept on site for the purpose of recording changes to the project and uncovered conditions during the course of construction, as well as documenting approved: products and colors. B. Work includes: 1 Record drawings 2. Record specifications 3 Record product data 4 Record sample submittals 5 Miscellaneous record submittals C Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1 Section 01300, Submittals 2. Section 01700, Contract Closeout 1 4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Section 01400, Quality Control. 1 6 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Section 01310, Progress Schedule. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USRD1 SECTION 01720 PAGE 1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS EABT 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL A. Comply with Section 00700, General Conditions. B. Maintain documents in good condition, available at all times for inspection by Architect and his consultants. C Do not use for construction purposes. D Protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire- resistive location. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL E. Make notations clearly and legibly Use color or other marking system for contrast. 3 2 RECORD DRAWINGS A. General 1 Keep records current. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded 2. Required information includes: a. Significant changes made during construction. Identify source of change. b. Significant detail not shown in original contract documents. c. Location of underground utilities and appurtenances as actually installed or encountered, referenced to permanent surface improvements. Show and locate changes in direction by dimension and elevation as utilities are actually installed. d. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in building structure as actually installed or encountered, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structures. B. Format Use one complete set of contract drawings titled 'Project Record Drawings. C Distribution 1 Submit one copy to Architect. For records concerning civil, structural, mechanical, and electrical work, submit directly to Architect's consultants with transmittal letter copy to Architect. 2. Architect will return submittal for corrections as necessary Contractor shall refer to corrected record drawings when preparing as -built drawings. 3 Architect will forward accepted submittal to Owner Contractor shall return corrected record drawings to Architect with as -built drawing submittal. 3 3 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. General: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda, and one copy of other written construction documents such as change orders and modifications issued in printed form during construction. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual work performed in comparison with the text of the specifications and modifications. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options, and similar information on elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observations. Note related record drawing information and product data. B. Format: Use one Project Manual titled 'Project Record Specifications. C Distribution 1 Submit one copy to Architect. 2. Architect will return submittal for corrections as necessary 3 Architect will forward accepted submittal to Owner 3 4 RECORD PRODUCT DATA SECTION 01720 PAGE 2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Maintain one copy of each product data submittal. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related change order and markup of record drawings and specifications. 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL B. Format: Use one set of product data submittals titled Project Record Product Data. C Distribution: Upon completion of markup, submit complete set of record product data to the Architect for the Owner's records. 3 5 RECORD SAMPLE SUBMITTAL A. Immediately prior to the date or dates of substantial completion, the Contractor will meet at the site with the Architect and the Owner's personnel to determine which of the submitted samples that have been maintained during progress of the work are to be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes. Comply with delivery to the Owner's sample storage area. 3 6 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Refer to other specification sections for requirements of miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of substantial completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the Architect for the Owner's records. ®1996 Mahlum Nordfora McKinley Gordon SECTION 01720 PAGE 3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS END OF SECTION 01720 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 01745 PAGE 1 WARRANTY PROCEDURES FART 1 GF.NRRAL 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. Requirements 1 Comply with Section 00700, General Conditions. 2. Specific requirements for warranties for the work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted are included in the individual sections of Divisions 2 through 16. B. Definitions 1 "Guarantee' and 'warranty' are used interchangeably and are understood to mean the same thing. See Section 00700, General Conditions, for definition. 2. "Standard product warranties' are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. 3 'Special warranties' are written warranties required by or incorporated in the contract documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner C Types 1 Categories of warranties required for the work include: a. Special project warranty issued by Contractor and, where required, countersigned by installer or other recognized entity involved in performance of the work. b Specified product warranty issued by a manufacturer or fabricator for compliance with requirements in contract documents. c. Coincidental product warranty available on a product incorporated into the work, by virtue of manufacturer's publication of warranty without regard for application requirements (nonspecified warranty). d. Refer to sections of Division 2 through 16 for requirements of specified warranties. D Disclaimers and Limitations 1 Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the work that incorporates the products nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor s MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 4 SUBMITTALS SECTION 017 4 5 PAGE 2 WARRANTY PROCEDURES A. General 1 Prepare per Section 01300, Submittals, and as follows. 2. The Contractor's written warranty shall be submitted to the Architect on the 'Contractor's Warranty" form attached to this section or in a similar format. 3 For subcontractor warranties as specified, a warranty by each such subcontractor countersigned by the General Contractor shall be submitted to the Architect on the 'Subcontractor's Warranty' form attached to this section or in a similar format. B. Format 1 Bind each manual in a three -ring, heavy -duty vinyl, hardboard cover binder. 2. On cover imprint title 'Warranty Manual' name of project, Owner Architect; and date of substantial completion. 3 On bound edge, imprint name of project and owner and date of substantial completion. 4 Pages to be neat, clean sheets, 8 -1/2 by 11 -inch maximum size or accordion foldouts to same size. 5 Items to be identified with tabbed dividers showing name and number of appropriate specification sections. 6. Arrange dividers and items in order they occur in specifications. C Information Required 1 Table of contents identifying separate warranties by specification section number and name. 2. Contractor's warranty of the work per contract documents. 3 Warranties, certificates, and bonds for all portions of the work per specifications, Divisions 1 through 16. 4 Certificate of occupancy obtained from appropriate building officials. D Distribution 1 Submit one preliminary copy to Architect for approval. 2. Upon approval of preliminary copy prepare and submit two final copies to Architect --one for Architect and one for Owner 1 5 WARRANTY OBLIGATIONS A. Restore or remove and replace warranted work to its originally specified condition at such time during warranty as it does not comply with or fulfill terms of warranty Restore or remove and replace other work which has been damaged by failure of warranted work or which must be removed and replaced to gain access to warranted work. B. Except as otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, warranties do not cover damage to building contents (other than work of contract) which results from failure of warranted work. C Cost of restoration or removal- and replacement is Contractor's obligation without regard to whether Owner has already benefited from use of failing work. D The Contractor shall warranty for a period of 1 year from the date of substantial completion all work performed under the provisions of the Agreement Between the Owner and Contractor MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 6 REINSTATEMENT OF WARRANTY A. Reinstatement of warranty shall be per Article 4.5 of the General Conditions of the Contract 1 7 OWNER'S RECOURSE A. Warranties and warranty periods do not diminish implied warranties and do not deprive Owner of actions, rights, and remedies otherwise available for Contractor's failure to fulfill requirements of the contract documents. Owner reserves right to reject coincidental product warranties considered to be conflicting with or detracting from requirements of the contract documents. FART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED). 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 017 4 5 PAGE 3 WARRANTY PROCEDURES END OF SECTION 01745 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY Date: General Contract Date: Owner- Olympic Memorial Hospital Address: 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, WA 98362 Project: Olympic Memorial Hospital -3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel (Contractor), the undersigned, warranties for a period of years) from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completions, all work performed under the provisions of the Agreement Between the Owner and Contractor (Contractor) will remedy any defects appearing during the warranty period which are due to failure, faulty materials, poor workmanship, or other nonconformity with or omission from the contract documents. The following subcontractors perfomed the work or furnished materials subject to warranty Trade Subcontractor and Address Phone Contact Person Contractor's Warranty Page 2 Trade Subcontractor and Address Phone Contact Person This warranty does not include holding the Contractor responsible for defects caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or wear and tear under normal usage (per Section 00700, General Conditions). Contractor Address: Phone: Contact Person`: Signature: (authorized representative) Cont ractor's Warranty Page 3 Trade Subcontractor and Address Phone Contact Person Trade: Subcontractor Address: Phone: Contact Person: Signature: Contractor Address: Signature: SUBCONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY Date: General Contract Date: Owner Olympic Memorial Hospital Address: 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, WA 98362 Project: Olympic Memorial Hospital -3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel The General Contractor, and the Subcontractor warranty for a period of year (s), as specified in Section of the contract documents, all work performed under the provisions of the Agreement Between the Owner and the Contractor The undersigned will remedy any defects appearing during the warranty period which are due to failure, faulty materials, poor workmanship, or other nonconformity with or omission from the contract documents. This warranty does not include holding the Contractor responsible for defects caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or wear and tear under normal usage (per Section 00700, General Conditions). (authorized representative) (authorized representative) 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 02070 PAGE 1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building. 2. Patching and repairs. B Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section 'Summary of Work' for use of the building and phasing requirements. 2. Division 1 Section 'Cutting and Patching for cutting and patching procedures for selective demolition operations. 3. Division 1 Section 'Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls' for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and environmental protection measures for selective demolition operations. 4 Division 1 Section "Hazardous Materials Procedures' for abatement of hazardous materials 5 Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout' for record document requirements. 6. Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry' for material and construction requirements for temporary enclosures. 7 Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies' for material and construction requirements for temporary enclosures. 8. Division 15 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items. 9 Division 16 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the Owner's property B Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's property Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents of containers and deliver to Owner's designated storage area. C. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them for reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in locations indicated. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL D Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option. 1.5 SUBMITTALS C. Landfill records indicating receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. SECTION 02070 PAGE 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, for information only unless otherwise indicated. B. Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section 'Contract Closeout. 1 Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed selective demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buildings to be selectively demolished. 1 Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. B. Asbestos: If any materials suspected of containing asbestos are encountered, do not disturb the materials. Immediately notify the Owner. 1 Asbestos will be surveyed and removed by Owner after wall finishes and framing are demolished. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1 Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION SECTION 02070 PAGE 3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. B. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Architect. D Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition. E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. B Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1 Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. B Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area. 1 Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 3 Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction, on exterior surfaces and new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL C. Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of building to be selectively demolished. 1 Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations. 1 Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. B Use enclosed chute and covered dumpster for debris removed via exterior opening Carefully remove, store and protect any windows temporarily removed to provide access to exterior chute. Reinstall window per Division 8 Section `Vinyl Windows. C. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. D Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition. 3.5 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ABATEMENT COORDINATION. 3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SECTION 02070 PAGE 4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Initial demolition shall be limited to that necessary to expose existing piping and insulation, and expose existing carpet substrate to view 1 Remove wall and ceiling fmishes and framing, casework, lighting and plumbing fixtures, and other work sufficiently to allow the Owner's abatement contractor unrestricted access to existing piping and insulation. 2. Do not disturb existing piping or insulation. If existing insulation is damaged, stop work and immediately notify Owner 3 Remove existing carpeting to expose pre existing floor finishes. Do not disturb existing adhesives or substrate. 4 Mark locations on floor where slab will need to be core drilled for new plumbing and ductwork penetrations. B Allow sufficient time for the Owner's abatement contractor to survey analyze, and abate hazardous materials before resuming demolition. Refer to Division 1 Section Hazardous Materials Procedures. C. Upon written notification from the Owner, resume demolition of piping, flooring, and remaining work shown to be demolished. A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 02070 PAGE 5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 1 Neatly cut openings and boles plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3 Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame- cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame cutting operations. 4 Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 5. Remove decayed, vermin- infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off -site. 6. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 7 Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly On -site storage or sale of removed items is prohibited. 9 Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start of selective demolition operations. B Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power- driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power driven impact tools. C. Remove resilient floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations of the Resilient Floor Covering Institute s (RFCI) 'Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings' and Addendum. 1 Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI. D Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing. See applicable Division 7 Section for new roofing requirements. E. Remove air- conditioning equipment without releasing refrigerants. 3.7 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective demolition operations. B Patching is specified in Division 1 Section 'Cutting and Patching. C. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3.8 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS 0 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 02070 PAGE 6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on -site. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.9 CLEANING A. Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation. END OF SECTION 02070 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary: Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Cast -in -place concrete includes the following: 1 Floor and roof slab repair 2. Floor underlayment. C Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 2 Section 'Selective Demolition for demolition procedures. 2. Division 9 Section 'Resilient Tile Flooring' for substrate requirements. 3. Division 9 Section 'Sheet Vinyl Flooring' for substrate requirements. 1 3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including patching compounds, underlayment compounds, curing compounds, and others if requested by Architect. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1 American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301 'Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. Installer Qualifications: Installers of proprietary materials must be authorized by the manufacturer and must use factory approved installation equipment. 1 5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in their original, unopened packages, and protect materials from exposure to the elements. 1 6 SITE CONDITIONS SECTION 03300 PAGE 1 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Maintain an environment of above 50° F before, during, and after installation of underlayment materials. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL FART 2 PRODUCTS SECTION 0 3 3 0 0 PAGE 2 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2 1 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 Grade 60, deformed. B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold -drawn steel. C Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar -type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 2 2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1 Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F C Normal- Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 1 Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when acceptable to Architect. D Water. Potable. 2 3 RELATED MATERIALS A. Underlayment Compound: Free- flowing, self leveling, pumpable, cement -based compound for applications from 1 inch thick to feathered edges. 1 Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Gyp -Crete Dura -Cap, Maxxon Corp. b. Underlayment 100, Master Builders, Inc. c. Stoncrete UL1 Stonhard, Inc. d. Thorn Underlayment Self- Leveling, Thoro System Products. 2. Sand Aggregate: 1/8 inch or less, washed masonry or plaster sand, or as required by underlayment manufacturer. 3. Sub -Floor Primers, Sealers, and Accelerators: As recommended by underlayment manufacturer B. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881 two component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit Project requirements. 1 Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Burke Epoxy M.V The Burke Co. b. Concresive Standard Liquid, Master Builders, Inc. c. Sikadur 32 Hi -Mod, Sika Corp. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2 4 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES SECTION 03300 PAGE 3 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301 B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at last 15 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Architect. C Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties as indicated on drawings and schedules: 1 3000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength; water cement ratio, 0.45 D Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows: 1 Concrete: Not more than four (4) inches. E. Mix proportions for underlayment in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for commercial applications. 2 5 ADMIXTURES A. Use water reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability B. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F (10 deg C). 2 6 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94 and as specified. 1 When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder/barrier, and other related materials with placement of reinforcing steel. 3 2 UNDERLAYMENT PREPARATION A. Clean sub -floor to remove mud, oil, grease, and other contaminants. B. Fill cracks and voids with a quick setting patching or caulking material where leakage of the underlayment could occur. C Prime the sub -floor using underlayment manufacturer's primer Use multiple coats if required. 3 3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for 'Placing Reinforcing Bars, for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 03300 PAGE 4 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect. D Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends am directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 3 4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete reinforcing steel. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. General: Comply with ACI 304 'Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete, and as specified. C Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. D Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation. 1 Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3 Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement. E. Cold- Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. F When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 1 Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. G Hot Weather Placement When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified. 1 Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water- soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 03300 PAGE 5 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 3 Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas. 4 Use water reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Architect. 3 5 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that to receive concrete floor topping and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and where indicated. 1 After placing slab repair, finish surface to tolerances of F(F) 15 (floor flatness) and F(L) 13 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish where slab surfaces are to be covered with membrane roofing. 1 After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until nerdy for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface by hand floating. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 3 6 APPLICATION OF UNDERLAYMENT A. General: Do not begin application of underlayment until building is enclosed. Install after drywall is in place. B. Application: Place 3/8 inch minimum thickness of underlayment over chipped floor tiles, troughs left behind after demolition of walls, depressions around core drilled areas, and other uneven floor areas. Place underlayment as continuously as possible until application is complete so that no underlayment is placed against product that has obtained its initial set. Feather edge boundaries of application to achieve smooth transition to areas not receiving underlayment application. C Drying: Provide continuous ventilation and adequate heat to rapidly remove moisture from the area until the underlayment is dry Provide mechanical ventilation if necessary Allow for 7 days of drying time. Test for drying by taping a 24 inch square section of plastic to the underlayment. If after 72 hours, no condensation occurs, the underlayment shall be considered dry D Sealing: Clean and seal all areas with underlayment manufacturer's sealant. Confirm compatibility of sealant with flooring manufacturer's adhesives. E Field Quality Control. Test underlayment mixture as it is being pumped as recommended by the manufacturer 1 Slump: Use cylinder size as recommended and test for patty within tolerances specified by manufacturer 2. Field Samples: Take at least one set of 3 molded cube samples from each day's pour. Test cubes as recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with ASTM C472. F Protection: Place temporary wood planking over underlayment wherever it will be subject to heavy wheeled or concentrated loads. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 7 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS 3 8 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION 01996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 03300 PAGE6 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work. A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during fmishing operations with an evaporation control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before floating and troweling. B. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces scheduled to receive finish flooring, including slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, with a moisture retaining cover unless otherwise directed. Do not use curing compounds. 1 Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture retaining cover unless otherwise directed. 3 9 SCHEDULE A. Concrete: Provide reinforcement and concrete fill at all abandoned penetrations through existing structural slab. B. Underlayment: Provide underlayment at troughs left by demolished walls, depressions at core drilled penetrations, areas of broken or uneven floors, and as noted in Volume 2 Project Drawings. END OF SECTION 03300 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 05120 PAGE 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes structural steel. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 1 Section 'Quality Control' for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 1 3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. C Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components. 1 Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 3 Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify high strength bolted slip critical, direct- tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connections. D Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the 'Quality Assurance' Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Letter stating that shop prime coating has been coordinated with field coating applicator and that prime coating is compatible with the scheduled field coating products. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural steel work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work. C Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1 1 'Structural Welding Code—Steel. 1 Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver structural steel to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of installation. B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1 Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1 6 SEQUENCING SECTION 0 PAGE2 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation. FART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: As follows: 1 Carbon Steel: ASTM A 36. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S Grade B. 1 Weight Class: Standard. C Nonhigh Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307 Grade A, carbon- steel, hex -head bolts; carbon -steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. 1 Finish: Plain, uncoated. D Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2 2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: SPCC -SP 1 solvent cleaning followed by SPCC -SP -6 commercial blast cleaning. 2 3 PRIMER A. General: Coordinate primer product with field coating applicator to assure compatability of shop primer coating with subsequent field touch up and additional coats. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting' for Architectural Specification Manual (ASM) designations. B. Primer Type: ASM SC 12 Inorganic Zinc -rich Primer C Available Manufacturers and Products: Subject to requirements 1 Benjamin Moore 2. Cloverdale Valspar 3 DuPont MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2 4 GROUT 4 Daniel Boone Ameron Dimetcote 5. Farwest/Jarvie Devoe 6. Kelly -Moore 7 PPG 8. Rodda 9 Sherwin Williams Co. SECTION 05120 PAGE 3 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water- reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107 of consistency suitable for application, and a 30- minute working time. 2 5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate structural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop Drawings. 1 Camber structural steel members where indicated. 2. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly 3 Fabricate for delivery a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of structural steel. 4 Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges' for structural steel. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1 Plane thermally cut edges to be welded. C Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing. 1 Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame -cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 2. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. 2 6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1 1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1 Assemble and weld built -up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without warp. PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A. Before erection proceeds, and with the steel erector present, verify elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchorages for compliance with requirements. B. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 3 3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. B. Base Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond- reducing materials. 1 Set base plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or seeing nuts as required. 2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. 3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for proprietary grout materials. C Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. D Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1 Level and plumb individual members of structure. E. Splice members only where indicated. F Finish sections thermally cut during erection equal to a sheared appearance. G Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3 4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. Install and tighten nonhigh strength bolts, except where high strength bolts are indicated. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1 1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1 Comply with AISC specifications referenced in this Section for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 3 5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 05120 PAGE4 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports. 1 Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from requirements. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. C Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. D Field- welded connections will be visually inspected. 0 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 05120 PAGE 5 STRUCTURAL STEEL END OF SECTION 05120 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following metal fabrications: 1 Rough hardware. 2. Miscellaneous framing and supports for the following: a. Handrails and Valences. b. Applications where framing and supports are not specified in other sections B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 5 Section 'Structural Steel' for structural steel framing system components. 1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project with a record of successful in- service performance, and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. 1 4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 FERROUS METALS A. Paint metal surfaces exposed to view per Division 9 Section `Painting. 2 3 FASTENERS SECTION 05500 PAGE 1 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. B. Gray -Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30. C Malleable -Iron Castings: ASTM A 47 Grade 32510 (ASTM A 47M, Grade 22010). D Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for the metal alloy to be welded. 2 2 PAINT A. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307 Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6), with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M), and, where indicated, flat washers. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE REMODEL SECTION 0 5 5 0 0 PAGE 2 METAL FABRICATIONS B. Machine Screws: ANSI B18.6.3. C Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1 (ANSI B18.2.3.8M). D Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ANSI B18.6.1. E. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ANSI B18.22.1 (ANSI B18.22M). F Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ANSI B18.21 1. G Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency 1 Material: Carbon steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Ln 5 H. Toggle Bolts: FS FF -B -588, tumble -wing type, class and style as required. 2 4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication. B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. C Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately Remove burrs. D Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. E. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. F Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1 Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3 Remove welding flux immediately 4 At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. G Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or if not indicated, Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. H. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. Shop Assembly Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE REMODEL J Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. 2 5 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Furnish bent, or otherwise custom fabricated, bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Division 6 Sections. B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions requited. 'Furnish malleable -iron washers for heads and nuts that bear on wood structural connections, and furnish steel washers elsewhere. 2 6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM 'Metal Finishes Manual' for recommendations relative to applying and designing finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION SECTION 0 5 5 0 0 PAGE 3 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installing anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in walls. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3 2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in -place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 1996 Mahlum Nordforr McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 05500 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Installation of miscellaneous items not installed under other sections. 2. Providing backing as required for: a. FOIC items b. Wall hung shelving standards c. Wall hung casework units d. Countertop support locations e. Other items as indicated. f. Electrical or telephone equipment B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls' for temporary partitions. 2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry' for non structural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. 1 3 DEFINITIONS SECTION 06100 PAGE 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and generally not exposed, unless otherwise specified. 1 4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Divisions 1 Specification Sections. B. Wood treatment data as follows including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installation, and finishing of treated material: 1 For each type of preservative treated wood product include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. 2. For fire-retardant treated wood products include certification by treating plant that treated material complies with specified standard and other requirements. 3. Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire retardant- treated wood products with requirements indicated. C Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction evidencing compliance of the following wood products with specified requirements and building code in effect for Project. 1 Fire- retardant treated wood. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General. Comply with Section 01400 Quality control, Section 01600 Materials and Equipment, and Section 01630 Finish Carpentry B. Regulations: Conform to Section 01065 Code and Permit Requirements. Use of fire-retardant- treated wood for blocking is restricted to rated assemblies, and not allowed in shafts. Refer to UBC Chapter 19 C Single- Source Responsibility for Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire-retardant- treated wood product from one source for both treatment and fire- retardant formulation. 1 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Keep materials under cover and dry Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 BACKING AND BLOCKING A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446, zinc coated according to ASTM A 525 and as follows: 1 Coating Designation: G 60 2. Grade: Grade A, 33,000 psi, minimum yield strength, 20 percent elongation. 2 2 CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR PANEL BOARD BACKING A. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fie- retardant- treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C -D PLUGGED EXPOSURE 1 in thickness indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch. 2 3 FASTENERS SECTION 06100 PAGE2 ROUGH CARPENTRY A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF -N -105. C Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER 272. D Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1 E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1 F Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307 Grade A, with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers. 2 4 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. General: Where fire- retardant treated wood is indicated, pressure impregnate lumber and plywood with fire retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 and C27 respectively for treatment type indicated; identify 'fire-retardant-treated wood' with appropriate classification marking of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. US Testing, Timber Products Inspection, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide fire- retardant treated wood for which a current model code evaluation/research report exists that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidences compliance of fire- retardant treated wood for application indicated. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL B. Interior Type A. For interior locations use fire retardant chemical formulation that produces treated lumber and plywood with the following properties under conditions present after installation: 1 No reduction takes place in bending strength, stiffness, and fastener holding capacities below values published by manufacturer of chemical formulation that are based on tests by a qualified independent testing laboratory of treated wood products identical to those indicated for this Project under elevated temperature and humidity conditions simulating installed conditions. 2. No other form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes related to manufacture and treatment. 3 No corrosion of metal fasteners results from their contact with treated wood. C Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. D Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, fire- retardant treated wood products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 Interior Type A Fire Retardant Treated Wood a. 'Dricon, Hickson Corporation. b 'Pyro-Guard, Hoover Treated Wood Products. c. 'Flameproof LHC -HTT Osmose Wood Preserving Co, Inc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL SECTION 06100 PAGE 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. C Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, milers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. Provide backing secured to studs behind wall finish materials at all wall mounted casework and countertop locations. D Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. F Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required. 1996 Mahlum Nordfora McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 06100 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY 1.3 SUBMTITALS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. This Section includes the following: 1 Interior standing and running trim and rails. 2. Plywood Paneling. SECTION 06200 PAGE 1 FINISH CARPENTRY A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry' for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work that is not exposed to view A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B Product data for each type of factory- fabricated product and process specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, textures, and colors. C. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. A. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of finish carpentry by a firm that can demonstrate successful experience in installing finish carpentry items similar in type and quality to those required for this Project. B. Standards: Comply with the quality standards established in Parts 200 and 300 of the Architectural Woodwork Institute Quality Standards, Guide Specifications, and Quality Certification Program Guidebook, latest edition, hereinafter referred to as AWI 'Quality Standards. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. B. Do not deliver interior finish carpentry until environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS SECTION 06200 PAGE 2 FINISH CARPENTRY A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with finish carpentry manufacturer's and installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for finish carpentry during its storage and installation. PART2 PRODUCTa 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 American Softwood Lumber Standard' for lumber and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review B Inspection and Grading Agencies: Inspection ,and grading agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them with lumber grades and species include the following: 1 WWPA Western Wood Products Association. 2. AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute. C. Hardwood Plywood: Comply with HPVA HP 1, 'Interim Voluntary Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. D Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M -2 made with phenol formaldehyde resins. E. Fire Retardant Particleboard Core: Medium Density Industrial Particleboard treated with fire retardant. 1 Rating: UL Class 1 fire rating 2. Flame Spread: 20 3 Smoke developed: 25 2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND RAILS A. Hardwood Trim. Provide finished hardwood lumber and moldings complying with the following requirements: 1 Species: Select White Hard Maple; AWI 100 -S -1 Grade II. 2. Texture: Surfaced (smooth). 3. Lumber for Transparent Finish (Stained or Clear). Solid lumber stock. B. Wood Molding Pattems: Provide stock moldings made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 7 and graded under WMMPA WM 4 1 Chair Rail. WM 297 2. Moldings for Transparent Finish: N- Grade. 2.7 HANDRAILS A. Interior Railings: Clear, kiln -dried railing stock of pattern indicated, either solid or laminated. 1 Species. Hard maple. MAHLUM NORDFORS McIONLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.8 PANELING A. Hardwood Veneer Plywood Paneling: Manufacturer's stock hardwood plywood panels complying with applicable requirements of HPVA HP 1 1 Face Veneer Species: Plain sliced American Maple 2. Backing Veneer Species: Any hardwood compatible with face species. 3 Construction: Fire treated medium density particleboard core. 4 Thickness: 3/4 inch 5 Glue Bond. Type II (interior). 6. Finish: Match Architect's samples. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS SECTION 06200 PAGE 3 FINISH CARPENTRY A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. 1 Countersink nails, fill surface flush, (match wood color and grain), and sand where face nailing is unavoidable. 2. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity provide fasteners and anchorages with hot -dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153 B. Paneling Adhesives: Comply with paneling manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Conform to unless otherwise shown or specified. 1 Standing and Running Trim. AWI 'Quality Standards' 300 -S -1 'Custom Grade' 2. Paneling: AWI 'Quality Standards' 200 -S -7 'Grade A B Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and manufacturer's recommendations for moisture content of fmish carpentry in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. Provide fmish carpentry with moisture content that is compatible with Project requirements. C. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. 2. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16 inch radius. 3 Ease edges of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8 inch radius. g®$T 3 EXFCU'1'ION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. MAHLUM NORDFORS MclUNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL C. Finish in accordance with specified requirements. 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND RAILS 3.5 HANDRAIL INSTALLATION 3.6 PANELING INSTALLATION SECTION 06200 PAGE 4 FINISH CARPENTRY B. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning recommended by manufacturer A. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated or fmished, not adequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. B. Install finish carpentry plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where required for alignment. 1 Scribe and cut fmish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer 2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/16 inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/8 inch maximum offset for reveal installation. 3 Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems that may be in or adjacent to standing and running trim and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exposed surfaces of trim and rails. A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim and rails. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight- fitting joints with full- surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end -to -end joints. Plane back of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints if required. 1 Match color and grain pattern across joints. 2. Install trim after drywall joint finishing operations and installation of wall finish are completed. 3 Drill pilot holes in hardwood prior to nailing or fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. A. Secure handrails with metal brackets. Assemble handrails at easements and splices with rail bolts and glue. A. Plywood Paneling: Select and arrange panels on each wall and soffit for best match of adjacent panels where grain character or color variations are noticeable. Install with uniform tight joints between panels. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 06200 PAGE 5 FINISH CARPENTRY 1 Attach panels to supports with manufacturer's recommended panel adhesive and fasteners. Space fasteners as recommended by panel manufacturer 2. Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi- exposed surfaces. Touch up factory- applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure finish carpentry is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 0 1996 Mahlum &'Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 06200 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 06402 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL WOODWORK FART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Laminate clad cabinets (plastic- covered casework). 2. Wood veneer faced cabinets 3. Cabinet tops (countertops). 4 Cabinet hardware and locks 5 Miscellaneous items incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation. 6. Cutout, borings, access panels, grommets, and other preparations required for installation of and access to mechanical and electrical items on or in cabinets. 7 Full height adjustable shelving. B Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1 Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry' for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work that is not exposed to view 2. Division 6 Section 'Finish Carpentry' for carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this section. 3 Division 8 Section 'Flush Wood Doors' for doors specified by reference to architectural woodwork standards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B Product data for each type of product and process specified in this section and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation. C. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large -scale details, attachment devices, and other components. Show materials, laminate colors, sinks, fittings, hardware, and other accessories. Show sink centerlines. D Samples for verification purposes of the following: 1 Laminate clad panel products, 8 -1/2 inches, by 11 inches for each type, color pattern, and surface finish, with separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core. 2. Wood veneer faced products, 8 -1/2 inches, by 11, inches for each species, color and surface finish 3 Comer pieces as follows: MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 06402 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL WOODWORK a. Cabinet front frame joints between stiles and rail as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep. b. Miter joints for standing trim. 4 Exposed cabinet hardware, one unit of each type and fmish. E. Product certificates signed by woodwork manufacturer certifying that products comply with specified requirements. F Qualification data for firms and persons specified in 'Quality Assurance article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information. specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work. Subject to specified requirements, provide architectural woodwork by one of the following: 1 Lyline 2. Lemons 3 Westmark 4 Master Millwork, Inc. 5 Cabinetmakers, Inc. 6. Northwestern Design, Inc. 7 Hillstrom Cabinets. 8. Ritter Cabinets 9 Old Time Woodwork, Inc. 10. Riverside Millwork, Inc. B Single Source Manufacturing and Installation Responsibility. Engage a qualified Manufacturer to assume undivided responsibility for woodwork specified in this section, including fabrication, finishing, and installation. C. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) except as otherwise indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. B Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in 'Project Conditions. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 06402 PAGE 3 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL WOODWORK 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Woodwork Manufacturer's and Installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until these conditions have been attained and stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of installation through remainder of construction period. B Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1 Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements on final shop drawings. 2. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with manufacture of woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. PART 2 PROJUCT,g 2.1 HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer Subject to compliance with requirements, and colors specified in Room Finish Schedule, provide high pressure decorative laminates of one of the following: 1 Formica Corp. 2. Laminart. 3 Micarta Div Westinghouse Electric Corp. 4 Nevamar Corp. 5 Wilsonart 6. Wilsonart Chemsurf 7 Pionite 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI woodworking standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards, that apply to product characteristics indicated: 1 Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135 4 2. High Pressure Laminate: NEMA LD 3 3 Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2. 4 Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 5 Softwood Plywood: PS 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 06402 PAGE 4 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL WOODWORK 6. Formaldehyde Emission Levels: Comply with formaldehyde emission requirements of each voluntary standard referenced below a. Particleboard. NPA 8. b. Medium Density Fiberboard: NPA 9 c. Hardwood Plywood: HPMA FE. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1 Corners of cabinets and edges of solid wood (lumber) members less than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of rails and similar members more than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/8 inch. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. D Factory-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Field cutting of sink and grommet cutouts allowed. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water resistant coating. E. Edges of Laminated Components: A minimum 0.125 -inch thick extruded PVC, color throughout, bonded to the core of the board with a waterproof hot melt adhesive for all drawers, doors, end panels, including the tops of tall and wall cabinets, the bottom of all cabinets, and the back of any exposed end panels. All other exposed edges shall be an extruded PVC, 0.024 inch thick. F Stainless Steel: Stainless steel shall be 18 gage, type 316, with No. 4 satin finish, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 LAMINATE CLAD CABINETS (PLASTIC COVERED CASEWORK) A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400B 'Laminate Clad Cabinets. B. Grade: Custom. C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay D. Laminate Cladding: High pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1 Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by architect. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 06402 PAGE 5 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL WOODWORK 2. Laminate Grade for Exposed Surfaces: Provide laminate cladding complying with the following requirements for type of surface and grade. a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: GP 50 (0.050 -inch nominal thickness). b. Postformed Surfaces: PF-42 (0.042 -inch nominal thickness). c. Vertical Surfaces. GP 28 (0.028 -inch nominal thickness). d. Edges: GP 50 (0.050 -inch nominal thickness). 3 Semi exposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below. a. High pressure laminate, CL -20. E. Chemical Resistant, High- Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade PF-42, and as follows: 1 Laminate has the following ratings when tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3 test procedure 3.9.5 a. Nitric acid (30 percent): moderate effect. b. Sulfuric acid (77 percent)• moderate effect. c. Hydrochloric acid (37 percent): moderate effect. d. Phosphoric acid (75 percent): no effect. e. Acetic acid (98 percent): no effect. f. Carbon tetrachloride: no effect. g. Formaldehyde: no effect. h. Ethyl acetate: no effect. i. Ethyl ether no effect. j Phenol (85 percent): moderate effect. k. Benzene: no effect. 1. Xylene: no effect. m. Butyl alcohol: no effect. n. Furfural: no effect. o. Methyl ethyl ketone: no effect. p. Sodium hydroxide (25 percent): no effect. q. Sodium sulfide (15 percent): no effect. r Ammonium hydroxide (28 percent): no effect. s. Zinc chloride: no effect. t. Gentian violet no effect. u. Methyl red: no effect. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Lab Grade 840 Black; Formica Corporation. b. Pionite Chemguard; Pioneer Plastics Corp. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 06402 PAGE 6 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL WOODWORK c. Chemsurf; Ralph Wilson Plastics Co. 2.5 WOOD VENEER FACED CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400A 'Wood Cabinets. B. Grade: Custom. C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay D Wood Species for Wood Veneer. Plain Sliced Natural Northern Maple. 1 Grain Matching: Run and match grain vertically across drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 2. Select for color rather than grain. 3. Effect: Filled finish 4 Sheen: Satin Medium rubbed effect 2.6 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section 'Finish Hardware. Locks, if required, shall be furnished at locations shown on architectural drawings. All hardware will be architectural woodwork manufacturer's standard but shall meet the following requirements: 1 Hinges shall be semi concealed dull chrome 2 3/4 inch fixed pin, five knuckle, 270 degree swing, hospital type. 2. Drawer and door pulls shall be through bolted from back side; US28 Satin Aluminum wire type clear anodized, 4 center to center, 1 3/16' projection, 5/16' diameter, no escutcheons. 3 Drawer slides shall meet the following minimum standards and shall consist of cold rolled steel, zinc plated ball bearing rollers, or ABS self lubricating slides: a. Typical drawers: Load rating of 75 pounds. b. File cabinet and paper storage drawers: Load rating of 100 pounds full extension. All file drawers to extend to allow 1 clearance between files and face of cabinet. 4 Cabinet mounted adjustable shelf support clips shall be provided as follows: a. Each shelf shall have 5 mm nickel plated steel, plug -in, retainer type support clips let into shelf bottoms to prevent sliding. b. Drill shelf clip holes at 1 1/4 inch on center, full height of cabinet, two columns per cabinet side. c. Provide four support clips at each shelf indicated, six at shelves over 42 inches in length. 5 For concealed hardware provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.9 6. Catching devices shall be heavy -duty magnetic with a maximum 5 lb. minimum 3 lb. pull. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 06402 PAGE 7 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL WOODWORK 7 Locks shall be Schlage 46 -002 6 inch type, National, or approved equal. US26D finish Provide locks at cabinets where shown. 8. Clothes rods at wardrobe unite less than 24 inches deep shall be Knape Vogt Clothing Carrier K1 16. B Drawer Construction: Comply with specified AWI standards for drawer construction. C. Closure and Filler Panels: Provide closure panels, soffits, sloped tops, and filler panels as shown on drawings. Finish surface to match adjacent cabinets. Provide all support as required. Extend closure panels 6 inches above finish ceiling where ceilings are shown to stop at face of cabinet. D Provide 4 -inch high backsplash at back and sides of all countertops, unless noted otherwise. E. Countertop Supports: Provide countertop supports spaced per manufacturer's recommendations. Support to be angle brace A901 as manufactured by Westmark or similar F Keyboard Shelf: Provide slide -out keyboard trays at locations shown on drawings. G. Grommeted Cord Drops: Provide and install up to twenty (20) manufacturer's standard 3 nominal grommets for electrical cord drops through countertops and/or cabinets at all locations directed by Owner after Owner occupancy and before final completion. Submit color samples to Architect for selection. 2.7 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET TOPS (COUNTERTOPS) A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400C. B. Standard Top: High pressure decorative laminate complying with the following: 1 AWI Grade: Custom. a. Match color pattern, and finish indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard designations for these characteristics. b. Grade: GP 50 (0.050 -inch nominal thickness). 2. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. C. Chemical Resistant Top: High pressure decorative laminate complying with the following: *1 AWI Grade: Custom. a. Match color, pattern, and finish indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard designations for these characteristics. b. Grade: Intermediate Laboratory grade 0.036 inch thick. 2. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 2.8 ADJUSTABLE SHELVING A. General: Provide adjustable shelves and standards as indicated on project drawings. B Shelf Construction. Comply with AWI Section 400, Division 400 C. 1 Shelves to be 3/4 inch thick with plastic laminate finish on all sides. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 06402 PAGE 8 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL WOODWORK C. Standards and Brackets 1 Wall- Mounted adjustable shelf supports shall be provided as follows: a. Surface mounted aluminum standards with vertical slots. 72 inch length unless noted otherwise. Provide standards at 36 inches on center maximum. Provide solid backing in wall. b. Provide shelf brackets for each shelf indicated. c. Quality standard product No. 186ANO as manufactured by Knape Vogt. 2.9 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS A. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF -S -111 for applicable requirements. B. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal framing manufacturer. C. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF -N -105 for applicable requirements. D Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. B Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance of time substrates are to be built. Verify that blocking and backings have been installed at appropriate locations for anchorage. C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop- fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. D Measure all areas for scribe fit. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this section for type of woodwork involved. B Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-0' for plumb and level (including tops) and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refmish cut surfaces or repair damaged fmish at cuts. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 06402 PAGE 9 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL WOODWORK D Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching fmal finish where transparent fmish is indicated. E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. F Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. G. Sinks. Verify sink locations and sizes before cutting openings in countertops. H. Complete the finishing work specified in this section to whatever extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually where not possible to repair replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi- exposed surfaces. Touch up factory- applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensures that woodwork is being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. General. Provide custom and prefabricated casework at locations as indicated on project drawings. Include all hardware and accessories required for a complete installation. 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 06402 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 07210 PAGE 1 BUILDING INSULATION A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Concealed building insulation in board form. 2. Building insulation in batt form. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section. 1 Division 7 Section 'Built up Roofing for roof insulation specified as part of roofing construction. 2. Division 9 Section 'Gypsum Board Assemblies' for thermal insulation and sound attenuation insulation installed as part of metal- framed wall and partition assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Thermal Receptivity. Where the thermal resistivity of insulation products are designated by 'r values, they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k values) Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B Product data and installation instructions for each type of insulation product specified. C. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by qualified independent testing laboratory evidencing compliance of insulation products with requirements including r values (aged values for plastic foam insulations), fire performance characteristics, perm ratings, water absorption ratings, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products. D U.L. or other ICBO accepted Research reports or evaluation reports that evidence compliance of plastic foam insulations with building code in effect for Project. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those whose indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method indicated below by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. MAHLUM NORDFORS MCIQNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 07210 PAGE 2 BUILDING INSULATION 1 Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E 84 2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119 3 Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 4 Foam plastic insulation characteristics in compliance with UBC Chapter 1713 B. Single- Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during installation. B Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1 Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to project site ahead of installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering insulation products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: B Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products of one of the following: 1 Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation: a. AFM Corporation. b. DiversiFoam Products. c. Grace Construction Products Div W.R. Grace Co. d. Manufacturers with a third party certification program satisfying mandatory requirements for foam plastics of model building codes. 2. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corp. b. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. c. Manville: Building Insulations Div Manville Sales Corp. d. Owens /Corning Fiberglas Corp. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 Manufacturers-of Semi- Refractory Fiber Insulation: a. Fibrex, Inc. (708)896 -4800. b. USG Thermafiber DN, USG Interiors, Inc. 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS SECTION 07210 PAGE 3 BUILDING INSULATION A. General. Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1 Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion of polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C 578 for type indicated, and as follows: 1 Type II, 1.35 pcf min. density aged r values of 4 4 and 4.0 at 40 and 75 deg F (4 4 and 23.9 deg C), respectively 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 75 and 450, respectively C. Faced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type III, Class A (blankets with reflective vapor retarder membrane facing with flame spread of 25 or less); foil scrim -kraft or foil scrim polyethylene vapor retarder membrane on one face, and as follows: 1 Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 50, respectively 2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder ASTM D 4397 6.0 mils thick, with a maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perms. B Tape for Vapor Retarder Pressure sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder 2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation or mechanical anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging or corroding either insulation, anchors, or substrates. B Adhesively Attached Pin Anchors: Perforated plate, 2 inches square, welded to projecting pin, with self locking washer complying with the following requirements: 1 Plate: Zinc- plated steel, 0 106 inch thick. 2. Pin. Copper coated low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 inches in diameter length to suit depth of insulation indicated and, with washer in place, to hold insulation tightly to substrate behind insulation. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 Self- Locking Washer Mild steel, 0.016 inch thick, size as required to hold insulation securely PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL SECTION 07210 PAGE 4 BUILDING INSULATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removal of projections that might puncture vapor retarders. A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation. B Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B Seal joints between closed -cell (non breathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer C. Set vapor retarder faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, except as otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. D Set reflective, foil -faced units accurately with not less than 0.75 -inch air space in front of foil as indicated. E. Stuff glass fiber loose fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume (to a density of approximately 2.5 pcf). MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3.5 PROTECTION A. General. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. 0 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 07210 PAGE 5 BUILDING INSULATION END OF SECTION 07210 MAHLUM NORDFORS McI INLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS SECTION 07270 PAGE 1 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING A. This Section includes firestopping and smokestopping for the following: 1 Penetrations through fire- resistance -rated floor and roof construction including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items. 2. Penetrations through fire resistance -rated walls and partitions including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items. 3 Penetrations through smoke barriers and construction enclosing compartmentalized areas involving both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. 4 Sealant joints in fire resistance -rated construction. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1 Division 7 Section Joint Sealants' for non fire resistive -rated joint sealants. 2. Division 15 Sections specifying ducts and piping penetrations. 3 Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations. A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire, according to UBC 4308 and the requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases. B F -Rated Through- Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through- penetration firestop systems with F ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814 but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire- resistance rating of the constructions penetrated. C. T -Rated Through- Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through- penetration firestop systems with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814 where indicated and where systems protect penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas. T -rated assemblies are required where the following conditions exist: 1 Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities. 2. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire resistive shaft enclosures. 3 Where firestop systems protect penetrations located in construction containing doors required to have a temperature -rise rating. 4 Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4- inch diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq in. in overall cross sectional area. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 07270 PAGE 2 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING D Fire- Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire resistance ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 119 but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire- resistance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs. E. For firestopping exposed to view traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions. 1 For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches or more in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting the floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means. 2. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. F For firestopping exposed to view provide products with flame- spread values of less than 25 and smoke- developed values of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B Product data for each type of product specified. C. Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and are nontoxic to building occupants. D Shop drawings detailing materials, installation methods, and relationships to adjoining construction for each through- penetration firestop system, and each kind of construction condition penetrated and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. E. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through- penetration firestop configuration for construction and penetrating items. F Product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. G. Product test reports from, and based on tests performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. H. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in 'Quality Assurance article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that complies with the following requirements and those specified under the 'System Performance Requirements article: MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 07270 PAGE 3 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING 1 Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or Warnock Hersey 2. Through- penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814 under conditions where positive furnace pressure differential of at least 0.01 inch of water is maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the test assembly Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Through- penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency b. Through- penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through- penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their 'Fire Resistance Directory or by Warnock Hersey 3 Fire resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested for fire response characteristics per ASTM E 119 under conditions where the positive furnace pressure differential is at least 0.01 inch of water, as measured 0.78 inch from the face exposed to furnace fire. Provide systems complying with the following requirements: a. Fire Resistance Ratings of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design designations listed by UL in their 'Fire Resistance Directory' b. Joint sealants, including backing materials, bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspection agency. B. Information on drawings referring to specific design designations of through- penetration firestop systems is intended to establish requirements for performance based on conditions that are expected to exist during installation. Any changes in conditions and designated systems require the Architect's prior approval. Submit documentation showing that the performance of proposed substitutions equals or exceeds that of the systems they would replace and are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed firestopping that is similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and that has performed successfully D Single Source Responsibility- Obtain through- penetration firestop systems for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer E. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F Appendix A, Section 1 'Polarized Light Microscopy F Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that designated through- penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer date of manufacture; lot number shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS SECTION 07270 PAGE 4 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING B Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturers' instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation. C. Coordination: Prior to the start of work which involves cutting openings in fire wall construction for penetrations, conduct a meeting with installers of such work to identify fire and smoke barriers and required configurations of penetrations and to discuss the proper procedures and time schedule for cutting, patching, and sealing penetrations in such assemblies, with emphasis on avoiding unnecessary cutting and patching. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Perform firestopping and smokestopping work after completion of work which penetrates fire and smoke barriers, but prior to covering up or eliminating access to the penetration. Coordinate with installers of such other work. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with 'System Performance Requirements article in Part 1 Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for the designated fire resistance -rated systems. Accessories include but are not limited to the following items: 1 Permanent forming/damming /backing materials including the following: a. Semirefractory fiber (mineral wool) insulation. b. Ceramic fiber c. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. d. Fire -rated formboard. e. Joint fillers for joint sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3 Substrate primers. 4 Collars. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 07270 PAGE 5 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING 5 Steel sleeves. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Firestopping Materials 1 Provide penetration seal assemblies whose fire resistance ratings have been determined by testing in the configurations required and which have fife- resistance ratings at least as high as that of the fire -rated assembly in which they are to be installed. 2. Use the materials required for the tested assemblies indicated on the drawings. Where no tested assembly is indicated for a particular penetration, use a fire protection engineered assembly backed in writing by the firestop manufacturer which complies with the requirements of the specification. 3 Provide products which: a. Allow normal expansion and contraction movement of the penetrating item without failure of the penetration seal. b. Emit no hazardous, combustible, or irritating by- products during installation or curing period. c. Do not require special tools for installation. d. Do not require hazardous waste disposal. B Smokestopping Materials 1 Use any gunnable or pourable joint sealant suitable for the application. Use only fully curing types where accessible in the finished work. 2. Provide products which: a. Allow normal expansion and contraction movement of the penetrating item without failure of the penetration seal. b. Emit no hazardous, combustible, or irritating by- products during installation or curing period. c. Do not require special tools for installation. d. Do not require hazardous waste disposal. C. Labels 1 Red, permanent marking using the words 'Fire -Rated Assembly Do Not Disturb, See Maintenance Instructions' or equivalent as approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. For marking fire and smoke barriers themselves, use letters at least 2 inches high. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1 Bio Fireshield, Inc. 2. Dow Corning Corporation 3 General Electric Company 4 3M Fire Protection Products MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 PREPARATION 3.3 INSTALLING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPS SECTION 07270 PAGE 6 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements: 1 Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping. 2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. B Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. A. General. Comply with the 'System Performance Requirements article in Part 1 and the through- penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross- sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through- penetration firestop systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for through- penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1 Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3 For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. MAHLUM NORDFORS McI INLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3.4 INSTALLING FIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with the 'System Performance Requirements article in Part 1, with ASTM C 1193, and with the sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire- resistance rating required. C. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant movement capability Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed. D Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or curing begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce fire- resistance rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealants with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting agency employed and paid by Owner will examine completed firestopping to determine, in general, if it is being installed in compliance with requirements. B Inspecting agency will report observations promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. C. Do not proceed to enclose firestopping with other construction until reports of examinations are issued. D Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestopping so that it complies with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING 3.7 SCHEDULE Construction Condition SECTION 07270 PAGE 7 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and of products in which opening and joints occur B Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce firestopping complying with specified requirements. Manufacturer/Product U.L. Listing MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL Metal pipe and conduit through framed walls Non metallic pipe and conduit through framed walls Insulated metal pipe through framed walls Miscellaneous wiring through framed walls Metal pipe and conduit through concrete and metal deck floor Non metallic pipe and conduit through concrete and metal deck floor Insulated metal pipe through concrete and metal deck floor 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon 3M CP 25WB+ BioFireshield Biotherm 100 BioFireshield Biostop 500 3M PPD or FS195 BioFireshield Sleeve 3M CP 25WB+ BioFireshield Biostop 500 3M CP 25WB+ 3M CP 25WB+ BioFireshield Biotherm BioFireshield K10 mortar 3M PRO or FS195, CP 25WB+ BioFireshield sleeve 3M FS195, CP 25WB+ BioFireshield Biostop 500 SECTION 07270 PAGE 8 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING UL #WL1001 UL #WL0001, WL1021 UL #WL1021 UL #WL2002, WL2003 WL2004, WL2005 UL #WL2028 UL #WL1001 WL5009 UL #WL 1021 UL #WL3001, WL3030 UL #CAJ1044 UL #CAJ1031 UL #CAJ1032 UL #CAJ2001 2005 UL #CAJ2037 UL #CAJ5001 5003 UL #CAJ5016 END OF SECTION 07270 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GRNRRAI, 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 0 7 5 3 0 PAGE 1 SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cutting and patching of existing single -ply membrane roofmg system. B. Types of roofing systems specified in this Section using single -ply roofing membranes include the following: 1 Fully adhered and ballasted systems. C Single -ply roofing membranes include the following: 1 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC). D Roof insulation related to single -ply membrane roofing is specified in this Section. E. Wood nailers, blocking, and other related items are specified in Division 6 Section `Rough Carpentry F Flashing is specified in Division 7 Section `Flashing and Sheet Metal. 1 3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data, installation instructions, and general recommendations from manufacturer of single -ply membrane system for types of roofmg required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. C Name, address, and phone number of roofing installer 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Obtain primary single -ply membrane roofing from manufacturer of existing roof system. Provide secondary materials as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. B. Installer: Engage an experienced Installer that has specialized in installing roofing systems similar to those required for this Project. Installer must be acceptable to or be licensed by manufacturer of primary roofing material. 1 Existing Roofing Installer Existing roofing was installed by Merg, Inc. P.O Box 2382, Shelton, WA 98584 (360) 427 -4504 phone, (360) 427 -4503 fax. 2. Work associated with single -ply membrane roofing, including (but not limited to) insulation, flashing, and membrane sheet joint sealers, is to be performed by Installer of this Work. C UL Listing: Provide labeled materials that have been tested and listed by UL in 'Building Materials Directory' or by other nationally recognized testing laboratory for Class A rated materials /system. D Factory Mutual: Provide materials with a Factory Mutual classification of FM 1 -90. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Proceed with roofing work when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements. B. Substrate Conditions: Do not begin roofing installation until substrates have been inspected and are determined to be in satisfactory condition. 1 6 WARRANTY PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 GENERAL 2 2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) MEMBRANE SECTION 0 7 5 3 0 PAGE 2 SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING A. Special Project Warranty Submit written documentation, signed and countersigned by Manufacturer and Installer (Roofer) of existing roofmg, that work of this Section including roofing membrane, composition flashing, roof insulation, and roof accessories, is in full compliance with the warranty requirements of the existing roofing warranty and that the existing roofing warranty is in no way modified, compromised, or violated. B. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. A. Performance: Provide roofing materials of the same manufacture and type as the existing roofing. A. General. Virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with plasticizers and modifiers, formed into uniform flexible sheets, complying with ASTM D 4434 Type to suit project. 1 Thickness: 50 mils, nominal. 2. Membrane Reinforcing: Manufacturer's standard polyester scrim. 3 Exposed Face Color. White. B. Fully Adhered PVC Membrane: Manufacturer's standard installation. 1 Manufacturer Provide PVC Thermoplastic Roofing system products by Mule -Hide. 2 3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Sheet Seaming System. Manufacturer's standard materials for sealing lapped joints, including edge sealer to cover exposed spliced edges as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 1 Mule -Hide Thermoplastic Edge Sealant. B. Cant Strips, Tapered Edge Strips, and Flashing Accessories: Types recommended by membrane manufacturer, including adhesive tapes, flashing cements, and sealants. 1 Mule -Hide Termination Caulk. 2. 3 mil aluminum foil tape with acrylic adhesive. 3 Mule -Hide Vinyl Coated 24 gauge metal flashing laminated with 40 mils of Mule -Hide Thermoplastic membrane. C Aggregate Surface Ballast: Washed, rounded, riverbed gravel or other acceptable smooth -faced stone ranging in size from 1 to 2 inches in diameter. Provide aggregate that will withstand weather exposure without significant deterioration and will not contribute to membrane degradation. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL D Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer for particular substrate and project conditions. 1 Mule -Hide Thermoplastic Bonding Adhesive. 2 4 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials to comply with requirements indicated for materials and with referenced standards in sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. 1 Provide tapered boards where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate with taper of 1/4 inch per foot, unless otherwise indicated. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Roof Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with polyisocyanurate closed -cell foam core and manufacturer's non asphaltic facing laminated to both sides; complying with FS HH I 1972/2, Class 1 and having a minimum compressive strength of 18 psi. 2 5 AUXILIARY INSULATION MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with fire- resistance requirements. FART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARING SUBSTRATE SECTION 0 PAGE 3 SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING A. General: Comply with manufacturers' instructions to prepare substrate to receive single -ply membrane system. B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to single -ply system installation. Remove sharp projections. C Install cant strips, flashings, and accessory items as shown and as recommended by manufacturer. D Prevent compounds from entering and clogging drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other work. 3 2 INSTALLING INSULATION A. General: Extend insulation full thickness in two layers, or in multiple layers in area to be patched, cutting and fining tightly around obstructions. Form cant strips, crickets, saddles, and tapered areas to match existing slopes with additional material as shown and as required for proper drainage of membrane. 1 Stagger joints in one direction for each course. For multiple layers, stagger joints in both directions between courses with no gaps, to form a complete thermal envelope. 2. Provide tapered units to suit existing drainage pattem and as indicated around new work. B. Do not install more insulation in a day than can be covered with membrane before end of day or before start of inclement weather C Provide protection sheet between insulation and membrane when recommended by membrane manufacturer MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 3 INSTALLING MEMBRANE 3 4 PROTECTING ROOFING 1996 Mahlu n Nordfora McKinley Gordon SECTION 0 7 5 3 0 PAGE 4 SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING A. Fully Adhered Membrane: Install membrane by unrolling over prepared substrate, lapping adjoining sheets as recommended by manufacturer Mechanically fasten membrane to curbs and penetrations per manufacturer's instructions. 1 Do not apply adhesive to lap areas that are to be welded. Align sheets to provide adequate lap area as required by welding techniques. 2. Use Thermoplastic Edge Sealant to seal cut edges of membrane. 3 Install flashings and counterflashings, and accessories at locations and as recommended by manufacturer B. Walkway Protection: Relocate existing paver units at locations shown and where required for access to roof mounted equipment. Place protection boards carefully to avoid damage to membrane, laying over an additional layer of roof membrane material, loosely applied, for additional protection. A. After completing roofing (including associated work), institute appropriate procedures for surveillance and protection of roofing during remainder of construction period. At the end of the construction period, or at a time when remaining construction will in no way affect or endanger roofing, make a final inspection of roofing and prepare a written report to Owner describing nature and extent of deterioration or damage found. B. Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective work found at the time of final inspection to a condition free of damage and deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion and according to the requirements of the specified warranty END OF SECTION 07530 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART -1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1 2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Metal counter flashing and base flashing at vents through roof, mechanical curbs and other roof penetrations. 2. Miscellaneous flashing details. 1 3 SUBMITTALS 1 4 PROJECT CONDITIONS PART 2 PRODTJCTS 2 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS SECTION 0 7600 PAGE 1 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data, Flashing, Sheet Metal, and Accessories: Manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product. A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of materials and finishes. A. Stainless -Steel Sheet ASTM A 167 Type 304 soft annealed, with No. 2D finish, except where harder temper is required for forming or performance; minimum 0.0187 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. 2 2 FABRICATED UNITS A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop- fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual' and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather resistant performance, with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil- canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat -lock seams. For metal other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder C Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently water /weatherproof, form expansion jomts of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). C MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON 1994 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 0 MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON 1994 SECTION 07600 PAGE 2 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL D Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards. E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer /fabricator. PART 3 EXEC'ITION 3 1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. 3 2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal ca deterioration of finishes. B. Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07600 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 2 SUMMARY A. Provide materials, labor equipment, inspection, coordination, and supervision necessary for the best and most complete installation per industry standards of roofing accessories and specialties with all components and appurtenances as indicated in this specification and the project drawings. B. Section includes: 1 Prefabricated curbs SECTION 07720 PAGE 1 ROOF ACCESSORIES C Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1 Insulation: Division 7 Section `Building Insulation 2. Sheet metal flashing, including coping: Division 7 Section `Flashing and Sheet Metal' 3 Joint sealants: Division 7 Section, `Joint Sealers' 4 Ventilating equipment and plumbing venting: Division 15 Mechanical 1 3 SUBMITTALS A. General. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Product Data Manufacturer's specifications, standard details, and installation recommendations for components provided. C Shop Drawings: Show style and size, fastening, and flashing for each curb required. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual' details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofmg indicated. Comply with 'NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual' details for installation of units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209• manufacturer's standard alloy and temper to suit specified finishes B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A570 C Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A526 or A527 minimum G90 coating D Hot -Dip Galvanizing (fabricated products and hardware): ASTM Al23 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL E. Fasteners 1 For Attachment of Roof Accessories to Supporting Structure: Hot -dip galvanized zinc plated or cadmium plated steel, or stainless steel. 2. For Aluminum: Made from the following, according to roof accessory manufacturer's standard practice: a. Stainless steel: ASTM A193 B8 series b Aluminum. ASTM B211 alloy 2024 -T4 for threaded fasteners; ASTM B316 for rivets 3 For Steel and Galvanized Steel. Hot -dip galvanized steel. 4 For Dissimilar Metals: Stainless steel, ASTM A193, B8 series. F Steel for Structural Supports and Reinforcements: ASTM A36, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM Al23. G Isolation Coatings 1 Zinc Chromate Alkyd Primer FS TT-P -645 2. Bituminous Coating: FS TT-C-494 Type II 2 2 FINISHES A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AA- M12C22A41 (nonspecular as- fabricated mechanical finish; chemical etch, medium matte; 0.7 mil minimum thickness clear anodic coating). B. Mill Finish: As fabricated, with welds cleaned and dressed and exposed welds ground smooth. Remove oil, grease, dirt, and weld spatter from finished units. 2 3 .PREFABRICATED CURB PART 3 EXRCUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION SECTION 07720 PAGE 2 ROOF ACCESSORIES A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1 Curbs, Inc. 2. Custom Curb, Inc. 3 Roof Products and Systems Corporation 4 Pate Company B. Quality Standard Product: Prefabricated roof curbs as manufactured by Custom Curb, Inc. C Description 1 Box Section design, 18 -gage galvanized steel with continuous welded seams. 2. Factory installed treated wood nailer. 3 Insulation: 1 1/2 inches, three -part fiberglass board. 4 Style: Type CRC 3 A. Det ermine that conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this section. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer Starting of the work will be construed as acceptance of conditions. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 07720 PAGE 3 ROOF ACCESSORIES B. Verify that substrates and openings to receive roof accessories are rigidly set, at proper lines ad elevation, properly sized, and ready to receive accessories. C Coordinate roof accessory installation with roofing work and other adjacent elements of building envelope to ensure watertight construction. 3 2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates and connecting work to enable the best and most complete installation per industry standards of the work of this section. B. Coat contact surfaces of dissimilar metals with one or more coats of isolation coating. The following metals are not considered dissimilar aluminum, stainless steel, cadmium, and zinc. C Apply one 15 -mil dry film thickness coat of bituminous isolation coating to metal surfaces other than galvanized steel which will be in contact with cementitious materials. 3 3 INSTALLATION A. Install roof accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and shop drawings. B. Set units plumb and true, and in proper alignment and relation to established lines and levels. Set flashings free of warp or twist. C Pack shim spaces with batt insulation. 3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 01400, Quality Control. B. Provide experienced supervision of all elements of the work of this section. 3 5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, and Section 01710, Final Cleaning. B. Remove protective material from prefinished surfaces immediately after installation. C Touch up marred or abraded areas of finished elements. If satisfactory touch -up cannot be accomplished, remove and replace element. ®l 996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 07720 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 07901 PAGE 1 JOINT SEALANTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: 1 Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below a. Joints between concrete and vinyl windows. b. Other joints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. c. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures. d. Other joints as indicated. B Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1 Division 7 Section 'Flashing and Sheet Metal' for sealing joints related to flashing and sheet metal for roofing. 2. Division 8 'Glass and Glazing for sealants used in glazing. 3 Division 9 Section 'Firestopping' for through- penetration firestopping systems. 4 Division 9 Section 'Gypsum Board Assemblies' for sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 5 Division 9 Section Acoustical Panels' for sealing edge moldings at perimeter of acoustical ceilings. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 1 Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required. 2. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view Where custom colors are specified, submit actual products in specified colors. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suii:able for the use indicated. 4 Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. 5 Product test reports for each type of joint sealants indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements specified. 1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 07901 PAGE 2 JOINT SEALANTS A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with rnanufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1 When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 degrees F (4 4 degrees C). 2. When joint substrates are wet. B Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B Colors. Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: '1 Provide custom colors to match adjacent substrate for exposed -to -view joint sealant. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 07901 PAGE 3 JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically or moisture /atmospherically curing elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet at end of this Section, including those requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. 1 Additional Movement Capability Where additional movement capability is specified in Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet, provide products with the capability when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719 to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for Uses indicated. B Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Schedule/Data Sheet, or approved equal. 2.3 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, mildew- resistant, paintable latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively B Acrylic- Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 that accommodates joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent. C. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, with ASTM C 920 that accommodates joint movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent. D Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in the Joint Sealant Schedule/Data Sheets, or approved equal. 2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements: 1 Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90. 2. Product has flame spread and smoke developed ratings of less than 25 per ASTM E 84 B Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in the Joint Sealant Schedule/Data Sheets, or approved equal. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.5 TAPE SEALANTS SECTION 07901 PAGE 4 JOINT SEALANTS A. Tape Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, solvent -free, butyl -based tape sealant with a solids content of 100 percent formulated to be nonstaining, paintable, and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces with or without reinforcement thread to prevent stretch and packaged on rolls with a release paper on one side. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or approved equal: 1 'Extru -Seal Tape, Pecora Corp. 2. 'Shim -Seal Tape, Pecora Corp. 3. 'PTT 606, Protective Treatments, Inc. 4 'Tremco 440 Tape, Tremco, Inc. or Tremco 440 II" 5. 'MBT 35, Tremco, Inc. 2.6 PREFORMED FOAM SEALANTS A. Preformed Foam Sealants: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, impregnated open -cell foam sealant manufactured from high density urethane foam impregnated with a nondrying, water repellent agent; factory- produced in precompressed sizes and in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated and to develop a watertight and airtight seal when compressed to the degree specified by manufacturer and complying with the following requirements: 1 Properties: Permanently elastic, mildew- resistant, nonmigratory nonstaining, and compatible with joint substrates and other joint sealants. 2. Impregnating Agent: Manufacturer's standard for weatherproof joint. 3. Density Manufacturer's standard. 4 Backing: None. 5 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or approved equal: a. 'Wil -Seal 150, Wil -Seal Construction Foams Div Illbruck. 2.7 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1 Closed -cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in unruptured state. C. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self adhesive tape where applicable. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS SECTION 07901 PAGE 5 JOINT SEALANTS A. Primer Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant- substrate tests and field tests. B Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements: 1 Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean concrete, masonry unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air 3 Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4 Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. MAHLUM NORDFORS McIONLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 07901 PAGE 6 JOINT SEALANTS C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1 Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between sealants and joint fillers or back of joints. E. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed. F Tooling of Nonsag Sealants Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer 1 Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. G. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, and to comply with sealant manufacturer's directions for installation methods, materials, and tools that produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in conformance with sealant manufacturer's recommendations. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur 3.5 PROTECTION PART 4 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALER DATA SHEETS 4.1 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALER DESIGNATION: ES -lb A. Base Polymer Neutral, curing ultra -low modulus silicone B. Type: Single component C. Grade: Nonsag D Class: A SECTION 07901 PAGE 7 JOINT SEALANTS A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. E. Additional Movement Capability 100 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in compression F Uses Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic) G. Uses Related to Joint Substrates. M, A, 0, and as applicable to joint substrates indicated in Joint Sealant Schedule H. Products 1 Dow 790 2. GE Silpruf 3 Pecora 864 4 Tremco Spectrem 1 4.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALER DESIGNATION: IS 1 A. Base Polymer Acid or neutral curing sanitary silicone B. Type: Single component C. Grade: Nonsag D Class: A E. Additional Movement Capability 25 percent movement in both extension and compression MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL F Uses Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic) H. Products 1 GE Sanitary 1700 2. Pecora 898 3 Sealant Specialists, White 4 Tremco ProGlaze, White 1 Pecora AC 20 2. Tremco Acoustical Sealant 0 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 07901 PAGE 8 JOINT SEALANTS G. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: As applicable to joint substrates indicated in Joint Sealant Schedule 4.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALER DESIGNATION: IS 3 A. Base Polymer Acrylic Latex B Type: Single component C. Grade: Nonsag D Class: N/A E. Additional Movement Capability 15 percent movement in both extension and compression F Uses Related to Exposure: NT nontraffic) G. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: Joints between GWB, window units, GWB and woodwork H. Products END OF SECTION 07901 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McILNNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL IYpe ES -lb Single component low modulus silicone IS -1 Single- component silicone IS -3 Single- component acrylic latex IS-4 Construction joints in fire -rated assemblies IS -5 Acoustical sealant ®1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon Color Custom: To be selected by Architect Standard: White Custom. To be selected by Architect Application SECTION 07901 -S PAGE 1 JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE Joints between concrete and window frames; joints in concealed flashing; sealant in reglets; other exterior sealant joints Toilet rooms; showers; janitor rooms Joints between GWB and aluminum window units, GWB and woodwork Refer to: Section 07270, Firestopping, for systems and applications Refer to: Section 09511 Acoustical Treatment/Acoustical Insulation END OF SECTION 07901 -S 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 08111 PAGE 1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following products manufactured in accordance with SDI Recommended Standards: 1 Doors: Flush, hollow or composite construction standard steel doors for interior and exterior Locations (if any 2. Frames: Pressed steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, mullions, interior glazed panels, and other interior and exterior openings of following type: a. Welded unit type. 3 Assemblies: Provide standard steel door and frame assemblies as required for the following: a. Labeled and fire rated. 4 Provide factory primed doors and frames to be field painted. B Painting primed doors and frames is specified in Division 9 Section 'Painting. C. Wood doors are specified in Division 8 Section 'Flush Wood Doors. D Door hardware is specified in Division 8 Section 'Door Hardware. E. Glass and Glazing are specified in Division 8 Section 'Glazing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1 Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings. 2. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. D Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire -rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit manufacturer's certification that each door and frame MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute 'Recommended Specifications Standard Steel Doors and Frames ANSI/SDI -100 and as herein specified. B Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies whose fire resistance characteristics have been determined per ASTM E 152 and which are labeled and listed by UL, Factory Mutual, Warnock Hersey or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING SECTION 08111 PAGE 2 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard- wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to fmish of factory- finished doors and frames. B Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover Place units on minimum 4- inches high wood blocking. Avoid use of non vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately Provide 1 /4- inches spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2 PROpMCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer Subject to compliance with requirements, provide standard steel doors and frames by one of the following: 1 Standard Steel Doors and Frames: a. Ceco Corp. b. Curries Company c. Fenestra Corp. d. Kewanee Corp. e. Mesker Door Co. f. Pioneer Industries. g. Republic Builders Products. h. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. i. Stiles Custom Hollow Metal MAHLUM NORDFORS McIONLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.2 MATERIALS SECTION 08111 PAGE 3 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568. B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality complying with ASTM A 526, or drawing quality ASTM A 642, hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 525, with A60 or G60 coating designation, mill phosphatized. D Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 -gage sheet steel; galvanized where used with galvanized frames. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, hot -dip galvanize in compliance with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. F Shop Applied Paint: Apply after fabrication. 1 Primer Rust inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying with ANSI A224.1, 'Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 2.3 FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 18 -gage cold -rolled steel. 1 Fabricate frames with mitered, coped, or welded corners. 2. Form exterior frames from 16 -gage galvanized steel. B. Door Silencers: Except on weather stripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double door frames. C. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 26 -gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. D Finish Hardware Reinforcement Reinforce frames for required finish hardware as follows: 1 Hinges: Steel plate 3/16 inch thick by 1 1/2 inch wide by 6 inches longer than hinge, secured by not less than six spot welds. 2. Strike Plate Clips: Steel plate 3/16 inch thick by 1 1/2 inch wide by 4 inches long. 3. Surface- Applied Closers: 12 -gage steel sheet secured with not less than six spot welds. 4 Concealed Closers: Removable steel access plate, 12 -gage internal reinforcement of size and shape required and enclosing housing to keep closer pocket free of mortar or other materials. Reinforcement for other moving items to meet SDI -107 1978. MAHLUM NORDFORS MCHIM,EY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL E. Wall Anchors SECTION 08111 PAGE 4 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1 General: Furnish wall anchors as required to secure frames to adjacent construction formed of not less than 18 -gage galvanized steel. 2. Masonry Construction: Adjustable, flat or corrugated, or perforated, T- shaped to suit frame size with leg not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long. Furnish at least four anchors per jamb up to 7- foot -6 -inch height, five anchors up to 8 -foot jamb height, one additional anchor for each 24 inches or fraction thereof over 8 -foot height. 3 Metal Stud Partitions: Insert type with notched clip to engage metal stud, welded to back of frames. Provide at least four anchors for each jamb for frames up to 7 feet 6 inches in height, five anchors up to 8 -foot jamb height, one additional anchor for each 24 inches or fraction thereof over 8 -foot height. 4 In -place Concrete or Masonry Anchor frame jambs with minimum 3/8 -inch concealed bolts into expansion shields or inserts at 6 inches from top and bottom and 26 inches on center, unless otherwise shown. Reinforce frames at anchor locations and fully grout. Apply removable stop to cover anchor bolts unless otherwise indicated. F Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion which extends to floor formed of not less than 16 -gage galvanized steel sheet as follows: 1 Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip type anchors with two holes per clip anchor to receive fasteners, welded to bottom of jambs and mullions. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable type with extension clips. Terminate bottom of frames at fmish floor surface. G. Head Anchors: Provide two anchors at head of frames exceeding 42 inches wide for frames mounted in steel stud walls. H. Structural Reinforcing Members 1 Provide structural reinforcing members as a part of frame assembly where indicated or required at mullions, transoms, or other locations which are to be built into frame. 2. Provide reinforcing of head and muntin members at openings greater than 48- inches. 3 Provide reinforcing of jamb members at units containing more than two pans of doors. I. Head Reinforcing: For frames over 4 feet wide, provide two continuous steel angles not Less than 2 inches by 2 inches by 12 gage and width of opening, welded to back of frame at head, unless otherwise shown. J Spreader Bars: Provide two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames; tack welded to jambs and mullions. K. Sound Deadening: Coat inside (concealed) faces of door jambs in hollow wall construction with plaster Coating shall cover concealed surfaces to the fullest extent possible. Apply over shop primer approximately 1/2 inch minimum thick and allow to dry before handling. Grout solid all exterior frames or frames in masonry walls. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 08111 PAGE 5 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES identify work that cannot be permanently factory- assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with ANSUSDI -100 requirements. 1 Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads except between non -fire -rated pairs of doors not more than 1/4 inch. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels from only cold rolled steel. C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 'Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames. D Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from either cold rolled or hot- rolled steel. E. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. F Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware in accordance with final Door Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 Series Specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. G. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface- applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface- applied hardware may be done at project site. H. Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with 'Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware on Standard Steel Doors and Frames, published by Door and Hardware Institute. Shop Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. 1 Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint. 2. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. FART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General. Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. B Placing Frames. Comply with provisions of SDI -105 'Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel Frames, unless otherwise indicated. 1 Sound deaden frames with vermiculite plaster Grout fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA 80 and UBC 43 -2 2. Except for frames located at existing concrete, masonry or drywall installations, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN 3.3 SCHEDULE 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 08111 PAGE 6 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 3. Provide at least three wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels and minimum 18- gage base anchors. 4 At existing concrete or masonry construction, provide 3 completed opening anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices. 5 Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80. 6. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. A. Prime Coat Touch -up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch -up of compatible air -drying primer B. Protection Removal Immediately prior to fmal inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors. C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. A. Provide hollow metal frames as scheduled at doors and relite openings, unless otherwise noted. B. Refer to project drawings, including but not limited to, plans, elevations, sections, details, and schedules. END OF SECTION 08111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 s 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes solid core flush wood doors. Extent and location of each type of flush wood door is indicated on drawings and in schedules. B. Types of doors include the following: 1 Solid core flush wood doors with plastic laminate fmish. 2. Existing solid core flush wood doors to be refinished with paint or plastic laminate C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 8 Section 'Standard Steel Doors and Frames' 2. Division 8 Section 'Hardware for hardware types and installation. 3 Division 9 Section `Gypsum Board Assemblies' for reinforcement at door openings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS SECTION 08211 PAGE 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each type of door including details of core and edge construction, trim for openings, and factory- fmishing specifications. B Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door elevation of each kind of door details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data. 1 For factory-pre machined doors, indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts for locksets and other cutouts adjacent to light and louver openings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards: 1 NWWDA Quality Standard: I.S.1 'Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors of National Wood Window and Door Association (NWWDA). 2. AWI Quality Standard: Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' including Section 1300 Architectural Flush Doors' of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) for grade of door core construction, finish and other requirements exceeding those of NWWDA quality standard. B Fire -Rated Wood Doors. Provide wood doors which are identical in materials and construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies per ASTM E 152 and which are labeled and listed for ratings indicated by UL or Warnock Hersey C. Manufacturer Obtain doors from a single manufacturer MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of NWWDA pamphlet 'How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors as well as with manufacturer's instructions. B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for door frames, and hardware, using temporary removable or concealed markings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS SECTION 08211 PAGE 2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to project's geographical location: 1 Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100 -S -3 'Moisture Content' 1.7 WARRANTY A. General. Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer Installer and Contractor agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow cup or twist) or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. 1 Warranty shall also include reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of Substantial Completion. 3 Solid Core Interior Doors: a. Life of installation. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where Contractor's work contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1 Solid Core Doors with High Pressure Decorative Laminate Faces: a. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division. b. Georgia Pacific c. Lynden Door 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL d. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. e. Cenco Door f. Vancouver Door Inc. g. Western Oregon Door h. Weyerhauser Company 2.2 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08211 PAGE 3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. Solid Core Doors High Pressure Decorative Laminate Finish: Comply with the following requirements: 1 Faces: High Pressure Decorative Laminate. 2. AWI Grade: Custom. 3 Construction: PC- HPDL -5 B Fire -Rated Solid Core Doors. Comply with the following requirements. C. Faces and AWI Grade: Provide faces and grade to match non -rated doors in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. 1 Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction as required to provide fire resistance rating indicated. 2. Edge Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated edge construction for improved screw holding capability and split resistance as compared to edges composed of a single layer of treated lumber. a. Provide fire -rated pairs with fire- retardant stiles which are labeled and listed for kinds of applications indicated without formed steel edges and astragals. D Plastic Laminate for Existing Doors: GP50 high pressure decorative laminate. Refer to Finish Plan and Finish Schedule in Volume 1 Project Drawings for color and manufacturer E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate to Existing Doors: Contact adhesive. 2.3 LIGHT FRAMES A. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 18- gage cold- rolled steel, factory- primed, and approved for use in door of fire- rating indicated. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate flush wood doors to produce doors complying with following requirements: 1 Factory- prefit and premachine doors to fit frame opening sizes indicated with the following uniform clearances and bevels: a. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for prefitting. Comply with final hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates. b. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory premachining. MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 08211 PAGE 4 FLUSH WOOD DOORS B. Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed steel edges for hardware where required for pairs of fire -rated doors. C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of doors required. 1 Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door 1 Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation see Division -8 'Door Hardware section of these specifications. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and of referenced AWI standard and as indicated. 1 Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA No. 80. C. Job -Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below• do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1 Fitting Clearances for Non -Rated Doors. Provide 1/8' at jambs and heads; 1/16' per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/8' from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Fitting Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: Complying with NFPA 80 3 Bevel non -rated doors 1/8' in 2' at lock and hinge edges. 4 Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8' in 2' at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency D Prefit Doors: Fit to frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3.4 REFINISHING EXISTING DOORS WITH NEW PLASTIC LAMINATE FACES A. Remove existing doors from frames. Retain and protect butts and hinge pins. Remove existing hardware. B Sand existing paint finish from door faces completely using progressively finer grit of sandpaper to achieve smooth, blemish free surface at original veneer C. Prep door for new hardware if scheduled. D Clean door faces to remove all dust and oils. E. Cut and trim plastic laminate to fit existing door faces. Apply plastic laminate to door faces per adhesive manufacturer's instructions. Allow adhesive to set and cure fully F Rehang door and check for proper clearances. Chamfer edges or adjust hinges to assure that doors swing and operate freely G. Reinstall existing hardware or install new hardware as scheduled. 3.5 REFINISHING EXISTING PAINTED DOORS A. Remove existing doors from frames. Retain and protect butts and hinge pins. Remove existing hardware. B. Sand existing paint finish to achieve smooth, blemish free, sound surface. It is not necessary to remove all of the existing paint coating. C. Prep door for new hardware if scheduled. D Clean door faces to remove all dust and oils. E. Paint doors per Division 9 Section `Painting. F Rehang door and check for proper clearances. Adjust to swing and operate freely G. Reinstall existing hardware or install new hardware as scheduled. ©1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinlcy Gordon SECTION 08211 PAGE 5 FLUSH WOOD DOORS END OF SECTION 08211 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 08305 PAGE 1 ACCESS DOORS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of access doors: 1 Ceiling access doors. B Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 9 Section 'Gypsum Board Assemblies' for gypsum board walls and ceilings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B Product data for each type of access door assembly specified, including details of construction relative to materials, individual components, profiles, fmishes, and fire protection ratings (if required). 1 Include complete schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, wall and ceiling construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility Obtain access doors for entire Project from one source and by a single manufacturer B Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule specified under 'Submittals' Article. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 Cesco Products. 2. J.L. Industries. 3 Karp Associates, Inc. 4 Larsen s Manufacturing Co. 5 Milcor, Inc. MAHLUM NORDFORS McIONLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 6. Nystrom, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M commercial quality cold rolled steel sheet with baked -on, rust- inhibitive primer B Zinc Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Electrolytic zinc coated steel sheet with Class C coating and phosphate treatment to prepare surface for painting. 2.3 ACCESS DOORS SECTION 08305 PAGE 2 ACCESS DOORS A. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Trim: Units consisting of frame with exposed trim, door hardware, and complying with the following requirements: 1 Frame: 0.0598 -inch- (1.52 -mm thick steel sheet. 2. Frame: 0.0598 -inch- (1.52 -mm thick zinc coated steel sheet. 3 Door 0.0747 -inch- (1.90 -mm thick steel sheet. 4 Door 0.0747 -inch- (1.90 -mm thick zinc coated steel sheet. 5. Trim. Flange integral with frame, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, overlapping surrounding finished surface. 6. Hinge: Continuous type. 7 Locks: Flush, screwdriver operated cam. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation. B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Continuous welded construction. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 1 Exposed Flange: Nominal 1 to 1 1/2 inches wide around perimeter of frame. 2. For gypsum board assemblies or gypsum veneer plaster, furnish frames with edge trim for gypsum board or gypsum base. C. Locking Devices. Furnish number required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Advise Installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for access doors that must be built into other construction. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing access doors. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 08305 PAGE 3 ACCESS DOORS B Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Provide ceiling access doors as shown and as required for code mandated access into ceiling space. B Proved zinc coated access doors where they occur in showers, baths, toilet rooms, and janitors and housekeeping closets. 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 08305 MAHLUM NORDFORS MCHINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY SECTION 08520 PAGE 1 VINYL WINDOWS A. This Section includes commercial -grade vinyl window units of the performance class indicated. Extent of each type of vinyl window unit required is indicated on the drawings. Window types required include: 1 Exterior individual fixed window unit set in existing concrete wall construction. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 8 Section `Glazing' for glass type, color and performance criteria. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Performance class number included as part of the window designation system is the actual design pressure in pounds per sq. ft. used to determine the structural test pressure and water test pressure. 1 Structural test pressure, windload test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure. 2. Water leakage resistance test pressure is equivalent to 15 percent of the design pressure with 2.86 psf as a minimum. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General. Provide vinyl window units that comply with performance requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding stock systems according to test methods indicated. B. Design Requirements: Comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements indicated in AAMA 101 for type, grade, and performance class of window units required. 1 Design wind velocity at the project site is 80 mph. C. Testing: Test each type and size of required window unit through a recognized independent testing laboratory or agency in accordance with ASTM E 330 for structural performance, with ASTM E 283 for air infiltration, and with ASTM E 547 for water penetration. Provide certified test results. 1 Structural Performance: Based on a maximum deflection of 1/175 of the span. Provide window units with no failure or permanent deflection after removal of the imposed load, for a positive (inward) and negative (outward) test pressure of 60 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Air Infiltration: Provide units with air infiltration rate of not more than 0.06 cfm/ft. of fixed area for an inward test pressure of 6.24 lbf /sq. ft. per ASTM E283 3 Water Penetration. Provide units with no water penetration as defined in the test method at an inward test pressure of 9.00 lbf/sq. ft. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 08520 PAGE 2 VINYL WINDOWS 4 Thermal Transmittance: Provide window units that have a U -value maximum of 0.60 BTU/hour /sq. ft. /deg F at 15 -mph exterior wind velocity when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503 1 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1 Product data for each type of window required, including: a. Construction details and fabrication methods. b. Profiles and dimensions of individual components. c. Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes. d. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces. 2. Shop drawings for each type of window required. Include information not fully detailed in manufacturer's standard product data and the following: a. Layout and installation details, including anchors. b. Elevations of continuous work at 1/4 -inch scale and typical window unit elevations at 3/4 -inch scale. c. Full -size, section details of typical composite members, including reinforcement. d. Glazing details. e. Accessories. 3 Samples: Submit samples of each specified fmish on 12 -inch -long sections of window members. 4 Certification: Provide certification by a recognized independent testing laboratory or agency showing that each type, grade, and size of window unit complies with performance requirements indicated. 5 Submit two (2) copies of shop drawings and product data showing glazing support conditions per UBC 2404 to the building official if so requested by the Architect. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installation of vinyl windows similar in design and extent to those required for the project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. B Standards: Requirements for vinyl windows, terminology and standards of performance, and fabrication workmanship are those specified and recommended in AAMA 101 and applicable general recommendations published by AAMA. C. Single -Source Responsibility Provide vinyl window units from one source and produced by a single manufacturer D Design Concept: The drawings indicate the size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of the vinyl window types required and are based on the specific type and model indicated. Vinyl windows by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer SENT BY M&NMG ,11 -12 -96 8 27AM (206) 441 0478 360 417 4542 2/ 2 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLIiY GORDON SE( `PION 08800 PAGE 12 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC (,LAZING AUBURN SOUTH AUI»NDUM 1 JNsUI.ATIN(i (;LASS DATA SHEET Classification of Units. Class C' CE3 or (:BA Thickness: 1 inch Air Space Width. 1/2 inch Gas Filling. Fill air space with Argon Scaling System Mal uGactwu cr s manikin], sealants Spacer Specifications. Manufacturer's standard Thickness of each light. 1/4 inch Uncoated Clear Indoor Light: Kind HS (heat strengthened), Conditiona A (uriemted) Class 1 (clear) float glass. Uncoated Clear Outdoor 1.ight. Kind HS (heat strengthen d) Condit,uua A (uncoated), Class T (clear) float glass. Visible: I,ight Transmittance t109'� Visible Light Reflectance 15% Summer Daytime U- Value. (1 56 Winter Nighttime U Value. 0 49 Shading Coefficient. 0.82 MAHLUM NORDFORS McILNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.8 WARRANTY B Warranty Period: three (3) years after the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCT 2.1 MANUFACTURERS SECTION 08520 PAGE 3 VINYL WINDOWS A. Field Measurements: Check actual window openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work. 1 Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit of window units. A. Vinyl Window Warranty Submit a written warranty executed by the window manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace window units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include but are not necessarily limited to: 1 Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage, or air infiltration. 2. Deterioration of finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies that the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 For exterior fixed windows: a. Alpine Windows; 280 series 2.2 MATERIALS A. Vinyl Extrusions: Frame and internal members of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound. B. Fasteners: Provide PVC, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with vinyl window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components of window units. 1 Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for application of hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match the finish of the member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. C. Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories of PVC, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or non corrosive material complying with the requirements of ASTM A 386; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. D Compression -Type Glazing Strips and Weatherstripping: Unless otherwise indicated, and at the manufacturer's option, provide compressible stripping for glazing and weatherstripping such as molded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with AAMA SG -1 or with ASTM D 2000 Designation 2BC415 to 3BC620, or molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287 or molded expanded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509 Grade 4 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSJTIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 08520 PAGE 4 VINYL WINDOWS E. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type recommended by the manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant shall remain permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating. Comply with Division 7 Section 'Joint Sealants of these specifications for selection and installation of sealants. 2.3 FIXED WINDOWS A. Window Grade and Class: Comply with requirements of AAMA Grade and Performance Class C20. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General. Fabricate vinyl window units to comply with indicated standards. Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units. 1 Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. 2. Prepare window sash or ventilators for glazing except where preglazing at the factory is indicated. B. Sizes, Profiles, and Details: Required sizes for window units and profile requirements are indicated on the drawings. 1 Details shown are based upon standard details by one or more manufacturers. Similar details by other manufacturers will be acceptable, provided they comply with size requirements, minimum/maximum profile requirements, and performance standards as indicated or specified. 2. Weepholes: Provide weepholes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to the exterior 3. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units, where shown, of profile and dimensions indicated. Miter or cope corners, and weld and dress smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to match window units. 4 Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, in the manner indicated. 5 Glazing Stops: Provide snap -on PVC glazing stops, coordinated with glass selection and glazing system indicated. Finish glazing stops to match window units. C. Preglazed Fabrication: Preglaze window units at the factory where possible and practical for applications indicated. Comply with glass and glazing requirements of the 'Glass and Glazing sections of these specifications and AAMA 101 D Reinforcement: Window manufacturer shall provide all necessary reinforcement within frames required due to size or profile of units shown or scheduled. This shall be determined by design criteria and as recommended by industry standards and local and state codes. 2.5 FINISHES A. General: Finish of all exposed surfaces to be the same. Any exposed fasteners shall match finish color 1 Color Almond to match units previously installed in other areas. Color to be solid throughout extrusion material. MAHLUM NORDFORS McILNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.6 HARDWARE A. Provide manufacturer's standard filler bar cap at all existing operable windows to disable operable function. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that rough or masonry opening is correct and the sill plate is level. 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.3 CLEANING SECTION 08520 PAGE 5 VINYL WINDOWS A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installation of window units, hardware, operators, and other components of the work. B Set window units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. C. Set sill members and other members in a bed of compound or with joint fillers or gaskets to provide weathertight construction. Refer to the Joint Sealer' sections of Division 7 for compounds, fillers, and gaskets to be installed concurrently with window units. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of the work. A. Clean vinyl surfaces promptly after installation of windows. Exercise care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. B. Clean glass of preglazed units promptly after installation of windows. Comply with requirements of the 'Glass and Glazing section for cleaning and maintenance. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Initiate and maintain protection and other precautions required through the remainder of the construction period, to ensure that, except for normal weathering, window units will be free of damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 0 1993 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 08520 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY SECTION 08710 PAGE 1 HARDWARE A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. B. This Section includes the following: 1 Hinges. 2. Pivots. 3. Lock cylinders and keys. 4 Lock and latch sets. 5 Bolts. 6. Exit devices. 7 Push/pull units. 8. Closers. 9 Overhead holders. 10. Miscellaneous door control devices. 11. Door trim units. 12. Protection plates. 13. Sound stripping for interior doors. 14 Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors. 15 Thresholds. 16. Door coordinators C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 8 Section 'Standard Steel Doors and Frames for silencers integral with hollow metal frames. 2. Division 8 Section 'Flush Wood Doors' for factory prefitting and factory premachining of doors for door hardware. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 08710 PAGE 2 HARDWARE B Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and fmish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1 Final Hardware Schedule Content Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into 'hardware sets' indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, and fmish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. The following is an example of the required format of the final hardware schedule: Heading 26 Sgl Door #41 Exterior from Boiler Room 14 3'0x7'0x 1 3 /4WDxHMF LHR 1 -1/2 pair butts (B5) Stanley FBB 191 26D -4 -1/2 x 4 -1/2 NRP lockset (L -21) Russwin D8OPD -PLY 26D door closer (C-4) LCN 4114 aluminum kickplate (K 2) BBW No. 37 US32D 10 x 34 inches wall bumper (S -1) BBW WB5OX US26D Threshold Pemko 179A x 36 inches MS ES Hardware schedules prepared in a coded horizontal manner are not acceptable. 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit fmal schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule. 3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. D Samples to be submitted only upon request. Submit one sample of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. Submit samples prior to submission of fmal hardware schedule. 1 Samples will be returned to the supplier Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review and field comparison process may, after final MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON_ OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL check of operation, be incorporated in the Work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements. E. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer B Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity that has a record of successful in- service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner Architect, and Contractor at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. 1 Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. C. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire -rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire -rated door and door frame labels. If coordinators, astragals and self latching bolts, door closers, and smoke seals are required, they shall be provided, whether or not specified. D Certificates: After installation of all hardware, but before acceptance of the work, furnish certification from hardware supplier that hardware is installed and operating in a satisfactory manner and hardware provided is as listed on the approved finish hardware submittal. Include one updated copy of the hardware schedule, listing hardware installed. Submit in writing addressed to the Owner in care of the Architect. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING SECTION 08710 PAGE 3 HARDWARE A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. D Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site). MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 08710 PAGE 4 HARDWARE E. Provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. 1.7 WARRANTY A. The hardware supplier shall provide to the Owner written warranties from the manufacturers of locksets, exit devices and door closers against defects in material and/or workmanship; locksets for one year, exit devices for three years and door closers for a ten year period. Pneumatic or electric closers are warranted for a two year period. PART 2 PRODUCtg 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 Butts and Hinges: a. Lawrence. b. McKinney Products Co. c. Stanley Hardware, Div Stanley Works. 2. Cylinders and Locks: a. Schlage (no substitutions) 3 Exit/Panic Devices: a. Von Duprin, Div Ingersoll -Rand Door Hardware Group. b. Sargent Company 4 Overhead Closers: a. Sargent Co. (no substitutions, match existing) 5 Smoke Activated Closers: a. LCN, Div Ingersoll -Rand Door Hardware Group. (no substitutions, match existing) 6. Kick, Mop, and Armor Plates: a. Baldwin Hardware Corp. b. Brookline Industries, Div Yale Security Inc. c. Builders Brass d. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco) e. CIPCO MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 7 Door Stripping and Seals: a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co. Inc. c. Reese Enterprises, Inc. 8. Thresholds: a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co. Inc. c. Reese Enterprises, Inc. 9 Sound Stripping: a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co. Inc. c. Reese Enterprises, Inc. 10. Astragals: a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co. Inc. c. Reese Enterprises, Inc. 2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE 2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION SECTION 08710 PAGE 5 HARDWARE A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the 'Hardware Schedule at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following: 1 Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article 'Manufacturers' in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements. A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using manufacturer's standard metal alloy composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for finish designations indicated. B. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. C. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including 'prepared for paint' surfaces to receive painted finish. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL D Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru -bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely Where thru -bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru -bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 2.4 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template- produced units. B Screws. Provide Phillips flat -bead screws complying with the following requirements: 1 For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. 2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws. 3. For fire -rated wood doors install #12 x 1 1/4 -inch, threaded -to- the -head steel wood screws. 4 Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. E. Quality Standard Product McKinney 2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING D Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze. SECTION 08710 PAGE 6 HARDWARE C. Hinge Pins. Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: 1 Out -Swing Exterior Doors: Nonremovable pins. 2. Out -Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins. 3 Interior Doors: Nonrising pins. 4 Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where hospital tip (HT) indicated. D Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height. 1 Fire -Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches or less in height with same rule for additional hinges. A. General. The hardware supplier shall be responsible to coordinate all keying of his locks with a representative of the Owner After keying conference, provide 3 copies of a key chart in form acceptable to the Owner listing all change keys by bitting if so required by the Owner Do not proceed without Owner's approval of key chart. Install all locks during the normal period of construction with construction keying. All locks must be operative for access and exit during construction with construction keys. B. Provide the keying type required, integrated with Owner's existing system. C. Equip locks with manufacturer's special 6 -pin tumbler cylinder with construction master key feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. MAHLUM NORDFORS McIUNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 08710 PAGE 7 HARDWARE E. Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. 1 Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer's key symbol, and notation, 'DO NOT DUPLICATE. F Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only G. Key Quantity Furnish 4 change keys for each lock. 1 Construction keys only are to be delivered to General Contractor 2. All permanent keys shall be sent via registered mail direct to the Owner H. Keying Conversion: At the completion of the project and under the supervision of the Owner or his appointed representative, the hardware supplier shall convert all construction keying to the permanent key system. After checking for proper key operation, all keys will be filed in an individual envelope furnished by the lock manufacturer marked with the door number key number master key set, etc. to facilitate their integration into a key control system. 2.6 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS A. General: All locks and latches shall have the following features: 1 Lever operated locks shall be equipped with separate heavy compression springs inside the lock case to maintain horizontal lever position. 2. To assure proper alignment of trim, rose supports (rose backplates) must either thread directly into case and cap or be through bolted through the door and lock case. 3. All lever operated locks used on fire -rated openings are to have U.L. approved fire stop inside the lock case or trim. B Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated. C. Lock Throw Provide 5/8 -inch minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. 1 Provide 1/2 -inch minimum throw of latch for other bored and preassembled types of locks and 3/4 -inch minimum throw of latch for mortise locks. Provide 1 -inch minimum throw for all dead bolts. D Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2- inch diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with minimum 12- inch -long rod for doors up to 7' -0' in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 7'-0' in height. E. Exit Device Dogging: Except on fire -rated doors where closers are provided on doors equipped with exit devices, equip the units with keyed dogging device to keep the latch bolt retracted, when engaged. 1 Quality Standard Product: Schlage lever handle, D Series Rhodes MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.7 PUSH/PULL UNITS A. Concealed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's special concealed fastener system for installation, thru- bolted for matched pairs but not for single units. 2.8 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES SECTION 08710 PAGE 8 HARDWARE A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. B. Coordinators: Provide integral or accessory door coordinators on double doors to assure that doors close in necessary sequence to facilitate astragal. C. Accessible Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117 1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. D Provide grey resilient parts for exposed bumpers. E. Quality Standard Product: LCN 2.9 DOOR TRIM UNITS A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine screws or self tapping screws. B Fabricate edge trim of stainless steel to fit door thickness in standard lengths or to match height of protection plates. C. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1 1/2 inches less than door width on hinge side and not more than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side by height indicated. 1 Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18 gage). D Quality Standard Product: Builders Brass 2.10 WEATHERSTRIPPING, SEALS AND SILENCERS A. General. Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. B Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer C. Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper -type resilient insert and metal retainer strips, surface applied unless shown as mortised or semimortised, and of specified metal, finish, and resilient bumper material. D Weatherstripping at Door Bottoms: Provide threshold consisting of contact -type resilient insert and metal housing of design and size shown. E. Door Silencers: Provide door silencers for all wood or metal frames except where weatherstripping or smoke gasketing is specified. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL F Quality Standard Product Pemko 2.11 THRESHOLDS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and profile appropriate for change in floor finish or level. B Quality Standard Product Pemko 2.12 HARDWARE FINISHES A. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, provide all architectural hardware in the following finishes: 1 The finish of all hardware in general, shall be dull chrome (US26D) 2. Push plates, door pulls and kickplates to be satin stainless steel (US32D) B. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware fmishes are the industry- recognized standard commercial fmishes, except as otherwise noted. 2.13 MISCELLANEOUS A. General. Provide miscellaneous hardware items and all required pieces for a complete installation as scheduled. B. Quality Standard Product Stanley 2.14 STOPS A. Furnish overhead stop or holders with maximum degree of opening that job conditions permit. B Furnish toggle bolts or machine screws and tampins as required. Plastic or fibre anchors will not be permitted. C. Furnish door silencers for all wood or metal frames except where weatherstripping or smoke gasketing is specified. 2.15 ASTRAGALS A. Provide astragal as required to maintain fire rating at meeting edge of double doors. B. Coordinate installation with door closer and coordinator PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION SECTION 08710 PAGE 9 HARDWARE A. In the absence of a hardware installation requirement in another section of this specification, the following recommendations shall be used as a guide. All other hardware shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer 1 Top hinge: 5- inches, header rabbet to top of hinge. 2. Bottom hinge: 10- inches, finish floor to bottom of hinge. 3 Center hinge: centered between top and bottom hinges. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 08710 PAGE 10 HARDWARE 4 Mortise locks: 40 -5/16 inches, fmish floor to center of lock case and strike. 5 Cylindrical or Unit locks: 38- inches, finish floor to center of lock case and strike. 6. Deadlocks and deadlatches: 60 -inch, finish floor to center of cylinder 7 Exit devices: 38- inches, finish floor to center of cross bar (including mortise lock type devices.) 8. Push Plates: 45- inches, finish floor to center of plate. 9 Door pulls: 42- inches, finish floor to center of pull. 10. Hospital latch or roller latch. 45- inches, finish floor to center of latch. B. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1 7 'Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors. C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or fmished in another way coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with fmishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. D Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. F Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl -rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section Joint Sealers. G. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated. H. Existing Doors and Frames: Prepare existing doors and frames to receive new hardware as specified. Hollow metal doors and frames are to be cut, reinforced and welded as required. Remaining holes where existing hardware is removed are to be filled and ground smooth. Wood doors and frames are to be blocked and remachined as required. Fill and sand any voids, cracks or gouges as required for refmishing. 2. It will be the responsibility of the contractor and the door and/or frame manufacturers to coordinate this work to ensure the matching of the door to the frame. 3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 1 Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 08710 PAGE 11 HARDWARE finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. 3.3 HARDWARE GROUPS A. General. The following is a list of hardware groups and general hardware required for each. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to employ a Builders' Hardware Supplier to provide, for Architect and Owner approval, a hardware schedule per Paragraph 1.3.0 of this Section. Group Typical Location Minimum Hardware Required A Patient Rooms Butts, passage latchset, smoke seal, wall stop or floor stop B Patient Toilets Butts, passage latchset, door silencers, wall or floor stop C Offices Butts, office lock, closer smoke seal, wall or floor stop D Offices Butts, office lock, door silencers, wall or floor stop E Cross Corridor Butts, panic hardware, astragal, closers, magnetic hold opens, smoke seal F Double Door Butts, classroom lockset, closers, door coordinator, astragal, magnetic hold opens, automatic flush bolt, dust proof strike, smoke seal G Utility Butts, storeroom lock, closer, smoke seal, wall or floor stop G2 Utility Same as G, with magnetic hold -open H Shower Butts, hospital privacy lock, closer, smoke seal 0 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 08710 MAHLUM NORDFORS McIONLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide materials, labor equipment, inspection, coordination, and supervision necessary for the best and most complete installation per industry standards of lath and plaster as indicated in this specification and on the project drawings. B Section includes: 1 Metal lath and furring 2. Portland cement base coats 3 Miscellaneous boards and moldings 4 Plaster accessories C. Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1 Steel studs for interior partitions, suspended ceilings and soffits, Division 9 Section `Gypsum Board Assemblies' 2. Grout for door frames, Division 9 Section `Gypsum Board Assemblies 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. SECTION 09200 PAGE 1 LATH AND PLASTER B. Product Data Consisting of manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each product, including data showing compliance with the requirements. C. Samples: If requested for verification purposes, in units at least 12 inches square of each type of finish indicated, in sets for each color texture, and pattern specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics. D Material Certificates. Submit producer's certificate for each kind of plaster aggregate indicated evidencing that materials comply with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General. Comply with Section 01400, Quality Control. B. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of system components with other work. C. Standards: Workmanship and installation not specified herein shall conform to the Northwest Wall Ceiling Bureau and/or industry specifications and recommendations as stated in ASTM Standard Specification C926, Application of Portland Cement Based Plaster MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01610, Delivery, Storage, and Handling. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS SECTION 09200 PAGE 2 LATH AND PLASTER B Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer C. Store materials inside, under cover, and in manner to keep them dry protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other causes. Protect metal corner beads and trim from being bent or damaged. A. General. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best and most complete installation per industry standards. B. Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards and recommendations of plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and after application of plaster C. Cold Weather Protection: Do not use frozen material. Do not apply plaster to frozen surfaces or surfaces containing frost. Do not mix materials or apply cement plaster when ambient temperature is less than 35 degrees F (1.6 degrees C). Temperatures for application of acrylic finishes shall be 40 degrees F or higher and remain so for a minimum of 24 hours. D Hot Weather Protection: Protect cement plaster from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, windy or dry weather During hot, windy or dry weather the cement plaster should be moistened down and then covered with a single sheet of polyethylene plastic. Moist curing is required at the start and end of work day Moist curing after each coat of cement plaster with water if ambient temperature is more than 75 degrees F (24 degrees C) Moist cure for 48 hours after application of coats. Moist curing not required if humidity higher than 75 percent. E. Protect contiguous work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration and other harmful effects that might result from plastering. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to the following: B Metal Supports 1. Framing a. American Studco, Inc. b. Chicago Metallic Corp. c. Gold Bond Building Products Div National.Gypsum Co. d. United States Gypsum Co. e. Allied Structural Industries, Inc. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2. Expanded Metal Lath a. Western Metal Lath Co. b. United States Gypsum Co. c. Gold Bond Building Products Div National Gypsum Co. 3. Accessories a. Western b. Amico c. Keene Corp. d. Cemco e. Fry Reglet Corp. f. Gold Bond Building Products Div National Gypsum Co. g. MM Systems Corp. b. Plastic Components, Inc. i. U.S. Gypsum Co. 2.2 VERTICAL METAL FURRING SECTION 09200 PAGE 3 LATH AND PLASTER A. Channel Furring and Braces: Cold -rolled steel, 0.0598 -inch min. thickness of base (uncoated) metal, allowable bending stress of 18,000 psi, protected with rust- inhibitive paint fmish or galvanizing, 3/4 -inch -deep by 7/16 -inch -wide flanges, 300 lbs. per 1000 feet with painted finish, 316 lbs. per 1,000 feet with galvanized finish. 1 Hat Channels. Hat shaped screwable furring channels, 7/8 -inch deep formed from zinc coated (galvanized) steel sheet minimum 0.0179 -inch thick complying with ASTM A 446, Coating Designation G 60, grade A (33,000 psi yield point). B. Z- Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard screw -type zee shaped furring members formed from zinc coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.0179 -inch min. base (uncoated) metal thickness, complying with ASTM A 525, Coating Designation G 60, designed for mechanical attachment of insulation boards of blankets to monolithic concrete and masonry walls. C. Furring Brackets: Serrated -Brun type, 0.0329 -inch min. thickness of base (uncoated) metal, adjustable from 1/4 -inch to 2 1/4 -inch wall clearance for channel furring. 2.3 LATH A. Expanded Metal and woven wire reinforcement Fabricate expanded metal lath and woven wire reinforcement from zinc coated (galvanized) steel to produce lath complying with ASTM C 847 for type, configuration, and other characteristics indicated below 1 Galvanized woven wire reinforcement (stucco): Comply with the following requirements: a. Configuration: self furring b. Size: 17 -gage by 1 1/2 -inch mesh MAHLUM NORDFORS McIQNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSMONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.4 PLASTER ACCESSORIES FOR PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER SECTION 09200 PAGE 4 LATH AND PLASTER c. Paper Backing: Where lath is indicated, provide asphalt- impregnated paper factory- bonded to back and complying with FS UU-B-790, for Type I, 60 minute, Grade D (vapor permeable), 20 pound, Style 2. d. Galvanized 2. Rib Lath: Comply with the following requirements: a. Configuration: Rib depth of 3/8 inch b. Weight 3 4 pounds per square yard. B Lath Attachment Devices: Devices of material and type required by referenced standards and recommended by lath manufacturer for secure attachment of lath to framing members and of lath to lath. A. General. Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063 coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of coats required. B Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded large -mesh diamond mesh lath fabricated from zinc alloy or welded wire mesh fabricated from 0.0475- inch diameter zinc coated (galvanized) wire and specially formed to reinforce external corners of Portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement. C. Metal Corner Beads: Small nose corner beads fabricated from galvanized steel, with expanded flanges of large -mesh diamond lath to allow full encasement by plaster D Casing Beads: Square -edged style, with expanded flanges, of galvanized steel. 2.5 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS A. Base coat cements: Type as indicated below B Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or II C. Masonry cement, ASTM C 91, Type N. D Sand Aggregate for Base Coats: ASTM C 897 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Fmishing Plaster Drinkable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Bonding Agent for Portland Cement Plaster ASTM C 932. 2.7 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MIXES AND COMPOSITIONS A. General. Comply with ASTM C 926 for portland cement plaster base coat mixes as applicable to plaster bases, materials, and other requirements indicated. B Portland Cement Plaster Base Coat Mixes and Compositions: Proportion materials for respective base coats in parts by volume for cementitious materials and in parts by volume per sum of cementitious materials for aggregates to comply with the following requirements for w e 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.8 MIXING SECTION 09200 PAGE 5 LATH AND PLASTER each method of application and plaster base indicated. Adjust mix proportions below within limits specified to attain workability 1 Fiber Content: Add fiber to following mixes after ingredients have mixed at least 2 minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's directions but do not to exceed 2 pounds per cubic feet of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability 2. Three -Coat Work Over Metal Lath: Base coats as indicated below. a. Scratch and Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 1 part masonry cement, 4 to 5 parts sand, fiber as indicated above. A. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable referenced application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Determine that conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this section. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer Starting of the work will be construed as acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates and connecting work to enable the best and most complete installation per industry standards of the work of this section. B Existing Water Damaged Plaster At areas of existing water damaged plaster, remove existing plaster and lath back to sound materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Lathing and Furring 1 Portland Cement Plaster Lathing and Furring Installation Standard: Select and Install lathing and furring materials indicated for portland cement plaster to comply with ASTM C 1063. 2. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in the work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, accessories and similar work to comply with details indicated. 3 Isolation: a. Where lathing and metal support system abuts building structure horizontally and where partition/wall work abuts overhead structure, isolate the work from structural movement sufficiently to prevent transfer of loading into the work from the building structure. Install slip -or cushion -type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support. B Installation of Vertical Metal Furring MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09200 PAGE 6 LATH AND PLASTER 1 Metal Furring to Receive Metal Lath: Comply with requirements of ML/SFA `Specification for Metal Lathing and Furring applicable to each installation condition indicated. C. Metal Lathing 1 Install expanded metal lath for the following applications where plaster base coats are required. Provide appropriate type, configuration, and weight of metal lath selected from materials indicated that comply with referenced lathing installation standards. a. Suspended and furred soffits using 3 4 lbs. per sq. yd. minimum weight diamond mesh lath. b. Vertical metal framing and furring. c. Exterior sheathed wall surfaces using 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd. minimum weight self furring diamond mesh lath. D Plastering Accessories 1 General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope accessories at corners; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and alignment during plastering. 2. Accessories for Portland Cement Plaster Provide the following types to comply with requirements indicated for location: a. Corner Reinforcement: Install at external corners. b. Casing Beads: Install at terminations of plaster work unless otherwise indicated. E. Plaster Application, General 1 Tolerances: Do not deviate more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10 -foot straightedge placed at any location on surface. 2. Sequence plaster application with the installation and protection of other work so that neither will be damaged by the installation of the other 3 Plaster flush with metal frames and other built -in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where plaster is not terminated at metal by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal before plaster sets and groove finish coat at the junctures with metal. 4 Apply thicknesses and number of coats of plaster as indicated or as required by referenced standards. F Portland Cement Plaster Application 1 Portland Cement Plaster Application Standard: Apply portland cement plaster materials, compositions, and mixes to comply with ASTM C 926. 2. Number of Coats: Apply portland cement plaster, of composition indicated, to comply with the following requirements: a. Use three -coat work over metal lath plaster bases. b. Use two -coat work over existing plaster bases. 1 y 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09200 PAGE 7 LATH AND PLASTER 3 Moist -cure portland cement plaster coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including recommendations for time between coats and curing in Annex A2 Design Considerations. Cure and prime portland cement plaster base coats in accordance with finish coat manufacturer's recommendations prior to application of finish coat. G. Cutting and Patching: 1 Cut, patch, point up, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, excessive crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to the substrate has failed. H. Repairing Damaged Plaster 1. Repair plaster and lath as necessary to restore plaster walls to smooth, level fmisb consistent with adjacent surfaces. Layer work as necessary to achieve integral bond through depth of repair 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 01400, Quality Control. B Provide experienced supervision of all elements of the work of this section. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, and Section 01710, Final Cleaning. B. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces that are not to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces that have been stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during the plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, and equipment and clean floors of plaster debris. C. Provide fmal protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer that ensure plaster work's being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Provide Portland cement plaster at repair work at existing plaster walls modified by work in this project and at areas of existing water damaged plaster and/or as indicated on project drawings. 0 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 09200 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 09255 PAGE 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Non load bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies. 2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing. 3. Grouting of hollow metal door frames. 4 Acoustic insulation. 5 Acoustic sealant. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 7 Section 'Firestopping and Smokestopping' for firestopping systems and fire resistive -rated joint sealants. 2. Division 8 Section `Lath and Plaster' for repairs to existing plaster walls. 3 Division 9 Section 'Painting' for substrate curing requirements. 4 Division 9 Section 'Wall Coverings' for vinyl wallcovering substrate requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA 505 for definitions of terms related to gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies indicated to have STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined per ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B Product data for each type of product specified. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Where fire -rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09255 PAGE 2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to GA File Numbers in GA -600 'Fire Resistance Design Manual or to design designations in UL 'Fire Resistance Directory' or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Single Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer C. Single Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer D Single Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer E. Conform to the following standards: 1 ASTM C 754 for installation of steel framing 2. ASTM C 840 for application and finishing of gypsum board F Conform to quality standards of the Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau, 1032 NE 65th, Seattle, WA 98115 (206) 524 -4243 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight., surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and fmishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. B. Room Temperatures: For non adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources. C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent fmishing materials from drying too rapidly MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09255 PAGE 3 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 2 PROPUC E 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 Steel Framing and Furring: a. Angeles, Co. b. Consolidated Systems, Inc. c. Dale Industries, Inc. d. Knorr, Inc. e. Marino Industries Corp. f. Gold Bond Building Products Div National Gypsum Co. g. Unimast Inc. h. Western Steel Framing, Inc. 2. Grid Suspension Assemblies: a. Chicago Metallic Corp. b. National Rolling Mills Co. c. USG Interiors, Inc. 3 Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. Domtar Gypsum. b. Georgia- Pacific Corp. c. Gold Bond Building Products Div National Gypsum Co. d. United States Gypsum Co. 4 Acoustic Insulation: a. Celotex b. Owens Corning Fiberglas Corp. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. General. Provide components of sizes indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641 Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper C. Hanger Rods: Mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust inhibitive paint. D Flat Hangers. Mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust- inhibitive paint. E. Channels: Cold -rolled steel, 0.05980- inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16 -inch -wide flanges, and as follows: 1 Carrying Channels: 1 1/2 inch deep, 475 lbs per 1000 feet, unless otherwise indicated. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS SECTION 09255 PAGE 4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 2. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep, 300 LB per 1000 feet, unless otherwise indicated. 3 Finish: Rust inhibitive paint, unless otherwise indicated. 4 Finish: G -60 hot -dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 525 for framing in shower rooms and where indicated. F Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16 -inch minimum lip (return), minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and minimum depth as follows: 1 Thickness: 0.0329 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: 2 1/2 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3 Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant coating. 4 Protective Coating: G40 hot -dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 525 for framing for exterior soffits and ceiling suspension members in areas within 10 feet of exterior walls. G. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth of 7/8 inch, and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows: 1 Thickness: 0.0329 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant coating. 3 Protective Coating: G40 hot -dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 525 for framing for exterior soffits and ceiling suspension members in areas within 10 feet of exterior walls. H. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce sound transmission, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 525 or ASTM A 568 to form 1/2 -inch -deep channel of one of the following configurations: 1 Single -Leg Configuration: Asymmetric- shaped channel with face connected to a single flange by a single slotted leg (web). 2. Double -Leg Configuration. Hat- shaped channel, with 1 1/2 -inch -wide face connected to flanges by double slotted or expanded metal legs (webs). I. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645 manufacturer's standard direct hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting network. A. General. Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements: 1 Component Sizes and Spacings: As indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the following maximum deflection and lateral loading conditions: a. Maximum Deflection: L/240 at 5 lbs per sq. ft. 2. Protective Coating: Manufacturers standard corrosion resistant coating. 3 Protective Coating: G40 hot -dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 525 for framing members attached to and within 10 feet of exterior walls. i 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL B Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16 -inch -wide minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1 Thickness: As indicated. 2. Depth: As indicated. C. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows: 1 Depth: 7/8 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated. D Furring Brackets: Serrated -arm type, adjustable, fabricated from corrosion- resistant steel sheet complying with ASTM C 645 minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch, designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring. E. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce sound transmission, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 525 or ASTM A 568 to form 1/2 -inch -deep channel of one of the following configurations: 1 Single -Leg Configuration: Asymmetric- shaped channel with face connected to a single flange by a single slotted leg (web). 2. Double -Leg Configuration: Hat shaped channel, with 1 1/2 -inch -wide face connected to flanges by double slotted or expanded metal legs (webs). F Z- Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard Z- shaped furring members with slotted or nonslotted web, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 525 or ASTM A 568, with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness of 0.0179 inch, face flange of 1 1/4 inch, wall- attachment flange of 7/8 inch, and of depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. G. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. 2.4 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows: 1 Type: Type X where required for fire- resistive -rated assemblies. 2. Edges: Tapered. 3 Thickness. 5/8 inch unless otherwise indicated. SECTION 09255 PAGE 5 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General. Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end -to -end butt joints. 1 Thickness: Provide gypsum board in .thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, minimum 5/8 inch thickness in compliance with ASTM C 840 for application system and support spacing indicated. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 4 Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work where type X gypsum wallboard is indicated include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Gyprock Fireguard C Gypsum Board, Domtar Gypsum. b. Firestop Type C, Georgia- Pacific Corp. c. Fire- Shield G, Gold Bond Building Products Div National Gypsum Co. d. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, FIRECODE C Core, United States Gypsum Co. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS SECTION 09255 PAGE 6 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES C. Gypsum Backing Board for Multilayer Applications: ASTM C 442 or, where backing board is not available from manufacturer, gypsum wallboard, ASTM C 36. 1 Type: Type X where required for fire- resistive -rated assemblies. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner beads, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below 1. Material: Formed metal, plastic, or metal combined with paper. 2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047• a. Comerbead on outside comers, unless otherwise indicated. b. LC -bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use LC -beads for edge trim unless otherwise indicated. c. L -bead with face flange only face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use L -bead where indicated. d. U -bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of joint compound. Use U -bead where indicated. e. One -piece control joint formed with V- shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot opening. A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. 1 Use pressure sensitive or staple- attached open -weave glass -fiber reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. C. Setting -Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory- packaged, job- mixed, chemical hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. MAHLUM NORDFORS MCHINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS SECTION 09255 PAGE 7 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1 Where setting -type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound only or for taping and filling only use formulation that is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it. 2. For prefilling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for this purpose. D Drying Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory- packaged vinyl -based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1 Ready -Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product. 2. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories. 3 Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. 4 All- purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds. A. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. B Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1 Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. BA -98, Pecora Corp. b. Tremco Acoustical Sealant, Tremco, Inc. A. General. Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer B. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications: 1 Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.03 inch thick. 2. Fastening gypsum board to wood members. 3 Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board. C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. D Gypsum Board Nails: ASTM C 514 E. Asphalt- Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. F Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral -fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing): 1 Mineral -Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag. 2. Blanket thickness: 3 -1/2 inches. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL FART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL SECTION 09255 PAGE 8 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames, cast -in- anchors, and structural framing with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or, if none available, with 'Gypsum Construction Handbook' published by United States Gypsum Co. C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement at locations indicated below 1 Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling. 2. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure except at floor a. Provide slip- or cushioned -type joints as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. D Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members. Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members as indicated, or if not indicated, at spacings and locations required by Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau Standard GWB-4 and as approved by the Architect for visual effect. 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows: 1 Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay bangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter splaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 3 Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09255 PAGE 9 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 4 Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5 Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 7 Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit. B Sway -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. C. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard. D. Installation Tolerances: Install Isteel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross furring members or grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet as measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. E. Wire -tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated. F Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross- furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction. 1 Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall. B Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing above suspended ceilings and brace to structural supports as detailed, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1 For STC-rated and fire- resistive rated partitions requiring partitions to extend to the underside of floor /roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor /roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. D Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated. Brace as shown on drawings. Install foam tape at top channel as shown on drawings. MAHLUM NORDFORS McIONLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL E. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard to comply with maximum deflection and minimum loading requirements specified: 1 Single -Layer Construction: Space studs at 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. F Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and so that leading edges or ends of each gypsum board can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. G. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA 219 and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1 Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. H. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated, in same manner as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door beads. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF SOUND DEADENING FOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Coordinate installation of grout in hollow metal frames with suppliers. B Apply 1t2 -inch minimum plaster to all frames in drywall construction. C. Grout full all frames at fire and sound rated construction, all exterior locations, and adjacent to masonry construction. 3.6 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL SECTION 09255 PAGE 10 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA 216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member D Install wall/partition board panels to minimize the number of abutting end joints or avoid them entirely Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally with end abutting joints over studs and staggered. E. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. F Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back blocking is provided behind end joints. Position adjoining panels so that tapered edges abut tapered edges, and field -cut edges abut field -cut MAHLUM NORDFORS McIONLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09255 PAGE 11 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES edges and ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints at corners of framed openings where possible. G. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so that the leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. H. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. I. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels. J Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.) where indicated, except in chase walls that are braced internally 1 Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. K. Isolate perimeter of non load bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- inch- to -1/2 -inch -wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U -bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. L. Where STC -rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. M. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.7 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS A. Single -Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows: 1 On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless parallel application is required for fire- resistive -rated assemblies. Use maximum length panels to minimize end joints. 3 On Z- furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. B. Double -Layer Application: Install gypsum backing board for base layers and gypsum wallboard for face layers. 1 On ceilings, apply base layer prior to applying base layer on walls /partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Offset face -layer joints at least 10 inches from parallel base MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL layer joints. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base layer joints. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3 On Z- furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. C. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: 1 Fasten with screws. D Double -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply base layer of gypsum panels and face layer to base layer as follows: 1 Fasten both base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES SECTION 09255 PAGE 12 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General. For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners. B Install corner beads at external corners. C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or semiexposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound except where other types are indicated. 1 Install LC -bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 2. Install LK -bead where substrate is kerfed to receive long flange of trim. 3. Install L -bead where edge trims can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed. 4 Install U -type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant -filled (including expansion joints.) D Install control joints at locations indicated, and where not indicated according to Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau Standard G.W.B -4, and in locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of gypsum board finish indicated. B Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting -type joint compound. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 0 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 09255 PAGE 13 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints except those with trim accessories having concealed face flanges not requiring taping to prevent cracks from developing in joint treatment at flange edges. D Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA 214 1 Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire- resistive -rated assemblies and sound -rated assemblies. 2. Level 2 where water resistant gypsum backing board panels form substrates for tile, and where indicated. E. For level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply three separate coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration. F Where level 2 gypsum board fmish is indicated, apply joint specified for first coat in addition to embedding coat. G. Where level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compound specified for embedding coat. H. Judging: Follow the recommended procedure for judging and finishing as per Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau Standard G.W.B 2. Coordinate with Painting subcontractor 3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer that ensures gypsum board assemblies remain without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09255 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09511 PAGE 1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panel ceilings installed with exposed suspension systems. B Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1 Division 15 Section for grilles, registers, and diffusers in acoustical ceilings. 2. Division 16 Section for lighting fixtures in acoustical ceilings. 1.3 SUBMITTA A. General. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1 Product data for each type of product specified. 2. Coordination drawings for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling- mounted items. Show the following: a. Ceiling suspension members. b. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. c. Ceiling- mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; speakers; sprinkler heads; and special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures with adjoining construction. d. Scale: 1/4 inch 1 -0' 3 Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. a. 6- inch square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color b. Set of 12 -inch -long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each color and system type required. 4 Qualification data for firms and persons specified in 'Quality Assurance article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. 5 Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that show compliance of acoustical ceiling system and components with building code in effect for Project. 6. Product test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory that are based on its testing of current products for compliance of acoustical ceiling systems and components with requirements. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 09511 PAGE 2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed acoustical ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for Project. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceilings that are identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1 Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A products. a. Flame Spread: 25 or less. b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less. C. Single Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. D Single Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. E. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system components, and partition system. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight; surface contamination, and other causes. B Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry work above ceilings is complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labels. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full -size units equal to 5.0 percent of amount installed. 2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 Non Fire- Resistance -Rated Wide -Face Double -Web Steel Suspension Systems: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. c. d. Chicago Metallic Corporation. National Rolling Mills, Inc. USG Interiors, Inc. 2. Edge Moldings: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation. c. Fry Reglet Corp. d. National Rolling Mills, Inc. e. USG Interiors, Inc. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS, GENERAL A. Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide manufacturers' standard units of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by reference to types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectance, unless otherwise indicated. 1 Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400 (plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15 -3/4 inches [400 mm] away from the test surface) per ASTM E 795 MINERAL BASE PANELS WATER FELTED Type, Form, and Finish: Provide type III, Form 2 units per ASTM that comply with pattern and other requirements indicated. B Perforated Pattern: Units matching pattern indicated by reference pattern designations, with other characteristics as follows: 1 Color/Light Reflectance Coefficient: White/LR 0.80. 2. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.50 -0.60. 3 Ceiling Sound Transmission Class: CSTC 35 -39 4 Edge Detail. As indicated. 5 Size: As indicated. SECTION 09511 PAGE 3 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS E 1264 with painted finish to manufacturers' standard MAHLUM NORDFORS McIONLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09511 PAGE 4 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS C. Acceptable Products. Provide ceiling units of each type from one of the following: 1 Type API, 2 x 4 regular lay -in panel. Armstrong Minaboard `Cortega' 24' x 48' x 5/8' angled regular lay -in No. 703 2. Type AP2, 2 x 4 lay -in panel: Armstrong Minaboard `Classic' 24' x 48' x 5/8' lay -in No. 758 3 Type AP3, 2 x 2 regular lay -in panel: Armstrong Minaboard `Cortega' 24' x 24' x 5/8' angled regular lay -in No. 704 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and fmishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory- applied finish for type of system indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. D Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641 Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper 1 Gage: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1 Direct- Hung), will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 -inch diameter (12 gage). E. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated, or protected with rust inhibitive paint. F Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated, or protected with rust inhibitive paint. G. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide, formed with 0.0365- inch -thick galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446, Coating Designation G90, with bolted connections and 5/16- inch diameter bolts. H. Edge Moldings and Trim. Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. 1 For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly I. Acceptable Products: Provide ceiling suspension units per the following: 1 Armstrong Prelude 7300 Series 15/16' exposed tee system. 2.5 NON FIRE RESISTANCE RATED DIRECT HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Wide -Face Capped Double -Web Steel Suspension System: Main and cross- runners roll formed from prepainted or electrolytic zinc coated cold -rolled steel sheet, with prefinished 15/16 -inch -wide metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows: 1 Structural Classification: Intermediate -Duty System. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 Cap Material and Finish. Steel sheet painted white. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect installation and anchorage of ceiling system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION SECTION 09511 PAGE 5 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less -than-half -width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical ceiling systems to comply with installation standard referenced below per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA 'Ceiling Systems Handbook" and 'Recommended Standards for Seismic Restraint Direct -Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies. 1 Standards for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems: Comply with ASTM C 636 and ASTM E 580. B. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally patterned units in a manner shown by reflected ceiling plans. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows: 1 Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards 3 Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 4 Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for structure to which hangers are attached as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3.4 CLEANING 1996 Mahlum Nordfom McKinley Gordon SECTION 09511 PAGE 6 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 5 Space hangers not more than 4' -0' o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown, and provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member D Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. 1 Sealant Bed: Apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant, concealed on back of vertical leg before installing moldings. 2. Screw- attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12' -0' Miter corners accurately and connect securely E. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch -up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09511 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Vinyl composition floor tile. 1.3 SUBMITTALS SECTION 09660 PAGE 1 RESILIENT TJLE FLOORINGS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1 Division 2 Section 'Selective Demolition for removal of existing floor finishes. 2. Division 9 Section Resilient Wall Base and Accessories' for resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor tiles. A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. C. Samples for verification purposes in full -size tiles of each different color and pattern of resilient floor tile specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics. D Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by manufacturer certifying that each product complies with requirements. E. Maintenance data for resilient floor tile, to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility for Floor Tile: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density. Less than 450 per ASTM E 662. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver tiles and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL B Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C) C. Store tiles on flat surfaces. Move tiles and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive tiles for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C). B Do not install tiles until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during tile installation. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS SECTION 09660 PAGE 2 RESILIENT TILE FLOORINGS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1 Furnish not less than 5 percent of each class, wearing surface, color, pattern and size of resilient floor tile installed. PART 2 PRODUCE 2.1 RESILIENT TILE A. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1066, Composition 1 (non asbestos formulated). B Available Products: Refer to Volume 1 Project Drawings, Finish Schedule for resilient floor tile manufacturers, styles, and colors. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer B Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex modified, portland- cement -based formulation provided or approved by tile manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Adhesives (Cements): Water resistant type recommended by tile manufacturer to suit resilient floor tile products and substrate conditions indicated. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION SECTION 09660 PAGE 3 RESILIENT TILE FLOORINGS A. General. Examine areas where installation of tiles will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for tile installation and comply with tile manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. B Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1 Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General. Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive tile. B Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile manufacturer's directions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder a drum sander or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy -duty wire brush. D Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by tiles immediately before tile installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with tile manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of tile installation included in Project. B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths at perimeter that equal less than one -half of a tile. Install tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated. C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1 Lay tiles in pattern with respect to location of colors, patterns, and sizes as indicated on Drawings. D Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installing on top of finished tile floor install tile before these items are installed. E. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, built -in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. MAHLUM NORDFORS McIONNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09660 PAGE 4 RESILIENT TILE FLOORINGS F Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. G. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. H. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates without producing open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed tile installation. I. Use full spread of adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with tile manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. J Hand roll tiles where required by tile manufacturer 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing tile installation: 1 Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by tile manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly 3 Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by resilient floor tile manufacturer 4 Damp -mop tile to remove manufacturer's marks, black marks and soil. B Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer 1 Cover sheet vinyl floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over sheet vinyl floor coverings. Place plywood or hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 09660 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Sheet vinyl floor coverings with fibrous backing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.4 SUBMITTALS B. Product data for each type of product specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 09666 PAGE 1 SHEET VINYL FLOOR B Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1 Division 2 Section 'Selective Demolition for removal of existing floor fmishes. 2. Division 9 Section 'Resilient Wall Base and Accessories' for resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor tiles. A. Type II sheet vinyl floor coverings are those having wear layers with a minimum binder content of 34 percent. A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. C. Samples for verification purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of sheet vinyl floor coverings showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics. D Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by manufacturer certifying that each product complies with requirements. E. Maintenance data for sheet vinyl floor coverings, to be included in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 A. Single- Source Responsibility for Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of sheet vinyl floor coverings from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density Less than 450 per ASTM E 662. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). C. Move sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive sheet vinyl floor coverings for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C). B. Do not install sheet vinyl floor coverings until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during installation of sheet vinyl floor coverings. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install sheet vinyl floor coverings and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS SECTION 09666 PAGE 2 SHEET VINYL FLOOR A. Deliver extra materials to Owner Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1 Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form of each different composition, wearing surface, color and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering installed. PART2 PRODUCT 2.1 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS A. Type II Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings: Products complying with ASTM F 1303, Type II (non- asbestos formulated). B Available Products: Refer to Volume 1 Project Drawings, Finish Schedule for sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturers, styles, and colors. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09666 PAGE 3 SHEET VINYL FLOOR B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex- modified, portland- cement -based formulation provided or approved by sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Adhesives (Cements): Water resistant, stabilized type as recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor coverings products and substrate conditions indicated. D Seam Sealer Formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for products indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas where installation of sheet vinyl floor covering will occur with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1 Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive sheet vinyl floor coverings. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile manufacturer's directions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy -duty wire brush. D Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by sheet vinyl floor coverings immediately before installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of floor covering installation included in Project. B. Lay out sheet vinyl floor covering to comply with the following requirements: 1 Maintain uniformity of sheet vinyl floor covering direction. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09666 PAGE 4 SHEET VINYL FLOOR 2. Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low traffic areas, but in no case less than 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. 3 Match edges of resilient floor coverings for color shading and pattern at seams. 4 Avoid cross seams. C. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installing on top of finished tile floor install tile before these items are installed. D Scribe, cut, and fit sheet vinyl floor coverings to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, built -in fumiture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. E. Extend sheet vinyl floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. F Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Adhere sheet vinyl floor covering by method approved by floor covering manufacturer 1 Produce completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. 2. Comply with floor covering manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. H. Chemically bond seams in sheet vinyl floor coverings as recommended by manufacturer Prepare seams and apply seam sealers to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps or overlaps. I. Integral Flash Cove Base: Cove sheet vinyl floor coverings up vertical surfaces to form integral base of height indicated over cove support strip with top edge butted against and covered by cap molding. J Hand roll sheet vinyl floor coverings in both directions from center out to embed floor coverings in adhesive and eliminate trapped air At walls, door casings, and other locations where access by roller is impractical, press floor coverings firmly in place with flat bladed instrument. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing sheet vinyl floor coverings: 1 Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by floor covering manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly 3 Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer 4 Damp -mop tile to remove manufacturer's marks, black marks and soil. B Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McIONLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 Cover sheet vinyl floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over sheet vinyl floor coverings. Place plywood or hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 09666 PAGE 5 SHEET VINYL FLOOR END OF SECTION 09660 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Resilient wall base. B Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 9 Section Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering 2. Division 9 Section 'Resilient Tile Flooring. 3. Division 9 Section 'Carpet. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. SECTION 09678 PAGE 1 RESILIENT BASE C. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 12 inches long, of each different color and pattern of product specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility for Products: Obtain each type and color of product specified from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density. Less than 450 per ASTM E 662. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). C. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS SECTION 09678 PAGE 2 RESILIENT BASE A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive products specified in this Section for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C). B Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as that of the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during installation of products specified in this Section. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installing products specified in this Section with other construction to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. A. Deliver extra materials to Owner Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1 Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof of each different type and color of resilient wall base installed. ART 2 PRODUCES 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer to Room Finish Schedule and Interior Finish Drawing for style, color and location of each type of Resilient Wall Base. 2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Color and Pattern. Refer to Room Finish Schedule and Interior Finish Drawing for style, color, and location of each type of Resilient Wall Base. B. Size: 6 inches high typical throughout. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer B Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex- modified, portland- cement -based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Adhesives: Water resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient flooring product and substrate conditions indicated. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL EMIT 3 EXECU 3.1 EXAMINATION SECTION 09678 PAGE 3 RESILIENT BASE A. Examine areas where installation of products specified in this Section will occur with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General. Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications for preparing substrates indicated to receive products indicated. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per manufacturers directions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder a drum sander or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy -duty wire brush. D Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing products specified in this Section. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install products specified in this Section using methods indicated according to manufacturer's installation directions. B Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 1 On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 2. Install inside and exterior corners before installing straight pieces. 3 Form inside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by cutting an inverted V- shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce snug fit to substrate. 4 Form outside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by shaving back of base at point where bending will occur Remove a strip perpendicular to length of base and only deep enough to produce a snug fit without bends whitening or removal of more than half the thickness of wall base. C. Place resilient accessones so they are butted to adjacent materials of type indicated and bond to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that otherwise would be exposed. MAHLUM NORDFORS McIQNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation: 1 Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by manufacturers of resilient product involved. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended•by manufacturer 4 Damp -mop resilient accessories to remove black marks and soil. B Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by manufacturer of resilient product involved. 1 Cover resilient accessories on floors and stairs with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. C. Clean products specified in this Section not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products using method recommended by manufacturer 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 09678 PAGE 4 RESILIENT BASE END OF SECTION 09678 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON SECTION 09680 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL CARPET 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes carpet, installation, and accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B Product data for each type of carpet material and installation accessory required. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability resistance to fading, and flame resistance characteristics. C. Shop drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or pattem direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built -in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Show installation details at special conditions. D Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard size, showing full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare samples from same material to be used for the Work. Submit the following: 1 12- inch square samples of each type of carpet material required. 2. 12 -inch -long samples of each type exposed edge stripping and accessory item. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualification: Firm whose carpet materials comply with 'Use of Materials Bulletin UM -44C' published by U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) and are currently listed in HUD 'Certified Products Directory' and so identified by imprint on back of carpet. B Carpet Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet identical to that tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1 Test Method: DOC FF 1 70 2. Rating: Pass. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 09680 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL CARPET 3E TRANSrn0NAL CARE UNIT REMODEL B Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well ventilated area protected from weather moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity Lay flat, blocked off ground. Maintain minimum temperature of 68 deg F (20 deg C) at least three days prior to and during installation in area where materials are stored. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Substrate Conditions: No condensation within 48 hours on underside of 4 -foot by 4 -foot polyethylene sheet, fully taped at perimeter to substrate. B. Substrate Conditions: pH of 9 or less when substrate wetted with potable water and Hydrion paper applied. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1 Carpet: Before installation begins, furnish quantity of full width for each type of material equal to 5 percent of amount installed. PART PRODUCT 2.1 GENERAL A. Colors and Patterns: Refer to Room Finish Schedule and Interior Finish Drawing for style, pattern, color, and location of each type of carpet. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products specified in Product Data Sheets at the end of this section. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Carpet Edge Guard: Extruded or molded heavy -duty vinyl or rubber of size and profile indicated; minimum 2 -inch -wide anchorage flange; manufacturer's standard colors. B. Seaming Cement: Hot -melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. C. Carpet Adhesive: Water resistant and nonstaining as recommended by carpet manufacturer to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet. PART 3 F;XECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from concrete surfaces to receive carpet; apply sealer to prevent dusting. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 09680 PAGE 3 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL CARPET 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position; do not place seams perpendicular to door frame, in direction of traffic through doorway Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet. B Extend carpet under removable flanges and furnishings and into alcoves and closets of each space. C. Provide cutouts where required, and bind cut edges where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. D Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. E. Install with pattern parallel to walls and borders. F Install carpet by trimming edges, butting cuts with seaming cement, and taping and/or sewing seams to provide sufficient strength for stretching and continued stresses during life of carpet. G. Fit sections of carpet prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butt cuts with seaming cement. H. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt edges tight to form seams without gaps. Roll entire area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond. 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove adhesive from carpet surface with manufacturer's recommended cleaning agent. B. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with commercial machine with face beater element. Remove soil. Replace carpet where soil cannot be removed. Remove protruding face yarn. C. Vacuum carpet. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer to ensure carpet is not damaged or deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON SECTION 09680 PAGE 4 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL CARPET 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1RODUCT DATA SHEET CARPET #1 A. Carpet Designation: CPT 1 B. Fiber Content: 100% Antron Lumena Solution Dyed Nylon C. Fiber Weight 34 oz. /Square Yard D Construction: Loop Pile E. Pattern Repeat: 3/4' W x 1 3/8' L F Dye Method: Solution Dyed G. Gauge: 1 /10' H. Pile Height: .250' 125' I. Total Weight: (Approximately) 80 oz. /Square Yard J. Primary Backing: Woven polypropylene with conductive anti -stat. K. Secondary Backing: Woven polypropylene L. Stitches Per Inch: 11 M. Density- 6528 N. Attached Cushion: Hardware 24 0. Performance Specifications: As follows: 1 Flammability Flooring Radiant Rating Panel ASTM E -648 and/or NFPA 253 Greater than 0.45 watts/CM Class 1 2. Smoke Density Passes NBS Smoke Chamber Test ASTM E -662 3. Colorfastness: 10 year colorfastness to light. Five year colorfastness to atmospheric contaminants. 4 Static Rating: Less than 3.0 KV Anti -stat warranted for the life of the carpet. 5 Warranty 10 year wear warranty 6. Antimicrobial. Built in antimicrobial properties 7 Fluorochemical Treatment: DuPont fluorochemical treatment P Product Masland Contract Fenestra #7802 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 09680 PAGE 5 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL CARPET 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PRODUCT DATA SHEET CARPET #2 A. Carpet Designation: CPT 2 B Fiber Content: 100% Antron Lumena Nylon C. Fiber Weight: 28 oz. /Square Yard D Construction. Loop E. Pattern Repeat: 1.25' W x 3' L F Dye Method: Solution Dyed G. Gauge: 1/10' H. Pile Height: .250' I. Total Weight: (Approximately) 70.06 ozJSquare Yard J Primary Backing: Woven polypropylene with conductive anti -stat. K. Secondary Backing: Woven polypropylene L. Attached Cushion: Hardware 24 M. Performance Specifications: As follows: 1 Flammability Flooring Radiant Rating Panel ASTM E -648 and/or NFPA 253 Greater than 0.45 watts/CM Class 1 2. Smoke Density Passes NBS Smoke Chamber Test ASTM E -662 3 Colorfastness: 10 year colorfastness to light. Five year colorfastness to atmospheric contaminants. 4 Static Rating: Less than 3.0 KV Anti -stat warranted for the life of the carpet. 5 Warranty 10 year wear warranty 6. Antimicrobial: Built in antimicrobial properties 7 Fluorochemical Treatment: DuPont Duratech fluorochemical treatment P Product Masland Contract Agenda #7800 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON SECTION 09680 PAGE 6 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL CARPET 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PRODUCT DATA SHEET BACKING A. Carpet Designation: CPT 1 and CPT 2 B. Product: 221b. density foam C. Foam Weight: 24 ozs. 3 ozs. D Thickness: 100 Mils 15 Mils E. Density 221b. or above F Compression Set: 15% maximum G. Compression Resistance: 5 lbs. /sq. in. minimum H. Tensile: 50 lbs. /sq. in. or greater I. Elongation: 60% minimum J Tear 5 lbs. minimum K. Roll Stool Test: 30,000 cycles with no delamination L. Product Masland Contract Hardwear 24 0 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 09680 MAHLUM NORDFORS McIONLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 09900 PAGE 1 PAINTING A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces, and inspections and warranties. 1 Surface preparation, priming, and fmish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop- priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections. 2. The words paint," 'painting, or 'paint finishes' as used herein refer to all painted finishes, including clear and opaque liquid applications in addition to terms normally used. 3. The terms Architectural Specifications Manual' and "ASM' as used in this section are defined to mean the Architectural Specifications Manual Painting, Wall covering, and Gypsum Wallboard Finishing, latest edition, published by Specification Services, 23830 Pacific Highway South, Suite 102, Kent, Washington 98032, telephone (206) 878 -6630. 4 Where 'SSPC' is referred to, the standards of the Structural Steel Painting Council are used. B Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or fmishes available. C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1 Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory- finished components: a. Metal toilet enclosures. b. Acoustic materials. c. Factory finished mechanical and electrical equipment (except exposed electrical wall panel doors and frames and factory primed equipment to be painted under this section.) d. Light fixtures. e. Distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following generally inaccessible areas: a. Furred areas. b. Pipe spaces. c. Enclosed ceiling spaces. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09900 PAGE 2 PAINTING 3 Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper e. Bronze. f. Brass. 4 Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications' for shop- priming ferrous metal. 2. Division 6 Section 'Interior Architectural Woodwork' for shop priming interior architectural woodwork. 3. Division 8 Section 'Steel Doors and Frames for shop- priming steel doors and frames. 4 Divisions 15 and 16: Painting mechanical and electrical work other than rooftop units is specified in Divisions 15 and 16, respectively E. Materials for Maintenance: Leave 1 gallon of each type and color of paint at location designated by Owner Obtain receipt from Owner's representative. Label each can for positive identification. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General. Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Do not apply paint until the following are submitted and approved. B Product data for each paint system specified, including block fillers and primers. 1 Provide the manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and instructions for handling, storage, and application of each material proposed for use. 2. List each material and cross reference the specific coating, fmish system, and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 3 Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. 1 Provide stepped samples, defming each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to location and application. 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09900 PAGE 3 PAINTING 3 Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only a. Gypsum Wallboard: Provide two 12 -inch square samples of each color and material on gypsum wallboard. b. Painted Wood: Provide two 12- inch square samples of each color and material on hardboard. c. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4 -by -8 -inch samples of natural and stained wood finish on actual wood surfaces. d. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4- inch square samples of flat metal and two 8 -inch- long samples of solid metal for each color and fmish. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in- service performance for at least 5 years. 1 Applicator shall be fully familiar with the Architectural Specification Manual. and shall have a current copy of the Architectural Specification Manual on file in their office. 2. Employ only qualified journeyman in this painting and decorating work. Apprentices may be employed on the project to work under the direction of qualified journeymen in accordance with trade regulations. B. Single Source Responsibility Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the fmish coats. C. Standards: Conform to the minimum standards for materials and work as set forth in the Architectural Specification Manual. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1 Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3 Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4 Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5 Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7 Color name and number B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. MAHLUM NORDFORS McIONLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL C. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly Remove oily rags and waste daily Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS SECTION 09900 PAGE 4 PAINTING A. Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). B Apply solvent thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1 Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. D Provide lighting level of at least 80 foot candles measured mid height at substrate surface. E. Provide continuous ventilation and heating to prevent accumulation of hazardous fumes and to maintain surface and ambient temperatures within specified range for 24 hours before, during, and for 48 hours after application of fmishes. F Do not work when dust, pollen, or insects are present. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warranty period will extend for two years from the date of substantial completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Use only the approved paint products of the paint manufacturers listed in the Architectural Specification Manual, chapter 7 Manufacturers' Product Listing. 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS A. Material Compatibility Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality Unless otherwise specified, furnish paint, varnish, stain, enamel, lacquer fillers, and related products for prime and intermediate and fmish coats of a type, brand, and manufacture listed in Chapters 5, 6, and 7 of the Architectural Specification Manual, factory- labeled for positive identification. Materials not specifically noted in the Architectural Specification Manual and required for the work such as linseed oil, shellac, thinners, or other materials required for the work shall be of quality not less than required by applicable published federal or state specification standards and as manufactured by approved firms 1 1 1 1. t t 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McIO:NLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSI HONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09900 PAGE 5 PAINTING C. Mixing: Furnish paints ready -mixed unless otherwise specified, except field -mix coatings which are in paste or powder form, or to be field catalyzed, in accordance with the directions of its manufacturer Fully grind pigments to maintain a soft paste consistency in the vehicle during storage that can be dispersed readily and uniformly by paddle to a completely homogenous mixture ready for use with good flowing and brushing properties. D Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to drawings and .finish schedules and to the manufacturer's standard color designations. E. Lead Content: Not more than 0.06 percent lead, based on total nonvolatile (dry-film) weight. This limitation is extended to surfaces in public areas and other surfaces readily accessible to children under 7 years of age EMIT 3 E2CECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied. 1 Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are ready to receive the work under this section. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. Unless otherwise specified hereinafter the following surfaces are considered, under this section, as the responsibility of other trades: a. Shop prime coats of structural steel, miscellaneous metal, sheet metal, and other shop prime coated metal items except for minimal spot touch -up painting at field welds and surfaces abraded during their installation. b. Gypsum wallboard finishing of joints, moldings and fastenings. c. The condition of substrates to be painted or finished under this section which may adversely affect the painting work except minimal work normally performed by this trade. B Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. C. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09900 PAGE 6 PAINTING B Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with the ASM and according to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1 Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re- prime. Notify Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish -coat material with substrates primed by others. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral- fiber reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen, as required, to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the fmish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application using a zinc sulfate wash solution. Do not use a zinc sulfate wash solution under a latex emulsion paint system. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry and vacuum before painting. d. Remove stains caused by weathering or corroding metals by washing with a sodium- metasilicate solution after being thoroughly wetted with potable water then let thoroughly dry 3 Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler Tint Filler to match stain when clear fmishes are specified. Work filler well into grain and, before it has set, working perpendicular to the grain, wipe excess from the surface. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery 1 1 t 1 r 1 r a t 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McIQNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09900 PAGE 7 PAINTING f. Turn over to carpenters an adequate quantity of stain so that they may apply one brush coat of stain to jobsite cut ends and edges as installation proceeds. 4 Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC specification SSPC -SP 10 b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop- applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5 Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non petroleum -based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Prepare surface as recommended by coatings manufacturer or apply one coat of etching type primer Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's directions. 1 Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary strain material before using. 3 Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General. Apply paint according to ASM and manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. B Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1 Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules and drawings. 2. Provide fmish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3 The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09900 PAGE 8 PAINTING recommended by the manufacturer Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce a smooth even surface according to the manufacturer's directions. 4 Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform fmish, color and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 5 The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built -in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only 7 Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint. 8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 9 Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 11. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touch -up painted. 12. Hollow metal doors, door frames, louvers, and trim shall have paint fmish spray applied. Touch up of these items shall be done with an airbrush. C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1 Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. D Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray or other applicators according to the manufacturer's directions. 1 Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3 Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer F Prime Coats: Before applying fmish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or fmished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 A t 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 09900 PAGE 9 PAINTING unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn- through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 1 For wood surfaces to receive paint or enamel finish, prime and backprime interior finish wood products before their installation by other trades with interior wood prime paint. 2. For wood surfaces to receive clear or transparent stain finish, prime and backprime faces, edges, and ends with first coat prior to its installation be other trades. 3 For wood surfaces to receive varnish or lacquer finish, backprime with resin sealer or lacquer sealer, as applicable to varnish or lacquer system specified, prior to installation by other trades. G. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. H. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. I. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass smooth surface film of even luster Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1 Provide satin finish for fmal coats. J Completed Work: Match approved samples for color texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Alkali Content Tests: Where paints are to be applied, test concrete, masonry cement board, and plaster surfaces using litmus paper to test for high alkalinity conditions, in accordance with the provisions for high alkalinity tests as set forth in the Architectural Specification Manual. B Substantial Moisture Content Testing 1 General: Prepare substrate to receive paint in conformance with the Architectural Specification Manual and manufacturer of painting materials. Substrate to meet maximum moisture content as listed below 2. Plaster and Wallboard: Maximum moisture content 17 percent. 3 Wood: Common stock boards and dimension lumber 19 percent. Detail architectural woodwork, standing and running trim, cabinets and casework; 7 percent average with a range permitted in individual pieces of from 5 to 10 percent. C. Testing 1 Painting material coats shall meet the requirements of the Architectural Specification Manual film thickness. 2. If test results show that material being used does not comply with specified requirements, the Contractor may be directed to: a. Stop painting work and remove noncomplying paint. MAHLUM NORDFORS McIONLEY GORDON SECTION 09900 PAGE 10 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL PAINTING 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3.5 CLEANING 3.6 PROTECTION b. Repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint. c. Remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible. D Patching: Other than normal damage to surfaces by other trades requiring touchup or refinishing, after painting and finishing is completed in any one room or area, painting repair shall be done under this section but at the expense of the trade or trades causing the damage. A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. B After completing painting, clean glass and paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. B Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.7 SCHEDULE OF PAINTS A. General: Refer to Room Finish Schedule, and Interior Design Drawings for color selection and placement. The titles and code numbers used hereinafter refer to the Architectural Specification Manual, unless otherwise indicated, for type of surfaces, coating, grade, named products, and their manufacturers. B Paint Grade: All paints are 'premium grade per the ASM unless otherwise noted. C. Moisture prone areas include toilet rooms, bathrooms, Shower rooms, Soiled Utility rooms, and Janitor's Closets Note: The following schedules are intended as a guide for the painted finish of a variety of substrates. Not all of the substrates listed will necessarily be found on the project site. For substrates not listed, finish per the recommendations in the Architectural Specification Manual. D Exterior Paint Schedule 1 Paint on Ferrous Non Galvanized Metal: a. Epoxy semi gloss; ASM Exterior Industrial 6 -D plus ASM SC4.2 Polyurethane top coat 2. Paint on Galvanized, Zinc coated Metals: 1 1 1 i MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL a. Alkyd semi- gloss; ASM Ext. 14 -A 3 Paint on Stucco, Concrete, Concrete Masonry Units a. Alkyd satin; ASM Ext. 6 -A SECTION 09900 PAGE 11 PAINTING E. Interior Paint Schedule 1 Paint on Concrete Ceilings, Columns, Walls: a. Latex Enamel eggshell, ASM Int. 5 -B 2. Paint on Concrete Ceilings, Columns, Walls in Moisture Prone Areas: a. Alkyd Enamel semi- gloss; ASM Int. 3 -F 3. Paint on Concrete Floors and Stairs: a. Alkyd semi gloss; ASM Int. 5 -A 4 Paint on Gypsum Wallboard and Plaster Ceilings and Walls: a. Latex Enamel eggshell; ASM Int. 3 -B 5 Paint on Gypsum Wallboard Ceilings and Walls in moisture prone areas: a. Latex Enamel semi gloss; ASM Int. 3 -B 6. Paint on Aluminum Ducts, Louvers, Trim: a. Latex Enamel satin; ASM Int. 16 -A 7 Paint on Miscellaneous Non Galvanized Ferrous Metal Railings, Doors and Frames, Structural Steel, Convectors, Trim, Ladders, Stairs: a. Latex Enamel satin; ASM Int. 12 -B (premium grade in public areas and custom grade at storage and building service areas.) Finish to be spray applied. 8. Paint on Galvanized, Zinc coated Metals: a. Alkyd Enamel semi- gloss; ASM Int. 13 -A 9 Paint on Woodwork and Millwork: a. Latex Enamel satin; ASM Int. 1 -B 10. Transparent Finish on Woodwork and Millwork: a. Lacquer satin; ASM Int. 1 H 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 09900 t 1 1 1 1 1 i MAHLUM NORDFORS SMITH GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Vinyl wall covering. 1.3 SUBMITTALS SECTION 09950 PAGE 1 WALL COVERINGS B Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 9 Section 'Gypsum Board Assemblies' for installation and preparation of substrates. A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B Product Data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics, durability fade resistance, and flame resistance characteristics. C. Shop Drawings showing location and extent of each wall covering type. Indicate seams and termination points. D Samples for verification in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1 Wall Covering Material: Full -width sample, not less than 36 inches long, from dye lot used for the Work. a. Submit sample with specified treatments applied. b. Mark top and face of material. c. Show complete pattern repeat. E. Schedule of wall coverings using same room designations indicated on Drawings. F Product certificates signed by manufacturers of wall coverings certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. G. Maintenance data for wall covering to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed 5 projects similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. MAHLUM NORDFORS SMITH GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL B. Fire- Test Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall covering until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy B Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 foot candles is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by the wall covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below before installation begins, that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1 Rolls of Wall Covering Material. Full -size units equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Refer to Volume 1 Project Drawings, Room Finish Schedule for wall covering manufacturers, styles, patterns, and colors. 2.2 ADHESIVES SECTION 09950 PAGE 2 WALL COVERINGS A. General: Mildew resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application, as recommended by wall covering manufacturer 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Wall Liner Non woven, synthetic underlayment and adhesive as recommended by wall covering manufacturer Provide at existing walls where substrate cannot be adequately prepared for installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. MAHLUM NORDFORS SMITH GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL D Match pattern 72 inches above finish floor SECTION 09950 PAGE 3 WALL COVERINGS 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew oil, grease, incompatible primers, and dirt. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1 Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. 2. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply rust- inhibitive zinc primer 3 Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter 4 Prime new gypsum board with primer recommended by wall covering manufacturer 5 Allow new plaster to cure. Treat areas of high alkalinity D Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper E. Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall covering manufacturer Form smooth wrinkle -free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall covering installation until wall liner has dried. F Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with wall coverings manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply B. Cut wall covering panels in roll number sequence. Change run numbers at partition breaks and corners only C. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps. E. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside corners. No horizontal seams. F Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. G. Trim edges for color uniformity pattern match, and tight closure at seams and edges. Butt seams. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B Use cleaning methods recommended by wall covering manufacturer MAHLUM NORDFORS SMITH GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSTTIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. 1996 Mahlum Nordfors Smith Gordon SECTION 09950 PAGE 4 WALL COVERINGS END OF SECTION 09950 1 1 1 1 i i 1 f 1 r 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL. 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Porcelain enamel markerboards. 2. Combination porcelain enamel markerboards natural -cork tackboards. 3. Fabric wrapped tackboards SECTION 10100 PAGE 1 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS B Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1 Blocking: Division 6 Section `Rough Carpentry' 2. Fabric for tack boards: Volume 2 Project Drawings, Finish Plan and Schedule 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of visual display board indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain visual display boards through one source from a single manufacturer B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of visual display boards and are based on the products indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section 'Substitutions. 1 Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval and only to the extent needed to comply with performance requirements. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify conditions at site affecting work. Allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: a. Alliance Wall as distributed by PBS Supply Inc. b. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL c. Greensteel, Inc. 2. Tackboard Cork: c. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. e. Greensteel, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS SECTION 10100 PAGE 2 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS A. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: Balanced, high- pressure laminated, porcelain enamel markerboards of 3 -ply construction consisting of face sheet, core material, and backing. 1 Face Sheet: 0.024 -inch enameling grade steel especially processed for temperatures used in coating porcelain on steel. Coat exposed face and edges with a 3 -coat process consisting of primer ground coat, and color cover coat. Coat concealed face with a 2 coat process consisting of primer and ground coat. Fuse cover and ground coats to steel at manufacturer's standard firing temperatures, but not less than 1200 deg F a. Cover Coat: Provide manufacturer's standard, light- colored, special writing surface with gloss finish intended for use with erasable dry markers. 2. Core: 3/8- inch thick, particleboard core material complying with requirements of ANSI A208.1, Grade 1 M 1 3. Backing Sheet: 0.005 -inch- (0.127 -mm thick, aluminum -foil sheet backing. 4 Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, moisture- resistant, thermoplastic -type adhesive. B. Natural -Cork Tackboards: Single -layer 1/4 -inch- (6.4 -mm thick, seamless, compressed fine- grain, bulletin board quality natural -cork sheet; face sanded for natural finish; complying with MS MIL -C 15116, Type II. C. Fabric Wrapped Tackboards: Frameless, fabric wrapped boards with 1/4 inch thick fine textured cork laminated to 1/4 inch fiberboard. Fabric edges fully wrapped. Size as indicated on drawings. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: Laminate facing sheet and backing sheet to core material under pressure with manufacturer's recommended flexible, waterproof adhesive. B Assembly Provide factory- assembled markerboard units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Determine that conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this section. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer Starting of work will be construed as acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Assure that adequate blocking has been provided in the walls where units are to be installed. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3.1 INSTALLATION SECTION 10100 PAGE 3 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS A. Deliver factory-built visual display boards completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. B Install units in locations and at mounting heights indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation. C. Attach Fabric Wrapped Tackboards to walls and casework with full coverage coating of linoleum paste. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Verify that accessories required for each unit have been properly installed and that operating units function properly B Clean units according to manufacturer's written instructions. C 1996 Mahlum Nordfors Smith Gordon END OF SECTION 10100 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Cubicle and privacy curtain tracks and accessories. 2. Cubicle curtains B Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 6 'Rough Carpentry' for backing. 2. Division 9 Section Acoustical Panel Ceilings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS SECTION 10190 PAGE 1 CUBICLES A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B Product data for each type of cubicle curtain, track, and accessory specified. C. Samples for verification for each curtain fabric indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility Obtain track, carriers, and accessories from one source of a single manufacturer 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best installation per industry standards. Notify Architect of any conflicts with light fixtures, diffusers, or other ceiling mounted items. PART 2 PROJUCTa 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 ARNCO 2. Capital. 3 Kirsch. 4 Others as approved by addendum B. Quality Standard Product: Kirsch series 9600 MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.2 CEILING TRACK AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 10190 PAGE 2 CUBICLES A. Cubicle Curtain Ceiling Track: Kirsch 9600 series, 6063 -T 5, anodized aluminum extruded channel. All curves bent from one continuous piece. 1 Kirsch 9616 Roller type carriers with nylon wheels and nickel plated hook. 2. Kirsch 9689 16' long PVC drops with Kirsch 9691 6 inch connectors. 3 Provide all bends, splices, end stops, and other components required for a complete installation. 2.3 CUBICLE CURTAINS A. Material: 100% flame resistant polyester B Width: 72 inches C. Manufacturer Refer to Volume 2 Project Drawings, Finish Plan and Schedules for manufacturer style, pattern, and color PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine ceiling, blocking, and support backing to determine that conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this section. B Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install per project drawings and manufacturer's installation standards. B Install a complete assembly true and with tight joints, and secure fasteners tightly C. Do not install tracks in a manner that interferes with the removal of acoustic ceiling panels, light fixtures or bulbs. Do not install tracks across diffusers. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust to ensure smooth, easy operation of carriers. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from curtain track installation upon completion of work and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL B Do not install cubicle curtains until after final cleaning of project site. 0 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 10190 PAGE 3 CUBICLES END OF SECTION 10190 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL FART 1 GFNRRAL. 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of wall surface protection systems: 1 Wall protection systems, including: a. Corner guards. b. Impact resistant wall covering. c. Rub Rails 1 3 SUBMITTALS MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON 1994 SECTION 10265 PAGE 1 WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each wall surface protection system component and installation accessory required, including installation methods for each type of substrate. Provide written data on each required component including physical characteristics, such as durability resistance to fading, and flame resistance. C Shop drawings showing locations, extent, and installation details of wall and corner guards, and other protection systems. Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction. D Samples for Initial Selection: For initial selection of color pattern and surface texture, provide the manufacturer's standard color chips consisting of actual sections of each vinyl plastic material required showing the full range of materials, colors, and textures available. E. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing compliance of wall surface protection system components with requirements indicated based on tests performed by the laboratory within the past five years. F Maintenance data for wall surface protection system components for inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 1 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has previously installed wall surface protection systems similar in material, design, and extent to the systems indicated for this Project. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide wall surface protection system components that are identical to those tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 for the fire performance characteristics indicated below Identify wall surface protection system components with appropriate markings from the testing and inspection organization. 1 Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 10265 PAGE2 WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS C Impact Strength: Provide wall surface protection system components with a minimum impact resistance of 25.4 ft. lbs per sq. ft. when tested in accordance with ASTM D 256 (Izod impact, ft. lbs per inch notch). D Single Source Responsibility Obtain each color grade, finish, and type of wall surface protection system component from a single source with resources to provided products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. E. Design Criteria The drawings indicate the size, profile and dimensional requirements of wall surface protection system components required and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Wall surface protection system components by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1 5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, and fire hazard classification. 1 6 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Instructions: Provide the manufacturer's instructions for maintenance of installed work. Include recommended methods and frequency for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to finishes and performance. PART 2 PRODUCT 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products for wall surface protection which may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 Impact Resistant Wall Covering a. Acrovyn b Others as approved by addendum 2. Rub Rails a. Acrovyn b Korogard by RJF Intemational c. Others as approved by addendum 3. Comer Guards a. IPC b Afco c. Arden Architectural Specialties d. Miller e. Pro-Tek f. Wilkinson g Others as approved by addendum MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON 1994 I 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2 2 MATERIALS SECTION 10265 PAGE 3 WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Rigid Plastic Material: Extruded, textured, chemical- and stain resistant, high- impact, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or acrylic modified vinyl plastic, thickness as indicated. Comply with specified requirements of ASTM D 256 for impact resistance and ASTM E 84 for flame spread and smoke developed characteristics. 1 Colors and Textures of Plastic Material: Provide extruded plastic material that matches selections made by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of solid and stone pattern colors and full range of textures. B. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for the type of use and finish indicated, but with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 for 6063 -T5 C Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened. Use theft -proof fasteners where exposed to view 2 3 CORNER GUARDS A. Surface Mounted 16 gauge stainless steel, square corners, satin finish. 2 4 IMPACT RESISTANT WALL COVERINGS A. Semirigid Sheet Wall Covering: Provide manufacturer's standard semirigid, embossed, fiber backed, impact- resistant vinyl /acrylic sheets. Sheets shall comply with fire performance characteristics specified and be chemical- and stain resistant. Provide manufacturer's standard matching moldings and trim as required. 1 Sheet Size: As indicated. 2. Sheet Thickness: 0.022 inch thick. B. Quality Standard Product Acrovyn high impact wallcovering. C Texture: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's complete line D Color To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's complete line. 2 5 RUB RAILS A. Semirigid Vinyl/Acrylic or Resilient Vinyl Rub Rails: Provide either manufacturer's standard semirigid, embossed, impact- resistant vinyl /acrylic linear rub rail with continuous vinyl retainer or manufacturer's linear vinyl rub rail and aluminum retainer Provide manufacturer's standard matching returns and trim as required. B. Quality Standard Product Vinyl /Acrylic rub rail: Acrovyn FR 270S C Quality Standard Product Vinyl rub rail: RJF International Korogard B200 D Color To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's complete line. 0 MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON 1994 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL £ART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions in which wall surface protection components and wall protection systems will be installed. 1 Complete all finishing operations, including painting and wallcovering, before beginning installation of wall surface protection system materials. B. Impact- Resistant Wall Covering Materials: Wall surfaces to receive impact resistant wall covering materials shall be dry and free from dirt, grease, loose paint, and scale. C Rub Rails: Wood handrail to be installed complete. D Corner Guards: Wall and Casework surfaces shall be dry and free from dirt, grease, and loose paint. E. Do not proceed with installations until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 2 PREPARATION A. General: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3 3 INSTALLATION A. General. Install wall surface protection units plumb, level, and true to line without distortions. 1 Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished work. B. Install aluminum and vinyl retainers, mounting brackets, and other accessories in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1 Where splices occur in horizontal runs of over 20 feet, splice retainer and plastic cover or insert at different locations along the run. 3 4 CLEANING 01996 Mahlum Nardfors McKinley Gordon MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON 1994 SECTION 10265 PAGE 4 WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. General. Immediately upon completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard ammonia based household cleaning agent. Clean metal components in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer C Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation upon completion of work and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition. END OF SECTION 10265 MAHLUM NORDFORS McIQNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 10522 PAGE 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Fire extinguishers. 2. Fire extinguisher cabinets. B Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1 Division 9 Section 'Gypsum Board Assemblies. 2. Division 15 Section 'Fire Protection. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B Product data for each type of product specified. For fire extinguisher cabinets include rough -in dimensions, details showing mounting method, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style, door construction, panel style, and materials. C. Samples for verification purposes of each type of metal finish required, prepared on metal samples of same thickness and alloy indicated for final unit of work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets from one source from a single manufacturer B. UL- Listed Products: Fire extinguishers shall be UL listed with UL listing mark for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher C. FM- Listed Products: Fire extinguishers approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher and carry appropriate FM marking. PART 2 PRODUCES 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 Ansul Fire Protection. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2. Badger Powhatan. 3. J.L. Industries. 4 Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 5 Modern Metal Products by Muckle. 6. Nystrom Products Co. 7 Potter Roemer Inc. 8. Samson Metal Products, Inc. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS SECTION 10522 PAGE 2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General. Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors and finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, that comply with requirements of governing authorities. 1 Fill and service extinguishers to comply with requirements of governing authorities and manufacturer 2. Abbreviations indicated below identify extinguisher types related to UL classification and rating system and not necessarily to type and amount of extinguishing material contained in extinguisher B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL -rated 4- A:60 -B•C, 10 -lb nominal capacity in enameled steel container 2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. General. Provide fire extinguisher cabinets where indicated, of suitable size for housing fire extinguishers of types and capacities indicated. B. Quality Standard Manufacturer Larsen's. Products from alternative manufacturers must meet or exceed the specifications for the products of the quality standard manufacturer C. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: 1 Flat Trim Fully- Recessed: Larsen's Architectural Series with full glass door model FS 2409 -R2 2. Cabinet door panels and trim shall be constructed of steel with baked acrylic enamel finish, full -swing steel hinges to permit the door to travel 180 degrees to conform to fire codes. 3. Interior cabinet shall be constructed of not lighter than 18 -gage steel with baked enamel finish. D Rated Wall Installations: 1 Provide Larsen s 'Flame Shield' option to match wall rating at cabinets recessed in rated wall assemblies. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 3 EXECUTION SECTION 10522 PAGE 3 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation. B Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. 1 Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer's instructions. 0 19% Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 10522 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 10800 PAGE 1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes toilet and bath accessory items as scheduled and/or shown on drawings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. B. Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including construction details relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, mounting method, specified options, and fmishes. C. Maintenance instructions including replaceable parts and service recommendations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish accessory manufacturers' standard inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay B. Single Source Responsibility Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items. 1.6 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Warranty* Submit a written warranty executed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace any mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within warranty period. B Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide toilet accessories by one of the following: 1 Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 2. Bradley Corporation. MAHLUM NORDFORS McIONLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL SECTION 10800 PAGE 2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304 with satin finish, 0.034 -inch (22 -gage) minimum thickness. B Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0 -mm (0.23 -inch) thick, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, and with silvering, electro- plated copper coating, and protective organic coating. C. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. D Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, or of galvanized steel where concealed. 2.3 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS A. Surface Mounted Towel Dispensers: Fabricate of stainless steel with hinged front equipped with tumbler lockset mounted on face of front. Provide pierced slots at sides as refill indicators. 1 Capacity Not less than either 400 C -fold or 525 multifold or 400 single -fold paper towels without special adapters. 2. Quality Standard: Bobrick model B -262. Note: Face mounted tumbler lock may be critical at under cabinet locations. Substitutions with top mounted tumbler lock will not be allowed. 2.4 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS A. Surface Mounted Toilet Tissue Dispenser Fabricate of heavy duty cast aluminum with satin finish for surface mounting. 1 Size: Unit to accommodate two separate core -type tissue rolls up to 5 inches in diameter 2. Quality Standard: Bobrick B -2740 2.5 COMBINATION TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER/SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL A. Recessed Unit: Stainless steel, combination unit fabricated for nominal 4 -inch wall depth with continuous seamless 1 -inch -wide wall flange. Lockable door to access napkin disposal. 1 Size: Nominal 16 inches wide by 18 inches tall. Two roll capacity at tissue dispenser and 1 1/2 gallon capacity at napkin disposal. 2. Quality Standard: Bobrick B35704 2.6 GRAB BARS A. Stainless Steel Type: Provide grab bars with wall thickness not less than 0.05 inch (18 gage) and as follows: 1 Mounting: Concealed, manufacturer's standard flanges and anchorage with four set screws. 2. Clearance: 1 1/2 -inch clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar 3 Gripping Surfaces. Satin finish. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKLNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 4 Heavy -Duty Size: Outside diameter of 1 1/2 inches. 5 Backing: provide manufacturer's standard steel plate backing kit for each grab bar 6. Quality Standard: Bobrick series 6206 a. At Shower enclosures, provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel grab bars if available, otherwise provide Bobrick as above. 2.7 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL UNITS 2.8 SEAT -COVER DISPENSERS SECTION 10800 PAGE 3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. Surface Mounted Type: Fabricate of stainless steel with seamless exposed walls, tightly self closing top cover and locking bottom panel with continuous, stainless steel piano hinge. 1 Size: 8 inches wide by 11 inches high by 4 inches deep. 2. Quality Standard: Bobrick B -270 A. Recessed Type: Fabricate of stainless steel with concealed opening at bottom for filling; capacity not less than 500 seat covers. 1 Size: Nominal 16 inches wide by 11 inches high by 2 inches deep. 2. Quality Standard: Bobrick B -301 B. Surface Mounted Type: Fabricate of stainless steel with concealed opening at bottom for filling; capacity not less than 250 seat covers. 1 Size: Nominal 16 inches wide by 11 inches high by 2 inches deep. 2. Quality Standard: Bobrick B -221 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Double Robe Hook: Fabricate of stainless steel with satin fmish. Surface mount with concealed wall plate. 1 Quality Standard: Bobrick B -672 B Mop Holder Surface- mounted: Fabricate mounting base from stainless steel with three spring loaded, rubber can mop holders. 1 Quality Standard: Bobrick B -223 x 24 2.10 SHELF UNITS A. Fixed Units: Fabricate of 18 gauge stainless steel with satin finish. 16 gauge stainless steel mounting brackets. Hemmed front edges for safety 1 Size: 5 inches wide by 18 inches long. 2. Quality Standard: Bobrick B -295 2.11 MIRROR UNITS A. Standard Stainless Steel Framed Mirror Units: Fabricate frame with 3/4 by 3/4 angles with heliarc welded corners, ground smooth. Provide satin finish. 1 Size: As indicated on drawings. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2. Quality Standard: Bobrick B -290 Series B Stainless Steel Framed Tilting Mirror Units: Adjustable tilting mirror with locking mechanism to allow mirror to tilt 7 inches at top. or be used in upright position. Fabricate frame with 3/4 by 3/4 angles with heliarc welded corners, ground smooth. Provide satin finish. 1 Size: As indicated on drawings. 2. Quality Standard: Bobrick B -294 Series 2.12 SHOWER SEAT A. Folding Unit L- shaped seat with stainless steel frame and mounting brackets, phenolic slat seats, self locking mechanism. 1 Size: 32 inches wide 2. Quality Standard: Shower enclosure manufacturer's standard unit. 2.13 FABRICATION SECTION 10800 PAGE 4 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. General: Only a maximum 1 1/2- inch diameter unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or back surface, provide additional identification by either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate, indicating manufacturer's name and product model number B Surface Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. C. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all- welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with full length, stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed. D Framed Mirror Units, General. Fabricate frames for glass mirror units to accommodate wood, felt, plastic, or other glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that will permit rigid, tamperproof glass installation and prevent moisture accumulation, as follows: 1 Provide galvanized -steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (22 gage) and full mirror size, with non absorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material. E. Mirror Unit Hangers: Provide system for mounting mirror units that will permit rigid, tamperproof, and theft proof installation, as follows: 1 One- piece, galvanized- steel, wall-hanger device with spring -action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts or 2. Heavy -duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. F Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for servicing, re- supply etc. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved. C. Install grab bars with backing to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbs. complying with ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIES A. General. Provide toilet accessories where indicated in the drawings. In addition provide the following if not shown in the drawings. B At new patient toilet/shower rooms: 1 Recessed combination toilet tissue dispenser /sanitary napkin disposal. 2. Grab bars at back and side of toilet and in shower 3 Fixed shelf unit 4 Two (2) Robe hooks 5 Folding Shower Seat C. At existing patient toilet/shower rooms: 1 Surface mounted toilet tissue dispenser /sanitary napkin disposal. 2. Grab bars at back and side of toilet and in shower 3 Surface mounted sanitary napkin disposal. 4 Fixed shelf unit 5 Two (2) Robe hooks at shared toilets, One (1) at private toilets. D At other toilet rooms: 1 Surface mounted toilet tissue dispenser /sanitary napkin disposal. 2. Surface mounted sanitary napkin disposal. 3 Surface mounted toilet seat cover dispenser 4 One (1) Robe hook SECTION 10800 PAGE 5 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL E. At lavatories and sinks in patient rooms: 1 Tilting mirror unit 2. Surface mounted paper towel dispenser F At new lavatories and sinks in other than patient rooms: 1 Fixed mirror unit 2. Surface mounted paper towel dispenser m 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 10800 PAGE 6 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES END OF SECTION 10800 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 3 SUBMITTALS SECTION 10990 PAGE 1 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERA", 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes miscellaneous specialties as scheduled and/or shown on drawings. B. Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1 Backing is specified in Division 9 Section `Gypsum Board Assemblies. A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. B. Product data for each specialty item specified, including physical characteristics, dimensions, mounting methods, and accessories. C Maintenance instructions including replaceable parts and service recommendations. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish specialty manufacturers' standard inserts and anchoring devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay B. Single Source Responsibility Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of specialty unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1 5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate specialty locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference with adjacent items and to ensure proper installation and operation. PART 2 PRODUCT 2 1 TELEVISION BRACKETS A. Wall Mounted Unit: Adjustable wall mount bracket fabricates of heavy gauge steel with baked on epoxy wrinkle finish. Provide lock 1 Size: Adequate to hold 13 inch Television 2. Capacity 75 lbs 3 Quality Standard: Lucasey HM1217 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION A. Install miscellaneous specialties according to manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 3 2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust miscellaneous specialties for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. 3 3 SCHEDULE OF SPECIALTIES A. General: Provide miscellaneous specialties where indicated in the drawings. In addition provide the following if not shown in the drawings. B. At patient bed rooms: 1 Television brackets in quantities equal to one per bed. 01996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 10990 PAGE 2 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES END OF SECTION 10990 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 1 GENERA[. 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes horizontal louver blinds. 1 3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of horizontal louver blind specified. Include printed data on physical characteristics. C Shop drawings showing location and extent of blinds. Show installation details at and relationship to adjoining work. Include elevations indicating blind units. Indicate location of blind controls. D Samples for Verification Purposes: One 12- inch -long slat for each color slat required. E. Maintenance data to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has specialized in installing horizontal louver blinds similar to those required for this Project. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide blinds identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics as determined by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 Test Method: NFPA 701 Small Scale Vertical Burn Test. C Single- Source Responsibility Obtain horizontal louver blinds from one source of a single manufacturer. 1 5 PROJECT CONDITIONS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS SECTION 12511 PAGE 1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS A. Field Measurements: Check openings by field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay in the Work. A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product manufactured by one of the following: B. Approved Manufacturers: 1 Levelor Lorentzen, Inc. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2 2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION 2 3 QUALITY STANDARD PRODUCT A. Manufacturer. Levelor Lorentzen B. Product: Levelor Riviera, Tiltone, 1 inch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION SECTION 12511 PAGE 2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS A. Product Standard and Description: American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (AWCMA) Document 1029 Each horizontal louver blind unit consists of slats, rails, cord lock, tilting mechanism, tapes, and installation hardware complying with referenced product standard and requirements indicated on each Horizontal Louver Blind Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section. B. Lifting and Tilting Mechanisms: Noncorrosive, self- lubricating materials. C Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C): 1 Blind Units Installed at face of Jambs: Width and length equal to 1/2 inch more than opening dimensions formed by jamb, head, and sill members of opening in which each blind is installed. D Installation Fasteners: Not less than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction and to support blind units under conditions of normal use. A. Examine openings where horizontal louver blinds will be installed prior to beginning installation. Verify that critical dimensions are correct and surface conditions acceptable. 1 Complete all fmishing operations, including painting, before beginning installation. 3 2 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds level, plumb, and located so exterior slat edges in any position are not closer than 1 inch to interior face of glass lights, gaps between slat ends and jambs do not exceed 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/8 inch, and bottom rail in fully lowered position is within 1/2 inch of bottom of window or other opening. 3 3 CLEANING A. After completing the installation, clean blind surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove surplus materials, packaging, rubbish and debris resulting from the installation. Leave areas where installation occurred neat, clean, and ready for use. 3 4 SCHEDULE A. Provide blinds at all exterior windows and interior relites. 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 12511 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 12 5 41 PAGE 1 DRAPERIES FART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes draperies and drapery hardware. 1 3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of drapery specified. Include printed data on physical characteristics. C Shop drawings showing location and extent of draperies. Show installation details at and relationship to adjoining work. Include elevations indicating drapery units. Indicate location of drapery controls. E. Two (2) Samples for Verification Purposes of each drapery fabric indicated. F 24 inch long sample of drapery track assembly including all accessories. G Maintenance data to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has specialized in installing draperies similar to those required for this Project. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide draperies identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics as determined by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 Test Method: NFPA 701, Large and Small Scale Vertical Burn Test. C Volatile Organic Compounds: Non detectable best rating for formaldehyde emission and total volatile organic compounds (VOC). D Single -Source Responsibility Obtain draperies from one source of a single manufacturer 1 5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check openings by field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay in the Work. FART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product manufactured by one of the following: MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL B. Approved Drapery Manufacturers: 1 ArcCom 2. Others as approved by addendum. C Approved Hardware Manufacturers: 1 Kirsch 2. Graber Company 3 Others as approved by addendum. 3 2 INSTALLATION 3 3 CLEANING 3 4 SCHEDULE 1996 Mahican Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 12541 PAGE 2 DRAPERIES 2 2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Drapery Track: Kirsch No. 94005 .050 extruded aluminum track with Teflon coated surfaces. B. Control. fiberglass baton draw system. C Drapery Type: Pinch Pleated D Drapery Fabric: 100% fire resistant Polyester Refer to Volume 2 Project Drawings, Room Finish Plan and Schedule for manufacturer style, color and pattern of drapery fabric. PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings where draperies will be installed prior to beginning installation. Verify that critical dimensions are correct and surface conditions acceptable. 1 Complete all finishing operations including painting ceiling before starting installation of drapery hardware 2. Complete fmal cleaning of project before installation of drapes. A. Install draperies level, plumb, and located so that bottom of drapes is 12 inches below window sill. A. After completing the installation, vacuum clean drapery surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove surplus materials, packaging, rubbish and debris resulting from the installation. Leave areas where installation occurred neat, clean, and ready for use. A. Refer to Volume 2 Project Drawings, Room Finish Plan and Schedule for locations of draperies. END OF SECTION 12541 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work includes complete mechanical systems shown on the plans and specified. The Bid and Contract Documents and General Requirements of the specification are a part of this division of the specification. Provide supervision, labor, material, equipment, and maclunery necessary to complete the mechanical systems. Provide finished work, tested and ready for operation. Where the word "provide" is used, it means "furnish and install complete and ready for use.'' 1 02 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Drawings are diagrammatic, indicating the general arrangement of systems and work, and do not attempt to show exact details or all offsets m piping and ductwork. Do not scale drawings. Examine the architectural drawings for exact location of fixtures and equipment. Where they are not definitely located, obtain this information from the Architect. B Follow drawings in laying out work and check drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Where minor adjustments of the work are necessary for purposes of fabncation or installation of items, or resolution of conflicts between items within the intent of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall make such adjustments at no added expense to the Owner Where such adjustments affect functional or aesthetic design of the work, they shall first be submitted to the Architect for review and approval. 1 03 EQUIPMENT DEVIATIONS A. Specific manufacturers and model numbers are noted to indicate a standard of design and not intended to be restrictive. B Requests for Substitutions. Requests for substitutions, complete with catalog data and proposed reduction in cost, shall be furnished not later than ten working days pnor to bid date or request may not be considered. Any substitutions approved shall be included in the submittals described below All substitutions approved shall be described in an addendum issued pnor to bid date. C When submitting an alternative and/or substitute product, Contractor shall include complete product literature of onginal specified item. D Provide redesign to any part of the work resulting from the use of equipment and matenal other than specified or shown on the drawings. Obtain approval of redesign from the Architect. Redesign cost and additional construction cost resulting from the redesign shall be at the Contractor's expense. 1 04 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Give necessary notices, obtain permits and pay taxes, fees and other costs, including utility connections or extensions for the work. File necessary plans, prepare documents and obtain necessary approvals of governmental departments having jurisdiction. Obtain required certificates of inspection for work and deliver to the Architect before request for acceptance and final payment for the work. SECTION 15010 PAGE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15010 PAGE 2 GENERAL PROVISIONS B Comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the work. If the Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith in any respect, he shall promptly notify the Architect m writing and any necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate modification. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without notice to the Architect, he shall assume full responsibility and shall bear all costs. C Matenal and equipment within the scope of the UL Testing Laboratory Service shall be listed by the Underwnters' Laboratones for the purpose for which they are used and shall bear their listing mark. 1 05 SHOP DRAWING AND SUBMITTAL DATA A. Check and verify field measurements and requirements. Submit promptly so as not to delay the work, six (6) copies, checked and approved by the Contractor, of all shop drawings, submittal data, and layout drawings listed below The Architect will check and review with reasonable promptness the shop drawings and submittal data only for conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Make corrections required by the Architect and re- submit to the Architect six corrected copies. The Architect's review of the shop drawings and submittal data shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibilities for deviation from the Contract Documents unless the Contractor has m wnting called to the Architect's attention deviation at the time of submission and secured the Architect's written approval, nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors in the shop drawings and submittal data. B The shop drawings and submittal data for the matenal and equipment listed below shall be submitted at one time. Each copy shall be in a three nng binder, indexed, properly labeled indicating specific material or equipment for which it is to be used and the specification section and paragraph number relating to the submitted item. C Review, approve and stamp shop drawings and submittal data before submission to the Architect. Notify the Architect in writing of any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents. D Failure to submit shop drawings and submittal data in ample time for checking and review shall not entitle the Contractor to an extension of contract time. E. Prepare detail layout drawings to a larger scale than the Contract drawings for all piping and sheetmetal work in Mechanical and Electncal Rooms and in other areas where the work is of sufficient complexity or space constraints to warrant additional detailing. Prepare these drawings on tracings of the same size as the Contract drawings and submit with each set of the Owner's record drawings. In general, do not submit these drawings for review When directed by the Architect, submit Layout drawings for review before commencing shop fabncation or field erection. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL F Submit shop drawings, submittal data and layout drawings on the following equipment: Plumbing equipment and fixtures Rooftop air conditioning units Refrigeration equipment Fans and air distribution equipment Fans, coils and duct layout Condensers Air filters Coils Control drawings, sequence of operation and products Medical gas systems and equipment Fire protection drawings and products Mechanical insulation vibration isolations Testing and balancing Valves and accessories 106 COORDINATION A. Mechanical contractor shall be thoroughly acquainted with the work involved and shall venfy at the site all measurements necessary for proper installation of the work. B Mechanical contractor shall refer to architectural, structural, and electncal drawings for building construction and other details which affect the mechanical installation and shall confer with those trades for finish adjacent to its work and arrange to have visible portions of this work (such as access doors, grilles, sprinkler heads, escutcheons, etc.) fit m and harmonize with the finish m a manner satisfactory to the Architect. C Where mechanical work will be installed in close proximity to, or will interfere with work of other trades, assist m working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. If work is installed before coordinating with other trades, or if it causes any interference with work of other trades, make the necessary changes in the work to correct the conditions and bear all costs. D Mechanical contractor shall identify all work items (valves, dampers, coils, etc) in an approved manner in order that the ceiling subcontractor may know where to install, and provide access -type panels. Locations of access panels shall be approved by Architect pnor to installation. E. Ceiling Heights. Architectural drawings shall be checked for ceiling heights, walls, and cabinets that are intended to conceal work of this Division. Where conflicts occur, the Architect shall be notified pnor to installation of the work. Location of exposed work such as lights, diffusers, speakers, spnnkler heads take precedence over concealed work. 107 PROTECTION A. Protect work and matenal from damage and be liable for damage. SECTION 15010 PAGE 3 GENERAL PROVISIONS MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL B Be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested and accepted, protect work against theft, injury or damage, and carefully store matenal and equipment received on site which are not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of obstructing material. 1 08 SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING AND HOISTING SECTION 15010 PAGE 4 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Provide ladders, scaffolding, ngging, hoisting and services necessary for delivery into the premises and erection of any equipment and apparatus and execution for the work. Remove same from premises when no longer required. 1 09 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP A. Matenals and equipment required for the work shall be new and shall be furnished, delivered, erected, installed, connected and finished in every detail, and shall be selected and arranged to fit properly into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or quality of matenal is given, an article as approved by the Architect shall be provided. B Furnish the services of an expenenced superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge of the work. C Equipment and materials shall be installed with the approval of the Architect in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer This includes the performance of such tests as the manufacturer recommends. 110 MOTORS A. Scope. This specification details the mechanical and electncal requirements for energy efficient, totally enclosed fan cooled and totally enclosed non ventilated squirrel -cage induction motors, NEMA frame size 182T through 449T B General 1 All motors covered by this specification shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of NEMA, IEEE, ANSI and NEC standards, including IEEE Std 841 2 Motors are to be designed for continuous duty for 3- phase, 60HZ, 460 volt operation, NEMA design B 3 Ratings to be based on a 40 degree C ambient, 3,300 foot (1000m) altitude or lower operation, with a maximum temperature nse of 80 degree C by resistance at 1 0 service factor, and 90 degree C nse at 1 15SF thru 150HP 4 Motors shall be furnished with Class F insulation, 1 15 service factor but shall be selected for operation within their full load rating without applying the service factor 5 Motors shall be of a premium efficient design and shall be different from the manufacturer's standard efficient product. C Beanngs and Lubncation. 1 Beanngs shall be ball, open, single row, deep groove Conrad type, and shall have a Class 3 internal fit conforming to AFBMA Std. 20 For belted duty applications, dnve end bearings may be cylindncal roller type. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15010 PAGE 5 GENERAL PROVISIONS 2. Beanng shall be selected to provide L10 ratmg life of 17,500 hours minimum for belted applications. 100,000 hours minimum for flexible direct coupled applications. Calculations shall be based on external loads using NEMA belted applications linuts per MG1 -14 07 and typical sheave weights and internal loads defined by the manufacturer including magnetic pull and rotating assembly weight. 3 Beanng temperature rise at rated load shall not exceed 60 degrees C at 3600 rpm or 50 degree C at 1800 rpm and slower Temperature nse is to be measured by RTD or thermocouple at bearing outer race. 4 Beanng AFBMA identification number shall be stamped on motor nameplate. 5 Motor lubncation system shall consist of a grease inlet on motor bracket with capped grease fitting on inlet, grease relief plug 180 degree from inlet, grease reservoir in cast inner cap 6 Motor to be greased by manufacturer with a premium moisture resistant polyurea thickened grease containing rust inhibitors and suitable for operation over temperature from -25 degree C to 120 degree C 7 Beanngs shall be protected by INPRO /SEAL bearing isolators on both ends of the motor D Enclosures. 1 Motor enclosure including frame with integrally cast feet, end brackets, locking bearing inner caps, fan guards, conduit box and cover shall be cast iron, ASTM Type A -48, Class 25 or better 2. Motor conduit box shall be cast iron construction, rotatable in 90 degree increments, diagonally split with tapped NPT threaded conduit entrance hole. Neoprene conduit box cover gasket and neoprene lead seal gasket between box and motor frame shall be furnished. Provision for grounding shall be provided in the conduit box utilizing a mounted clamp -type ground lug. 3 External cooling fan shall be corrosion resistant, non sparking, bi- directional, keyed, clamped and shouldered on the motor shaft. 4 Motor rotor construction shall be die cast aluminum or fabncated copper or their respected alloys. Rotors on frames 213T and above shall be keyed to shaft and rotating assembly dynamically balanced to 0005 inches peak to peak 182T- 326T frames, and 00075 inches peak to peak 364T -449T frames. Balanced weights, if required, shall be secured to the rotor resistance nng or fan blades by rivets. Machine screws and nuts are prohibited. The entire rotating assembly between beanng inner caps shall be coated with a corrosion resistant epoxy 5 Stainless steel automatic breather drains shall be provided in the lowest part of both front and back end brackets to allow dramage of condensation. 6 All mounting hardware shall be hex head, high strength, SAE Grade 5 plated for corrosion protection. Screwdriver slot fasteners are prohibited. A forged steel shouldered eyebolt shall be provided on all frames. Eyebolt receptacle shall be threaded and designed to prevent moisture or foreign matenal from entering motor when eyebolt is removed. 7 Corrosion resistant stainless steel nameplate shall be affixed to motor frame with stainless steel or brass dnve pins. Nameplate(s) shall include all required NEMA data and AFBMA beanng numbers, and connection diagram for dual voltage motors. 8 An external V -Ring shaft slinger shall be provided on both shaft extensions 254T and larger, on the dnve shaft only 182T -215T to minimize entrance of moisture or foreign material into beanng cavity MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15010 PAGE 6 GENERAL PROVISIONS 9 Frame to end bracket assembly of machined parts shall be protected and sealed by application of thick corrosion resistant matenal to the machine surfaces pnor to assembly 10 All motor parts including frame, brackets, fan cover, and terminal box shall receive a minimum of two coats of high grade USDA accepted epoxy paint. Motor assembly must satisfactorily withstand salt spray tests for corrosion per ASTM B -117 for 96 hours. E. Electncal. 1 All motors shall successfully operate under power supply variations per NEMA MG1 -14.30 2. All motors shall be NEMA Design B with torque and starting currents m accordance with NEMA MG1 -12.35 and 12.38 except m special applications requiring higher starting torques where NEMA Design C is permitted. 3 Motors shall have copper windings. 4 Motor insulation system shall be Class F minimum, utilizing matenals and insulation systems evaluated in accordance with IEEE 117 classification tests. 5 Motor leads shall be non wicking type, Class F temperature rating or better and permanently numbered for identification. 6 Entire wound and insulated stator shall receive additional coating of epoxy pamt on all air gap surfaces to protect against moisture and corrosion. 7 Each completed and assembled motor shall receive a routine factory test per NEMA standards. F Sound Transmission. 1 The no -load sound pressure level, based on the A- weighted scale at 3 feet when measured in accordance with IEEE Std. 85 should not exceed 85 DBA. G Efficiency 1 All motors shall be of an energy efficient design, different from the manufacturer's standard product through the use of premium matenals, design and improved manufactunng process. Energy efficient design shall reduce motor losses approximately 40 percent from standard efficient designs, and minimum efficiencies shall exceed NEMA Table MG1 -12.6C 2. Motor efficiency shall be determined in accordance with NEMA Standard MG1 -12.54 and full load efficiency labeled on motor nameplate in accordance with NEMA standard MG1 -12.55 H. Manufacturer 1 Motor shall be Reliance XE or equal of Toshiba, G.E. or Siemans. I. Motors and equipment shall be provided for current charactenstics as shown on the electrical drawings. Motor starters, disconnects switches and thermal heaters shall be provided by the Electncal Subcontractor 111 ACCESSIBILITY A. Install the work with adequate clearances throughout the project, including being responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts, chases, double partitions and suspended ceilings. Cooperate with other trades where work is in the same space. Such spaces and clearances shall be kept to the minimum size required. B Locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible positions. Minor deviations from drawings may be made to allow for better accessibility and any change shall be approved by the Architect. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15010 PAGE 7 GENERAL PROVISIONS C The Mechanical Subcontractor shall provide the General Contractor the exact locations of access panels for each concealed valve, control, damper or other device requinng service. Access panels will be provided and installed by the General Contractor and as specified in the other divisions of the specifications. Submit locations of these panels in sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of work. 1 12 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide winng, except temperature control winng, equipment control winng and interlock wiring. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide power wiring complete from power source to motor or equipment junction box, including power wiring through starters. Electncal Subcontractor shall provide starters and disconnect switches not factory- mounted on equipment. B The Mechanical Subcontractor shall, regardless of voltage, provide temperature control winng, interlock wiring and equipment control winng for the equipment that the Mechanical Subcontractor furnishes or installs. C The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for power winng. Control winng shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Subcontractor Motors and equipment shall be provided for current characteristics as shown on the electncal drawings. 1 13 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide drilling, conng, cutting and patching necessary to install the work specified in this division. 1 Patching: All patching shall be by the General Contractor During the bidding penod, notify the General Contractor the extent of patching required. 2 Drilling and cutting: All round holes through concrete slabs or shall be core drilled with diamond drill, all rectangular openings shall be cut with a diamond saw B No structural members shall be cut without the approval of the Architect, and cutting shall be done in a manner directed by him. Do not damage or endanger any portion of the project or work of the Owner or any other separate contractor by drilling, coring, cutting and patching. C Inform the General Contractor and other subcontractors affected of requirements for cutting and patching. 114 DEMOLITION A. Provide all demolition work required in the existing building for the removal of existing mechanical equipment, ductwork, tubing, or piping and the installation of new equipment, ductwork, tubing, or piping. Relocate or modify the existing piping, tubing, and ductwork as required by any general construction alterations or by the installation of new ductwork, tubing, or piping in the existing building. B Existing Matenals, Removal and Disposition. 1 Existing materials shown or specified to be removed shall be removed and shall be disposed of. The Owner will retain possession of certain salvageable materials when Contractor has existing matenals removed and stacked for pickup 2 Where existing plumbing fixtures and radiators are removed, cut back to the stack or nser and cap the piping behind the wall or below the floor Remove all unused branch piping and piping in walls to be demolished and cap the remauung piping. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 Where existing insulation is damaged due to cuttmg and abandonment, asbestos removal or connection to new systems, replace damaged sections, as herem specified for new systems. 4 Reuse plumbing fixtures where so noted. Provide new stops, supplies, hangers, and traps. Do not reuse pipe m general, but cast -iron soil pipe may be reused m new work if of proper arrangement, wall thickness, and pressure rating. Reuse of materials is permitted only m existing building. 5 Materials to Owner Existing plumbing fixtures and their true, which are not reused, motors on equipment which are not shown to be reused and motors which are replaced; traps and valves which are not reused. 6 Materials to Contractor Materials other than those reserved by Owner 1 15 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE TO AND IN EXISTING BUILDING SECTION 15010 PAGE 8 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Temporary Services Provide those temporary services to the existing building as required to maintain the building in continuous operation and without reducing efficiency The extent of temporary services shall be carefully conferenced and coordinated with the Owner the Architect, and General Contractor B Continuity of Service in Existing Buildings Do all new work so that there is no shutdown of more than one -hour duration of any existing mechanical system. 1 Interruptions of any existing service or system shall be fully coordinated with Owner and agreed upon m wntmg. 2. Provide advance notice as specified m Divisionl before performing the work which would cause or require the shutdown. C Interference with Owner's Employees. Do all work in the existing building with respect for the necessity of Owner's employees to perform their regular work. 1 16 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING ACCESSIBLE CEILING PANELS A. Remove and reinstall all necessary panels in existing accessible ceilings as required to install the mechanical work in areas where no architectural work is required. Where existing ceiling panels are damaged, they shall be replaced with new units. After ceiling removal and reinstallation is complete, the ceiling system appearance shall match adjacent similar ceilings that have not been removed. 1 17 TEMPORARY SERVICES A. Temporary Heat. Temporary heat is specified in Division 1 Cooperate with the General Contractor and prepare the terminal heating equipment for operation when the building is enclosed and ready for finishing. B Air Systems. Do not use air systems dunng construction. Cover duct and grille opemngs with taped -on plastic sheet or equivalent to keep all construction dust possible out of the ductwork. C Cleaning: Promptly remove all waste matenal and rubbish. At completion of the work, clean all dirt and construction debns such as paint, plaster, glue, cement, mastic, tar, paper, tape, and dirt from the mechanical installation including equipment, piping, ductwork, and plumbing fixtures. In finished areas to be occupied, keep equipment covered dunng course of construction. Where this is not practical, clean and/or refinish item to new condition. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15010 PAGE 9 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 18 REVISIONS, ALTERATIONS, AND CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A. Concealed piping, tubing, and duct systems of record are shown on the drawings. These are not necessarily exact with respect to location or completeness, therefore, the following steps shall be taken. 1 Inspect existing conditions of work, mcludmg existmg piping, ductwork, and equipment, and compare the Drawings and Specifications for extent and scope of new work. 2. Where connections are required to existing piping or duct systems, to connect new piping or ducts, keep the shutdown penod to a minimum and restore services promptly to existing building. Comply with the requirements of "Contmuity of Service To and In Existing Buildmg," specified elsewhere m this Section. 3 Each shutdown shall be agreed to with the Owner All work shall be performed in a manner which will nunmuze shutdown periods to one hour 4 Should any unknown piping or duct be encountered during the source of work, notify the Engineer of such discovery Engineer will then investigate and issue instructions for the disposition of the unknown pipe or duct. 5 Protect existmg services, piping systems, and duct systems from any damage or interruption of service. 6 Execute cutting as required to uncover work. Patch with finishes to match adjacent surfaces. Cutting and patching is specified elsewhere m this Section. B Mechanical contractor shall protect existing building and furnishings from damage and be liable for all damage thus caused. Mechanical contractor shall be responsible for work and matenals until finally tested and accepted. C Work will be checked as it progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or matenals m no way prevents later rejection when such defects are discovered, nor shall it obligate the Owner for final acceptance. 1 19 OPERATING PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION A. General. Provide "classroom" and "field" instruction of facility operating personnel sufficiently pnor to facility acceptance, upon mutually satisfactory arrangement with Owner B Instruction. Instruction shall not begin until the component, assembly, or system has been tested and is in acceptable operating condition, otherwise instruction shall be deemed incomplete. Instruction shall encompass normal operation, emergency operation, fire and other hazards, safety provisions, pollution prevention provisions, and maintenance procedures for all work provided. C Instructors Instructors shall include the Mechanical contractor's staff supplemented by authonzed representatives of the component, assembly, or system manufacturer D Aids Instruction process shall utilize specified manuals which, if deemed unsatisfactory in any content, shall be supplemented in a manner to achieve specified instruction. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15010 PAGE 10 GENERAL PROVISIONS E. Time Provide all necessary instruction to the complete understanding of the operating personnel. Minimum instruction penods shall be as follows. Plumbing 1/2 days Heating, ventilating and air conditioning 1 days Fire protection 1/2 days Special systems 1 days Controls 2 days F See Section 15950, "Controls," for additional instruction requirements. 1.20 RECORD DRAWINGS, DATA A. The Contractor shall, during the progress of the work, keep a current and careful record of all changes where the actual installation differs from that shown on the Contract Drawings. "As -built drawings" shall be maintained m the project office for inspection by the Architect at any time. Accurately locate and show all isolating and operating valves complete with valve tag numbers. Valve tag requirements are specified in Section 15050, "Basic Matenals and Methods." B Construction Coordination Drawings. 1 Provide construction coordination drawings for all congested areas requinng close coordination with other trades and the general construction. Mechanical work that is fully coordinated and that can be installed without detailed coordination drawings will not require the drawmgs. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to work out and coordinate all conflicts and to provide all offsets and special fittings required to facilitate installation of work. Failure to provide the drawings, when required, shall be considered non performance, and progress payments will be suspended until the drawmgs are reviewed and accepted by the Architect. 2. Pnor to installation, where conflicts cannot be worked out due to space restrictions, and where contract modifications are required, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and obtain wntten instructions. 3 The construction coordination drawings shall be submitted to the Architect for review pnor to commencement of any related work. Drawings shall be executed on sheets sized the same as the Contract Documents and shall be reproducible mylar either hand drafted or produced by CAD Drafting shall be the same quality as the Contract Documents. 4 The construction coordination drawings shall show all related trades, structure, and ceilings, walls, and partitions. Provide cross sections of all congested areas. 5 The construction coordination drawings shall be contmuously updated during the execution of the work. The drawings shall be submitted at the completion of the project for record purposes. C Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall furnish one complete set of as -built drawings on reproducible transparencies or Autocad files to the Architect. Outside utilities must be accurately located by dimension -to- permanent construction. Contractor shall obtain transparencies or cad files of the Contract Drawings from the Architect and pay all costs. 1.21 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. General. Comply with all Division 1 requirements. B Requirements for Final Inspection. All of the following items shall be completed prior to final inspections. No exceptions will be made and no approval for final payment will be made until all items are completed. Cleaning equipment and premises. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL Operating instructions and maintenance manuals. Testing, adjusting and balancing. Record drawings "as- built Guarantee. 1.22 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. General Prepare instruction manuals describing the operation, servicing, and maintenance requirements of all mechanical equipment provided and complete parts lists. B Equipment Described in the Manual Include the following sections, each with separate tab index: Vibration isolation Rooftop air conditioning units Fans, ventilation equipment and terminal units Air filters Air heating and evaporator coils Condensers Plumbing fixtures and faucets Medical gases and equipment Fire protection equipment Valve locations schedule Control products and sequence of operation C Information Contained in the Manual. Catalog data on each item installed and not the complete "line" of the manufacturer Supplementary drawings for servicing and maintenance points. Index all contents listed in an orderly presentation. Include tabulations describing the type of equipment, frequency of service, type of service, and descnption of all lubncants required. Lubncation and lubncants especially shall be detailed separately for all equipment and presented for ready reference. D Binding: Bind matenal in post -type expandable three -hole binder with clear plastic covered heavy -duty cover and back panel. Insert front cover with the name of the project, the Owner, year of completion, the words "Mechanical Equipment," and names of Architect, Engineer and mechanical subcontractor The back edge shall be inserted with the name of the project, Owner and year of completion. If thickness of the manual exceeds approximately 3", provide separate volumes, each approximately 3" thick with each volume number included as described above. E. Number of Copies: Submit one preliminary copy for approval. Deliver three final bound copies to the Architect for final approval and delivery to the Owner 1.23 TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAGRAMS A. Laminate in plastic temperature control diagrams, piping diagrams, valve list and color code. Mount where directed by Architect. 1.24 CLEANING SECTION 15010 PAGE 11 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Promptly remove waste matenal and rubbish caused by the work. At Completion of the work, clean dirt and debris from the mechanical installation, including equipment, piping, ductwork and plumbing fixtures. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL B Upon completion of the project and after cleaning is complete and before project is air balanced, provide clean air filters throughout. 1.25 WARRANTY A. All work, material and equipment to be free from defects. Correct all defects and failures occurring within one year from date of Owner's final acceptance without cost to the Owner except when such failure is due to neglect or carelessness by the Owner, as determined by the Architect. B The warranty disregards shorter time limits by any manufacturer of equipment provided. C Make all necessary adjustments and corrections dunng first year of operation. The fact that the Architect or Engineer was present during any construction does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for defects discovered after completion of the work. 1.26 ASBESTOS A. This project may require work in the presence of asbestos fibers. These Bid Documents do not provide for or cover the identification, removal, encapsulation, or disposition of such materials. The Contractor is cautioned to obtain all instructions relative to proceeding with the execution of the work under the above circumstances, directly and solely from the owner 1.27 TESTING SECTION 15010 PAGE 12 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. If the work is completed during the heating season, perform final tests of cooling equipment the following summer; if completed during summer, perform test of heating system the following winter PARTS II AND III, PRODUCT AND EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION 15010 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 WORK INCLUDED A. Mechanical Equipment Isolators B Flexible Pipe Connectors C Pipe and Duct Isolators PART II PRODUCT 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Kinetics Peabody Noise Control, Mason Industries, Amber- Booth, Vibrex, Flexonics, or approved substitute. 2 02 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS 2.03 PIPE AND DUCT ISOLATORS A. Kinetics Type SFH. 2.04 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT VIBRATION ISOLATORS Section 15020 PAGE 1 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Braided type, screwed ends for 2 -inch and smaller, flanged ends for 2 -1/2 -inch and larger B Stainless steel for steel pipe Flexomcs #PCS C Bronze for copper pipe Flexomcs #PCB A. Rubber Pads 1 Single layer Kinetics Type NPS or NPD 2. Multi -layer Mason Industnes Type WMW 3 Multi -layer to receive leveling bolts Mason Industnes Type WML. 4 Multi -layer requinng equipment anchoring Mason Industries Type WM. B Glass fiber pad Kinetics Type KIP C Floor spnng mounts Kinetics FDS Senes all- welded construction with NPS rubber pad bonded to mounting plate. 1 Unhoused stable spnng, with ratio of horizontal to vertical spnng constant not less than 1 0, and built -in leveling bolts. Provide spnngs with an additional overload capacity of 50 percent. D Spring hanger Kinetics SFH. 1 Unhoused stable spnng, with the ratio of honzontal to vertical spring constant not less than .1 0, and built -in leveling bolts. Provide springs with an additional overload capacity of 50 percent. E. Seismic applications restrained spnng mounts Kinetics Type FYS with NPS rubber pad bonded to mounting plate. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART III EXECUTION 3 01 ISOLATION EFFICIENCY A. Isolate mechanical equipment in accordance with Table 34, Chapter 42, in the 1991 ASHRAE Handbook HVAC Applications Volume. 1 Select isolators for floor mounted or ceiling hung equipment from the "20 -Foot Floor Span" column. 2 Select isolators for roof mounted equipment from the "40 -Foot Floor Span" column. 3 Select isolators for equipment mounted on grade support slabs from the "Grade Supported Slab" column. 3 02 PIPES A. Flexible Connectors 1 Provide flexible pipe connectors at piping connections to equipment mounted or suspended with external vibration isolators and where shown on the drawings. 2. Align bolt holes on flanged flexible connectors with bolt holes in companion flanges to prevent twisting of connector and install screwed flexible connectors to avoid twisting. 3 Do not use flexible connectors to compensate for misalignment of piping. 4 Install flexible connections at nght angles to the direction of the vibration to avoid compression and extension of the connector from equipment motion. B Pipe Sleeves 1 Where pipes pass through walls, ceilings or floors (except slab -on- grade), install pipe sleeves and fill space between pipe and sleeve as specified in Section 15060 3 03 ISOLATORS Section 15020 PAGE 2 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Provide spring isolators on piping connected to isolated mechanical equipment as follows. up to 4 -inch diameter first 3 points of support; 5 -inch to 8 -inch diameter first 4 points of support; 10 -inch diameter and over first 6 points of support. B Provide spring mounts on all centnfugal fans and utility sets. C Static deflection of first point shall be twice deflection of isolated equipment. D Provide continuous rubber pad between rooftop unit base and field fabricated roof curb, and between condenser unit and roof curb 3 04 EQUIPMENT BASES A. Install bases dead level. B Install inertia bases with a minimum clearance of 2- inches under base, other bases with a minimum clearance of 1 -inch under base END OF SECTION 15020 MALUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 WORK INCLUDED A. Paint mechanical work, including piping, not factory- finished, except concealed work. Identify all piping, concealed and exposed work. B Equipment painting and piping identification in accordance with the following color code. C In other rooms where piping is exposed, paint as directed.by Architect/Engmeer, identify in accordance with the following color code. D Repaint factory finish equipment if damaged. E. Label each piece of mechanical equipment and system with equipment or system name lettered thereon with 2 -inch high block style black paint letters. F Paint all visible surfaces behind grilles dull black. G Provide tag on each valve with identifying number where destination and service of valve is not obvious. Post Valve Index, laminated in plastic, where directed by Architect. H. Provide flow directional arrows on all exposed piping. I. Definitions. 1 "Concealed" Work: Work installed within pipe shafts, duct spaces, above furred or hung ceilings, or otherwise built into the building and not exposed to view 2. "Exposed" Work: Work in walkway tunnels, Mechanical and Fan Rooms, closets and all occupied areas is included as work regarded as "exposed" PART II PRODUCTS 2.01 PAINT A. Manufacturer Quigley, Cowman and Campbell, Fuller, General Paint, Sherwin Williams, or Glidden Manufacture, or approved substitute. B Industrial Enamel Alkyd base, Quigley AAA, Sherwin- Williams, "Kem- Lustral Glidden "Daylite" enamel. C Primer for Steel Surfaces Zinc chromate primer, Cowman Campbell No 1134 or equal. D Pnmer for zinc- coated surfaces. Metallic zinc -zinc oxide pnmer, W.P Fuller No 7747 Glidden "Rustmaster" or Dupont "Dulux." E. Pnmer- Sealer for Insulated Surfaces Resin -type pnmer sealer 2.02 IDENTIFICATION BANDS AND FLOW ARROWS a.03 VALVE TAGS SECTION 15030 PAGE 1 MECHANICAL PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION A. Seton contact type adhesive backed, Zeston or approved substitute. 1 -1/8 -inch wide for lines up through 3 -inch, 2 -inch wide for larger pipes. A. Seton 1 -1/2 -inch round brass with stamped, black enamel filled characters or contractor's option, 1 1/2 -inch round solid plastic with stamped, black enamel filled characters #6 nickel plated bead chain. MALUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15030 PAGE 2 MECHANICAL PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION Oxygen, Medical Green Vacuum, Medical Green Heating Water Light Green Refrigerant Piping Gray Domestic Cold Water Dark Blue Domestic Hot Water Maroon Waste, Soil, Vents, Downspout Brown Fire Red Other Services Gray Rooftop Equipment Color as selected or approved by Architect Ductwork (include. roof mtd) Color as selected or approved by Architect Grilles, Diffusers Color to match ceiling grid or paint Hanger Rods, Structural Members, Equipment Base Silver Flow Arrows Black PART III EXECUTION 3 01 PAINTING A. Use skilled painters; paints, well mixed, each coat to have slight vanation m color from the preceding, for ready identification. B Clean grease, dirt, wax and scale from surfaces before painting. C Cleaning Solvents. Mineral Spirits; remove cleaning solvent cloths from building each day D Metal Surfaces 2 04 COLOR CODE 1� 1 1 1 1 1 f t t 1 1 MALUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15030 PAGE 3 MECHANICAL PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION 1 In General 3 mils minimum dry film thickness; apply one priming coat and one finish coat of acrylic base paint and additional coats as required to obtain minimum dry film thickness. 2 Outside Building: Environment contains salt air and pulp mill acid and is considered corrosive. Paint 4 mils =mum thickness, apply prime coat and two finish coats of epoxy or hersite base paint and additional coats as required to obtain minimum dry film thickness. E. Insulation Surfaces. 3 mils minimum dry film thickness; apply one coat of primer sealer, and one coat of acrylic base paint and additional coats as required to obtain minimum dry film tickness. F Grilles and Diffusers 3 mils minimum thickness; apply spray paint; one pnmer coat and two coats of mdustnal enamel. G Interior of Ducts (Where Visible Through Grilles) Apply one coat of black paint. H. Hangers. Same as metal surfaces. I. Repainting of Existing Work: Wherever any existing work has been damaged dunng operations of this contract, repaint it, following repair of insulation to match the onginal condition as closely as practical. Complete repainting of the piping will not be required. 3 02 IDENTIFICATION BANDS AND FLOW ARROWS A. Apply on 10 -foot centers and wherever a pipe leaves or enters any wall, floor, ceiling or foundation. Place the proper band on pipe at each valve, branch connection, and exit from a piece of equipment. Apply after paint work is completed. END OF SECTION 15030 1 1 1 1 1 1 t MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 WORK INCLUDED A. Air Systems Balancing B Water Systems Balancing C Balancing Reports 1 02 SYSTEMS BALANCING CONTRACTOR SECTION 15040 PAGE 1 BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS A. Systems balancing contractors, Nuedorfer Engineers, United Systems Inc., Hardin Inc., or approved substitute. B Obtain approval from the Architect of systems balancing contractor pnor to commencing balancing. C Qualification requirements. 1 Must have minimum five (5) years expenence record m systems balancing. 2 Must have sufficient expenence on projects similar to this project. Submit lists of projects to demonstrate this expenence. 1 03 BALANCING REPORT A. Upon completion of the work, provide the necessary skilled labor, helpers, materials and equipment to support the commissioning work (see Section 15950). During the commissioning, coordinate with the commissioning company and make all adjustments required to demonstrate systems are working properly PART II PRODUCT 2 01 BALANCING REPORT A. Provide three (3) sets of balancing reports, two (2) for the Owner and one (1) for the Engineer B Include in report: Project Name, Owner, Engineer, Systems Balancing Sub contractor, other data necessary to describe activity and the status of the systems plus the following data. 1 Fans a. Installation data. 1) Manufacturer and model 2) Size 3) Arrangement, discharge and class 4) Motor HP, voltage, phase, cycles and full load amps 5) Identification data MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15040 PAGE 2 BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS b Design data. 1) Total CFM 2) Static pressure 3) Motor HP, rpm and amp 4) Fan rpm 5) Fan BHP c. Fan recorded data. 1) CFM 2) Static pressure 3) Rpm 4) Motor operating amp 5) Motor operating BHP 6) Dnve sizes (sheaves, belts, and shaft) 2. Duct systems. a. Duct CFM mains, branches, (maximum and mimmum) 1) Duct size(s) 2) Number of pressure readings 3) Sum of velocity measurements 4) Average velocity 5) Duct recorded CFM 6) Duct design CFM b CFM of return and outside air at required maximum return air, at required minimum outside air 3 Air terminal zone vav boxes a. Identification data b Manufacturer's identification c. Box inlet static pressure d. Design and recorded quantities CFM (minimum and maximum) 4 Reheating coils a. Design data and recorded data. 1) MBH 2) GPM 3) Entenng and leaving water temperature 4) Entenng and leaving air temperature 5) CFM 6) Water pressure drop 7) Air velocity 8) Identification data 9) Air pressure drop 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART III EXECUTION 3 01 PROCEDURES SECTION 15040 PAGE 3 BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS A. Use procedures in accordance with the Associated Air Balance Council's "National Standard for Field Measurements and Instrumentation Total System Balance Volume One, No 81266 3 02 INSTRUMENTS A. Use accurate and recently calibrated instruments. Provide instrument calibration history if requested by the Architect. Use instrumentation application methods in accordance with A.A.B C or N.E.B.B procedures. 3 03 BALANCING AGENDA A. Submit balancing agenda prior to start of work. Include the following in the agenda. 1 General descnption of each air and water system with its associated equipment and operating cycles for heating and cooling. 2. A complete listing of all flow (air and water) and air terminal measurements to be performed. 3 For each specific procedure specify type of instrument to be used, method of instrument application (by sketch) and air terminal correction factors. 4 Include in agenda sample forms showing application of procedure to typical systems. 3 04 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES A. Complete system balancing pnor to the final inspection of the building. B Make air quantity measurements in ducts with a Pitot tube traverse of the entire cross sectional area of the duct. C For ducts having air velocities of 1000 feet per minute and higher measure flow with inclined manometers or draft gauges, having suitable scales and increments. D For ducts having air velocities lower than 1000 feet per minute measure flow with micro- manometers, hook gauges, or similar low pressure instruments. E. Volume control devices to regulate air quantities of air terminals only to the extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Volume control by means of air terminal adjustment or duct internal devices other than dampers is not permitted. F Adjust and balance the air system as necessary to accommodate field conditions and occupant comfort. Provide necessary fan adjustments, pulley changes and damper adjustments. 3 05 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURES MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL A. Complete system balancing prior to the final inspection of the building. B Use calibrated metenng fittings and pressure gauges installed in the piping system, in conjunction with the portable type flow meters, to determine water flow rates for system balance. Where flow metenng devices are not mstalled, use temperature differential across the vanous heat transfer elements m the system to determine flow C Adjust systems to provide the approved pressure drops through the heat transfer elements pnor to the thermal testing. D Perform initial system balance with automatic control valves full open to the heat transfer elements. E. Perform adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks. Service valves shall not be used for balancing. F Adjust pressure drop through 3 -way valve by- passes to balance drop through the system and the components served. G Adjust and balance the water systems as necessary to accommodate field conditions and occupant comfort. END OF SECTION 15040 SECTION 15040 PAGE 4 BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEDICAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe, fittings, and connections. B Piping specialties. PART II PRODUCT 2 01 STANDARDS 2.02 PIPING SYSTEMS A. All material in conformance with the standards listed in 2 01 1 Domestic Water Piping (Above Ground) a. Pipe Type L hard copper ASTM B88 SECTION 15060 PAGE 1 PIPING AND FITTINGS A. All standards refer to the current edition. 1 ANSI/ASTM A53 Pipe, steel, black and hot dipped zinc- coated, welded and seamless. 2. ANSI/ASTM A74 Cast iron soil pipe and fittings. 3 ASTM A795 Black and hot dipped zinc- coated (galvanized) welded and seamless steel pipe for fire protection. ANSI/ASTM Al26 Gray iron castings for valves, flanges and pipe fittings. 4 ANSI B9 1 Mechanical refrigeration pipe. 5 ANSI/ASME B16 3 Malleable -iron threaded fittmgs. 6 ANSI/ASME B16 4 Cast iron threaded fittings Class 125 and 250 7 ANSI/ASME B16 5 Pipe flanges and flanged fittings. 8 ANSI B16 9 Factory-made wrought steel butt welding fittings. 9 ANSI/ASTM B16 12 Cast iron threaded drainage fittings. 10 ANSI/ASME B16.22 Wrought copper and bronze solder -joint pressure fittings. 12. ANSI B16.25 Butt welding ends for pipe, valves, flanges and fittings. 13 ANSI/ASME B16.29 Wrought copper and wrought copper alloy solder point drainage fittings DWV 14 ASTM B88 Seamless copper water tube. 15 ANSI/ASTM B306 Copper drainage tube. 16 ANSI/AWWA C111 Rubber gasket joints for ductile iron and gray iron pressure pipe and fittings. 17 ANSI/AWWA C151 Ductile iron pipe, centrifugally cast in metal molds or sand lined molds, for water or other liquids. ANSI/AWWA C104 /A21 4 Cement mortar lining. 18 ASTM C443 Joints for circular concrete sewer and culvert pipe, using rubber gaskets. 19 ANSI/AWWA C606 Grooved and shouldered type points. 20 CISPI No 301 Cast iron soil pipe and fittings for hubless cast iron sanitary system. 21 FS WW -P -521 Pipe fittings, flange fittings, and flanges. Steel and malleable -iron (threaded and butt welding) Class 150 22. ASTM A234 Seamless and welded wrought -steel welding fittings. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEDICAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL b Fittings Wrought copper or bronze soldered, ANSI/ASME B75 SECTION 15060 PAGE 2 PIPING AND FITTINGS 2 Soil/Waste Pipe (Above Ground) a. Pipe. Galvanized steel, Schedule 40, for piping 2 -1/2 -inch and smaller Service weight coated cast iron, bell and spigot or no -hub for piping 3 -inch and larger At Contractor's option and where code permits, DWV copper drainage tube may be used. ANSI/ASTM Al20, A74, B306 and CISPI 301 b Fittings Black cast iron threaded drainage pattern for galvanized pipe. Service weight coated cast iron bell and spigot or no -hub fittings, coupling, shields and clamp assemblies. Wrought copper solder joint drainage fittings for DWV tube. ANSI/ASTM A74, B16 12, ANSI/ASME B16.29 and CISPI 301 3 Vent Piping (Above Ground) a. Pipe. Galvanized steel, Schedule 40; or service weight coated cast iron, bell and spigot no -hub pipe. At Contractor's option, DWV copper drainage tube may be used, ANSI/ASTM A53, A74, B306 and CISPI 301 b Fittings: Black cast iron threaded drainage pattern for galvanized pipe. Service weight coated cast iron bell and spigot or no -hub fittings, couplings, shields and clamp assemblies. Wrought copper solder joint drainage fittings for DWV tube, ANSI/ASTM A74, B16 12, ANSI/ASME B16.29 and CISPI 301 4 Rainwater Leader Piping: Pipe and fittings shall be as specified for waste piping above. 5 Hot Water Heating Piping: a. Pipe. Black steel, Schedule 40, ANSI/ASTM A53, Grade B b Fittings: Black malleable iron, 1501b threaded for piping smaller than 2-1/2 inch, ANSI/ASME A197 Steel butt welding fittings for piping 2 -1/2 -inch and larger, with 150 -lb forged steel flanges, ASTM A234, Grade WPB and ANSI/ASTM B16 5 c. "Weldolets" may be used in lieu of tees when branch size is smaller than the main size, ASTM A234 6 Mechanical Refrigeration Piping: a. Pipe ACR Type L hard copper cleaned, dehydrated, and seal ends, ANSI B9 1 b Fittings Wrought copper or bronze solder fittings, except refrigerant flare fittings may be used for connections to equipment with flare connections, ANSI/ASME B75 7 Fire Sprinkler Piping: a. Pipe Black steel, Schedule 40, 2 -inch and below, above 2 -inch in accordance with NFPA -13 b Fittings. Cast iron threaded cast iron flanged, or grooved rubber gasketed flexible couplings, elbows and tees. c. All pipe and fittings in stnct accordance with ANSI/ASTM Standards listed in NFPA -13 d. Welding permitted per NFPA -13 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEDICAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.03 UNIONS 8 Medical Vacuum Piping: a. Pipe Type L hard -drawn copper, ASTM B88 b Fittings Wrought copper or bronze soldered, ANSI/ASME B75 9 Medical Oxygen. a. Pipe. Type K seamless hard -drawn copper, ASTM B88 b Fittings Wrought copper, brass or bronze soldered, ANSI/ASME B75 A. Copper tube, Sweat, Nibco #733, Grinnell -ITT #9730, EPC #4733 B Steel pipe, threaded 2 -inch and under, malleable -iron 250 -1b ground joint. C Steel pipe, welded 2 -1/2 -inch and over, flange unions 150 -1b forged steel. D Dielectric unions, soldered to threaded 2 -inch and below, flanged 2 -1/2 -inch and above. Select gasket for pressure and temperature range of service. Capitol Series CS or F, Epco "Dielectnc Union" 2.04 PIPE SLEEVES AND SEALS A. Sleeves m concrete floor slabs above grade and concrete roofs, 20 -gauge galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints, or pre formed factory- fabricated plastic sleeves. B Sleeves through concrete beams and concrete, masonry or tile walls above grade Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves. C Fire stopping seals USG Interiors Inc Thermafiber Safing insulation and Thermafiber Smoke Seal. 2.05 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS A. Sisco P/T Plugs. B Valve core and body suitable for300 degrees F C 1/2 -Inch size. D Test Kit 2- 2.5- 2GA -2T complete. 1 Two (2) dial face gauge. 2. Two (2) stainless steel gauge adapter size to match valve core/body 3 Two (2) dial face thermometer 4 Select suitable temperature and pressure ranges for system requirements. 2.06 ESCUTCHEON RINGS SECTION 15060 PAGE 3 PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Chrome- plated split ring type. Deep recessed type on pipes with sleeves through floor which extend above finished floor line to conceal pipe sleeve. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEDICAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSMONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART III EXECUTION 3 01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3 02 WELDED PIPE JOINTS SECTION 15060 PAGE 4 PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Keep openings in piping and ends of pipe closed during installation. B Ells shall be long- radius. C Change size in piping with reducing couplings; bushings not acceptable. D Install all piping parallel with the building and other piping. E. Cut pipe accurately to measurement established on building and work mto place without spnnging or forcing. F Install piping concealed in finished rooms, unless indicated otherwise. G Provide pressure/temperature test plugs at supply and discharge of each coil, on each side of control valves, at balancing cocks, where indicated on the drawings, and in any location requinng system balance information. H. Install exposed work neatly and workmanlike; run pipes parallel to the closest wall, maintain maximum headroom, avoid light fixtures. I. Correct piping leaks immediately; use new matenals; leak- sealing compounds or peening not permitted. A. Qualifications and Procedures 1 Welded piping points on all piping shall be welded using procedures, welders and welding operators qualified in accordance with ASME B31 9, and applicable state labor requirements. As described in ASME B31 9, qualifications of welding procedures and personnel certification reports are the Contractor's responsibility, and shall be supplied to the Owner's Representative/Engineer for approval at least 21 days prior to the start of work. 3 Employ only welders holding one of the following certificates, dated within the preceding 3 months or dated earlier with documented records indicating acceptable continuous welding has been performed since certificate was issued. a. Certificate of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. b Certificate from a recognized testing laboratory indicating satisfactory welding test results in accordance with ASME Boiler and Unfired Pressure Vessel Code, Section 9 "Welding Qualifications" If in the opinion of the Owner's Representative/Engineer the work of a welder creates a reasonable doubt as to his skill, additional tests may be ordered by the Owner's Representative/Engineer at the Contractor's expense. 4 Safety Standards. Welding practice shall comply with the latest edition and amendments of ANSI Z49 1 "Safety in Welding and Cutting" 5 Where welders make additions to an ASME stamped product in the field (i.e., boiler tank, etc.), welders must be tested and qualified under the requirement of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 1 1 1 1 1 1 r t 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEDICAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL B Welding: 1 Beveling: Field or shop bevel by mechanical means or flame. cutting. Where beveling is done by flame cutting, thoroughly clean surface of scale and oxidation dust before welding. Bevel to conform to recognized standards. 2. Alignment: Girth butt welds and welded branch connections. Complete penetration welds shall be made without backing nngs. 3 Socket Welds Use socket welds on piping 2 inches and smaller Cut and ream pipe ends to provide straight end surface free of burr 4 Defective welds will not be accepted. Defective welds are those which fail to comply with ANSI B31 1 and those which result in leakage during testing of piping. Defective welds shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner Pipe and fittings with defective welds which cannot be satisfactorily corrected, as determined by the Owner's Representative/Engineer, shall be replaced with new pipe and fittings at no additional cost to the Owner 5 Electrodes Store electrodes in a dry heated area. Keep free of moisture and dampness dunng fabrication operations. Discard electrodes that have lost part of their coating. Use low hydrogen type E7018, or equal. Use E6010 SMAW or ER705 -2 GTAW filler metal for root pass on open butt welds. 6 Welds shall be thoroughly fused and otherwise sound throughout. Contours shall be uniform with regular even ripples. Surfaces shall not be dressed, smoothed or otherwise finished to improve their appearance, except as necessary to correct defects. Welds shall be free from gas pockets, oxides, slag inclusions and surface porosity, except very small pores. Oxides and slag will be permitted if widely dispersed. Welds shall be free from overlaps, undercuts and excessive convexity Internal surfaces of pipe and fittings shall be free from weld metal globules or other inward protrusions at the welded joints. C Examination of Welds. 1 Welds containing pressures 125 psi and over Perform fit -up, root pass, and final visual inspections in accordance with ASME B31 1 2. Welds containing pressures less than 125 psi. Final visual inspection in accordance with ASME B31 1 3 Inspection records. In accordance with ASME B31 1 3 03 THREADED PIPING JOINTS A. Ream all pipe to full diameter B Use pipe dope or Teflon tape on male threads of all screwed joints. C Close nipples not permitted. D Full cut threads and make up joints with no more than three threads exposed. E. Do not caulk threaded joints to stop leaks. 3 04 COPPER PIPING JOINTS SECTION 15060 PAGE 5 PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Ream thoroughly to remove all burrs. B Polish contact surfaces of fittings and pipes with emery cloth, sandpaper or steel brush, and wipe clean before fluxing male and female surfaces of joints. C Steel wool not permitted for polishing. D 95 -5 solder, lead free Bndgit or Silvabnte solder for above ground points. E. Take care to avoid burning of piping. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEDICAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL F Provide solder unions, ground point or flanged joints where necessary for access to equipment. G Coordinate installation of unslit insulation with piping installation for refrigeration piping. See section 15070 Mechanical Systems Insulation. 3 05 MECHANICAL PIPING JOINTS A. Groove pipe for mechanical grooved points in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications contained in the latest published literature. B Fabrication techniques for all mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations contained in the latest published hterature. 3 06 CAST IRON BELL AND SPIGOT PIPING JOINTS A. Make points up with lead and oakum, double- sealed elastomenc compression -type gaskets conforming to ASTM C564, or no -hub couplings, shields, and clamp assemblies. 3 07 BRAZED -TYPE WROUGHT JOINTS 3 08 UNIONS SECTION 15060 PAGE 6 PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Thoroughly clean of all grease, oil or other combustible matenals m strict accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 99 B All piping, tubing, and fittings for oxygen service prepared by the manufacturer and received sealed on the job, shall be examined internally dust pnor to assembly, and if necessary recleaned. C Scrubbing and continuous agitation of parts shall be employed where necessary to remove all deposits and ensure complete cleansing. After washing, all matenals shall be nnsed thoroughly in clean, hot water D After cleansing, exercise care in the storage and handling of all matenals, and in the condition of tools used in cutting and reaming, prevent oil or grease from being introduced into the tubing. Where such contamination is known to have occurred, the materials affected must be rewashed and then nnsed. E. All points in the pipe and tubing shall be made with brazed -type wrought fittings. All brazed connections shall be made with the type of brazing alloy specified in pipe and fittings. The joining processes shall be those recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe and the tubing and the fittings. The use of flux is prohibited in all instances. A. Provide unions at all connections to equipment and where necessary to disconnect for repairs. B Use union fittings wherever practicable to save points. C Provide dielectnc unions between iron and copper pipe. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEDICAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 09 PIPE SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEON RINGS A. Provide and locate all sleeves and inserts, coordinate with General Contractor B Provide sleeves for all mechanical piping passing through concrete floor slabs or roof slabs and concrete, masonry and tile wall construction. C Where pipe motion due to expansion and contraction or earthquake will occur, make sleeves of sufficient diameter to permit free movement of pipe. Where sleeves pass insulated pipes, size the sleeves large enough to pass the pipe only Butt insulation against the construction except for pipes requinng insulation having a vapor bamer, in which case size the sleeves large enough to pass the pipe and insulation. Check floor and wall construction finishes to determine the proper length of sleeves for various locations; make actual lengths to suit the following: 1 Terminate sleeves flush with walls, partitions and ceiling. 2 In areas where pipes are concealed, as in chases, terminate sleeves flush with floor 3 In all areas where pipes are exposed, extend sleeves 1/4 -inch above finished floor, except in rooms having floor drains, where sleeves shall be extended 3/4 -inch above floor D Fasten sleeves securely in floors, roofs and walls so that they will not become displaced when concrete is poured or when other construction is built around them. Take precautions to prevent concrete, plaster, or other materials from being forced into the space between the pipe and sleeve during construction. E. Fill annular space at pipes with fiberglass batt insulation to a compressed fit, except at fire wall, floor and roof penetrations. At fire wall, floor and roof penetrations, fill annular space at pipes with USG Intenors Inc. Thermafiber Safing insulation and 2 -inch minimum coating of Thermafiber Smoke Seal. F Provide escutcheon nngs for all exposed umnsulated pipes passing through walls, floors and ceilings. END OF SECTION 15060 SECTION 15060 PAGE 7 PIPING AND FITTINGS MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe Insulation B Duct Insulation C Equipment Insulation PART II PRODUCT 2.01 GENERAL A. Comply with NFPA 90A and 90B, UL -181 (Class 1) and UL -723, and for elastomeric material comply with ASTM E -84 -75 B Matenals shall be of the highest grade. Adhesives, sealers, vapor coatings, etc., shall be compatible with the matenals to which they are applied, and shall not corrode, soften or otherwise attack such material in either the wet or dry state. Scrap pieces of insulation shall not be used where a full section will fit. Glass fiber matenals which become wet or damaged dunng installation shall be removed and replaced with new matenals. Acceptability of a manufacturer is not to be taken as acceptability of his "usual" or "regular" accessory matenals such as facings, adhesives, etc. C Unless specified otherwise, all facings, coatings, PVC covers and other accessories shall have a fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for Flame Spread and 50 for Fuel Contributed and Smoke Developed, ratings determined by UL Standard No 723, NFPA Standard No 225 or ASTM Standard No E -84 UL label or listing, or satisfactory test results from the approved testing laboratory, shall be available to indicate that fire hazard ratings for matenals do not exceed the above amounts. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Product name and numbers listed are Owens Corning Fiberglas, Armstrong Cork Company, and Childers. B Other acceptable manufacturers are Schuller, Certain -Teed, Knaupf, or approved substitute. 2.03 HEATING WATER PIPING A. Two -Piece Fiberglas ASJ/SSL-H B Pipe Size Insulation Thickness 4 -inch and below 1 -1/2 -inch Above 4 -inch 2 -inch C Cover Fiberglas ASJ /SSL SECTION 15070 PAGE 1 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.04 REFRIGERATING PIPING 2.08 DUCTS (INTERIOR) 2.09 DUCTS (EXTERIOR) A. Rigid glass fiber board, reinforced aluminum foil face. B Insulation thickness. 2 -inch. C Density of 6 0 lb. /cu ft., with an installed R -value of 7 0 SECTION 15070 PAGE 2 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION A. Armstrong II/Anmaflex flexible closed -cell elastomenc unslit tubing. B Pipe Size Insulation Thickness 1 -inch and below 1 -inch Above 1 -inch 1 -1/2 -inch, multiple -layer C Seam joint adhesive Armstrong Adhesive #520 D Insulation coating WB Armstrong Armaflex Finish. 2.05 DOMESTIC HOT, COLD AND HOT CIRCULATING WATER PIPING AND REFRIGERATION CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING A. Two -piece Fiberglas ASJ /SSL -II. B Insulation thickness. 1 -tnch all sizes, except 1/2 -inch for cold water and condensate drain pipe. C Cover Fiberglas ASJ /SSL D At contractor's option Armstrong 1/2 -inch thick self -seal Armaflex 2000 on piping 1/2- inch thru 2 -inch pipe size. 2.06 RAINWATER LEADERS (DOWNSPOUT AND OVERFLOW) AND UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DRAINS A. Same as for cold water piping. 2.07 PIPE AND DUCT METAL JACKETING A. Childers Strap -On aluminum packet 0 016 -inch minimum thickness and 1 /2 -mch wide aluminum bands 0 02 -inch minimum thickness for pipe and ducts. B Childers aluminum 0 02 -inch minimum thickness for pipe fittings. A. Fiberglas FRK -25 faced duct wrap B Insulation thickness 2 -inch. C Thermal conductivity at 75 degrees F mean (ASTM C518) 0 3 BTU /in/h/Ft {2 }/Degrees F with an installed R -value of 5 5 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.10 VALVE AND ACCESSORY INSULATION A. Glass Fiber Insulation 1 Insulation a. Curved surfaces 10 -inch diameter and less, use premolded pipe insulation. Larger sizes, provide Owens- Corning "Pipe Wrap Insulation CertainTeed "Snap Wrap" or Knauf "Flex Wrap maximum "K" value at 75 degrees F of 0 27 Btu-inches/hr/sqft/degrees F, with factory- applied jacket. 2. Jacket a. Pnmary Jacket. All service jacket; factory applied, laminated type with off white vinyl coating, integral vapor barrier with 0 02 perm rating and 10 x 6 mesh scnm per inch, or type FRK, foil- reinforced kraft jacket with integral vapor bamer 0 02 perm rating and 10 x 6 mesh scrim per inch B Foamed Uni- Cellular Insulation. 1 Insulation. As made by Armstrong World Industries "Armaflex II" or equivalent of Rubatex or Halstead manufacturer., meetmg flame (25) and smoke (50) limitations, as specified herebefore, Submit certification of such compliance 2 Adhesive: Contact adhesive Armstrong Type 720 C Prefabricated Insulation Bats. 1 Insulation. 3 -inch thick Owens Cormng Type II glass wool or Knauf "Elevated Temperature Blanket non oiled. 2. Jacket: Tight weave, woven glass fiber cloth; Alpha Associates Type 1925 3 Accessones. Jacket sewing thread shall be glass fiber and stainless steel sewing twine. Jacket lacing hooks shall be brass or stainless steel Bergen hooks. Lacing shall be copper wire. 4 Lagging. Finish Compound Benjamin Foster 30-30 lagging adhesive and 30 -42 lagging adhesive. 2.11 RIGID INSERTS A. Manville Thermo -12 pipe insulation, cork, or shaped wood. PART III EXECUTION 3 01 PREPARATION SECTION 15070 PAGE 3 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION A. Do not install covering before piping, ductwork, and equipment have been tested and approved. B Ensure surface is clean and dry pnor to installation. Ensure insulation is dry before and dunng application. C Ensure insulation is continuous through inside walls except at fire walls penetrations. D Deliver matenal to job site in onginal non broken factory packaging, with manufacturer's labels. E. Perform work at ambient and equivalent temperatures as recommended by the manufacturer MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 02 PIPING SECTION 15070 PAGE 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION A. Do not apply insulation to connections, joints, welds, flanges, or screwed points until pipe tests are completed. B Do not apply insulation over flanged joints until piping has been brought up to operating temperature and flange bolts have been fully tightened. C Do not insulate flanges, unions, strainers, flexible connections and expansion joints on any piping, except domestic cold water D Where piping supports pass around the outside of insulation with a vapor barner, provide ngid inserts. Repair damage to vapor bamer resulting from installation of the inserts by sealing with a vapor bamer pressure sensitive tape. E. Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions. F Provide adequate support for insulation on vertical pipe to prevent slipping. G Insulate test thermometer and industnal thermometer wells over their extenor length. Insulate thermometer wells protruding above finish pipe or equipment insulation. Neatly taper insulation away from top of well, use a 1 -1/2 -inch minimum thickness of insulation on thermometer walls. Contractor's option to use prefabricated insulation bat. I. Piping, fittings, valves and accessones located outdoors, and where indicated on the drawings cover with metal jacketing. J Insulate refrigeration outside the building. Refrigeration piping insulation outside the building, not covered with metal jacket, apply Armstrong Annaflex Finish on elastomeric insulation. Do not insulate hot gas pipe. M. Seal butt points of insulation with pressure sensitive vapor bamer tape. Seal exposed ends of insulation with Benjamin- Foster 30 -36, and at 21 -foot intervals on continuous runs of pipe. Use Armstrong #520 adhesive on Annaflex II and Armstrong 2000 products. Apply insulation with all sides and end points butted tightly N Valves, fittings and accessones. 1 Valves, strainers. Insulate with removable prefabricated bats. 2. Fittings Insulate with covenng same as pipe insulation material or equal in temperature resistance and thickness to that of connecting pipe. 2. Fittings, valves and accessones exposed in rooms cover with Zeston PVC covers, installed in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. O Calcium silicate insulation. 1 Wire in place with 16 -gauge black annealed wire, 12- inches on center Stagger joints on multi- layered applications. 2. Field apply jackets in accordance with manufacturer's directions. P Roof Drains. Adhere flexible insulation with adhesive applied to the entire surface of the exiting dram inside the building. Butt insulation and seal points and breaks with 4 -inch wide stnps of ASJ sealed with vapor barner adhesive. Q Downspout Piping: Insulate all exposed and concealed existing downspout piping. If coupling for grooved -end pipe is used on piping, insulate as specified for flanges with PVC fitting cover S At handicapped lavatones and countertop patient lavatones, insulate tailpiece, trap, trap arm, and hot water supply with same insulation as hot water piping, and cover with Zeston jackets. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 03 DUCTS SECTION 15070 PAGE 5 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION A. Insulate return ducts in spaces not heated to at least 65 degrees F and areas outside the insulated building envelope. Insulate all supply ducts. B Intenor ducts Adhere insulation to metal with 4 -inch wide stnps of insulation bonding adhesive at 8- inches o c. Additionally secure insulation to the bottom of rectangular ductwork wider than 24- inches with Miracle surface anchors or metal stick clips 18- inches on center Round duct over 12- inches in diameter spiral wind over insulation 16- gauge black annealed wire Wrap insulation firmly on the ductwork with all circumferential points butted and longitudinal points overlapped a minimum of 2- inches. Secure overlap and 2 -inch facing flange with 9/16 flare -door staples 6- inches o c. Tape with 3 -inch -wide foil reinforced Kraft tape. All pin penetrations or punctures in facing shall also be taped. C Insulate all access panels in ducts with vapor barrier insulation same as duct insulations. Seal edges of insulation on access panel and finish openings to assure accessibility D Lined ducts need not be wrapped. E. Line all ducts installed outside the insulated building envelope. F Insulate with duct insulation ngid fiberglass round duct when not installed in a ceiling return plenum space, or not within the insulated building envelope. G Install aluminum jackets on all insulated ductwork above the roof and elsewhere where exposed to weather All jacket points to overlap 2 -inch minimum. All points shall be sealed with weather proof silicone sealant. Honzontal joints shall lap downward to shed water Provide aluminum straps at each circumferential lap and on 18 -inch maximum centers with straps tightened to hold jacket tightly to insulation surfaces. 3 04 EQUIPMENT, VALVE AND ACCESSORY A. Application 1 Prefabncated Insulation Bats Insulate the following: a. Domestic Cold Water Flanges, Valves, Unions, Strainers, Flexible Connections and Expansion Joints B Prefabricated Insulation Bats 1 Matenals Cover all surfaces with bats of glass fiber within glass cloth jackets and with outer vapor barrier finish, made and shaped to fit irregular contour surfaces of the valves. Thickness shall be same as on adjacent piping. 2 Construction of Bats. Construct bats with glass wool, fully enclose all sides and edges, within woven glass fiber cloth. Jacket shall be sewn with glass fiber and stainless steel sewing twine, and rolled in blind seams, with bats compressed to 1 1/2 -inch thickness. Attach stainless steel Bergen hooks on 3 -inch centers around all edges of bats on top surfaces. 4 Attachment. Fit the bats to the surface, with edges overlapping adjacent insulation at least 3 -inch, and lace between hooks with stainless steel wire lacing. END OF SECTION 15070 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEDICAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe hangers and supports. B Expansion devices. C Equipment bases and supports. 1 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Seismic Restraints. 1 Provide seismic protection for all piping and ductwork in accordance with the most current edition of the SMACNA publication "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems Hazard Level "A." 2 Provide seismic protection for all equipment in accordance with the Uniform Building Code, for the Port Angeles area. 3 Overturning force calculations for equipment shall be prepared and submitted and shall be used to determine anchor bolt size and locations. PART II PRODUCT 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Pipe hangers and supports 1 ITT Grinnell, Elcen, Grabler, Kindorf, Fee Mason, Urustrut, Superstrut or approved substitute. B Expansion Devices, Guides and Anchors. 1 Adsco, Advance Thermal Systems, ITT Gnnnell, Keflex, Elcen, Aeroquip Barco, or approved substitute. 2 02 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS SECTION 15090 PAGE 1 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Steel Structural Clamps. 1 Beam clamps, brackets, channel clamps and bar joist clips select to suit structural system and meet loading recommendations of manufacturer B Ceiling Inserts 1 3 -inch and smaller pipe, Grinnell Fig. 285 2. 3 -1/2 -inch and larger pipe, Gnnnell Fig. 281 3 Multiple pipes on trapeze, Gnnnell Fig. 285 or Fig. 281, selected for maximum weight of piping. C Wall Inserts. 1 Unistrut P -3200 series inserts for concrete walls. 2 Urustrut P -1800 senes inserts for bnck walls. 3 Unistrut P -1000 channels with P -1045 and P -1047 fittings for frame and block walls. D Attachment into existing concrete or masonry wall. Self -drill type Red Head, Phillips Anchors or approved substitute. Do not use powder dnven inserts. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEDICAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.03 INTERMEDIATE ATTACHMENTS SECTION 15090 PAGE 2 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Hanger Rods. 1 Continuous threaded rod, do not use chain, wire or perforated strap 2. Maximum hanger rod loading as follows. Rod Size, Maximum Load, Diameter in Inches Pounds 3/8 610 1/2 1130 5/8 1810 3/4 2710 7/8 3 770 1 4960 B Trapeze Pipe Racks. Fabricate from structural angles or channels or Umstrut channels to suit weight of piping to be supported. Size for a minimum safety factor of 5 C Hanger Straps Galvanized bar steel, 3/4 -inch wide by 18 gauge for 2 -1/2 -inch and smaller pipe; 7/8 -inch wide by 16 gauge for 3 -inch to 4 -inch pipe; 1 -1/8 -inch wide by 12 gauge for 6 -inch pipe size. 2.04 PIPE ATTACHMENTS A. Pipe Rings. 1 Steel pipe and cast iron soil pipe. 2 -inch and smaller, adjustable ring Grinnell #269 2 -1/2 -inch and larger, adjustable clevis Gnnnell #260 2. Copper Pipe. 2 -inch and smaller, adjustable ring Grinnell #CT -269 2 -1/2 -inch and larger, adjustable clevis Gnnnell #CT -65 3 Finish. Black for black steel pipe and cast iron pipe; galvanized for galvanized steel pipe; copper plated for copper pipe. 4 Application. Use only on piping systems where axial movement from thermal expansion is less than 1/2 -inch. 5 For Hanger Straps. Elcen Figure 94 or Gnnnell Figure 97 with flattened -end bolt through cast iron socket; or hinged type, Modern Hanger Corporation No 20, Elcen Figure 104, or Gnnnell Figure 108 Pipe nngs shall be electro galvanized, prime painted or cadmium- plated. B Pipe Rolls 1 Suspended pipe Adjustable clevis pipe rolls, Grinnell Fig. 181 2 Racked pipe. Pipe roll stand, Grinnell Fig. 271 3 Application. Use on piping systems where axial movement from thermal expansion is 1/2 -inch or greater C Pipe Clamps. 1 Vertical piping Unistrut P -1332 shelf bracket, Unistrut P -1100 channel and Unistrut P -1100 series pipe clamps. Copper pipe clamps for copper pipe 2 Honzontal racked piping: Unistrut P -1109 senes or Unistrut P -2024C senes clamps for Unistrut channel pipe racks. 3 Application. Use on piping systems without any thermal expansion. D Vertical Pipe Supports. 1 Steel and iron pipe. Gnnnell #261 galvanized. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEDICAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15090 PAGE 3 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 2 Plastic pipe Grinnell #261C E. Pipe Slides. Elcen or Grinnell manufacturer; reinforced teflon slide material (3/32 -inch minimum thickness) bonded to steel, highly finished steel or stainless steel contact surfaces to resist corrosion, 60 80 psi mimmum thickness; attachment to pipe and framing by welding. 2.05 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide supports, pads, bases and their attachments for mechanical work to be furnished or installed. Submit drawings to the Architect for approval. B Provide concrete pads rotating mechanical machinery, and for equipment where indicated on the drawings. Extend pads 6- inches beyond machine base in all directions with 3/4 -inch top edge chamfered. Insert #4 6 -inch -long steel dowel rods into floors to anchor pads. Submit shop drawings of pads to the Architect for approval. PART III EXECUTION 3 01 HANGER SPACING FOR HORIZONTAL PIPING A. Steel Pipe Maximum hanger spacing and mimmum hanger rod diameters as follows. 1/2 and 3/4 -inch pipe 1 and 1 -1/4 -inch pipe 1 -1/2 -inch pipe 2 -inch pipe 2 -1/2 and 3 -inch pipe 4 -inch pipe 5 -foot span 7 -foot span 9 -foot span 10 -foot span 12 -foot span 14 -foot span 3/8 -inch rod 3/8 -inch rod 3/8 -inch rod 3/8 -inch rod 1/2 -inch rod 5/8 -inch rod B Copper Pipe Maximum hanger spacing and minimum hanger rod diameters as follows. 1/2 -inch pipe 5 -foot span 3/8 -inch rod 1 -inch pipe 7 -foot span 3/8 -inch rod 1 -1/4 and 1 -1/2 -inch 8 -foot span 3/8 -inch rod 2 and 2 -1/2 -inch pipe 9 -foot span 1/2 -inch rod 3 and 4 -inch pipe 10 -foot span 1/2 -inch rod C Cast Iron Soil Pipe. 1 One hanger for each pipe section, close to hub, maximum hanger spacing of 5 -feet, except for pipe exceeding 5 -feet in length may be supported at not more than 10- foot intervals within 18- inches of joint. 2 Hubless and compression points at every other joint except when developed length exceeds 4 -feet, then at each joint. Provide supports at each honzontal branch. D Provide additional hangers or supports at concentrated loads such as valves, to maintain alignment and prevent sagging. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEDICAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL END OF SECTION 15090 SECTION 15090 PAGE 4 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES E. Vertical Piping Supports. 1 Support piping at each floor 2. Provide intermediate supports to prevent excessive pipe movement. F Piping crossing over excavated and backfilled areas, provide precast concrete beam supported by the building structure and undisturbed earth. G Provide a mimmum of 2 hangers per pipe section for grooved joint pipe. 3 02 INSTALLATION OF PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide piping supports and hangers with a means of adjustment for leveling, grading of piping and cold spnng movements. B Provide sufficient hanger rod lengths to limit rod displacement from thermal expansion to 4 degrees from vertical. C Size pipe nngs and clamps to pass around the outside of the piping insulation. Provide Gnnnell Fig. 160 pipe covenng protection saddles at pipe nngs where pipe insulation does not include a vapor bamer Provide Gunnell Fig. 167 insulation protection shields at pipe nngs where pipe insulation includes a vapor barrier Provide ngid inserts as required to prevent crushing of insulation. D Install vertical piping supports to allow for pipe movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. E. Do not hang pipe from other pipe F Provide special hangers and supports for vibration control in cntical areas. See Vibration Isolation, Section 15060 G Install steel backing in walls as required to support piping hung from steel stud walls. H. Provide bored, drilled or reamed holes for all bolting to miscellaneous structural metals, frames or for mounts or supports. Flame cut, punched or hand sewn holes will not be accepted. I. Install anchor bolts for all mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as required. Tightly fit and clamp base supported equipment anchor bolts at all equipment support points. Provide locknuts where equipment is hung. 1 a 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15100 PAGE 1 VALVES PART I GENERAL 1 01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide valves and cocks as shown on the drawings and where required for operation and maintenance. PART II PRODUCT 2 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide valves of same manufacturer throughout where possible. B Provide valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly marked on outside of body 2.02 GENERAL A. Provide valves suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints. Use pipe size valves, unless indicated otherwise. B Thread pipe sizes 2- inches and smaller C Flange pipe sizes 2- 1 /2- inches and larger D Solder or screw to solder adapters for copper tubing. E. Use grooved body valves with mechanical grooved jointed piping. 2.03 GATE VALVES A. 2 -Inch and Smaller Bronze, wedge disc, screwed bonnet, screwed ends, non rising stem, 125 psi, S W.P B 2 -1/2 -Inch to 4 -Inch. Iron body, bronze trimmed, wedge disc, bolted bonnet, screwed ends, non-nsing stem, 125 psi S W.P C 4 -Inch and Larger Iron body, bronze tnmmed, wedge disc, bolted bonnet, flanged ends, non -using stem, 125 psi, S W.P 2.04 GLOBE VALVES A. 3 -Inch and Smaller Bronze, composition disc, for 300 degrees F, union bonnet, screwed ends, 150 psi, S W.P B Larger than 3 -inch. Use butterfly valve. 2 05 CHECK VALVES A. Honzontal 2 -Inch and Smaller Bronze body and disc, lift check, union bonnet, screwed ends, 150 psi, S W.P B Honzontal 2 -1/2 -Inch to 4 -Inch. Bronze body, bronze disc, lift check, union bonnet, screwed ends, 125 psi, S W.P C Vertical 1 -1/4 -Inch and Smaller Bronze body and bronze guided disc, lift check, screwed ends, 125 psi, S W.P D Vertical 1 -1/2 -Inch Through 3 -Inch. Semi-steel body, bronze trim, guided spnng, silent lift check, center guided 125 psi, S W.P MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL E. 4 -Inch and Larger Iron body, bronze tnmmed, guided spring, silent check, globe type, flanged ends, 125 psi S W.P 2.06 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. SECTION 15100 PAGE 2 VALVES 2 -Inch to 6 -Inch. Lug wafer factory- tested, bubble -tight to 150 psig, tapped -lug, ductile or gray iron body, top bushing, extended neck, and Buna -N sleeve for 250 degrees F Other wetted parts shall be Type 316 stainless steel or aluminum bronze. Valve suitable for operation with up to 2- inches of pipe insulation, l0- position lever operating handle, with tooth plate for shutoff service and infinitely adjustable handle with lock nut and memory stop 2.07 BALL VALVES A. 2 -Inch and Smaller Bronze body brass ball, teflon seats, screwed ends, 300 psi. B 3 -Inch and Larger Use butterfly valve. 2 08 GAUGE COCKS A. Brass, 1/4 -inch, 1000 psi, S.P W all brass. Trence No 865 2.09 METERING BALANCING VALVES A. Bell Gossett "Circuit Setter or Taco "Circuit Setter" equivalent; valve same size as connected piping, with memory stop and connection taps. Furnish setting instructions and curves. When manufacturer's largest catalogued metering balancing valve is smaller than the size required, provide a Barco or Gerand ventun type flow tube and butterfly valve as specified herein. 2.10 BALANCING COCKS A. Brass body 300 psi W 0 G 250 degrees F, indicating dial, locking balancing device, with wheel handle. Threaded ends for steel piping, sweat union for copper piping. B Where manufacturer's largest catalogued valve is smaller than the required size, provide butterfly valve. 2.11 DRAIN VALVES A. Globe valves, angle pattern, bronze body composition disc, screwed bonnet, nsmg stem, 200 psi W 0 G 3/4 -inch, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Where not shown piped to drain, provide capped hose adapter 2.12 REFRIGERANT LINE VALVES A. 7/8 -inch and Smaller Diaphragm packless -type Supenor, Henry, Kerotest or Mueller; larger sizes, either diaphragm packless type or Metrex with 0-Ring, teflon seat and seal cap Provide where shown on the drawings or where required by codes and ordinances. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to avoid damage to valves. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2 13 VALVE SPECIFICATION CHART ABBREVIATED INDEX CRANE BELL GOSSETT= WALWORTH KENNEDY STOCKHAM HAMMOND NIBCO MILWAUKEE KEYSTONE SARCO NORRIS MUELLER GRINNELL ITT VICTAULIC Type of Valve GATE (2 -inch smaller) GLOBE (3- inches smaller) (1 -1/2 thru 3- inches) BUTTERFLY Lever -Oper CRANE B &G WALW KENN STOCK HAMM NIBCO MILW KEY SARCO NORR MUEL G/ITT VIC 2.14 VALVE SPECIFICATION CHART LIFT CHECK (VERT (1 -1 /4- inches smaller) Model Number CRANE 438, WALW 4,STOCK B -110; HAMM 1B645, NIBCO T -123 MILW 1105M, G/ITT 3000 CRANE 7, WALW 95, STOCK B22, HAMM 1B413, NIBCO T235YW, G/ITT 3240 LIFT CHECK (HORIZ.) (2- inches smaller) CRANE 27, WALW 97, STOCK B- 322 -B, MILW 544 WALW 75 NIBCO T -480• MILW 548 G/ITT 3600 WALW 75 CRANE 23N- HRB -T92, STOCK LD31 -DS3 or STOCK LD712 -DS3, B or N HAMM B, NIBCO NL -082, KEY 228, NORRIS R3310- 17SS -F VIC 300; G/ITT 8000 SECTION 15100 PAGE 3 VALVES MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL BALL (2- inches smaller) BALANCING COCK (2 -inch smaller) to steel pipe (2- 1 /2- inches larger) to steel pipe (1 -inch smaller) to copper pipe (1-1/4-inches larger) to copper pipe 2.15 VALVE OPERATORS SECTION 15100 CRANE 9302, WALW 575, MILW BA -300 STOCK S -127, NIBCO T590; G/ITT 1700; MILW BB -2 (not for steam) (Butter ball) B G -CB, SARCO W -PP -G Use Butterfly SARCO W -SM -G Use Butterfly PART III EXECUTION 3 01 GENERAL A. Install all valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. END OF SECTION 15100 PAGE 4 VALVES A. Provide one (1) plug cock wrench for every ten (10) plug cocks sized 2- inches and smaller, minimum of one. Provide each plug cock sized 2 -1/2- inches and larger with a wrench, with set screw 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 s 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 Description. Work specified in this Section includes all plumbing fixtures, complete with tnm. 11 1 02 Codes and Regulations. Meet or exceed the following ANSI Standards. Fittings A112.18.IM-79 Supports A112.6.IM -79 Vitreous China Fixtures A112.19.2M -82 SECTION 15400 PAGE 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 1 03 Obtain exact location and mounting heights of fixtures from details on the architectural plans. 1 04 Where trim or rough is not specified, furnish all necessary for the completion of the fob, and of the same quality as elsewhere specified. 105 MATERIALS A. Tnm. 1 Material Brass, except faucet handles may be Federal Specification grade zinc or specified otherwise, all exposed metal parts, chrome plated over nickel. 2 Escutcheon. At each point where pipe or other fitting enters the wall or cabinet back at a fixture. B Acceptable manufacturers Amencan Standard, Kohler, Eljer, J.R. Smith, Zurn, Wade, Josam, Elkay, Just, Chicago, T S Brass, Powers, Leonard, Speakman, Symmons, Delta, Church, Olsonite. C Unless specified otherwise, provide white fixtures. D Flush valves, Sloan Royal Quiet Flush pattern. Vacuum breaker and stop valve required. E Stops. In all water connections to all lavatones and sinks; threaded inlet; loose key pattern with slueld, polished finish where exposed, rough where concealed, Bridgeport Brass or Brasscraft manufacturer For brass thru -wall nipples, see "Domestic Water Piping" F Exposed Supplies. 1/2 -inch outer diameter tubing; non convoluted, one end to have a brazed or formed end for compression joint. G Provide stainless steel self -nm for all countertop sinks. H. Provide wall carrier fittings for all wall mounted fixtures. Where special wall camers are not specified, provide camer or hanger clips furnished as standard for the particular fixture. I. Provide tnm as specified and connect to equipment funushed by others. Where not otherwise specified, provide 17 gauge tubing chrome plated P- traps. J Where not otherwise specified, provide 17 gauge tubing chrome plated P- traps. K. Lavatory supplies. Speedway #R1720A lockshield -loose key L Deck -type supplies. Speedway #R1720K lockshield -loose key M. Lavatories Senes numbers for lavatones specified hereinafter refer to a style and to one of the drilling patterns required. Select fixture to have exact drilling to suit specified faucets. Lavatones shall be equipped with flow restnctors which limit the flow of hot MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART II PRODUCT 2.01 FIXTURE SCHEDULE P1 -1 Lavatory oval counter handicapned Fixture Elkay #LLVR -1916 stainless steel, oval Faucet Chicago Faucets #786 -FC Grid Strainer Elkay #LK -464 C.P with tailpiece Insulate trap and cover with Zeston jacket. P1 -2 Lavatory wall mount handicapped Fixture Kohler #K -2023 Faucet. Chicago #786 -FC Gnd Strainer Kohler #K7715 with tailpiece Insulate trap and cover with Zeston jacket. Existing Lavatory Toilet Room 19B Faucet: Chicago #786 -FC P2 -1 Water closet Handicap Fixture. Kohler Model Kingston Lite (1 5 gallon flush) Valve: Sloan #BPW- 1000 -1 5 with bedpan washer Seat Olsomte #95 -SS Existing Water Closets Seat. Olsonite #95 -SS SECTION 15400 PAGE 2 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM water to the maximum allowed by the Washington State Energy Code. For handicapped countertop lavatones, the centerline of the faucet drilling shall be no more than 17 -inch from the front edge of the counter per State of Washington Handicap Code. 1 Provide stream straighteners or flow control fittings on all lavatones. Aerators shall not be provided. P4 -1 Mon sink. floor corner tvne. Fixture Kohler #K -6710 Faucet: Chicago Faucet 897 -369 -VE with wall brace, vacuum breaker, pailhook, hose thread outlet, 5 -feet hose and wall hose bracket Gnd Strainer #803 -0630 for 3" outlet, with tailpiece Accessones. Kohler #K -8940, coated wire nm guard MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15400 PAGE 3 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM P5 -1 Tub island Fixture. Kohler #K -12590 Faucet: Kohler #K- 7034 -2A, shampoo fitting, vacuum breaker, hose, spray nozzle and hook, spout. Dram. Kohler #K -7150, pop -up P5 -2 Shower stall handicaoned Enclosure. Crane Model #3636S Shower valve. Powers #L -425 Shower head. Powers #6 -V, hand shower head, chrome- plated metal hose with 24" slide bar, vacuum breaker Gnd Strainer D -1 Floor dram P5 -3 Shower stall Enclosure. Kohler Model Sonata Shower valve Powers #L -425 Shower head. Powers #6 -V, hand shower head, chrome- plated metal hose with 24" slide bar, vacuum breaker D -1 Floor drain Existing Shower Stalls Shower valve: Powers #L -425 Shower head. Powers #6 -V, hand shower head, chrome- plated metal hose with 24" slide bar, vacuum breaker P7 -1 Stainless Steel Sink counter Fixture Elkay #PSR -1716 Faucet: Chicago Faucet #888 with #217 4" handles Gnd Strainer Elkay #LK -8 D -1 Floor drain J.R. Smith 2005 -A, chrome- plated Funnel drain ice maker drains J.R. Smith 3820 with P -Trap Cleanouts Floors. J.R. Smith 4020 Senes, polished bronze Walls. J.R. Smith 4422 Senes, chrome plated Water hammer arrestor J.R. Smith Hydrotrol, size per manufacturer's directions MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART III EXECUTION 3 01 WALL HUNG FIXTURE CARRIER 3 02 FIXTURE AND ACCESSORY LOCATIONS SECTION 15400 PAGE 4 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM A. All fixtures except lavatones and sinks with stanchions and water closets shall be provided with back -up plates built into the wall and embedded bolts attached thereto B Lavatones and sinks with stanchions shall be installed with hangers built into the wall. Anchor rectangular tubing stanchions base support to the floor slab with anchor bolts and attach the stanchions to the wall framing above the fixture. Provide anchor bolts for all manufacturer provided locations in base support. C Wall -hung water closet shall have wall surfacing extended across face of wall over the fixture hangers with sleeves at fixture hanger bolts; plastic spacers not allowed. A. The plumbing fixture heights and accessory locations listed below are standard. Not all items described will necessarily be employed on this project. Certain combinations or conditions may require changes. Changes must be referred to the Architect for specific instructions before proceeding with that portion of the work. In the event special details or elevations are drawn for one or more items, the special detail shall govern for those specific conditions. Standard Handicapped Lavatones, nm 33 -inch 34 -inch Lavatories, nm, wrist action 34 -inch 33 -inch Closets, top of nm 15 -inch 17 -inch Shower valves 42 -inch 40 -inch to valve centerline (head adjustable) B Heights for lavatories and toilets are from finish floor line to top of nm. Verify width of toilet stalls and locate toilets on center line of each stall unless shown otherwise. Venfy with Architect before installation. 3 03 PLUMBING CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OWNER OR UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS A. Plumbing Equipment 1 Connect equipment and/or fixtures requinng plumbing connections. 2 Provide any necessary traps, tailpieces, valves and faucets for equipment or fixtures. 3 Provide the waste size necessary for drainage of the fixture or equipment and roughed -in as called for on the approved shop drawings. Minimum waste not less than 1 -1/2 -inch pipe. 4 Provide water with an accessible shutoff valve in the pipe at each fixture or equipment. On equipment with quick opening valves, provide water hammer arrestors. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15400 PAGE 5 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 5 Exposed piping: Exposed piping in finished areas chrome- plated. Keep to a minimum exposed piping. 6 Special equipment: For equipment installed and connected by others, provide floor drains and valved and capped water lines, or capped waste connections as shown on the drawings. 7 Provide thermometers, tempenng valves, aquastats and control valves necessary for the operation or adjustment of equipment not supplied as part of the equipment. 3 04 FIXTURE SEAL A. Seal fixture edges against walls and countertops with a narrow, uniform width, fillet bed of sealant, General Electnc type SCS1202 Series or equal. Color as approved by the Architect. Sealant applied after surfaces have been completely cleaned and dried, bonded to fixture and to wall or countertop 3 05 MISCELLANEOUS A. Handicap lavatones, insulate trap and cover with Zeston jacket. 3 06 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Install exact sizes selected from manufacturer's tables to match branch pipe sizes, fixture units of attached fixtures and equipment and to suit system pressure expected at point of installation. Attach to tee in piping in all cases. Placement and connections shall be per ANSI A112.26 1, with the exception that a water hammer arrester is not required on a branch line which has only a single fixture unless there is a line mounted water solenoid valve in the branch line. END OF SECTION 15400 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 WORK INCLUDED A. Hot, cold, and hot water circulating piping system, connection to fixtures and equipment. PART II PRODUCT 2.01 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS (See Section 15060) 2 02 VALVES (See Section 15100) 2.03 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES (See Section 15090) PART III EXECUTION 3 01 TESTING 3 02 DISINFECTING END OF SECTION 15410 SECTION 15410 PAGE 1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS A. Upon completion of roughing -in and before setting fixtures, test hot and cold water system at 150 p s.i. hydrostatic. Hold test for a minimum of tlurty (30) minutes. B If a portion of piping is to be concealed before finishing, this portion shall be tested separately C If test shows leak or defect, repair by remaking with new matenal, and retest. A. Flush lines after testing; minimum flushing velocity 2.5- feet -per second. B Disinfect lines after flushing to chlonne residuals of not less than 50 parts per million and allow to stand for 24- hours. Open and close valves to assure complete chlonnation. After disinfection, flush and refill the pipe line. MAHLUMvM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART GENERAL 1 01 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 15420 PAGE 1 SOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM A. Soil, waste and vent piping and downspout, overflow piping systems, and connection to fixtures and equipment within 5 -feet outside the building wall. 1 02 Code. All plumbing shall conform to the 1991 Uniform Plumbing Code of the IAPMO, as amended by Local Junsdiction s Ordinances. PART II PRODUCT 2.01 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS (See Section 15060) 2.02 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES (See Section 15090) 2 03 VENTS A. Vent piping shall be same material as soil and waste piping. B Flash and counterflash vents under 3 -inch with 4 -pound sheet lead or use adjustable roof flashing of galvanized steel with lead caulking ring. Flash 3 -inch vents and larger vents with "Stoneman" #1100 -7 flashing assembly with vandal proof cast iron counterflashing sleeve. 2.04 CLEANOUTS (See Section 15400) PART III EXECUTION 3 01 INSTALLATION A. PIPING 1 Install all horizontal sanitary, drainage, downspout and vent piping with a muumum slope of 1/4 -inch per foot of length. 2. Install piping in suspended ceiling areas, to be above the finished ceiling height called for on the Architectural drawings. 3 Make flashing permanently watertight. 4 Provide cleanouts the same size as pipe, except that cleanouts larger than 4 -inch not required. 5 Provide cleanouts in soil and waste pipes with floor or wall plates as required, flush with finished wall or floor Provide cleanouts in accordance with Uniform Plumbing Code "Drainage System" chapter, in vertical waste pipe at each sink immediately below trap arm and where shown on the drawings. 6 Provide vent for each trap, unless noted otherwise. 7 Terminate vents above the roof at least 10- feet -0 -inch from any opening to the building. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 02 TESTING SECTION 15420 PAGE 2 SOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM A. Plug all openings and fill the entire system with water to highest vent stack above roof. If the system is tested in sections, no section shall be tested with less than a 10 -feet head of water Hold test for 4- hours. B Repair joints and replace defective fittings or pipe, and retest. C Final test may be required by either the Plumbing Inspector or Engineer using 2- ounces of oil of peppermint introduced into each line or stack, or as required by ordinances. D Records. The Contractor shall keep a record of each test, initialed by test witnesses, in a log book which is available on site for inspection, copies delivered to the Architect at job completion. END OF SECTION 15420 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 15490 PAGE 1 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS A. General Conditions and other specifications as shown on drawing apply to all work of this section. 102 SUMMARY A. Section includes piping, valves, alarms, auxiliary devices, connection to existing systems, installation and testing requirements for medical gas systems including, but not limited to, the following: 1 Oxygen System 2. Medical Vacuum System 1 03 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS The following references and standards are hereby made a part of this Section and Work shall conform to applicable requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings. A. Work shall comply with the following: 1 NFPA 99 1996 Edition, Standard for Health Care Facilities. 2. CGA Pamphlet P -2 1, Medical/Surgical Vacuum Systems. 3 CGA Pamphlet G-4 1, Cleaning equipment for Oxygen Service. 4 CGA Pamphlet G -7, Compressed Air for Human Respiration. 5 CGA Pamphlet G -7 1, commodity specification for Air 6 CGA Pamphlet G -8 1, Installation of Nitrous Oxide Systems. 7 CGA Pamphlet G -10 1 commodity Specification for Nitrogen. 8 ANSI/AWS A5 8, Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing. Construe nothing in these plans and specifications to permit work not complying with these regulations. Regulations are applicable to oxygen and medical vacuum B Comply with the latest edition of all applicable standards, including: AGA Amencan Gas Association ANSI Amencan National Standard Institute ASME Amencan Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Standards for Testing and Materials ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers AWWA American Water Works Association CS PS Commercial Standards and Product Standards CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials NBS National Bureau of Standards NCPWB National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau NFPA National Fire Protection Association CAL -OSHA Occupational Safety Health Administration PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute UL Underwriter's Laboratones C Minimum Requirements 1 The requirements of authorities and listed standards shall represent minimum acceptable work. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 04 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SECTION 15490 PAGE 2 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS A. Review the construction Services Agreement, General Conditions and Division One, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to this Section. 1 05 WORK RESPONSIBILITIES A. Site Conditions: 1 Examine all the drawings and the specifications, survey the existing site conditions, and include all necessary allowances in bid proposal. 2 Resolve all conflicts with code requirements, site conditions, the work of other trades, or other mechanical contractors. 3 Venfy the location of all existing utilities prior to construction and protect from damage. 4 Pay all costs incurred due to damage of existing utilities or other facilities. B Locations. 1 Drawings are diagrammatic and size and locations are generally shown to scale. Make use of data in all Contract Documents, and informational documents, and venfy this information against field conditions. 2. The drawings indicate the required size and point of termination of the pipes. Install pipe with all necessary offsets and fittings to conform to the structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom, maintain required accessibility, and satisfy the requirements of the governing codes and standards of good practice. 3 The architectural drawings and specifications take precedence over the mechanical drawings for location of headwall casework, equipment, lights, diffusers, plumbing fixtures, etc. Contractor shall refer to the drawings, specifications, and review shop drawings for all work, in order to coordinate his mechanical work with the other work of the project. 4 Bnng discrepancies between different drawings, between drawings and actual field conditions or between drawings and specification, promptly to the attention of the Architect for decision. C Responsibility 1 Provide complete functioning systems and include all labor, matenal and associated tools and transportation required for the system to operate safely and satisfactorily 2. Provide all work indicated on the drawings whether or not specifically mentioned m the specifications. 3 Coordinate the installation of medical gas items with the schedules for work of other trades and other contractors to prevent delays in total work. Assume responsibility for any cooperative work which must be altered due to lack of proper supervision or failure to make proper provisions in time. 4 Obtain and pay for all permits, fees and inspections. 1 06 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. Final Review Request a final review prior to system acceptance after• 1 Completion of the installation of all systems required under the Contract Documents. 2 Submission and acceptance of operating and maintenance data. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 Completion of identification program. 4 Completion of cleaning. 5 Satisfactory operation of all systems for a penod of one week. B Acceptance shall be contingent on. 1 Completion of final review and correction of all deficiencies. 2. Satisfactory completion of the acceptance tests which shall demonstrate compliance with all performance and technical requirements of the Contract Documents. 3 Submission of As -built drawings. PART II PRODUCT 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Chemetron, Oxiquip, or Omeda. 2.02 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS (See Section 15060) 2.03 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES (See Section 15090) 2.04 QUICK CONNECT RECESSED WALL OUTLETS A. Outlets. Medical gas wall outlets shall be gas specific for the services indicated. All outlets shall be UL listed, CSA certified and meet NFPA -99 Standard. A complete outlet shall consist of a gas specific rough -in assembly for installation before walls are finished and a matching gas specific finishing assembly consisting of a gas specific finishing assembly consisting of a gas- specific latch valve assembly and coverplate for installation after walls are finished. Outlets shall be factory assembled single type wall outlets, using DISS type connection hardware. Confirm DISS type with hospital prior to ordenng. 2.05 AREA/ZONE VALVES SECTION 15490 PAGE 3 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS A. General Recess valves in wall boxes constructed of extruded aluminum having an anodized window frame with mitered welded corners, shatter resistant easily removable window with emergency pull nng, appropriately labeled. A closed valve prevents the installation of the window B Valves Bolted union ball type with Type K copper tubing extensions, bronze swing away type body, brass or bronze ball, Buna -N seat and stem seals, quarter turn handles, and a locking plate. Valves shall be designed for vacuum and working pressure up to 400 psi. Valves shall be factory cleaned for oxygen service. Provide an extension on the outlet side with a line pressure monitonng gauge located within the box. Color code and label each valve to identify its service. C Multiple Valves. Housed within a single box. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.05 AREA/ZONE ALARMS SECTION 15490 PAGE 4 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS A. Area/Zone Alarms. Shall be recessed, UL and CSA listed, audio visual, closed circuit, self- monitonng, solid state type with plug -in circuit boards, integral 120/28 5 volt step down transformer, pressure sensor switches, and full range line pressure gauges. Open circuit alarms which do not monitor alarm signal wiring integnty will not be acceptable. Area/zone alarms shall be provided per NFPA 99 B Rough -in Assembly Provide self sealing check valves for easy removal of finish assembly to facilitate servicing without system shut down. C Electrical Work: 120 volt, 60 Hz power provided under Division 16 Provide medical gas alarm and interlock signal winng electncal work under this Section, refer to Drawings. D Provide one digital area alarm panel sized for oxygen, medical vacuum and one future module. Panels shall be recess wall mounted facing into the control room. Alarm panels shall be modular design and have one LED to indicate each normal/abnormal condition. Each gas monitored shall have an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) to continuously indicate actual pressure. The control module will have a test switch and an alarm silence switch. In the event of high or low pressure or vacuum in the services being monitored, the specific visual indicator will become illuminated and the alarm buzzer will sound. The visual indicator will remain illuminated until the abnormality is corrected. The alarm panel shall include all necessary gauges, transducers, factory winng, transformers and circuitry PART 3 EXECUTION 3 01 WORKMANSHIP A. Degrease, clean, dehydrate, and cap pipe for medical gas usage, per CGA Pamphlet G- 4 1 Piping shall be reamed and deburred at all connections. B Daily label piping as to gas service dunng erection to maintain continuity and system integrity C Confirm final connections to equipment to assure that no cross connections exist. D Connection to existing systems. Refer to NFPA 99 paragraph 4 -4 1 4 3 (h.) 3 02 MEDICAL GAS ALARM WIRING A. Provide medical gas alarm wiring diagrams. Electrical work required for 120 volt, 60 Hz power, and emergency power shall be provided per electrical specifications. Provide signal wiring electrical work under these specifications. Electncal work shall not be started until complete winng diagrams have been made available for use by parties concerned. 3 03 TESTING A. Provide gases necessary to complete testing procedures through to certification. B Complete and test pipe rough -in accordance with NFPA 99 before any finish work is applied. Covering of work before acceptance is prohibited. Certify system testing completion to Architect and Owner's representative. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15490 PAGE 5 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS C Medical gas systems, including valving, alarms, and use point outlets shall be evaluated and certified for mechanical and therapeutic function as defined by NFPA 99, CGA Pamphlet P -2.1, and state and local authorities having jurisdiction thereto This testing shall be performed by an agency independent of the facility, contractor or their facilities and shall be able to demonstrate experience and expertise in medical gas installations. The testing agency shall be hired by the Architect and Owner's representative and be supported by the Contractor throughout the testing penod. D The agency shall provide to the facility full documentation of the following: 1 That all medical gas systems as constructed follow guidelines of NFPA 99, regarding placement and applicability of valves, alarms, and source equipment. The agency shall not be responsible for evaluation of plumber's technique in such elements as routing and hangers except as required by paragraphs that follow 2. That no cross connections exist in pipelines as constructed. Documentation shall include examination of the outflow of each outlet, following NFPA 99 mechanical cross connect procedures. Additionally, examine each outlet outflow with an appropriate analyzer and document concentrations. Include oxygen and vacuum systems in the mechanical examination. 3 That all outlets are delivenng gas at a pressure and flow consistent with anticipated needs, as defined by responsible authonties within the facility, but in no case less than CGA or NFPA guidelines. 4 That pipelines are free of debns, including liquid. 5 That all outlets are functional. 6 That delivered gas punty complies with applicable CGA/USP specifications for breathing gas. Take samples from each station outlet for oxygen and test with an oxygen analyzer to confirm the presence of the desired percentage of oxygen. Evaluate samples against CGA/USP requirements for human use and compare to one another 7 That valves are functional. Document the location of control zones without regard to plans. Compare documentation with as -built plans and report discrepancies between the actual installation and the plans to the Architect and Owner's representative. 8 That all alarms are set and functioning in accordance with NFPA 99 The surveillance areas of each shall be documented and compared per 3 03.D 8 above. 9 That systems bear appropriate labels in accordance with NFPA 99 E. Documentation shall be provided by the testing agency and contain the above information as the certification. These documents become part of the facility's permanent records. Certification shall be provided upon successful completion of tests. The Contractor shall not be released from his contractual obligations until certification is obtained. END OF SECTION 15490 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEDICAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor and materials and perform all operations necessary to provide a complete, satisfactory and ready -to- operate wet fire protection system in accordance with NFPA 13 and with these plans and specifications and such additional and incidental work not indicated or described, which can reasonably be inferred as belonging to the work described and is required by good practice to provide a complete and satisfactorily operating system. In general, the matenal to be provided includes. 1 Intenor piping systems 1 02 BUILDING CLASSIFICATION *A. Light hazard sizing and spacing *B Ordinary hazard sizing and spacing 103 AUTHORITIES SECTION 15500 PAGE 1 AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Provide system in accordance with the following authonties. Shop drawings submitted to the Arclutect must have the stamped approval of these authorities 1 The City of Port Angeles Fire Marshall 2. The State Fire Marshall PART II PRODUCT 2.01 PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Matenal to conform to NFPA #13 2.02 FIRE SPRINKLER HEADS A. Exposed sprinkler heads shall be approved quick- response, bulb heads for pendent mounting as noted, with a temperature rating of 165 degrees F, except where specific conditions require different ratings. B Semi- recessed PART III EXECUTION 3 01 The matenal and equipment furnished and installed by the Contractor shall be first quality, new, full -size and weight, free from any defects, in first -class condition and standard in every respect. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be the product of the same manufacturer Storage and handling of all matenal shall be done such that they are at all times protected against loss and damage. The materials compnsing the fire protection system and its appurtenances shall be installed as described herein and on the plans and as required by the applicable codes, listed authonties and manufacturers recommendations. In the event of conflict MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEDICAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15500 PAGE 2 AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS between the plans and specifications, the decision of the Architect shall be final. The mechanical drawings do not attempt to show complete details of building construction, which affect the installation. Refer to the architectural, structural and electrical drawings for additional building details which affect the installation of the work covered under this unit of contract. 3 02 Inspection of the site is mandatory Determine the extent of difficulties and obstacles likely to be encountered in the installation of the work before preparing bid. Drawings do not attempt to show exact details of all piping, and no extra payment will be allowed for obstruction by work of other trades or local obstructions to the work under this contract which require offsets. 3 03 Before starting work, carefully examine the site and all of the architectural, structural, electrical and utility drawings to be thoroughly familiar with the conditions governing the work on this project. Call to the attention of the Architect any error or conflict or discrepancy in the plans or specifications coming to his attention, he is not to proceed with any questionable items of work until clanfication of same has been made. Supplementary details and plans shall be supplied as required and they will become a part of the Contract Documents. Coordination of the work with all of the other crafts employed on the project is mandatory 3 04 Give exact locations for openings through walls and set all sleeves and cutouts in concrete work before said work is done. 3 05 Final locations shall be approved by the Architect. Heads must be aligned with other heads, lighting fixtures and registers, in the room in a symmetncal pattern. Heads must be centered in 1/2 of 4'x2' ceiling tile. 3 06 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. At the completion of the work, all parts of the installation shall be thoroughly cleaned. Clean up and remove from the premises all refuse material, crates and rubbish arising from this work. Proper adjustment of all devices shall be made and proper operation shall be demonstrated as required by the Architect. 3 07 TESTS AND INSPECTION A. All tests required shall be performed and certificates transmitted to the authorities having junsdiction. An inspection of the system will be made by the Authority and the Architect/Owner and any discrepancies which are a part of the Contract shall be corrected prior to final acceptance. END OF SECTION 15500 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEDICAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL (Not Applicable) PART II PRODUCT SECTION 15640 PAGE 1 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT 2.01 CONDENSING UNIT (Outdoor Type, Propeller Fan) A. Condensing units are assembled on a heavy -gauge integral steel base. Units are weatherproofed and include hermetic compressors, condenser coils, hot -gas bypass, fans and motors, charging valves, controls and holding charge of R -22. Units have a hinged top access panel and removable end panel which allows access to all controls and major components. B Sheet metal casing is 18- gauge, zinc- coated galvanized steel, cleaned, and phosphatized, with extenor surfaces finished with grey /green baked enamel finish over an epoxy resin pnmer C Units have two (2) independent refrigeration circuits. Each refrigeration circuit has an integral subcooling circuit with factory- installed refrigerant filter dryers. D Units have welded steel shell, hermetic 3,600 RPM compressors, crankcase heaters, internal temperature and current sensitive motor overloads to protect compressor under loss of charge conditions and abnormal operating conditions. E. Units have V -coils mechanically bonded to 3/8 -inch OD seamless copper tubing. All coils are factory pressure and leak tested to 425 psig. Coil guards are optional. F Upflow, direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced propeller fans are used. Permanently lubricated motors have built -in thermal and current overload protection. G Provide high pressure protection. The units have external control m a lock -out circuit that is reset by switching the thermostat. All units completely factory prewired with necessary controls and terminal blocks for power wiring and 24 -volt control wiring. Controls include motor contactors, ambient fan switches and a 24 -volt control transformer Provide compressor sequencing time delay control and anti -short cycle (time delay on restart) H. Condensing units shall be Trane, size and capacity as scheduled, Camer, or approved substitute. PART III EXECUTION 3 01 CONDENSING UNIT A. Provide condensing unit as part of the packaged rooftop air handler unit. Unit shall be factory charged and tested with air handler before shipping. B Condenser is anticipated to be shipped separate from air handler When installed, reconnect refrigerant piping and electncal service from condenser to air handler per manufacturer's directions. C Unit control shall be interlocked with air handler control. END OF SECTION 15640 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL (NOT APPLICABLE) PART II PRODUCT 2.02 HEATING AND COOLING COILS SECTION 15650 PAGE 1 LIQUID HEAT TRANSFER PIPING SYSTEMS A. General 1 Coils must be rated, tested and certified in accordance with ARI Standard #410 2. Fins shall be 8 fins per inch minimum and 0 008 -thick aluminum, mechanically bonded to tubes. 3 Tubes shall be 5/8 -inch diameter by 0 024 seamless copper, staggered m direction of air flow 4 Headers shall be seamless copper or gray cast iron (direct expansion coils shall not have gray cast iron headers) 5 Water coils shall have vent and dram connections and have steel MPT connections on water coils. 6 Coil casings shall be minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel, with 1 -1/2 -inch flanges with 3/8 -inch diameter holes at 3 -inch centers. Coils 60- inches in length up to 96- inches in length shall have one galvanized steel center support. Coils over 96- inches in length shall have two intermediate supports. 7 Direct expansion refrigerant coils shall have two distributors installed when more than twelve circuits are required or when the system requires split evaporator coil. Coil connection shall be male sweat nonferrous. Coil shall be dipped in Heresite, a a corrosion inhibitor suitable for salt air and pulp mill fume environment. 8 Coil type shall be a. Water 1) Serpentine 0 Provide stainless steel dram pan with 1 -1/4 -inch dram connection under cooling coils, and extended downstream to catch condensate carry-over and under headers. Dnp pan to be sloped toward dram connection, double constructed with 1 -inch- thick fiberglass insulation to insure the elimination of condensation under dnp pans. Extend 1 -1/2 -inch minimum diameter drain to Janitor Room sink on Third Floor down comer leader at one end of pan. 10 Coil capacitie and, sizes shall be as scheduled on the drawings. 11 Rooftop direct expansion coils shall be as manufactured by Trane, Pace -Brod McClung, Temptrol, or approved substitute. B Duct Reheat Coils. Single duct, rectangular inlet manual balancing hot water heating coil Titus, Trane, Barber Colman, or approved substitute. Size and capacities as scheduled on drawings. Coils. 1 Coil casing: 20 gauge galvanized steel. 2. Coil header plate 16 gauge galvanized steel. 3 Fins. 006 -inch aluminum, nppled, 10 per inch. 4 Copper Tubes. 1/2 -inch OD 016 -inch wall thickness mechanically expanded to fins. 5 Header tubes extended 3- inches for field sweat connection. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART III EXECUTION 3 01 WATER SYSTEMS 6 Coils tested leak free at 315 psig air pressure under warm water containing special wetting agent. A. Piping Installation. 1 Piping 2 -1/2- inches and over shall be joined as specified. Welding is optional for smaller sizes. 2. Run piping level. 3 Install dram valves at all low points. 4 Install air vents at all high points and as detailed on the drawings. 5 Test all heating piping at 125 psi hydrostatic test. Repair all leaks by remaking the joint and repeat the test. 6 After installation is complete, thoroughly flush and clean entire system. END OF SECTION 15650 SECTION 15650 PAGE 2 LIQUID HEAT TRANSFER PIPING SYSTEMS 1 1 t t a m 1 C i 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 WORK INCLUDED A. Air Handling Units B Fans SECTION 15700 PAGE 1 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 1 02 Fan Drive Guards Shall be per WAC 296 -24 -205 "General Safety and Health Standards State of Washington Department of Labor and Industnes. PART II PRODUCT 2.01 ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNIT A. General. 1 Unit completely factory- assembled, wired and tested prior to shipping. Unit shall include condensing unit, supply and return fans, pre filters, high efficiency final filters, direct expansion cooling coil, capacity for full ecomomizer mode, horizontal duct discharge, outside air volume measuring dampers, and electncal and control cabinets. 2. The air handling unit, and the fans used therein, must conform to the standards, as applicable, set forth in the AMCA Standards Handbook (Publication No 99), and bear the AMCA Seal. B Casing Construction. 1 Insulated double wall cabinet constructed from galvanized steel with a minimum thickness of 16 -gauge for the steel panels. Adequately reinforce panels for the maximum anticipated static pressures involved. Bolt panel Joints on close centers and caulk to insure the air- tightness of the cabinet. Factory- applied enamel paint finish coat. Construct base of units of structural steel channels and angles and provide a second exterior panel to protect insulation from weather 2 Insulate all panels and unit base with a minimum of 2 -inch thick, 3 0 -pound density ngid fiberglass insulation. Provide acoustical board on the intenor of the unit upstream of the final filters, applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners 12- inches on centers. Raw edges of the lining exposed to the airflow, coat to prevent airflow erosion. For lining in the fan sections, provide perforated plate over lining to prevent air flow erosion 3 Access doors double construction, 20 -gauge galvanized steel door liners, extruded aluminum frames, seal to vinyl dual durometer gasketing, heavy duty hinge, solid locking lever latching mechanism. Provide locking type door restrainers. Provide door on one side of unit, full unit height at fans, filters, coils and electncal sections. 4 Relief and outside air louvers, storm -proof design and provided with 1/2 -inch by 1/2 -inch mesh bird screen. 5 Provide stainless steel waterproof and insulated drain pan under cooling coil section with drain pipe to Janitor Room sink on Third Floor C Fan Sections. 1 Supply fan shall be airfoil plug type and return fan shall be airfoil, backward inclined/forward curve, sizes and capacities as scheduled on the drawings. AMCA rated. Size the shafting of the fans not to exceed 75- percent of the first critical speed under the specified operating conditions and the lateral static deflection of the MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15700 PAGE 2 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT shaft not to exceed 0 003 inches per foot of the length of the shaft. In larger sizes, shafting will be hollow to lessen the weight of the rotating parts and insure longer bearing life. 2. Statically and dynamically balance the fan wheel and shaft assembly pnor to assembly Following assembly test the fan balance using an electronic balance analyzer with tunable filter and strobscope. Take vibration measurements on each bearing housing in two (2) radial and one (1) axial direction in relation to shaft centerline. Use I.A.W 1980 ASHRAE Systems Guide, Chapter 35, Table 26 Equipment Vibration Cntena, acceptance /reject cntena. Vibration test the fan assembly at design RPM with the tunable filter utilized and scan frequencies from 500- cycles per minute to 50 000 CPM to detect misalignment, beanng defects, mechanical looseness, or foundation weakness. 4 Mount fan and motor internally in the fan cabinet on an integral base. Isolate this assembly from the cabinet by freestanding, unhoused, stable steel springs with leveling bolts with isolation efficiency in accordance with Section 15020, Vibration Isolation. Isolate the fan outlet from the cabinet by means of neoprene- coated flexible connection. Install spnngs in such a manner that a neoprene, or fiberglass, high- frequency absorber is used and no continuous metal -to -metal contact is present between the fan integral base and the base of the fan cabinet. Provide vibration isolation base with earthquake restraints to restrain fan assembly in vertical and honzontal direction. Electrically ground the rotating assembly through the motor winng. Wire the fan motor with a flexible conduit of adequate length so that it will not affect the vibration isolation. Mount the fan cabinet as rigidly as possible in order not to impair the efficiency of the spnng isolation of the fan and motor The maximum allowable velocity in the vertical direction on top of the bearings is 0 075- inches per second as compared to the base on which the fan and motor are mounted. 5 V -belt type drives with cast iron sheave. Motor sheaves adjustable- pitched- diameter -type. Select dnves so that drive horsepower is equal to at least 150 percent of motor nameplate horsepower Dnves selected otherwise in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. Motors over 2 -HP provide multi -belt drives. 6 Motors standard NEMA frame. Fractional horsepower motors resilient- mounted. Integer horsepower motors ball beanng, ngid mounted. Motors open- driproof construction. Heavy steel motor adjusting bases to be supplied. Motor speeds not to exceed 1750 -RPM. 7 Pillowblock ball bearings selected for life of 100,000 -hours on forward -curved units and 50,000 hours on backward- inclined and airfoil units. Pressure- lubncated ball type bearings, provide with safety pressure relief grease fittings. Extend grease fittings to accessible position. Structural channels bearing supports of sufficient size and strength to insure flat beanng mounting surface and proper structural support. Additional support above 30- inches wheel diameter will be required and bearing supports above Size 11 must be bolted construction for ease of wheel removal. Welding of beanng supports is not acceptable. D Economizer Section. 1 Economizer section includes dampers for return air and dampers and louvers for outside air and discharge in a "Z" configuration. 2. Louver and damper sizing: a. Outside air 500 to 600 fpm range. b Discharge air 600 to 700 fpm range. c. Return air 1000 to 1200 fpm range. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15700 PAGE 3 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 3 Damper construction as described for mixing box damper above. Barometnc dampers or louvers not permitted. E. Filter Section. Provide in filter section filters and Magnehelic gauge on each filter bank in accordance with Section 15850, and as scheduled on the drawings. F Electric Control Center and Winng: 1 Each unit will contain an electncal control center consisting of: a. A unit mounted NEMA 1 enclosure with fused motor starters with H.O.A. switch and 3 -phase overload protection for supply and return fan motors, control transformer for primary voltage to 120 1/60 hz, and system control terminal stnp 2. Each unit completely factory- wired, requiring only field wiring of power wiring to the main power disconnect and one separate source 120/60/1 power with disconnect switch (vandal proof) for receptacles and light fixtures. Switches shall be vandal proof. 3 Provide vapor service light in each fan, filter, and coil compartment; wire to a single switch. Provide duplex GF -I receptacle adjacent to electncal control center Lights and receptacle factory-wired to separate function box. G Controls. 1 Will be provided under Section 15900 H. Cooling Coils. Provide direct expansion cooling coils as specified in Section15650 I. Condenser Unit: Provide condenser unit as specified in Section 15640 J Unit size and capacity as scheduled on the drawings, Pace Company, Trane, Temtrol or approved substitute. 2.02 EXHAUST FANS A. Roof Mounted. 1 Open centnfugal wheel -type fan all aluminum construction, rubber isolated drive assembly, direct dnve, backdraft damper, prefubncated bearings, prefabncated curb, AMCA certified and with vibration efficiencies in accordance with Section 15020, Vibration Isolation. 2. Fans as manufactured by Penn, model, size, and capacity as scheduled on drawings, Acme Co Bnedert, Carnes, Greenheck, Jenn -Aire, Loren Cook, or approved substitute. 2.03 CENTRIFUGAL FANS B Elevator Pressurization. 1 Backward inclined, airfoil, AMCA certified, Class 1, full belt guard, adjustable sheave and vibration isolation spnngs in accordance with Section 15020, Vibration Isolation. 2 All sheetmetal parts and frames factory enamel finish. 3 2 -HP motors and larger provide multi -belt drives. Accessones as scheduled on the drawings. 4 Bearings designed for minimum L[10] life 40,000- hours. 5 Fan Pace Co., arrangement, discharge, size, and capacity as scheduled on the drawings, Trane Co Barry Blower Acme, Twin City, Champion, or approved substitute. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKJNLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART III EXECUTION 3 01 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT A. Furnish and install all accessories shipped with unit including filter frame and economizer B Cap or plug gas connection at unit. C Connect to cooling coil dnp pan outlet. Provide 2" deep trap, discharge to Janitor Room sink. END OF SECTION 15700 SECTION 15700 PAGE 4 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 1 f 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 WORK INCLUDED A. Duct Systems B Equipment C Hangers and Supports D Hardware and Accessories E. Air Duct Cleaning 102 STANDARDS SECTION 15800 PAGE 1 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A. Comply with the current editions of the following standards unless specified or drawn otherwise: 1 ASHRAE Guide Equipment Volume: Duct Construction, Chapter 1 2. "SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards" 3 "SMACNA Industrial Duct Construction Standards" 4 "SMACNA Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide for Air Handling Systems" 5 NFPA -90A 6 NFPA -90B 7 NFPA -96 8 Uniform Mechanical Code Standard No 10.2 B For matenal, gauges, fabncation and installation select from the SMACNA options that will result in a composite assembly that will be serviceable within the following cntena.* 1 Systems without air Handling boxes. a. Supply duct systems use 3 -inch w g. basis of compliance. b Return systems use 1 -inch w g. negative basis of compliance. 2. Exhaust duct systems use 1-inch w g. negative basis of compliance. PART II PRODUCT, FABRICATION AND EXECUTION 2.01 DUCT AND PLENUM MATERIAL A. G -90 coated galvanized steel of lock forming grade ASTM A -525 and A -527, unless indicated on the drawings or specified otherwise. B For round and flat oval ducts provide spiral seam duct United -McGill "Uni- Seal" ducts and fittings, Mitco, Sheet Metal Products Co., or approved substitute. At Contractor's option, Contractor may provide ducts with SMACNA type RL -2, RL -3 or RL-4 longitudinal seam's for unexposed round duct upstream of air handling boxes. C Joint Sealant. Duro -Dyne SZ, Ductmate No 795, Hardcast Sealing System, or fire retardant, high bonding type sealer with Class I flame spread rating as manufactured by United Sheet Metal Company, Inc. or Mon -Eco Industnes, Inc. Adhesive- backed cloth, woven fiber, or metallic furnace tape will not be acceptable. 2.02 HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS A. Comply with "SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards" and with the following exceptions, selections or deviations. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15800 PAGE 2 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM B Duct Sealing: Duro -Dyne SZ, Ductmate No 795, Hardcast Sealing System, or fire retardant, high bonding type sealer with Class I flame spread rating as manufactured by United Sheet Metal Company, Inc. or Mon -Eco Industnes, Inc. Adhesive- backed cloth, woven fiber, or metallic furnace tape will not be acceptable. C Fittings. 1 Square throat elbows in rectangular ducts must have double wall turn vanes. 2. Turn vanes must be double wall type. 3 Do not use straight tap for branch connections in rectangular duct. 4 Do not use dovetail joint for round branch connection to rectangular ducts. Provide notch spin -in type. 5 Do not use adjustable type elbows in duct systems upstream of air Handling boxes. 6 Provide conical fittings in supply duct systems upstream of air handling boxes. 90 degree tee with oval to round tap may be used. 7 Air handling box upstream duct connection. a. Provide two box inlet diameter lengths of straight duct of the same diameter as the inlet diameter of the box. Where duct sizes on the drawing indicate larger or smaller size, provide increaser or reducer fitting ahead of straight length. b Provide rigid connection to the box. c. Make connections with Mastic and Ideal stainless steel clamps. 8 Provide airtight stuffing boxes in supply ducts upstream of air handling boxes at penetrations, such as thermostats, thermometers and pipes. Use rubber grommets or U- channel rubber extrusions of Rubbercraft Manufacturer to create airtight seal. D Access Doors and Panels. 1 Provide access panels at combination smoke and fire dampers. 2. Access panel 16 -gauge single wall type with screws at 4- inches maximum spacing, and with Ventlok #299 gasketing material all round perimeter 3 Provide access doors where indicated as follows. a. Double sheetmetal panel type construction, tight fitting, hinged, with latch, insulated or acoustic -lined equivalent to duct; steel angle frame. b 18 -inch x 24 -inch minimum size. General, 24 -inch x 72-inch minimum for access into main plenum spaces; 12 -inch x 16 -inch size, or maximum possible size where duct dimensions do not permit this size, for access to duct mounted coils, automatic dampers or humidifiers, which are less than 3 -feet maximum. c. Special access doors for plenums and between filters and supply fan shall be 24 -inch x 72 -inch minimum size, double construction, Buenstod Stacey Type F -1, or C.E. Sparrow "Cesco" manufacturer or acoustical panel casing type as specified elsewhere. d. Die -cast latches; Ventfabncs Manufacturer Cataloe No. Door Sizes 100 2- feet -0- inches high or less 260 3- feet -0- inches high or less 310 3- feet -0- inches or higher (2 latches required) E. Volume Dampers 1 Do not use splitter dampers. 2 Do not use orifice plates or perforated metal in lieu of volume dampers unless indicated on the drawings. 3 Sectionalize dampers with blade length over 48 -inch. 4 Do not use fire dampers for volume adjustment or control. 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15800 PAGE 3 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 5 Use square damper rod. 6 Size dampers to obstruct approximately 95 percent of the duct area when in the closed position. 7 Duro -Dyne or approved substitute damper quadrants. a. #KS -145 for dampers maximum 10- inches long. b #KS -385 for dampers maximum 80- inches long. c. K -7 with bearings for dampers longer than 80 -inch. d. Quadrants in finished spaces where dampers in ducts are concealed in finished walls or ceilings provide with Duro -Dyne Series SRC, sizes as listed for accessible ducts, or Young Regulator Series 301 or Ventlock Series 666 concealed damper operators. 8 Set and lock dampers in the "open" position. 9 Damper quadrant stand -offs for insulated ducts shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel damper quadrant stand -offs; 1 -1/2 -inch height above duct surface; sized to permit secure attachment of damper quadrant; pop rivet connections to duct. 2.03 FIRE DAMPERS AND SMOKE -FIRE DAMPERS A. Codes and Regulations: 1 Fire damper construction and mstallation shall comply with requirements of the Uniform Building Code and to NFPA 90A. 2 Smoke -fire damper assemblies shall be UL labeled and shall meet all UL and NFPA requirements for pnmary fire dampers and shall be UL classified and shall meet NFPA requirements for smoke control dampers. B Fire Dampers, Casings, Frames and Sleeves 1 Certification. All fire damper assemblies shall be UL listed and have a UL label. 2. Manufacture: Phillips -Aire, Amencan Warming Ventilating Co, Louvers Dampers Inc, National Control Air Inc, Airstream, Prefco, Ruskin or approved substitute; factory- fabricated. 3 Type. Metal curtain folding blade, all parts steel, spring- closing, where placed horizontally 4 Construction Requirements Blades recessed outside of the air stream, horizontal mullions or damper heads across the duct not allowed, if over 40 pounds force required to lift or reset the curtain, provided with lifting accessories and attachments. 5 Fusible Links For Each Damper 30 pound load rating; UL listed and classified under category JGIZ, temperature setting 50 degrees F above maximum duct air temperature or 165 degrees F mimmum. 6 Casings for dampers shall enclose entire damper area frame and shall have sleeves to extend through wall or slab, except where damper casing is built into wall or slab Sheetmetal thickness shall be four gauge sizes heavier than connecting ductwork or 16 gauge minimum for small ducts and 14 gauge minimum for ducts over 24- inches wide and ducts over 36- inches high. All seams and joints shall be welded, with attachment lugs or straps for anchonng to wall or slab independent of ductwork. Casings shall incorporate change in size from rectangular to circular or oval, wherever connection is made to circular or oval ducts. 7 Provide 6 -inch x 8 -inch access plate in duct, accessible for inspecting and replacing the fusible link at each damper 8 Negative pressure relief valve, United McGill Corp type AR -W shall be installed downstream of fire damper where shown on drawings. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15800 PAGE 4 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM C Combination Smoke -Fire Dampers 1 Fusible Links. Shall be concealed in frame. Heat activated with temperature settings 50 degrees F above maximum duct air temperature or 165 degrees F minimum, also electncally activated, Air Balance, Inc. "ETL Actuator" 2. Manufacture and Type. Ruskin Type SFD 60 "Fire -Smoke Damper" or Prefco with stainless steel blade beanng inserts and 20 gauge metal blade stiffeners, UL listed as a 1 -1/2 hour fire damper; UL classified as leakage Class II per UL555S, with 15 cfm per cubic foot maximum leakage at 1 -inch w g. differential pressure across closed damper 3 Construction. 16 gauge galvanized steel frame with corner, braces and blade stops; 6- inches wide, 16 gauge galvanized steel blades with closure spnng; stainless steel sleeve type beanngs, 1/8 -inch x 1/2 -inch steel tie bars concealed in frame; 1/2 -inch axles; 160 degrees F fusible link. 4 Operating Shaft. Auxiliary operating shaft shall permit operation by a damper motor When fusible link melts, damper shall be disconnected from the operating shaft, damper shall close and latch to function as a fire damper 5 Sleeves, Frames and Casings Same as specified for Fire Dampers. 6 Damper Operator Linkage Damper shall be complete with operator shaft and support bracket to accept a damper motor operator supplied by the Temperature Control System Contractor 7 Coordinate actuator locations and electrical requirements with Electrical Contractor D Accessones 1 Duct Access Panels. Sheetmetal, 12 -inch x 16 -inch minimum size or maximum possible size where duct dimensions do not permit this size, for fire dampers and combination smoke -fire dampers, for access into duct as required to replace fusible link and reset damper 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS A. Relief Backdrafter Dampers. 1 Metal blade type. Arrow United industries #335 with Counterbalance, Oilite bearings and 1/2 -inch mesh bird screen. B Wall Openings. 1 Seal space around ducts where ducts pass through walls, ceilings or floors. 2. Densely pack void space with loose fill fiberglass Insulation. install galvanized iron frame at each side of opening to cover edges of duct openings. C Automatic Dampers. 1 Install automatic dampers furnished by the temperature controls subcontractor, and specified in Section 15900 D Pressure Testing: 1 Test supply duct systems upstream of reheat coils. 2. Leakage not to exceed 10 percent of the total design air flow when tested under a pressure of 1 5 times the working pressure. When partial sections of the duct system are tested, the summation of the leakage for all sections not to exceed the total allowable leakage. 3 Test method in accordance with 'SMACNA' manual for the Balancing and Adjustment of Air Distribution Systems." 4 Notify Engineer at least 24 -hours in advance of test. 1 1 t 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.05 AIR DUCT CLEANING PART III EXECUTION SECTION 15800 PAGE 5 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A. Thoroughly clean duct systems including plenums, fans and coils, after systems are complete and before the project is balanced. B Execution. 1 Perform cleaning with equipment utilizing compressed air for loosening and dislodging the dirt and power vacuum systems for collecting the dirt in the systems. 2. Provide access panels so the duct cleaning equipment can reach all portions of the ductwork to be cleaned. 3 Submit a letter to the Architect certifying that systems have been completely cleaned. C Provide power vacuum and air blast method by Ventilation Power Cleamng, Inc., or approved equal. 3 01 INSTALLATION A. Square corner elbows for duct offsets are not allowed, except where shown. B Route ductwork in suspended ceiling areas to avoid interference with ceiling supports and framing, and work of other trades. Provide offsets as required. C Ductwork in General. 1 Elbows. a. Supply Ducts: Standard radius elbows per SMACNA Standards. Square elbows with vanes are allowed only where shown. b Exhaust Ducts: Minimum elbow radius equal to 1/2 duct width. Square corner elbows allowed only where shown. 2. Circular Ducts. Spiral seam ducts per Section 15800 3 Duct Collars. Provide, where exposed ductwork passes through walls, slabs or ceilings. 4 Seams: Formed and sealed per SMACNA recommendations for 5 percent maximum leakage; standing seams are not acceptable on ducts other than plenums. Snaplock type seams by Lockformer tools are acceptable for low pressure ductwork where Pittsburgh seams called for 5 Joints. Formed and sealed per SMACNA recommendations for 5 percent maximum leakage; T -22 companion angle joints and T -23 flanged points are not allowed. D Provide steel angle framing on 18 -inch centers to support plenums and large ducts. Fasten lapped type seams to framing on 4 -inch centers or standing type seams to framing on 12 -inch centers. Provide supplementary bracing on honzontal surfaces to prevent deformation under system operating and "upset" pressures. Fasten sheetmetal to backing steel screws. E. Plenums: Provide horizontal structural support members for plenum floor, except where shown on Structural drawings. F Duct and Plenum Sealing 1 Seam and Joint Construction. Fill sheetmetal seams and points with fire retardant mastic prior to their assembly; construct seams and points to retain mastic after assembly 2. Sealing Around Filters. Seal between the base of the filter casing and the floor surfaces with a polysulphide base mastic. Seal filter casing to walls with sheetmetal. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15800 PAGE 6 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 3 Pipe Penetrations. Seal per Figure 6 -10, SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1985 4 Flexible Connections at Fans. Provide flexible connections to connecting ductwork at fans and at air handling units with non internal spring isolated fans and at other locations as shown. Install flexible materials, with sufficient slack to permit 2- inches of honzontal or vertical movement of the fan or air handling unit, without stretching the flexible fabnc. Support ductwork at flexible connection from the building structure. G Provide transitions to rectangular where fire dampers or air pressure reducing valves are installed in circular and flat oval ducts. H. Install automatic dampers specified in Section 15900; provide all supports, bracing and closure plates. I. Remove construction debns and dirt in ducts and plenum interiors at end of work; no additional cost to the Owner J Mitered Ducts and Fittings. Use radius ells and connections. K. Adjustable or pleated elbows shall not be used. 3 02 SUPPORT A. Construct and install per recommended practices of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, with the following additions and exceptions. B All hangers shall support the weight of installed ductwork and insulation, plus the weight of a 200 pound man. C Continuously threaded type steel rods 1/4 -inch minimum diameter shall be allowed only if electroplated. D Support mixing boxes with rod hangers or with non perforated strap hangers and inserts in the slab E. Provide hangers in pairs on exact opposite sides of honzontal duct, at the following locations. 1 Close to transverse joints of main ducts and branches, and for branch connections 3 -feet or greater in length. 2. Adjacent to fire dampers and to ducts penetrating walls and partitions. 3 Square corner elbows at not over 24 -inch intervals measured along the elbows. 4 At the mid -point of small and medium size honzontal radius elbows greater than 20 degrees change in direction. 5 One or more supplementary hangers, as necessary, along the radius elbows of any angle whenever the lengths of these arcs exceed the maximum hanger spacing length for that particular size duct. F Vertical ducts shall be supported using steel angles nveted to the sides of the ducts, which shall serve as a support bracing and shall be anchored by embedded anchor bolts to concrete walls, and by bolts welded to the structural steel for ducts adjacent to steel structures. Maximum spacing between such bracing angles shall be 8 -feet centers for full height of vertical ducts. G Provide support for vertical ducts at the following locations. 1 Provide duct supports from floors and walls when necessary 2 Provide each duct nser with a minimum of two supports completely spanning the shaft opening at each floor One pair of supports may be used to support more than one duct nser, provided that the strength of the supports is increased appropnately and proper additional supplementary steel is used at the extra nsers. 3 Support duct nsers located between floors that are more than 15 feet high, at each floor and halfway points between floors. The distance between intermediate MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 03 SUPPORT FOR EQUIPMENT 3 04 MAXIMUM PERMITTED DUCT HANGER SPACING 3 06 SHEETMETAL CONNECTIONS 3 07 VOLUME DAMPERS AND QUADRANTS SECTION 15800 PAGE 7 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM supports on very high floors should not exceed 12 feet. (Intermediate hangers may be supported from an adjacent wall or hung by rods from supports on the floor above). H. Anchor structure shall be provided, made of welded structural steel, attached to embedded anchor bolts, shall be provided at base of the vertical nser I. Support of Ducts Above Roof: Provide hot dip galvanized steel angle frames at spacing shown, made of 1 -1/4 -inch x 1 -1/4 -inch x 1/4 -inch minimum steel angles, all welded, hot dip galvanized. Provide one or more sets of hangers for heating coils, VAV units, and all other equipment in duct runs, as recommended by their manufacturers. A. Ducts with areas up to 4 square feet shall have their hangers spaced up to 8 feet apart. B Ducts with areas 4 1 to 10 square feet shall have their hangers spaced not more than 6 feet apart. C Ducts with area over 10 square feet shall have their hangers located up to 4 feet apart. D Provide Spring Type Vibration Isolators m each hanger for high pressure fan discharge ductwork from fan, to and including sound attenuators; also all other high pressure supply ducts in Mechanical Rooms. Isolators shall be 1/2 -inch minimum static spnng deflection; springs loaded in compression, manufacture, same as specified under Section 15020 3 05 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES Provide access doors where access to equipment in ducts or plenums is necessary A. Air Cushion (Square, Round or Rectangular Pattern Diffusers) Branch duct shall extend full size at least one diameter of the diffuser neck, past the diffuser neck connection. B Return and Exhaust Grille Provide rectangular duct connection with mounting frame where required, flexible duct connections not allowed. A. Damper Locations. Provide in the duct to each supply opening and exhaust opening. Provide branch volume dampers in all trunk ducts at each shaft penetration and in each branch duct from a main trunk duct and in each branch duct with 3 or more supply or exhaust openings. Provide additional dampers as shown on drawings. Locate dampers as far upstream from the outlets as possible and in accessible areas. B Acoustic Performance: Noisy dampers as determined by the Architect/Engineer shall be replaced. C Ducts Concealed in Walls or Non Removable Ceilings. Install flush mounted concealed type damper quadrants at all such locations. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL D Damper Quadrants On Insulated Ductwork: Install a damper quadrant stand -off for each volume damper on insulated ductwork. Attach stand -off to duct and quadrant to standoff with pop rivets. E. Damper Positions. Set and lock all volume dampers m the "Full Open" position prior to commencement of balancing work on the system. 3 08 TESTING 3 09 INSTALLATION OF FIRE FIRE -SMOKE DAMPERS SECTION 15800 PAGE 8 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A. Pressure Testing of Medium Pressure Ductwork and Plenums Test all ductwork and plenums before insulation is installed to determine system tightness. B Test Method. Provide temporary caps at each end of each plenum or duct section to be tested. Furnish portable blower with volume adjustment and a calibrated orifice for determining cfm of air being added to ductwork. Submit certified performance data on blower and orifice. Include diameter of onfice and calculation of air flow through onfice at three differential pressures to venfy performance curve of test umt. Maintain pressure equal to the rating stated in section 15800, paragraph 1 02,B in duct; make sufficient preliminary tests and examinations of each section at this pressure, and seal all observable leaks so that leakage dunng final testing will be at or below maximum permissible leakage. C Permissible Leakage: Add up the lengthwise cross sectional area in a plane through the duct centerline, which shall be calculated by multiplying the duct length by the duct diameter for all circular duct sections to be tested. For oval ducts, reinstate rectangular diameter; and for transition sections, use average diameter For rectangular ducts and plenums, use the duct or plenum width plus height divided by two to obtain an equivalent diameter Maximum permissible leakage shall not exceed 1 -1/2 CFM, for each 4200 square inches of total cross section area of all ducts under each test. Final test of each section will be witnessed by the Architect. Give at least 7 days prior notice before such test. D Test Data. Record data of test results of final test only, including sketch or diagram of testing section showing all dimensions in inches, computation of total lengthwise cross section area and actual leakage found dunng the test. Upon completion of testing, submit data to the Architect. A. Dampers, Casings and Sleeves Damper casings and sleeves shall extend through walls or slabs. Connections to ductwork shall be tightly fitted slip fit to ductwork; sealed with fire retardant mastic. All sleeves and casings shall be anchored to wall or slab independent of ductwork. Dampers shall be installed in wall or slab openings utilizing sleeves, angles, other matenals and practices required to provide an installation equivalent to that utilized by the manufacturer when dampers were tested by UL. Installation shall be in accordance with damper manufacturer's instructions. B Links and Actuators. Install links in damper assembly to prevent damper vibration. Install actuator above removable ceilings. C Duct Access Panels at Dampers. Provide in the sheetmetal duct at each fire damper and combination smoke -fire damper, for access to replace fusible links and reset the damper; gasketed and attached to ductwork with sheetmetal screws, 6 -inch maximum screw spacing to centers. Install access panels above removable ceilings or provide access panels as required. r MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL END OF SECTION 15800 SECTION 15800 PAGE 9 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 WORK INCLUDED A. Air terminal units. B Registers. C Diffusers. D Door grilles. PART II PRODUCT 2.01 AIR TERMINAL UNITS SECTION 15825 PAGE 1 AIR TERMINAL EQUIPMENT A. Single Duct Vanable/Constant Volume Units. 1 TITUS Series 3000 air distribution assemblies with manual volume regulator on inlet and heating coil on inlet (within the cabinet) of the sizes and capacities shown on the drawings, Anemostat, Trane, Nailor -Hart, or approved substitute. 2 Pressure independent assemblies capable of reset to any air flow between zero and the maximum cataloged CFM. CFM limiters will not be accepted. The inlet shall be equipped with a multi -point flow sensor and capped tees for field pressure readings. The sensor shall maintain control accuracy within 5 percent with same size inlet duct in any configuration. 3 The umt casing shall be 22 gauge galvanized steel, internally lined with 3/4 -inch, 1- 1/2 pound density insulation which complies with UL 181 and NFPA 90A. All exposed insulation edges to be coated with NFPA 90A approved sealant to prevent erosion. Casing shall be sealed to hold leakage below 1 percent of maximum capacity at 3 0 -inch entering static pressure. 4 The unit damper shall have built -in stop to prevent over stroking and seal to limit leakage to less than 2 percent at maximum capacity of 6 0 -inch inlet static pressure. 5 Sound ratings not to exceed NC scheduled on the drawings. 6 Unit manufacturer shall install at the factory pneumatic damper actuator and controller furnished by the temperature control maufacturer pre- tested and set for maximum and minimum flow rates as scheduled on the drawings. Field calibration and readjustment shall be provided for by both external gauge taps and maximum mimmum CFM dials on controller Coordinate thermostat and damper action with controls contractor before ordering units. 7 Access Plate in Casings For Access to All Interior Parts. Minimum size 4 -inch x fl- inch; gasketed, upset edges or otherwise stiffened, four or six fastenings; wing nuts and stud bolts or equivalent; no putty or other mastic. 8 Coils. Copper tube type; aluminum fins; not over 10 fins per inch, 75 psi w p adequately secured within the insulated section of casing of the unit; capacity and water flow rates as shown. D Air Terminal Unit Zone Coil 1 Hot water coil enclosed in a galvanized steel casing module to match basic air terminal unit factory mounted on the umt discharge. 2. Coil construction of copper tubes 1/2 -inch O.D on single circuit coils, 7/8 -inch O.D on multiple circuit coils. Aluminum rippled fins, 10 per inch. Galvanized steel casing with downstream slip- and -dnve duct connection. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 Size and capacity as scheduled on the units. Coil same manufacturer as air terminal unit. 2 02 REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES A. General 1 Units sized and scheduled Titus, unless indicated otherwise. Other manufacturers listed select and size units to obtain same performance and quality as unit scheduled. Frame style to accommodate ceiling type, or as scheduled below Carnes, Anemostat, Krueger, Tuttle Bailey Nailor -Hart, or approved substitute. 2. Sizes shown on drawings give honzontal dimension first; do not include borders. Borders, where installed against building construction, shall be 1 -1/4 -inch width to cover the embedded frame; where installed against exposed sheetmetal shall be 5/8- inch or 3/4 -inch width, fitted with air seal of cellular plastic or rubber 3 Where shown; diffuser sections blanked -off with sheetmetal baffles on top of diffuser vanes; attached to diffuser intenor; same manufacturer as diffuser 4 Finish, submit to Architect for approval. a. Ceiling Units White Baked Enamel PART III EXECUTION 3 01 INSTALLATION OF TERMINAL UNITS SECTION 15825 PAGE 2 AIR TERMINAL EQUIPMENT A. Coordination. Coordinate depths of terminal units with clearances available above suspended ceilings and with other items in the ceiling space. See requirements under Coordination of Work. B Hangers: Install each unit on electro- galvanized, pnme painted or cadium- plated steel hanger rods or galvanized bar steel strap hangers from the slab above with anchor (expansion) bolts or concrete inserts. C Reheat Unit Coil Connections. Install connections to coils to insure effective venting and drainage of the coil and connecting piping. D VAV Units: Install each unit with not less than 4 diameters of straight duct upstream of the unit. 3 02 INSTALLATION OF REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Provide duct connections as specified in Section 15800 B Diffusers shall be well fitted to the ceiling or tnm of ceiling. C Support of diffusers and grilles shall be concealed attachments wherever possible. Supports and attachments for ceiling mounted diffusers and grilles shall be from structure of the duct or from the ceiling. Diffusers and grilles in lay -in ceilings shall be positively attached to the ceiling suspension main runners or to cross runners with the same carrying capacity as the main runner per UBC D Intenor of Ducts (Where visible through Grilles) Apply one coat of black paint. E. Sheetmetal Connections to Diffusers and Grilles. 1 Supply Outlet (Square, Round or Rectangular Pattern Diffusers) Provide sheetmetal duct connection the same size and shape as diffuser neck to the branch duct. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL END OF SECTION 15825 SECTION 15825 PAGE 3 AIR TERMINAL EQUIPMENT 2. Air Cushion (Square, Round or Rectangular Pattern Diffusers) Branch duct shall extend full size at least one diameter of the diffuser neck, past the diffuser neck connection. 3 Supply and Exhaust Grille: Provide rectangular duct connection with mounting frame where required, flexible duct connections not allowed. 4 Exhaust Inlet (Screening Opening) Provide angle frame and screened cover over duct operung. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 WORK INCLUDED A. Filters and filter frames. B Service filter housing. C Filter gauges. 102 STANDARDS A. All filter performance ratings based on tests in accordance with ASHRAE Test Standard #52 -76, unless noted otherwise. B All filter media Underwriters Laboratones (UL) listed as Class 1 and 2. C Quantity, size, type and resistance as scheduled on the drawings. D Manufacturer must guarantee performance and performance must be stated in the manufacturer's punted literature. PART II PRODUCT SECTION 15850 PAGE 1 AIR FILTRATION 2.01 REPLACEABLE (300 -500 FPM FACE VELOCITY) A. Dry Media (30 percent) 1 2 -inch thick non -woven cotton media pleated, 30 percent efficiency ASHRAE Dust Spot, 65 grams/sq ft dust holding capacity, 93 percent ASHRAE Weight Arrestance, with heavy duty, beverage board enclosing frame. 2. Media in a 16 -gauge galvanized steel or plated steel holding frame with wire fasteners retaining clips and polyurethane foam gasket. Fasteners removable without use of tools. 3 New -Aire HC Type 40, Farr 30/30 Cambndge Aeropleat, or approved substitute. B Dry Media Bag Filters (90 percent) 1 12 -inch thick ultrafine glass fiber media 90 percent efficiency ASHRAE Dust Spot, 96 percentASHRAE Weight Arrestance in steel head and frame. 2. Media in a 16 -gauge galvanized steel or plated steel holding frame with wire fastener retaining clips and polyurethane foam gasket. Fasteners removable without use of tools. 3 Farr Riga -Flo, equivalent New -Aire or Amencan Air Filter, or approved substitute. PART III EXECUTION 3 01 GENERAL A. Install filters in filter banks, flat or V -bank configuration as recommended by air handler manufacturer Secure filter sections in racks with airtight seals between filter sections and at perimeter of filters to prevent bypass of unfiltered air Install filters for service access as shown on the drawings. B Provide air filter gauges for all filters, Dwyer Magnehelic Gauge, Senes 2000 with Fig. #4 -3 accessories. Range of the gauge selected for appropriate installation. Provide engraved phenolic plate indicating "CLEAN" filter and "CHANGE" filter readings. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL Install pressure sensing taps and tubing so that filter servicing will not restrict taps or damage tubing. C Upon project completion, provide the owner with new filters. D Install temporary filter media dunng supply system balancing in either roll filter media or fixed filter media frames; resistance of temporary media to be 125 percent of combined initial design resistance across the roll media and fixed media filter sections. E. During supply system balancing, install a perforated plate or other device to simulate 125 percent of the initial airflow resistance across the filter in filter cabinets without filters. END OF SECTION 15850 SECTION 15850 PAGE 2 AIR FILTRATION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 SCOPE A. Provide a complete pneumatic control system for the heating, ventilating and air condition system as herein described and shown on the drawings. The Temperature Control System will be installed by skilled mechanics in this line of work, employed by the Landis Staefa. B The Control Manufacturer shall submit descnption of operation and schematic drawings of the entire Control System to the Engineer for approval before starting work. Bulletins describing each item of Control Equipment or component shall be included. Upon completion of his work, the Control Manufacturer shall provide a final set of descnption of operation and schematic as -built drawings of the Control System to the Owner (see Section 15010). C Related Work Specified Elsewhere Air handling equipment and air distribution systems: All automatic control dampers not furnished with mechanical equipment shall be furnished by the Control Manufacturer and shall be installed by the Mechanical Contractor or his sheet metal subcontractor, under the Control Manufacturer's supervision. D Contractor Adjustment. At the completion of the job, the Controls Contractor must submit to the Architect a letter stating that he has made final calibrations and adjustments to the system and that the Owner's operating personnel have been instructed in its use. E. Upon completion of the work, provide the necessary skilled labor, helpers, materials and equipment to support the commmssiomng work (see Section 15950). During the commissioning, coordinate with the commissioning company and make all adjustmens required to demonstrate systems are working properly PART II PRODUCT 2.01 CONTROL TUBING SECTION 15900 PAGE 1 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A. Matenal. 1 Hard drawn and soft drawn copper of 0 025 -inch wall thickness. 2 Plastic Black fire resistant polyethylene with a self extinguishing rating. 3 Bundle plastic where not exposed to possible physical damage; Dekoron PlyCor with PVC jacket. B Testing: Test all tubing with compressed air and prove tight before concealing or backfilling. Test air tight at 30 psig and blow out clean before attachment to control instruments. C Fittings. Will be compressed, soldered or brass barb type. D Installation. 1 Within enclosures, equipment cabinets, and metal troughs. If permitted by applicable codes, plastic may be used, with the exception of copper used when tubing is near anything that might be a high temperature. 2 Concealed and accessible locations If permitted by applicable codes, plastic may be used, such as runs within a drop ceiling. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 Exposed. a. Air lines in finished spaces shall be either hard drawn copper or plastic tubing installed in prefabncated wire way as manufactured by Wiremold. 6 All tubing shall be neatly installed, concealed except in Mechanical Rooms, adequately strapped and run parallel or vertical to building walls and column lines. Tubing above ceilings will be attached to or hung from the building construction and not attached to moving or vibrating duct and pipes. Spacing of supports on 4- foot center maximum. 7 Shut -off valves will be provided at each branch main supplying a floor or other section of the building. Valves will be accessible. 2 02 INSTRUMENT AIR SYSTEM SECTION 15900 PAGE 2 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A. Duplex Compressors. System is existing. Expand to provide complete control for this remodel project. 2.03 ELECTRIC WIRING A. This Contractor to do all winng in connection with the automatic control system. All electnc winng shall be in conduit and be installed stnctly in accordance with local and state codes and the electncal division of this specification. B All wiring and conduit shall be concealed except in Mechanical Rooms. C Temperature control and interlock winng shall be furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor or his authonzed distributor D The Contractor shall fully coordinate the interconnection of factory assembled portions of system controls, field installed control systems and the electncal power system to provide a complete working installatin. E. Power for temperature control equipment shall not be taken from equipment motor leads. Power shall be from circuits dedicated for controls only or a circuit for convienent outlets and service lights. 2 04 INSTRUMENTS A. Room Thermostats Single Setpoint. Will be relay -type with adjustable sensitivity and concealed set point adjustment unless noted otherwise. Covers will be furnished without thermometers and with tamperproof screws, unless noted otherwise. Finish as selected by the Architect. Mount five feet above floor Provide heavy -duty thermostat guards. B Control Dampers: Control dampers not funushed with mechanical equipment will be furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor and installed by the Sheet Metal Contractor These control dampers will be parallel or opposed blade as shown on the drawings, with synthetic elastomer seals and will not leak in excess of 20 cfs per square foot when closing against 4 -inch water gauge. Dampers shall be 16 -gauge galvanized, bronze beanngs, and their linkage will not be exposed to the airstream. These dampers will be sized by the Control Contractor for proper pressure drop and control charactenstics. Outside air dampers will be normally closed, return dampers will be normally open, and exhaust air dampers will be normally closed. C Damper Operators. The motors shall be of piston -type using neoprene diaphragm, shall be sized to handle all loads through full range of pressure; shall have positive positioning devices where sequenced or when operating dampers over 16 square feet in size. Damper motors shall be of metal construction with replaceable diaphragms. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART III EXECUTION SECTION 15900 PAGE 3 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS D Control Valves. Control valves furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor shall be set by the Mechanical Contractor Heating valves will be normally open to coil flow The valves will be of the rubber diaphragm actuator, spring return type with 150 psig body rating and furnished with spnng ranges for requiring sequencing. 3 01 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Sequence of operations are designed to illustrate basic control functions only Temperature Controls Contractor shall review drawings and submit complete installation data, including minor details, to provide proper operation in his submittal. Where an item differs from specifications, Controls Contractor shall submit manufacturer's recommendations subject to Architect's approval. 3 02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION—SYSTEMS (AC-3E-1} A. Scope: The supply air systems serve single -duct system with hot water reheat coils and one vanable volume unit. Supply air system consists of supply fan, return fan, prefilters, final filters, outside dampers with flow measunng capabilities, return and relief air dampers, and dx cooling coil. System shall operate 24 -hours but shall be capable of a night set back operation. B Start-Up The supply fan shall be directly controlled by the controller according to the program established by the Owner The return fan shall be electrically interlocked to operate with the supply fan. Supply and return fans shall be controlled to start "unloaded." C Basic Temperature Control. A temperature controller sensing fan discharge temperature shall maintain the supply air temperature setpoint by modulating the outside air return air relief air dampers and dx expansion valve in sequence. D On sensing a rise in temperature, controller shall first modulate the outside /relief air dampers open and the return air damper closed. A continued rise shall cause the direct expansion valve to modulate open. E. If the fans are running dunng unoccupied hours, a signal shall override damper modulation and close the outside /relief air dampers. Dunng occupied hours, an outside air temperature switch shall ovemde the•damper modulation signal and position the dampers to provide mimmum ventilation only F When outside air temperature is low enough to provide economizer cooking, a temperature reset program shall lower supply air temperature setpoint as low as possible to maintain a 76 °F (adjustable) return air temperature without offset. G Freeze Protection. A low temperature detector, manual reset type, with range adjustable between 10 °F and 50 °F shall be provided at the downstream side of the dx coil, set at 36 °F If temperature drops below 36 °F, low temperature detector shall stop the fan and outside air dampers shall close. 3 03 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) TERMINAL UNIT CONTROL {TU -1 A. A room temperature sensor shall maintain setpoint by modulating the normally closed damper between minimum and maximum volume positions through a terminal control unit (TCU) mounted on the VAV terminal. Each room sensor shall include a switch to initiate ovemde of unoccupied mode of operation. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 4 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS B Upon call for room heating, the damper will modulate to the minimum volume position and the zone heating coil shall be modeluted as stated below 3 04 ZONE RE -HEAT COIL CONTROL {RH} A. Provide two -way control valve, unless otherwise noted on the drawings, in the hot water supply line to each zone heating coil which shall be modulated by its room thermostat to maintain setpoint temperature. B Provide three -way control valve in the hot water supply line to each zone heating coil located at end of supply air duct which shall be modulated by its room thermostat to maintain setpoint temperature and also maintain hot water system flow 3 18 COMBINATION SMOKE/FIRE DAMPERS A. Smoke Damper Control. Provide pneumatic two position damper motor and air tubing from motor to the pneumatic /electnc switch at the main fire alarm control panel. Dampers are specified in Section 15800, "Air Distribution." Pneumatic /electnc switch, and all other related electnc controls, are specified in Division 16 Winng from PE switches at fire alarm panel to all dampers shall be by temperature controls subcontractor Smoke dampers shall operate with their respective fan and system. B Smoke Damper Control Provide pneumatic two position damper motor for each smoke damper Dampers are specified in Section 15800, "Air Distribution." Damper motors shall operate with the smoke detection system to close the smoke dampers when the detection system is activated and open the dampers when the detection system is deactivated. End switches on dampers, or differential switches across fans, shall prevent dampers from closing until differential is less than 1" and prevent fan startup unless dampers are open. The smoke dampers shall not close on normal fan shutdown. The smoke detection system, including EP relays, is specified under Division 16 Coordinate the work with the electrical subcontractor and provide all piping, wnng, and controls required for the functioning of the smoke dampers. 3 19 ELEVATOR PRESSURIZATION FANS {PF -1 AND PF-2) A. Elevator Pressurization Fan Control. Fan shall be started by interlocking with fire alarm system specified in Divisionl6 3.20 ROOFTOP. EXHAUST FANS {EF} B Toilet Exhaust Fan. Toilet exhaust fan shall be started through the time switch specified for the supply and return fans. END OF SECTION 15900 Sparling, Inc Electrical Engineer j \6807 \specs \index OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE REMODEL PORT ANGELES, WASHINGTON DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16030 TESTING SECTION 16051 EXISTING CONDITIONS SECTION 16100 BASIC MATERIALS METHODS SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS TERMINATIONS SECTION 16130 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES SECTION 16140 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES SECTION 16170 DISCONNECTS AND FUSED SWITCHES SECTION 16180 FUSES SECTION 16450 GROUNDING SECTION 16471 PANELBOARDS SECTION 16500 LIGHTING SECTION 16700 COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SECTION 16724 SMOKE DAMPER CONTROL SECTION 16740 TELEPHONE, COMPUTER RACEWAY SYSTEMS SECTION 16750 NURSE CALL SECTION 16776 VOICE PAGING SYSTEM SECTION 16781 TELEVISION SYSTEM SECTION 16960 MEDICAL GAS ALARM PANEL SECTION 16999 PROJECT CLOSEOUT I hereby certify that this project specification was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly registered Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Washington EXPIRES: 5 26 41- Olive Way, Suite 1100 Seattle, WA 98101 (206) 667 -0555 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16010 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 GENERAL Conform to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and related work in other Divisions for all work in Division 16 See Division 1 for sequence of work 1 2 SCOPE OF WORK It is the intention of this Division of the Specifications and the accompanying drawings to describe and provide for the furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory and fully operational condition all equipment, materials, devices and necessary appurtenances to provide a complete electrical system, together with such other miscellaneous installations and equipment hereinafter specified and /or shown on the drawings The work shall include all materials, appliances and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or shown on the drawings, but which are necessary to make a complete, fully operational installation of all electrical systems shown on the drawings or described herein Equipment and devices furnished and installed under other Divisions of this specification (or the Owner) shall be connected under this Division The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is binding as if called for in both 1 3 WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS See all other divisions of specifications for other work which includes but is not limited to Temporary Power Cutting and Patching Door Hardware Painting, Refinishing and Finishes Equipment Wiring Mechanical Control Wiring Mechanical Equipment Fire Protection 1 4 CODES AND REGULATIONS A If any conflict occurs between government adopted code rules and this Specification, the codes are to govern Nothing in these drawings and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming with the governing codes Also, this shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with any requirements of the drawings or specifications which may be in excess of requirements of the hereinbefore mentioned governing codes and rules and not contrary to same B The electrical systems shall be installed based on the following current Standards NFPA 70 National Electrical Code as adopted and amended by the State of Washington or Local Jurisdiction Washington State Department of Health Hospital Rules Chapter 246 -318 WAC Uniform Building Code International Conference of Building 16010 1 MAHLTJM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16010 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL GENERAL PROVISIONS Officials as adopted and amended by the Local Jurisdiction The Contractor is required to familiarize himself with the detailed requirements of these standards and any local codes and ordinances as they affect the installation of specific electrical systems 1 5 PERMITS AND FEES The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all licenses, permits and inspections required by laws, ordinances and rules governing work specified herein The Contractor shall arrange for inspection of work by the inspectors and shall give the inspectors all necessary assistance in their work of inspection 1 6 COORDINATION A The Contractor responsible for accomplishing Division 16 work shall coordinate his work with that of the other Contractors and /or other trades doing work on the project and shall examine all drawings and specifications of other trades including the mechanical, architectural, and structural for construction details and necessary coordination B Obtain submittals and shop drawings of all equipment with electrical connections furnished under other divisions of the specifications Provide all wiring in accordance with requirements indicated Advise the Architect of any changes which may affect the contract price C Special attention is called to the following items and all conflicts shall be coordinated prior to installation 1 Door swings to the end that switches will be located on the "strike" side of the door 2 Location of grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment so that all electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and other electrical outlets and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items 3 Location of cabinets, counters and doors so that electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items 4 Recessing and concealing electrical materials in CMU walls, concrete construction, precast construction and similar construction methods 5 Electrical characteristics (HP, KVA, voltage, phase) of actual equipment furnished under other divisions being different from that shown on the electrical drawings D The Contractor will not be paid for relocation of work, cuttings, patching and finishing required for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination prior to installation 1 7 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A Raceways, boxes and ground connections are shown diagrammatically only and indicate the general character and approximate location The layout 16010 2 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16010 PAGE 3 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL GENERAL PROVISIONS does not necessarily show the total number of raceways or boxes for the circuits required, nor are the locations of indicated runs intended to show the actual routing of the raceways The Contractor shall furnish, install and place in satisfactory condition all raceways, boxes, conductors and connections and all other materials required for the electrical systems shown or noted in the contract documents to be complete, fully operational and fully tested upon completion of the project B The drawings do not show all requirements. of the specifications The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for (or shown) in either is required to be provided as if called for in both C The horsepower of motors and apparatus wattages shown on the drawings are estimated requirements of equipment furnished under other Divisions of this contract and bid shall be based on these sizes Overload elements shall be provided to suit actual equipment nameplate current Advise Architect of any equipment changes or substitutions affecting electrical systems Conform to Substitution Requirements, Section 16100 D Any minor changes (less than 6' -6" horizontal) in the location of the raceways, outlets, boxes, devices, wiring, etc from those shown on the drawings shall be made without extra charge, where coordination requires or if so directed by the Architect before rough -in E Contractor shall consult the architectural drawings for the exact height and location of all electrical equipment not specified herein or shown on the drawings F Outlet locations shown on the drawings are approximate Contractor shall study the building drawings in relation to spaces and equipment surrounding each outlet so that the outlet is correctly positioned and symmetrically located for proper usage Lighting fixtures are to be symmetrically located according to ceiling tile and room layout G When inserts or sleeves for outlet boxes, conductors, cables and /or raceways are required, Contractor shall provide and shall fully coordinate the installation thereof with other trades 1 8 ITEMIZED SCHEDULE OF COSTS Furnish a contract cost breakdown by specification section to the Architect with a copy to the Engineer to allow evaluation of partial payment requests Refer to the Supplementary Conditions of General Contract for details, and conform thereto 1 9 WARRANTY The Contractor shall guarantee all work installed under this specification He shall make good, repair or replace, at his own expense, any defective work, materials or parts which may show themselves within one year after final acceptance, if in the opinion of the Architect said defect is due to imperfection in material, design or workmanship Incandescent lamps are not warranted, but all shall be operating at time of final acceptance 1 10 RECORD DRAWINGS 16010 3 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McRINLEY GORDON SECTION 16010 PAGE 4 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 11 A Continually record the actual electrical system(s) installation on a set of prints kept readily available at the project during construction These prints shall be used for this purpose alone Accurately locate with exact dimensions all underground and underslab raceways and stub outs At the completion of the work, Contractor shall furnish the Architect a set of reproducible record drawings (xerox type) and the set of mark -ups Final payment to the Contractor will not be authorized until these prints have been submitted to and accepted by the Architect ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS The Contractor shall prepare four (4) O&M manuals for all equipment furnished under Division 16 of the specifications B The information included must be the exact equipment installed, not the complete "line" of the manufacturer Where sheets show the equipment installed and other equipment, the installed equipment shall be neatly and clearly identified on such sheets C These 0 M manuals shall contain all the information needed to operate and maintain all systems and equipment provided in the project It shall be presented and arranged in a logical manner for efficient use by the Owner s operating personnel The information provided shall include but not be limited to the following 1 Equipment manufacturer, make, model number, size, etc 2 Equipment nameplate data 3 Description of system configuration and operation including component identification and interrelations A master control schematic drawing(s) may be required for this purpose 4 Dimensional and performance data for specific unit provided as appropriate 5 Manufacturer s recommended operation instructions as appropriate 6 Manufacturer's recommended lubrication and servicing data including frequency as appropriate 7 Complete parts list including reordering information, recommended spares and anticipated useful life (if appropriate) Parts lists shall give full ordering information assigned by the original parts manufacturer Relabeled and /or renumbered parts information as reassigned by equipment supplier not acceptable 8 Shop drawings 9 Wiring diagrams 10 Signal equipment submittals shall contain step -by -step circuit description information designed to acquaint maintenance personnel with equipment operation in each mode of operation D Wiring diagrams for each system shall be complete drawings for the specific system installed under the contract "Typical" line diagrams 16010 4 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16010 PAGE 5 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL GENERAL PROVISIONS will not be acceptable unless properly marked to indicate the exact field installation E The information contained in the manuals shall be grouped in an orderly arrangement by specification index The manuals shall have a typewritten index and divider sheets between categories with identifying tabs The completed manuals shall be bound with hard board covers (0 M manuals shall not exceed 5" thick Provide two or more volumes if required Signal and communication systems shall be in separate volume(s) The covers shall be imprinted with the name of the job, Owner, Architect, Electrical Engineer, Contractor and year of completion The back edge shall be imprinted with the name of the job, Owner and year of completion Hard board covers and literature contained may be held together with screw post bindings Bayless Bindery (206) 622 -6395 acceptable F A preliminary copy, complete except for the bound cover, shall be submitted 60 days prior to completion of the project for checking and review Four (4) bound, final, corrected copies shall be provided Deliver one (1) to Sparling, Inc Deliver three (3) to the Owner via the Architect 20 days prior to scheduled instruction periods Obtain a receipt for the manuals and forward a copy of the receipt to both the Architect and Engineer with the completed form 1 12 INSTRUCTION PERIODS After substantial completion of the work and 20 days after the 0 M manuals have been delivered to the owner and after all tests and final inspection of the work by the Authority(s) Having Jurisdiction; the Contractor shall demonstrate the electrical systems and instruct the Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the various electrical systems The Contractor shall arrange scheduled instruction periods with the Owner The Contractor s representatives shall be superintendents or foremen knowledgeable in each system and suppliers representatives when so specified Scheduled instruction periods shall be 1 Lighting Control Power Distribution System 1/2 day 2 Fire Alarm System 1/2 day 3 Nurse Call Systems 1/2 day 1 13 FINAL ACCEPTANCE REQUEST The Contractor shall submit to the Architect, with a copy to the Engineer, a Job Completion Form (form attached in this section) properly filled out prior to the time final acceptance of the electrical work is requested At this time also submit copies of final inspection certificates and receipts for loose materials (microphones, etc turned over to the Owner 16010 5 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL GENERAL PROVISIONS JOB COMPLETION FORM PROJECT NAME PROJECT LOCATION. DATE A Electrical Inspectors Final Acceptance Copy of certificate attached Name Agency B Fire Marshal s Final Acceptance of Fire Alarm System Copy of certificate attached Date Name Agency Date C The following systems have been demonstrated to Owner's representative 1 Lighting Power Systems Owner's Rep Date 2 Fire Alarm System Owner's Rep Date 3 Communication Systems Owner's Rep Date D Record Drawings Attached Transmitted previously to Date E O M Manuals Attached Transmitted previously to Date F Test Reports Attached Transmitted previously to Date G The work is complete in accordance with contract documents and authorized changes except for and the architect /engineer s representative is requested to meet with at on Supervisor of Electrical Work Time Date Contractors Rep Signature Date Note Additional copies of this form are available from Sparling, Inc 720 Olive Way, Suite 1100, Seattle, WA 98101 16010 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 14 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS When the following abbreviations and definitions are used in relation to the work for Divisions 16 they shall have the following meanings Item Accepted AHJ ANSI Approved ASTM Boxes Code Connection EMT Exterior Location Fully Oper- ational Furnish ICEA Install RCM Mfr NEC NEMA NFPA $eaninq Reviewed with no exceptions taken to submittal material See "Submittal" below Authority Having Jurisdiction American National Standards Institute Inspected and accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction American Society for Testing Materials Outlet, Junction or Pull Boxes All codes currently enforced at project location Compression Compressed using a leverage powered (hydraulic or equivalent) crimping tool All materials and labor required for equipment to be fully operational Electrical Metallic Tubing Outside of or penetrating the outer surfaces of the building weather protective membrane Tested and approved and operating to the satisfaction of the AHJ, manufacturer and contract documents Deliver to the jobsite Insulated Cable Engineers Association To enter permanently into the project and make fully operational Thousand circular mils (formerly MCM) Manufacturer National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association Publication #70 (latest adopted edition with amendments) National Electrical Manufacturers Association National Fire Protection Association 16010 1 SECTION 16010 PAGE 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16010 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL GENERAL PROVISIONS Noted PVC Provide RGS Required Shop Drawing Shown Submittal UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc Wiring Shown or specified in the contract documents Polyvinyl Chloride Furnish and install Rigid Galvanized Steel As required by code, AHJ or contract documents for the particular installation to be fully operational Hand drafted document which fully details the equipment and intended installation relative to this specified project As indicated on the drawings or details Material for Engineer review which may contain catalog cuts, shop drawings, wiring diagrams, etc of the actual material being furnished Raceway, conductors and connections END OF SECTION 16010 2 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS MCRINLEY GORDON SECTION 16030 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL TESTING PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION Test and provide written certification that the entire electrical installation complies with contract documents, code and proper system operation Perform acceptance tests in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, NFPA 70B and International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) testing specifications NETA ATS -1991 A Testing company The following testing shall be performed by an independent testing company 1 Molded -Case Circuit Breakers 1 2 SCHEDULE Perform all testing after installation All systems shall pass tests prior to substantial completion or owner occupancy 1 3 RECEPTACLE AND DEVICE TEST A. Receptacle Polarity Test Test every receptacle installed or reconnected under this contract with a receptacle circuit tester Tester shall test for open ground, reverse polarity, open hot, open neutral, hot and ground reversed, hot or neutral and hot open Rewire receptacles with faults and retest Submit test report signed by electrician that performed the test B Ground -Fault Receptacle Circuit Interrupter Tests Test each receptacle or branch circuit breaker having ground -fault circuit protection to assure that the ground -fault circuit interrupter will not operate when subjected to a ground -fault current of less than 4 milliamperes and will operate when subjected to a ground fault current exceeding 6 milliamperes Perform testing using an instrument specifically designed and manufactured for testing ground -fault circuit interrupters Apply the test to the receptacle "TEST" button operation will not be acceptable as a substitute for this test Replace receptacles that do not shutoff power with 5/1000 of an ampere within 1 /40th of a second and retest C Operational Tests Demonstrate the operation of each switch, circuit breaker and other item of electrical control with the systems fully energized and operating Each shall be demonstrated three times 1 4 600 VOLT WIRING A Scope Teat all electrical feeders whose operating voltage is 600 volts or less that are installed or reconnected under this contract B Test for continuity of each circuit C Test for grounds in each circuit which shall consist of the physical examination of the installation to ensure that all required ground jumpers, devices, and appurtenances do exist and are mechanically firm 16030 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS MCK)NLEY GORDON SECTION 16030 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL TESTING D Perform a 500 volt megohm meter test on each circuit between the conductor and ground The insulation resistance shall not be less than 2 megohms for circuits under 115V, 6 megohms between conductor and ground on those circuits (115V -600V) with total single conductor length of 2,500 feet and over, nor leas than 8 megohms for those circuits (115V -600V) with single conductor length of less than 2,500 feet If conductor fails test replace wiring or correct defect and retest E Perform torque test for every conductor tested and terminated in an overcurrent device or bolted type connection; torque all connections per manufacturers recommendations and tabulate the results on a tabular form 1 5 POWER SYSTEM TESTS A Scope Inspect and test entire electrical systems provided by this contract to verify equipment and controls are correctly operating B Load Balance Tests Checks all panelboards for proper load balance between phase conductors and make adjustments as necessary to bring unbalanced phases to within 15% of average load C Motor Tests Check all motors for proper rotation and measure actual load current Submit tabulation of motor currents for all motors 1 HP or more after the HVAC system has been balanced D Phase Relationship Tests Check connections to all new and existing equipment for proper phase relationship During such check, disconnect all devices which could be damaged by the application of voltage or reversed phase sequence E Transformer Taps Connect all transformers at "Normal" tap After facility is completely occupied for two weeks, measure secondary voltages at all new and existing transformers Forward a list to engineer including service switchboard voltmeter reading at the time of the test for evaluation Reconnect taps as subsequently directed PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 TESTING COMPANY A Retain the services of an independent testing company that is qualified to test electrical equipment, and is an approved testing company by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries The testing company shall not be associated with the manufacturer of equipment or systems under test Approved companies Electro -Test, Apparatus Service and Engineering Technology, Inc Westinghouse Engineering Service (for equipment not manufactured by Westinghouse) B Testing company shall prepare test reports on the systems they test 2 2 TEST EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall provide all apparatus and material required for testing The Contractor shall use installation tools and test 16030 2 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16030 PAGE 3 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL TESTING equipment which are designed for the specific task and shall use this equipment per the manufacturer s instructions All test equipment shall have current calibration certification by a third party calibration laboratory, and shall have a signed and dated calibration sticker affixed to the device Calibration shall be traceable to the National Bureau of Standards and be less than 6 months since last calibration Defective test equipment and installation tools shall not be used Installation tools such as torque wrenches shall be calibration certified PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PROJECT DOCUMENTS Deliver the following project documents to testing company two weeks prior to testing: Division 16 Specification Electrical Floor Plans showing equipment to be tested Electrical One Line Diagrams Submittals of Manufacturers Data and Shop Drawings including engineers review letter of all systems to be tested Coordination Study 3 2 SCHEDULE Notify Architect 10 working days prior to performance of any test 3 3 TEST REPORTS A The Contractor shall prepare test reports including description of project, description of equipment tested, description of teat, test results, conclusions and recommendations, retesting results and list of test equipment used and calibration date B One copy of each test report shall be delivered directly to the electrical engineer and Owner within 7 calendar days of the test C Insert a copy of each test report in the operation and maintenance manuals 3 4 RETESTING Any fault in material or in any part of the installation revealed by these tests shall be investigated, replaced or repaired by the Contractor and the same test repeated at Contractor's expense until no fault appears 3 5 LABELS Upon completion of the tests a label shall be attached to all serviced devices These labels shall indicate date serviced and the testing company 3 6 OBSERVATIONS BY ENGINEER Contractor shall remove and replace covers of electrical equipment, open manholes and remove /replace ceiling tiles to permit engineer to observe equipment and wiring provided Furnish ladder and flashlight 16030 3 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McXITILEY GORDON SECTION 16030 PAGE 4 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL TESTING 3 7 TROUBLESHOOTING If a system or device provided under this contract does not operate per manufacturers specifications contractor shall provide qualified men with tools and test equipment to find and repair problem at contractor's expense END OF SECTION 16030 4 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16051 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL EXISTING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED WORK Same as in Section 16010 General Provisions 1 2 EXISTING SYSTEMS MAINTAINED A Prior to bidding, existing systems and systems adjacent to the work shall be investigated thoroughly Any damage resulting from performance of work under this contract shall be repaired to assure continuing operation and integrity during and at completion of the project at no increase in contract cost Any existing wiring serving devices to remain in service and which is interrupted by work performed under this contract shall be rerouted to maintain circuit continuity Contractor shall assume the risk of maintaining existing systems except relocation of wiring of 12 AWG and above shall be considered an additional cost if not shown to be relocated If such wiring is found the Contractor shall notify Architect of wiring location, reason it must be removed and cost of relocation and receive the Owner's approval before proceeding with the work The building will continue operation during the work and it is essential that no systems operation be interrupted unless scheduled with the Architect Contractor shall assume responsibility for unscheduled interruptions and expedient repair B All ceiling areas in project area Provide new raceway support system for all existing raceways above existing or new accessible ceilings in accordance with Section 16110 3 8 (Note: The original construction consists of raceways being supported by the ceiling suspension system which is unacceptable to the Electrical Inspector Provide new earthquake support system for all existing fixtures in project area in accordance with Section 16500 1 3 EXISTING SYSTEMS CONCEALED A. The electrical drawings show portions of the existing electrical systems which are to remain, be removed or be modified as a part of the Contractor s work. Concealed features of the existing systems are derived from record drawings and the Engineer's best judgment of the configuration, but no guarantee is made as to their correctness B The Contractor shall inspect the existing installation prior to bidding and shall make his own judgment as to the work required to provide a complete installation and demolition within the intent of the contract documents 1 4 EXISTING SYSTEM DRAWINGS The drawings show portions of the existing systems which are derived from record drawings The drawings are incomplete and no guarantee is made to their correctness The Contractor shall assume there is 20% more electrical systems than shown on the demolition and existing system drawings 1 5 DEMOLITION WORK All demolition work required under this contract is not shown on the drawings The Contractor shall remove all electrical equipment in the area being remodeled which is no longer in 16051 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McXINLEY GORDON SECTION 16051 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL EXISTING SYSTEMS service presently or as a result of this contract The definition of electrical equipment is any equipment mentioned in the National Electrical Code 1 6 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT Removing, temporary hanging by chains and reinstalling in ceilings of light fixtures, speakers, detectors, exit signs and other electrical equipment is not shown on the drawings The Contractor shall investigate the ceiling demolition work and include this work in the bid The sequence of work shall be (1) Remove and store fixtures, detectors and speakers along with removal of ceiling, (2) Provide temporary support for wired fixtures and devices to be reinstalled in new ceiling at approximately the same location Use chains for lighting fixture support, (3) Clean and reinstall in the new or replaced ceilings Provide new lamps when so noted Provide temporary relocation of exit signs connected to existing emergency circuits and reinstall in the original location when exit is reactivated 1 7 PREMIUM TIME Premium time shall be included in the Base Bid for electrical system(s) outages and for other work as required by the schedule, as shown on the drawings and as noted in other Divisions of the specifications 1 8 WORK OUTSIDE OF REMODEL AREAS Caution this work is not shown on the contract documents Provide new wiring systems in concealed ceiling spaces to switchboards, panelboards, communication and signaling and system control panels Provide new conduit systems in ceiling spaces of floor below remodel floors Remove and relocate electrical equipment in the way of other trades work installed under this contract Spaces above existing ceilings are highly congested Route wiring around obstructions and provide pull boxes per code PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 EXISTING MATERIALS All materials which are a part of the building shall remain the property of the Owner 2 2 EXISTING MATERIALS TO BE REINSTALLED Existing materials and equipment (except interior, undamaged raceways) that are removed as a part of the work or stored in surplus shall not be reinstalled as a part of the new systems unless specifically noted or authorized in writing by the Owner Forward a copy of the authorization to the Engineer The requirements of the specifications (i e condition, installation, testing, etc shall apply as if the materials were new, furnished by the Contractor 2 3 EXISTING MATERIALS NOT TO BE REINSTALLED A. In coordination with the Architect, these materials shall be made available for his inspection and decision as to whether the Owner will retain possession Items selected for retention shall be turned over to the Owner These items shall be delivered to a location on the premises selected by the Owner Take reasonable care to avoid damage to this material If the Contractor fails to 16051 2 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL EXISTING SYSTEMS conform to this requirement, he shall purchase and turn over to the Owner replacement material of like kind and quantity B All material not selected for retention by the Owner and debris shall be legally disposed of by the Contractor 2 4 EXISTING RACEWAYS The Contractor may reuse the existing raceways if no other systems occupy the raceway, raceways and enclosures are electrically and mechanically continuous and new wiring is provided No warranty is made and the Contractor shall assume the risk of using existing outlet boxes and raceway systems PART 3 EXECUTION SECTION 16051 PAGE 3 3 1 EXISTING CONDITIONS Examine the structure, building, and conditions under which electrical work is to be installed for conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of electrical work. Do not proceed with work until deficiencies or detrimental conditions have been corrected Report deficiencies or detrimental conditions of existing electrical work which might be unsuitable to connect with or receive other work Failure to so report shall constitute acceptance of other work as being fit and proper for the reception of electrical work. 3 2 EXISTING SYSTEMS MAINTAINED A General Reroute existing circuits that are interrupted as a result of this contract that serve devices to remain in service 1 Power Circuits Trace out and identify loads and systems being served Provide temporary wiring, schedule outage and reconnect loads to temporary wiring Provide new wiring in new location Schedule outage, disconnect temporary wiring, and connect loads to new wiring 2 Signal and Communication Systems Trace out and identify device and systems being served Provide temporary wiring to maintain operation of system throughout facility Schedule outage and connect to temporary wiring and test system Provide new wiring and new equipment in project area Schedule outage, disconnect temporary wiring and connect new wiring and new equipment and test system 16051 3 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS Mc1INLEY GORDON SECTION 16051 PAGE 4 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL EXISTING SYSTEMS 3 3 DEMOLITION Panelboards, signaling and communication systems, lighting fixtures, other electrical equipment free standing or surface mounted, raceway (exposed) and conductors; which are no longer in service presently or as a result of this contract shall be removed Unused flush mounted devices, outlet and other boxes in finished areas shall be removed from wall and the remaining hole patched to match adjacent wall surfaces Unused raceways and sleeves embedded in concrete shall be cut flush at ceiling, floor or wall and filled with grout Unused raceways above ceilings that are removed shall be removed Contractor shall remove all floor, wall or ceiling mounted electrical equipment in the "Demolition Area" indicated on the drawings even if the equipment /or device is not shown on the project drawings If Contractor questions whether a particular device is to be removed notify the Architect noting type and location of device If so directed the Contractor shall maintain the existing device in service without any change in contract price 3 4 POWER OUTAGES A. Scheduled Outages The facility will continue its normal operation during the construction work; therefore it is required that the Contractor schedule electrical system(s) outages with the Owner Electrical system(s) outages to Owner occupied areas shall not be permitted from 7 00 am to 6 00 pm on any day of the week Submit a written request for a power outage at least one week in advance identifying the areas, and systems that will be affected, time and duration of the power outage The Contractor shall receive written authorization to proceed with the outage and shall renotify the Owner verbally at least one hour prior to the outage and also notify the Owner when the outage is completed B Unscheduled Outages In the event that the Contractor's work causes or contributes to an unscheduled system(s) outage (or other system fault), the Contractor is responsible for immediately correcting the problem. Included (as examples) shall be any premium time required to stay on the job site until problem is corrected and air freight for parts not locally available If the Contractor fails to correct the problem, the Owner s cost of correcting the problem shall be deducted from the Contractor s contract amount C Removal or relocation of existing panelboards Prior to demolition work, trace out and identify each branch circuit and feeder circuit Temporarily refeed branch circuits and feeder circuits that serve loads in occupied areas Outages for each branch circuit shall not be more than 20 minutes Remove or relocate the panelboard Move feeders and circuits to relocated or new panelboards Outages shall not be more than 20 minutes 3 5 ACCESS TO PERFORM WORK Carefully remove, store or temporarily hang and re- install in undamaged condition all electrical equipment, lighting fixtures and ceiling tiles where access to perform work is required Clean prior to re- installation 16051 4 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKIWLEY GO!WON SECTION 16051 PAGE 5 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL EXISTING SYSTEMS 3 6 NEW DEVICES IN REMODEL AREAS Provide flush mounting for devices in existing walls Fish conduit in wall Where existing boxes are indicated to be reused, extend box as necessary and provide new devices and plates Contractor is cautioned that the existing building contains clay tile and concrete walls New devices may require cutting, patching, and painting of walls and it shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide all cutting, patching and painting required for the installation of the Division 16 work. Contractor shall investigate existing areas prior to bid and shall include all costs of such work in the bid This facility has wiring embedded in raceways in concrete slabs Provide new concealed wiring to last outlet or pull box before homerun to panel END OF SECTION 16051 5 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McXINLEY GORDON SECTION 16100 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION This section contains the general requirements for materials and installation methods which apply to all sections of Division 16 All materials and equipment shall be installed in conformance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and U L requirements PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 GENERAL A. All materials to be new, free from defects and not less than quality herein specified (except as permitted in Section 16050) Materials shall be designed to insure satisfactory operation and operational life in the environmental conditions which will prevail where they are being installed B Each type of materials furnished shall be of the same make, be standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such materials and be the manufacturer's latest standard design C All materials and equipment installed, including lighting fixtures, shall have been tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories or other approved testing organization and shall be so labeled unless otherwise permitted by the Code Inspector (AHJ) and the Architect 2 2 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A Listing of materials is not intended to prevent listing of other material provided the substitute product is submitted for listing and has been reviewed and listed in accordance with the following Substitution of Materials requirements 1 No Substitute It is the intent of this specification to require new materials to be compatible with the existing installation and to this end certain materials and systems are indicated "No Substitute" and shall be provided as specified 2 Listing Prior to Bid Opening Listing of products other than those specified will be issued after the following requirements are met Requests to be original material, clearly indicating the product fully complies with contract documents and be neatly marked with yellow felt -tip marker to clearly define and describe the product for which listing is requested Include certified laboratory test report for lighting fixtures Samples shall be submitted if requested Requests shall be received prior to 10 days before bid opening. Requests containing insufficient information to confirm compliance with contract documents will not be considered 16100 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16100 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3 After Award of Contract Substitution of products will be considered after award of contract only under the following conditions a The Contractor shall have placed orders for specified materials promptly after contract is awarded b The reason for the unavailability is beyond the Contractor's control, i e due to strikes, bankruptcy, discontinuance of manufacture, acts of God c Requests for substitutions shall be made in writing and shall be accompanied by complete description of the material or equipment B In all cases, should a substituted material result in requiring electrical system or building modifications; the Contractor alone shall pay all costs to provide these modifications including all costs to the Engineer and Architect for redesign time required to accommodate the required modifications 2 3 COMPLETE SYSTEMS All the systems mentioned shall be complete in every detail and fully operational upon completion of the project unless specifically noted otherwise Mention of certain materials in these specifications shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor from furnishing such additional materials and performing all labor required to provide complete and fully operational systems 2 4 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A Submittals Within 30 days after award of contract, submit common brochure(s) with index and divider tabs by specification section, containing all required catalog cuts, to the Architect in a three ring binder with hardboard cover The data shall indicate listing by U L or other approved testing agency and contain sufficient information neatly highlighted with yellow or blue marker to demonstrate that the materials being submitted fully comply with contract documents Each item submitted shall have been stamped "Reviewed and Approved" by the Contractor prior to review by the Architect (Note Submittals and shop drawings which are incomplete or which contain insufficient information will be returned for resubmittal See General Conditions for format, quantity, etc B Shop Drawings Shop drawings shall be submitted as soon as available but not later than 45 days after award of contract Shop drawings shall show the ratings of items and systems and how the components of an item or system are assembled, interconnected, function together and how they will be installed on the project System layout drawings shall show floor plans with complete device layout and point -to -point wiring and connection diagrams between all components of the system Show wire sizes and color coding C The contractor agrees that submittals and shop drawings processed by the Architect are not change orders; that the purpose of 16100 2 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16100 PAGE 3 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS submittals and shop drawings by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use The Contractor alone accepts all responsibility for assuring that all materials furnished under this Division of the specifications meet in full all requirements of the contract documents The Engineer s review is for general conformance with the design concept and contract documents Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the project plans and specifications, nor departures therefrom. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes and for techniques of assembly D Submittals are required for Qualification Certificates Contract Cost Breakdown Raceways Wire and Cables Floor Boxes and Poke -Thru Devices Wiring Devices Motor Controllers Disconnects and Fused Switches Fuses Panelboards Lighting Fixtures and Ballasts Fire Alarm w /AHJ approval indicated Nurse Call Systems TV System E Shop Drawings are required for Nurse Call System Fire Alarm w /AHJ approval indicated 2 5 NAMEPLATES Provide permanently attached nameplates constructed of plastic (black on white) laminated material engraved through black surface material to white sublayer Exception Emergency distribution system component labeling white letters on red background A Job Nameplate Refer to Section 16470 B Switchboard and Panelboard Nameplates Refer to Sections 16470 and 16471 C Receptacle Nameplates Refer to Section 16140 D Motor Starter and Disconnect Nameplates Refer to Sections 16160 and 16170 E Special Equipment Outlet Nameplates Refer to appropriate Sections 16100 3 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS F Emergency Power System Nameplates Refer to Section 16470 G As shown on the drawings and details PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 CUTTING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION A. Obtain permission from the Architect and coordinate with other trades prior to cutting Locate cuttings so they will not weaken structural components Cut carefully and only the minimum amount necessary Cut concrete with diamond core drills or concrete saws except where space limitations prevent the use of such tools B All construction materials damaged or cut into during the installation of this work must be repaired or replaced with materials of like kind and quality as original materials by skilled labor experienced in that particular building trade 3 2 EXCAVATIONS A Excavations shall not disturb or injure walls, footings or other property B Remove all surplus earth not needed for backfilling and dispose of same as directed C See Section 16105 3 3 PENETRATIONS OF FIRE RATED ELEMENTS Must be provided such as to retain that rating SECTION 16100 PAGE 4 3 4 PAINTING A Painting in general will be covered under another Division of this specification, except items furnished under this Division that are scratched or marred in shipment or installation shall be refinished B Exposed raceways and /or Wiremold (when allowed) in finished areas, shall be painted with two coats of oil based paint Paint color shall match color of surface the raceway is attached to 3 5 CLEAN UP Contractor shall continually remove debris, cuttings, crates, cartons, etc created by his work. Such clean up shall be done daily and at sufficient frequency to eliminate hazard to the public, other workmen, the building or the Owner's employees Before acceptance of the installation, Contractor shall carefully clean cabinets, panels, lighting fixtures, wiring devices, cover plates, etc to remove dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster, mortar, concrete, etc Blemishes to finished surfaces of apparatus shall be removed and new finish equal to the original applied 3 6 WORKMANSHIP AND OBSERVATION A. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and none but competent and experienced electricians shall be employed and shall be under the supervision of a competent and experienced foreman All completed work shall represent a neat and orderly appearance 16100 4 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16100 PAGE 5 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS B All work and materials shall be subject to observation at any and all times by representatives of the Architect 3 7 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION A For equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the specifications, or by owner; provide complete all electrical connections necessary to serve such equipment and provide required control connections to all equipment so that the equipment is fully operational upon completion of the project Whenever the drawings show an equipment connection the Contractor shall provide the code required disconnect switch B Prior to rough -in, obtain submittals and shop drawings for all equipment requiring electrical connections being furnished under other divisions of the specifications and by the owner Provide all wiring per the wiring diagrams and requirements indicated 3 8 INTERFACE WITH OTHER TRADES A The Contractor shall continually interface and coordinate the electrical work with the work of other trades B At each switchboard, panelboard and motor control center location the Contractor shall monitor the work of all trades to assure that the space and clearance requirements of code are met 3 9 HOUSEKEEPING PADS A Provide concrete housekeeping pad under each floor mounted switchboard, transformer, motor control center and generator Size 4" greater (horizontal minimum) than base of equipment mounted thereon Minimum height 3 1/2" Refer to Division 3 for "Cast in Place" concrete Equipment mounting bolts to be Grade 8 B When housekeeping pad is poured on previously poured concrete or is for engine or motor driven equipment, the pad shall be reinforced #4, 12" o c both ways) and the rebar shall be tied to the existing floor via Grade 8 j -bolts (previously set) or expansion bolts or other acceptable means The existing slab shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared for the pad just before the pour END OF• SECTION 16100 5 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY- CORDON SECTION 16110 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL RACEWAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION Provide all raceway systems complete and in conformance with code PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RGS) AND INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) A Hot dipped galvanized steel Fittings Galvanized malleable iron or noncorrosive alloy threaded fittings compatible with galvanized conduit Erickson couplings, watertight split couplings, similar to OZ permitted Set screw and running thread fittings not permitted B Wherever rigid galvanized steel conduit is specified, intermediate metal conduit is permitted unless noted or required otherwise 2 2 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A Hot dip galvanized, electrogalvanized or sherardized, steel tubing B Couplings and Connectors Raintight; steel or malleable iron type using a split corrugated compression ring and tightening nut or stainless steel locking disc Steel set screw fittings are permitted Indenter, drive -on and pressure cast or diecast type fittings are not permitted 2 3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A Galvanized, or zinc coated flexible steel for dry locations Aluminum and flexible metallic tubing not permitted Fittings malleable iron or steel, similar to Thomas and Betts "squeeze" type B Liquid Tight Flexible-Metal Conduit PVC weatherproof cover over flexible steel conduit Fittings similar to Thomas and Betts "Super -Tite" 2 4 METAL SURFACE RACEWAY Formed steel type Standard Factory painted finish Where color choice is available, consult Architect for selection Manufacturer Wiremold 2 5 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT (PVC) Schedule 40, rigid polyvinyl chloride type, unless noted otherwise Type BB permitted for underground rebar reinforced concrete duct banks PVC elbows not permitted 2 6 EXPANSION FITTINGS Malleable iron, hot dip galvanized allowing 4" -2 conduit movement O -Z /Gedney type AX series 2 7 RACEWAY PENETRATION SEALS Thruwall and Floor Seals New Construction OZ /Gedney FSK Series, existing construction OZ /Gedney CSM Series 2 8 RACEWAY SEALING FITTINGS For one through four conductors OZ /Gedney CSB Series For greater than four conductors OZ /Gedney EYA Series with sealing 16110 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL RACEWAYS compound Low Temperature or Hazardous Locations OZ /Gedney EYA Series with sealing compound PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL A. Provide raceways concealed in construction unless noted otherwise or unless specifically authorized by the Architect B Supports, bending, reaming and threading of raceway shall conform with code 3 2 RIGID METAL AND INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT All connections watertight Shall be used for 1) all raceways where subject to damage, 2) all stubups in concrete, 3) all stubouts through concrete walls or from slabs, 4) where exposed to weather 3 3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) Provide for wiring in masonry or frame construction and for wiring in furred ceilings and above suspended ceilings May be used for exposed work in unfinished areas where not subject to damage Where construction involves masonry work, assemble and install at the same time as the wall is erected Avoid surface cut masonry units wherever such masonry units are to remain unplastered or uncovered in completed construction EMT not permitted to be encased in concrete slabs 3 4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT Provide flexible raceway connection with 90 degree loop minimum for isolation to 1) motors 2) transformers and 3) to all other equipment subject to vibration, (i e control equipment, such as solenoid valves, pressure controls, aquastats, pneumatic electric relays, etc Provide liquid tight for pumps, for equipment in areas which are regularly washed down, and for equipment in damp or wet locations Provide code bonding jumper 3 5 METAL SURFACE RACEWAY Verify exact mounting and locations with Architect prior to rough in Install parallel to a building surface (i e wall, ceiling, floor) Fasten to surface as recommended by manufacturer Mount so raceway is in the least obvious location Ream all cuts smooth Provide all required boxes, extensions, fittings, elbows and devices for a complete installation Provide bushings in ends of Wiremold 500 and 700 runs at all boxes and devices 3 6 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A When permitted by code, may be used underground, or where completely encased with 2" of concrete (or as required by code) Exception Use rigid steel for elbows, penetrations through floors and walls and stub ups Raceway size may need to be increased to include code required ground wire Provide expansion joints per code Field bends limited to less than 44 degrees, formed with manufacturer's recommended heater B Fire alarm and clock systems in raceway shall be in steel raceway 16110 2 SECTION 16110 PAGE 2 1 Y 1 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16110 PAGE 3 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL RACEWAYS 3 7 RACEWAYS UNDERGROUND A Rigid galvanized steel with a 15 mil PVC jacket (repair abrasions with two coats PVC base paint) Option: Two applications of Scotchrap primer and 51 tape, 1/2 lapped, each application Rigid nonmetallic raceways may be used where permitted by code unless noted otherwise B Arrange and slope raceways entering building to drain away from building C Provide marker tape over underground raceways Marker tape to read "Caution Electric Line Buried Below" as manufactured by Terra Tape or accepted equal Install 1' -0" below grade D Install underground raceways a minimum of 24" below final grade (36" on public property) unless otherwise noted or required E Provide backfill around underground raceways Use clean sand 6" above and below raceways Backfill above 6" shall be free of debris or rocks greater than 1" in diameter Space raceways 7- 1/2" minimum between centers and 3" minimum between raceways F Anchor raceways encased in concrete to prevent floating during pour 3 8 RACEWAYS THAT STUB UP THROUGH FLOOR Install at such depth that the exposed raceway is vertical and no curved section of the elbow is visible 3 9 RACEWAY PENETRATION. SEALS A Exterior wall surfaces above grade Provide watertight seal around all raceways For concrete construction above ground level, cast raceway in wall or core drill wall and hard pack with a mixture of equal parts of sand and cement For other types of construction use method acceptable to Architect B Exterior surfaces below grade Provide watertight seal around all raceways Cast raceway into wall (or floor) or use manufactured seal assembly C Roofs Provide flashed and hot mopped weatherproof seal, or a pitch pan filled and sealed to be weatherproof where raceway penetrates roof membrane Provide a weatherhead on all raceway stubups penetrating roof D Fire rated construction Seal penetrations to maintain fire rating of construction penetrated Caulk around penetration with Thomas Betts Flame -Safe Compound, 3M Fire Barrier Caulk, Nelson Electric Flameseal or Dow Corning Silicone RTV foam Install as recommended by manufacturer 3 10 RACEWAYS SEALING FITTINGS A Provide watertight seal in the interior of all raceways which pass through building roof, ground floor slab or through outside walls of the building above or below grade Seal on the end inside the building, using raceway sealing fittings manufactured for the 16110 3 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS Mc1INLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL RACEWAYS purpose Seal poured type fittings with a non hardening compound manufactured for such service B Provide sealing fittings for all raceways entering freezers and refrigeration units 3 11 HANGERS FOR RACEWAYS A. Raceways 1" and larger Provide lay -in pipe hangers on 3/8" all threaded rods attached to metal ceiling inserts or to structural members at not greater than 10' -0" on center and within 12" of each change in direction B When more than two raceways will use the same routing, group together on a patented channel trapeze support system supported by 3/8" (minimum) threaded rods attached to metal ceiling inserts or structural members C Suspended ceiling systems Do not attach raceways to ceiling suspension system hangers Raceways 3/4" and smaller serving equipment located within ceiling cavity or mounted on or supported by the ceiling grid system may be supported by dedicated 19 ga galvanized, soft annealed mild steel wire hangers Two raceways maximum per hanger Attach raceways with clips manufactured for the purpose Attach hangers to structure and to ceiling system 3 12 PULL CORDS A Provide a pull cord in all raceways for communications and telephone systems B In other raceways, provide a nylon pull cord in those which are left empty at end of the project, greater than 25 feet in length 3 13 PROXIMITY TO HIGH TEMPERATURE SURFACES Maintain 12" minimum clearance 3 14 RACEWAY FILL Raceways not sized on the drawings shall be sized per NEC Table 3A. Raceways for signal and communications systems shall be sized per the shop drawings and code 3 15 EXPANSION FITTINGS Provide expansion fittings for raceways crossing expansion joints, building separation walls, and seismic joints Provide bonding jumper END OF SECTION 16110 4 SECTION 16110 PAGE 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY_.GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION A Provide all conductors, splices and terminations, complete B Refer to Section 16700 and specific sections following for limited energy wiring and conductors PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 POWER CONDUCTORS A. Copper, 600V insulation, UL labeled, brought to project in original containers Aluminum or copper clad aluminum conductors not permitted B Interior and above grade All conductors to be type THW or RHW Type THWN /THHN or XHHW conductors may be utilized at Contractor s option, subject to code requirements Conductors #8 and larger stranded, #10 and #12 solid C Underground Rome -XLP type USE /RHW insulation or equal Exception Underground conductors completely contained in code recognized raceway and boxes may be type THW, THWN or XHHW Type OF direct burial not permitted unless shown on the drawings B Conductor insulation color code SECTION 16120 PAGE 1 CONDUCTORS AND TERMINATIONS COPPER ONLY 208Y/120V A- Black, B -Red, C -Blue, N- White, G -Green 480Y/277V A- Brown, B- Orange, C- Yellow, N- Natural Grey, G- Green Colored tape acceptable on #8 and larger Tape 3" at ends 2 2 SPLICES A. Above Grade Solderless type Preinsulated "twist -on" type (limited to size #10 and smaller) Bolt or compression set type with application of preformed insulated cover, heat shrinkable tubing or plastic insulated tape acceptable for all sizes B Below Grade Provide in handholes with watertight epoxy resin type splicing kits similar to Scotchcast 2 3 TERMINATIONS A Compression set, bolted or screw type terminal B Conductors #12 and smaller compression set terminator block or terminal cabinet 2 4 PLASTIC CABLE TIES Nylon or equivalent, locking type PART 3 EXECUTION screw type lug or direct to bolted or Provide eye or forked tongue at bolted or screw set type terminal 3 1 GENERAL A Install conductors in raceway unless shown or specifically authorized otherwise 16120 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS Mc INLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SECTION 16120 PAGE 2 CONDUCTORS AND TERMINATIONS COPPER ONLY B Conductors from one system shall not be intermixed in same raceway as another system unless shown in same raceway Examples of circuits not to be intermixed are 480/277 with 208 /120, emergency power with normal power, 120V with low voltage, intercom with nurse call, etc C Install splices and terminations in enclosures as required or shown D Tape ends of future circuit conductors in each enclosure 3 2 CONDUCTOR SIZE Number 12 AWG minimum for power and lighting circuits 3 3 CONDUCTOR SIZES SHOWN ON DRAWINGS Copper, type THW, unless noted Aluminum conductors not permitted 3 4 RACEWAY SIZES SHOWN ON DRAWINGS Raceway sizes (when shown) are for THW copper conductors unless shown otherwise Size raceways per code unless specifically shown larger on drawings 3 5 TAPING, if used, shall be half lapped synthetic tape 3 6 CONDUCTORS IN PANELS, SWITCHBOARDS AND TERMINAL CABINETS Install neatly grouped and .formed in a manner to "fan" into terminals with regular spacing 3 7 CONDUCTORS SUPPORTS Provide conductor support devices per code in vertical cable runs END OF SECTION 16120 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKIC GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION Provide outlet, junction and pull boxes as required to enclose devices, permit pulling conductors and for wire splices and branches PART 2 PRODUCTS SECTION 16130 PAGE 1 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 2 1 INTERIOR WIRING A. General Outlet and pull boxes shall be pressed steel, zinc coated with plaster ring where applicable Large junction and pull boxes shall be fabricated sheet steel, zinc coated or baked enamel finish, with return flange and screw retained cover B Metal Surface Raceway Boxes of same manufacture and to match raceway Boxes to accommodate standard devices and device plates C Concrete and Masonry Boxes for casting in concrete or mounting in masonry walls shall be specifically designed for that purpose 2 2 EXTERIOR WIRING A. Above Grade Outlet and junction boxes shall be cast or malleable iron or shall be cast of corrosion resistant alloy, complete with conduit hubs, compatible with raceway to which it is connected Pull boxes shall be fabricated of heavy gauge steel and hot dipped galvanized complete with malleable iron hubs All boxes shall be labeled for damp or wet locations as applicable B Below Grade Where exposed to earth, boxes (handholes) shall be constructed of precast concrete with size, configuration, cover, grates and reinforcing as required by the particular installation Manufacturer Utility Vault or Renton Concrete Products Where not exposed to earth shall comply with 2 2A above PART! 3 EXECUTION 3 1 ANCHORING All boxes shall be firmly anchored directly or with concealed bracing to building studs or joists Boxes must be so attached that they will not "rock" or "shift" when devices are operated 3 2 FLUSH MOUNTING A All boxes shall have front edge (box or plaster ring) even with the finished surface of the wall or ceiling, except for those mounted above accessible ceilings or where drawings indicate surface mounting is permitted B Flush mounted boxes on opposite sides of a common wall shall not be mounted back -to -back. Provide 0' -6" minimum horizontal separation between closest edges of the boxes Option Use other sound proofing method acceptable to Architect 16130 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SECTION 16130 PAGE 2 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 3 3 ELECTRICAL OUTLETS A General Coordinate the work of this Section with the work of other Sections and trades Study all drawings that form a part of this contract and confer with the various trades involved to eliminate conflicts between the work of this Section and the work of other trades Check and verify outlet locations indicated on Architectural drawings, door swings, installation details and layouts of suspended ceilings and locations of all plumbing, heating and ventilating equipment B Centered on Built -In Work: In the case of doors, cabinets, recesses or similar features, or where outlets are centered between two such features, such as between a door jamb and a cabinet, make these outlet locations exact Relocate any outlets which are located off center C Vertical and Horizontal Relationships Where more than one outlet is shown or specified to be at the same elevation or one above the other, align them exactly on center lines horizontally or vertically Relocate as directed all such outlets (including lighting, receptacle, power, signal and thermostat outlets) which are not so installed, at no additional cost to Owner D Device Outlet Height Measure from the finished floor to the center line, unless otherwise noted Switches 4 feet, set vertically Receptacles 18 inches, set vertically or as indicated Telephone 18 inches, set vertically or as indicated Other As noted or as directed by Architect E Ceiling Location For acoustical material locate outlet either at the corner joint or in the center of a panel, whichever is closer to the normal spacing Locate all outlets in the same room in same panel position 3 4 LIGHTING FIXTURES In ceilings of Acoustical Material Locate in accordance with approved ceiling layout plans and so that fixtures replace full size ceiling tiles wherever possible 3 5 ELECTRICAL WORK IN COUNTERBACKS, MILLWORK AND CASEWORK Provide as shown and /or specified Provide templates, where required, to other trades for drilling and cutting to insure accurate location of electrical fixtures (outlets and devices) as verified with the Architect Provide all wiring, devices, plates and connections required by said fixtures 3 6 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT For equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the specifications, or by others; provide outlet boxes of sizes and at locations necessary to serve such equipment and provide final connections to all equipment Outlet box required if equipment has pigtail wires for external connection, does not have space to accommodate circuit wiring or requires a wire with insulation 16130 2 1 1 1 111 1 1 1 t 1 t 1 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SECTION 16130 PAGE 3 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES rating different from circuit wiring used Study equipment details to assure proper coordination 3 7 BLANK COVERS Provide blank covers or plates over all boxes that do not contain devices or are not covered by equipment 3 8 DEVICE BOXES CONTAINING EMERGENCY AND NORMAL DEVICES Permitted only with steel barrier manufactured especially for the purpose of dividing the box into two completely separate compartments 3 9 DEVICE BOXES CONTAINING MULTIPLE DEVICES AND WIRING RATED OVER 150 VOLTS TO GROUND AND OVER 300 VOLTS BETWEEN CONDUCTORS Permitted only with steel barrier manufactured especially for the purpose of dividing the box into separate compartments for each device having exposed live parts 3 10 JUNCTION OR PULL BOXES A Pull and junction boxes shall be installed as shown, or as necessary to facilitate pulling of wire and to limit the number of bends within code requirements Boxes shall be permanently accessible and shall be placed only at locations approved by the Architect B Conductors from one system shall not be intermixed in same junction box or pull box as another system unless shown or specifically authorized otherwise C In suspended ceiling spaces shall be supported from structure independently from ceiling suspension system D The drawings do not necessarily show every pull or junction box required The Contractor shall add all boxes required 3 11 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS Conceal the electrical outlet behind the unit housing when provided for by manufacturer 3 12 BOXES IN EARTH Provide for all wire splices and as required to pull conductors Boxes (handholes) smaller than 3' -0" x 3 -0" shall be set in place on a 3" sand or pea gravel bed Larger boxes shall have 6" bed Coverplates shall be flush to, and match the slope of, the final surface grade 3 13 COLOR CODING A All junction boxes installed in accessible ceiling spaces and exposed in unfinished areas shall be color coded using spray paint on the box and cover as applicable in the following manner 480 Power Brown Telephone Black 277V Lighting Yellow Nurse Call Lt Blue 16130 3 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS MCXINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL 120/208V Unpainted Fire Alarm Red B Following painting use black felt circuit numbers contained within END OF SECTION 16130 4 SECTION 16130 PAGE 4 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES Emergency Power Orange Television Gold tip marker to indicate the MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16140 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION Provide all wiring devices and plates complete and fully operational PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURE Wiring devices shall be the product of a nationally recognized manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing such products 2 2 COLOR A Ivory material for switch handles and receptacle faces except as follows; 1 Brown in areas selected by Architect (verify) 2 Red for emergency circuits 3 Other colors as noted B Plates shall be as specified below and as noted 2 3 SWITCHES A. "Specification Grade Federal Specification WS -896, back and side wired, rated 277 volt, 20 amp Provide single pole, double pole, keyed, 3 -way, pilot light, locking type or as required or as noted Provide matching styles and color in other devices as required for the conditions of installation Arrow Hart 1991 -I, Bryant 4901 -1, Eagle 2221V, General Electric GE 5951 -2G, Hubbell 1221 -I, Leviton 1221 -I, Pass Seymour 20AC1 -I B Interchangeable type shall be rated same as above C Momentary Contact Line Voltage Switches Single pole, double throw, 3 -wire, spring return to open Rating same as above D Pilot light switches Lighted handle when "ON or with separate pilot light 2 4 DIMMERS A. Incandescent Preset Dimmers Incandescent wall box dimmers shall be rated for incandescent, inductive or low voltage loads as required by the load served with RFI filter and preset off control Dimmer shall be capable of being controlled by multiple remotes and shall automatically come back to the previously set light level after power outages Dimmer shall fit in a standard GFCI wall plate and shall gang with other standard switches and receptacles utilizing standard faceplates Dimmer shall be rated for 125% of the maximum wattage that can be installed in the controlled fixtures (minimum) Leviton 10600 -PI Series, Lightolier Sunrise Preset ZP600VA, ZP1000VA Series, Lutron Maestro Series B Incandescent Preset Dimmer Remotes Shall provide full control of dimmer from a remote location, Leviton 10000 -P, Lightolier ZPR -3, Lutron Maestro Series 16140 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McXINLEY GORDON 16140 2 SECTION 16140 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES C Fluorescent Preset Dimmers Shall be compatible with the fluorescent dimming ballasts installed in the fixtures to be controlled, shall fit in a standard GFCI type wall plate, shall have a preset off control, shall be capable of being controlled by multiple remotes, and shall gang with other standard switches and receptacles utilizing standard faceplates Leviton 6661 -P1I, Lightolier ZP600F or ZP1000F Series, Lutron Maestro Series 2 5 RECEPTACLES A Hospital grade (15 amp), Duplex NEMA 5 -15R configuration (15 amp, 120 volt) Federal Specification WC -596F Arrow Hart 5226 -HGI, Bryant 8200 -I, Eagle 8200V, General Electric 8200 -2, Hubbell 8200HI, Leviton 8200 -I, Pass Seymour 9200 -HGI B Hospital Grade (20 amp), Duplex NEMA 5 -20R configuration (20 amp, 120 volt), Federal Specification WC -596 F Arrow Hart 5326 -HGI, Bryant 8300 -I, Eagle 8300V, General Electric 8300 -2, Hubbell 8300HI, Leviton 8300 -I, Pass Seymour 9300 -HGI C Specification Grade, Duplex NEMA 5 -15R configuration (15 amp, 120 volt), Federal Specification WC -596F, back and side wired, unless shown otherwise Arrow Hart 5252 -I, Bryant 5252 -I, Eagle 5252V, General Electric GEN 5252 -2, Hubbell 5252 -I, Leviton 5252 -I, Pass Seymour 5252 -I D Clock Receptacle: NEMA 5 -15R with hanger bracket Flush Type Hubbell 5235 Recessed Type Leviton 5361 -CH, or equivalent by manufacturer listed is 2 5A. E Twist Lock: NEMA L5 -20R configuration (20 amp, 120 volt, locking type) Hubbell 2310A, or equivalent by manufacturer listed in 2 5A. F Isolated Ground Hospital Grade, NEMA 5 -15R configuration orange face and isolated ground terminal Hubbell IG 8200 or equivalent by manufacturer listed in 2 5A G Safety Receptacles Safety type receptacles for designated areas shall be hospital grade, cross shunting type to make it necessary for both plug blades to be inserted to complete a circuit NEMA 5 -15R configuration Hubbell #SG62HI, General Electric GE8200 -T2, Leviton 5262 -SGI, Arrow Hart 6352 -I Safety receptacles are the same as tamperproof receptacles H Ground Fault Receptacles Hospital grade duplex receptacle with 4 6 milliamps leakage current trip level Ivory color Hubbell HGF- 8200I, Pass Seymour 1591 -SHG, Leviton 6598 -HGI, Arrow Hart GF8200 -I I Surge Protection Receptacles Hospital grade, rectangular, 15 amp, 120 volt duplex configuration with built in surge protection and monitor /indicator lights Surge protection receptacles shall be UL 1449 listed for both categories A and B and shall comply with ANSI /IEEE C62 41 Devices shall suppress transients in both normal mode (line to neutral) and common mode (line to ground) energy dissipation shall be 70 joules minimum with 6500 amp peak surge current Hubbell 8200HIS, Pass Seymour 6262 -ISP, Leviton 8280 -I, Arrow Hart 8200 -SI MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16140 PAGE 3 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES J 208 Volt Receptacles NEMA 6 -20R configuration (20 amp, 208 volt) unless otherwise indicated Hubbell #5462 -I or equivalent by manufacturer listed in 2 5A. 2 6 DEVICE PLATES A. Interiors Plates for receptacles other than 15 and 20A, 120V shall have the plate engraved or separate nameplate with ampere rating, voltage and phase indicated Plates for recessed boxes shall be stainless steel with Sierra type 302 satin stainless finish Attachment screws shall match finish of plate Plates for surface mounted boxes shall be of pressed steel sized to fit exactly box used B Exterior Bell #RCH1 -GFR, Pass Seymour 4511, Hubbell CWP 26H (horizontal mounting) for GFCI duplex receptacles Where horizontal mounting is not possible provide Bell #RCV1 -GFR, Pass Seymour 4512 or Hubbell WP26 For receptacles other than 15A and 20A provide weatherproof cover to match receptacle C Engraving Branch Circuit Designation Device Plates 1 Emergency receptacle device plates shall be engraved "Emergency" above the receptacle with the panelboard and circuit number supplying them engraved below the receptacle Engraving shall be approximately 1/4" high, red filled characters 2 Normal receptacle coverplates in Critical Care Areas as defined in the NEC, and shall have the circuit number supplying them engraved below the receptacle with 1/4" high, black filled letters 3 The electrical contractor shall be responsible to have faceplates on all owner furnished equipment and equipment furnished under other divisions engraved with circuit number, panelboard and "emergency" (where applies) as specified in this section This includes but is not limited to headwalls, gas columns and booms, patient consoles, medical rail systems, custom casework with electrical devices, etc 2 7 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLY Provide assemblies complete, including necessary fittings and hardware with circuits as indicated on drawings Outlet spacing shall be as indicated except that a receptacle shall be located within 0' -8" of each end and no receptacles shall be installed over sinks All assemblies shall contain green ground wire Provide 040" thick steel assembly with standard factory ivory painted finish Wiremold 20GBA 12 series or equivalent by Walker 2 8 CORD CAPS (PLUGS) A Provide hospital grade cord caps for all 120V cord connected equipment provided or installed under this contract Hubbell 8215C, Pass Seymour 5266 -%HG, or Leviton 5266 HGN, Arrow Hart 5266NHG B Provide cord caps for all receptacle configurations other than NEMA 5 -15R and 5 -20R to match type of receptacle installed 16140 3 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16140 PAGE 4 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 2 9 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL See Section 16930 2 10 POWER /COMMUNICATION RACEWAY A Provide assembly complete with barrier between receptacle and communication sections including necessary fittings and hardware as indicated on drawings Outlets spacing shall be as indicated except that a receptacle shall be located within 0' -8" of each end and no receptacles shall be installed over sinks All assemblies shall contain green ground wire Provide with hospital grade or specification grade duplex receptacles as specified in 2 5C B Provide 040" thick steel assembly with standard factory grey or ivory painted finish Wiremold G -4000 series or equivalent by Walker PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 MOUNTING Rigidly fasten (without play) each outlet box and each device to the outlet box at proper position with the wall to bring receptacle flush with plate or switch handle the proper distance through the plate All devices and plates shall be aligned to be plumb vertically Plates which are over tightened so corners have play are not acceptable 3 2 ORIENTATION Set switches with handle operating vertically, up position "ON" Set receptacles vertically with ground pin up or when construction requires horizontal mounting with ground pin left 3 3 DEVICE PLATES A Provide for each new wiring device and for each telephone and signal equipment outlet Plate shall completely cover the cutout for the device outlet box B For remodel projects or for additions to existing construction provide new plates on existing outlet boxes unless the existing plate matches new plates in construction and appearance 3 4 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES AND POWER COMMUNICATION RACEWAYS Rigidly fasten assemblies and raceways to the cabinet, wall, casework, or modular casework as indicated Provide a chase nipple extension between outlet box in the wall and the raceway when the raceways are mounted to the support channels for the modular casework. 3 5 RECEPTACLES A Hospital Grade Provide hospital grade receptacles in all patient care areas, operating rooms, patient corridors, work rooms, equipment rooms, utility rooms, patient preparation rooms, exam rooms and nurses stations Provide 15 amp receptacles in all locations except provide 20 amp receptacles on dedicated 20 amp circuits B Provide a surge protection receptacle in the locations shown on the drawings 16140 4 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16140 PAGE 5 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES C Provide isolated ground receptacles in the locations shown on the drawings D Provide weatherproof GFCI receptacle within 25' -0" of each roof mounted mechanical equipment, for all outdoor receptacles, and other locations shown on the drawings END OF SECTION 16140 5 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS MCRINLEY GORDON SECTION 16170 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL DISCONNECTS AND FUSED SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION Provide all disconnects, fused and unfused, required by code for equipment furnished under this and other Divisions of these specifications and by Owner PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 DISCONNECTS A. Switch shall be heavy duty type, shall be quick -make, quick -break and shall be horsepower rated Exception Toggle switches with padlocking provisions are acceptable when applied within their rating Switch shall have blades as required to open all ungrounded conductors and shall be single throw unless noted Conductors and terminations shall conform with 16120 B Enclosure shall have interlocking cover to prevent opening door or removal when switch is closed Door interlocks shall include a defeating scheme Shall be padlockable in the "off" position C Enclosure shall be suitable for the environment in which mounted Shall be NEMA 3R when exposed to weather Other enclosures shall be per code or as noted 2 2 FUSED SWITCHES (OR FUSED DISCONNECTS) Shall be as above with addition of fuse space and clips to accept only Class R fuses 2 3 MANUFACTURER General Electric, Westinghouse, Square D, Gould -ITE, GTE Sylvania, Cutler Hammer 2 4 NAMEPLATES Provide engraved phenolic nameplates per Section 16100 Permanently attach (with mechanical fasteners) on each a nameplate with the following information load and area served, voltage and phase and (when applicable) fuse size and type PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 WIRING Wiring shall conform to applicable sections of these specifications Location of motor disconnects shall be per code 3 2 SUPPORTS Securely mount to equipment, wall or acceptable mounting frame Disconnects supported only by raceway are not acceptable 3 3 SPLICES Wiring space within Disconnects or Fused Switches shall not be used as a junction box END OF SECTION 16170 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL, SECTION 16180 1 DESCRIPTION Provide fuses sized per code as required for systems to be complete and fully operational PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 FUSES A Current limiting, U L Class R rejection type or Class L unless noted otherwise B 600 Amp and less Class R1C1 except motor circuits Class RK5 C Over 600 Amp Class L. D Manufacturer Bussmann, 2 2 SPARE FUSES Provide 10% spare fuses, size and type PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 FUSES Install in fusible devices 3 2 SPARE FUSE CABINET Locate in main distribution room. Gould, Littelfuse but not less than three (3) of any one END OF SECTION 16180 1 PAGE 1 FUSES MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16450 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL GROUNDING PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION Grounding systems shall be provided for service neutral power ground and for equipment grounds and bonding as required by code PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS Copper only, sized per code Bare or green insulated in sizes 110 AWG or larger Green insulated for size #12 AWG PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GROUNDING, GENERAL Provide all grounding for electrical systems and equipment as required by codes and as specified herein 3 2 BONDING Panel boards serving common patient care areas shall be bonded together 3 3 SIZE OF GROUND WIRE As required by National Electrical Code Where ground wire is exposed to physical damage protect with rigid non ferrous conduit as permitted by applicable code 3 4 GROUND CONNECTION OF WATER PIPING Metal internal piping shall be grounded, as a part of this contract 3 5 CONNECTION TO THE POWER GROUND BUS A Provide connections in accordance with the codes; including but not limited to 1 Raceway system 2 "Separately derived service" (transformer or emergency power supply) 3 Electrically operated equipment and devices B No device or equipment shall be connected for electrical service which has a neutral conductor connected to a grounding conductor or to the frame within the device or equipment 3 6 METHOD OF CONNECTIONS Make all ground connections and ground cable splices by thermal welding or copper compression set type connectors U L listed for grounding purposes Grounding lugs, where provided as standard manufacturer s items on equipment furnished, may be used 3 7 EXPANSION FITTINGS In conduit runs requiring an expansion fitting, a bonding jumper shall be installed around the fitting to maintain continuous ground continuity 16450 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16450 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL GROUNDING 3 8 TESTING Conform to Section 16030 3 9 GROUND CABLE CROSSING EXPANSION JOINTS Ground cables crossing expansion joints or similar separations in structures or paved areas shall be protected from damage by means of suitable approved devices or methods of installation which will provide the necessary slack in the cable across the joint to permit movement Stranded or other approved flexible copper run or jumper shall be used across such separations 3 10 RACEWAY BUSHINGS Provide insulated grounding bushing on service and feeder raceways at panelboards and switchboards Provide ground conductor sized per code to ground bus END OF SECTION 16450 2 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16471 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION Dead front type, conforming with U L 67 and NEMA PB 1 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURER Square D, GE, Cutler Hammer, Siemens, Westinghouse, IEM. 2 2 SHOP DRAWINGS A Submit for review prior to manufacture Include complete description, front view, dimensions, device sizes and layout, and ground bus(s) B Dimensions Not exceeding dimensions noted or shown 2 3 PANELBOARD TYPE A Rated at proper voltage and current, bus bars of copper or aluminum, 3 phase, 4 wire, 100 percent neutral, unless noted otherwise Multiple lugs where conductors in parallel or "feed through" or double lugs are shown B Bolted busbar to busbar connections Conductor connectors to conform with 16120, bolted to busbars using Grade 5 bolts, belleville and flat washers C Separate ground bus bonded to panelboard cabinet D Isolated ground bus insulated from cabinet when noted E Service entrance label for service entrance equipment 2 4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND FUSED SWITCHES A U L interrupting rating labeled Ratings as noted Minimum rating 208Y/120V Panelboards 10,000 AIC symmetrical 480Y/277V Panelboards 14,000 AIC symmetrical B Circuit breakers Conform with UL 489, labeled for 75 C conductors Mount per panel schedules Pre threaded, bolt on type Common trip on multiple pole breakers Labeled 'SWD' when utilized for switching loads C Spares and spaces Complete. for future circuits Where "Space" is indicated, provide space, bussing, device mounting hardware and steel knockouts in dead front 2 5 CABINET AND FRONTS A Flush or surface, as noted Tight closing doors without play, when latched Where two cabinets are located adjacent to each other in finished areas, provide matching trim, same height Where remote controlled switch or contactor is mounted in panelboard, mount on same frame as panelboard interior, with dedicated key lock access door over 16471 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McXINLEY GORDON SECTION 16471 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL PANELBOARDS B Fronts Lifting rest Door -in -door, hinged at right side in addition to hinged door with flush key lock over dead front Key identically Match existing key system where applicable Both doors shall be secured with latches C Finish Factory prime coat for cabinets located in finished areas When located in unfinished areas, factory standard lacquer or enamel finish, gray or blue -gray color, over prime coat 2 6 NAMEPLATES A Engraved nameplates per Section 16100 permanently attached to panelboard front Include panel name with 3/16" letters, area served, voltage, phase and wire (e g 2N1, 208Y/120, 3 phase, 4 wire or 4P, 480Y/277, 3. phase, 4 wire) in 1/8 inch characters When project has more than one switchboard include switchboard fed from (e g Fed from SWBD 4BP) B Nameplate color Normal system white letters on black. Emergency system white letters on red 2 7 SYSTEM OF NUMBERING AND BUS ARRANGEMENT As noted on Panel Schedules PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 MOUNTING Firmly anchor cabinets directly or with concealed bracing to building structure, level, 6' -6" above finished floor unless otherwise required When not located directly on wall, provide support frame of formed steel channel anchored to floor and ceiling structure Install interiors after structure is enclosed 3 2 WIRING Conform to applicable sections of these specifications and NEMA PB 1 1 Conductors and terminations per 16120 Coverplates in open knockouts 3 3 CIRCUIT INDEX AND LABELS Typed circuit index with odd circuits on left, even circuits on right, listing each circuit by number with complete load designation, (i e Receptacle room lights room etc Room names /numbers per actual room identification assigned by Architect at project completion (assigned room numbers may differ from drawings) Mount inside door with transparent protective cover Provide number labels on circuit breakers matching index 3 4 WORK CLEARANCE Verify space available with equipment sizes and code required working clearances prior to submitting shop drawings 3 5 GROUNDING Provide per 16450 3 6 CABINET PAINTING Cabinets furnished prime painted Field paint matching wall color (See Division Painting) 16471 2 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McXINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL PANELBOARDS 3 7 FEED THROUGH AND DOUBLE LUGS Provide feeder with amperage equal to incoming feeder to panels and sections fed via feed through or double lugs 3 8 DEDICATED SPACE Locate in dedicated spaces Coordinate project construction so piping, ducts, etc are routed around dedicated spaces above and in front of panelboards per code END OF SECTION SECTION 16471 PAGE 3 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McXINLEY GORDON SECTION 16500 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 3 1 SUMMARY A Provide lighting system complete and fully operational B Substitutions 1 Bidders requesting approval to provide products other than those specifically listed in the fixture schedule shall submit requests in writing to the Architect and Lighting Designer ten days prior to the close of the bid period Approval will be in the form of an addendum to the specifications issued to all registered plan holders No requests for substitution will be considered after this date 2 Substitution request shall include all information required under paragraph 1 4 SUBMITTALS Requests for approval shall be accompanied by a working fixture sample (including lamp(s) and a cord and plug) Provide the name of at least one installation where each proposed substitute has been installed for at least six months along with the name and phone number of the Architect, Owners representative and the Lighting Designer of Record If required by the Lighting Designer, the proposed substitutes must be installed at the bidders expense in a location selected by the Architect 3 2 REFERENCES A National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 1 LE5 -1993 Procedure for determining Luminaire efficiency ratings B Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL) 1 UL 496 Edison Base Lampholders 2 UL 542 Lampholders, Starter Holders for Fluorescent Lamps 3 UL 924 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment 4 UL 935 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts 5 UL 1570 Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures 6 UL 1571 Incandescent Lighting Fixtures 3 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A Light fixture schedule series numbers are a design series reference and do not necessarily represent the exact catalog number, size, voltage, wattage, type of lamp, ballast, finish 16500 -1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS Mc(INLEY GORDON SECTION 16500 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL LIGHTING trim, ceiling type, mounting hardware, ceiling trim or special requirements as specified hereinafter or as required by the particular installation(s) Provide complete fixtures to correspond with the number of lamps, wattage and /or size specified B Light fixture voltage shall match voltage of circuit serving the light fixture 3 4 SUBMITTALS A For standard catalog items provide original product sheets, neatly and clearly marked to indicate light fixture, ballasts and lamps fully comply with contract documents Include photometric report by an independent certified testing laboratory when required in fixture schedule Manufacturer's test report is not acceptable B Submittals shall have fixture types and project name clearly indicated and shall be prepared by the authorized manufacturer s representative serving the project area A list of manufacturer s representatives (including address, telephone and fax numbers) identifying which light fixture types they represent shall be included with submittals Submittals or requests for prior approvals not meeting these requirements will be rejected 3 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A All fixtures and components shall be new and listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or other testing lab acceptable to local jurisdiction 3 6 WARRANTY A Ballasts Provide manufacturer s warranty for a period of not less than five years Warranty shall include parts and labor to replace defective ballasts B Exit Signs Utilizing LED Lamp Technology Provide manufacturer's warranty for a period of not less than 5 years including parts and labor for full replacement of defective product 3 7 EXTRA MATERIALS A Ballasts: Provide one case or 10% (whichever is less) of each type used on the project Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt B Lamps Provide one case or 10% (whichever is less) of each type used on the project Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt C Fuses Provide one case or 10% (whichever is less) of each type used on the project Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt 16500 -2 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McXINLEY GORDON SECTION 16500 PAGE 3 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL LIGHTING PART 2 PRODUCTS 3 1 GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A Interior Light Fixtures Finish ferrous mounting hardware and accessories to prevent corrosion and discoloration to adjacent materials B For weatherproof or vaportight installations, painted finishes of fixtures and accessories shall be weather resistant enamel using proper primers or galvanized and bonderized epoxy, so that the entire assembly is completely corrosion resistant for the service intended Where aluminum parts come into contact with bronze or steel parts, apply a coating material to both surfaces to prevent corrosion C Fixtures shall be free of light leaks and designed to provide sufficient ventilation of lamps to provide the photometric performance required Ballasts and transformers shall be adequately vented D All sheet metal work shall be free from tool marks and dents and shall have accurate angles bent as sharp as compatible with the gauges of the required metal Intersections and joints shall be formed true and of adequate strength and structural rigidity to prevent any distortion after assembly Finish exposed edges so no sharp or ragged edges are exposed All miters shall be in accurate alignment with abutting intersecting members E Lampholders shall hold lamps securely against normal vibrations and maintenance handling F Reflector Cones 1 Provide minimum 45 lamp and lamp image cut -off for all vertically mounted lamps For horizontal lamps provide minimum 33 cut -off 2 Plastic materials shall not be used for reflector cones, unless noted otherwise in the Light Fixture Schedule 3 Reflector cones shall not be riveted or welded to housing and shall be removable without tools Retention devices shall not deform the cone in any manner Trim shall be flush with finished ceiling without gaps or light leaks Where the flange trim is separate from the cone, it shall have the same finish as the cone 4 Reflector cones shall be of uniform gauge, not less than 0 032" thick, high purity aluminum Alcoa 3002 alloy, free of spin marks or other defects 5 Manufacture reflector under the Alzak process Refer to fixture schedule for cone color and specular or diffuse finish requirements For fixtures 'using compact fluorescent lamps, provide additional finish equivalent to Color -Chek that eliminates iridescence Submit one sample of each cone type for review when required in the fixture schedule 16500 -3 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McRINLEY GORDON SECTION 16500 PAGE 4 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL LIGHTING G Light fixtures containing lamps which require protective shielding shall have tempered glass lens H For adjustable fixtures, provide positive locking devices to fix aiming angle Fixture shall be capable of being relamped without adjusting aiming angle I Fixtures rece$sed in suspended ceilings where the space above the ceiling. is either an air supply or return plenum shall conform with NEC Article 300 -22 Safety Provide safety devices for removable fixture elements (cones, reflectors, lenses, etc to support removable elements when not in normal operating position Safety devices shall be detachable if necessary and shall not interfere with fixture performance, maintenance or the seating of any fixture element, and not be visible during normal fixture operation 3 2 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. Housing Minimum code gauge steel or rigid aluminum construction B Reflector Minimum 88% reflectance C Light shields 1 Parabolic Louvers Provide Alzak aluminum, specular or semi specular as specified, with a low- iridescent finish 2 Flat Translucent Diffusers: Shall be 100% virgin acrylic and have matte finish on exterior side (facing away from lamps) Diffuser shall be of thickness specified and shall be of sufficient density to completely obscure lamp image 3 Flat Clear Lenses Injection molded 100% virgin acrylic or clear tempered glass, thickness as specified 4 Clear patterned lenses Injection molded 100% virgin acrylic For lenses with a male pattern of prisms or cones, specified minimum thickness refers to distance from flat surface to base of pyramids or cones, or to thickness of undisturbed material For lenses with female pattern, specified minimum thickness refers to overall thickness of material Lenses shall fully eliminate lamp image when viewed from all directions between 45 -90° from vertical From 0 -45° the ratio of maximum brightness (under a lamp) to minimum brightness (mid point between lamps) shall not exceed 3 1 Minimum thickness shall not be less than 0 125" with a minimum weight of 8 ounces per square foot D Frames Supply with concealed hinges and latching Provide mitered corners with no gaps or light leaks E Lamp Mounting 1 Mount lamps used in rapid start circuits 430 ma and below within 1/2" of grounded metal as long as the lamp For 800 16500 -4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16500 PAGE 5 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL LIGHTING and 1500ma lamps, mount within 1" of grounded metal as long as the lamp 2 For rapid start circuits using single lamp ballasts, provide one grounding lamp holder per lamp F Reflectors Adjustable snap on for cold cathode lamps, when specified, shall be of high reflectance white extruded plastic 3 3 INCANDESCENT /TUNGSTEN HALOGEN FIXTURES Tungsten halogen is a type of incandescent light source and will herein be included under the heading of incandescent A. Finish Concealed parts, (lamp holders, yokes, brackets, etc matte black B Tungsten Halogen Lamp Seal Temperature shall not exceed 350 °C at ambient of 25 °C when tested per UL Bulletin 57, Paragraph 328 -334 Submit certified heat test by independent testing laboratory when required in Fixture Schedule 3 4 WIRING A All wiring shall be as required by code for fixture wiring B All flexible cord wiring between fixture components or to electrical receptacle and not in wireways shall have a minimum temperature rating of 105 C C Cords shall be fitted with proper strain reliefs and watertight entries where required by application D No internal wiring shall be visible at normal viewing angles, i e above 45 from vertical E Master Slave fixtures supply ballasts in adjacent fixtures to operate one or more lamps in the adjacent fixture where required in drawings or fixture schedule For single lamp fixtures, provide a two lamp ballast for two adjacent fixtures For three lamp fixtures, provide one, two lamp ballast for the outboard lamps in each fixture and an additional two lamp ballast for the center lamp in each of two adjacent fixtures F Tandem Wired fixtures For fixtures in continuous rows and where required in drawings or fixture schedule, supply ballasts and wiring to control all top or inboard lamps together and control all bottom or outboard lamps together G Provide #14 AWG, 3 -wire flexible conduit connections (whips) for dual level switching as shown on drawings for light fixtures recessed in accessible suspended ceilings Provide 3 wire whips for all dual level switching Wire count on wire whips is not shown on drawings and shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide proper wire count for the lighting control as shown on drawings 16500 -5 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16500 PAGE 6 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL LIGHTING 3 5 BALLASTS A Fluorescent General Requirements 1 All lamps shall be operated on the type of circuit the lamp was designed for (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc T8 lamps shall be operated on rapid start ballasts only Ballasts shall provide normal rated lamp life as stated by lamp manufacturers 2 Ballasts shall be HPF (greater than 90%), UL listed, and ETL certified Magnetic ballasts shall be CBM certified For projects applying for utility funding, ballasts shall meet utility requirements Provide ballasts with thermal protection unless otherwise specified Ballasts shall be Class P 3 Confirm voltage requirements with electrical drawings Ballasts shall operate lamps correctly within -10% voltage variation without damaging ballasts 4 "A" sound rating for 430 ma and 265 ma "B" sound rating for 800 ma "C" sound rating for 1500 ma 5 Low temperature and /or outdoor application Provide ballasts suitable for low starting temperature where light fixture is located outdoors, in freezer or refrigerator or other location where ambient air temperature will be below 50 degrees F 6 Dimming ballasts Type required by dimmer manufacturer for proper operation and to maintain U L listing of dimming system components utilized Total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 20% at any point within the dimming range B Magnetic Fluorescent Ballasts In addition to the general requirements, provide magnetic ballasts where required in the fixture schedule as follows 1 Energy saving type with a ballast factor not less than 95% 2 Each ballast individually protected by an in -line GMF fuse in a Sussman type HLR fuseholder 3 Approved manufacturers are Advance, Magnatek, Valmont or Robertson or as specifically noted in the fixture schedule C Electronic Fluorescent Ballasts In addition to the general requirements, provide electronic ballasts where required in the fixture schedule as follows 1 Ballasts in conformance with the following regulatory requirements: EMI and RTZ limits set by the FCC (CFR47, part 18 and FCC Part 18,15j) IEEE publication 587, category A (transients) 16500 -6 MAHLUM AND MCRINLEY GORDON SECTION 16500 PAGE 7 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL LIGHTING Minimum efficiency standards of Public Law No 100 -357 Starting sequence consistent with ANSI standard C82'1 -1993 2 Reduced light output ballasts (ballast factors below 89 are not acceptable except as noted otherwise in the light fixture schedule 3 Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 15% of the input current Current crest factor shall be less than 1 7 Operating frequency shall be between 25 and 60 kHz with no visible flicker 4 Ballasts shall operate in ambient temperatures up to 105 F (40 C) 5 Rapid Start ballasts shall be wired in series (or in parallel if manufactured accordingly) 6 Acceptable manufacturers EBT, Magnatek, MTI, Motorola (G E Valmont 3 6 LAMPS A Each lamp type in the project shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer B Fluorescent Medium Bi -pin, T -8 rapid start, T12, Compact TT and DTT; 3500K color temperature and 80+ Color Rendering Index (CRI) unless otherwise noted Acceptable manufacturers General Electric, Philips, Osram Sylvania or as noted in the fixture schedule C Incandescent (Including Tungsten Halogen): 1 General service lamps Inside frosted, 120V, filament lamps with a minimum 1000 hours rated life 2 Lamps with diodes are not acceptable 3 At time of installation, provide HIR technology lamps (by GE) for standard voltage PAR lamps and double ended tungsten halogen lamps, unless HIR technology is not available for specified lamps 4 For low voltage lamps with dichroic reflectors, use Constant Color type (by GE) or aluminum back finishes Coating on back of lamp shall be sufficiently dense and even to prevent light and heat from escaping out the back side of the reflector 5 Acceptable manufacturers General Electric (GE), Philips, Osram Sylvania or as noted in the fixture schedule 16500 -7 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16500 PAGE 8 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL LIGHTING 3 7 SOCKETS A. Incandescent Porcelain for medium or mogul screw base For other lamp types, as required by base type B Fluorescent Suitable for lamp and ballast type employed PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 LIGHTING FIXTURES, GENERAL A. Provide mounting accessories and trims as required for wall and ceiling construction types shown in finish schedule and on drawings B Verify weight and mounting method of all fixtures and provide suitable supports Fixture mounting assemblies shall comply with all local seismic codes and regulations C Refer to architectural reflected ceiling plans for coordination of lighting fixture locations with mechanical and fire safety equipment Where conflicts occur, coordinate with Architect prior to installing any of the systems D Install fixtures with vent holes free of air blocking obstacles E Lighting fixtures located in recessed ceilings with a fire resistive rating of one hour or more shall be enclosed in an approved fire resistive rated box equal to that of the ceiling F Contractor shall be responsible for adjusting aperture rings on all recessed fixtures to be flush with the finished ceiling G For fluorescent lamps operated on dimming ballasts, operate lamps at full output for 100 hours (continuous burn) before dimming H Adjust variable position lampholders for proper lamp position prior to fixture installation I Blemished, damaged or unsatisfactory fixtures or accessories shall be replaced J For pendant mounted fixtures, mounting height is from finished ceiling to top of pendant light fixture For wall mounted fixtures, center on outlet box unless otherwise noted Verify mounting provisions and other requirements prior to order of light fixtures and provide as required K. In accessible suspended ceilings, provide 72" flexible conduit wiring connection (flexible tubing not permitted) from a rigidly supported junction box L All finishes shall be unmarred upon project completion All damaged finishes repaired or replaced M Replace all burned out or inoperative lamps at the end of the construction prior to owner occupancy 16500 -8 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16500 PAGE 9 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL LIGHTING 3 2 DIFFUSERS AND ENCLOSURES Remove protective plastic covers from lighting fixture diffusers only after construction work, painting and clean up are completed Remove all dirty lamps, reflectors and diffusers; clean and reinstall When cleaning "Alzak" reflectors, use a manufacturer recommended cleaning solution Reflectors damaged or impregnated with fingerprints shall be replaced at the contractor s expense 3 3 ADJUSTMENT OF LIGHT FIXTURES Focus all adjustable light fixtures under the direction of the Lighting Designer during a scheduled period of time prior to the completion of the project, after hours if required Include in base bid all equipment and personnel expenses (including overtime) required for adjustment 3 4 SUPPORT OF INCANDESCENT AND COMPACT FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES A Surface or pendant type Attach heavy formed steel straps to the outlet box by means of threaded stems with locknuts, or directly to the outlet box where the light fixture ie specifically so designed B Recessed Types Mount in frames suitable for the ceiling, with recessed portion of the fixture securely supported from the ceiling framing Bottom of light fixture to be flush with adjacent ceiling Fixture trim shall totally conceal ceiling opening Provide two #14 earthquake chains or #12 wires when fixture is supported by ceiling suspension system 3 5 SUPPORT OF FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES A Recessed type For light fixtures supported by the ceiling suspension system, provide four Caddy #515 support clips (one each corner) which lock light fixture to ceiling tees after light fixture is installed In addition, provide for each light fixture two #14 earthquake chains or #12 wires secured at diagonally opposite fixture corners (for fixtures weighing less than 56 pounds) to structural members above suspended ceiling For plaster or GWB ceilings provide plaster frame compatible with light fixture Contractor shall coordinate fixture trim with ceiling type B Surface mounted type 1 Where mounted on accessible ceilings, support from structural members above ceiling by means of hanger rods through ceiling or as approved 2 Continuous Runs of Fixtures Laser sight to assure fixtures are straight when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in the ceiling Where light fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections C Pendant Mounted Type 1 For fixtures with rigid pendants, supply swivel ball aligners at canopy to comply with local seismic requirements 16500 -9 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16500 PAGE 10 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL LIGHTING 2 Where suspended from accessible ceiling, support fixture from structural members above ceiling by means of hanger rode through ceiling or as approved 3 Continuous Runs of Light Fixtures Laser sight to assure fixtures are straight when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in the ceiling Where light fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections 3 6 CEILING LIGHT FIXTURE SUPPORT Where ceiling is of insufficient strength to support weight of lighting fixture(s) installed, provide additional framing to support as required j \6807 \specs \16500 END OF SECTION 16500 -10 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16700 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL COMMUNICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION Provide complete and fully operational signal and communication systems Exception Those systems designated as "Raceway" systems only 1 2 TO QUALIFY AS AN ACCEPTABLE SUPPLIER AND /OR SUBCONTRACTOR For Sections 16701 through 16799 shall fulfill the following requirements A Have the ability to provide the systems indicated in the contract documents from the criteria contained in the specification and the information shown on the drawings B Provide AHJ approved shop drawings which show complete system plan views indicating equipment layout, device layout, raceway routing and sizing, point -to -point wiring, termination and connection diagrams and wire numbers for all conductors and connections C Prior to bid determine the complete system components required to conform with local code and AHJ requirements Include the cost of all components to all contractors in bid price D To have been in the business of installing and maintaining the specific type of system equipment under the present firm name for at least five years E To have been distributing and /or installing the specific brand and model line of system equipment for at least three years prior to the date on the contract documents F To have the capability of dispatching a maintenance or repair truck with a qualified repairman to the job site within four (4) hours of a request for service on the equipment 1 3 CONTRACT DRAWINGS The contract drawings indicate the general nature of the components required, but do not necessarily show all components required The drawings are intended to aid the contractor and /or subcontractor and /or supplier in providing the complete systems required Raceways, routing and wiring are not shown on the drawings Contractor shall provide per system requirements and shop drawings 1 4 RELEASE OF CADD FILES FOR SHOP DRAWINGS Contractor may request to utilize Sparling CADD files for assistance in producing shop drawings Request shall be made by signing Sparling's "Agreement for Release of CADD Files" letter and paying $80 00 to cover the cost of reproducing and delivering the files to the Contractor PART 2 PRODUCT$ 2 1 GENERAL See individual Sections 16701 through 16799 16700 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16700 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL COMMUNICATIONS 2 2 WIRING Provide as specified herein before, except conductor size and type shall be as required to suit the system involved and shall conform with code and AHJ requirements PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 SYSTEM SUPPLIER AND /OR SUBCONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS A Determine the complete system raceway, wiring and outlet box requirements B Provide and /or supervise all wiring, wire terminations and connections C Provide and /or supervise all equipment installation D Perform and /or supervise all testing during and after installation E Certify in writing to the Architect (copy to Engineer) at completion stating that system has been inspected, tested and is complete and fully operational in accordance with contract documents F Instruct and /or assist the Contractor in instructing the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the system 3 2 WIRING Provide all wiring complete per system requirements, including 10% spare conductors not less than two (2) Install all conductors in raceway, unless noted otherwise Color code all junction boxes Provide numbered wire markers on each terminal end of all wires, in accordance with shop drawings using permanent pressure sensitive or sleeve type markers 3 3 O M MANUAL A Provide all information as required per Section 16010 B Include record drawings, letter of certification and test results 3 4 INSTRUCTION Provide as required per Section 16010, and applicable specification sections 3 5 RECORD DRAWINGS Provide per 16010 Record drawings shall clearly indicate 1 Actual routing of all raceways, and location of all junction boxes 2 Actual cable type, numbers and routing 3 Actual system wiring diagrams, connection diagrams and interface of all components in the system END OF SECTION 16700 2 MAHLUM NORDFORS McnY GORDON SECTION 16721 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION A Provide a complete, electrically supervised and fully operational extension of the Hospital's existing fire alarm system The modified portion of the system shall fully comply with the local fire code currently enforced at the project location If any conflict occurs between government adopted code rules and these contract documents, the codes are to govern B Existing Building Fire Alarm System The existing fire alarm system is manufactured by Notifier, installed by Guardian Security The existing system in the East wing is a hardwired, non addressable system The fire alarm system in the remainder of the hospital is addressable New devices installed for this project shall be addressable type, connected to the existing fire alarm system serving this area Replace the existing fire alarm devices and wiring where indicated in the existing hospital The work in the existing building consists of, but is not limited to, the following 1 Remove existing fire alarm devices where indicated on drawings 2 Replace existing smoke detectors with new locations as indicated on the drawings 3 Extend existing magnetic door holder circuits and provide new connections to equipment furnished with door hardware package 4 Install new fire alarm speakers and visual alarm strobe lights 5 Connect new smoke /fire dampers to fire alarm control Dampers to close on fire alarm. Reference specification section 16724 1 2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS Provide the system in compliance with the following A NFPA Codes, Standards and Manuals (latest issue enforced) 71 Signalling systems for Central Station Service 72 Installation, Maintenance and use of Protective Signalling Systems 90A Air Conditioning Ventilating Systems (specifically Chapter 4 "Controls 72G Notification Appliances for Protective Signalling Systems 72H Testing Procedures for Protective Signalling Systems B Other Codes and Standards WAC (Washington Administrative Code) 296 -46 ADA (Americans with Disability Act) Local fire code, building code, mechanical code, electrical code rules and interpretations required by the Authority having jurisdiction 1 3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 16721 -1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3 Furnish and load all software required to implement a complete monitoring and control system SECTION 16721 PAGE 2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Fire Alarm System Supplier and /or Subcontractor Requirements 1 The fire alarm system subcontractor shall coordinate the installation of the fire alarm system including the preparation of shop drawings and submittals to the "Authority Having Jurisdiction" 2 The fire alarm subcontractor shall comply with the requirements of Section 16700 and prepare shop drawings in conformance with 16721, 1 13 B Contractor Requirements: 1 Submit shop drawings to the "Authority Having Jurisdiction" (AHJ) as defined in NFPA 72 The AHJ for this project is the local Fire Marshal and the Washington State Fire Marshal One copy of the above shop drawings with this approval evidenced shall be included with the submittal required by Section 16100 2 Provide raceway, back boxes, wiring, and power circuits for the fire alarm system, and install the devices ready for final termination at the transponders and Fire Alarm Panel by the Fire Alarm System Subcontractor Contact the fire alarm system subcontractor prior to bidding to determine exact requirements and include all costs in the bid price 3 In addition, the contractor shall schedule periodic inspections by the AHJ during the course of the installation and shall make any minor corrections, deletions, relocations or additions to the system as required for acceptance of the completed system by the AHJ Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required permits 4 Coordinate the interface requirements between mechanical control systems and the fire alarm system. 5 Performance Test Final approval of the fire alarm system is contingent upon a successful performance test, accomplished by the installer and witnessed by the Fire Marshal 1 4 GENERAL OPERATION Match existing Notifier equipment 1 5 ANALOG ADJUSTABLE DETECTORS A Smoke Detectors 1 Shall communicate actual smoke chamber values to the FACP Adjustable sensitivity of the detector from the control panel shall be possible through software control with a sensitivity range from 5% to 3 7% in 5% increments 2 A dirty trouble condition shall be reported any time the average value of a detector reaches a preset value Any time the sensor can no longer compensate for the environmental conditions to maintain its set sensitivity an excessive dirty trouble condition shall be reported 16721-2 MAHLUM NORDFORS McRINLEY GORDON SECTION 16721 PAGE 3 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM B Sensitivity adjustments shall be capable via seven day time controlled day /night operating mode 1 6 DESIGN, SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS A Contractor Design Raceways, routing and system wiring are not shown on the plans and shall be the responsibility of the fire alarm system supplier to design conduit routing and wiring and to show the same on the shop drawings Existing fire alarm raceway and wiring is derived from record drawings and no guarantee is made as to their correctness The contractor shall investigate the existing conduit routing and determine what is required to tie the existing fire alarm raceway system into the new fire alarm system B Evacuation Alarm Sound Level The number of fire alarm speakers shall be increased if required by the AHJ to meet the following "The decibel level reading in the most remote area shall not be less than 70 and at least 10 above the normal ambient noise level C Submittals Submit product data per Section 16100 Include the following information: Transmission Cable Equipment Documentation Conductors Initiating Devices Alarm Devices (Audible and Visual) D Shop Drawings 1 Riser Diagrams Fire alarm supplier and /or subcontractor shall develop CAD based original mylar fire alarm riser diagram to show transponder locations, fire alarm zones and point to point wiring requirements 2 Floor Plans CAD based floor plans shall be drafted to show conduit routing, device locations, end of line resistors, wire count and color coded wiring between device locations on each plan Show fire alarm zones, and room names and numbers for each room where a fire alarm device is located At the supplier's option an AutoCad release 11 or 12 drawing file can be furnished for the suppliers use in preparing shop drawings 3 Ownership All original shop drawings shall become the property of the owner at the completion of the project E Operations and Maintenance Manual Per Section 16010 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURE All equipment. shall be Notifier to match existing Notifier AM2020 system 16721-3 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16721 PAGE 4 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 2 2 WIRING UL listed conductors which conform to AHJ requirements Subject to AHJ approval use No 16 AWG (seven strand) for initiating circuits and No 14 AWG (nineteen strand) for control and alarm circuits Transmission cable shall be #18 AWG multiple twisted pair with overall shield 2 3 ADDRESSABLE INITIATING DEVICES All initiating devices shall have all electronic components and address setting devices located in the base assembly or in the device Removal of the device shall cause a trouble signal to be transmitted to the FACP indicating the address of the device in trouble All devices shall be field programmable If DIP switch switches are not utilized for programming addresses then the supplier shall provide a programmer as part of their bid 2 4 MANUAL STATIONS Manual stations shall be addressable, single action, mechanically latching non -coded type with tumbler type key operated teat -reset lock. Mounting shall be semi -flush in all finished areas and may be surface mounted in unfinished areas The station housing shall be fire red factory finish Provide ten (10) keys which will initiate alarm at any station 2 5 SMOKE DETECTORS A Shall be addressable with adjustable sensitivity of the detector from the control panel through software, photoelectric type or as required by AHJ Provide detection sensitivity from 5% to 3 7% in 5% increments Visual indication of normal and alarm /trouble shall be incorporated into the exposed surface of the device Detector head shall be removable from the base and base shall accept photo electric, ionization or heat detector head B All smoke detectors located where they are not visible when standing in the room shall be provided with a remote indicating light in the nearest corridor Device shall be flush or semi flush mounted with identifying engraved nameplate per 16100 indicating detector address and name i e AHU -5 smoke detector zone 12 2 6 FIRE ALARM SPEAKERS A Finished Areas 4" diameter, fire retardant, treated cone type, with line matching transformer for 1/4, 1/2, and 1 watt output on a 25 or 70 7 volt line Frequency range 400 -4000 Hz producing 87 db at 10 feet with 1 watt input Speakers shall be UL listed for emergency alarm systems Speaker grill shall be round steel or plastic screw retained with matte white painted finish B Unfinished Areas 4" treated paper cone type with power tap points at 1/4, 1/2, 1 and 2 watts on a 25 watt on a 25 volt or 70 volt line Surface mounted Rated 88 db at 10 feet at 2 watts C Provide a speaker in each elevator Coordinate wiring requirements with elevator subcontractor 2 7 VISUAL ALARM LIGHTS Visual alarm lights shall be a Xenon strobe, wall mounted with white housing and clear lens with "FIRE" printed vertically on the lens Light intensity shall be 75 candela, with 0 2 second maximum pulse duration, flash rate of 1 to 1 5 flashes per second 16721-4 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16721 PAGE 5 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM meeting ADA requirements Provide 110 candela visual alarm lights, U L listed under Standard 1971 in sleeping rooms 2 8 SMOKE DOOR RELEASE MECHANISMS A Wall Mounted Magnetic Holder: 120 volts, AC, release upon de- energization furnished under Division 8 2 9 DUCT DETECTORS A Heat Detectors Shall contain two sets of contacts rated 10 amps resistive and shall have 50 -650 degrees F adjustment range B Smoke Detectors: Shall be sampling ionization type for sensing of products of combustion within the air stream of ducted fan systems The devices shall include necessary sampling tube extensions and sensitivity adjustments for detection of products of combustion across the width of the duct The device shall function uniformly in air velocities of 500 feet per minute through 3000 fpm Visual indication of normal and alarm /trouble shall be incorporated into the exposed surface of the device Provide a remote indicator light as required in Part 3 of this Section Provide auxiliary contacts for fan shutdown C Nameplates Adjacent to each duct detector provide a nameplate per Section 16100 with 3/8 inch letters indicating load served and area served Example "EF -1A Main Building Exhaust Fan" D Air handling equipment to be automatically shutdown only when activated by the smoke detector located in the supply air duct downstream of the filters Provide control wiring and all coordiantion with mechanical equipment supplier 2 10 REMOTE INDICATING LIGHT Ceiling or wall mounted, single gang device with red LED light to flash whenever the associated smoke detector is in alarm. Provide remote indicating light outside each patient room that has a smoke detector (unless remote indication is provided via the nurse call system) PART 3 INSTALLATION 3 1 APPROVED EQUIPMENT AND PERMIT A No equipment shall be delivered to the jobsite until shop drawings have been reviewed and AHJ approved A reviewed and AHJ approved shop drawing set shall be continuously available at the jobsite during construction B Obtain a permit from the local AHJ prior to installation of equipment as required 3 2 CIRCUITRY A All wiring shall be contained in steel raceways and red color junction boxes Seal raceways to prevent air passage at each smoke detector Wiring insulation shall be one of the types required by NEC 725 -16 and shall be consistently color coded throughout the system Permanent wire markers shall be affixed to all conductors at terminations and splices Numbering system shall be consistent with shop drawings (Color schedule shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to delivery of wire to the project All terminations shall be T &B "Sta-Kon" (or equivalent) self insulated, flanged or forked tongue lugs where connected at screw type terminals Wiring in main control cabinet shall be 16721-5 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16721 PAGE 6 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM neatly arranged and bundled with Tyraps (or equivalent) Number 16 gauge wire shall have a maximum of 7 strands B Provide 1/2" raceway and wiring from the control panel to the main telephone terminal board as required for alarm transmission to the monitoring company 3 3 AUXILIARY CONTROLS Conductors and power supplies of sufficient size shall be installed to minimize voltage drop consistent with the proper operation of all devices Destructible link smoke dampers shall not be connected to the fire alarm system. Fan Shutdown Control Circuits and Smoke Removal Circuits need not be electrically supervised (subject to NFPA 72 and 72E requirements) and may be incorporated into the fire alarm raceway system, except that limited energy circuits shall be routed separately from line voltage circuits as required by Code (NEC Article 725) 3 4 DEVICE LOCATIONS Device locations may be changed within 15 feet without extra charge, if so directed by the Engineer before installation A. Automatic Detectors Locate not less than 2 feet from a supply or exhaust ventilation grill and not less than 18" from dead air spaces B Visual Alarm Lights Locate 80" above floor or 6" below ceiling whichever is lower, with a maximum of 100 foot between alarm lights Locate in public areas and in each public bathroom C Manual Stations Locate at 48" AFF maximum if only front reachable, 54" AFF maximum if side reachable 3 5 FAN CONTROLS Provide all relays and wiring of fan motor starter control circuits Coordinate with Specification Sections 16160 and 16920 Refer to electrical detail 3 6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Provide per Section 16010 3 7 RECORD DRAWINGS Provide per Section 16010 As -built indicate 1 Actual routing of all raceways 2 Actual cable type, numbers and 3 Actual system wiring diagrams, interface of all components in 16721-6 drawings shall clearly routing connection diagrams and the system 3 8 EXISTING SYSTEMS A The Hospital shall be continuously provided with an operational fire alarm system at least equivalent to the existing system (unless otherwise permitted by the Authority having jurisdiction) throughout the construction period Any shutdowns shall be scheduled two days in advance with Hospital Engineer B All existing panels, and devices no longer in service as a result of this contract shall be removed Unused flush mounted devices, outlet and other boxes in finished areas shall be provided with blank coverp ].atei MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16721 PAGE 7 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 4 TESTING 4 1 The modified portion of the Fire Alarm System shall be tested using the following procedure Special equipment required for testing ionization detectors and /or heat detectors where installed shall be provided by Contractor at time of test A Device Tests Contractor shall connect all signal and initiating devices in the zone to the fire alarm control panel All smoke detectors, and all other devices shall each be tested for proper operation B Operation of all features of the systems under normal operation C Operation of all supervisory features of the systems D Operation of all features of the systems on generator power, and battery power with primary power off E Operation of each alarm and command function F AHJ Inspection After testing has been satisfactorily performed, the complete system shall be operated "on -line" for one week (minimum) The system shall then be demonstrated to operate satisfactorily in the presence of the Authority having jurisdiction PART 5 INSTRUCTION 5 1 The Contractor shall (after one week (minimum) written notification to Architect) conduct an instruction session during which all maintenance and operational aspects of the system will be described and demonstrated to personnel selected by the Owner The session shall be conducted by a Fire Alarm Supplier s representative thoroughly familiar with the characteristics of the system 0 M manual information regarding the system shall be turned over to the Architect prior to scheduling the instruction session END OF SECTION 16721-7 MAHLUM NORDFORS McRINLEY GORDON SECTION 16724 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL SMOKE DAMPER CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION A General Provide wiring and relays to control smoke dampers provided by Division 15 B Contractor Design: Raceways, routing, and wiring is not shown on the drawings Contractor shall be the responsible for design of conduit routing and wiring and to show the same on shop drawings System shall be in steel raceways Circuits shall be Class B 1 2 SUBMITTALS A Provide data per Section 16100 B Shop Drawings 1 Reproducibles Contractor shall pay a Seattle located reprographic company for having a set of erasable mylars made of the contract drawings, including floor plans and risers Contact engineer to arrange for printing 2 Floor Plans Floor Plans shall be marked up showing conduit, routing, device locations, wire count, and color coded wiring between device locations on each plan 3 Detail Plans In addition to the contract set of sepias, Contractor shall prepare original mylar drawings showing termination and connection diagrams at relays PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 SMOKE DAMPERS Electrically operated, single phase, 120 volt, two position Dampers close upon de- energization Provided by Division 15 2 2 CONTROL RELAYS Heavy duty plug -in relay, contacts twice the rating of circuit requirements, temperature range -45 degrees to +70 degrees C Enclosure Sealed heat and shock resistant, rated for 2 5 million mechanical operations, 100,000 electrical operations 2 3 NAMEPLATES Provide nameplate per Section 16100 with 1/8" lettering on each relay "SMOKE DAMPERS PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 CONTROL SEQUENCE Connect all smoke dampers in parallel for each fan to an adjustable 0 -3 minute time delay (set at two minutes), relay located and connected to the fan's motor controller Operation shall be as follows Smoke dampers will open immediately when fan starts and close two minutes after fans are turned off See typical smoke damper control wiring diagram 16724 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON S ?CTION 16724 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL SMOKE DAMPER CONTROL PART 4 TESTING 4 1 GENERAL Each fan and its smoke dampers shall be tested using the following procedure With the fan stopped, each smoke damper shall be visually inspected to insure that it is closed With the fan running, each smoke damper shall be visually inspected to insure that it has opened Testing form in Electrical Appendix A shall be filled out by the contractor to record the tests Submit forms to engineer END OF SECTION 16724 2 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide raceway systems for the installation of the telephone equipment and /or computer wiring Installation shall include raceways, outlet boxes, plaster rings, outlet box cover plates and terminal boards B Provide a raceway from each telephone and computer outlet to an accessible ceiling space on the same floor as the outlet Provide raceway sleeves through all fire and smoke separation walls Provide raceways to outlets located in fixed casework PART 2 PRODUCTS PART 3 EXECUTION SECTION 16740 PAGE 1 TELEPHONE, COMPUTER RACEWAY SYSTEMS 2 1 WALL OUTLETS Shall consist of a 4" square, 2 gang, 2 -1/2" (minimum) deep box with 3/4" single device plaster ring Surface wall outlets shall be 4" square, 2 gang, 2 -3/4" (minimum) and shall match and be manufactured by the metal surface raceway manufacturer 2 2 PULL WIRE Shall be plastic having not less than 200 -pound tensile strength 2 3 PLATES Provide by others 2 4 CONDUCTORS Provided by others 3 1 RACEWAYS Shall conform to specification sections "Raceways" and "Outlet, Junction and Pull Boxes" with the additional requirement that no length of run shall exceed 150 feet and shall not contain more than two 90- degree bends or the equivalent without a code size pull box Provide pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements Inside radii of bends in raceways one -inch trade size and larger shall be not less than two times the nominal diameter Terminate raceway at bottom or top edge of backboard or in terminal cabinet with two locknuts and a plastic bushing Raceways and raceway sleeves shall be sized as follows unless shown to be larger Up to 2 telephone /computer outlets 1/2" trade size Up to 3 telephone /computer outlets 3/4" trade size Up to 4 telephone /computer outlets 1" trade size 3 2 PULL CORDS Nylon type, shall be included in all raceways over 10 feet long Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire 3 3 GROUNDING Provide a continuous #2 bare copper grounding conductor from a ground rod, or main switchboard ground bus or metallic water 16740 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McRINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SECTION 16740 PAGE 2 TELEPHONE, COMPUTER RACEWAY SYSTEMS service line to the main telephone terminal board and from there to each subdistribution terminal board Terminate in lower right hand corner of terminal board 3 4 RACEWAY RISER SLEEVES Riser raceways to be installed through floors with tops 6 inches above each floor to give continuous cable riser capability Stuff sleeves with an approved non combustible material such as rock wool to maintain floor fire separation 3 5 REMODEL SPACES A. Remove out of service telephone and computer conductors that serve spaces remodeled, only after receiving approval from the owner 8 Notify owner in writing when inservice telephone and computer conductors are serving occupied spaces and must be relocated The owner shall relocate existing conductors that are to remain in service except as indicated END OF SECTION 16740 2 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL SECTION 16750 PAGE 1 NURSE CALL SYSTEMS MICROPROCESSOR BASED 1 1 DESCRIPTION Furnish all equipment, accessories, and material required for the installation of a Nurse /Patient Communication System in accordance with the specifications and drawings Any material and /or equipment necessary for the proper operation of the system not specified or described herein shall be deemed part of this specification 1 2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Raceways, Section 16110 Outlet and Pull Boxes, Section 16130 Communications, Section 16700 1 3 CODES AND STANDARDS Refer to Section 16010, General Requirements, for applicable codes All components and the system as a whole shall be listed under U L 1069 1 4 SUBMITTALS A Product Data Assemble in submittal brochure as specified in Section 16100 B Shop Drawings 1 Reproducibles Contractor shall pay a Seattle located reprographic company for having a set of erasable mylars made of the contract drawings including floor plans and risers Contact engineer to arrange for printing 2 Floor Plans Mylar floor plan shop drawings shall show conduit routing, device locations, wire count and color coded wiring between device locations on each plan 3 Detail Plans In addition to the contract set of floor plan drawings, the Contractor shall prepare original mylar drawings showing termination and connection diagrams including wire numbers and front view of annunciators Messages on annunciator shall be clearly indicated together with letter size on the shop drawings C Operations and Maintenance Manual Per Section 16010 1 5 COORDINATION Contractor shall coordinate outlet box requirements with system supplier Notify Architect prior to installation if conflicts occur between required box depth and wall thickness 1 6 SYSTEM OPERATION AUDIO /VISUAL SYSTEMS A General Each audio /visual nurse call system shall consist of microcomputer controlled equipment utilizing stored program software providing maximum flexibility for station number assignments, call priority levels and future expansion Each system shall provide audible signalling, visual annunciation, patient to staff communication, 16750 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GOaDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL 16750 2 SECTION 16750 PAGE 2 NURSE CALL SYSTEMS MICROPROCESSOR BASED staff to staff communication and intercommunication between Master Station Annunciators B Call Priority Seven distinct call priority levels shall be provided as follows Priority Dome Light Annunciation Call Txpe Dave], /ndicatiox Rate Code Blue 1 Flashing Green 120 PPM Nurse Assist 2 Flashing Red 60 PPM Toilet Emergency 3 Flashing White 60 PPM Patient Priority 4 Flashing White 60 PPM Patient Personal Attention 5 Steady White 6 PPM Patient Normal Call 6 Steady White 6 PPM Staff Call 7 6 PPM Tone rate (pulses per minute) annunciated at the Master Station Annunciator and all Duty Stations associated with the System C PATIENT BED STATION A patient shall originate a call on the system by depressing a button on the Pillow Speaker or Call Button The type of call that is placed on the system shall be determined by how the patient station is programmed from the Master Station (either normal (6), personal attention (5), or priority (4)) These calls shall perform the following functions 1 Normal Call (Priority Level 6) a Illuminate the white call indicator lamp on the Patient Station b Continuously illuminate the white section of the Corridor Dome Light and white section of any associated Zone Dome Lights c Illuminate the patient call light and sound a tone (6 ppm) at all Duty Stations d Identify the patient's room number, bed number, call priority status (6) and sound a tone (6. ppm) at the Master Station Annunciator 2 Personal Attention Call (Priority Level 5) a Perform the same functions as a Normal Call (Items la, b, c, d above) except the call priority status shall read 5 b Personal attention calls shall only be cancelable at the Patient Bed Station 3 Priority Patient Call (Priority Level 4): a Illuminate the white call indicator lamp on the Patient Station b Flash the white section of the Corridor Dome Light and white section of any associated Zone Dome Lights at 60 ppm c Flash the patient call light and sound a tone (60 ppm) at all Duty Stations MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL 16750 3 SECTION 16750 PAGE 3 NURSE CALL SYSTEMS MICROPROCESSOR BASED d Flash the patient's room number, bed number, call priority status (4) and sound a tone (60 ppm) at the Master Station Annunciator e Priority Patient Calls shall only be cancelable at the Patient Bed Station 4 Voice communication shall be established upon answer of the call at the Master Station When the call is answered, all previously illuminated lights are extinguished and the red privacy light on the Patient Station is illuminated If a call cord is removed for whatever reason from a Patient Station, a Priority Patient call shall automatically be initiated This call cannot be canceled at the Master Station or by depressing the red cancel button on the Patient Station until the call cord is reinserted into the receptacle of the Patient Station 5 A combination call cancel /privacy button shall be provided When this button is depressed while the station is idle the red indicator light shall flash and conversation within the room cannot be monitored When the privacy switch is activated the Master Station shall be able to speak to the bed station and the switch shall not interfere with the placement of a call to the Master Station D TOILET EMERGENCY STATION A patient shall originate an emergency call on the system by pulling a cord or pushing a button in the Psych Rooms The call shall hold until answered at the originating station by depressing the reset switch /call assurance light Originating a call from these stations shall 1 Flash the call assurance lamp in the Toilet Station at 60 PPm 2 Flash the white section of the Corridor Dome Light and white section of any associated Zone Dome Lights at 60 ppm 3 Flash the patient call light and sound a tone (60 ppm) at all Duty Stations 4 Flash the patient s room number, call priority status (3) and sound a tone (60 ppm) at the Master Station Annunciator No voice communication to the nurses station will be possible E NURSE ASSIST BUTTON A staff member can initiate a nurse assist call from a Nurse Assist station by depressing a large red button The call shall hold until answered at the originating station by depressing the reset switch /call assurance light Originating a call from these stations shall 1 Flash the call assurance lamp in the Nurse Assist Station at 60 ppm MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SECTION 16750 PAGE 4 NURSE CALL SYSTEMS MICROPROCESSOR BASED 2 Flash the red section of the Corridor Dome Light and red section of any associated Zone Dome Lights at 60 ppm. 3 Flash the patient call light and sound a tone (60 ppm) at all Duty Stations 4 Flash the patient's room number, bed number, call priority status (2) and sound a tone (60 ppm) at the Master Station Annunciator F CODE BLUE BUTTON A staff member can initiate a Code Blue call from a Code Blue Station by depressing a large blue button The call shall hold until answered at the originating station by depressing the reset switch /call assurance light Originating a call from these stations shall: 1 Flash the call assurance lamp in the Code Blue Station at 120 ppm. 2 Flash the green section of the Corridor Dome Light and green section of any associated Zone Dome Lights at 120 ppm 3 Flash the patient call light and sound a tone (120 ppm) at all Duty Stations 4 Flash the patient's room number, bed number, call priority status (1) and sound a tone (120 ppm) at the Master Station Annunciator 5 Flash the corresponding station annunciator lamp and sound a tone (120 ppm) on the Code Blue Annunciator located at the telephone switchboard PBX Two way voice communication will not be possible between the Code Blue Station and the annunciator at the telephone switchboard G STAFF STATION Calling facilities and two way voice communication between the nurses station can be accomplished from the Staff Station A staff member can originate a call on the system by momentarily pressing the call button Originating a call shall 1 Illuminate the white call indicator lamp on the Staff Station 2 Flash the call light and sound a tone (6 ppm) at all Duty Stations 3 Flash the room number, call priority status (7) and sound a tone (6 ppm) at the Master Station Annunciator Upon answer of the call from the Master Station a red privacy light shall be illuminated on the Staff Station and the staff member may carry on a two way conversation 16750 4 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SECTION 16750 PAGE 5, NURSE CALL SYSTEMS MICROPROCESSOR BASED H DUTY STATION Calls from a Duty Station shall be annunciated in the same manner as calls from Staff Stations In addition the Duty Station shall provide audible and visual annunciation of calls placed from any other station in the system Normal, Emergency and Code Blue calls are distinguished by a distinct difference in signal rate I MASTER STATION ANNUNCIATOR The Master Station Annunciator can be used to call or receive calls from Patient Stations, Staff Stations, Duty Stations, or other Master Stations Code Blue, Nurse Assist and Toilet Emergency Station calls are also annunciated at the Master Station When a call is placed on the system the room number, bed number and priority status is displayed in one of five numeric displays in order of it's priority status (If all of the numeric displays are occupied, the Calls Waiting lamp on the Master Station shall illuminate Answering a call is accomplished by depressing the direct selection button adjacent to the numeric display Two way voice communication can then take place via the speaker- microphone utilizing the talk- listen bar or via a handset If calls are not answered immediately the tone signal shall be repeated unless the nurse is in the process of answering other calls Code Blue calls shall always be announced by a tone signal even if the Master Station is busy In addition to the communication and annunciation capabilities described above the following controls and options shall be provided 1 Patient Priority and Personal Attention Status programming 2 Scanning of patient bed stations for Patient Priority and Personal Attention Status 3 Zone Monitoring and Paging of up to 20 stations simultaneously 4 Nurse Service This feature shall permit the nurse at the Master Station to place a service reminder call on the system Depressing the Nurse Service button shall a Flash the amber section of the Corridor Dome Light at 60 ppm b Flash the amber section of any associated Zone Dome Lights at 60 ppm c Flash the white call indicator on the Patient Station d Activate the overtime reminder circuitry in the Master Station 16750 5 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SECTION 16750 PAGE 6 NURSE CALL SYSTEMS MICROPROCESSOR BASED 5 Overtime Reminder The nurse at the Master Station shall automatically be alerted after an adjustable time period (3 to 10 minutes) if a Nurse Service call has gone unanswered 6 Master Station Intertie Master Stations on the same floor shall be capable of intercommunication 7 Capture /Recapture Each Master Station shall be able to capture calls from swing rooms in the other unit, display captured rooms and release these rooms J PILLOW SPEAKER The Pillow Speaker shall allow the patient to place a call to the Master Station, turn a TV set off and on, change the TV channel, regulate the TV volume and to control patient bed reading light and wall wash ambient light over patient bed (two light contorl switches) Two -way voice communication is carried on over the speaker in the Patient Station K. CALL BUTTON AND CORDSET The Call Button and Cordset shall allow the patient to place a call to the Master Station by depressing the call button Two -way voice communication is carried on over the speaker in the Patient Station PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURE Owner preferred manufacturer is Rauland Responder III Executone and Dukane equipment may be submitted as alternate bid items Rauland Responder III part numbers are specified to indicate the level of quality required for the project 2 2 FINISHES All exposed faceplates shall be high impact molded plastic and shall be capable of withstanding normal hospital cleaning solutions 2 3 COMPONENTS AUDIO /VISUAL SYSTEM A Patient Bed Station single bed stations BS140 B Toilet Emergency Station PCS113 with 6 foot long cord C Nurse Assist Button PBS113 with red pushbutton and A44189 "STAFF USE ONLY" label D Code Blue Button PBS113 with blue pushbutton and A44189 "STAFF USE ONLY" label E Staff Station SS130 F Duty Station DS230 G Master Station Annunciator NCS4010 H Dome Lights CL4096 with white, amber, red and green lenses 16750 6 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McXINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL PART 4 TESTING 16750 7 SECTION 16750 PAGE 7 NURSE CALL SYSTEMS MICROPROCESSOR BASED I Pillow Speakers; ES313 -6' Furnish one for each audio /visual patient station and ten (10) spares J Call Button and Cordset CC11B Furnish five (5) K. Geriatric Call Button: CC010 Furnish ten (10) L Power Supply NCS2040 M Central Equipment NCS2000 N Equipment Cabinet Standard UL 24" x 18" x 4" deep flush wall mounted PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 OUTLET BOXES Provide an outlet box as required for each device Refer to architectural interior elevations for exact location See Section 16130 for mounting requirements 3 2 RACEWAYS Refer to Section 16110 for installation requirements and to drawings for proper raceway size Coordinate with system supplier for exact raceway requirements Raceways indicated on the drawings are 3/4" unless noted otherwise 3 3 WIRE Coordinate with system supplier for wiring requirements 3 4 STAFF STATIONS AND DUTY STATIONS When more than one Staff Station or Duty Station is located in a room, engrave each coverplate with the Department Name that it is connected to 3 5 STATION GROUPING Refer to Electrical Details in the Electrical Appendix for station grouping requirements 4 1 The completed system shall be tested and, after one subsequent week (minimum) "on -line" operation,, demonstrated to operate satisfactorily in the presence of the Architect, Electrical Engineer and an Owner's representative Correct any problems that surface during the test and redemonstrate to the satisfaction of an Owner s Representative PART 5 INSTRUCTION 5 1 The Contractor shall (after one week notification to the Architect) conduct a 4 hour instruction session during which all maintenance and operational aspects of the system will be described and demonstrated to personnel selected by the Owner The session shall be conducted by a Contractor's representative thoroughly familiar with the characteristics of the system 0 M MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SECTION 16750 PAGE 8 NURSE CALL SYSTEMS MICROPROCESSOR BASED manual information regarding the system shall be turned over to the Architect prior to scheduling the instruction session 5 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Provide per Section 16010 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 16750 8 1 1 1 MABLUM AND NORDFORS Mc INLEY GOpON SECTION 16776 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3B REMODEL VOICE PAGING SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION A Existing paging system manufacture is Rauland with Dukane amplifiers located on the basement level of the East Wing B Disconnect existing speakers Prior to wall demolition, carefully remove the speakers in the remodel area from service Terminate the circuits to maintain continuity and operation of the system throughout the facility Remove existing speakers and deliver to hospital engineer Obtain a signed receipt C Speakers Provide new speakers and local volume controls at Nurse Station and connect to existing system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURER Executone, Rauland, Soundolier 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 2 SPEAXERS 8" wide range with line matching transformers for 1/2, 1, 2 and 4 watt output (one coil for paging, one for background music) each with 4 volume taps CEILING TRIM PLATE Square, flush with ceiling trim ring, steel, white baked enamel finish, with plaster ring where mounted in gypboard ceilings BAFFLE BOX Formed welded steel painted inside and out with resonance limiting lining Mounting compatible with trim plate LOCAL VOLUME CONTROL Flush mounted in 2 gang box Volume controllers affect volume of music only Paging volume will remain constant regardless of volume control setting Provide phenolic nameplate "Music Volume" 2 6 RACEWAY AND OUTLET BOXES Raceway and outlet boxes shall be as specified in Sections 16110 and 16130 respectively 2 7 WIRES AND CABLES As supplied or specified by equipment supplier Provide individual circuits for each paging zone plus a common music circuit PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 Entire system wiring shall be contained in raceways Minimum size 1/2" Refer to Section 16700 Both paging and music circuits shall be extended to all speakers 16776 1 MAHLMM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 16776 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL VOICE PAGING SYSTEM 3 2 Speakers in ceiling tiles shall be centered or as directed 3 3 Reconnect matching transformer volume taps as required by Architect at completion of project END OP SECTION 16776 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON PART 1 GENERAL PART 2 PRODUCTS SECTION 16960 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3B REMODEL MEDICAL GAS ALARM PANEL 1 1 DESCRIPTION Provide emergency electrical power to each medical gas alarm station furnished under Division 15 Provide a power connection for central medical gas alarm panel at the Unit Clerk work station and circuits to the various pressure and vacuum switches furnished under Division 15 2 1 RACEWAY AND OUTLET BOXES Raceway and outlet boxes shall be as specified in Sections 16110 and 16130 respectively 2 2 WIRES AND CABLES As supplied or specified by equipment supplier Provide individual circuits for each alarm medical gas alarm panel PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 ALARM PANEL Provide flush mounted outlet box at alarm panel location 3 2 WIRING Refer to Section 16120 3 3 TESTING Test the completed system for proper operation and demonstrate satisfactory operation in the presence of the Owner and Engineer END OF SECTION MAHLUM NORDFORS McXINLEY GORDON .SECTION 16999 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL 1 01 DESCRIPTION Summary of procedures and requirements for project closeout of electrical portions of work. Conform also with other portions of the Contract Documents Final payment to Contractor is subject to full completion of this Section PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 01 RECORD DRAWINGS Reproducible, Xerox drawings See 16010, 1 10 2 02 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (0 M) MANUALS Hardboard, screw post, imprinted covers Tabbed dividers between categories See 16010, 1 11 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 01 REQUEST FOR FINAL PUNCH LIST To request a final electrical punch list, forward a letter to Sparling, Inc stating; "The electrical work on this project is complete, all punch list items to date are complete, items 1 14 in Section 16999, 3 02 are complete and the project is ready for final punch list observation" 3 02 JOB CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE A Perform the following procedures for project closeout of electrical portions of work 1 Perform testing, tests and documentation per 16030 2 Provide engraved nameplates on electrical equipment 3 Refinish electrical equipment finishes which are damaged 4 Clean up per 16100, 3 05 Clean all parts of lighting fixtures 5 Color code jdnction boxes per 16130 6 Provide spare fuses per 16180 7 Type panel schedules with actual "as- built" circuit descriptions 8 Number all circuit breakers 9 Obtain final electrical inspection Include copies in 0 M manual 10 Give written one year warranty in 0 M per 16010, 1 09 11 Furnish Record Drawings per 16010, 1 10 Obtain signature on Job Completion Form. 12 Furnish 0 M Manuals per 16010, 1 11 Obtain signature on Job Completion Form 13 Give instruction periods to owner's personnel per 16010, 1 12 Obtain signature on Job Completion Form. 14 Obtain letter of certification from fire alarm system supplier and forward to Sparling per 16700, 3 OlE 15 Obtain letter of certification from communications system supplier(s) and forward to Sparling per 16700, 3 OlE 16 To request final acceptance of project, fill out Job Completion Form in 16010, 1 13 and forward to Sparling Note If inspectors have not signed form, a copy of signed -off permits will suffice 17 Include with Job Completion Form, a copy of the final punch list with the word "DONE and the date and Contractor's initials after each item on the list END OF SECTION 16999 16999 1 TECHNICAL Permit Address q3c Caro h Sf Project description O1 (4 m i c ineAmo r ck 4- osp cal Li V G Kk 3E Trcths i-14or i ('a►e.'o r( rn 'r M ed i cal Cew -er) R�rno d eJ Date the permit was finaled Number of technical pages g5 \Iovemo2r 12 199 A o1A,exicivne 1 6 4+1e_ Vo tine. Drtject maLnuck, TO RE. 6 e9t) _.#71ed4 WE ARE SENDING ATTACHED ORIGINALS COPIES. DATE: 3 n/� kk moo )I FOR APPROVAL APPROVED AS SUBMITTED RESUBMIT FOR APPROVAL FOR REVIEW AND COMMENT C COPIES FOR YOUR USE APPROVED AS NOTED SUBMIT FOR DISTRIBUTION RETURNING LOANED PRINTS COPIES AS REQUESTED RETURNED FOR CORRECTIONS RETURN CORRECTED PRINTS SIGN RETURN COPIES ORIGINALS FOR DISTRIBUTION FOR BIDS DUE DATE DUE REMARKS. Z'eti A II C/V i 4L !la.--I /A b p: elate.< !SZt4fe I ~e.124)01 pievdmo_ COPY LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL FAX VIA COURIER DATE PROJECT NO 9//o. 00 UNDER SEPERATE COVER VIA NO. /DESCRIPTION SI o 4 A A Le S 6944,€ 2dd ad.s.d rr- _c/ M A H L U M A N O R D F O R S M KINLEY GORDON 2505 Th rd Ave S to 219 Seattle WA 98121 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 F Code Reauirements: All design materials, fabrications and construction shall conform to the requirements of the Uniform Building Code, 1994 edition, and latest edition of ACI 'Building Code Requirement for Reinforced Concrete' Utility Location. The general contractor shall utilize the services of the 'Utility Locator Service' (1- 800 -424- 5555) to verify the extent and locations of site utilities. Any major discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Design Engineer In addition any discrepancies in location between actual utilities and the utilities locations shown on these drawings shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Design Engineer Site Safety* All work shall be performed in conformance with existing WISHSA regulations. Special Conditions Contractor shall verify existing grades as shown on the drawing and all dimensions of existing structures in the field and shall notify the Design Engineer of all field changes which would modify the shoring system prior to excavation, drilling fabrication and installation. Steel Specification. Structural Steel Welding Welder Certification Steel Materials: Prestressing steel Structural steel Connection material embedded items channels angles, base plates and miscellaneous steel Welding electrodes Structural tubing Pipes seamless Reinforcement Bar fc (psi) 1 000 Use Minimum Cement Per Cubic Yard 2 Sacks Timber Lagging 4 x12' \C£097 \9706J \06JSHf(Mc GENERAL SHORING NOTES (CT JO 970631_ Design fabrication and erection shall be in accordance with the following specifications AISC Specification for the Design Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings 9th Edition AWS D1 1 -88 AWS prequalified joint details Washington Associated of Building Officials (WABO) (City of Seattle Certified) ASTM A416 Grade 270 ksi Seven -Wire Strand ASTM A36 ASTM A36 E70XX ASTM A500 Grade B ASTM A53 Type S Grade B ASTM A615 Grade 60 Concrete. Concrete work shall conform to all required of Chapter 26 of the Uniform Building Code. Concrete strength shall be verified by standard cylinder tests, unless approved otherwise. Max Water Per 94 LB of Cement Grade Max. Water Per 94 LB of Cement When Using Air Entraining Aaent Lagging* Saw lumber shall conform to 'Grading and Dressing Rules, West coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) latest edition. Lumber shall be pressure treated and be the grade listed below* Douglas Fir -Larch No 2 or Equivalent Use Lean Concrete Fb(psi) NORTH ADDITION 1250 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL PORT ANGELES WA SHORING PROCEDURE SHORING MONITORING Verification. Dimensions and location of existing structures shall be verified prior to fabrication and installation of any structure member Notify the Design Engineer about any discrepancies in dimensions Hole Drilling Pile holes shall be drilled without loss of ground and without endangering previously installed piles. Pile Placement: Place piles in hole and fill with lean concrete insuring adequate contact between piles and soil. Do not allow a drilled hole to remain open overnight. Lagging Shotcrete lagging shall be installed at all shoring walls. Voids between lagging and soil shall be backfilled with granular material. Drainage behind the wall must be maintained It is the Contractor's responsibility to limit the amount of exposed soil without lagging to avoid loss of soil. Shorina Monitorina Systematic program of observation shall be conducted per project specifications during the project execution to determine the effect of construction on adjacent facilities and structure in order to protect them from serious damage Utilities within the distance of 1 0 H (where H is the depth of the excavation) from the shoring wall should be protected from damage due to the lateral and vertical movement occurring around the excavation area. Corrective action can then be taken if unusual patterns of movement are recorded Monitoring of the shoring system should include measurements of vertical and horizontal movements at the top of each soldier pile or at intermittent intervals as considered appropriate by the geotechnical engineer Additional monitoring points may be established at the direction of the geotechnical engineer The measuring system used for shoring monitoring should have an accuracy of at least 0 05 inches. All reference points on the existing ground surface should be installed and read prior to commencing the excavation Subsequent points at depth along the shoring wall should be installed and read as soon as possible during excavation All reference points should be read prior to and during critical stages of construction The frequency of readings will depend on the results of previous readings and the rate of construction. As a minimum, readings should be taken on a daily basis until the shoring walls are completed More frequent readings may be required at critical times during construction or if significant movement is indicated All readings should be reviewed by the geotechnical engineer D.\SHORINGW OTEIGNOTE_97063.doc GENERAL NOTES CIVILTECH CORPORATION SHORING DESIGN BERSCHAUER PHILLIPS "-NEW CON( R 9 E. \GE097 \97063 \0635H2.0WG NOTE. EXACT LOCATIONS OF UNDERGROUND POWERLINES ARE UNKNOWN P EX ELEC MH 3 1 11 C2 C l SD 2 EX A/C 3 I L04 `l r �5 T -1-. r w I. 1 `L I \i AREA kt) f F r l 1 RE)tovl AL4''P tl �s w N �AI BUiLD1NlS. Ns, 1\ Q PO \1'dc '�I EX. OIL /V REMOVE A WALL IS TO SANITA RE- INSTAI EXIST ELE TO REMAIt PROTECT IF NECES ENC PROTEC SHORIN( TO CON BOLLARE LIN O REMOVE LINE OF EX CLf CONNEC REMOVE SOLIDER PILE SCHDULE I Pile No Top Elev (ft) Base Elev (ft) Tip Elev (ft) I Pile Length (ft) Pile Size P1 91 0 85 73 0 18 W24x68 P2 97 0 85 67 5 30 0 W24x68 NORTH ADDITION CI VILTECH OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL CORPORATION PORT ANGELES WA P3 P4 98 0 98 2 85 85 62 5 62 5 35 5 35 7 W24X104 W24X104 PLAN AND PILE SCHEDULE SHORING DESIGN BERSCHAUER PHILLIPS P5 98 5 85 62 5 36 0 W24X104 SH2 E. G£097\9 706J 063SH3.0 wC ELEV (ft) 100 90 80 70 60 4 SPACES 5 -0' 20' -0' P2 P3 P4 -7- EXCAVATION LINE P1 EXISTING GROUND SURFACE L _J i L J \4 L J WALL ELEVATION PILE TIP TOP OF PILE BOTTOM OF EXCAVATION 4 0 PVC CUT HALF CONNECTING TO DRAINAGE \W\ r NO SCALE NO SCALE 2 -6' PILE DETAIL NORTH ADDITION C I V I L T E C H OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL PORT ANGELES WA aTJ CORPORATION z-- GRAVEL BACKFILL PILE SHALL BE INSTALLED WITHIN DRILLED SHAFT ELEVATION AND DETAIL SHORING DESIGN BERSCHAUER PHILLIPS mma IUIa, Cl p an SHJ s .C" MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL Date: Tuesday November 12, 1996 NOTICE TO ALL CONTRACTORS. SUBCONTRACTORS. AND SUPPLIERS This addendum is considered a part of the contract documents. VOLUME 1 PROJECT MANUAL Section Description 00300 BID FORM Delete 03300 Bid Form and replace with revised 03300 Bid Form, Addendum 1 as attached. 01030 BASE BID AND ALTERNATES Delete 01030 Base Bid and Alernates and replace with revised 01030 Base Bid and Alternates, Addendum 1 as attached. 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE From the Office of: MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON 2505 Third Avenue, Suite 219 Seattle, WA 98121 SECTION 00901 PAGE 1 ADDENDUM 1 Insert Paragraph 2.3 C as follows: A. Trowelable Underlayment Compound: Fine textured latex concrete mortar compound for building slopes to drain. 1 Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Raeco R 25 b Ardex SD -P Instantpatch c. Embeco T-430, Master Builders. d. Thoro Underlayment Trowel Grade, Thom System Products. e. Thorite, Thoro System Products. 2 Sub -Floor Pnmers, Sealers, and Accelerators: As recommended by underlayment manufacturer Insert Paragraph 3.2.A.1 as follows: 1 Chip, scour acid -etch, or otherwise roughen existing substrate as recommended by underlayment manufacturer Replace Paragraph 3.9.A with the follows: A. Concrete: Provide reinforcement and concrete fill at all abandoned penetrations through existing structural slab. 1 Install steel plate to underside of existing opening and permanently fasten with anchor bolts. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2. Pre -drill and epoxy reinforcing bars into edges of existing penetrations 1 arger than eighteen inches. Tie ends of bars together at center of opening. Replace Paragraph 3.9.B with the follows: B. Underlayment Provide underlayment at troughs left in existing flooring by demolished walls, depressions in existing flooring around core drilled penetrations, at areas of broken or uneven floors, at sloped floors at shoewer rooms, and as not d in Volume 2 Project Drawings. 1 Provide self leveling underlayment where required to provide smooth level surface for floor finish materials. 2. Provide trowelable underlayment where required for slopes, deep depressions, and feather edges. 08800 GLAZING Add Section 08800 GLAZING in entirety 09666 SHEET VINYL FLOOR M Paragraph 2.3 as follows: 2 3 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE A. Thin. load- bearing, flexible waterproofing system consisting of a self curing liquid rubber polymer which is cold applied with an integral reinforcing fabric to form a seamless light duty waterproof membrane. B. Available Products: 9235 waterproof membrane by Laticrete International, Inc. Ail Paragraph 3.2.F as follows: F Apply waterproof membrane per manufacturer's directions at sloping floors to drain in HC Toilet/Shower rooms. DIV 15 MECHANICAL Add Addendum 1 Division 15 as provided by FSi Consulting Engineers, attached. 16781 TELEVISION SYSTEM Add Section 16781 TELEVISION SYSTEM in entirety VOLUME 2 PROJECT DRAWINGS Drawing Description A 2 5 FINISH PLAN AND FINISH SCHEDULE SECTION 00901 PAGE 2 ADDENDUM 1 Add the following remark to the finish schedule at room 37 Elevator Lobby 11 Wood trim to match Corridor 36 extends to underside of soffit only See Interior Elevation 5/A 5.2 for extents, typical. A 3 1 EXTERIOR ELEVATION Add Type B window unit designation per attached sketch ASK 106 A 4 1 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN Revise HC Toilet room 33 per attached sketch ASK 101 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 0 0 9 01 PAGE 3 ADDENDUM 1 A 4 2 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN Revise HC Toilet rooms 13 17 and 26 per attached sketch ASK 102. A 5 1 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Revise HC Toilet rooms per attached sketch ASK 103. A 5 2 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Revise patient bedrooms per attached sketch ASK 105 A 6 1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN Revise ceilings at patient bedrooms and patient toilet rooms per attached sketch ASK 104 A 9 2 DETAILS Add Typical Floor Drain Detail per attached sketch ASK 107 M MECHANICAL Add Addendum 1 revisions to mechanical drawings as provided by FSi Consulting Engineers, attached. E -4 LIGHTING PLAN Revise ng fixture at patient room sinks as indicated on attached electrical sketch ESK-4 1 E -6 COMMUNICATIONS PLAN Provide electrical connection of additional smoke /fire dampers as indicated on attached electrical sketch ESK -6.1 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon Revise location of Nurse Call Toilet Emergency Station in HC Toilet 33 as indicated on attached sketch ESK -6.2 Add nurse call devices at Patient Room 34 as indicated on attached sketch ESK -6.3 E ROOF PLAN Provide electrical connection of additional exhaust fan as indicated on attached electrical sketch ESK 7 1 END OF SECTION 00901 MAHLUM NORDFORS VICKI \LE\ GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART l GUNER 1 1 THE PROJECT Olympic Memorial Hospital 3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 1 2 THE DOCUMENTS PART 2 THE BID SECTION 00300 PAGE 1 BID FORM ADDENDUM 1 The plans and specifications are entitled 'Construction Documents for Olympic Memorial Hospital -3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel 1 3 THE ARCHITECT Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon 2505 Third Avenue, Suite 219 Seattle Washington 9812] To: Olympic Memorial Hospital 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 98362 Ladies and Gentlemen. I/We have received the Project Specification for the project as identified above. I/We have also received Addenda Nos. and have included their provisions in my /our bid. I/We have attended the mandatory site inspection. Yes No (check one) I/We have examined both the documents and the site and fully understand the extent and nature of the work. Questions regarding the project have been asked of the Architect during the bidding period. I/We submit the following bid. In submitting this bid, I/We agree 1 To hold my /our bid open for sixty (60) days. 2. To accept the provisions of the Advertisement to Bid and the Instructions to Bidders regarding disposition of Bid Security 3 To enter into and execute a contract, if awarded on the basis of this bid and to furnish guarantee bonds in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions of this contract. 4 To accomplish the work in accordance with the contract documents. 5 To complete the work by the time specified in Section 01011 Contract Time and Sequence. 6 The bids are in accordance with Section 01030 Base Bid and Alternates. 7 I/We have attached to this bid the required Bid Security and Bidder Qualification Form. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKI \LEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIO \AL CARE UNIT REMODEL I/We will construct this project for the lump -sum price of Alternates (Not Used) Alt. Description Addition #1 Headwall Units at Patient Rooms S #2 Wood Veneer Soffits. S #3 Vinyl Wallcovering at Patient Room walls S #4 Drapes and Valences S #5 Lavatories in HC Toilet Rooms S NOTE. If such subcontractors are not listed below a list of their names must be submitted within one hour of the published bid submittal time. Failure to provide this list shall render the bid void. SECTION 00300 PAGE 2 BID FORM ADDENDUM 1 DOLLARS (S None of the base bid or alternate prices include Washington State sales tax. £ubcontractors I/We intend to use the following subcontractors for any and all portions of the work awarded. HVAC Subcontractor Plumbing Subcontractor Electrical Subcontractor Roofing Subcontractor In addition to the above, the following subcontractors have subcontract amounts equal to more than ten percent of the bid amount. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEI GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL Signatures (Date) (Signature) (Title) (Legal name of person, corporation, or firm submitting bid) (State Contractor's License Number) 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinicv Gordon SECTION 00300 PAGE 3 BID FORM ADDENDUM 1 (Seal If bid is by a corporation, signature must be as required in Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders.) END OF SECTION 00300 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKi \LEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL FART 1 GENERAL 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1 2 REFERENCES A. Comply with Section 00030 Invitation to Bid, and Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders. B Each bidder shall state in his bid, in the spaces provided on the Bid Form (Section 00300) the following: 1 Base Bid. Bid for performing the work of the base bid as described below 2. Alternate Bids: Bid for performing additional items of work, omitting items of work, substituting materials or construction for those specified in the base bid, all as described below State the amount to he added to or deducted from the base bid. C No sales tax shall be included for any of the bid prices. D The above terms are used as defined in Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders. 1 3 DESCRIPTION SECTION 01030 PAGE 1 BASE BID AND ALTERNATES ADDENDUM 1 A. Base bid is the sum proposed to perform all general mechanical, and electrical work as specified and shown in Divisions 0 through 16 (specifications) and Divisions A M, and E (project drawings) also referred to as the contract documents. B. The following items are excluded from the above base bid: 1 Work included in the following additive or deductive alternates 2. Work specifically shown or noted as not in contract (NIC) 1 4 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form (Section 00300) for certain construction activities defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from base bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the contract documents. 1 5 ALTERNATES A. Coordination: Coordinate related work and modify or adjust adjacent work as necessary to ensure that work affected by each accepted alternate is complete and fully integrated into the project. B. Notification. Immediately following the award of the contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved notification of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C Schedule 1 A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this section. Specification sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate 2 Include as part of each alternate miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as pan of the alternate MAHLUM NORDFORS McKI \LEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIO \AL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED1 SECTION 01030 PAGE 2 BASE BID AND ALTERNATES ADDENDUM 1 PART 3 EXFCUTION 3 1 GENERAL A. Alternate bids may or may not be accepted by Owner B. Bid prices for alternates shall include adjustments in the work of all materials and trades as may be necessary because of additions, deletions, or substitutions. C Rough -ins and all other provisions required for the future installation of items of work omitted in base bid or in deductive alternates shall remain in the contract unless otherwise stated. Refer to drawings or specifications for explanations of cut off points of work remaining. D Work which may be added in alternates shall become part of and be governed by the provisions of the specification sections for like materials and construction. E. In alternate descriptions, reference to architectural drawings shall be interpreted as all inclusive reference to any other project drawings showing the work. 3 2 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate #1 Headwall Units at Patient Rooms 1 Provide 06400 headwall units at all Patient Rooms. 2. If this alternate is not accepted, base bid provides for 06400 headwall units at Patient Rooms 15 20 21 and 22 only Gas outlets, electrical receptacles, and accessories in Patient Rooms 12 14 16 18 19 25 27 and 34 shall be flush mounted directly into wall At back to back headwalls, provide 09255 6 inch studs at wall between the adjacent Patient Bedrooms. B. Alternate #2 Wood Veneer Soffits. 1 Provide 09255 framing and 06200 wood veneer soffits as shown above Patient Room doors, Nurse Station counter and entry doors to wing. 2. If this alternate is not accepted, base bid provides for 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings. C Alternate #3 Vinyl Wallcovering at Patient Room walls. 1 Provide 09950 Vinyl Wallcovering at Patient Room walls as shown in Volume 2 Project Drawings, Finish Schedule 2 If this alternate is not accepted, provide 09900 paint at Patient Room walls in lieu of vinyl wallcovenng. D Alternate #4 Drapes and Valences 1 Provide 12541 Draperies and 06200 Wood Valence at exterior windows where indicated in Volume 2, Project Drawings, Room Finish Plan and Schedules and Interior Elevations. 2. If this alternate is not accepted, Base Bid does not include 12541 Draperies and 06200 Wood Valences. E. Alternate #5 Lavatories at HC Toilet Rooms 13 17 26 and 33 1 Provide 15000 lavatory and all associated plumbing, and 10800 paper towel dispenser and mirror at HC Toilet Rooms 13 17 26 and 33 as shown in ASK s 101 102, and 103 Addendum 1 2 If this alternate is not accepted, Base Bid does not include 15000 lavatory and all associated plumbing and 10800 paper towel dispenser and mirror at HC Toilet Rooms 13 17 26 and 13 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKI \LEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIO \AL CARE UNIT REMODEL O 1996 Mahlum sordfors McKinley (lord( n SECTION 01030 PAGE 3 BASE BID AND ALTERNATES ADDENDUM 1 END OF SECTION 01030 MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 1 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section. 1 Insulated window units. 2. Vision lights in doors. 3 Interior relites. 1 3 DEFINITIO \S A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glazing standard. B Deterioration of Coated Glass. Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's directions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. C Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's directions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standard. D Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use due to causes other than glass breakage and improper practices for maintaining, and cleaning insulating glass. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on the interior surfaces of glass. Improper practices for maintaining and cleaning glass do not comply with the manufacturer's directions. 1 4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General. Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable) without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabncation, and installation, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on Drawings are for detailing only Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in- service conditions. Provide glass lights for the various size openings in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat treated) to meet or exceed the following criteria. 1 Minimum glass thickness, nominally of lights in exterior walls is 0.23 inch. 2. Tinted and heat absorbing glass thicknesses for each tint indicated are the same throughout Project. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 2 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 3 Minimum glass thicknesses of lights, whether composed of annealed or heat treated glass, are selected so the worst -case probability of failure does not exceed the following: a. 8 lights per 1000 for lights set vertically or not over 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. Determine minimum thickness of monolithic annealed glass according to ASTM E 1300 For other than monolithic annealed glass, determine thickness per glass manufacturer's standard method of analysis including applying adjustment factors to ASTM E 1300 based on type of glass. C Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass- framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on materials actual surface temperatures due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1 Temperature Change (Range) 120 deg F (67 deg C) ambient, 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 1 5 SUBMITTALS A. General. Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated. C Samples for verification purposes of 12 -inch- square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12 inch -long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. D Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1 Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program of a recognized certification agency or independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Maintenance data for glass and other glazing matenals to be included in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1 FGMA Publications: 'FGMA Glazing Manual 2. LSGA Publications: 'LSGA Design Guide 3 SIGMA Publications: TM -3000 Vertical Glazing Guidelines B. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97 1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. 1 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. r MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 3 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 C Fire Resistive Glazing Products for Door Assemblies: Products identical to those tested per ASTM E 152, labeled and listed by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D Insulating Glass Certification Program Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component light of units with appropnate certification label of inspecting and testing agency indicated below 1 Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc (ALI) 3 National Certified Testing Laboratories (NCTL) E. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project with a record of successful in- service performance. F Single Source Responsibility for Glass. Obtain glass from one source for each product indicated below 1 Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036) type and class indicated. 2. Insulating glass of each construction indicated 3 Heat- treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048) condition indicated. G Single Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessones from one source for each product and installation method indicated. 1 7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND H 1NDLI \G A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1 8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing matenals manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1 9 WARRANTY A. General. Warranties specified in this Article shall not depnve the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. D Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass: Submit written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass units that deteriorate as defined in 'Definitions article, f.o.b point of manufacture freight allowed Project site within specified warranty period indicated below Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing protecting, and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. 1 Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of Substantial Completion MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 4 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTI RERS A. Available Products. Subject to compliance with requirements products that may be Incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 Ford Glass Division 2. Guardian Industries Corp 3 LOF Glass, Inc. 4 PPG Industries, Inc. 2 2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat) Class as indicated below and Quality q3 (glazing select) 1 Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B Refer to requirements for sealed insulating glass units for performance characteristics of assembled units composed of tinted glass, coated or uncoated, relative to visible light transmittance, U- values, shading coefficient, and visible reflectance. 2 3 HEAT TREATED FLOAT GLASS A. Uncoated, Clear Heat Treated Float Glass. ASTM C 1048 Condition A (uncoated surfaces) Type I (transparent glass flat) Class 1 (clear) Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as indicated below 2. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated. C Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide heat treated glass by one of the following companies 1 AFG Industries, Inc. 2. Guardian Industries Corp 3 PPG Industries, Inc. 4 Tempglass. 5 Viracon, Inc. 2 5 CERAMIC COATED SPANDREL GLASS PRODUCTS A. Ceramic Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048 Condition B (spandrel glass, one surface ceramic coated) Type I (transparent glass, flat) Class 1 (clear) Quality q3 (glazing select) and complying with requirements specified including those in Ceramic- Coated Spandrel Glass Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section. B Fallout Resistance: Provide spandrel units identical to those passing fallout resistant test for spandrel glass specified in ASTM C 1048. 2 7 WIRED GLASS A. Wired Glass. ASTM C 1036 Type II (patterned and wired glass, fiat) Class 1 (clear) Quality q8 (glazing); 6 mm (0.23 inch) thick of form and mesh pattern indicated below 1 Polished Wired Glass. Form I (wired, polished both sides), and as follows: MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 5 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 b Mesh m2 (square) B Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering wired glass products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following companies. 1 Polished Wired Glass: a. Ashai Glass Co. b Central Glass Co. Ltd. c Nippon Sheet Glass Ltd. d. Pilkington Sales (North America) Ltd. 2 4 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units. Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lights of glass separated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and with other requirements indicated, including those in Insulating Glass Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section. 1 For properties of individual glass lights making up units, refer to requirements specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to types, classes, kinds, and condiuons of glass products comprising lights of insulating glass units. 2. Provide heat treated, coated float glass of kind indicated or if not otherwise indicated, Kind HS (heat strengthened) where recommended by manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements specified and Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is designated or required. 3 U values are expressed as Btu /hour x sq ft. x deg F 2 5 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1 Compatibility Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 2. Suitability Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated and conditions existing at time of installation. 3 Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: a. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturers standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that comply with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referencing ASTM classifications for Type Grade, Class and Uses. C Glazing Sealant: Use for all wet glazing, except as otherwise specified: 1 `999 Glazing Sealant by Dow Corning Corp 2. `Silglaze N2501 Sealant or `Gesil N26(X) Sealant by General Electrical Co 3 `Rhodorsil 5C' by Rone Poulenc Inc. Princeton NJ MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC AUBURN SOUTH NOTE. Backup material shall be compatible with sealant. 2 6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING \7ATLRI \LS B Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. SECTION 08800 PAGE 6 GLAZING ADDENDUM 1 D Closed Cell Foam Tape: Continuous extruded expanded foam neoprene with a Shore A durometer hardness and profile adequate to fulfill the overall performance requirements specified and complying with ASTM C509 Type II Provide adhesive on one side E. Butyl Glazing Tape Reinforced: A preformed, nonsagging, nonoxidizing, nonstaining butyl rubber tape with core reinforcement, one of the following: I Tremco 440' by Tremco Mfg Co 2. Extru -Seal B -44 by Pecora Chemical Corp 3 `DAP Butyl Rubber Tape by DAP Inc. A. General. Provide products of material size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer C Setting Blocks: Elastomenc material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5 D Spacers: Elastomenc blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lights in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomenc material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking) 2 7 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements. ERT 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following 1 Manufactunng and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system 3 Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4 Effective sealing between points of glass- framing members. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 7 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLI \IC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 3 2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates. 3 3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows: 1 Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturers label 2 Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant substrate testing. E. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as follows: I Locate spacers inside, outside and directly opposite each other Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements. 2 Provide 1/8 -inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw bow and similar characteristics. 3 4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed by glass their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sighiline of stops. B Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKI\LE1' GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 8 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 C Where framing points are vertical cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer E Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each lite is installed. G Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 3 6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance B Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. Install pressurized gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. 3 8 PROTECTION AND CLEA \I A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter If despite such protection contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer C Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build -up of dirt, scum alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer D Remove and replace glass that is broken chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, dunng construction period. E. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer 3 6 SCHEDULE A. Extent of Work 1 Provide glass and glazing throughout openings at windows, relights, sidelights, transoms, doorlights, vision panels, and other openings intended for or requiring glass. 2. Provide types of glass and glazing as scheduled herein and indicated on the drawings. 3 Where in conflict with this schedule provide the work that is the most expensive. B. At Intenor Doors and Sidelights I MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEN GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 9 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM I 1 At nonlabeled door openings, provide tempered glass throughout. 2. At labeled door openings, provide clear wire glass throughout. C Relights and Transoms 1 Provide tempered glass throughout, 1/4 inch thick. D Insulated Glass. Provide factory installed insulated glazing units at all vertical exterior windows. E. Where Glass is Shown on Drawings: Provide as shown except provide per this schedule in event of conflict. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKI \LEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 10 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 PRIMARY CLEAR FLOAT GLASS DATA Class: Class 1 (clear) Thickness: 1/4 inch Visible Light Transmittance. 89% Visible Light Reflectance: 8% Shading Coefficient. 0 94 Solar Heat Gain Coefficient. 0 81 Quality Standard Product. PPG Clear Glass MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 11 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 CERAMIC- COATED GLASS PROI)I.CT DATA SHEET Kind of Heat Treatment: Kind HS (heat strengthened) Thicicness: 1/4 inch Location of Ceramic Coating: Third Surface Ceramic Coating Color Silver Pearl Quality Standard Product. PPG Spectraclad MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTIO\ 08800 PAGE 12 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 INSULATING GLA SS DATA SHI ?E'1' Classification of Units: Thickness: Air Space Width. Gas Filling: Sealing System Spacer Specifications: Thickness of each light. Uncoated Clear Indoor Light. Uncoated Clear Outdoor Light: Visible Light Transmittance. Visible Light Reflectance: Summer Daytime U -Value Winter Nighttime U Value: Shading Coefficient: Class C, CB or CBA I inch 1/2 inch Fill air space with Argon Manufacturer's standard sealants Manufacturers standard 1/4 inch Kind HS (heat strengthened) Conditiona A (uncoated) Class 1 (clear) float glass. Kind HS (heat strengthened) Conditiona A (uncoated) Class I (clear) float glass. 80% 15%r 0 56 049 0 82 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY CORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 13 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLI \IC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 INSULATING SPANDREL GLASS DATA SHEET Classification of Units: Class C CB or CBA Thickness: 1 inch Air Space Width. 1/2 inch Gas Filling: Fill air space with Argon Sealing System Manufacturer s standard sealants Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard Thickness of each light. 1/4 inch Ceramic Coated Indoor Light. Comp!) with requirements of specified for ceramic- coated spandrel glass products. Ceramic- Coated Outdoor Light. Comply with requirements of specified for ceramic- coated spandrel glass products. Summer Daytime U Value. 0 56 Winter Nighttime U Value 0 49 Shading Coefficient: 0.82 0 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 08800 G E3) e%AHLUM N O R D F O R S M c K I N L E Y GORDON CORRDOR 36 VERIFY 15000 SHOWER ENCLOSURE ROUGH OPENING DIMENSIONS TYPICAL CN1 I ~21 N 1 1 3 5X8' cI I ACTIVITY ROOM 32 l 3- 11/2' r- -moo li- i 1 1 I HC I'TOLET 1 3 I R I 7• VERIFY A) 4'-1d 3 Z 1 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 SPattIP WA a 12 I 2 0 6 4 4 1 4 1 5 1 2D6 441 047:-. F 1 PARTAL E\JLARGED PLAY WEST 1/4 1 -0' li.MORML Transitional Care Unit Remodel /BOTTOM OF T V ALCOVE 'ABOVE AT 6 -4 A.F F PATENT ROOM 34 SLOPE 03300 UNDERLAYMENT TO 15000 FLOOR DRAIN TYPICAL 09666 THRESHOLD TYPICAL PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRPTION: ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING: A -4.1 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 ASK. 101 CLEAN UTUTY C SLOPE 03300 UNDERLAYMENT TO 15000 FLOOR DRAIN TYPICAL PATENT ROOM M 12 10265 CORNER GUARD TYPICAL .1 M A H L U M N O R D F O R S M c K I N L E Y GORDON VERIF( 15000 SHOWER ENCLOSURE ROUGH OPENING DIMENSIONS TYPICAL C 2505 Third Avenue Suite 119 SYattle WA 90121 2ub 441 4151 2 441 047c F NOTE DIMENSIONS AND WALL TYPES SHOWN AT TOILET ROOM 13 SIMILAR AT TOILET ROOM 17 AND SIMILAR OPPOSITE AT TOILET ROOM 26 PAR ENLARGED PLAN EAST TOILET ROOM 17 SIMILAR TOILET ROOM 26 SIMILAR OPPOSITE VEMORK Transitional Care Unit Remodel 09666 THRESHOLD TYPICAL 10265 CORNER GUARD TYPICAL PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRIPTOR ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING: A -4.2 DATE: 11 NOVEMBER 1996 ASK. 102 16000 UGHT SWITCH TYPICAL NORTH EAST (ROOM 33 SIMILAR OPPOSITE) 10800 RECESSED SEAT COVER DISPENSER TYPICAL 16000 NURSE CALL TYPICAL 10800 SHELF TYPICAL I I SOUTH (ROOM 33 SIMILAR) e M A H L U M 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 N O R D F O R S Seattle WA x-•121 M c K I N L E Y 206 441 4 1 5 1 GORDON 206 441 047b F SOAP DISPENSER (FI0) TYPICAL 10800 MIRROR TYPICAL 10800 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER J r TYPICAL 10800 GRAB BAR TYPICAL r 10800/15000 GRAB BAR TYPICAL HC TOILET 13 SHOWN 1/4" 1 -0' HC TOILET 17 SIMILAR HC TOILET 26 SIMILAR OPPOSITE oft VEIIORUI llo Transitional Care Unit Remodel 10800 RECESSED TOILET PAPER AND NAPKIN RECEPTACLE TYPICAL 10800/15000 FOLDING SHOWER SEAT TYPICAL 10800 GRAB BAR TYPICAL PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRPTION: ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWUIG: A -5.1 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 ASK. 103 M &N M G TOILET 15A 09255 GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT WITH I 09900 PAINT I TYPICAL PATENT ROOM 15 A H L U M O R D F O R S c K 1 N L E Y O R D O N PATENT ROOM 16 X -id 8 -0' off• 7'-6' r 15' 0 2505 Third Avenue Suite 2l' Seattle WA q 121 20b 441 4151 2 b 441 u47-- F 12' TYPICAL J Transitional Care Unit Remodel ortt Mt HON l ROOM 18 V o HC 0 TOILET PARTIAL ENLARGED REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1/4 1 -0' PATIENT ROOM 16 SHOWN, PATIENT ROOM12 SIMILAR, PATIENT ROOM 27 SIMILAR OPPOSITE PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRIPTION: ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING: A-6.1 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 AS 104 ef' M A H L U M N O R D F O R S M c K IN L E Y GORDON 06400 HEADWALL ALTERNATE NO. 1 TYPICAL 10265 WALL PANEL TYPICAL El EE 1 r 06400 ADJUSTABLE SHELF WITH PULL OUT CLOTHES ROD PERPENDICULAR TO DOOR TYPICAL AT ALL 18" DEEP WARDROBES 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I� EAST 10265 CORNER GUARD TYPICAL 16000 NIGHT LIGHT 06400 WARDROBE TYPICAL. PL -4 4" 2' 6" 21" DEEP PATIENT ROOM 16 SHOWN 1/4" 1 -0' PATIENT ROOM 12 SIMILAR PATIENT ROOM 27 SIMILAR OPPOSITE 2565 Third Avenue Suice 21`i SPattIP WA 9,:;121 20h 441 4151 20b 441 047: F oft gEORML It* Transitional Care Unit Remodel 2' -0" 18" DEEP PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRPTIO■t ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING. A -5.2 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 19% ASK. 105 M A H L U M N O R D F O R S M c K I N L E Y GORDON El I I II 101 I I IE 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 eattle WA 9'-121 20h 441 4151 2 h 441 047 F I11 6 PARTIAL SOUTH ELEVATION 1/8" 1 -0' L '7) Transitional Care Unit Remodel i opt RI4L II 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRIPTION: ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING. A -3.1 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 ASK. 106 S =1 —0' 9 1/2' DIAMETER TYPICAL FLOOR DRAIN M A H L U M 2505 Third Avenue t)uice N O R D F O R S Seaccle WA 9o121 M c K I N L E Y 2 0 6 4 4 1 4 1 5 1 GORDON 20e 441 047c F 15000 FLOOR DRAIN 07901 SEALANT 09666 SHEET VINYL SLOPE 03300 UNDERLAYMENT TO 09666 THRESHOLD TYPICAL 03300 SETTING BED NOTE FLOOR DRAIN TYPICAL AT TOILET ROOM 13 17 26 AND 33 EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR og1,f4WATERPR00F MEMBRANE CORE DRILL OPENING FOR DRAIN Oft PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 •■•••4 r DESCRIPTOR ADDENDUM 1 21y ���u gmm` REFERENCE DRAWNG: A-9.2 Transitional Care Unit DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 Remodel ASK. 107 f MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL Date. Tuesday November 12, 1996 VOLUME 1 PROJECT MANUAL Section Descnption 15010 GENERAL PROVISIONS Add to paragraph 1 05 F submittal data to be submitted on Rooftop Air Handler color options Condenser color options Revise paragraph 1 13 A.1 to read as follows. 1 Patching. The mechanical subcontractor shall do all patching required for installation of new mechanical work. Patching of structure or walls required due to demolition of existing mechanical shall be done by General Contractor During the bidding period, notify the General Contractor the extent of patching required. 15400 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM Add paragraph 1.05 N as follows. N Water Use Standards for Fixtures and fittings. 1 Waterclosets, flush valve 2. Faucets 3 Shower Heads From the Office of: FSi consulting engineers 605 First Ave, Suite 400 Seattle, Washington 98104 1.6 gpf 2.5 gpm 2.5 gpm Revise paragraph `P1 -1 and `P1 -2' insulation description as follows: Insulation. McQuire Products Model ProWrap, seamless insulation and cover Add paragraph `P5 -2' and `P5 -3' accessory description as follows. Accessories. See Architectural drawings and Section 10800 for grab bars, seats and other accessories to be ordered by the General with the enclosure. Add paragraph `P5 -3' enclosure description as follows: Enclosure: Kohler Model Sonata with non -slip walking surface Revise paragraph "Existing Shower Stalls' shower head description as follows. Shower Head. Powers #M -2. Revise paragraph `D -1 Floor Drain description as follows. D -1 Floor Drain J.R. Smith #2005 -A, chrome plated Include trap primer option for Handicap Toilet Room Floor Drains. PAGE 1 ADDENDUM 1 DIVISION 15 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL Add paragraph 2.01 as follows: Trap primers Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. Prime -Rite model Revise paragraph 3.05 description as follows: A. Completely insulate handicap lavatory traps and water supplies. Add paragraph 3.07 as follows. 3.07 AUTOMATIC TRAP PRIMERS 15410 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS Add paragraph 2.04 as follows: 2.04 Mechanical Systems Insulation (See Section 15070) A. Provide trap primer for all floor drains, and where required by the Plumbing Code. Piping shall be as specified for water piping, 1/2 inch minimum size; chrome plated brass pipe where exposed. Connect primer line at the top of a horizontal cold water line and install the trap primer valve and distribution umt in an accessible location. 15490 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS Add to paragraph 2.05 D as follows. Alarm panel shall indicate high and pressure alarms for oxygen supply PAGE 2 ADDENDUM 1 DIVISION 15 Add paragraph 2.05 E as follows: E. Gauges: Provide in zone valve box, downstream side of each zone valve, as required by NFPA 99 Gauges shall be 1 1/2' with plastic protective dial faces, built into the valve box. Add paragraph 2.05 E as follows: E. Switches. Provide a pressure switch for "High Pressure' and "Low Pressure signals to the alarm panels. Switches shall be installed in respective medical gas mains downstream from the main shutoff valves and in lines, located as required in NFPA 99 for the area alarms. For line vacuum below normal, provide vacuum switch. 15500 FIRE PROTECTION Revise paragraph 1.02 to read as follows: A. Ordinary hazard sizing and spacing. 15640 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT Revise paragraph 2.01 H to read as follows. H. Condensing units shall be provided by the manufacturer of the Rooftop Air Handling Unit, see Section 15700. 15650 LIQUID HEAT TRANSFER PIPING SYSTEMS Add to paragraph 2.02 B Temtrol as an accepted coil manufacturer 15700 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT Revise paragraph 2.01 D 3 to read as follows: 3 Dampers shall be constructed of extruded aluminum blades. Provide blades with extruded vinyl or rubber edge seals. Seal blade ends with aluminum arc seals. Damper leak rate not to exceed 11 -CFM per square foot of damper at 2 1/2 inches W G pressure. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL Add to paragraph 2.01 D as follows. 4 Outside air dampers shall be integral air monitor /damper sized for the full economizer load and factory adjusted to meet the minimum outside air requirements as scheduled. Frame shall be extruded aluminum hat channel with mounting flanges on both sides of frame. Blades shall be airfoil shaped heavy gauge extruded aluminum, anodized monitonng blades fixed with damper frame and includes air pressure sensing ports. Dampers shall be Ruskin Model IAQ or approved equal. 15800 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Revise paragraph 2.03 C 4 to read as follows. UL classified as leakage Class I per UL555S with 4.0 cfm per cubic foot maximum leakage at 1 -inch w g. differential pressure across closed damper Revise paragraph 2.03 C 6, to read as follows. 6 Damper Actuators. Electric two position damper motor spring close and hold open. Actuator shall tie -in to the smoke detection system. Smoke detection system and wiring from the fire alarm relay panel will be provided under the electrical work. 15825 AIR TERMINAL EQUIPMENT Revise paragraph 2.01 A 6, to read as follows: 6. Unit manufacturer shall install at the factory electric damper actuator and controller furnished by the temperature control manufacturer 15900 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Replace entire Section with attached Section 15900. VOLUME 2 MECHANICAL DRAWINGS PAGE 3 ADDENDUM 1 DIVISION 15 Drawing Description M 2 Second Floor Plan Mechanical Add waste and vent piping for Third Floor Toilet Room Floor Drains. Refer to sketches MSK 102 and MSK -103 for work included. M -4 Third Floor Plan Piping and Plumbing Add wall mounted lays, P1 2, floor drains, D -1 and associated piping in the new handicap toilet rooms. Refer to sketches MSK 100 and MSK -101 for work included. M -8 Third Floor Plan Fire Protection Diagrams Add wall mounted lays, P1 2, floor drains, D -1 and associated piping in the new handicap toilet rooms to the diagrams. Refer to sketches MSK -104 MSK 105 and MSK -106 for work included. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The "General Conditions" of the specification apply to work specified m this section, consult them in detail for applicable instructions. B All components of the Direct Digital Control (DDC) system must meet applicable local code requirements. 1 02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install a networked Direct Digital Control (DDC) system for control and monitoring of the buildmg heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems as described in this specification. B System shall consist of stand -alone DDC panels, sensors, automatic valves, actuators, dampers, operating software, operator training, installation labor warranty and all other necessary material and labor to provide a complete and workable system. 1 03 INSTALLATION QUALITY A. The entire building control system shall be installed by skilled electricians and control mechamcs, all of whom are properly trained and qualified for this work. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with Division 16 of these specifications and applicable national, state and local codes. B Supervision and checkout of the system shall be by local branch engineers and technicians directly employed by the Contractor C. Contractor shall be a manufacturer -owned service organization which stocks and has direct factory access to the manufacturer's standard parts, manuals and training options. Contractor shall be fully capable of system inspection, trouble shooting, maintenance, and service to the system. B Contractor shall maintain a field service office within 150 miles of project site This field office shall have a minimum of five years experience engineering and installing the control systems proposed for this project. At engineer's request, provide a listing of at least ten projects of similar magnitude, complexity and facility use type completed within the past five years. 104 SUBMITTALS/DRAWINGS SECTION 15900 PAGE 1 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 4.000.01.)F.t t A. Submittals 1 The contractor shall submit, prior to installation, a set of installation drawings, equipment data sheets and control strategies for review by the consultant and/or Owner's representative. 2. These drawings shall include the physical location of all building control system panels and controllers as well as a diagram indicating complete DDC system architecture. 3 The complete sequence of operation for the control system shall be provided. 4 A complete list of monitored and controlled points shall be provided. B Record Drawings (As- builts) 1 Upon completion of the installation and final system adjustment the contractor shall provide and deliver to the Owner a full set of record drawings of the MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 107 WARRANTY SECTION 15900 PAGE 2 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS ADDE4JD441 -t 1 installation and the control strategies including pnntouts of all system programs, system database and system operating parameters 2 Record drawings shall be submitted m 11" x 17" bound format. At owner's request, provide a copy of as -built drawings on 3 -1/2" floppy disks. C Standards and Format 1 All submittals shall be generated on reproducible Autocad (Version 10 or later) schematic diagrams. 1 05 SYSTEM TURN -OVER AND SERVICE A. Upon completion of the installation, the contractor shall initiate operation of the control system and perform all necessary testing and diagnostics to ensure proper operation A formal commissioning procedure shall be utilized to insure complete system integrity and conformance to these specifications. This procedure shall be a completely documented procedure. Contractor's recommended commissioning plan shall be submitted with the initial submittal for approval by engineer At a mimmum, submittal shall include a step -by -step, written description of the commissioning plan as well as the project specific commissioning forms that will be utilized. Commissioning forms shall address all field devices, field controllers, software statements and software points. B An acceptance test in the presence of the owners representative, and/or the Project Manager shall be performed. Deficiencies revealed by failed test(s) shall be repaired and corrected and the test(s) repeated until successful. C. The graphical interface software shall be installed prior to completion and all modifications to reflect as-built conditions and changes shall be completed within fourteen (14) days of the scheduled completion date 1 06 TRAINING /OWNER'S INSTRUCTION A. The contractor shall provide to the Owner two (2) copies of an operator's manual describing all operating and routine maintenance service procedures to be used with the system. B The contractor shall instruct the owner's designated representatives in these procedures during the start -up and test penod. The instruction shall consist of two separate training components. on -site, project specific training and off -site factory training. C On -site training shall consist of a minimum of one (1) full day (8 hours total) of training performed by an engineer familiar with the specific design of the system provided for this project. A. The building control system, including all hardware and software components shall be warranted for a penod of one year following owner's beneficial use of system. For phased project completion, the warranty shall also commence in phases. Any manufacturing defects arising during this penod shall be corrected without cost to the owner B In addition to the hardware warranty, the Contractor shall correct any software sequences that do not meet the specified sequence of operation. Modification or repairs required due to changes enacted by the owner's system operators dunng the warranty penod will not be considered warranty items. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 08 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS SECTION 15900 PAGE 3 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A00614 (7U M I A. The DDC system shall be provided by Landis Gyr, as an extension of the existing system, NO SUBSTITUTIONS B Pricing structure has been negotiated prior to bid with engineer /owner Contact Landis Gyr, Greg Ackerson, (206) 455 -3700 for pricing. PART II PRODUCTS 2.01 DDC SYSTEM A. GENERAL 1 The Direct Digital Control (DDC) system shall possess a fully modular architecture, permitting expansion through the addition of DDC controllers, slave panels, terminal equipment controllers, operator terminals, personal computers and/or a general purpose multi- tasking, multi operator minicomputer B DDC CONTROLLER 1 DDC controllers shall be stand alone, microprocessor -based, with a minimum word size of 16 bits. They shall be multi tasking, multi -user, real -time digital control processors consisting of modular hardware with plug -in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies and input/output point modules. Controller size shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list and with spare capacity and expandability features as described below 2 Each DDC controller shall have sufficient memory (minimum 1 MB) to support its operating system and databases including trending, dial -up communications, alarm management and manual override monitoring. 3 Each DDC controller shall support monitoring and control of the following types of points, without the addition of equipment outside the DDC controller cabinet: a. Analog Inputs (AI) 4 -20 mA 0 -10 Vdc Thermistors 1000 ohm RTDs b Digital Inputs (DI)- Dry Contact Closure Pulse Accumulator Voltage Sensing c Digital Outputs (DO) Closure (motor starters, sizes as required) d. Analog Outputs (AO) -20 psi 4 -20 mA 0 -10 Vdc 4 Each DDC controller shall have a minimum of one spare of each point type (analog inputs, digital inputs, analog outputs, digital outputs) and no less than 10% expandability within the controller enclosure. Provide all processors, power supplies and communication controllers complete so that the implementation of a new point only requires the addition of the appropriate point input/output termination module and wiring. Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and have at least 25% of the memory available for future use. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 4 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A t7DE{.it7uM l 5 The operator shall have the ability to manually ovemde automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC controller via local, point discrete, on -board hand/off /auto operator override switches for digital control type points and gradual switches for analog control type points. These override switches shall be operable whether the panel processor is operational or not. Switches shall be mounted either within the DDC controller key- accessed enclosure, or externally mounted with each switch keyed to prevent unauthorized overrides. DDC controllers shall monitor the status of all ovemdes and inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. DDC controllers shall also collect ovemde activity information for reports. At a mimmum, all digital outputs (except terminal controllers) shall have supervised manual ovemde switches. 6 DDC controllers shall provide local LED status indication for each digital input and output for constant, up -to -date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator 1/0 device. Graduated intensity LEDs or analog indication of value shall also be provided for each analog output. 7 DDC controllers shall provide at least two RS -232C serial data communication ports for operation of operator 1/0 devices such as industry standard printers, operator terminals, modems and portable laptop operator's terminals. DDC controllers shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, printers or terminals. 8 Each DDC controller shall continuously perform self diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all panel components. The DDC controller shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions or repeated failure to establish commumcation. 9 DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform any or all the following energy management routines. a. Time -of -day scheduling b Calendar -based scheduling c. Holiday scheduling d. Temporary schedule overrides e. Start-stop time optimization f Automatic Daylight Savings Time switchover g. Night setback control h. Enthalpy switchover (economizer) i. Peak demand limiting J Temperature compensated duty cycling The software programs specified m this Section shall be provided as an integral part of DDC controllers and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention and shall be flexible enough to allow user customization. Programs shall be applied to building equipment as described in the Sequence of Operations. 11 Alarm management shall be provided to monitor and direct alarm information to operator devices. Each DDC controller shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to mimmize operator interruptions due to non critical alarms, minimize network traffic and prevent alarms from being lost. Any critical alarms shall have the capability of generating a user defined message and routing MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 5 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A01963-117U M I that message to any operator device or printer At no time shall the DDC controllers ability to report alarms be affected by either operator or activity at a PC workstation, local I/O device or communications with other panels on the network. 12. A variety of historical data collection utilities shall be provided to manually or automatically sample, store and display system data for points Each DDC controller shall have a dedicated RAM -based buffer for trend data storage and shall be capable of storing a minimum of 10,000 data samples. Trend data shall be stored at the DDC controllers and uploaded to the workstation (if provided) when retrieval is desired. For systems with graphical workstation capabilities, uploads shall occur based upon either user defined interval, manual command or when the trend buffers are full. All trend data shall be available for use in Microsoft Word or Excel applications C APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS 1 GENERAL a. Provide Application Specific Controllers (ASC's) as required for control of unitary mechanical systems or pieces of equipment. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor -based DDC control unit and shall be capable of operating either as a standalone controller or on a multi -drop communications network originating at the DDC controller Provide each ASC with sufficient memory to operate in a truly independent manner; that is, each ASC shall support its own inputs and outputs, operating systems, database and programs necessary to perform control sequences and energy management routines. b Provide the following types of ASC's as necessary. Unitary Controllers (UC's) Terminal Equipment Controllers (TEC's) 2. UNITARY CONTROLLERS (UC's) a. UC's shall include all point inputs and outputs necessary to perform the specified control sequences. Provide a hand off automatic switch for each binary output for manual override capability Switches shall be mounted either within the controller's key- accessed enclosure, or externally mounted with each switch keyed to prevent unauthorized ovemdes. In addition, each switch position shall be supervised m order to inform the system that automatic control has been ovemdden. As a minimum, 50% of the point inputs and outputs shall be of the universal type, allowing for additional system flexibility In lieu of universal inputs and outputs, provide a minimum of 50% spare points of each type. b Each UC shall support its own real -time operatmg system. Provide a time clock with 72 hour battery backup to allow for stand alone operation and to insure protection during power outages. Should the controller reside on a DDC controller network, the clock operation shall be ovemdden by the DDC controller clock to insure network continuity c. All databases and programs shall be stored in non volatile EEPROM or a minimum of 100 -hour battery back -up shall be provided. All programs shall be field customized to meet the user's exact control strategy requirements Controllers utilizing pre packaged or canned programs shall not be acceptable. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 6 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS d. Local alarming and trending capabilities shall be provided for convenient troubleshooting and system diagnostics. Alarm limits and trend data information shall be user definable for any point. e. Each UC shall have connection provisions for a portable laptop or similar programming tool. This tool shall allow the user to display, generate or modify all point databases and operating programs. All new values and problems shall then be restored to EEPROM. 3 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS (TEC's) a. Control of terminal units such as VAV boxes, heat pumps and reheat boxes shall be accomplished by a microprocessor based stand -alone controller utilizing direct digital control. The Terminal Equipment Controller (TEC) shall interface to the building control system in a multi -drop communications network originating at the DDC field panel. An individual controller shall be provided for each terminal unit. The terminal controller must be listed by Underwriters Laboratory under UL 916 PAZX and UL 864 UDTZ. b For VAV boxes, the controls contractor shall furnish the terminal controller (controller, damper motor flow transducer) to the terminal unit manufacturer for factory mounting. Costs associated with factory mounting of terminal controller shall be covered by terminal umt manufacturer The terminal box manufacturer shall provide an averaging air velocity sensor suitable for interfacing with the TEC's differential pressure transducer c. Each TEC shall be accessible for purposes of control and monitoring from a central or remote operator's terminals as specified herein. d. TEC damper actuator shall be of the 24 Vac floating point type. Upon power loss, the actuator maintains its current damper position. Position status is shown in percentage open notation. e TEC room temperature sensor shall come complete with a terminal jack and programmable override switch integral to the sensor assembly The terminal jack shall be used to connect the portable operators terminal to control and monitor all hardware and software points associated with the terminal unit. A terminal jack may be alternatively located on a stainless steel wall plate mounted adjacent to the sensor An override switch shall initiate override of the night setback or unoccupied mode to normal operation when activated. A thumbwheel -type temperature setpoint dial shall also be provided with 1 Deg F temperature increments Override switch and temperature setpoint functions may be locked out, canceled or limited as to time or temperature via software. f TEC's for VAV or CV applications shall be provided with integral differential pressure transducer capable of accepting an average air flow measurement signal from the terminal box averaging air velocity sensor The value is converted through a square root function to average airflow by the TEC. g. TEC control valve electronic actuators shall mount on the valve body and provide complete modulating control of the valve. Valve body shall separate from actuator for servicing without requiring any special tools or electrical connections. The actuator shall be of the floating control point type. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 7 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 04.Qt7Ei.1 iDu M 1 h. TEC wiring terminal bars are to be detachable type allowing quick serviceability of the electronic controller hardware without removal of the existing wiring. D AUTO ANSWER/AUTO -DIAL MODEM 1 A telecommunications interface shall be furnished and installed to allow direct connection of DDC controllers and networks to owner provided public or private phone lines. This device shall be microprocessor -based and will be capable of both automatic answer and automatic dial methods of call handling. Additionally, manual call initiation shall be done via a man- machine interface command. Phone modem shall be US Robotics Sportster 9600 baud or equal. 2. The telecommunications interface, when operatmg in an automatic dialing mode, shall be able to perform any of the following functions. a. Retry a single pnmary number at a fixed interval a finite number of times and quit if unsuccessful. (If the number is busy, retry it until successful) In addition, call a minimum of three additional secondary numbers one time. b Retry successive numbers arranged in a pnonty scheme at fixed intervals a finite number of times and quit if unsuccessful. c. Inform the requesting device that a successful connection has been made. (If the numbers are busy, retry until successful) d. Inform the requesting device that a connection cannot be made. e. Detect loss of communication on its network and dial an appropriate device (CPU, Terminal, etc.), and upon successful connection transmit a message identifying a network failure. 3 The telecommunications interface shall also have automatic answer capabilities to allow it to be accessed from a remote central computer or terminal with modem. The interface unit shall allow the person calling to access any information on the network, provided that the standard log -on security screening is met. 2 02 FIELD DEVICES A. TEMPERATURE SENSORS 1 All temperature sensors shall be solid state electronic, employing a resistance type output. Room and zone temperature sensors may be thermistor type. All duct sensors shall be ngid or flexible probe, averaging RTD -type sensors. All duct mixed air sensors shall be flexible averagmg RTD -type sensors with sensor element length suitable for complete duct coverage Pipe sensors shall be RTD- type Provide outside air temperature sensors with watertight inlet fitting and sunlight shield. All single point sensors shall be accurate to a minimum of 0.5 degrees F at 77 degrees F calibration point. Duct averaging sensors shall be accurate to a minimum of 1 0 degrees F B CONTROL DAMPERS 1 Provide low leakage, galvanized steel control dampers with roll formed steel frames and blades and oil impregnated bronze bearings. Dampers shall have blade seals and stops, equal to Ruskin CD36 2 Leakage shall be no greater than 10 CFM per square foot at 4 in. W C. with 20 in.- lbs torque applied regardless of size. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 8 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS ,1717E1.1Du h( 1 3 Provide opposed blade type dampers unless indicated otherwise. All multi section dampers shall be provided with factory linkage to allow for connection of actuator at one common point. C. DAMPER AND VALVE ACTUATORS 1 All modulating damper and valve actuators shall be 24vac electric motor type; floating point, 0- 10Vdc, 0 -16Vdc or other industry standard input signal type. Actuators shall function properly within the range of 85 to 110 percent of line voltage. 2. Provide actuators in sufficient size, quantity and type to match application. Provide a minimum of one damper actuator for each 30 square feet of damper area. 3 Damper actuators shall be rotary action -type (90 degree) designed for direct connection to damper shaft wherever possible. Provide position indication on exterior of actuator body 4 All valve actuators for steam applications shall be mounted at a 45 degree offset from vertical to avoid heat damage to actuator 5 Actuators shall be spnng return as indicated by Normally Closed or Normally Open designation on drawings or in sequence of operation. D CONTROL VALVES 1 Modulating Valves 2" and Smaller Bronze body and seat with stainless steel stem and screwed ends. ANSI Class 250 body rating. Suitable for fluid temperatures of up to 300 degrees F Equal percentage flow characteristics capable of smooth operation at differential pressures present in system. Landis Gyr Powers VE VVG/VXG 44, VE698, Flownte VE598 or approved equal. 2. Sizing Modulating control valves shall be correctly selected for service and flow of system served. A pressure drop of 5 psi shall be used as a sizing guideline unless specifically noted otherwise in project documents. Two position shutoff valves shall be line size. E. LOW TEMPERATURE DETECTION THERMOSTATS 1 Provide low temperature control thermostat, electric type manual reset, non- averaging 20 feet long sensing elements that switch whenever any 6 inch section or more of any portion senses a temperature as low as the thermostat setpomt as specified in sequences. 2. Provide with two sets of contacts, one for hardwired fan shutdown and one for remote monitoring. 3 Powers ET141 or approved equal. F DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES 1 Provide air and liquid differential pressure switches for status of pumps and fans as called out in sequences and input/output summary 2. Diaphragm operated SPDT snap switch with ranges from .05" W G to 12.0" W G for air Airflow switch shall be Powers SW141 or approved equal. 3 Liquid switch shall be PENN P74 or equal. G CURRENT SENSING RELAYS 1 Provide current sensing relays for status of fans or pumps as called out in sequences or input/output summary Provide with field adjustable current setpoint range. 2. Nielsen- Kuljian or approved equal. H. INTERPOSING RELAYS 1 Track mounted SPDT relays (or as required) for all interposing applications. 2. IDEC or approved equal. I. PRESSURE SAFETY SWITCHES MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 Provide static pressure high limit switches as required by sequence of operation to sensing duct over pressure condition. Provide with adjustable setpoint. Provide with spare contacts for momtonng by DDC system. 2. Switch shall be suitable for duct mountmg. Dwyer Series 3000, Ashcroft or approved equal. PART III EXECUTION SECTION 15900 PAGE 9 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS DOAEJJDu M I 3 01 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. All setpoints, limits, etc. shall be adjustable through the central CPU or the laptop computer connected to the system B Sequence of operations are designed to illustrate basic control functions only Temperature Controls Contractor shall review drawings and submit complete installation data, including minor details, to provide proper operation in his submittal. Where an item differs from specifications, Controls Contractor shall submit manufacturer's recommendations subject to Architect's approval. C. HOA OVERRIDE /STATUS PANEL Provide HOA /status override panel including the following for all mechanical equipment control excluding terminal controllers. 1 Hand /Off /Auto selector switch for each binary output. 2 Hand /Auto variable positioner for each analog output. 3 Feedback to central panel for annunciation of hand position 4 LED status for each binary output and input. 5 Variable intensity LED status for each analog output. 6 Lock cover to prevent unauthorized access to switches 7 Cover to include clear tamperproof front for viewing switch position and LED indication 3 02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION SYSTEMS (AC-3E-11 A. Scope The supply air systems serve single -duct system with hot water reheat coils and one variable volume unit. Supply air system consists of supply fan, return fan, prefilters, final filters, outside dampers with flow measuring capabilities, return and relief air dampers, dx cooling coil and condenser System shall operate 24 -hours but shall be capable of a mght set back operation. B Start-Up The supply fan shall be directly controlled by the controller according to the program established by the Owner The return fan shall be electrically interlocked to operate with the supply fan. Supply and return fans shall be controlled to start "unloaded." C. Basic Temperature Control. A temperature controller sensing fan discharge temperature shall maintain the supply air temperature setpoint by modulating the outside air return air relief air dampers and dx coil in sequence. Provide discharge temperature reset based on hi -low zone conditions D On sensing a rise in temperature, controller shall first modulate the outside /relief air dampers open and the return air damper closed. A continued rise shall cause the direct expansion valve to modulate open. E. If the fans are running during unoccupied hours, a signal shall ovemde damper modulation and close the outside /relief air dampers. During occupied hours, an outside air temperature switch shall ovemde the damper modulation signal and position the dampers to provide m ventilation only MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 10 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS AvDENOU ht i F When outside air temperature is low enough to provide economizer cooling, a temperature reset program shall lower supply air temperature setpomt as low as possible to maintain a 76 °F (adjustable) return air temperature without offset. G Freeze Protection. A low temperature detector, manual reset type, with range adjustable between 10 °F and 50 °F shall be provided at the downstream side of the dx coil, set at 36 °F If temperature drops below 36 °F, low temperature detector shall stop the fan and outside air dampers shall close. H. Upon signal from duct smoke detector, fans shall shut down. Coordinate location of duct smoke detector with fire alarm and electrical contractors 3 03 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) TERMINAL UNIT CONTROL {TU -1 A. A room temperature sensor shall maintain setpoint by modulating the normally closed damper between minimum and maximum volume positions through a terminal control unit (TCU) mounted on the VAV terminal. Each room sensor shall include a switch to initiate override of unoccupied mode of operation. B Upon call for room heating, the damper will modulate to the muumum volume position and the zone heating coil shall be modeluted as stated below 3 04 ZONE RE -HEAT COIL CONTROL RH A. Provide two -way control valve, unless otherwise noted on the drawings, in the hot water supply line to each zone heating coil which shall be modulated by its room thermostat to maintain setpoint temperature. B Provide three -way control valve in the hot water supply line to each zone heating coil located at end of supply air duct which shall be modulated by its room thermostat to maintain setpoint temperature and also maintain hot water system flow 3 05 COMBINATION SMOKE/FIRE DAMPERS A. Smoke Damper Control. Actuators shall be controlled by fire alarm system specified in Division 16 3 06 ELEVATOR PRESSURIZATION FANS {PF -1 AND PF -2} A. Elevator Pressurization Fan Control. Fan shall be controlled by the fire alarm system specified in Division16 3 07 ROOFTOP EXHAUST FANS EF -3E -1 A, 1B, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 A. Toilet Exhaust Fan. Toilet exhaust fan shall be started through the time switch specified for the supply and return fans. 3 08 ROOFTOP EXHAUST FANS {EF -3E -1, 5) A. Toilet Exhaust Fan. Toilet exhaust fan are existing to remain or relocated as indicated. Existing control sequence shall remain for these fans. Extend existing controls as required to relocated fan relay location. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 09 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS END OF SECTION 15900 SECTION 15900 PAGE 11 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS ADDE -mou i A. CONTROL WIRING 1 All line voltage wiring and low voltage winng in exposed areas shall be run in EMT, conduit or wiremold. Wiring run exposed in finished areas shall be in wiremold. 2 Wiring shall be in accordance with the "Electrical" section of these specifications, Section 16000 and all applicable codes. Wiring within concealed, accessible spaces may be run with plenum -rated cable as allowed by local codes. 3 If utilized in lieu of conduit plenum -rated cables shall be run in an orderly manner, tied and bundled every 3 feet on average. B LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION 1 Identify all equipment and panels. Identification shall be with labels describing equipment and panel use and function. 2. Labels shall be engraved with contrasting text using bakelite, plastic or metal material. Labels shall be permanently glued or mechanically fastened. 3 All wires and cables shall be identified with permanent markers at each end. The wire designator shall match those on the shop and installation drawings. C. GENERAL 1 Provide and install devices, relays, switches, thermostats, sensors, dampers, conduit, wiring, and tubing to provide a complete temperature regulation and control operation system. All wiring shall be run m concealed areas where possible. Where necessary to be exposed it shall be installed in a workmanlike manner 2. Contractor is responsible for providing a complete and operational system as called out in the sequence of operation and/or in the mput/output summary and/or the mechanical/electrical drawings for this project. Any item referenced in one part of the system documentation but not listed elsewhere shall be covered under contractors pricing (i.e. damper called out in sequence but not indicated on drawings) D OUTSIDE COMMISSIONING AGENT 1 Contractor is required to provide a completely installed and commissioned DDC control system as outlined in previous portions of this specification. 2 At the Owner's option an outside commissioning agent may be retained to insure mechamcal system compliance with specifications. The control system contractor shall have the following responsibilities under the scope of this contract: a. Provide submittal and/or as-built documentation. b Participate in specified job acceptance test with owner's representative. c. Provide specified owner training. d. Perform all system startup and commissioning procedures as required and described previously by the specification. e. Respond to project punch list and correct any system deficiencies. 3 Any additional training, documentation, software, on -site or modem assistance, system functionality or general project management required in support of a commissioning process not specified as part of the Contract Documents shall be considered work outside of this contract. c. B MAHLUM &NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON 1 1 Fp1A3T8EMNT I 16 t TOILET 15A P2-1 ji 5 P5:2 IN/ D 1 2 -t- 12 1/27 \1 1"/ Ii 3/4" 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 Seattle WA 98121 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 F ACTIVITY/ DINING ROOM HCTOIL 32 6133 HC TOIL. I 17 PATIENT ROOM I 18 4"V RI I Ws \--P2-1 PATIENT I ROOM 34 7 ORtAL HOSNifi Transitional Care Unit Remodel P 1 1 PAR .A. 71-I_RD E.00R PANS PP NG/P.„WB \G SCALE: 1/8":4-0" PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 F1101t ADDIMUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING M-4 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 MSK. 100 W 1 1 /4„ "VTR V Cp9 PA 8 i PATIENT 12 12 HC TOIL. 13 t ADWALL 1 i� r 1 CORRIDOR/ 1 1 1 4 i 1 Remodel P2 -1 1 "HW DN 1 1 /2 "C1N DN \P2 -1 PAR -:A_ H:RJ FOOR PA\S PP:NG/PL/VB \G SCALE: 1/8 =1' -0" D �y�p1C MEInAL NOS/4 PROKT NUMBER: 95110.00 MA H L U M 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 w DESCRPT1Ott ADDENDUM 1 I I N O R D F O R S Seattle W A 98121 REFERENCE DRAWPG: M 4 M c K 1 N L E Y 2 0 6 4 41 4151 Transitional Care Unit DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 GORDON 206 441 0478 F MSK. 101 N C 2"W UP 1 1 2' V UP 2"W UP 1 1/2' VI UP Ag MAHLUM &NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON 4x8 UP TO 3RD FLOOR PROVIDE FIRE DA PER AT FLOOR PENETATION 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 Seattle WA 98121 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 F Remodel 1 1/2"W UP f, 2" W, 3/4"HW 3/4"CW UP 04K, VEMORbit HON/ z Transitional Care Unit PAE k SECOND F..00R !UN SCALE: 1/8"=-1-0" \J„,- PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRPTIOR ADDETUUM 1 REFERENa DRAWNG: M-2 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 MSK: 102 MECH. 8x6 U PROVI[ AT FL( MAHLUM &NORDFORS McK1NLEY GORDON HW UF C -10x14 UP TO 3RD FLOOR PROVIDE F RE DAMPER AT FLOOR PENETRATION 4 UP TO 3RO. FLOOR PROVIDE FIRE DAMPER AT FLOOR PENETRATION AR7A1. SECOND EDOR PI.A\ :ALE: 1/8"=1-0" 2505 Third Avenue Suite Seattle WA 98121 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 F F 14x10 DAN TO 1ST FLOOR 1 Transitional Care Unit Remodel o K *ARIAL HOS/34// pRojEcr NUMBER: 95T1M DESCRPT1Ott ADDENDUM 1 219 REFERENCE DRAWNG: M-2 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 M9(.13 MECH. 4 VTR (GRID 11) M A H L U M 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 S N O R D F O R S Seattle WA 98121 McKINLEY 206 441 4151 GORDON 206441 0478 F IC 0 _E ROOM #7 R SER JAGRAM CALE: NONE (HC TO LET #13 S M.) C waiORI IAL HOSro/ PROjECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCiP110N: ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWNGc M-8 Transitional Care Unit DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 Remodel MSK. 104 M A H L U M N O R D F O R S M c K I N L E Y GORDON 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 Seattle WA 98121 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 F C '0. =E ROOM #26 R:SER JAGRAW :ALE: NONE o IltEMORIAL HOS Transitional Care Unit Remodel PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRPTIOR ADDENDUM 1 mama DRAWNG: M-8 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 MSK. 105 -IC 0 1 ROOM #33 R SER D.AGRAM KALE: NONE 0 6, IAEUORIAL HOSpy41 PROx.CT MJMBER: 95110.00 M A H L U M 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 4111 114; ii NI DESCRPTI0R ADDENDUM 1 4W ow so WA OW N O R D F O R S Seattle WA 9 8 1 2 1 REFERENCE DRAWt4G: M-8 M c K I N L E Y 206 4 4 1 4 1 5 1 Transitional Care fait DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 GORDON 2 0 6 441 0478 F Remodel MSK. 106 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL SECTION 16781 PAGE 1 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 1 1 DESCRIPTION A The work includes furnishing and installing all cable devices, and connectors necessary to extend the the existing television distribution system The expanded system shall be complete and ready to use The system shall include all amplifiers power supplies cable outlets attenuators and all other parts necessary for the distribution of the TV and FM signals B The Contractor shall show satisfactory evidence upon request that he maintains a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service to the system including standard replacement parts Contractor shall be prepared to offer a service contract for the maintenance of this system after the guarantee period C The Contractor shall construct the system following best engineering techniques for continuous operation in accordance with applicable codes and safety precautions D All television system equipment shall be supplied and installed by an authorized factory distributor who shall be a licensed and bonded television contractor holding a valid Washington State Electrical Contractor's license E Coordinate with the television set supplier for proper remote control wiring connections 1 2 SYSTEM FUNCTIONS A The system shall distribute television FM and in -house originated signals to all TV outlets to permit simple connection of EIA standard television receivers The system shall provide distribution of all the existing off the -air TV channels from the existing head end equipment B The system shall deliver at all outlets all monochrome and NTSC color television signals without introducing noticeable affect on intelligence and color fidelity 1 The distribution system shall provide for ready attachment of RF monitor /TV receivers at any outlet and at any time without additional auxiliary equipment 2 The distribution system shall be operative at all times in such a manner that it is not subject to possible human error during the course of attachment or detachment of equipment at any outlet C The system shall deliver at all television outlets a minimum signal level of 10 db above 1 000 microvolts across 75 OHM impedance on each channel at each television outlet The system VSWR shall not exceed 1 4 1 D Origination of CCTV programming shall be accomplished by connecting a suitable CCTV camera chain to any TV outlet in the system and shall not require switching of any type in the 16781 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SECTION 16781 PAGE 2 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM distribution system It shall be possible to simultaneously originate CCTV signals from rooms connected to the same distribution leg F The system and all equipment shall be designed and rated for 24 hours a day continuous operation All active components shall be of solid state design G The system shall be designed to prevent direct pickup of signals from the building structure PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURER All components shall be manufactured by RCA Blonder- Tongue Electronics Company or approved equal Blonder- Tongue catalogue numbers are used for reference unless manufacturer is identified 2 2 GENERAL Conform with the requirements of Section 16700 2 3 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A System coaxial cable shall be 82 channel 75 ohm 18 gauge solid conductor duofoil and brand shield, RG 6/U type cable Standard cable 507 -6FA All cable routed in cable tray or routed above the accessible ceiling shall be extinguishing as defined by NFPA 701 Section 6 -1 by the match flame test Belden 9248 B Coaxial cables shall be run in continuous lengths terminations and no splices shall be permitted in C All cables terminating at amplifiers or splitters as to function and destination except for any run shall be tagged D All coaxial cable used in the system shall be sweep tested for transmission and structural return loss and be so certified in writing by the cable manufacturer Transmission sweep tests shall establish conformance to guaranteed loss values from 20 -108 MHz 174 -216 MHz and 470 -890 MHz Structural return loss tests by sweep method shall show a minimum return loss of 26 dB RL VHF 16 dB RL UHF as compared to a fixed 75 -ohm reference from 20 -108 MHz 174- 216 HMz and from 470 -890 MHz 2 4 DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER A Broad band amplifiers shall be provided for VHF /FM band Unit shall be of solid state design and contain its own power supply Model MVB -45 B Amplifier shall consist of independent high and low band input amplifiers independent high and low band gain controls The main amplifier shall have three stages of RF amplification C Amplifier shall have switchable combined or split inputs for use with single (low band FM high band) antenna or for individual low band and high band antennas Amplifier shall contain a switchable FM bandstop filter in the input circuit to prevent FM signal overload 16781 2 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SECTION 16781 PAGE 3 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM D Amplifier shall meet gain of 45 dB in all bands noise figure at full gain of 6 1 dB (LB) 6 7 dB (HB) a gain control range of 18 dB output capability (7ch -46 dB crossmode) Flat 54 dBmV, 6 db block tilt 56 dBmV Operating temperature range shall be -20 degrees C to +65 degrees C E Amplifier dimensions shall be 19" in length 3- 15/32" in width and 2 -5/8" in height with mounting brackets to fit standard E1A rack 2 5 LINE SPLITTERS A Two -way line splitters shall have a flat frequency response over the entire operating band from 12 MHz to 300 MHz and from 470 to 890 MHz The unit shall be of the hybrid design with a 75 ohm match of 23 0 dB RL minimum on all inputs and outputs Output isolation shall be not less than 23 0 dB VHF 18 0 dB UHF B Two -way line splitters shall have a signal loss of not more than VHF 3 7 dB UHF 4 0 dB at each output All unused outputs on the splitters shall be terminated with 75 ohm terminations C Four -way line splitters shall have a flat frequency response over the entire operating band from 12 MHz to 216 MHz and from 470 to 890 MHz The unit shall be of the hybrid design with a 75 ohm match of 24 0 dB RL minimum on all input and outputs Output isolation shall be not less than 16 0 dB VHF 11 5 dB UHF D Four -way line splitters shall have a signal loss of not more than VHF 6 2 dB UHF 6 7 dB E Blonder Tongue Model MS -2V /V or MS -4U /V 2 6 ATTENUATORS Attenuators with DC to 890 MHz passband and 75 ohms input- output impedance shall be installed to equalize all signals prior to input to amplifier The amount of attenuation shall be determined at field during system set -up 2 7 TAPOFF INLINE Shall be single tap, back matched directional coupler type with brass 75 ohm type F connections Band width shall be 5 0 -400 MHz Tapoff shall meet or exceed the following specifications Insertion loss 1 2 db maximum Tap isolation 24 0 db minimum Return loss 16 0 db minimum Blonder Tongue Model 4488 or 4888 series 2 8 TV OUTLETS A Television Signal Outlets Shall be mounted in 4" square 2" deep minimum flush mounted outlet boxes with barrier between the 110 volt receptacle and the TV signal cable Provisions shall be incorporated in the network to prevent 60 Hz AC or DC feedback into the distribution lines 16781 3 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SECTION 16781 PAGE 4 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM B Outlets shall be designed to cover a frequency range of 10 MHz to 500 MHz Insertion loss shall not exceed 1 0 db at any frequency within the designated frequency range Outlets shall be back matched from 10 to 500 MHz Tap isolation shall be 16 db minimum C Outlets shall have "F" type connector and shall include a 5 PIN DIN receptacle for remote control applications Blonder Tongue V- 5- DC D Coverplates shall match those specified in Section 16140 with standard double duplex configuration 2 9 TV REMOTE CONTROL STATION TV Remote Control Station Provide a two gang outlet box with pushbutton and volume controller to turn set on on -off, change channels and adjust the speaker volume GTE Sylvania model HWT 6098BA chassis with a HFT6193BA faceplate 2 10 CONNECTOR A Connectors shall be brass, bronze or silver plated B Connector threads shall be cut to assure good contact Cast or pressed threads shall not be permitted 2 11 DROP CABLES A Provide coaxial cable with type F connector at wall outlet and appropriate connector at TV set B Provide control cable with 5 pin DIN connector at wall outlet and appropriate 6 pin connector at TV set for remote on -off station selection and volume control PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL 3 2 Raceways shall be sized as follows unless shown to be larger on the drawings PART 4 TESTING Up to 3 television outlets 1/2" trade size Up to 5 television outlets 3/4" trade size Cables shall be installed to avoid sharp bends or physical distortion Protect cables over sharp edges 4 1 TESTING On completion of the installation of the system the Contractor supplying this equipment shall provide a qualified technician to perform the following tests A The overall system shall be swept tested from the head -end location to the last outlet in each distribution leg of the system 16781 4 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SECTION 16781 PAGE 5 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM B A certification shall be made to the fact that no frequency dropouts are present in the system which would affect any of the VHF channels C Using a return loss bridge the Contractor shall certify that the return loss of the system shall be a minimum of 20 db down D The Architect shall be notified forty -eight hours prior to testing so that he may at his discretion furnish representatives to witness the test procedure and results E A report of the testing shall be submitted on all the above required data, prior to final acceptance Copies shall be included in the Operation Instructions and Maintenance Manuals The report shall include the names of the individuals performing and witnessing the test and the manufacturer's name and model number of the equipment used in the test A block diagram of the test set -up for each test shall be included END OF SECTION 16781 5 E d,e rn r v 15 d,e TYPIC�L 1 01 7 1170 RO liri> 8 F5 O C J im M1 9 ;3C 19n \CFS, OD.- 23 I I. FW") J 0 30_ 3 3M1' -26 28,30 9 o I I 6 28 7 3Y b 1- ILI 7 OM TOIL 17 e 3M1 -19 18 Iii O 2B0 c D.? c l 0 1k 8 1 .1 A 0O b 28 d 7-" 10 HC TU ROOM 611 2 Project Job No 28 bf TOL 28 F3 r fls bF i r 10 6807 7 NT ROOM r 22 I Reference Drawing No E-4 SA Convo nwT,oN r im --'r si d,el, de 1 30 30 a g p 30 d,e l 1 cLe r 7 PATE C1 NG nC^WICAL! LAWN° 04344141 COMOWNICATKAY CONZULININ 7200LWI WAY BUS1100 WATTLE, WA 98101.1553 _9 PATIENT ROOM O r L J r 1 J Drawing T t le PARTIAL LIGHTING PLAN OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL TRANSITIONAL CARE REMODEL d, 30 PATIEN ROOM 19 9 30 9 PATIENT ROOM I 20 28 H TO 30 0� C4D PROVIDE PRESCOLITE SERIES 4020 -13 W/ (1) 13W COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMP OR APPROVED EQUAL. M* T HORIZONTALLY. Scale 1/8 I 0 Drown By RPR Checked By JNL Date 11/08/96 Dwg No E-4 1 Page of ddd aweuJasn 9b 1:1.60 '96/80/U 3420 '173 \00d3\L089 aweu 6utMPJ0 HC SHOWER 4Z i� 0 PATIENT •R OOM STORAGE 27 •C. f 29 I g y=D TA.- ,sa >ZE3 e, L lIH .i._,..n:::D 7 1 1 H II D C2) OFFICE I 35 I FSJDe11aCAL I 7200LNEWA' sum 1100 6lA77LF, WA 061o1 -1e53 FAX 200467-0004 P1FILL' 206607-0606 SAAR- NG PATIENT ROOM t/ I L 25 1 E l )r aw i ng Title PARTIAL COMMUNICATIONS PLAN Scale 1/8 1 0 >roject OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL TRANSITIONAL CARE REMODEL Drawn By RPR lob No 6807 Reference Drawing No E -6 Checked By JNL Date 11/08/96 Dwg No E-6 1 Page of ddd aweuJaSO 25 :90:60 '96 /BO /U ale0 '93 \0040 \1099 awn 6utMeJO Drawing name E6, Date 11/08/96, 09:23:03 Username RPR 10 iNr 6d12:1 0 I 9/I abod Z 9 -3 °N 6Ma al Da 96/90/ L l AG Pa>loa4o Xe UMDJa ;loos r 9 -3 o 6UIMDJa aoueJa;aa L 099 °N qor 13C101/138 3dVO 1VN01 1 I SNd211 ldl I dSOH 1d 12j0IN34 0 I dINAl0 IDafoid NVld SN011VJINf WIN00 1d112IVd a i a' 1 5""o OD 0) 0 0 U1jJ1JU j}IUW 40021 1N311dd 11`d 140i 1JIdA1 b£ WOOb 1N311Vd 12000. 1.09.000 MOW 1 Yva C001 •M 'FILMS OOI I A10W AvMWgoZL ONI_ .7//77 11V00 38 01 011-Id3131 ONIISIX3 I I I M 09+ I so JMd33N 3Sf10H L i� I Job No PrOjeCt 0'. ,!i fe 4 Y•JC j. r HOUSL— WIC 42. o— Mr M' ••A ``c AMITY/ Drawing Title PARTIAL i•OMMUNICAIIONS PLAN 6 71, +60' DOSING M� AA TO BE RaocA .W 7 Scale OLY P I C o 4OR I AL HOSPITAL TRANS I T I OVAL CARE REMODEL Dr own By RPR 6807 Reference Droving No €_6 Checked Elyy JNL S PA Dote R bw No E -6.3 AC. Po9a of 7a sa rUr• May f We Misam wr .e10 !at ma• 1a1Me1 Tree I /e" Drawing name J: \6807 \CADD \E7 Date 11/08/96, 09:10'55 Username RPR Jo a6od l L -3 °N 6MQ 96/20/ alp() 1Nr �e Pamoa40 2:1d8 xe °MDJ m oo s 0 1 9/1 C7 17 33 'TELX 9l S102J1N00 VIA 1119O1-90-90 3 ONd 19OO•L999Oi rte CO11.-1O111 ♦M 'TU.LV)D OOl1 Awmannoort 1MMx] ONUM11'pi 11V31143119 rau .V ON 13001/438 32iV0 1VN0 I 1 I SNV 1 1V1 I dSOH 1V 12:101N311 0 I dINA10 NII T'd oN 6U1MOJQ aouaJayaa L099 oN Qof foafoid NVld 3002) 1VIJ Vd a1f!1 6u!MO�p I I I 66D co a ZZ —Z S 32 33 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL Date: Tuesday November 12, 1996 NOTICE TO ALL CONTRACTORS. SUBCONTRACTORS. AND SUPPLIERS This addendum is considered a part of the contract documents. VOLUME 1 PROJECT MANUAL Section Description 00300 BID FORM Delete 03300 Bid Form and =lace with revised 03300 Bid Form, Addendum 1 as attached. 01030 BASE BID AND ALTERNATES From the Office of: MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON 2505 Third Avenue, Suite 219 Seattle, WA 98121 SECTION 00901 PAGE 1 ADDENDUM 1 Delete 01030 Base Bid and Alernates and ]re l ce with revised 01030 Base Bid and Alternates, Addendum 1 as attached. 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Insert Paragraph 2.3 C as follows: A. Trowelable Underlayment Compound: Fine textured latex concrete mortar compound for building slopes to drain. 1 Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Raeco R 25 b Ardex SD -P Instantpatch c. Embeco T-430, Master Builders. d. Thoro Underlayment Trowel Grade, Thoro System Products. e. Thorite, Thoro System Products. 2 Sub -Floor Primers, Sealers, and Accelerators: As recommended by underlayment manufacturer Insert Paragraph 3.2.A.1 as follows: 1 Chip, scour acid -etch, or otherwise roughen existing substrate as recommended by underlayment manufacturer Replace Paragraph 3.9.A with the follows: A. Concrete: Provide reinforcement and concrete fill at all abandoned penetrations through existing structural slab. 1 Install steel plate to underside of existing opening and permanently fasten with anchor bolts. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2. Pre -drill and epoxy reinforcing bars into edges of existing penetrations larger than eighteen inches. Tie ends of bars together at center of opening. Replace Paragraph 3.9.B with the follows: B. Underlayment: Provide underlayment at troughs left in existing flooring by demolished walls, depressions in existing flooring around core drilled penetrations, at areas of broken or uneven floors, at sloped floors at shoewer rooms, and as noted in Volume 2 Project Drawings. 1 Provide self leveling underlayment where required to provide smooth level surface for floor finish materials. 2 Provide trowelable underlayment where required for slopes, deep depressions, and feather edges. 08800 GLAZING Add Section 08800 GLAZING in entirety 09666 SHEET VINYL FLOOR Add Paragraph 2.3 as follows: 2 3 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SECTION 00901 PAGE 2 ADDENDUM 1 A. Thin. load- bearing, flexible waterproof system consisting of a self- curing liquid rubber polymer which is cold applied with an integral reinforcing fabric to form a seamless light duty waterproof membrane. B. Available Products: 9235 waterproof membrane by Laticrete International, Inc. Add Paragraph 3.2.F as follows: F Apply waterproof membrane per manufacturer's directions at sloping floors to drain in HC Toilet/Shower rooms. DIV 15 MECHANICAL Add Addendum 1 Division 15 as provided by FSi Consulting Engineers, attached. 16781 TELEVISION SYSTEM Add Section 16781 TELEVISION SYSTEM in entirety VOLUME 2 PROJECT DRAWINGS Drawing Description A 2 5 FINISH PLAN AND FINISH SCHEDULE M the following remark to the finish schedule at room 37 Elevator Lobby 11 Wood trim to match Corridor 36 extends to underside of soffit only See Interior Elevation 5/A 5.2 for extents, typical. A 3 1 EXTERIOR ELEVATION Add Type B window unit designation per attached sketch ASK 106 A 4 1 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN Revise HC Toilet room 33 per attached sketch ASK 101 y s MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 00901 PAGE 3 ADDENDUM 1 A 4 2 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN Revise HC Toilet rooms 13 17 and 26 per attached sketch ASK 102. A 5 1 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Revise HC Toilet rooms per attached sketch ASK 103. A 5 2 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Revise patient bedrooms per attached sketch ASK 105 A 6 1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN Revise ceilings at patient bedrooms and patient toilet rooms per attached sketch ASK 104 A 9 2 DETAILS Add Typical Floor Drain Detail per attached sketch ASK 107 M MECHANICAL Add Addendum 1 revisions to mechanical drawings as provided by FSi Consulting Engineers, attached. E -4 LIGHTING PLAN Revise ng fixture at patient room sinks as indicated on attached electrical sketch ESK-4 1 E -6 COMMUNICATIONS PLAN Provide electrical connection of additional smoke/fire dampers as indicated on attached electrical sketch ESK -6.1 Revise location of Nurse Call Toilet Emergency Station in HC Toilet 33 as indicated on attached sketch ESK -6.2 Add nurse call devices at Patient Room 34 as indicated on attached sketch ESK -6.3 E -7 ROOF PLAN Provide electrical connection of additional exhaust fan as indicated on attached electrical sketch ESK 7 1 ®1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 00901 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKI\LEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 1 THE PROJECT Olympic Memorial Hospital 3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 1 2 THE DOCUMENTS 1 3 THE ARCHITECT Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon 2505 Third Avenue, Suite 219 Seattle, Washington 98121 PART 2 THE BID SECTION 00300 PAGE 1 BID FORM ADDENDUM 1 The plans and specifications are entitled 'Construcuon Documents for Olympic Memorial Hospital -3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel To: Olympic Memorial Hospital 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 98362 Ladies and Gentlemen. I/We have received the Project Specification for the project as identified above. I/We have also received Addenda Nos. and have included their provisions in my /our bid. I/We have attended the mandatory site inspection. Yes No (check one) I/We have examined both the documents and the site and fully understand the extent and nature of the work. Questions regarding the project have been asked of the Architect during the bidding period. I/We submit the following bid. In submitting this hid, I/We agree 1 To hold my /our bid open for sixty (60) days. 2. To accept the provisions of the Advertisement to Bid and the Instructions to Bidders regarding disposition of Bid Security 3 To enter into and execute a contract, if awarded on the basis of this bid and to furnish guarantee bonds in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions of this contract. 4 To accomplish the work in accordance with the contract documents. 5 To complete the work by the time specified in Section 01011 Contract Time and Sequence. 6 The bids are in accordance with Section 01030 Base Bid and Alternates. 7 I/We have attached to this bid the required Bid Security and Bidder Qualification Form. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKI \LEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIO \AL CARE UNIT REMODEL I/We will construct this project for the lump -sum price of DOLLARS (S None of the base bid or alternate prices include Washington State sales tax. Alternates (Not I Js Alt. Description Addition #1 Headwall Units at Patient Rooms S #2 Wood Veneer Soffits. S #3 Vinyl Wallcovering at Patient Room walls S #4 Drapes and Valences S #5 Lavatories in HC Toilet Rooms S Siibcnn tractors I/We intend to use the following subcontractors for any and all portions of the work awarded. HVAC Subcontractor Plumbing Subcontractor Electrical Subcontractor Roofing Subcontractor In addition to the above, the following subcontractors have subcontract amounts equal to more than ten percent of the bid amount. 1 2. 3 4 NOTE. If such subcontractors are not listed below a list of their names must be submitted within one hour of the published bid submittal time. Failure to provide this list shall render the bid void. SECTION 00300 PAGE 2 BID FORM ADDENDUM 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKI'LE\ GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE U\IT RE\90UFL Signatures (Date) (Signature) (Title) (Legal name of person, corporation, or firm submitting bid) (State Contractor's License Number) 1996 Mahlum Nordfors \lcKinley Gordon SECTION 00300 PAGE 3 BID FORM ADDENDUM 1 (Seal If bid is by a corporation, signature must be as required in Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders.) END OF SECTION 00300 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLE\ GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODLL C No sales tax shall be included for any of the bid prices. D The above terms are used as defined in Section 00100, Instructions to Bidders. 1 3 DESCRIPTION B The following items are excluded from the above base bid. 1 Work included in the following additive or deductive alternates 2. Work specifically shown or noted as not in contract (NIC) 1 4 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES 1 5 ALTERNATES SECTION 01030 PAGE 1 BASE BID AND ALTERNATES ADDENDUM 1 PART l GENERAL 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section 1 2 REFERENCES A. Comply with Section 00030 Invitation to Bid, and Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders. B Each bidder shall state in his bid, in the spaces provided on the Bid Form (Section 00300) the following: 1 Base Bid: Bid for performing the work of the base bid as described below 2. Alternate Bids: Bid for performing additional items of work, omitting items of work, substituting materials or construction for those specified in the base bid, all as described below State the amount to be added to or deducted from the base bid. A. Base bid is the sum proposed to perform all general mechanical, and electrical work as specified and shown in Divisions 0 through 16 (specifications) and Divisions A, M, and E (project drawings) also referred to as the contract documents. A. An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form (Section 00300) for certain construction activities defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from base bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the contract documents. A. Coordination: Coordinate related work and modify or adjust adjacent work as necessary to ensure that work affected by each accepted alternate is complete and fully integrated into the project. B. Notification. Immediately following the award of the contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved notification of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C Schedule 1 A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this section. Specification sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. 2 Include as part of each alternate miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the alternate MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) SECTION 01030 PAGE 2 BASE BID AND ALTERNATES ADDENDUM 1 PART 3 ?C IITION 3 1 GENERAL A. Alternate bids may or may not be accepted by Owner B Bid prices for alternates shall include adjustments in the work of all materials and trades as may be necessary because of additions, deletions, or substitutions. C Rough -ins and all other provisions required for the future installation of items of work omitted in base bid or in deductive alternates shall remain in the contract unless otherwise stated. Refer to drawings or specifications for explanations of cut- off points of work remaining. D Work which may be added in alternates shall become part of and be governed by the provisions of the specification sections for like materials and construction. E In alternate descriptions, reference to architectural drawings shall be interpreted as all inclusive reference to any other project drawings showing the work 3 2 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate #1 Headwall Units at Patient Rooms 1 Provide 06400 headwall units at all Patient Rooms. 2. If this alternate is not accepted, base bid provides for 06400 headwall units at Patient Rooms 15 20 21 and 22 only Gas outlets, electrical receptacles, and accessories in Patient Rooms 12 14 16 18, 19 25 27 and 34 shall be flush mounted directly into wall At back to back headwalls, provide 09255 6 inch studs at wall between the adjacent Patient Bedrooms. B. Alternate #2 Wood Veneer Soffits. 1 Provide 09255 framing and 06200 wood veneer soffits as shown above Patient Room doors, Nurse Station counter and entry doors to wing. 2. If this alternate is not accepted, base bid provides for 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings. C Alternate #3 Vinyl Wallcovering at Patient Room walls. 1 Provide 09950 Vinyl Wallcovering at Patient Room walls as shown in Volume 2 Project Drawings, Finish Schedule. 2 If this alternate is not accepted, provide 09900 paint at Patient Room walls in lieu of vinyl wallcovering. D Alternate #4 Drapes and Valences 1 Provide 12541 Draperies and 06200 Wood Valence at exterior windows where indicated in Volume 2, Project Drawings, Room Finish Plan and Schedules and Interior Elevations. 2. If this alternate is not accepted, Base Bid does not include 12541 Draperies and 06200 Wood Valences. E. Alternate #5 Lavatories at HC Toilet Rooms 13 17 26 and 33 1 Provide' 15000 lavatory and all associated plumbing and 10800 paper towel dispenser and mirror at HC Toilet Rooms 13 17 26 and 33 as shown in ASK s 101 102, and 103 Addendum 1 2 If this alternate is not accepted, Base Bid does not include 15000 lavatory and all associated plumbing and 10800 paper towel dispenser and mirror at HC Toilet Rooms 13 17 26 and 13 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKI \LEN GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPIT AL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 01996 Mahlum \ordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 01030 PAGE3 BASE BID AND ALTERNATES ADDENDUM 1 END OF SECTION 01030 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 1 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1 Insulated window units. 2. Vision lights in doors. 3 Interior relitcs. 1 3 DEFINITIO \S A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glazing standard. B. Deterioration of Coated Glass. Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's directions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. C Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturers directions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standard. D Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use due to causes other than glass breakage and improper practices for maintaining, and cleaning insulating glass. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on the interior surfaces of glass. Improper practices for maintaining and cleaning glass do not comply with the manufacturer's directions. 1 4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General. Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable) without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction. B Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on Drawings are for detailing only Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in- service conditions. Provide glass lights for the various size openings in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat treated) to meet or exceed the following criteria. 1 Minimum glass thickness, nominally of lights in exterior walls is 0.23 inch. 2. Tinted and heat absorbing glass thicknesses for each tint indicated are the same throughout Project. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 2 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 3 Minimum glass thicknesses of lights, whether composed of annealed or heat treated glass, are selected so the worst -case probability of failure does not exceed the following: a. 8 lights per 1000 for lights set vertically or not over 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. Determine minimum thickness of monolithic annealed glass according to ASTM E 1300 For other than monolithic annealed glass, determine thickness per glass manufacturer's standard method of analysis including applying adjustment factors to ASTM E 1300 based on type of glass. C Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on materials actual surface temperatures due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1 Temperature Change (Range). 120 deg F (67 deg C) ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) material surfaces. 1 5 SUBMITTALS A. General Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated. C Samples for verification purposes of 12 -inch- square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12 inch -long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. D Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1 Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program of a recognized certification agency or independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Maintenance data for glass and other glazing materials to be included in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1 FGMA Publications: 'FGMA Glazing Manual 2. LSGA Publications: 'LSGA Design Guide 3 SIGMA Publications: TM 3000 Vertical Glazing Guidelines B. Safety Glass. Products complying with ANSI Z97 1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. 1 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 3 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 C Fire Resistive Glazing Products for Door Assemblies: Products identical to those tested per ASTM E 152 labeled and listed by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D Insulating Glass Certification Program Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component light of units with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing agency indicated below 1 Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI). 3 National Certified Testing Laboratories (NCTL) E. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project with a record of successful in- service performance. F Single Source Responsibility for Glass. Obtain glass from one source for each product indicated below 1 Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036) type and class indicated. 2. Insulating glass of each construction indicated. 3 Heat treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048) condition indicated. G Single Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessones from one source for each product and installation method indicated. 1 7 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturers directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1 8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain frost, condensation, or other causes. 1 9 WARRANTY A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. D Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass: Submit written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass units that deteriorate as defined in 'Definitions article, f.o.b. point of manufacture freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. 1 Warranty Period: Manufacturers standard but not less than 10 years after date of Substantial Completion. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 4 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 ?ART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to the following 1 Ford Glass Division 2. Guardian Industries Corp 3 LOF Glass, Inc. 4 PPG Industries, Inc. 2 2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat) Class as indicated below and Quality q3 (glazing select). 1 Class 1 (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B. Refer to requirements for sealed insulating glass units for performance characteristics of assembled units composed of tinted glass, coated or uncoated, relative to visible light transmittance, U values, shading coefficient, and visible reflectance. 2 3 HEAT TREATED FLOAT GLASS A. Uncoated, Clear Heat Treated Float Glass ASTM C 1048 Condition A (uncoated surfaces) Type I (transparent glass, flat) Class 1 (clear) Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as indicated below 2. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated. C Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide heat treated glass by one of the following companies. 1 AFG Industries, Inc. 2. Guardian Industries Corp 3 PPG Industries, Inc. 4 Tempglass. 5 Viracon Inc. 2 5 CERAMIC COATED SPANDREL GLASS PRODUCTS A. Ceramic- Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048 Condition B (spandrel glass, one surface ceramic coated) Type I (transparent glass, flat) Class 1 (clear) Quality q3 (glazing select) and complying with requirements specified including those in Ceramic- Coated Spandrel Glass Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section. B. Fallout Resistance: Provide spandrel units identical to those passing fallout resistant test for spandrel glass specified in ASTM C 1048 2 7 WIRED GLASS A. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat) Class 1 (clear) Quality q8 (glazing); 6 mm (0.23 inch) thick. of form and mesh pattern indicated below 1 Polished Wired Glass. Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), and as follows: MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 5 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 b Mesh m2 (square) B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering wired glass products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following companies. 1 Polished Wired Glass: a. Ashai Glass Co. b Central Glass Co. Ltd. c Nippon Sheet Glass Ltd. d. Pilkington Sales (North America) Ltd. 2 4 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units. Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lights of glass separated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and with other requirements indicated, including those in Insulating Glass Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section 1 For properties of individual glass lights making up units, refer to requirements specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to types, classes, kinds, and conditions of glass products comprising lights of insulating glass units. 2. Provide heat treated, coated float glass of kind indicated or if not otherwise indicated, Kind HS (heat strengthened) where recommended by manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements specified and Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is designated or required. 3 U- values are expressed as Btu /hour x sq ft. x deg F 2 S ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEkLAVI'S A. General. Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1 Compatibility Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 2 Suitability Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated and conditions existing at time of installation. 3 Colors. Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: a. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that comply with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referencing ASTM classifications for Type Grade, Class and Uses. C Glazing Sealant: Use for all wet glazing, except as otherwise specified: 1 `999 Glazing Sealant by Dow Corning Corp 2 `Silglaze N250] Sealant or `Gesil N26(0 Sealant by General Electrical Co 3 `Rhodorsil 5C' by Ronc Poulenc Inc. Princeton, NJ MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 6 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 NOTE. Backup material shall be compatible with sealant. D Closed Cell Foam Tape: Continuous extruded expanded foam neoprene with a Shore A durometer hardness and profile adequate to fulfill the overall performance requirements specified and complying with ASTM C509 Type II Provide adhesive on one side. E. Butyl Glazing Tape Reinforced: A preformed, nonsagging, nonoxidizing, nonstaining butyl rubber tape with core reinforcement, one of the following: 1 Tremco 440' by Tremco Mfg Co 2. `Extru -Seal B -44 by Pecora Chemical Corp 3 `DAP Butyl Rubber Tape by DAP Inc. 2 6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General. Provide products of material size and shape complying with referenced glazing standard requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer C Setting Blocks: Elastomenc material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5 D Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lights in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomenc material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking) 2 7 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements. EART 3 EXFCIiTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following 1 Manufactunng and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system 3 Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4 Effective sealing between points of glass framing members. B. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 7 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 3 2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates. 3 3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. 0 Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows: 1 Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label 2 Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D Apply primers to point surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant substrate testing. E. Install elastomenc setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass bites. G Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as follows. 1 Locate spacers inside, outside and directly opposite each other Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements. 2 Provide 1/8 -inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern draw bow and similar characteristics. 3 4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed b) glass their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 8 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 C Where framing joints are vertical cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each lite is installed. G Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 3 6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant perfonnance B Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. Install pressurized gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. 3 8 PROTECTION AND CLEA\IN(, A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer C Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build -up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer D Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, dunng construction period. E Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer 3 6 SCHEDULE A. Extent of Work 1 Provide glass and glazing throughout openings at windows, relights, sidelights, transoms, doorlights, vision panels, and other openings intended for or requiring glass. 2. Provide types of glass and glazing as scheduled herein and indicated on the drawings. 3 Where in conflict with this schedule provide the work that is the most expensive. B. At Intenor Doors and Sidelights MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLE\ GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 9 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 1 At nonlabeled door openings, provide tempered glass throughout. 2. At labeled door openings, provide clear wire glass throughout. C Relights and Transoms 1 Provide tempered glass throughout, 1/4 inch thick. D Insulated Glass: Provide factory installed insulated glazing units at all vertical exterior windows. E. Where Glass is Shown on Drawings: Provide as shown except provide per this schedule in event of conflict. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKI \LEY GORDON VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC AUBURN SOUTH PRIMARY CLEAR FLOAT GLASS DATA Class: Class 1 (clear) Thickness: 1/4 inch Visible Light Transmittance: 89% Visible Light Reflectance: 8% Shading Coefficient. 0 94 Solar Heat Gain Coefficient. 0 81 Quality Standard Product. PPG Clear Glass SECTIO\ 08800 PAGE 10 GLAZING ADDENDUM 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE II VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLI \IC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 CERAMIC COATED GLASS PRODUCT DATA SHEET Kind of Heat Treatment: Kind HS (heat strengthened) Thickness: 1/4 inch Location of Ceramic Coating: Third Surface Ceramic Coating Color Silver Pearl Quality Standard Product. PPG Spectraclad MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEI GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 12 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 INSULATING GLASS DATA SHEET Classification of Units. Thickness: Air Space Width. Gas Filling: Sealing System Spacer Specifications: Thickness of each light. Uncoated Clear Indoor Light. Uncoated Clear Outdoor Light: Visible Light Transmittance Visible Light Reflectance: Summer Daytime U Value Winter Nighttime U -Value Shading Coefficient: Class C, CB or CBA 1 inch 1/2 inch Fill air space with Argon Manufacturer's standard sealants Manufacturers standard 1/4 inch Kind HS (heat strengthened) Conditiona A (uncoated) Class I (clear) float glass. Kind HS (heat strengthened) Conditiona A (uncoated) Class 1 (clear) float glass. 80% 15 0.56 049 082 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 13 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 INSULATING SPANDREL, GLASS DATA SHEET Classification of Units: Class C, CB or CBA Thickness: 1 inch Air Space Width. 1/2 inch Gas Filling: Fill air space with Argon Sealing System Manufacturer s standard sealants Spacer Specifications: Manufacturers standard Thickness of each light. 1/4 inch Ceramic Coated Indoor Light. Comply with requirements of specified for ceramic coated spandrel glass products, Ceramic Coated Outdoor Light. Comply with requirements of specified for ceramic coated spandrel glass products. Summer Daytime U -Value 0 56 Winter Nighttime U- Value 0 49 Shading Coefficient: 0.82 43 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 08800 ACTIVITY ROOM 32 II CORRDOR 36 i VERIFY 15000 SHOWER ENCLOSURE ROUGH OPENING DIMENSIONS TYPICAL -Lo ic±1 t 0 1 13 5Z8' 1 3' -1 1/2' I 4 —10 3/4" 3 —4" F, A) I I I HC ITOLET 3R 71 VERIFY, PART AL ENLARGED PLAY WEST 1/4" 1 —0' MAHLUM N O R D F O R S M c K I N L E Y GORDON 2505 Third Avenue Su1te 219 S4atiIF WA 9 0 1 2 1 206 441 4151 2)6 441 047d F L Ho Transitional Care Unit Remodel o3 I u N F2 /BOTTOM OF T V ALCOVE 'ABOVE AT 6 —4 A.F F SLOPE 03300 UNDERLAYMENT TO 15000 FLOOR DRAIN TYPICAL 09666 THRESHOLD TYPICAL PATENT ROOM M 34 PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRIPTION: ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING: A -4.1 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 ASK. 101 CLEAN UTUTY M n j SLOPE 03300 UNDERLAYMENT TO 15000 FLOOR DRAIN TYPICAL PATENT 10265 CORNER GUARD TYPICAL .1 M A H L U M N O R D F O R S M c K I N L E Y GORDON VERIF( 15000 SHOWER ENCLOSURE ROUGH OPENING DIMENSIONS TYPICAL HC TOUT 01 13 II J i i/ I (A 3 -1 -31/2' VERIFY 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 Seattle WA 9b 1 21 20b 441 4 1 1 Zit, 441 047c F —2 3/4" 8' ,1 —7 3/8' I 20 CORRIDOR 36 PART AL ENLARGED PLAY EAST TOILET ROOM 17 SIMILAR TOILET ROOM 26 SIMILAR OPPOSITE Host PATENT ROOM 14 I 09666 THRESHOLD TYPICAL CV 00 10265 CORNER GUARD TYPICAL NOTE DIMENSIONS AND WALL TYPES SHOWN AT TOILET ROOM 13 SIMILAR AT TOILET ROOM 17 AND SIMILAR OPPOSITE AT TOILET ROOM 26 PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRPTION: ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING: A -4.2 Transitional Care Unit DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 Remodel ASK. 102 16000 LIGHT SWITCH TYPICAL NORTH 10800 RECESSED SEAT COVER 54" DISPENSER TYPICAL 3'-1" 16000 NURSE CALL 21. TYPICAL 10800 SHELF —11 TYPICAL SOAP DISPENSER I, (FI0) TYPICAL 10800 MIRROR TYPICAL 10800 PAPER j TOWEL DISPENSER _r TYPICAL M A H L U M 2505 Third Avenue Suite 2H N O R D F O R S Seattle WA 9- M c K I N L E Y 20b 441 4 1 51 GORDON 20b 441 047c F EAST (ROOM 33 SIMILAR OPPOSITE) 10800 RECESSED TOILET PAPER AND NAPKIN RECEPTACLE TYPICAL 10800 GRAB BAR TYPICAL r 10800/15000 GRAB BAR TYPICAL 1 10800 /15000 FOLDING SHOWER SEAT TYPICAL SOUTH (ROOM 33 SIMILAR) HC TOILET 13 SHOWN 1/4 1 -0' HC TOILET 17 SIMILAR HC TOILET 26 SIMILAR OPPOSITE o pt 11910141. Transitional Care Unit Remodel 10800 GRAB BAR TYPICAL PROJECT NUMBER: 9511000 DESCRPTION: ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING. A -5.1 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 19% ASK. 103 M &N M G TOILET 15A 09255 GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT WITH 09900 PAINT 1 TYPICAL PATENT ROOM 15 A H L U M O R D F O R S c K I N L E Y O R D O N PAHENT ROOM 16 s -0 "c= °J 7 -6" f 0 a PARTIAL ENLARGED REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1/4 -1' -O" PATIENT ROOM 16 SHOWN PATIENT ROOM12 SIMILAR, PATIENT ROOM 27 SIMILAR OPPOSITE 2505 Third Avenue Suite Seattle WA 9 206 441 41s1 206 441 47t, F 219 12' TYPICAL V o o *Mk HON Transitional Care Unit Remodel PATIENT ROOM 18 a O PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESORPTION: ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING. A-6.1 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 ASK. 104 A H L U M O R D F O R S c K I N L E Y O R D O N 06400 HEADWALL ALTERNATE NO. 1 TYPICAL 10265 WALL PANEL TYPICAL El 1 r i o 0 0: I 2505 Third Avenue Suite 2H Seattle WA a, 121 20b 441 4151 266 441 047c F 06400 ADJUSTABLE SHELF WITH PULL OUT CLOTHES ROD PERPENDICULAR TO DOOR TYPICAL AT ALL 18" DEEP WARDROBES 06400 WARDROBE TYPICAL. PL -4 i i i 1 II I I I I 11 Elf 10265 CORNER GUARD TYPICAL 16000 NIGHT LIGHT PATIENT ROOM 16 SHOWN I n 11 r-a I J a 4L NO Transitional Care Unit Remodel 4" 2' -6" L 21" DEEP 1 1/4 1 -0' PATIENT ROOM 12 SIMILAR PATIENT ROOM 27 SIMILAR OPPOSITE 2' -0" L 18" DEEP PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRIPTION ADDENDUM 1 RETREJO DRAWNG. A -5.2 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 ASK. 105 MA H L U M N O R D F O R S M c K I N L E Y GORDON OI I I I II 1;11k.1- _IL_ PARTIAL SOUTH ELEVATION 1/8" 1 -0' 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 JPattIP WA 9k121 206 441 4151 2 h 441 47: F fl I L Transitional Care Unit Remodel PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRPTION: ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING. A -3.1 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 ASK. 106 CV ta ilpo MAHLUM N O R D F O R S M c K I N L E Y GORDON 3' =1 —0' 9 1/2' DIAMETER 2505 Third Avenue Juice 219 S accle WA 9� 12 I 20h 441 4 I c I 23b 441 047c F TYPICAL FLOOR DRAIN 15000 FLOOR DRAIN 07901 SEALANT 09666 SHEET VINYL SLOPE 03300 UNDERLAYMENT TO 09666 THRESHOLD TYPICAL EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR Oq(, WATERPROOF MEMBRANE 03300 SETTING BED CORE DRILL OPENING FOR DRAIN O e— NOTE FLOOR DRAIN TYPICAL AT TOILET ROOM 13 17 26 AND 33 tiosp Transitional Care Unit Remodel PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRPTION: ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING: A-9.2 DATE: 11 NOVEMBER 1996 ASK. 107 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL Date. Tuesday November 12, 1996 VOLUME 1 PROJECT MANUAL Section Descnption 15010 GENERAL PROVISIONS From the Office of FSi consulting engineers 605 First Ave, Suite 400 Seattle, Washington 98104 Add to paragraph 1.05 F submittal data to be submitted on Rooftop Air- Handler color options Condenser color options Revise paragraph 1 13 A.1 to read as follows. 1 Patching: The mechanical subcontractor shall do all patching required for installation of new mechanical work. Patching of structure or walls required due to demolition of existing mechanical shall be done by General Contractor During the bidding period, notify the General Contractor the extent of patching required. 15400 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM Add paragraph 1 05 N as follows. N Water Use Standards for Fixtures and fittings. 1 Waterclosets, flush valve 2. Faucets 3 Shower Heads 1.6 gpf 2.5 gpm 2.5 gpm Revise paragraph "P1 -1 and "P1 -2' insulation description as follows: Insulation. McQuire Products Model ProWrap, seamless insulation and cover PAGE 1 ADDENDUM 1 DIVISION 15 Add paragraph `P5 -2' and `P5 -3' accessory description as follows. Accessories. See Architectural drawings and Section 10800 for grab bars, seats and other accessories to be ordered by the General with the enclosure. Add paragraph "P5 -3' enclosure description as follows. Enclosure: Kohler Model Sonata with non -slip walking surface Revise paragraph `Existing Shower Stalls' shower head descnption as follows Shower Head: Powers #M -2. Revise paragraph `D -1 Floor Drain description as follows: D -1 Floor Drain J.R. Smith #2005 -A, chrome plated Include trap pnmer option for Handicap Toilet Room Floor Drains. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL Add paragraph 2.01 as follows. Trap primers Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. Prime -Rite model Revise paragraph 3.05 descnption as follows. A. Completely insulate handicap lavatory traps and water supplies. Add paragraph 3.07 as follows. 3.07 AUTOMATIC TRAP PRIMERS 15410 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS Add paragraph 2.04 as follows. 2.04 Mechanical Systems Insulation (See Section 15070) 15490 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS Add to paragraph 2.05 D as follows. Alarm panel shall indicate high and pressure alarms for oxygen supply 15500 FIRE PROTECTION Revise paragraph 1.02 to read as follows: A. Ordinary hazard sizing and spacing. 15650 LIQUID HEAT TRANSFER PIPING SYSTEMS Add to paragraph 2.02 B Temtrol as an accepted coil manufacturer. PAGE 2 ADDENDUM 1 DIVISION 15 A. Provide trap primer for all floor drains, and where required by the Plumbing Code. Piping shall be as specified for water piping, 1/2 -inch minimum size; chrome plated brass pipe where exposed. Connect primer line at the top of a horizontal cold water line and install the trap primer valve and distribution unit in an accessible location. Add paragraph 2.05 E as follows: E. Gauges: Provide in zone valve box, downstream side of each zone valve, as required by NFPA 99 Gauges shall be 1 -1/2' with plastic protective dial faces, built into the valve box. Add paragraph 2.05 E as follows: E. Switches. Provide a pressure switch for "High Pressure and "Low Pressure signals to the alarm panels. Switches shall be installed in respective medical gas mains downstream from the main shutoff valves and in lines, located as required in NFPA 99, for the area alarms. For line vacuum below normal, provide vacuum switch. 15640 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT Revise paragraph 2.01 H to read as follows. H. Condensing units shall be provided by the manufacturer of the Rooftop Air Handling Unit, see Section 15700. 15700 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT Revise paragraph 2.01 D 3 to read as follows. 3 Dampers shall be constructed of extruded aluminum blades. Provide blades with extruded vinyl or rubber edge seals. Seal blade ends with aluminum arc seals. Damper leak rate not to exceed 11 -CFM per square foot of damper at 2 -1/2- inches W G pressure. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PAGE 3 ADDENDUM 1 DIVISION 15 Add to paragraph 2.01 D as follows. 4 Outside air dampers shall be integral air monitor /damper sized for the full economizer load and factory adjusted to meet the minimum outside air requirements as scheduled. Frame shall be extruded aluminum hat channel with mounting flanges on both sides of frame. Blades shall be airfoil shaped heavy gauge extruded aluminum, anodized monitoring blades fixed with damper frame and includes air pressure sensing ports. Dampers shall be Ruskin Model IAQ or approved equal. 15800 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Revise paragraph 2.03 C 4 to read as follows. UL classified as leakage Class I per UL555S with 4.0 cfm per cubic foot maximum leakage at 1 inch w g. differential pressure across closed damper Revise paragraph 2.03 C 6, to read as follows 6. Damper Actuators. Electric two position damper motor, spring close and hold open. Actuator shall tie in to the smoke detection system. Smoke detection system and wiring from the fire alarm relay panel will be provided under the electncal work. 15825 AIR TERMINAL EQUIPMENT Revise paragraph 2.01 A 6, to read as follows. 6. Unit manufacturer shall install at the factory electnc damper actuator and controller furnished by the temperature control manufacturer 15900 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Replace entire Section with attached Section 15900. VOLUME 2 MECHANICAL DRAWINGS Drawing Description M -2 Second Floor Plan Mechanical Add waste and vent piping for Third Floor Toilet Room Floor Drains. Refer to sketches MSK 102 and MSK -103 for work included. M -4 Third Floor Plan Piping and Plumbing Add wall mounted lays, P1 2, floor drains, D 1 and associated piping in the new handicap toilet rooms. Refer to sketches MSK 100 and MSK -101 for work included. M -8 Third Floor Plan Fire Protection Diagrams Add wall mounted lays, P1 2, floor drains, D -1 and associated piping in the new handicap toilet rooms to the diagrams. Refer to sketches MSK 104 MSK -105 and MSK -106 for work included. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON q SECTION 15900 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 4.00EI.0014 I PART I GENERAL 1 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The "General Conditions" of the specification apply to work specified in this section, consult them in detail for applicable instructions. B All components of the Direct Digital Control (DDC) system must meet applicable local code requirements. 1 02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install a networked Direct Digital Control (DDC) system for control and monitonng of the building heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems as described in this specification. B System shall consist of stand -alone DDC panels, sensors, automatic valves, actuators, dampers, operating software, operator training, installation labor warranty and all other necessary material and labor to provide a complete and workable system. 1 03 INSTALLATION QUALITY A. The entire building control system shall be installed by skilled electricians and control mechanics, all of whom are properly trained and qualified for this work. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with Division 16 of these specifications and applicable national, state and local codes. B Supervision and checkout of the system shall be by local branch engineers and technicians directly employed by the Contractor C. Contractor shall be a manufacturer -owned service organization which stocks and has direct factory access to the manufacturer's standard parts, manuals and training options. Contractor shall be fully capable of system inspection, trouble shooting, maintenance, and service to the system. B Contractor shall maintain a field service office within 150 miles of project site. This field office shall have a minimum of five years expenence engineering and installing the control systems proposed for this project. At engineer's request, provide a listing of at least ten projects of similar magnitude, complexity and facility use type completed within the past five years. 104 SUBMITTALS/DRAWINGS A. Submittals 1 The contractor shall submit, prior to installation, a set of installation drawings, equipment data sheets and control strategies for review by the consultant and/or Owner's representative. 2. These drawings shall include the physical location of all building control system panels and controllers as well as a diagram indicating complete DDC system architecture. 3 The complete sequence of operation for the control system shall be provided. 4 A complete list of monitored and controlled points shall be provided. B Record Drawings (As- builts) 1 Upon completion of the installation and final system adjustment the contractor shall provide and deliver to the Owner a full set of record drawings of the MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 05 SYSTEM TURN -OVER AND SERVICE 107 WARRANTY SECTION 15900 PAGE 2 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS AODEl iDwh -c I installation and the control strategies including pnntouts of all system programs, system database and system operating parameters. 2. Record drawings shall be submitted in 11" x 17' bound format. At owner's request, provide a copy of as -built drawings on 3 -1/2" floppy disks. C. Standards and Format 1 All submittals shall be generated on reproducible Autocad (Version 10 or later) schematic diagrams A. Upon completion of the installation, the contractor shall initiate operation of the control system and perform all necessary testing and diagnostics to ensure proper operation. A formal commissioning procedure shall be utilized to insure complete system integrity and conformance to these specifications. This procedure shall be a completely documented procedure. Contractor's recommended commissioning plan shall be submitted with the mitial submittal for approval by engineer At a minimum, submittal shall include a step -by -step, written description of the commissioning plan as well as the project specific commissioning forms that will be utilized. Commissioning forms shall address all field devices, field controllers, software statements and software points. B An acceptance test in the presence of the owners representative, and/or the Project Manager shall be performed. Deficiencies revealed by failed test(s) shall be repaired and corrected and the test(s) repeated until successful. C The graphical interface software shall be installed pnor to completion and all modifications to reflect as-built conditions and changes shall be completed within fourteen (14) days of the scheduled completion date. 1 06 TRAINING /OWNER'S INSTRUCTION A. The contractor shall provide to the Owner two (2) copies of an operator's manual describing all operating and routine maintenance service procedures to be used with the system. B The contractor shall instruct the owner's designated representatives in these procedures during the start -up and test penod. The instruction shall consist of two separate training components on -site, project specific training and off -site factory training. C On -site training shall consist of a minimum of one (1) full day (8 hours total) of training performed by an engineer familiar with the specific design of the system provided for this project. A. The building control system, including all hardware and software components shall be warranted for a penod of one year following owner's beneficial use of system. For phased project completion, the warranty shall also commence in phases. Any manufactunng defects arising during this period shall be corrected without cost to the owner B In addition to the hardware warranty, the Contractor shall correct any software sequences that do not meet the specified sequence of operation. Modification or repairs required due to changes enacted by the owner's system operators during the warranty period will not be considered warranty items MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 08 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS SECTION 15900 PAGE 3 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS ,.17DEN Du M t A. The DDC system shall be provided by Landis Gyr, as an extension of the existing system, NO SUBSTITUTIONS B Pncmg structure has been negotiated prior to bid with engineer /owner Contact Landis Gyr, Greg Ackerson, (206) 455 -3700 for pricing. PART II PRODUCTS 2.01 DDC SYSTEM A. GENERAL 1 The Direct Digital Control (DDC) system shall possess a fully modular architecture, permitting expansion through the addition of DDC controllers, slave panels, terminal equipment controllers, operator terminals, personal computers and/or a general purpose multi tasking, multi operator minicomputer B DDC CONTROLLER 1 DDC controllers shall be stand alone, microprocessor- based, with a minimum word size of 16 bits. They shall be multi tasking, multi -user real -time digital control processors consisting of modular hardware with plug -in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies and input/output point modules. Controller size shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list and with spare capacity and expandability features as described below 2. Each DDC controller shall have sufficient memory (minimum 1 MB) to support its operating system and databases including trending, dial -up communications, alarm management and manual override momtonng. 3 Each DDC controller shall support monitormg and control of the following types of points, without the addition of equipment outside the DDC controller cabinet. a. Analog Inputs (AI) 4 -20 mA 0 -10 Vdc Thermistors 1000 ohm RTDs b Digital Inputs (DI)• Dry Contact Closure Pulse Accumulator Voltage Sensing c Digital Outputs (DO)-Contact Closure (motor starters, sizes as required) d. Analog Outputs (AO)•0 -20 psi 4 -20 mA 0 -10 Vdc 4 Each DDC controller shall have a minimum of one spare of each point type (analog inputs, digital inputs, analog outputs, digital outputs) and no less than 10% expandability within the controller enclosure Provide all processors, power supplies and communication controllers complete so that the implementation of a new point only requires the addition of the appropriate point input/output termination module and wiring. Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and have at least 25% of the memory available for future use. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 4 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS AWEi.it7uM 1 5 The operator shall have the ability to manually ovemde automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC controller via local, point discrete, on -board hand/off /auto operator ovemde switches for digital control type points and gradual switches for analog control type points These ovemde switches shall be operable whether the panel processor is operational or not. Switches shall be mounted either within the DDC controller key- accessed enclosure, or externally mounted with each switch keyed to prevent unauthonzed ovemdes DDC controllers shall monitor the status of all ovemdes and inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. DDC controllers shall also collect override activity information for reports. At a minimum, all digital outputs (except terminal controllers) shall have supervised manual ovemde switches. 6 DDC controllers shall provide local LED status indication for each digital input and output for constant, up -to -date venfication of all point conditions without the need for an operator 1/0 device. Graduated intensity LEDs or analog indication of value shall also be provided for each analog output. 7 DDC controllers shall provide at least two RS -232C senal data communication ports for operation of operator 1/0 devices such as industry standard printers, operator terminals, modems and portable laptop operator's terminals. DDC controllers shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, pnnters or terminals. 8 Each DDC controller shall continuously perform self diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all panel components. The DDC controller shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions or repeated failure to establish communication. 9 DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform any or all the following energy management routines. a. Time -of -day scheduling b Calendar -based scheduling c. Hohday scheduling d. Temporary schedule overrides e. Start -stop time optimization f. Automatic Daylight Savings Time switchover g. Night setback control h. Enthalpy switchover (economizer) 1. Peak demand limiting j Temperature- compensated duty cycling The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as an integral part of DDC controllers and shall not be dependent upon any lugher level computer for execution. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention and shall be flexible enough to allow user customization. Programs shall be applied to building equipment as described in the Sequence of Operations. 11 Alarm management shall be provided to monitor and direct alarm information to operator devices. Each DDC controller shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non- cntical alarms, minimize network traffic and prevent alarms from being lost. Any critical alarms shall have the capability of generating a user defined message and routing MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 5 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS a17176/.1 Q U M 1 that message to any operator device or pnnter At no time shall the DDC controllers ability to report alarms be affected by either operator or activity at a PC workstation, local I/O device or commumcations with other panels on the network. 12. A vanety of histoncal data collection utilities shall be provided to manually or automatically sample, store and display system data for points Each DDC controller shall have a dedicated RAM -based buffer for trend data storage and shall be capable of stonng a nummum of 10,000 data samples. Trend data shall be stored at the DDC controllers and uploaded to the workstation (if provided) when retrieval is desired. For systems with graphical workstation capabilities, uploads shall occur based upon either user defined interval, manual command or when the trend buffers are full. All trend data shall be available for use in Microsoft Word or Excel applications. C. APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS 1 GENERAL a. Provide Apphcation Specific Controllers (ASC's) as required for control of unitary mechanical systems or pieces of equipment. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor -based DDC control unit and shall be capable of operating either as a standalone controller or on a multi -drop communications network originating at the DDC controller Provide each ASC with sufficient memory to operate in a truly independent manner; that is, each ASC shall support its own inputs and outputs, operating systems, database and programs necessary to perform control sequences and energy management routines. b Provide the following types of ASC's as necessary Unitary Controllers (UC's) Terminal Equipment Controllers (TEC's) 2. UNITARY CONTROLLERS (UC's) a. UC's shall include all point mputs and outputs necessary to perform the specified control sequences. Provide a hand off automatic switch for each binary output for manual override capability Switches shall be mounted either within the controller's key- accessed enclosure, or externally mounted with each switch keyed to prevent unauthorized ovemdes. In addition, each switch position shall be supervised m order to inform the system that automatic control has been overridden. As a mmimum, 50% of the point inputs and outputs shall be of the universal type, allowing for additional system flexibility In lieu of universal inputs and outputs, provide a minimum of 50% spare points of each type b Each UC shall support its own real -time operating system. Provide a time clock with 72 hour battery backup to allow for stand alone operation and to insure protection dunng power outages. Should the controller reside on a DDC controller network, the clock operation shall be overridden by the DDC controller clock to insure network continuity c. All databases and programs shall be stored in non volatile EEPROM or a minimum of 100 -hour battery back -up shall be provided. All programs shall be field- customized to meet the user's exact control strategy requirements. Controllers utilizing pre packaged or canned programs shall not be acceptable. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 6 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS AOUENOUM 1 d. Local alarming and trending capabilities shall be provided for convenient troubleshooting and system diagnostics Alarm limits and trend data information shall be user definable for any point. e Each UC shall have connection provisions for a portable laptop or similar programming tool. This tool shall allow the user to display, generate or modify all point databases and operating programs. All new values and problems shall then be restored to EEPROM. 3 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS (TEC's) a. Control of terminal units such as VAV boxes, heat pumps and reheat boxes shall be accomplished by a microprocessor based stand -alone controller utilizing direct digital control. The Terminal Equipment Controller (TEC) shall interface to the building control system in a multi -drop communications network originating at the DDC field panel. An individual controller shall be provided for each terminal unit. The terminal controller must be listed by Underwriters Laboratory under UL 916 PAZX and UL 864 UDTZ. b For VAV boxes, the controls contractor shall furnish the terminal controller (controller, damper motor, flow transducer) to the terminal unit manufacturer for factory mounting. Costs associated with factory mounting of terminal controller shall be covered by terminal unit manufacturer The terninal box manufacturer shall provide an averaging air velocity sensor suitable for interfacing with the TEC's differential pressure transducer c. Each TEC shall be accessible for purposes of control and monitoring from a central or remote operator's terminals as specified herein. d. TEC damper actuator shall be of the 24 Vac floating point type. Upon power loss, the actuator maintains its current damper position. Position status is shown in percentage open notation. e. TEC room temperature sensor shall come complete with a terminal jack and programmable ovemde switch integral to the sensor assembly The terminal jack shall be used to connect the portable operators terminal to control and monitor all hardware and software points associated with the terminal unit. A terminal jack may be alternatively located on a stainless steel wall plate mounted adjacent to the sensor An ovemde switch shall initiate override of the night setback or unoccupied mode to normal operation when activated. A thumbwheel -type temperature setpoint dial shall also be provided with 1 Deg F temperature increments. Override switch and temperature setpomt functions may be locked out, canceled or limited as to time or temperature via software. f TEC's for VAV or CV applications shall be provided with integral differential pressure transducer capable of accepting an average air flow measurement signal from the terminal box averaging air velocity sensor The value is converted through a square root function to average airflow by the TEC. g. TEC control valve electronic actuators shall mount on the valve body and provide complete modulating control of the valve. Valve body shall separate from actuator for servicing without requiring any special tools or electncal connections. The actuator shall be of the floating control point type. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2.02 FIELD DEVICES SECTION 15900 PAGE 7 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Apoet.f ou tic 1 h. TEC winng terminal bars are to be detachable type allowing quick serviceability of the electronic controller hardware without removal of the existing wiring. D AUTO ANSWER/AUTO -DIAL MODEM 1 A telecommunications interface shall be furmshed and installed to allow direct connection of DDC controllers and networks to owner provided public or private phone lines. This device shall be microprocessor -based and will be capable of both automatic answer and automatic dial methods of call handling. Additionally, manual call initiation shall be done via a man machine interface command. Phone modem shall be US Robotics Sportster 9600 baud or equal. 2. The telecommunications interface, when operating in an automatic dialing mode, shall be able to perform any of the following functions. a. Retry a single primary number at a fixed interval a finite number of times and quit if unsuccessful. (If the number is busy, retry it until successful) In addition, call a minimum of three additional secondary numbers one time. b Retry successive numbers arranged in a priority scheme at fixed intervals a finite number of times and quit if unsuccessful. c. Inform the requesting device that a successful connection has been made. (If the numbers are busy, retry until successful). d. Inform the requesting device that a connection cannot be made. e Detect loss of communication on its network and dial an appropriate device (CPU Terminal, etc.), and upon successful connection transmit a message identifying a network failure. 3 The telecommunications interface shall also have automatic answer capabilities to allow it to be accessed from a remote central computer or terminal with modem. The interface unit shall allow the person calling to access any information on the network, provided that the standard log -on security screening is met. A. TEMPERATURE SENSORS 1 All temperature sensors shall be solid state electronic, employing a resistance type output. Room and zone temperature sensors may be therrmstor type. All duct sensors shall be ngid or flexible probe, averaging RTD -type sensors. All duct mixed air sensors shall be flexible averaging RTD -type sensors with sensor element length suitable for complete duct coverage. Pipe sensors shall be RTD- type. Provide outside air temperature sensors with watertight inlet fitting and sunlight shield. All single point sensors shall be accurate to a minimum of 0.5 degrees F at 77 degrees F calibration point. Duct averaging sensors shall be accurate to a minimum of 1 0 degrees F B CONTROL DAMPERS 1 Provide low leakage, galvanized steel control dampers with roll formed steel frames and blades and oil- impregnated bronze bearings. Dampers shall have blade seals and stops, equal to Ruskin CD36 2. Leakage shall be no greater than 10 CFM per square foot at 4 in. W C. with 20 in.- lbs. torque applied regardless of size MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 8 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS AC77 4DUh4 1 3 Provide opposed blade type dampers unless indicated otherwise. All multi- section dampers shall be provided with factory linkage to allow for connection of actuator at one common point. C. DAMPER AND VALVE ACTUATORS 1 All modulating damper and valve actuators shall be 24vac electnc motor type; floating point, 0- 10Vdc, 0 -16Vdc or other industry standard input signal type. Actuators shall function properly within the range of 85 to 110 percent of line voltage. 2. Provide actuators in sufficient size, quantity and type to match application. Provide a minimum of one damper actuator for each 30 square feet of damper area. 3 Damper actuators shall be rotary action -type (90 degree) designed for direct connection to damper shaft wherever possible. Provide position indication on exterior of actuator body 4 All valve actuators for steam applications shall be mounted at a 45 degree offset from vertical to avoid heat damage to actuator 5 Actuators shall be spring return as indicated by Normally Closed or Normally Open designation on drawings or in sequence of operation. D CONTROL VALVES 1 Modulating Valves 2" and Smaller Bronze body and seat with stainless steel stem and screwed ends. ANSI Class 250 body rating Suitable for fluid temperatures of up to 300 degrees F Equal percentage flow characteristics capable of smooth operation at differential pressures present in system. Landis Gyr Powers VE VVG/VXG 44 VE698, Flowrite VE598 or approved equal. 2. Sizing Modulating control valves shall be correctly selected for service and flow of system served. A pressure drop of 5 psi shall be used as a sizing guideline unless specifically noted otherwise in project documents. Two position shutoff valves shall be line size. E. LOW TEMPERATURE DETECTION THERMOSTATS 1 Provide low temperature control thermostat, electric type manual reset, non- averaging 20 feet long sensing elements that switch whenever any 6 inch section or more of any portion senses a temperature as low as the thermostat setpoint as specified in sequences. 2. Provide with two sets of contacts, one for hardwired fan shutdown and one for remote monitoring. 3 Powers ET141 or approved equal. F DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES 1 Provide air and liquid differential pressure switches for status of pumps and fans as called out m sequences and input/output summary 2. Diaphragm- operated SPDT snap switch with ranges from 05" W G to 12.0" W G for air Airflow switch shall be Powers SW141 or approved equal. 3 Liquid switch shall be PENN P74 or equal. G CURRENT SENSING RELAYS 1 Provide current sensing relays for status of fans or pumps as called out in sequences or input/output summary Provide with field adjustable current setpoint range. 2. Nielsen- Kuljian or approved equal. H. INTERPOSING RELAYS 1 Track mounted SPDT relays (or as required) for all interposing applications 2. IDEC or approved equal. I. PRESSURE SAFETY SWITCHES MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 9 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A,DO6NDU 1 1 Provide static pressure high limit switches as required by sequence of operation to sensing duct over pressure condition. Provide with adjustable setpoint. Provide with spare contacts for momtoring by DDC system. 2. Switch shall be suitable for duct mounting. Dwyer Series 3000, Ashcroft or approved equal. PART III EXECUTION 3 01 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. All setpoints, limits, etc. shall be adjustable through the central CPU or the laptop computer connected to the system B Sequence of operations are designed to illustrate basic control functions only Temperature Controls Contractor shall review drawings and submit complete installation data, including minor details, to provide proper operation m his submittal. Where an item differs from specifications, Controls Contractor shall submit manufacturer's recommendations subject to Architect's approval. C. HOA OVERRIDE /STATUS PANEL Provide HOA /status override panel including the following for all mechanical equipment control excluding terminal controllers. 1 Hand /Off /Auto selector switch for each binary output. 2 Hand /Auto variable positioner for each analog output. 3 Feedback to central panel for annunciation of hand position 4 LED status for each binary output and input. 5 Variable intensity LED status for each analog output. 6 Lock cover to prevent unauthorized access to switches. 7 Cover to include clear tamperproof front for viewing switch position and LED indication 3 02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION SYSTEMS AC-3E-11 A. Scope The supply au systems serve single -duct system with hot water reheat coils and one variable volume unit. Supply air system consists of supply fan, return fan, prefilters, final filters, outside dampers with flow measuring capabihties, return and relief air dampers, dx coohng coil and condenser System shall operate 24 -hours but shall be capable of a night set back operation. B Start-Up The supply fan shall be directly controlled by the controller according to the program established by the Owner The return fan shall be electrically interlocked to operate with the supply fan. Supply and return fans shall be controlled to start "unloaded." C. Basic Temperature Control. A temperature controller sensing fan discharge temperature shall maintain the supply air temperature setpoint by modulating the outside air return air relief air dampers and dx coil in sequence. Provide discharge temperature reset based on hi -low zone conditions. D On sensing a nse in temperature, controller shall first modulate the outside /relief air dampers open and the return air damper closed. A continued rise shall cause the direct expansion valve to modulate open. E. If the fans are running dunng unoccupied hours, a signal shall overnde damper modulation and close the outside /relief air dampers. Dunng occupied hours, an outside air temperature switch shall override the damper modulation signal and position the dampers to provide minimum ventilation only MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 10 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS ADDENDU twt F When outside air temperature is low enough to provide economizer cooling, a temperature reset program shall lower supply air temperature setpomt as low as possible to maintain a 76 °F (adjustable) return air temperature without offset. G Freeze Protection. A low temperature detector, manual reset type, with range adjustable between 10 °F and 50 °F shall be provided at the downstream side of the dx coil, set at 36 °F If temperature drops below 36 °F, low temperature detector shall stop the fan and outside air dampers shall close. H. Upon signal from duct smoke detector, fans shall shut down. Coordinate location of duct smoke detector with fire alarm and electrical contractors 3 03 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) TERMINAL UNIT CONTROL {TU -1 A. A room temperature sensor shall maintain setpoint by modulating the normally closed damper between rrunimum and maximum volume positions through a termmal control unit (TCU) mounted on the VAV terminal. Each room sensor shall include a switch to initiate override of unoccupied mode of operation. B Upon call for room heating, the damper will modulate to the minimum volume position and the zone heating coil shall be modeluted as stated below 3 04 ZONE RE -HEAT COIL CONTROL RH A. Provide two -way control valve, unless otherwise noted on the drawings, in the hot water supply line to each zone heating coil which shall be modulated by its room thermostat to maintain setpoint temperature. B Provide three -way control valve in the hot water supply line to each zone heating coil located at end of supply air duct which shall be modulated by its room thermostat to maintain setpoint temperature and also maintain hot water system flow 3 05 COMBINATION SMOKE/FIRE DAMPERS A. Smoke Damper Control. Actuators shall be controlled by fire alarm system specified in Division 16 3 06 ELEVATOR PRESSURIZATION FANS {PF -1 AND PF -2} A. Elevator Pressurization Fan Control. Fan shall be controlled by the fire alarm system specified in Divisionl6. 3 07 ROOFTOP EXHAUST FANS {EF- 3E -1A, 1B, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10) A. Toilet Exhaust Fan. Toilet exhaust fan shall be started through the time switch specified for the supply and return fans. 3 08 ROOFTOP EXHAUST FANS {EF -3E -1, 5) A. Toilet Exhaust Fan. Toilet exhaust fan are existing to remain or relocated as indicated. Existing control sequence shall remain for these fans. Extend existing controls as required to relocated fan relay location. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 09 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 15900 PAGE 11 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS ADENoUM 1 A. CONTROL WIRING 1 All line voltage wiring and low voltage wiring in exposed areas shall be run in EMT, conduit or wiremold. Wiring run exposed in finished areas shall be in wiremold. 2. Wiring shall be in accordance with the "Electncal" section of these specifications, Section 16000, and all applicable codes. Wiring within concealed, accessible spaces may be run with plenum -rated cable as allowed by local codes. 3 If utilized in lieu of conduit plenum -rated cables shall be run in an orderly manner, tied and bundled every 3 feet on average. B LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION 1 Identify all equipment and panels. Identification shall be with labels describing equipment and panel use and function. 2. Labels shall be engraved with contrasting text using bakehte, plastic or metal matenal. Labels shall be permanently glued or mechanically fastened. 3 All wires and cables shall be identified with permanent markers at each end. The wire designator shall match those on the shop and mstallation drawmgs. C. GENERAL 1 Provide and install devices, relays, switches, thermostats, sensors, dampers, conduit, wiring, and tubing to provide a complete temperature regulation and control operation system. All wiring shall be run in concealed areas where possible. Where necessary to be exposed it shall be installed in a workmanlike manner 2. Contractor is responsible for providing a complete and operational system as called out in the sequence of operation and/or in the input/output summary and/or the mechanical/electrical drawings for this project. Any item referenced in one part of the system documentation but not hsted elsewhere shall be covered under contractors pricing (i.e. damper called out in sequence but not indicated on drawings) D OUTSIDE COMMISSIONING AGENT 1 Contractor is required to provide a completely installed and commissioned DDC control system as outlined in previous portions of this specification. 2. At the Owner's option an outside commissioning agent may be retained to insure mechanical system compliance with specifications. The control system contractor shall have the following responsibilities under the scope of this contract: a. Provide submittal and/or as -built documentation. b Participate m specified job acceptance test with owner's representative. c. Provide specified owner training. d. Perform all system startup and commissioning procedures as required and described previously by the specification. e. Respond to project punch list and correct any system deficiencies. 3 Any additional training, documentation, software, on -site or modem assistance, system functionality or general project management required in support of a commissioning process not specified as part of the Contract Documents shall be considered work outside of this contract. END OF SECTION 15900 B A 1 1 PA 16 PATIENT ROOM J. 18 fl x: �2 3/4 I TOILET 15A I 1: 7 -1 fi. Arm—I I 1 c§1 1 1 /4" li la t;ir r t- 1 ttig) 5 J 32 PAR' 'H_RD EDOR PANS PP NG/FLIVB SCALE: 1/8"=t--0" O MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON 2505 Third Avenue Suite Seattle WA 98121 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 F 12 13 HC TOIL. ACTIVITY/ i DINING ROOM(' HCTOIL 1/4 6 \,‘..1 33 17 I 1 1/2" Transitional Care Unit Remodel 4 PATIENT ROOM 34 7 MEMORIAL HOS/4 PROJECT RAWER: 9511040 DESCRPT1Ott ADDENDUM 1 219 REFERENCE DRAWING M-4 DATE 11 NOVEMB ER 1996 MSK. 100 o PATIENT u ROOM j 12 M A H L U M 2505 Third Avenue Suite IgNORDFORS Seattle WA 98121 McKINLEY 206 441 4151 GORDON 206 441 0478 F 9 HC TOIL. 13(. 10 r R 1 CORRIDOR! 36 PATIEN *s\-\ ROOM es 8 219 1/" TOIL. 9 4) 26 0 Transitional Care Unit Remodel 1"HW DN 1 1/2"CW DN MEMORIAL HOSJ;ii A b. AUTO". .'114M=" PATIEN1\, HC ROOM ROC 25 t 10 PARTA 'FIRD E.00R PANS P:P:NG/P.,MB \G SCALE: 1/8"4-0" PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DSCRPTIONt ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING: M-4 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 MSK. 101 2 "W UP 1 1/2 VI :UP 1 #U 2 "W UP 1 1 2'V UP 2 "W UP 1 1 /2' Vlj UP (NP) 4x8 UP TO 3RD FLOOR PROVIDE FIRE DA PER AT FLOOR PENETIATION r44J 1, 2 "CW 4 "W (JE1 1"HW UP 1 1 /2" W UP Y• 11} 2"W, 3/4"HW 3 /4 "CW UP 1 1 /2" CW 1"HW 1 1 /2 "CW 8x6 U PROVI[ AT FL( [II' r Ar5 PAR A_ SECO\J FOOR PA\ MECH. SCALE: 1/8 =1' -0" o pt IhEfvIOWA( HOSP/Jg PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 M A M L U M 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 i DESORPTION ADOBDUM 1 N O R D F O R S Seattle W A 9 8 1 2 1 1 REFIRE a DRAWNG: M-2 M c K I N L E Y 206 4 4 1 4 1 5 1 Transitional Care Unit DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 GORDON 2 0 6 441 0 4 7 8 F Remodel MSK: 102 W &HWU HW L. A -10x14 UP ,TO 3RD FLOOR PROVIDE FIRE DAMPER AT FLOOR PENETRATION r 14x10 D AN TO 1ST LOOR 1/2 1,1" UP f UP TO 3RD FLOOR PROVIDE FIRE DAMPER AT FLOOR PENETRATION .3 AF:Al. SECOND EDOR EA\ MECH. :ALE: 1/8"4-0" ,opt *MORAL 80$ 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 MAHLUM 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 DESGRFT1Ott ADDIMUM 1 liNORDFORS Seattle WA 98121 REFERENCE DRAWING: M-2 McKINLEY 206 441 4151 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 Transitional Care Unit GORDON 206 441 0478F Remodel M.% 103 4 VTR (GRID 11) IC 0 _E ROOM #7 R SER JAGRAM CALE: NONE (HC TO LET #13 S M.) M A H L U M Fr N O R D F O R S M c K 1 N L E Y GORDON 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 Seattle WA 98121 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 F ocit IIIEfdORUI HOS Transitional Care Unit Remodel PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRPTIOR ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWIC M-8 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 MSK: 104 M A H L U M &NORDFORS M c K 1 N L E Y GORDON C 0._E ROOM #26 R.SER JAGRAM :ALE: NONE 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 Seattle WA 98121 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 F ,01C MEMORIAL HOS jgl Transitional Care Unit Remodel PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DES(RPT1OR ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING: M-8 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 MSK. 105 -IC ROOM #33 R:SER D:AGRAM KALE: NONE K, CORAL HON/ PRO)FCT NUMBER: 95110.00 A H L U M 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 4I WA m x. DESCRIPTOR ADDENDUM 1 W✓.W r OM WW N O R D F O R S Seattle W A 9 8 1 2 1 REFERENCE DRAMING: M 8 M c K I N L E Y 2 0 6 4 41 4 1 5 1 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 Transidonal Care Udt GORDON 2 0 6 441 0478 F MSIC. 106 Remodel MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL SECTION 16781 PAGE 1 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 1 1 DESCRIPTION A The work includes furnishing and installing all cable devices and connectors necessary to extend the the existing television distribution system The expanded system shall be complete and ready to use The system shall include all amplifiers, power supplies cable outlets attenuators and all other parts necessary for the distribution of the TV and FM signals B The Contractor shall show satisfactory evidence, upon request that he maintains a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service to the system including standard replacement parts Contractor shall be prepared to offer a service contract for the maintenance of this system after the guarantee period C The Contractor shall construct the system following best engineering techniques for continuous operation in accordance with applicable codes and safety precautions D All television system equipment shall be supplied and installed by an authorized factory distributor who shall be a licensed and bonded television contractor holding a valid Washington State Electrical Contractor's license E Coordinate with the television set supplier for proper remote control wiring connections 1 2 SYSTEM FUNCTIONS A The system shall distribute television FM and in -house originated signals to all TV outlets to permit simple connection of EIA standard television receivers The system shall provide distribution of all the existing off the -air TV channels from the existing head end equipment B The system shall deliver at all outlets all monochrome and NTSC color television signals without introducing noticeable affect on intelligence and color fidelity 1 The distribution system shall provide for ready attachment of RF monitor /TV receivers at any outlet and at any time without additional auxiliary equipment 2 The distribution system shall be operative at all times in such a manner that it is not subject to possible human error during the course of attachment or detachment of equipment at any outlet C The system shall deliver at all television outlets a minimum signal level of 10 db above 1 000 microvolts across 75 OHM impedance on each channel at each television outlet The system VSWR shall not exceed 1 4 1 D Origination of CCTV programming shall be accomplished by connecting a suitable CCTV camera chain to any TV outlet in the system and shall not require switching of any type in the 16781 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL distribution system It shall be possible to simultaneously originate CCTV signals from rooms connected to the same distribution leg F The system and all equipment shall be designed and rated for 24 hours a day continuous operation All active components shall be of solid state design G The system shall be designed to prevent direct pickup of signals from the building structure PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURER All components shall be manufactured by RCA Blonder- Tongue Electronics Company or approved equal Blonder- Tongue catalogue numbers are used for reference unless manufacturer is identified 2 2 GENERAL Conform with the requirements of Section 16700 2 3 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A System coaxial cable shall be 82 channel 75 ohm 18 gauge solid conductor duofoil and brand shield RG 6/U type cable Standard cable 507 -6FA All cable routed in cable tray or routed above the accessible ceiling shall be extinguishing as defined by NFPA 701 Section 6 -1 by the match flame test Belden 9248 B Coaxial cables shall be run in continuous lengths terminations and no splices shall be permitted in C All cables terminating at amplifiers or splitters as to function and destination SECTION 16781 PAGE 2 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM except for any run shall be tagged D All coaxial cable used in the system shall be sweep tested for transmission and structural return loss and be so certified in writing by the cable manufacturer Transmission sweep tests shall establish conformance to guaranteed loss values from 20 -108 MHz 174 -216 MHz and 470 -890 MHz Structural return loss tests by sweep method shall show a minimum return loss of 26 dB RL VHF 16 dB RL UHF as compared to a fixed 75 -ohm reference from 20 -108 MHz 174- 216 HMz and from 470 -890 MHz 2 4 DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER A Broad band amplifiers shall be provided for VHF /FM band Unit shall be of solid state design and contain its own power supply Model MVB -45 B Amplifier shall consist of independent high and low band input amplifiers independent high and low band gain controls The main amplifier shall have three stages of RF amplification C Amplifier shall have switchable combined or split inputs for use with single (low band FM high band) antenna or for individual low band and high band antennas Amplifier shall contain a switchable FM bandstop filter in the input circuit to prevent FM signal overload 16781 2 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SECTION 16781 PAGE 3 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM D Amplifier shall meet gain of 45 dB in all bands noise figure at full gain of 6 1 dB (LB) 6 7 dB (HB) a gain control range of 18 dB; output capability (7ch -46 dB crossmode) Flat 54 dBmV, 6 db block tilt 56 dBmV Operating temperature range shall be -20 degrees C to +65 degrees C E Amplifier dimensions shall be 19" in length 3- 15/32" in width and 2 -5/8" in height with mounting brackets to fit standard E1A rack 2 5 LINE SPLITTERS A Two -way line splitters shall have a flat frequency response over the entire operating band from 12 MHz to 300 MHz and from 470 to 890 MHz The unit shall be of the hybrid design with a 75 ohm match of 23 0 dB RL minimum on all inputs and outputs Output isolation shall be not less than 23 0 dB VHF 18 0 dB UHF B Two -way line splitters shall have a signal loss of not more than VHF 3 7 dB UHF 4 0 dB at each output All unused outputs on the splitters shall be terminated with 75 ohm terminations C Four -way line splitters shall have a flat frequency response over the entire operating band from 12 MHz to 216 MHz and from 470 to 890 MHz The unit shall be of the hybrid design with a 75 ohm match of 24 0 dB RL minimum on all input and outputs Output isolation shall be not less than 16 0 dB VHF 11 5 dB UHF D Four -way line splitters shall have a signal loss of not more than VHF 6 2 dB UHF 6 7 dB E Blonder Tongue Model MS -2V /V or MS -4U /V 2 6 ATTENUATORS Attenuators with DC to 890 MHz passband and 75 ohms input- output impedance shall be installed to equalize all signals prior to input to amplifier The amount of attenuation shall be determined at field during system set -up 2 7 TAPOFF INLINE Shall be single tap, back matched directional coupler type with brass 75 ohm, type F connections Band width shall be 5 0 -400 MHz Tapoff shall meet or exceed the following specifications Insertion loss 1 2 db maximum Tap isolation 24 0 db minimum Return loss 16 0 db minimum Blonder Tongue Model 4488 or 4888 series 2 8 TV OUTLETS A Television Signal Outlets Shall be mounted in 4" square 2" deep minimum flush mounted outlet boxes with barrier between the 110 volt receptacle and the TV signal cable Provisions shall be incorporated in the network to prevent 60 Hz AC or DC feedback into the distribution lines 16781 3 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SECTION 16781 PAGE 4 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM B Outlets shall be designed to cover a frequency range of 10 MHz to 500 MHz Insertion loss shall not exceed 1 0 db at any frequency within the designated frequency range Outlets shall be back matched from 10 to 500 MHz Tap isolation shall be 16 db minimum C Outlets shall have "F" type connector and shall include a 5 PIN DIN receptacle for remote control applications Blonder Tongue V- 5- DC D Coverplates shall match those specified in Section 16140 with standard double duplex configuration 2 9 TV REMOTE CONTROL STATION TV Remote Control Station Provide a two gang outlet box with pushbutton and volume controller to turn set on on -off change channels and adjust the speaker volume GTE Sylvania model HWT 6098BA chassis with a HFT6193BA faceplate 2 10 CONNECTOR A Connectors shall be brass, bronze or silver plated B Connector threads shall be cut to assure good contact Cast or pressed threads shall not be permitted 2 11 DROP CABLES A Provide coaxial cable with type F connector at wall outlet and appropriate connector at TV set B Provide control cable with 5 pin DIN connector at wall outlet and appropriate 6 pin connector at TV set for remote on -off station selection and volume control PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL 3 2 Raceways shall be sized as follows unless shown to be larger on the drawings Cables shall be installed to avoid sharp bends or physical distortion Protect cables over sharp edges PART 4 TESTING Up to 3 television outlets 1/2" trade size Up to 5 television outlets 3/4" trade size 4 1 TESTING On completion of the installation of the system the Contractor supplying this equipment shall provide a qualified technician to perform the following tests A The overall system shall be swept tested from the head -end location to the last outlet in each distribution leg of the system 16781 4 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SECTION 16781 PAGE 5 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM B A certification shall be made to the fact that no frequency dropouts are present in the system which would affect any of the VHF channels C Using a return loss bridge the Contractor shall certify that the return loss of the system shall be a minimum of 20 db down D The Architect shall be notified forty -eight hours prior to testing so that he may at his discretion furnish representatives to witness the test procedure and results E A report of the testing shall be submitted on all the above required data, prior to final acceptance Copies shall be included in the Operation Instructions and Maintenance Manuals The report shall include the names of the individuals performing and witnessing the test and the manufacturer's name and model number of the equipment used in the test A block diagram of the test set -up for each test shall be included END OF SECTION 16781 5 3M1' -26 28,30 �9 l it Iim 8 P3 1 as MI to BrIE NT Fw 28 I 6 4 0 28 i I u! HC T J b f F3 T O L ROOM 28 'J 1 24'1 b F I C"1 Project r(FN) 1 s' Adi gh,DPIQ o C:f 11 L c d e 136 30 All' TOIL d,e 7 NT ROOM r 22 L 2$ d,el S iuu w n conao NG Lg1 ESLCf15CJLL= TN5OmmaGoo5IPICAnON Colauwns 720dJK 8;x WAY 7[1100 EWArit WA oe1o1 -1e63 FAx -oa54 Noe 20e- 5474055 _9 PATIENT ROOM 18 I 9 9 30 1 de1 c 2 A ri 8 r I J PATIE Z1 I l 2• O r L r J d, 30 PATIENT ROOM 0 0o b Drawing Title PARTIAL LIGHTING PLAN OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL TRANSITIONAL CARE REMODEL Job No 6807 Reference Drawing No E-4 19 1 V; ►i1 2g o 9 TO ILET 30 0 I ,sa I FS PATIENT ROOM 1 20 1 28 H o PROVIDE PRESCOLITE SERIES 4020 -13 W/ (1) 13W COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMP OR APPROVED EQUAL. M4 T HORIZONTALLY. Scale Drown By Checked Date N Dwg No Page 1/8 I -0 RPR By JNL 11/08/96 E-4 1 of ddd aweuJasn 97 11 :60 '96 /B0 /1i a4a0 b3 \OOd3 \L099 aweu 6utMeJO Drawing name J: \6807\CADD\E6, Date 11/08/96, 09: 08: 52 Username RPR Jo 6iddl 0 1 8/1 6od t 9 -3 oN 6MG 96/90/tt a}oa Ae Paoa43 lNr ,9 uMOJQ a1O S DNIT 9 -3 o 6uIMOJQ aouaJajaa L089 ON qo 130ON3d R1V3 1VNO I 1 I SNVW 1V1 I dSOH 1V1801^131^1 O I dWX10 13aroJ NVld SN011V3IN(1WW00 1V118Vd awl 6u MO J I I J 'Et sz 1 1 :7 010011 1■3I1Vd 7 1-16a, TIVOtr- L gao0- c9090z ZNCHd snoo-coraoz XV3 [831.10196 VM 'I LLVi4 PM l LXM3 AVM3Ar OEL S£ I C 1 1 ;IP I W00 391/1101S 1N311Vd 113MOHS r�xr, Drawing name E6, Date 11/08/96 09:23:03 Username RPR ;D a6od 9 -3 oN 6M0 96/80/ L l a +Do A8 Pamoa48 lNr ?Jc12:1 Ae UMDJQ 0— 1 2/ 1 aID s 4i 4: 9 -3 o 6u!MDJ4 aouaia+a8 L099 oN Qor 13000138 3d`d0 1VNO 1 11 SNV211 1V1 I dSOH 1V 1210W31A1 0 I dIAR10 +'arDJd NVld SNOI1VOINMIA100 1VI121Vd a 1 6 u i MDJ° 0 CD CD 1A1002i 1N311dd 11V 1#03 1V31dA1 I _1V00132! 38 01 0INd3131 ONIISIX3 I 09+ 1 _c 111Q9o-1..9o9oz VMOMd 1.000-t009oZ XV9 [001.10196 WA 'Tun= 0011 mum VM3AflOOZL LIN c. MouvaoWM•O3 Mona I :J ICMYW73 DN T'dVcS 1 i 17 DI /AW ADY O® I so I I 1 91•1If OH 4 ULM y 4 .e ACT rv Il r ky A 5 i i 6 Drawing Tit PARIAI. CAIMUNICATIONS PLAN Scale 1 /B I 0 Pro OLYMPIC MEMORIAL I AL HOSPITAL TRANSITIONAL CARE REMOD Drawn By RPR Job No 6807 Reference Drawing No E -6 Checked By JNL SPARLING Aamomyarm A 7siswea.. *e saean.wW•eueawe• w N/aaeu 7 Date Mai bwg No E -6.3 Page of EF -3E -5 c L 2 -22 Drawing ri t le PARTIAL ROOF PLAN OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL TRANSITIONAL CARE REMODEL Project Job No 6807 1 1 EF -3Er2 18 -3M2-2D, Reference Drawing No VIA CONTROLS SAP aLQSICAL E/ISNOWN L LIGHTERS OMEN 720XUVEWAT TAME 1100 SEATTLE. WA 06101 -1663 FAX 206667-0564 RHONE 206. 667-0555 3M2 -1416 EF- 3E -1A-- 16 Y Q9i EF -3E -4 1 Date Page ED Scale Drawn By Checked By 11/08/96 E -7 1 Dwg No 0 1/8 I -0 RPR JNL of ddd aweuuas0 55.01 :60 '96/80/11 a1e0 L3 \00d3 \L089 .aweu 6utMeJO MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL Date: Tuesday November 12, 1996 NOTICE TO ALL CONTRACTORS. SUBCONTRACTORS. AND SUPPLIERS This addendum is considered a part of the contract documents. VOLUME 1 PROJECT MANUAL Section Description 00300 BID FORM Delete 03300 Bid Form and replace with revised 03300 Bid Form, Addendum 1 as attached. 01030 BASE BID AND ALTERNATES Delete 01030 Base Bid and Alernates and rewlace with revised 01030 Base Bid and Altemates, Addendum 1 as attached. 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE From the Office of: MAHLUM NORDFORS MCKINLEY GORDON 2505 Third Avenue, Suite 219 Seattle, WA 98121 SECTION 0 0 9 01 PAGE 1 ADDENDUM 1 Insert Paragraph 2.3 C as follows: A. Trowelable Underlayment Compound: Fine textured latex concrete mortar compound for building slopes to drain. 1 Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Raeco R 25 b Ardex SD -P Instantpatch c. Embeco T -430, Master Builders. d. Thoro Underlayment Trowel Grade, Thoro System Products. e. Thorite, Thoro System Products. 2 Sub -Floor Primers, Sealers, and Accelerators: As recommended by underlayment manufacturer Insert Paragraph 3.2.A.1 as follows: 1 Chip scour acid -etch, or otherwise roughen existing substrate as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Replace Paragraph 3.9.A with the follows: A. Concrete: Provide reinforcement and concrete fill at all abandoned penetrations through existing structural slab. 1 Install steel plate to underside of existing opening and permanently fasten with anchor bolts. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 2. Pre -drill and epoxy reinforcing bars into edges of existing penetrations larger than eighteen inches. Tie ends of bars together at center of opening. Replace Paragraph 3.9.B with the follows: B. Underlayment Provide underlayment at troughs left in existing flooring by demolished walls, depressions in existing flooring around core drilled penetrations, at areas of broken or uneven floors, at sloped floors at shoewer rooms, and as noted in Volume 2 Project Drawings. 1 Provide self leveling underlayment where required to provide smooth level surface for floor finish materials. 2. Provide trowelable underlayment where required for slopes, deep depressions, and feather edges. 08800 GLAZING Add Section 08800 GLAZING in entirety 09666 SHEET VINYL FLOOR Add Paragraph 2.3 as follows: 2 3 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SECTION 00901 PAGE 2 ADDENDUM 1 A. Thin. load- bearing, flexible waterproofing system consisting of a self- curing liquid rubber polymer which is cold applied with an integral reinforcing fabric to form a seamless light duty waterproof membrane. B. Available Products: 9235 waterproof membrane by Laticrete Intemational, Inc. Add Paragraph 3.2.F as follows: F Apply waterproof membrane per manufacturer's directions at sloping floors to drain in HC Toilet/Shower rooms. DIV 15 MECHANICAL Add Addendum 1 Division 15 as provided by FSi Consulting Engineers, attached. 16781 TELEVISION SYSTEM Add Section 16781 TELEVISION SYSTEM in entirety VOLUME 2 PROJECT DRAWINGS Drawing Description A 2 5 FINISH PLAN AND FINISH SCHEDULE AI the following remark to the finish schedule at room 37 Elevator Lobby 11 Wood trim to match Corridor 36 extends to underside of soffit only See Interior Elevation 5/A 5.2 for extents, typical. A 3 1 EXTERIOR ELEVATION Add Type B window unit designation per attached sketch ASK 106 A 4 1 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN Revise HC Toilet room 33 per attached sketch ASK 101 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 00901 PAGE 3 ADDENDUM 1 A 4 2 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN Revise HC Toilet rooms 13 17 and 26 per attached sketch ASK 102. A 5 1 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Revise HC Toilet rooms per attached sketch ASK 103. A 5 2 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Revise patient bedrooms per attached sketch ASK 105 A 6 1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN Revise ceilings at patient bedrooms and patient toilet rooms per attached sketch ASK 104 A 9 2 DETAILS Add Typical Floor Dram Detail per attached sketch ASK 107 M MECHANICAL Add Addendum 1 revisions to mechanical drawings as provided by FSi Consulting Engineers, attached. E -4 LIGHTING PLAN Revise ng fixture at patient room sinks as indicated on attached electrical sketch ESK-4 1 E -6 COMMUNICATIONS PLAN Provide electrical connection of additional smoke/fire dampers as indicated on attached electrical sketch ESK -6.1 Revise location of Nurse Call Toilet Emergency Station in HC Toilet 33 as indicated on attached sketch ESK -6.2 Add nurse call devices at Patient Room 34 as indicated on attached sketch ESK -6.3 E 7 ROOF PLAN Provide electrical connection of additional exhaust fan as indicated on attached electrical sketch ESK 7 1 Q 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 00901 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKI \LEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL FART 1 GENERAL 1 1 THE PROJECT Olympic Memorial Hospital 3E Transitional Care Unit Remodel 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 1 2 THE DOCUMENTS 1 3 THE ARCHITECT Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon 2505 Third Avenue, Suite 219 Seattle, Washington 98121 PART 2 THE BID SECTION 00300 PAGE 1 BID FORM ADDENDUM 1 The plans and specifications are entitled Construction Documents for Olympic Memorial Hospital -3E Transitional Carc Unit Remodel To: Olympic Memorial Hospital 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 98362 Ladies and Gentlemen. 1/We have received the Project Specification for the project as identified above. I/We have also received Addenda Nos. and have included their provisions in my /our bid. I/We have attended the mandatory site inspection. Yes No (check one) I/We have examined both the documents and the site and fully understand the extent and nature of the work. Questions regarding the protect have been asked of the Architect during the bidding period. I/We submit the following bid. In submitting this bid, I/We agree: 1 To hold my /our bid open for sixty (60) days. 2. To accept the provisions of the Advertisement to Bid and the Instructions to Bidders regarding disposition of Bid Security 3 To enter into and execute a contract, if awarded on the basis of this bid and to furnish guarantee bonds in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions of this contract. 4 To accomplish the work in accordance with the contract documents. 5 To complete the work by the time specified in Section 01011 Contract Time and Sequence. 6 The bids are in accordance with Section 01030, Base Bid and Alternates. 7 I/We have attached to this bid the required Bid Security and Bidder Qualification Form. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKI \LEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIO \AL CARE UNIT REMODEL I/We will construct this project for the lump -sum price of None of the base bid or alternate prices include Washington State sales tax. Alternates (Not 11std). Alt. Descripuon Addiuon #1 Headwall Units at Patient Rooms S #2 Wood Veneer Soffits. #3 Vinyl Wallcovering at Patient Room walls S #4 Drapes and Valences S #5 Lavatories in HC Toilet Rooms S £uhcontractori I/We intend to use the following subcontractors for any and all portions of the work awarded: HVAC Subcontractor Plumbing Subcontractor Electrical Subcontractor Roofing Subcontractor In addition to the above, the following subcontractors have subcontract amounts equal to more than ten percent of the bid amount. DOLLARS (S NOTE. If such subcontractors are not listed below a list of their names must be submitted within one hour of the published bid submittal ume. Failure to provide this list shall render the bid void. SECTION 00300 PAGE 2 BID FORM ADDENDUM 1 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLE\ GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT RE\1ODFL Signatures (Date) (Signature) (Title) (Legal name of person, corporation, or firm submitting bid) (State Contractor's License Number) 01996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon SECTION 00300 PAGE3 BID FORM ADDENDUM 1 (Seal If bid is by a corporation, signaturL must be as required in Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders.) END OF SECTION 00300 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT RE\IODLL PART 1 GENERAL., 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section 1 2 REFERENCES A. Comply with Section 00030 Invitation to Bid, and Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders. B. Each bidder shall state in his bid, in the spaces provided on the Bid Form (Section 00300) the following: 1 Base Bid. Bid for performing the work of the base bid as described below 2 Alternate Bids: Bid for performing additional items of work, omitting items of work, substituting materials or construction for those specified in the base bid, all as described below State the amount to he added to or deducted from the base bid. C No sales tax shall be included for any of the bid prices. D The above terns are used as defined in Section 00100, Instructions to Bidders. 1 3 DESCRIPTION A. Base bid is the sum proposed to perform all general, mechanical, and electrical work as specified and shown in Divisions 0 through 16 (specifications) and Divisions A, M, and E (project drawings) also referred to as the contract documents. B The following items are excluded from the above base bid 1 Work included in the following additive or deductive alternates 2. Work specifically shown or noted as not in contract (NIC) 1 4 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES SECTION 01030 PAGE1 I3ASE BID AND ALTERNATES ADDENDUM 1 A. An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form (Section 00300) for certain construction activities defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from base bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the contract documents. 1 5 ALTERNATES A. Coordination. Coordinate related work and modify or adjust adjacent work as necessary to ensure that work affected by each accepted alternate is complete and fully integrated into the project. B Notification. Immediately following the award of the contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved notification of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or defend for consideration at a later date. Include a complete descripuon of negotiated modifications to alternates. C Schedule 1 A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this section Specification sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate 2 Include as part of each alternate miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the alternate MAHLUM NORDF'ORS McKI \LEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) SECTION 01030 PAGE 2 BASE BID AND ALTERNATES ADDENDUM 1 EA 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL A. Alternate bids may or may not be accepted by Owner B. Bid prices for alternates shall include adjusunents in the work of all materials and trades as may be necessary because of additions, deletions, or substitutions. C Rough -ins and all other provisions required for the future installation of items of work omitted in base bid or in deductive alternates shall remain in the contract unless otherwise stated. Refer to drawings or specifications for explanations of cut off points of work remaining. D Work which may be added in alternates shall become part of and be govemed by the provisions of the specification sections for like materials and construction. E. In alternate descriptions, reference to architectural drawings shall be interpreted as all inclusive reference to any other project drawings showing the work. 3 2 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate #1 Headwall Units at Patient Rooms 1 Provide 06400 headwall units at all Patient Rooms. 2. If this alternate is not accepted, base bid provides for 06400 headwall units at Patient Rooms 15 20 21 and 22 only Gas outlets, electrical receptacles, and accessones in Patient Rooms 12 14 16 18, 19 25 27 and 34 shall be flush mounted directly into wall At back to back headwalls, provide 09255 6 inch studs at wall between the adjacent Patient Bedrooms. B Alternate #2 Wood Veneer Soffits. 1 Provide 09255 framing and 06200 wood veneer soffits as shown above Patient Room doors, Nurse Station counter and entry doors to wing. 2. If this alternate is not accepted, base bid provides for 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings. C Altemate #3 Vinyl Wallcovering at Patient Room walls. 1 Provide 09950 Vinyl Wallcovering at Patient Room walls as shown in Volume 2 Project Drawings, Finish Schedule. 2 If this alternate is not accepted, provide 09900 paint at Patient Room walls in lieu of vinyl wallcovering D Altemate #4 Drapes and Valences 1 Provide 12541 Draperies and 06200 Wood Valence at exterior windows where indicated in Volume 2, Project Drawings, Room Finish Plan and Schedules and Interior Elevations. 2. If this alternate is not accepted, Base Bid does not include 12541 Draperies and 06200 Wood Valences. E. Alternate #5 Lavatories at HC Toilet Rooms 13 17 26 and 33 1 Provide 15000 lavatory and all associated plumbing, and 10800 paper towel dispenser and mirror at HC Toilet Rooms 13 17 26 and 33 as shown in ASK s 101 102, and 103 Addendum 1 2 If this alternate is not accepted, Base Bid does not include 15000 lavatory and all associated plumbing and 10800 paper towel dispenser and mirror at HC Toilet Rooms 13 17 26 and 33 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLE1 GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinlcv Gordy n SECTION 01030 PAGE 3 BASE BID AND ALTERNATES ADDENDUM 1 END OF SECTION 01030 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 1 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 FART 1 GENERAL, 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1 Insulated window units. 2. Vision lights in doors. 3 Interior relites 1 3 DEFINITIO \S A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glazing standard. B Deterioration of Coated Glass. Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's directions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. C Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's directions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standard. D Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use due to causes other than glass breakage and improper practices for maintaining, and cleaning insulating glass. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on the interior surfaces of glass. Improper practices for maintaining and cleaning glass do not comply with the manufacturer's direcuons. 1 4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable) without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction. B Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on Drawings are for detailing only Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in- service conditions. Provide glass lights for the various size openings in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat treated) to meet or exceed the following criteria. 1 Minimum glass thickness, nominally of lights in exterior walls is 0.23 inch. 2. Tinted and heat absorbing glass thicknesses for each tint indicated are the same throughout Project. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 2 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 3 Minimum glass thicknesses of lights, whether composed of annealed or heat treated glass, are selected so the worst -case probability of failure does not exceed the following: a. 8 lights per 1000 for lights set vertically or not over 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. Determine minimum thickness of monolithic annealed glass according to ASTM E 1300 For other than monolithic annealed glass, determine thickness per glass manufacturer's standard method of analysis including applying adjustment factors to ASTM E 1300 based on type of glass. C Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass- framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on materials actual surface temperatures due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1 Temperature Change (Range) 120 deg F (67 deg C) ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 1 5 SUBMITTALS A. General. Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated. C Samples for verification purposes of 12 -inch- square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12 inch -long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. D Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1 Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturers permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program of a recognized certification agency or independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Maintenance data for glass and other glazing materials to be included in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1 FGMA Publications: 'FGMA Glazing Manual 2. LSGA Publications: 'LSGA Design Guide 3 SIGMA Publications: TM 3000 Vertical Glazing Guidelines B. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97 1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. 1 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLE1 GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 3 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 C Fire Resistive Glazing Products for Door Assemblies: Products idenucal to those tested per ASTM E 152, labeled and listed by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authoriues having jurisdiction D Insulating Glass Certification Program Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component light of units with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing agency indicated below 1 Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI) 3 National Certified Testing Laboratories (NCTL) E. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project with a record of successful in- service performance. F Single- Source Responsibility for Glass. Obtain glass from one source for each product indicated below 1 Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036) type and class indicated. 2. Insulating glass of each construction indicated. 3 Heat- treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048) condition indicated. G Single- Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessones from one source for each product and installation method indicated. 1 7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1 8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing matenals manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain frost, condensation, or other causes. 1 9 WARRANTY A. General. Warranties specified in this Article shall not depnve the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. D Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass: Submit written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass units that deteriorate as defined in 'Definitions article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site within specified warranty period indicated below Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. 1 Warranty Period: Manufacturer s standard but not less than 10 years after date of Substantial Completion MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 4 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products. Subject to compliance with requirements products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1 Ford Glass Division 2. Guardian Industries Corp. 3 LOF Glass, Inc. 4 PPG Industries, Inc 2 2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat) Class as indicated below and Quality q3 (glazing select) 1 Class 1 (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B Refer to requirements for sealed insulating glass units for performance characteristics of assembled units composed of tinted glass, coated or uncoated, relative to visible light transmittance, U- values, shading coefficient, and visible reflectance. 2 3 HEAT TREATED FLOAT GLASS A. Uncoated, Clear Heat Treated Float Glass ASTM C 1048 Condition A (uncoated surfaces) Type I (transparent glass, flat) Class 1 (clear) Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as indicated below 2 Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated. C Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide heat treated glass by one of the following companies. 1 AFG Industries Inc. 2. Guardian Industries Corp 3 PPG Industries, Inc. 4 Tempglass. 5 Viracon Inc. 2 5 CERAMIC COATED SPANDREL GLASS PRODUCTS A. Ceramic- Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048 Condition B (spandrel glass, one surface ceramic coated) Type I (transparent glass, flat) Class 1 (clear) Quality q3 (glazing select) and complying with requirements specified including those in Ceramic Coated Spandrel Glass Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section. B Fallout Resistance: Provide spandrel units identical to those passing fallout resistant test for spandrel glass specified in ASTM C 1048 2 7 WIRED GLASS A. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036 Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat) Class 1 (clear) Quality q8 (glazing); 6 mm (0.23 inch) thick. of form and mesh pattern indicated below 1 Polished Wired Glass. Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), and as follows: MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 5 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 b Mesh m2 (square) B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering wired glass products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to the following companies. 1 Polished Wired Glass: a. Ashai Glass Co. b Central Glass Co. Ltd. c Nippon Sheet Glass Ltd. d. Pilkington Sales (North America) Ltd. 2 4 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Preaisemblcd units consisting of organically sealed lights of glass separated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and with other requirements indicated, including those in Insulating Glass Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section 1 For properties of individual glass lights making up units, refer to requirements specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to types, classes, kinds, and conditions of glass products comprising lights of insulating glass units. 2. Provide heat treated, coated float glass of kind indicated or if not otherwise indicated, Kind HS (heat strengthened) where recommended by manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements specified and Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is designated or required. 3 U- values are expressed as Btu /hour x sq ft. x deg F 2 5 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1 Compatibility Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 2. Suitability Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated and conditions existing at ume of Installation. 3 Colors. Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: a. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer s full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer s standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that comply with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referencing ASTM classifications for Type Grade, Class and Uses. C Glazing Sealant: Use for all wet glazing, except as otherwise specified: 1 `999 Glazing Sealant by Dow Corning Corp 2 `Silglaze N2501 Sealant or `Gesil N26(X) Sealant by General Electrical Co. 3 `Rhodorsil 5C' by Rone Poulenc Inc. Princeton, NJ MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY CORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 6 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 NOTE. Backup material shall be compatible with sealant. D Closed Cell Foam Tape: Continuous extruded expanded foam neoprene with a Shore A durometer hardness and profile adequate to fulfill the overall performance requirements specified and complying with ASTM C509 Type II Provide adhesive on one side. E. Butyl Glazing Tape Reinforced: A preformed, nonsagging, nonoxidizing, nonstaining butyl rubber tape with core reinforcement, one of the following: 1 `Tremco 440' by Tremco Mfg Co. 2 `Extru -Seal B -44 by Pecora Chemical Corp 3 `DAP Butyl Rubber Tape by DAP Inc. 2 6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General. Provide products of material size and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer C Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5 D Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lights in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking) 2 7 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements. PART 3 FA "I TION. 3 1 EXAMINATION A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following: 1 Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3 Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4 Effective sealing between joints of glass- framing members. B Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 7 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 3 2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates. 3 3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C Protect glass from edge damage dunng handling and installation as follows: 1 Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label 2. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D Apply primers to point surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstrucuon sealant- substrate testing. E. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F Do not exceed edge pressures supulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as follows. 1 Locate spacers inside, outside and directly opposite each other Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements. 2 Provide 1/8 -inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern draw bow and similar characteristics. 3 4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed b) glass their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightlinc of stops. B. Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 8 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 C Where framing joints are vertical cover these points by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer E. Do not remove release paper from tape until dust before each lite is installed. G Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and Installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 3 6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers between glass Ines and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding Into glass channel weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. Install pressurized gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. 3 8 PROTECTION AND CLEANI \G A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter If despite such protection contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer C Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build -up of dirt, scum alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer D Remove and replace glass that is broken chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construcuon penod. E Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer 3 6 SCHEDULE A. Extent of Work 1 Provide glass and glazing throughout openings at windows, relights, sidelights, transoms, doorlights, vision panels, and other openings intended for or requiring glass. 2. Provide types of glass and glazing as scheduled herein and indicated on the drawings. 3 Where in conflict with this schedule provide the work that is the most expensive. B. At. Intenor Doors and Sidelights MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEN GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 9 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 1 At nonlabeled door openings, provide tempered glass throughout. 2 At labeled door openings, provide clear wire glass throughout. C Relights and Transoms 1 Provide tempered glass throughout, 1/4 inch thick. D Insulated Glass. Provide factory installed insulated glazing units at all vertical exterior windows. E. Where Glass is Shown on Drawings: Provide as shown except provide per this schedule in event of conflict. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKI \LEY CORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 10 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 PRIMARY CLEAR FLOAT GLASS DATA Class: Class 1 (clear) Thickness: 1/4 inch Visible Light Transmittance: 89% Visible Light Reflectance: 8% Shading Coefficient: 0 94 Solar Heat Gain Coefficient. 0 81 Quality Standard Product. PPG Clear Glass MAHLUM NORDFORS McK!NLEY GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 11 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 CERAMIC- COATED GLASS PRODUCT DATA SHEET Kind of Heat Treatment: Kind HS (heat strengthened) Thickness: 1/4 inch Location of Ceramic Coating: Third Surface Ceramic Coating Color Silver Pearl Quality Standard Product. PPG Spectraelad MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEI' GORDON SECTION 08800 PAGE 12 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 INSULATING GLASS DATA SHI:U' Classification of Units: Thickness: Air Space Width. Gas Filling: Sealing System Spacer Specifications: Thickness of each light. Uncoated Clear Indoor Light. Uncoated Clear Outdoor Light: Visible Light Transmittance. Visible Light Reflectance: Summer Daytime U- Value Winter Nighttime U- Value• Shading Coefficient: Class C, CB or CBA 1 inch 1/2 inch Fill air space with Argon Manufacturer's standard sealants Manufacturer's standard 1/4 inch Kind HS (heat strengthened) Conditiona A (uncoated) Class 1 (clear) float glass. Kind HS (heat strengthened) Conditiona A (uncoated) Class 1 (clear) float glass. 80% 15% 0 56 049 0 82 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON SECTIO\ 08800 PAGE 13 VALLEY MEDICAL CENTER CLINIC GLAZING AUBURN SOUTH ADDENDUM 1 INSULATING SPANDREL GLASS DATA SHEET Classificauon of Units: Class C CB or CBA Thickness: 1 inch Air Space Width. 1/2 inch Gas Filling: Fill air space with Argon Sealing System Manufacturer's standard sealants Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard Thickness of each light. 1/4 inch Ceramic Coated Indoor Light. Comply with requirements of specified for ceramic coated spandrel glass products. Ceramic- Coated Outdoor Light. Comply with requirements of specified for ceramic- coated spandrel glass products. Summer Daytime U- Value. 0 56 Winter Nighttime U -Value 0 49 Shading Coefficient: 0.82 0 1996 Mahlum Nordfors McKinley Gordon END OF SECTION 08800 &N A H L U M O R D F O R S c K I N L E Y O R D O N CORRDOR 36 VERIFY 15000 SHOWER ENCLOSURE ROUGH OPENING DIMENSIONS TYPICAL -Lo 1' 3 5y8' 1 4 -10 3/4 3 —4" 1 r- 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 S N a t t l P WA Q 1 2 1 206 441 4 1 51 2)6 441 047^ F [3:// /J'S i A 1 J HC tTOLET 1 I 313 7 VERIFY, PARTAL ENLARGED PLAN WEST 1/4" 1 —0" Transitional Care Unit Remodel rJ co 1 L N /BOTTOM OF T V ALCOVE 'ABOVE AT 6 —4 A.F F PATENT ROOM 34 SLOPE 03300 UNDERLAYMENT TO 15000 FLOOR DRAIN TYPICAL 09666 THRESHOLD TYPICAL PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESORPTION: ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING. A -4.1 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 ASK. 101 CLEAN UTILITY M 11 I 1 SLOPE 03300 UNDERLAYMENT TO 15000 FLOOR DRAIN TYPICAL PATENT ROOM 10265 CORNER GUARD TYPICAL M A H L U M N O R D F O R S M c K I N L E Y GORDON VERIFY 15000 SHOWER ENCLOSURE ROUGH OPENING DIMENSIONS TYPICAL 1505 Third Avenue Suite 219 SPactle WA q,,121 2U6 441 41`1 216 441 047c F HC Icy 01 3 �Iv I 1 r I� r 1 A 3 -1" .1' -3 1/2' VERIFY CORRDOR 36 i PAR AL ENLARGED PLAN EAST TOILET ROOM 17 SIMILAR TOILET ROOM 26 SIMILAR OPPOSITE 0,11110114L Transitional Care Unit Remodel PATENT ROOM 6;4 1/2' 09666 THRESHOLD TYPICAL 10265 CORNER GUARD TYPICAL NOTE. DIMENSIONS AND WALL TYPES SHOWN AT TOILET ROOM 13 SIMILAR AT TOILET ROOM 17 AND SIMILAR OPPOSITE AT TOILET ROOM 26 PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRPT1ON: ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING: A -4.2 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 ASK 102 e. &N 16000 UGHT SWITCH TYPICAL NORTH 10800 RECESSED SEAT COVER DISPENSER TYPICAL 16000 NURSE CALL TYPICAL 10800 SHELF TYPICAL M7 A H L U M O R D F O R S c K I N L E Y O R D O N N N SOAP DISPENSER (HO) TYPICAL 10800 MIRROR TYPICAL 10800 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER TYPICAL ■1. 10800/15000 FOLDING SHOWER SOUTH (ROOM 33 SIMILAR) HC TOILET 13 SHOWN 1/4 1 -0' HC TOILET 17 SIMILAR HC TOILET 26 SIMILAR OPPOSITE 2505 Third Avenue Suite 2I .:Pattie WA q 121 20b 441 4151 20h 441 047c F EAST (ROOM 33 SIMILAR OPPOSITE) 10800 RECESSED TOILET PAPER AND NAPKIN RECEPTACLE TYPICAL II. 10800 GRAB BAR TYPICAL p i 10800/15000 GRAB BAR TYPICAL SEAT TYPICAL ,ork, CIORIAL fps* Transitional Care Unit Remodel 10800 GRAB BAR TYPICAL PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRIPTION ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING: A -5.1 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 ASK. 103 TOILET 15A I 09255 GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT WITH I 09900 PAINT I TYPICAL PATENT ROOM 15 M A H L U M N O R D F O R S M c K I N L E Y GORDON 7 -6" PATENT cy ROOM 16 0 15' 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 Seattle WA 9 121 206 441 4151 206 441 47o F 8 -0' c 12' TYPICAL of WL lios4 Transitional Care Unit Remodel PATIENT 1s PARTIAL ENLARGED REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1/4" 1 -0" PATIENT ROOM 16 SHOWN, PATIENT ROOM12 SIMILAR, PATIENT ROOM 27 SIMILAR OPPOSITE PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRPTION: ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING: A -6.1 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 ASK. 104 M A H L U M N O R D F O R S M c K I N L E Y GORDON 06400 HEADWALL ALTERNATE NO. 1 TYPICAL 10265 WALL PANEL TYPICAL El EAST OBI r 2565 Third Avenue Suite 219 JPattIP WA 96111 20t 441 4151 20b 441 047c F 06400 ADJUSTABLE SHELF WITH PULL OUT CLOTHES ROD PERPENDICULAR TO DOOR TYPICAL AT ALL 18' DEEP WARDROBES 06400 WARDROBE TYPICAL. PL -4 I I I 1 I __J II 1 11 10265 CORNER GUARD TYPICAL 16000 NIGHT UGHT Transitional Care Unit Rernodd I c u n II l 1 okt ui+o14L �s PATIENT ROOM 16 SHOWN 1/4" 1 -0' PATIENT ROOM 12 SIMILAR PATIENT ROOM 27 SIMILAR OPPOSITE 4" 2' -6" L 21" DEEP L 2'-0" L 18" DEEP 1/ l PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESORPTION: ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING. A -5.2 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 ASK. 105 M &N M G A H L U M O R D F O R S c K I N L E Y O R D O N 11 6 D 1 l 1 11 11 11 1 1 11 1 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 SeauIP WA 9-121 20b 441 4151 2 h 441 L.47c F 1 N 1 PARTIAL SOUTH ELEVATION 1 /8 =i 11 1 1 uoi RI L llosp Transitional Care Unit Remodel 1 1l 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRIPTION ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWNG: A -3.1 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 ASK. 106 3' =1 —0' 9 1 /2' DIAMETER M A H L U M 2505 Third Avenue Suite Ll9 N O R D F O R S $rattle WA 9121 McK1NLEY 206 441 4151 GORDON 206 441 047b F TYPICAL FLOOR DRAIN 15000 FLOOR DRAIN 07901 SEALANT 09666 SHEET VINYL SLOPE 03300 UNDERLAYMENT TO 09666 THRESHOLD TYPICAL 03300 SETTING BED CORE DRILL OPENING FOR DRAIN NOTE FLOOR DRAIN TYPICAL AT TOILET ROOM 13 17 26 AND 33 Transitional Care Unit EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR 7 Oq1, 4WATERPR00F MEMBRANE O H PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRIPTION: ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWING: A-9.2 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 Remodel ASK 107 MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL Date. Tuesday November 12, 1996 VOLUME 1 PROJECT MANUAL Section Description 15010 GENERAL PROVISIONS From the Office of FSi consulting engineers 605 First Ave, Suite 400 Seattle, Washington 98104 Add to paragraph 1 05 F submittal data to be submitted on Rooftop Air Handler color options Condenser color options Revise paragraph 1 13 A.1 to read as follows. 1 Patching The mechanical subcontractor shall do all patching required for installation of new mechanical work. Patching of structure or walls required due to demolition of existing mechanical shall be done by General Contractor Dunng the bidding period, notify the General Contractor the extent of patching required. 15400 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM Add paragraph 1.05 N as follows. N Water Use Standards for Fixtures and fittings: 1 Waterclosets, flush valve 2. Faucets 3 Shower Heads 1.6 gpf 2.5 gpm 2.5 gpm Revise paragraph `P1 -1 and "Pl 2' insulation description as follows: Insulation: McQuire Products Model ProWrap, seamless insulation and cover PAGE 1 ADDENDUM 1 DIVISION 15 Add paragraph "P5 -2" and "P5 -3' accessory description as follows: Accessories. See Architectural drawings and Section 10800 for grab bars, seats and other accessories to be ordered by the General with the enclosure. Add paragraph "P5 -3' enclosure descnption as follows: Enclosure: Kohler Model Sonata with non -slip walking surface Revise paragraph `Existing Shower Stalls' shower head description as follows. Shower Head. Powers #M 2. Revise paragraph "D -1 Floor Dram description as follows: D -1 Floor Drain J.R. Smith #2005 -A, chrome plated Include trap primer option for Handicap Toilet Room Floor Drains. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL Add paragraph 2.01 as follows. Trap primers Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. Pnme -Rite model Revise paragraph 3.05 description as follows: A. Completely insulate handicap lavatory traps and water supplies. Add paragraph 3.07 as follows. 3.07 AUTOMATIC TRAP PRIMERS A. Provide trap primer for all floor drains, and where required by the Plumbing Code. Piping shall be as specified for water piping, 1/2 inch minimum size; chrome plated brass pipe where exposed. Connect primer line at the top of a horizontal cold water line and install the trap primer valve and distribution umt in an accessible location. 15410 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS Add paragraph 2.04 as follows: 2.04 Mechanical Systems Insulation (See Section 15070) 15490 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS Add to paragraph 2.05 D as follows. Alarm panel shall indicate high and pressure alarms for oxygen supply Add paragraph 2.05 E as follows: E. Gauges: Provide in zone valve box, downstream side of each zone valve, as required by NFPA 99 Gauges shall be 1 -1/2' with plastic protective dial faces, built into the valve box. Add paragraph 2.05 E as follows: E. Switches. Provide a pressure switch for "High Pressure' and `Low Pressure signals to the alarm panels. Switches shall be installed in respective medical gas mains downstream from the main shutoff valves and in lines, located as required in NFPA 99 for the area alarms. For line vacuum below normal, provide vacuum switch. 15500 FIRE PROTECTION Revise paragraph 1.02 to read as follows: A. Ordinary hazard sizing and spacing. 15640 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT Revise paragraph 2.01 H to read as follows. H. Condensing units shall be provided by the manufacturer of the Rooftop Air Handling Unit, see Section 15700. 15650 LIQUID HEAT TRANSFER PIPING SYSTEMS Add to paragraph 2.02 B Temtrol as an accepted coil manufacturer PAGE 2 ADDENDUM 1 DIVISION 15 15700 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT Revise paragraph 2.01 D 3 to read as follows: 3 Dampers shall be constructed of extruded aluminum blades. Provide blades with extruded vinyl or rubber edge seals. Seal blade ends with aluminum arc seals. Damper leak rate not to exceed 11 -CFM per square foot of damper at 2- 1 /2- inches W G. pressure. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PAGE 3 ADDENDUM 1 DIVISION 15 Add to paragraph 2.01 D as follows. 4 Outside air dampers shall be integral air monitor /damper sized for the full economizer load and factory adjusted to meet the mimmum outside air requirements as scheduled. Frame shall be extruded aluminum hat channel with mounting flanges on both sides of frame. Blades shall be airfoil shaped heavy gauge extruded aluminum, anodized monitoring blades fixed with damper frame and includes air pressure sensing ports. Dampers shall be Ruskin Model IAQ or approved equal. 15800 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Revise paragraph 2.03 C 4 to read as follows. UL classified as leakage Class I per UL555S with 4.0 cfm per cubic foot maximum leakage at 1 -inch w g. differential pressure across closed damper Revise paragraph 2.03 C 6, to read as follows. 6. Damper Actuators. Electric two position damper motor spnng close and hold open. Actuator shall tie -in to the smoke detection system. Smoke detection system and wiring from the fire alarm relay panel will be provided under the electrical work. 15825 AIR TERMINAL EQUIPMENT Revise paragraph 2.01 A 6, to read as follows: 6. Unit manufacturer shall install at the factory electric damper actuator and controller furnished by the temperature control manufacturer 15900 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Renlace entire Section with attached Section 15900. VOLUME 2 MECHANICAL DRAWINGS Drawing Description M 2 Second Floor Plan Mechanical Add waste and vent piping for Third Floor Toilet Room Floor Drains. Refer to sketches MSK 102 and MSK -103 for work included. M -4 Third Floor Plan Piping and Plumbing Add wall mounted lays, P1 2, floor drains, D 1 and associated piping in the new handicap toilet rooms. Refer to sketches MSK -100 and MSK -101 for work included. M -8 Third Floor Plan Fire Protection Diagrams Add wall mounted lays, P1 -2, floor drains, D -1 and associated piping in the new handicap toilet rooms to the diagrams. Refer to sketches MSK 104 MSK -105 and MSK -106 for work included. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL PART I GENERAL 1 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The "General Conditions" of the specification apply to work specified m this section, consult them in detail for applicable instructions B All components of the Direct Digital Control (DDC) system must meet applicable local code requirements. 1 02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install a networked Direct Digital Control (DDC) system for control and monitonng of the building heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems as described in this specification. B System shall consist of stand -alone DDC panels, sensors, automatic valves, actuators, dampers, operating software, operator training, installation labor, warranty and all other necessary material and labor to provide a complete and workable system. 1 03 INSTALLATION QUALITY A. The entire buildmg control system shall be installed by skilled electncians and control mechanics, all of whom are properly trained and qualified for this work. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with Division 16 of these specifications and applicable national, state and local codes. B Supervision and checkout of the system shall be by local branch engineers and technicians directly employed by the Contractor C. Contractor shall be a manufacturer -owned service organization which stocks and has direct factory access to the manufacturer's standard parts, manuals and traimng options. Contractor shall be fully capable of system inspection, trouble shooting, maintenance, and service to the system. D Contractor shall maintain a field service office within 150 miles of project site. This field office shall have a minimum of five years experience engineering and installing the control systems proposed for this project. At engineer's request, provide a listing of at least ten projects of similar magnitude, complexity and facility use type completed within the past five years. 104 SUBMITTALS/DRAWINGS SECTION 15900 PAGE 1 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 4DDEiu X M 1 A. Submittals 1 The contractor shall submit, pnor to installation, a set of installation drawings, equipment data sheets and control strategies for review by the consultant and/or Owner's representative. 2. These drawings shall include the physical location of all building control system panels and controllers as well as a diagram indicating complete DDC system architecture. 3 The complete sequence of operation for the control system shall be provided. 4 A complete list of monitored and controlled points shall be provided. B Record Drawings (As- builts) 1 Upon completion of the installation and final system adjustment the contractor shall provide and deliver to the Owner a full set of record drawings of the MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL installation and the control strategies mcludmg printouts of all system programs, system database and system operating parameters. 2. Record drawings shall be submitted m 11" x 17" bound format. At owner's request, provide a copy of as -built drawings on 3 -1/2" floppy disks. C. Standards and Format 1 All submittals shall be generated on reproducible Autocad (Version 10 or later) schematic diagrams. 1 05 SYSTEM TURN -OVER AND SERVICE A. Upon completion of the mstallation, the contractor shall initiate operation of the control system and perform all necessary testing and diagnostics to ensure proper operation. A formal commissioning procedure shall be utilized to insure complete system integrity and conformance to these specifications. This procedure shall be a completely documented procedure. Contractor's recommended commissioning plan shall be submitted with the initial submittal for approval by engineer At a minimum, submittal shall include a step -by -step, written description of the commissioning plan as well as the project specific commissioning forms that will be utilized. Commissiomng forms shall address all field devices, field controllers, software statements and software points. B An acceptance test in the presence of the owners representative, and/or the Project Manager shall be performed. Deficiencies revealed by failed test(s) shall be repaired and corrected and the test(s) repeated until successful. C. The graphical interface software shall be installed pnor to completion and all modifications to reflect as-built conditions and changes shall be completed within fourteen (14) days of the scheduled completion date 1 06 TRAINING /OWNER'S INSTRUCTION A. The contractor shall provide to the Owner two (2) copies of an operator's manual describing all operating and routine maintenance service procedures to be used with the system. B The contractor shall instruct the owner's designated representatives in these procedures during the start -up and test penod. The instruction shall consist of two separate training components on -site, project specific training and off -site factory training. C. On -site training shall consist of a minimum of one (1) full day (8 hours total) of training performed by an engineer familiar with the specific design of the system provided for this project. 107 WARRANTY SECTION 15900 PAGE 2 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 14 OPEN 1:7utit 1 A. The building control system, includmg all hardware and software components shall be warranted for a penod of one year following owner's beneficial use of system. For phased project completion, the warranty shall also commence m phases. Any manufactunng defects arising during this penod shall be corrected without cost to the owner B In addition to the hardware warranty, the Contractor shall correct any software sequences that do not meet the specified sequence of operation. Modification or repairs required due to changes enacted by the owner's system operators dunng the warranty period will not be considered warranty items. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 1 08 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS PART II PRODUCTS 2.01 DDC SYSTEM SECTION 15900 PAGE 3 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Apcski DU IA 1 A. The DDC system shall be provided by Landis Gyr, as an extension of the existing system, NO SUBSTITUTIONS B Pncmg structure has been negotiated pnor to bid with engineer /owner Contact Landis Gyr, Greg Ackerson, (206) 455 -3700 for pncing. A. GENERAL 1 The Direct Digital Control (DDC) system shall possess a fully modular architecture, permitting expansion through the addition of DDC controllers, slave panels, terminal equipment controllers, operator terminals, personal computers and/or a general purpose multi- tasking, multi operator minicomputer B DDC CONTROLLER 1 DDC controllers shall be stand alone, microprocessor- based, with a minimum word size of 16 bits. They shall be multi tasking, multi -user, real -time digital control processors consisting of modular hardware with plug -in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies and input/output point modules. Controller size shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list and with spare capacity and expandability features as described below 2. Each DDC controller shall have sufficient memory (minimum 1 MB) to support its operating system and databases including trending, dial -up communications, alarm management and manual override monitoring. 3 Each DDC controller shall support momtormg and control of the following types of points, without the addition of equipment outside the DDC controller cabinet: a. Analog Inputs (AI)• 4 -20 mA 0 -10 Vdc Thermistors 1000 ohm RTDs b Digital Inputs (DI) Dry Contact Closure Pulse Accumulator Voltage Sensing c Digital Outputs (DO)•Contact Closure (motor starters, sizes as required) d. Analog Outputs (AO)•0 -20 psi 4 -20 mA 0 -10 Vdc 4 Each DDC controller shall have a minimum of one spare of each point type (analog inputs, digital mputs, analog outputs, digital outputs) and no less than 10% expandability within the controller enclosure Provide all processors, power supplies and communication controllers complete so that the implementation of a new point only requires the addition of the appropnate point input/output termination module and wiring. Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and have at least 25% of the memory available for future use. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 4 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A CPEi ipUM I 5 The operator shall have the ability to manually ovemde automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC controller via local, point discrete, on -board hand/off /auto operator ovemde switches for digital control type points and gradual switches for analog control type points. These override switches shall be operable whether the panel processor is operational or not. Switches shall be mounted either within the DDC controller key- accessed enclosure, or externally mounted with each switch keyed to prevent unauthonzed overrides. DDC controllers shall monitor the status of all overrides and inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. DDC controllers shall also collect override activity information for reports. At a minimum, all digital outputs (except terminal controllers) shall have supervised manual override switches. 6 DDC controllers shall provide local LED status mdication for each digital mput and output for constant, up -to -date venfication of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device. Graduated intensity LEDs or analog indication of value shall also be provided for each analog output. 7 DDC controllers shall provide at least two RS -232C senal data communication ports for operation of operator 1/0 devices such as industry standard printers, operator terminals, modems and portable laptop operator's terminals. DDC controllers shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, pnnters or terminals. 8 Each DDC controller shall continuously perform self diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all panel components. The DDC controller shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions or repeated failure to establish communication. 9 DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform any or all the following energy management routmes. a. Time -of -day scheduling b Calendar -based scheduling c. Holiday scheduling d. Temporary schedule overrides e. Start -stop time optimization f. Automatic Daylight Savings Time switchover g. Night setback control h. Enthalpy switchover (economizer) i. Peak demand limiting J Temperature compensated duty cycling The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as an integral part of DDC controllers and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention and shall be flexible enough to allow user custonuzation. Programs shall be applied to building equipment as described in the Sequence of Operations. 11 Alarm management shall be provided to monitor and direct alarm information to operator devices. Each DDC controller shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non- cntical alarms, minimize network traffic and prevent alarms from being lost. Any critical alarms shall have the capability of generating a user defined message and routing MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 5 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS ADOE1.IQU M 1 that message to any operator device or printer At no time shall the DDC controllers ability to report alarms be affected by either operator or activity at a PC workstation, local I/O device or communications with other panels on the network. 12. A vanety of histoncal data collection utilities shall be provided to manually or automatically sample, store and display system data for points Each DDC controller shall have a dedicated RAM -based buffer for trend data storage and shall be capable of storing a minimum of 10,000 data samples. Trend data shall be stored at the DDC controllers and uploaded to the workstation (if provided) when retrieval is desired. For systems with graphical workstation capabilities, uploads shall occur based upon either user defined interval, manual command or when the trend buffers are full. All trend data shall be available for use in Microsoft Word or Excel applications C. APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS 1 GENERAL a. Provide Application Specific Controllers (ASC's) as required for control of unitary mechanical systems or pieces of equipment. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor -based DDC control unit and shall be capable of operating either as a standalone controller or on a multi -drop communications network originating at the DDC controller Provide each ASC with sufficient memory to operate in a truly independent manner; that is, each ASC shall support its own inputs and outputs, operating systems, database and programs necessary to perform control sequences and energy management routmes. b Provide the following types of ASC's as necessary. Unitary Controllers (UC's) Terminal Equipment Controllers (TEC's) 2. UNITARY CONTROLLERS (UC's) a. UC's shall include all point mputs and outputs necessary to perform the specified control sequences. Provide a hand- off automatic switch for each binary output for manual override capability Switches shall be mounted either within the controller's key- accessed enclosure, or externally mounted with each switch keyed to prevent unauthonzed overrides. In addition, each switch position shall be supervised m order to inform the system that automatic control has been ovemdden. As a minimum, 50% of the pomt inputs and outputs shall be of the universal type, allowing for additional system flexibility In heu of universal inputs and outputs, provide a minimum of 50% spare points of each type b Each UC shall support its own real -time operating system. Provide a time clock with 72 hour battery backup to allow for stand alone operation and to insure protection during power outages. Should the controller reside on a DDC controller network, the clock operation shall be overridden by the DDC controller clock to msure network continuity c. All databases and programs shall be stored in non volatile EEPROM or a minimum of 100 -hour battery back -up shall be provided. All programs shall be field customized to meet the user's exact control strategy requirements Controllers utilizing pre packaged or canned programs shall not be acceptable. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 6 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS AP1 EW oU M d. Local alarming and trending capabilities shall be provided for convenient troubleshooting and system diagnostics. Alarm limits and trend data information shall be user definable for any point. e. Each UC shall have connection provisions for a portable laptop or similar programming tool. This tool shall allow the user to display, generate or modify all point databases and operating programs. All new values and problems shall then be restored to EEPROM. 3 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS (TEC's) a. Control of terminal units such as VAV boxes, heat pumps and reheat boxes shall be accomplished by a microprocessor based stand -alone controller utilizing direct digital control. The Terminal Equipment Controller (TEC) shall interface to the building control system m a multi -drop communications network originating at the DDC field panel. An individual controller shall be provided for each terminal unit. The terminal controller must be fisted by Underwriters Laboratory under UL 916 PAZX and UL 864 UDTZ. b For VAV boxes, the controls contractor shall furnish the terminal controller (controller, damper motor, flow transducer) to the terminal unit manufacturer for factory mounting. Costs associated with factory mounting of terminal controller shall be covered by terminal unit manufacturer The terminal box manufacturer shall provide an averagmg air velocity sensor suitable for interfacing with the TEC's differential pressure transducer c Each TEC shall be accessible for purposes of control and monitoring from a central or remote operator's terminals as specified herein. d. TEC damper actuator shall be of the 24 Vac floating point type. Upon power loss, the actuator maintains its current damper position. Position status is shown in percentage open notation. e. TEC room temperature sensor shall come complete with a terminal jack and programmable override switch integral to the sensor assembly The terminal jack shall be used to connect the portable operators terminal to control and monitor all hardware and software points associated with the terminal unit. A terminal jack may be alternatively located on a stainless steel wall plate mounted adjacent to the sensor An override switch shall initiate override of the night setback or unoccupied mode to normal operation when activated. A thumbwheel -type temperature setpoint dial shall also be provided with 1 Deg F temperature increments. Override switch and temperature setpoint functions may be locked out, canceled or limited as to time or temperature via software. f TEC's for VAV or CV applications shall be provided with integral differential pressure transducer capable of accepting an average air flow measurement signal from the terminal box averaging air velocity sensor The value is converted through a square root function to average airflow by the TEC. g. TEC control valve electronic actuators shall mount on the valve body and provide complete modulating control of the valve Valve body shall separate from actuator for servicing without requiring any special tools or electncal connections. The actuator shall be of the floating control point type. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL D AUTO ANSWER/AUTO -DIAL MODEM 1 A telecommunications interface shall be furnished and installed to allow direct connection of DDC controllers and networks to owner provided public or private phone lines. This device shall be microprocessor -based and will be capable of both automatic answer and automatic dial methods of call handling. Additionally, manual call initiation shall be done via a man- machine interface command. Phone modem shall be US Robotics Sportster 9600 baud or equal. 2. The telecommunications interface, when operating in an automatic dialing mode, shall be able to perform any of the following functions. a. Retry a single pnmary number at a fixed interval a finite number of times and quit if unsuccessful. (If the number is busy, retry it until successful) In addition, call a minimum of three additional secondary numbers one time b Retry successive numbers arranged in a priority scheme at fixed intervals a fimte number of times and quit if unsuccessful. c. Inform the requesting device that a successful connection has been made. (If the numbers are busy retry until successful). d. Inform the requesting device that a connection cannot be made. e. Detect loss of communication on its network and dial an appropnate device (CPU, Terminal, etc and upon successful connection transmit a message identifying a network failure. 3 The telecommunications mterface shall also have automatic answer capabilities to allow it to be accessed from a remote central computer or terminal with modem. The interface unit shall allow the person calling to access any information on the network, provided that the standard log -on secunty screening is met. 2 02 FIELD DEVICES SECTION 15900 PAGE 7 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS AvnE1 bu tit 1 h. TEC wiring terminal bars are to be detachable type allowing quick serviceability of the electronic controller hardware without removal of the existing wiring. A. TEMPERATURE SENSORS 1 All temperature sensors shall be solid state electromc, employing a resistance type output. Room and zone temperature sensors may be thermistor type. All duct sensors shall be ngid or flexible probe, averaging RTD -type sensors. All duct mixed air sensors shall be flexible averaging RTD -type sensors with sensor element length suitable for complete duct coverage. Pipe sensors shall be RTD- type. Provide outside air temperature sensors with watertight inlet fitting and sunlight shield. All smgle point sensors shall be accurate to a minimum of 0.5 degrees F at 77 degrees F calibration point. Duct averaging sensors shall be accurate to a minimum of 1 0 degrees F B CONTROL DAMPERS 1 Provide low leakage, galvanized steel control dampers with roll formed steel frames and blades and oil- impregnated bronze beanngs. Dampers shall have blade seals and stops, equal to Ruskin CD36 2 Leakage shall be no greater than 10 CFM per square foot at 4 in. W C. with 20 in.- lbs torque applied regardless of size. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 8 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS ACveJDuM 1 3 Provide opposed blade type dampers unless indicated otherwise. All multi- section dampers shall be provided with factory linkage to allow for connection of actuator at one common point. C. DAMPER AND VALVE ACTUATORS 1 All modulating damper and valve actuators shall be 24vac electric motor type, floating point, 0- 10Vdc, 0 -16Vdc or other industry standard input signal type. Actuators shall function properly within the range of 85 to 110 percent of line voltage. 2. Provide actuators in sufficient size, quantity and type to match application. Provide a minimum of one damper actuator for each 30 square feet of damper area. 3 Damper actuators shall be rotary action -type (90 degree) designed for direct connection to damper shaft wherever possible. Provide position indication on exterior of actuator body 4 All valve actuators for steam applications shall be mounted at a 45 degree offset from vertical to avoid heat damage to actuator 5 Actuators shall be spring return as indicated by Normally Closed or Normally Open designation on drawings or in sequence of operation. D CONTROL VALVES 1 Modulating Valves 2" and Smaller Bronze body and seat with stainless steel stem and screwed ends. ANSI Class 250 body rating. Suitable for fluid temperatures of up to 300 degrees F Equal percentage flow characteristics capable of smooth operation at differential pressures present in system. Landis Gyr Powers VE VVG/VXG 44, VE698, Flownte VE598 or approved equal. 2 Sizing Modulating control valves shall be correctly selected for service and flow of system served. A pressure drop of 5 psi shall be used as a sizing guideline unless specifically noted otherwise in project documents. Two position shutoff valves shall be line size. E. LOW TEMPERATURE DETECTION THERMOSTATS 1 Provide low temperature control thermostat, electric type manual reset, non- averaging 20 feet long sensing elements that switch whenever any 6 inch section or more of any portion senses a temperature as low as the thermostat setpoint as specified in sequences. 2. Provide with two sets of contacts, one for hardwired fan shutdown and one for remote momtonng. 3 Powers ET141 or approved equal. F DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES 1 Provide air and liquid differential pressure switches for status of pumps and fans as called out in sequences and input/output summary 2. Diaphragm- operated SPDT snap switch with ranges from 05" W G to 12.0" W G for air Airflow switch shall be Powers SW141 or approved equal. 3 Liquid switch shall be PENN P74 or equal. G CURRENT SENSING RELAYS 1 Provide current sensing relays for status of fans or pumps as called out in sequences or input/output summary Provide with field adjustable current setpoint range. 2. Nielsen Kuljian or approved equal. H. INTERPOSING RELAYS 1 Track mounted SPDT relays (or as required) for all interposing applications. 2. IDEC or approved equal. I. PRESSURE SAFETY SWITCHES MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 9 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS ADAENDlI 1 Provide static pressure high limit switches as required by sequence of operation to sensing duct over pressure condition. Provide with adjustable setpoint. Provide with spare contacts for monitoring by DDC system. 2 Switch shall be suitable for duct mounting Dwyer Series 3000, Ashcroft or approved equal. PART III EXECUTION 3 01 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. All setpoints, limits, etc. shall be adjustable through the central CPU or the laptop computer connected to the system. B Sequence of operations are designed to illustrate basic control functions only Temperature Controls Contractor shall review drawings and submit complete installation data, includmg minor details, to provide proper operation in his submittal. Where an item differs from specifications, Controls Contractor shall submit manufacturer's recommendations subject to Architect's approval. C. HOA OVERRIDE /STATUS PANEL Provide HOA /status override panel including the following for all mechanical equipment control excluding terminal controllers. 1 Hand /Off /Auto selector switch for each binary output. 2 Hand /Auto variable positioner for each analog output. 3 Feedback to central panel for annunciation of hand position. 4 LED status for each binary output and input. 5 Variable intensity LED status for each analog output. 6 Lock cover to prevent unauthorized access to switches. 7 Cover to include clear tamperproof front for viewing switch position and LED indication 3 02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION SYSTEMS AC-3E-1) A. Scope The supply air systems serve single -duct system with hot water reheat coils and one variable volume unit. Supply air system consists of supply fan, return fan, prefilters, final filters, outside dampers with flow measuring capabilities, return and relief air dampers, dx cooling coil and condenser System shall operate 24 -hours but shall be capable of a mght set back operation. B Start -Up The supply fan shall be directly controlled by the controller according to the program established by the Owner The return fan shall be electrically interlocked to operate with the supply fan. Supply and return fans shall be controlled to start "unloaded." C. Basic Temperature Control. A temperature controller sensing fan discharge temperature shall maintain the supply air temperature setpoint by modulating the outside air return air rehef air dampers and dx coil m sequence. Provide discharge temperature reset based on hi -low zone conditions. D On sensing a nse in temperature, controller shall first modulate the outside /relief air dampers open and the return air damper closed. A continued rise shall cause the direct expansion valve to modulate open. E. If the fans are running dunng unoccupied hours, a signal shall ovemde damper modulation and close the outside /rehef air dampers. Dunng occupied hours, an outside air temperature switch shall ovemde the damper modulation signal and position the dampers to provide minimum ventilation only MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL SECTION 15900 PAGE 10 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Abt7E1.iOU M 1 F When outside air temperature is low enough to provide economizer cooling, a temperature reset program shall lower supply air temperature setpoint as low as possible to maintain a 76 °F (adjustable) return air temperature without offset. G Freeze Protection. A low temperature detector, manual reset type, with range adjustable between 10 °F and 50 °F shall be provided at the downstream side of the dx coil, set at 36 °F If temperature drops below 36 °F, low temperature detector shall stop the fan and outside air dampers shall close. H. Upon signal from duct smoke detector, fans shall shut down. Coordinate location of duct smoke detector with fire alarm and electrical contractors 3 03 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) TERMINAL UNIT CONTROL {TU -1 A. A room temperature sensor shall maintain setpomt by modulating the normally closed damper between minimum and maximum volume positions through a terminal control unit (TCU) mounted on the VAV terminal. Each room sensor shall include a switch to initiate override of unoccupied mode of operation. B Upon call for room heating, the damper will modulate to the minimum volume position and the zone heating coil shall be modeluted as stated below 3 04 ZONE RE -HEAT COIL CONTROL {R}{} A. Provide two -way control valve, unless otherwise noted on the drawings, in the hot water supply line to each zone heating coil which shall be modulated by its room thermostat to maintain setpoint temperature B Provide three -way control valve in the hot water supply line to each zone heating coil located at end of supply air duct which shall be modulated by its room thermostat to maintain setpoint temperature and also maintain hot water system flow 3 05 COMBINATION SMOKE/FIRE DAMPERS A. Smoke Damper Control. Actuators shall be controlled by fire alarm system specified in Division 16 3.06 ELEVATOR PRESSURIZATION FANS {PF -1 AND PF -2} A. Elevator Pressurization Fan Control. Fan shall be controlled by the fire alarm system specified in Divisionl6. 3 07 ROOFTOP EXHAUST FANS (EF- 3E -1A, 1B, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10) A. Toilet Exhaust Fan. Toilet exhaust fan shall be started through the time switch specified for the supply and return fans. 3 08 ROOFTOP EXHAUST FANS EF -3E -1, 5) A. Toilet Exhaust Fan. Toilet exhaust fan are existing to remain or relocated as indicated. Existing control sequence shall remain for these fans. Extend existing controls as required to relocated fan relay location. MAHLUM NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E TRANSITIONAL CARE UNIT REMODEL 3 09 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS END OF SECTION 15900 SECTION 15900 PAGE 11 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS ADDEi J to UM 1 A. CONTROL WIRING 1 All line voltage winng and low voltage wiring in exposed areas shall be run in EMT, conduit or wiremold. Wiring run exposed in finished areas shall be in wiremold. 2. Wiring shall be m accordance with the "Electncal' section of these specifications, Section 16000, and all applicable codes. Winng within concealed, accessible spaces may be run with plenum -rated cable as allowed by local codes. 3 If utilized in lieu of conduit plenum -rated cables shall be run in an orderly manner, tied and bundled every 3 feet on average. B LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION 1 Identify all equipment and panels. Identification shall be with labels describing equipment and panel use and function. 2. Labels shall be engraved with contrasting text using bakelite, plastic or metal material. Labels shall be permanently glued or mechanically fastened. 3 All wires and cables shall be identified with permanent markers at each end. The wire designator shall match those on the shop and installation drawings. C. GENERAL 1 Provide and install devices, relays, switches, thermostats, sensors, dampers, conduit, winng, and tubing to provide a complete temperature regulation and control operation system. All winng shall be run in concealed areas where possible Where necessary to be exposed it shall be installed in a workmanlike manner 2. Contractor is responsible for providing a complete and operational system as called out in the sequence of operation and/or in the input/output summary and/or the mechanical/electrical drawings for this project. Any item referenced in one part of the system documentation but not listed elsewhere shall be covered under contractors pricing (i.e. damper called out in sequence but not indicated on drawings) D OUTSIDE COMMISSIONING AGENT 1 Contractor is required to provide a completely installed and commissioned DDC control system as outlined in previous portions of this specification. 2. At the Owner's option an outside commissioning agent may be retained to insure mechanical system compliance with specifications. The control system contractor shall have the following responsibilities under the scope of this contract: a. Provide submittal and/or as-built documentation. b Participate m specified job acceptance test with owner's representative. c Provide specified owner training. d. Perform all system startup and commissioning procedures as required and described previously by the specification. e. Respond to project punch list and correct any system deficiencies. 3 Any additional training, documentation, software, on -site or modem assistance, system functionality or general project management required in support of a commissioning process not specified as part of the Contract Documents shall be considered work outside of this contract. B A x: 14. P2- 1 1 1 PATIENT I 16 1. TOILET l 15A I 5 MAHLUM 2505 Third Avenue Suite 88NORDFORS Seattle WA 98121 McKINLEY 206 441 4151 GORDON 206 441 0478 F 12 2" 1 :um tt! etoviti t: ARO P5-2 W/ D-1 3/4" ACTIVITY/ DINING ROOM r" HCTOIL 32 6 33 HC TOIL. 1 3 I 17 PATIENT ROOM 18 -P2-1 PAr.A. :HU EDOR PANS P2 NG/F.:NB \G SCALE: 1/8" MEMRIL HOS/4 PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 219 DESCRPT1Ott ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWNG M-4 Transitional Care Unit DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 Remodel MSC 100 1 P1-1 4"V RI 1 I PATIENT ROOM 34 7 IQ PATIENT u ROOM 12 0 1 1/4" VTR ON= rp 1 ADWALL W V 9 HC TOIL. 13. :3/4" P5- 5— rasm W/ D 1 3/4" 1 0 P2-1 1" HW DN 1 1 /2" DN \P2— 1 I P1 i CORRIDOR/ I) 1/4"J 4 36 1 PATIENT PATIEN1 HC ROOM 7 r HC TOIL. ROOM 7 ROC 8 27 1 26 25 R 1 0 PARTAI. 'RD F.00R PANS P:RNG/P.,MB\G SCALE: 1/8"=1LO" rpv 04 ‘)t WEMORIAL HOS/0/ pRojECT NUMBER: 9511040 P1AHLUP1 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 411111/4 1111111111•1111111M11, DESCRPTIOR ADDENDUM 1 tNORDFORS Seattle WA 98121 A...h. REHRENa DRAWNG: M-4 McKINLEY 206 441 4151 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 Transitional Care Unit GORDON 206 441 0478F Remodel MSK: 101 2"W UP 1 1/2'V UP 1\1/2 W UP 2"W UP 1 1 2'V UP 2"W UP 1 1/2' VI UP ,ate.w.e.4 eAseen dig MAHLUM &NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON (TYP) 4x8 UP TO 3RD FLOOR PROVIDE FIRE DA PER AT FLOOR PENETRATION 2505 Third Avenue Suite Seattle WA 98121 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 F 0 4"W UP 1 1/2"W UP 1 1/2"CW 3/4'HW UP 1 1 4"W JP I 1" FM/ UP t k- 1 1/2"W UP 2"W, 3/4"HW 3/4"CW UP 1"HW L z PAR k SECOND E.00R P.A\ MECH. SCALE: 1/8"=14" "ORAL HOS/97,4/ pRojEcr NUMBER: 95110.00 219 DEsaurnott ADDENDUM 1 REFERENa DRAWNG M-2 Transitional Care Unit DAM II NOVEMBER 1996 Remodel MSK: 102 W HW U 2"W UF 1 1/2"Cw 8x6 U PROVI[ AT FL( Orre• MAHLUM &NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON •il HW 1" HW Ylr -10x14 UP JO 3RD FLOOR PROVIDE F RE DAMPER AT FLOOR PENETRATION r ,P7 14x10 D WN TO 1ST LOOR 1/2 16'UP CA) "8x 1 2 UP TO 3RD FLOOR 11 PROVIDE FIRE DAMPER AT FLOOR PENETRATION 1 AR7A1 SECOND E.00R EA\ MECH. ALE: 1/8"=1-0" MEMORIAL HOSpoi pRofcr NumBER: 95110.00 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 DESCRPTIOR ADDENDUM 1 Seattle WA 98121 REFERENCE DRAWNG: M-2 206 441 4151 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 Transitional Care Unit 206 441 0478 F Remodel MSK: 103 M A H L U M or N O R D F O R S M c K 1 N L E Y GORDON 4 VTR (GRID 11) 2 "V 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 Seattle WA 98121 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 F Q1C MEMORIAL HO$ a �.w. w. r—rr rr s. Transitional Care Unit Remodel IC '0_E ROOM #7 R SER J:AGRAM CALE: NONE (HC TO LET #13 S M.) PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRIPTION ADDE+DUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWNQ M-8 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 MSK: 104 MAHLUM 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 N O R D F O R S Seattle WA 98121 McKINLEY 206 441 4151 GORDON 206 441 0478 F C 0:_E ROOM #26 R.SER AGRAM :ALE: NONE 0, CORAL HOS/7/ PROLCT NUMBER: 95110.00 Transitional Care Ur* Remodel DESCRPTKNE ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWNG: M-8 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 MSC: 105 M A H L U M &NORDFORS M c K I N L E Y GORDON IC O:F ROOM #33 R:SER D.AGRAM SCALE: NONE 2505 Third Avenue Suite 219 Seattle WA 98121 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 F oc MEAORAL HQsN A. Aar& 4•0 oft lam to au Transitional Care Unit Remodel PROJECT NUMBER: 95110.00 DESCRP110Pk ADDENDUM 1 REFERENCE DRAWNG: M-8 DATE 11 NOVEMBER 1996 MSK: 106 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL PART 1 GENERAL SECTION 16781 PAGE 1 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 1 1 DESCRIPTION A The work includes furnishing and installing all cable devices and connectors necessary to extend the the existing television distribution system The expanded system shall be complete and ready to use The system shall include all amplifiers power supplies cable outlets attenuators and all other parts necessary for the distribution of the TV and FM signals B The Contractor shall show satisfactory evidence upon request, that he maintains a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service to the system including standard replacement parts Contractor shall be prepared to offer a service contract for the maintenance of this system after the guarantee period C The Contractor shall construct the system following best engineering techniques for continuous operation in accordance with applicable codes and safety precautions D All television system equipment shall be supplied and installed by an authorized factory distributor who shall be a licensed and bonded television contractor holding a valid Washington State Electrical Contractor's license E Coordinate with the television set supplier for proper remote control wiring connections 1 2 SYSTEM FUNCTIONS A The system shall distribute television FM and in -house originated signals to all TV outlets to permit simple connection of EIA standard television receivers The system shall provide distribution of all the existing off the -air TV channels from the existing head end equipment B The system shall deliver at all outlets all monochrome and NTSC color television signals without introducing noticeable affect on intelligence and color fidelity 1 The distribution system shall provide for ready attachment of RF monitor /TV receivers at any outlet and at any time without additional auxiliary equipment 2 The distribution system shall be operative at all times in such a manner that it is not subject to possible human error during the course of attachment or detachment of equipment at any outlet C The system shall deliver at all television outlets a minimum signal level of 10 db above 1 000 microvolts across 75 OHM impedance on each channel at each television outlet The system VSWR shall not exceed 1 4 1 D Origination of CCTV programming shall be accomplished by connecting a suitable CCTV camera chain to any TV outlet in the system and shall not require switching of any type in the 16781 1 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL F G PART 2 1 2 2 2 3 A B C D distribution system It shall be possible to simultaneously originate CCTV signals from rooms connected to the same distribution leg The system and all equipment shall be designed and rated for 24 hours a day continuous operation All active components shall be of solid state design The system shall be designed to prevent direct pickup of signals from the building structure 2 PRODUCTS SECTION 16781 PAGE 2 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM MANUFACTURER All components shall be manufactured by RCA Blonder- Tongue Electronics Company or approved equal Blonder Tongue catalogue numbers are used for reference unless manufacturer is identified GENERAL Conform with the requirements of Section 16700 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM System coaxial cable shall be 82 channel 75 ohm 18 gauge solid conductor duofoil and brand shield RG 6/U type cable Standard cable 507 -6FA All cable routed in cable tray or routed above the accessible ceiling shall be extinguishing as defined by NFPA 701 Section 6 -1 by the match flame test Belden 9248 Coaxial cables shall be run in continuous lengths terminations and no splices shall be permitted in All cables terminating at amplifiers or splitters as to function and destination 16781 2 except for any run shall be tagged All coaxial cable used in the system shall be sweep tested for transmission and structural return loss and be so certified in writing by the cable manufacturer Transmission sweep tests shall establish conformance to guaranteed loss values from 20 -108 MHz 174 -216 MHz and 470 -890 MHz Structural return loss tests by sweep method shall show a minimum return loss of 26 dB RL VHF 16 dB RL UHF as compared to a fixed 75 -ohm reference from 20 -108 MHz 174- 216 HMz and from 470 -890 MHz 2 4 DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER A Broad band amplifiers shall be provided for VHF /FM band Unit shall be of solid state design and contain its own power supply Model MVB -45 B Amplifier shall consist of independent high and low band input amplifiers independent high and low band gain controls The main amplifier shall have three stages of RF amplification C Amplifier shall have switchable, combined or split inputs for use with single (low band FM high band) antenna or for individual low band and high band antennas Amplifier shall contain a switchable FM bandstop filter in the input circuit to prevent FM signal overload MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SECTION 16781 PAGE 3 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM D Amplifier shall meet gain of 45 dB in all bands noise figure at full gain of 6 1 dB (LB) 6 7 dB (HB) a gain control range of 18 dB; output capability (7ch -46 dB crossmode) Flat 54 dBmV, 6 db block tilt 56 dBmV Operating temperature range shall be -20 degrees C to +65 degrees C E Amplifier dimensions shall be 19" in length 3- 15/32" in width and 2 -5/8" in height with mounting brackets to fit standard E1A rack 2 5 LINE SPLITTERS A Two -way line splitters shall have a flat frequency response over the entire operating band from 12 MHz to 300 MHz and from 470 to 890 MHz The unit shall be of the hybrid design with a 75 ohm match of 23 0 dB RL minimum on all inputs and outputs Output isolation shall be not less than 23 0 dB VHF 18 0 dB UHF B Two -way line splitters shall have a signal loss of not more than VHF 3 7 dB UHF 4 0 dB at each output All unused outputs on the splitters shall be terminated with 75 ohm terminations C Four -way line splitters shall have a flat frequency response over the entire operating band from 12 MHz to 216 MHz and from 470 to 890 MHz The unit shall be of the hybrid design with a 75 ohm match of 24 0 dB RL minimum on all input and outputs Output isolation shall be not less than 16 0 dB VHF 11 5 dB UHF D Four -way line splitters shall have a signal loss of not more than VHF 6 2 dB UHF 6 7 dB E Blonder Tongue Model MS -2V /V or MS -4U /V 2 6 ATTENUATORS Attenuators with DC to 890 MHz passband and 75 ohms input- output impedance shall be installed to equalize all signals prior to input to amplifier The amount of attenuation shall be determined at field during system set -up 2 7 TAPOFF INLINE Shall be single tap back matched, directional coupler type with brass 75 ohm type F connections Band width shall be 5 0 -400 MHz Tapoff shall meet or exceed the following specifications Insertion loss 1 2 db maximum Tap isolation 24 0 db minimum Return loss 16 0 db minimum Blonder Tongue Model 4488 or 4888 series 2 8 TV OUTLETS A Television Signal Outlets Shall be mounted in 4" square, 2" deep minimum flush mounted outlet boxes with barrier between the 110 volt receptacle and the TV signal cable Provisions shall be incorporated in the network to prevent 60 Hz AC or DC feedback into the distribution lines 16781 3 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL SECTION 16781 PAGE 4 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM B Outlets shall be designed to cover a frequency range of 10 MHz to 500 MHz Insertion loss shall not exceed 1 0 db at any frequency within the designated frequency range Outlets shall be back matched from 10 to 500 MHz Tap isolation shall be 16 db minimum C Outlets shall have "F" type connector and shall include a 5 PIN DIN receptacle for remote control applications Blonder Tongue V- 5- DC D Coverplates shall match those specified in Section 16140 with standard double duplex configuration 2 9 TV REMOTE CONTROL STATION TV Remote Control Station Provide a two gang outlet box with pushbutton and volume controller to turn set on on -off change channels and adjust the speaker volume GTE Sylvania model HWT 6098BA chassis with a HFT6193BA faceplate 2 10 CONNECTOR A Connectors shall be brass bronze or silver plated B Connector threads shall be cut to assure good contact Cast or pressed threads shall not be permitted 2 11 DROP CABLES A Provide coaxial cable with type F connector at wall outlet and appropriate connector at TV set B Provide control cable with 5 pin DIN connector at wall outlet and appropriate 6 pin connector at TV set for remote on -off station selection and volume control PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL 3 2 Raceways shall be sized as follows unless shown to be larger on the drawings Up to 3 television outlets 1/2" trade size Up to 5 television outlets 3/4" trade size Cables shall be installed to avoid sharp bends or physical distortion Protect cables over sharp edges PART 4 TESTING 4 1 TESTING On completion of the installation of the system the Contractor supplying this equipment shall provide a qualified technician to perform the following tests A The overall system shall be swept tested from the head -end location to the last outlet in each distribution leg of the system 16781 4 MAHLUM AND NORDFORS McKINLEY GORDON OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 3E REMODEL END OF SECTION SECTION 16781 PAGE 5 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM B A certification shall be made to the fact that no frequency dropouts are present in the system which would affect any of the VHF channels C Using a return loss bridge, the Contractor shall certify that the return loss of the system shall be a minimum of 20 db down D The Architect shall be notified forty -eight hours prior to testing so that he may at his discretion furnish representatives to witness the test procedure and results E A report of the testing shall be submitted on all the above required data prior to final acceptance Copies shall be included in the Operation Instructions and Maintenance Manuals The report shall include the names of the individuals performing and witnessing the test and the manufacturer's name and model number of the equipment used in the test A block diagram of the test set -up for each test shall be included rn TYPICAL1 2 '�1P d s ,e i elf r E �J' J M) 15 I 9 a! AZ l'a- 1 d, J r �r F5 O .t- i 9 M1 1 3 CFS Y3 F 3M1' -26 28 30 191 ■9 28 L J PA ROO 2 6 1 30 30_; 28 b Nil c sit TOIL 17 3M1 -19 c 28 30 J O 3 Nci SIP M. 19 0o b 0 TOILET F. UMW ■M WT. V FS 5 -U 2 8 N W 28 D HCTJE b r F3 ROOM 28 240 b Project Job No 6807 TO I Drawing Title PARTIAL LIGHTING PLAN J_ I Id e 3fY 30- 9 PATIENT ROOM 3 -7 18 <v ,-L-28- ,-L-,-L-28- PATIE 7 1ti NT ROOM L J L J 22 L j 21 L Reference Drawing No E -4 S?AR E1,ocnerx L II, a •6gMUMCA1 N CoNsuumers 72000VXWAY BURS 1100 SsA T1.X, WA 981014853 FAX 2004/57.0554 Nos 208.867-0555 O OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL TRANSITIONAL CARE REMODEL Id, e d 30 PATIENT ROOM 19 I 1's a 9 r 1 J PROVIDE PRESCOLITE SERIES 4020 -13 W/ (1) 13W COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMP OR APPROVED EQUAL. MI T HORIZONTALLY. 28 eH 9 PATIENT ROOM 20 2-8 sca e 1/8 1 0 Drown By RPR Checked By JNL Date 11/08/96 Dwg No E -41 Page of bdd aweuJas0 917 ii :60 '96 /BO /ii 3480 173 \00b3\L089 a weu 6utMeJ0 Drawing name J: \6807\CADD\E6, Date 11/08/96, 09:08:52 Username RPR o 96D 9 -3 oN 6Ma 96/80/ l l 1Nf A8 Pa>1 °a43 1d2i X °M°Ja moos 0 1 8/1 Boa 11 sz pi —7 WOOM 1•3I1Vd itC L/ gg610-/.90.0z 101014d MiliCeL99.00Z XV4 FgSI-IOIY VM '711.I. V919 00111 M/M3MIOO L DMI 9 -3 oN 6u Moto aouaJaiaa L089 oN 9of 13001N3d 3dVO 1VN0 I 1 I SNVal 1dl I dSOH W16011301 0 I dIV 10 +,a Ndld SNOIIV3INf1WW03 1VIldVd a 5 M° J (I\ 9Z 1 131101 DH I apt= 39V 1OlS WOO —1 S `r ,:I mrLvo t4 1--r- I 1■311VdI 1 J]M0HS t V Drawing name E6, Date 11/08/96, 09:23:03 Username RPR 10 a60d jl JAC)A5 1 1N311Vd 1 11V i0ld,ll 1 b£ WOOb J.N3E1dd v 9990-L9990Z DCI1a 0990-L9990Z rid fag 1-101911 WA 'FILMS 0011 1/II9 •MWIOOLL ,7 /7 W,. z*9 -3 oN 1 t 6m° 0 TI Vci S 96/80/L1 alp Ag'39100U D 9 3 o 6u imo. aoua,a 1N11' LO99 2ld�i xg umoL° 1300013d 3?JV0 1VN0 I 1 I SNVd1 1VI I dSOH 1V I dOIN3IN O I dINA1O 0 1 2/1 NVld SNOI1V0INf N O3 1VIld`dd a l i 1 0 CD 0 0 i(:611 /AlV1IlOV 1 iii s 1V0013d 38 01 O 1 so 1 011id3131 ONIISIX3 1 1 %WEN 1 -MOH 1 M 09+ 11 1 41 I k. I I i 6 I f>71 i 1 111 oN qor 10a(o)d 6u!mO J° 4 6 r SPARLING Aftimmimm 7I' eanafimt•r/ewLwseoawea Art aend.sanl'•I+Mr1 aen.en►eeee EXtSTNG 1ELEP O 8 TO SE RELOCAT 7 Drawing T i t l e PARTIAL COMIUNICAT1ONS PLAN Scale I/8" 1."-0 Project OLYMPIC IENOR I AL HOSPITAL TRANSITIONAL CARE REMODEL grown By RPR Job No 6807 Reference Drowing No £,6 Checked By JNL Dote M Dwg No E -5.3 Pogo of 9 f I EF -3E -5 2 -22 c6 c8) AC -3E -1 EF -3Ei -2 18 1 1-4-8 I Th J I fl Gfl 3M2-2.1, \I 72000VE WAY 8Ur1Q 1100 SEATTLE, WA 58101 -1867 FAX 206667-0864 PHONE 200667-0668 2 VIA CONTROLS S?AP NG W 0 Cn t-- X W M 1V MI. EF -3E -4 Drawing T i t l e PARTIAL ROOF PLAN Project OLYMPIC MEMORIAL HOSPITAL TRANSITIONAL CARE REMODEL Job No 6807 Reference Drawing No CD LI Scale I 8 I 0 Drawn By RPR Checked By JNL Dote 11/08/96 Dwg No E -71 Page of ddd GweuJasf 55 .01 :60 '96/80/>: i aIe0 L3 \00d9 \L089\ a weu 6UIMPJ0